qcustomplot.cpp

/***************************************************************************
**                                                                        **
**  QCustomPlot, an easy to use, modern plotting widget for Qt            **
**  Copyright (C) 2011-2022 Emanuel Eichhammer                            **
**                                                                        **
**  This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify  **
**  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by  **
**  the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or     **
**  (at your option) any later version.                                   **
**                                                                        **
**  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,       **
**  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of        **
**  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the         **
**  GNU General Public License for more details.                          **
**                                                                        **
**  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License     **
**  along with this program.  If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.   **
**                                                                        **
****************************************************************************
**           Author: Emanuel Eichhammer                                   **
**  Website/Contact: https://www.qcustomplot.com/                         **
**             Date: 06.11.22                                             **
**          Version: 2.1.1                                                **
****************************************************************************/
 
#include "qcustomplot.h"
 
 
/* including file 'src/vector2d.cpp'       */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 7973 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPVector2D
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPVector2D
  \brief Represents two doubles as a mathematical 2D vector
  
  This class acts as a replacement for QVector2D with the advantage of double precision instead of
  single, and some convenience methods tailored for the QCustomPlot library.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn void QCPVector2D::setX(double x)
  
  Sets the x coordinate of this vector to \a x.
  
  \see setY
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPVector2D::setY(double y)
  
  Sets the y coordinate of this vector to \a y.
  
  \see setX
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::length() const
  
  Returns the length of this vector.
  
  \see lengthSquared
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::lengthSquared() const
  
  Returns the squared length of this vector. In some situations, e.g. when just trying to find the
  shortest vector of a group, this is faster than calculating \ref length, because it avoids
  calculation of a square root.
  
  \see length
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::angle() const
  
  Returns the angle of the vector in radians. The angle is measured between the positive x line and
  the vector, counter-clockwise in a mathematical coordinate system (y axis upwards positive). In
  screen/widget coordinates where the y axis is inverted, the angle appears clockwise.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPVector2D::toPoint() const
  
  Returns a QPoint which has the x and y coordinates of this vector, truncating any floating point
  information.
  
  \see toPointF
*/
 
/*! \fn QPointF QCPVector2D::toPointF() const
  
  Returns a QPointF which has the x and y coordinates of this vector.
  
  \see toPoint
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPVector2D::isNull() const
  
  Returns whether this vector is null. A vector is null if \c qIsNull returns true for both x and y
  coordinates, i.e. if both are binary equal to 0.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPVector2D QCPVector2D::perpendicular() const
  
  Returns a vector perpendicular to this vector, with the same length.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::dot() const
  
  Returns the dot/scalar product of this vector with the specified vector \a vec.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates to 0.
*/
QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D() :
  mX(0),
  mY(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the \a x and \a y coordinates with the specified
  values.
*/
QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(double x, double y) :
  mX(x),
  mY(y)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates respective coordinates of
  the specified \a point.
*/
QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(const QPoint &point) :
  mX(point.x()),
  mY(point.y())
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates respective coordinates of
  the specified \a point.
*/
QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(const QPointF &point) :
  mX(point.x()),
  mY(point.y())
{
}
 
/*!
  Normalizes this vector. After this operation, the length of the vector is equal to 1.
  
  If the vector has both entries set to zero, this method does nothing.
  
  \see normalized, length, lengthSquared
*/
void QCPVector2D::normalize()
{
  if (mX == 0.0 && mY == 0.0) return;
  const double lenInv = 1.0/length();
  mX *= lenInv;
  mY *= lenInv;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a normalized version of this vector. The length of the returned vector is equal to 1.
  
  If the vector has both entries set to zero, this method returns the vector unmodified.
  
  \see normalize, length, lengthSquared
*/
QCPVector2D QCPVector2D::normalized() const
{
  if (mX == 0.0 && mY == 0.0) return *this;
  const double lenInv = 1.0/length();
  return QCPVector2D(mX*lenInv, mY*lenInv);
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the squared shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the finite line
  segment given by \a start and \a end.
  
  \see distanceToStraightLine
*/
double QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end) const
{
  const QCPVector2D v(end-start);
  const double vLengthSqr = v.lengthSquared();
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vLengthSqr))
  {
    const double mu = v.dot(*this-start)/vLengthSqr;
    if (mu < 0)
      return (*this-start).lengthSquared();
    else if (mu > 1)
      return (*this-end).lengthSquared();
    else
      return ((start + mu*v)-*this).lengthSquared();
  } else
    return (*this-start).lengthSquared();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the squared shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the finite line
  segment given by \a line.
  
  \see distanceToStraightLine
*/
double QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine(const QLineF &line) const
{
  return distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(line.p1()), QCPVector2D(line.p2()));
}
 
/*!
  Returns the shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the infinite straight
  line given by a \a base point and a \a direction vector.
  
  \see distanceSquaredToLine
*/
double QCPVector2D::distanceToStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &base, const QCPVector2D &direction) const
{
  return qAbs((*this-base).dot(direction.perpendicular()))/direction.length();
}
 
/*!
  Scales this vector by the given \a factor, i.e. the x and y components are multiplied by \a
  factor.
*/
QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator*=(double factor)
{
  mX *= factor;
  mY *= factor;
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Scales this vector by the given \a divisor, i.e. the x and y components are divided by \a
  divisor.
*/
QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator/=(double divisor)
{
  mX /= divisor;
  mY /= divisor;
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Adds the given \a vector to this vector component-wise.
*/
QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator+=(const QCPVector2D &vector)
{
  mX += vector.mX;
  mY += vector.mY;
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  subtracts the given \a vector from this vector component-wise.
*/
QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator-=(const QCPVector2D &vector)
{
  mX -= vector.mX;
  mY -= vector.mY;
  return *this;
}
/* end of 'src/vector2d.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/painter.cpp'        */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 8656 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPainter
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPainter
  \brief QPainter subclass used internally
  
  This QPainter subclass is used to provide some extended functionality e.g. for tweaking position
  consistency between antialiased and non-antialiased painting. Further it provides workarounds
  for QPainter quirks.
  
  \warning This class intentionally hides non-virtual functions of QPainter, e.g. setPen, save and
  restore. So while it is possible to pass a QCPPainter instance to a function that expects a
  QPainter pointer, some of the workarounds and tweaks will be unavailable to the function (because
  it will call the base class implementations of the functions actually hidden by QCPPainter).
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPPainter instance and sets default values
*/
QCPPainter::QCPPainter() :
  mModes(pmDefault),
  mIsAntialiasing(false)
{
  // don't setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefautPen) here, because painter isn't active yet and
  // a call to begin() will follow
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPPainter instance on the specified paint \a device and sets default values. Just
  like the analogous QPainter constructor, begins painting on \a device immediately.
  
  Like \ref begin, this method sets QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt versions before Qt5.
*/
QCPPainter::QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device) :
  QPainter(device),
  mModes(pmDefault),
  mIsAntialiasing(false)
{
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) // before Qt5, default pens used to be cosmetic if NonCosmeticDefaultPen flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions.
  if (isActive())
    setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen);
#endif
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of this
  QCPPainter.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  QPainter::setPen(pen);
  if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic))
    makeNonCosmetic();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the pen (by color) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of
  this QCPPainter.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen(const QColor &color)
{
  QPainter::setPen(color);
  if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic))
    makeNonCosmetic();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the pen (by style) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of
  this QCPPainter.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen(Qt::PenStyle penStyle)
{
  QPainter::setPen(penStyle);
  if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic))
    makeNonCosmetic();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Works around a Qt bug introduced with Qt 4.8 which makes drawing QLineF unpredictable when
  antialiasing is disabled. Thus when antialiasing is disabled, it rounds the \a line to
  integer coordinates and then passes it to the original drawLine.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::drawLine(const QLineF &line)
{
  if (mIsAntialiasing || mModes.testFlag(pmVectorized))
    QPainter::drawLine(line);
  else
    QPainter::drawLine(line.toLine());
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether painting uses antialiasing or not. Use this method instead of using setRenderHint
  with QPainter::Antialiasing directly, as it allows QCPPainter to regain pixel exactness between
  antialiased and non-antialiased painting (Since Qt < 5.0 uses slightly different coordinate systems for
  AA/Non-AA painting).
*/
void QCPPainter::setAntialiasing(bool enabled)
{
  setRenderHint(QPainter::Antialiasing, enabled);
  if (mIsAntialiasing != enabled)
  {
    mIsAntialiasing = enabled;
    if (!mModes.testFlag(pmVectorized)) // antialiasing half-pixel shift only needed for rasterized outputs
    {
      if (mIsAntialiasing)
        translate(0.5, 0.5);
      else
        translate(-0.5, -0.5);
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust its
  fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices.
*/
void QCPPainter::setModes(QCPPainter::PainterModes modes)
{
  mModes = modes;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt versions before Qt5 after beginning painting on \a
  device. This is necessary to get cosmetic pen consistency across Qt versions, because since Qt5,
  all pens are non-cosmetic by default, and in Qt4 this render hint must be set to get that
  behaviour.
  
  The Constructor \ref QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device) which directly starts painting also sets
  the render hint as appropriate.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
bool QCPPainter::begin(QPaintDevice *device)
{
  bool result = QPainter::begin(device);
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) // before Qt5, default pens used to be cosmetic if NonCosmeticDefaultPen flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions.
  if (result)
    setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen);
#endif
  return result;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust its
  fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices.
*/
void QCPPainter::setMode(QCPPainter::PainterMode mode, bool enabled)
{
  if (!enabled && mModes.testFlag(mode))
    mModes &= ~mode;
  else if (enabled && !mModes.testFlag(mode))
    mModes |= mode;
}
 
/*!
  Saves the painter (see QPainter::save). Since QCPPainter adds some new internal state to
  QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore those members.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
  
  \see restore
*/
void QCPPainter::save()
{
  mAntialiasingStack.push(mIsAntialiasing);
  QPainter::save();
}
 
/*!
  Restores the painter (see QPainter::restore). Since QCPPainter adds some new internal state to
  QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore those members.
  
  \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
  
  \see save
*/
void QCPPainter::restore()
{
  if (!mAntialiasingStack.isEmpty())
    mIsAntialiasing = mAntialiasingStack.pop();
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Unbalanced save/restore";
  QPainter::restore();
}
 
/*!
  Changes the pen width to 1 if it currently is 0. This function is called in the \ref setPen
  overrides when the \ref pmNonCosmetic mode is set.
*/
void QCPPainter::makeNonCosmetic()
{
  if (qFuzzyIsNull(pen().widthF()))
  {
    QPen p = pen();
    p.setWidth(1);
    QPainter::setPen(p);
  }
}
/* end of 'src/painter.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/paintbuffer.cpp'     */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 18915 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractPaintBuffer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAbstractPaintBuffer
  \brief The abstract base class for paint buffers, which define the rendering backend
 
  This abstract base class defines the basic interface that a paint buffer needs to provide in
  order to be usable by QCustomPlot.
 
  A paint buffer manages both a surface to draw onto, and the matching paint device. The size of
  the surface can be changed via \ref setSize. External classes (\ref QCustomPlot and \ref
  QCPLayer) request a painter via \ref startPainting and then perform the draw calls. Once the
  painting is complete, \ref donePainting is called, so the paint buffer implementation can do
  clean up if necessary. Before rendering a frame, each paint buffer is usually filled with a color
  using \ref clear (usually the color is \c Qt::transparent), to remove the contents of the
  previous frame.
 
  The simplest paint buffer implementation is \ref QCPPaintBufferPixmap which allows regular
  software rendering via the raster engine. Hardware accelerated rendering via pixel buffers and
  frame buffer objects is provided by \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer and \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo.
  They are used automatically if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is enabled.
*/
 
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual QCPPainter *QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::startPainting() = 0
 
  Returns a \ref QCPPainter which is ready to draw to this buffer. The ownership and thus the
  responsibility to delete the painter after the painting operations are complete is given to the
  caller of this method.
 
  Once you are done using the painter, delete the painter and call \ref donePainting.
 
  While a painter generated with this method is active, you must not call \ref setSize, \ref
  setDevicePixelRatio or \ref clear.
 
  This method may return 0, if a painter couldn't be activated on the buffer. This usually
  indicates a problem with the respective painting backend.
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0
 
  Draws the contents of this buffer with the provided \a painter. This is the method that is used
  to finally join all paint buffers and draw them onto the screen.
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::clear(const QColor &color) = 0
 
  Fills the entire buffer with the provided \a color. To have an empty transparent buffer, use the
  named color \c Qt::transparent.
 
  This method must not be called if there is currently a painter (acquired with \ref startPainting)
  active.
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::reallocateBuffer() = 0
 
  Reallocates the internal buffer with the currently configured size (\ref setSize) and device
  pixel ratio, if applicable (\ref setDevicePixelRatio). It is called as soon as any of those
  properties are changed on this paint buffer.
 
  \note Subclasses of \ref QCPAbstractPaintBuffer must call their reimplementation of this method
  in their constructor, to perform the first allocation (this can not be done by the base class
  because calling pure virtual methods in base class constructors is not possible).
*/
 
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::donePainting()
 
  If you have acquired a \ref QCPPainter to paint onto this paint buffer via \ref startPainting,
  call this method as soon as you are done with the painting operations and have deleted the
  painter.
 
  paint buffer subclasses may use this method to perform any type of cleanup that is necessary. The
  default implementation does nothing.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a paint buffer and initializes it with the provided \a size and \a devicePixelRatio.
 
  Subclasses must call their \ref reallocateBuffer implementation in their respective constructors.
*/
QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio) :
  mSize(size),
  mDevicePixelRatio(devicePixelRatio),
  mInvalidated(true)
{
}
 
QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::~QCPAbstractPaintBuffer()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the paint buffer size.
 
  The buffer is reallocated (by calling \ref reallocateBuffer), so any painters that were obtained
  by \ref startPainting are invalidated and must not be used after calling this method.
 
  If \a size is already the current buffer size, this method does nothing.
*/
void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setSize(const QSize &size)
{
  if (mSize != size)
  {
    mSize = size;
    reallocateBuffer();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the invalidated flag to \a invalidated.
 
  This mechanism is used internally in conjunction with isolated replotting of \ref QCPLayer
  instances (in \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered mode). If \ref QCPLayer::replot is called on a buffered
  layer, i.e. an isolated repaint of only that layer (and its dedicated paint buffer) is requested,
  QCustomPlot will decide depending on the invalidated flags of other paint buffers whether it also
  replots them, instead of only the layer on which the replot was called.
 
  The invalidated flag is set to true when \ref QCPLayer association has changed, i.e. if layers
  were added or removed from this buffer, or if they were reordered. It is set to false as soon as
  all associated \ref QCPLayer instances are drawn onto the buffer.
 
  Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to manually call this method.
*/
void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setInvalidated(bool invalidated)
{
  mInvalidated = invalidated;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the device pixel ratio to \a ratio. This is useful to render on high-DPI output devices.
  The ratio is automatically set to the device pixel ratio used by the parent QCustomPlot instance.
 
  The buffer is reallocated (by calling \ref reallocateBuffer), so any painters that were obtained
  by \ref startPainting are invalidated and must not be used after calling this method.
 
  \note This method is only available for Qt versions 5.4 and higher.
*/
void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setDevicePixelRatio(double ratio)
{
  if (!qFuzzyCompare(ratio, mDevicePixelRatio))
  {
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    mDevicePixelRatio = ratio;
    reallocateBuffer();
#else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4";
    mDevicePixelRatio = 1.0;
#endif
  }
}
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferPixmap
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPaintBufferPixmap
  \brief A paint buffer based on QPixmap, using software raster rendering
 
  This paint buffer is the default and fall-back paint buffer which uses software rendering and
  QPixmap as internal buffer. It is used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is false.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a pixmap paint buffer instancen with the specified \a size and \a devicePixelRatio, if
  applicable.
*/
QCPPaintBufferPixmap::QCPPaintBufferPixmap(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio) :
  QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio)
{
  QCPPaintBufferPixmap::reallocateBuffer();
}
 
QCPPaintBufferPixmap::~QCPPaintBufferPixmap()
{
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferPixmap::startPainting()
{
  QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(&mBuffer);
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(6, 0, 0)
  result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing);
#endif
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  if (painter && painter->isActive())
    painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, mBuffer);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed";
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::clear(const QColor &color)
{
  mBuffer.fill(color);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::reallocateBuffer()
{
  setInvalidated();
  if (!qFuzzyCompare(1.0, mDevicePixelRatio))
  {
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio);
    mBuffer.setDevicePixelRatio(mDevicePixelRatio);
#else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4";
    mDevicePixelRatio = 1.0;
    mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize);
#endif
  } else
  {
    mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize);
  }
}
 
 
#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer
  \brief A paint buffer based on OpenGL pixel buffers, using hardware accelerated rendering
 
  This paint buffer is one of the OpenGL paint buffers which facilitate hardware accelerated plot
  rendering. It is based on OpenGL pixel buffers (pbuffer) and is used in Qt versions before 5.0.
  (See \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo used in newer Qt versions.)
 
  The OpenGL paint buffers are used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is set to true, and if they are
  supported by the system.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer instance with the specified \a size and \a
  devicePixelRatio, if applicable.
 
  The parameter \a multisamples defines how many samples are used per pixel. Higher values thus
  result in higher quality antialiasing. If the specified \a multisamples value exceeds the
  capability of the graphics hardware, the highest supported multisampling is used.
*/
QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, int multisamples) :
  QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio),
  mGlPBuffer(0),
  mMultisamples(qMax(0, multisamples))
{
  QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::reallocateBuffer();
}
 
QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::~QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer()
{
  if (mGlPBuffer)
    delete mGlPBuffer;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::startPainting()
{
  if (!mGlPBuffer->isValid())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?";
    return 0;
  }
  
  QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(mGlPBuffer);
  result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing);
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  if (!painter || !painter->isActive())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed";
    return;
  }
  if (!mGlPBuffer->isValid())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL pbuffer isn't valid, reallocateBuffer was not called?";
    return;
  }
  painter->drawImage(0, 0, mGlPBuffer->toImage());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::clear(const QColor &color)
{
  if (mGlPBuffer->isValid())
  {
    mGlPBuffer->makeCurrent();
    glClearColor(color.redF(), color.greenF(), color.blueF(), color.alphaF());
    glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT | GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT);
    mGlPBuffer->doneCurrent();
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL pbuffer invalid or context not current";
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::reallocateBuffer()
{
  if (mGlPBuffer)
    delete mGlPBuffer;
  
  QGLFormat format;
  format.setAlpha(true);
  format.setSamples(mMultisamples);
  mGlPBuffer = new QGLPixelBuffer(mSize, format);
}
#endif // QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER
 
 
#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferGlFbo
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPaintBufferGlFbo
  \brief A paint buffer based on OpenGL frame buffers objects, using hardware accelerated rendering
 
  This paint buffer is one of the OpenGL paint buffers which facilitate hardware accelerated plot
  rendering. It is based on OpenGL frame buffer objects (fbo) and is used in Qt versions 5.0 and
  higher. (See \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer used in older Qt versions.)
 
  The OpenGL paint buffers are used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is set to true, and if they are
  supported by the system.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo instance with the specified \a size and \a devicePixelRatio,
  if applicable.
 
  All frame buffer objects shall share one OpenGL context and paint device, which need to be set up
  externally and passed via \a glContext and \a glPaintDevice. The set-up is done in \ref
  QCustomPlot::setupOpenGl and the context and paint device are managed by the parent QCustomPlot
  instance.
*/
QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, QWeakPointer<QOpenGLContext> glContext, QWeakPointer<QOpenGLPaintDevice> glPaintDevice) :
  QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio),
  mGlContext(glContext),
  mGlPaintDevice(glPaintDevice),
  mGlFrameBuffer(0)
{
  QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::reallocateBuffer();
}
 
QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::~QCPPaintBufferGlFbo()
{
  if (mGlFrameBuffer)
    delete mGlFrameBuffer;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::startPainting()
{
  QSharedPointer<QOpenGLPaintDevice> paintDevice = mGlPaintDevice.toStrongRef();
  QSharedPointer<QOpenGLContext> context = mGlContext.toStrongRef();
  if (!paintDevice)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL paint device doesn't exist";
    return 0;
  }
  if (!context)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL context doesn't exist";
    return 0;
  }
  if (!mGlFrameBuffer)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?";
    return 0;
  }
  
  if (QOpenGLContext::currentContext() != context.data())
    context->makeCurrent(context->surface());
  mGlFrameBuffer->bind();
  QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(paintDevice.data());
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(6, 0, 0)
  result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing);
#endif
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::donePainting()
{
  if (mGlFrameBuffer && mGlFrameBuffer->isBound())
    mGlFrameBuffer->release();
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Either OpenGL frame buffer not valid or was not bound";
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  if (!painter || !painter->isActive())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed";
    return;
  }
  if (!mGlFrameBuffer)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?";
    return;
  }
  painter->drawImage(0, 0, mGlFrameBuffer->toImage());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::clear(const QColor &color)
{
  QSharedPointer<QOpenGLContext> context = mGlContext.toStrongRef();
  if (!context)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL context doesn't exist";
    return;
  }
  if (!mGlFrameBuffer)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?";
    return;
  }
  
  if (QOpenGLContext::currentContext() != context.data())
    context->makeCurrent(context->surface());
  mGlFrameBuffer->bind();
  glClearColor(color.redF(), color.greenF(), color.blueF(), color.alphaF());
  glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT | GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT);
  mGlFrameBuffer->release();
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::reallocateBuffer()
{
  // release and delete possibly existing framebuffer:
  if (mGlFrameBuffer)
  {
    if (mGlFrameBuffer->isBound())
      mGlFrameBuffer->release();
    delete mGlFrameBuffer;
    mGlFrameBuffer = 0;
  }
  
  QSharedPointer<QOpenGLPaintDevice> paintDevice = mGlPaintDevice.toStrongRef();
  QSharedPointer<QOpenGLContext> context = mGlContext.toStrongRef();
  if (!paintDevice)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL paint device doesn't exist";
    return;
  }
  if (!context)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL context doesn't exist";
    return;
  }
  
  // create new fbo with appropriate size:
  context->makeCurrent(context->surface());
  QOpenGLFramebufferObjectFormat frameBufferFormat;
  frameBufferFormat.setSamples(context->format().samples());
  frameBufferFormat.setAttachment(QOpenGLFramebufferObject::CombinedDepthStencil);
  mGlFrameBuffer = new QOpenGLFramebufferObject(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio, frameBufferFormat);
  if (paintDevice->size() != mSize*mDevicePixelRatio)
    paintDevice->setSize(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio);
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
  paintDevice->setDevicePixelRatio(mDevicePixelRatio);
#endif
}
#endif // QCP_OPENGL_FBO
/* end of 'src/paintbuffer.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layer.cpp'           */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 37615 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLayer
  \brief A layer that may contain objects, to control the rendering order
 
  The Layering system of QCustomPlot is the mechanism to control the rendering order of the
  elements inside the plot.
 
  It is based on the two classes QCPLayer and QCPLayerable. QCustomPlot holds an ordered list of
  one or more instances of QCPLayer (see QCustomPlot::addLayer, QCustomPlot::layer,
  QCustomPlot::moveLayer, etc.). When replotting, QCustomPlot goes through the list of layers
  bottom to top and successively draws the layerables of the layers into the paint buffer(s).
 
  A QCPLayer contains an ordered list of QCPLayerable instances. QCPLayerable is an abstract base
  class from which almost all visible objects derive, like axes, grids, graphs, items, etc.
 
  \section qcplayer-defaultlayers Default layers
 
  Initially, QCustomPlot has six layers: "background", "grid", "main", "axes", "legend" and
  "overlay" (in that order). On top is the "overlay" layer, which only contains the QCustomPlot's
  selection rect (\ref QCustomPlot::selectionRect). The next two layers "axes" and "legend" contain
  the default axes and legend, so they will be drawn above plottables. In the middle, there is the
  "main" layer. It is initially empty and set as the current layer (see
  QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer). This means, all new plottables, items etc. are created on this
  layer by default. Then comes the "grid" layer which contains the QCPGrid instances (which belong
  tightly to QCPAxis, see \ref QCPAxis::grid). The Axis rect background shall be drawn behind
  everything else, thus the default QCPAxisRect instance is placed on the "background" layer. Of
  course, the layer affiliation of the individual objects can be changed as required (\ref
  QCPLayerable::setLayer).
 
  \section qcplayer-ordering Controlling the rendering order via layers
 
  Controlling the ordering of layerables in the plot is easy: Create a new layer in the position
  you want the layerable to be in, e.g. above "main", with \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer. Then set the
  current layer with \ref QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer to that new layer and finally create the
  objects normally. They will be placed on the new layer automatically, due to the current layer
  setting. Alternatively you could have also ignored the current layer setting and just moved the
  objects with \ref QCPLayerable::setLayer to the desired layer after creating them.
 
  It is also possible to move whole layers. For example, If you want the grid to be shown in front
  of all plottables/items on the "main" layer, just move it above "main" with
  QCustomPlot::moveLayer.
 
  The rendering order within one layer is simply by order of creation or insertion. The item
  created last (or added last to the layer), is drawn on top of all other objects on that layer.
 
  When a layer is deleted, the objects on it are not deleted with it, but fall on the layer below
  the deleted layer, see QCustomPlot::removeLayer.
 
  \section qcplayer-buffering Replotting only a specific layer
 
  If the layer mode (\ref setMode) is set to \ref lmBuffered, you can replot only this specific
  layer by calling \ref replot. In certain situations this can provide better replot performance,
  compared with a full replot of all layers. Upon creation of a new layer, the layer mode is
  initialized to \ref lmLogical. The only layer that is set to \ref lmBuffered in a new \ref
  QCustomPlot instance is the "overlay" layer, containing the selection rect.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPLayerable*> QCPLayer::children() const
  
  Returns a list of all layerables on this layer. The order corresponds to the rendering order:
  layerables with higher indices are drawn above layerables with lower indices.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPLayer::index() const
  
  Returns the index this layer has in the QCustomPlot. The index is the integer number by which this layer can be
  accessed via \ref QCustomPlot::layer.
  
  Layers with higher indices will be drawn above layers with lower indices.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPLayer instance.
  
  Normally you shouldn't directly instantiate layers, use \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer instead.
  
  \warning It is not checked that \a layerName is actually a unique layer name in \a parentPlot.
  This check is only performed by \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer.
*/
QCPLayer::QCPLayer(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &layerName) :
  QObject(parentPlot),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot),
  mName(layerName),
  mIndex(-1), // will be set to a proper value by the QCustomPlot layer creation function
  mVisible(true),
  mMode(lmLogical)
{
  // Note: no need to make sure layerName is unique, because layer
  // management is done with QCustomPlot functions.
}
 
QCPLayer::~QCPLayer()
{
  // If child layerables are still on this layer, detach them, so they don't try to reach back to this
  // then invalid layer once they get deleted/moved themselves. This only happens when layers are deleted
  // directly, like in the QCustomPlot destructor. (The regular layer removal procedure for the user is to
  // call QCustomPlot::removeLayer, which moves all layerables off this layer before deleting it.)
  
  while (!mChildren.isEmpty())
    mChildren.last()->setLayer(nullptr); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild()
  
  if (mParentPlot->currentLayer() == this)
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "The parent plot's mCurrentLayer will be a dangling pointer. Should have been set to a valid layer or nullptr beforehand.";
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this layer is visible or not. If \a visible is set to false, all layerables on this
  layer will be invisible.
 
  This function doesn't change the visibility property of the layerables (\ref
  QCPLayerable::setVisible), but the \ref QCPLayerable::realVisibility of each layerable takes the
  visibility of the parent layer into account.
*/
void QCPLayer::setVisible(bool visible)
{
  mVisible = visible;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the rendering mode of this layer.
 
  If \a mode is set to \ref lmBuffered for a layer, it will be given a dedicated paint buffer by
  the parent QCustomPlot instance. This means it may be replotted individually by calling \ref
  QCPLayer::replot, without needing to replot all other layers.
 
  Layers which are set to \ref lmLogical (the default) are used only to define the rendering order
  and can't be replotted individually.
 
  Note that each layer which is set to \ref lmBuffered requires additional paint buffers for the
  layers below, above and for the layer itself. This increases the memory consumption and
  (slightly) decreases the repainting speed because multiple paint buffers need to be joined. So
  you should carefully choose which layers benefit from having their own paint buffer. A typical
  example would be a layer which contains certain layerables (e.g. items) that need to be changed
  and thus replotted regularly, while all other layerables on other layers stay static. By default,
  only the topmost layer called "overlay" is in mode \ref lmBuffered, and contains the selection
  rect.
 
  \see replot
*/
void QCPLayer::setMode(QCPLayer::LayerMode mode)
{
  if (mMode != mode)
  {
    mMode = mode;
    if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
      pb->setInvalidated();
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws the contents of this layer with the provided \a painter.
 
  \see replot, drawToPaintBuffer
*/
void QCPLayer::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  foreach (QCPLayerable *child, mChildren)
  {
    if (child->realVisibility())
    {
      painter->save();
      painter->setClipRect(child->clipRect().translated(0, -1));
      child->applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
      child->draw(painter);
      painter->restore();
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws the contents of this layer into the paint buffer which is associated with this layer. The
  association is established by the parent QCustomPlot, which manages all paint buffers (see \ref
  QCustomPlot::setupPaintBuffers).
 
  \see draw
*/
void QCPLayer::drawToPaintBuffer()
{
  if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
  {
    if (QCPPainter *painter = pb->startPainting())
    {
      if (painter->isActive())
        draw(painter);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "paint buffer returned inactive painter";
      delete painter;
      pb->donePainting();
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "paint buffer returned nullptr painter";
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid paint buffer associated with this layer";
}
 
/*!
  If the layer mode (\ref setMode) is set to \ref lmBuffered, this method allows replotting only
  the layerables on this specific layer, without the need to replot all other layers (as a call to
  \ref QCustomPlot::replot would do).
 
  QCustomPlot also makes sure to replot all layers instead of only this one, if the layer ordering
  or any layerable-layer-association has changed since the last full replot and any other paint
  buffers were thus invalidated.
 
  If the layer mode is \ref lmLogical however, this method simply calls \ref QCustomPlot::replot on
  the parent QCustomPlot instance.
 
  \see draw
*/
void QCPLayer::replot()
{
  if (mMode == lmBuffered && !mParentPlot->hasInvalidatedPaintBuffers())
  {
    if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
    {
      pb->clear(Qt::transparent);
      drawToPaintBuffer();
      pb->setInvalidated(false); // since layer is lmBuffered, we know only this layer is on buffer and we can reset invalidated flag
      mParentPlot->update();
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid paint buffer associated with this layer";
  } else
    mParentPlot->replot();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Adds the \a layerable to the list of this layer. If \a prepend is set to true, the layerable will
  be prepended to the list, i.e. be drawn beneath the other layerables already in the list.
  
  This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable to this layer. (Use
  QCPLayerable::setLayer to change the layer of an object, not this function.)
  
  \see removeChild
*/
void QCPLayer::addChild(QCPLayerable *layerable, bool prepend)
{
  if (!mChildren.contains(layerable))
  {
    if (prepend)
      mChildren.prepend(layerable);
    else
      mChildren.append(layerable);
    if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
      pb->setInvalidated();
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is already child of this layer" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(layerable);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Removes the \a layerable from the list of this layer.
  
  This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable. (Use QCPLayerable::setLayer
  to change the layer of an object, not this function.)
  
  \see addChild
*/
void QCPLayer::removeChild(QCPLayerable *layerable)
{
  if (mChildren.removeOne(layerable))
  {
    if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
      pb->setInvalidated();
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is not child of this layer" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(layerable);
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayerable
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLayerable
  \brief Base class for all drawable objects
  
  This is the abstract base class most visible objects derive from, e.g. plottables, axes, grid
  etc.
 
  Every layerable is on a layer (QCPLayer) which allows controlling the rendering order by stacking
  the layers accordingly.
  
  For details about the layering mechanism, see the QCPLayer documentation.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPLayerable *QCPLayerable::parentLayerable() const
 
  Returns the parent layerable of this layerable. The parent layerable is used to provide
  visibility hierarchies in conjunction with the method \ref realVisibility. This way, layerables
  only get drawn if their parent layerables are visible, too.
  
  Note that a parent layerable is not necessarily also the QObject parent for memory management.
  Further, a layerable doesn't always have a parent layerable, so this function may return \c
  nullptr.
  
  A parent layerable is set implicitly when placed inside layout elements and doesn't need to be
  set manually by the user.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0
  \internal
  
  This function applies the default antialiasing setting to the specified \a painter, using the
  function \ref applyAntialiasingHint. It is the antialiasing state the painter is put in, when
  \ref draw is called on the layerable. If the layerable has multiple entities whose antialiasing
  setting may be specified individually, this function should set the antialiasing state of the
  most prominent entity. In this case however, the \ref draw function usually calls the specialized
  versions of this function before drawing each entity, effectively overriding the setting of the
  default antialiasing hint.
  
  <b>First example:</b> QCPGraph has multiple entities that have an antialiasing setting: The graph
  line, fills and scatters. Those can be configured via QCPGraph::setAntialiased,
  QCPGraph::setAntialiasedFill and QCPGraph::setAntialiasedScatters. Consequently, there isn't only
  the QCPGraph::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint function (which corresponds to the graph line's
  antialiasing), but specialized ones like QCPGraph::applyFillAntialiasingHint and
  QCPGraph::applyScattersAntialiasingHint. So before drawing one of those entities, QCPGraph::draw
  calls the respective specialized applyAntialiasingHint function.
  
  <b>Second example:</b> QCPItemLine consists only of a line so there is only one antialiasing
  setting which can be controlled with QCPItemLine::setAntialiased. (This function is inherited by
  all layerables. The specialized functions, as seen on QCPGraph, must be added explicitly to the
  respective layerable subclass.) Consequently it only has the normal
  QCPItemLine::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint. The \ref QCPItemLine::draw function doesn't need to
  care about setting any antialiasing states, because the default antialiasing hint is already set
  on the painter when the \ref draw function is called, and that's the state it wants to draw the
  line with.
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0
  \internal
  
  This function draws the layerable with the specified \a painter. It is only called by
  QCustomPlot, if the layerable is visible (\ref setVisible).
  
  Before this function is called, the painter's antialiasing state is set via \ref
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint, see the documentation there. Further, the clipping rectangle was
  set to \ref clipRect.
*/
 
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPLayerable::layerChanged(QCPLayer *newLayer);
  
  This signal is emitted when the layer of this layerable changes, i.e. this layerable is moved to
  a different layer.
  
  \see setLayer
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPLayerable instance.
  
  Since QCPLayerable is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated directly. Use one of the
  derived classes.
  
  If \a plot is provided, it automatically places itself on the layer named \a targetLayer. If \a
  targetLayer is an empty string, it places itself on the current layer of the plot (see \ref
  QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer).
  
  It is possible to provide \c nullptr as \a plot. In that case, you should assign a parent plot at
  a later time with \ref initializeParentPlot.
  
  The layerable's parent layerable is set to \a parentLayerable, if provided. Direct layerable
  parents are mainly used to control visibility in a hierarchy of layerables. This means a
  layerable is only drawn, if all its ancestor layerables are also visible. Note that \a
  parentLayerable does not become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable, \a
  plot does. It is not uncommon to set the QObject-parent to something else in the constructors of
  QCPLayerable subclasses, to guarantee a working destruction hierarchy.
*/
QCPLayerable::QCPLayerable(QCustomPlot *plot, QString targetLayer, QCPLayerable *parentLayerable) :
  QObject(plot),
  mVisible(true),
  mParentPlot(plot),
  mParentLayerable(parentLayerable),
  mLayer(nullptr),
  mAntialiased(true)
{
  if (mParentPlot)
  {
    if (targetLayer.isEmpty())
      setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer());
    else if (!setLayer(targetLayer))
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "setting QCPlayerable initial layer to" << targetLayer << "failed.";
  }
}
 
QCPLayerable::~QCPLayerable()
{
  if (mLayer)
  {
    mLayer->removeChild(this);
    mLayer = nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the visibility of this layerable object. If an object is not visible, it will not be drawn
  on the QCustomPlot surface, and user interaction with it (e.g. click and selection) is not
  possible.
*/
void QCPLayerable::setVisible(bool on)
{
  mVisible = on;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a layer of this layerable object. The object will be placed on top of the other objects
  already on \a layer.
  
  If \a layer is 0, this layerable will not be on any layer and thus not appear in the plot (or
  interact/receive events).
  
  Returns true if the layer of this layerable was successfully changed to \a layer.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::setLayer(QCPLayer *layer)
{
  return moveToLayer(layer, false);
}
 
/*! \overload
  Sets the layer of this layerable object by name
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layerName is a valid layer name.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::setLayer(const QString &layerName)
{
  if (!mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set";
    return false;
  }
  if (QCPLayer *layer = mParentPlot->layer(layerName))
  {
    return setLayer(layer);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "there is no layer with name" << layerName;
    return false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this object will be drawn antialiased or not.
  
  Note that antialiasing settings may be overridden by QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPLayerable::setAntialiased(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiased = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this layerable is visible, taking the visibility of the layerable parent and the
  visibility of this layerable's layer into account. This is the method that is consulted to decide
  whether a layerable shall be drawn or not.
  
  If this layerable has a direct layerable parent (usually set via hierarchies implemented in
  subclasses, like in the case of \ref QCPLayoutElement), this function returns true only if this
  layerable has its visibility set to true and the parent layerable's \ref realVisibility returns
  true.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::realVisibility() const
{
  return mVisible && (!mLayer || mLayer->visible()) && (!mParentLayerable || mParentLayerable.data()->realVisibility());
}
 
/*!
  This function is used to decide whether a click hits a layerable object or not.
 
  \a pos is a point in pixel coordinates on the QCustomPlot surface. This function returns the
  shortest pixel distance of this point to the object. If the object is either invisible or the
  distance couldn't be determined, -1.0 is returned. Further, if \a onlySelectable is true and the
  object is not selectable, -1.0 is returned, too.
 
  If the object is represented not by single lines but by an area like a \ref QCPItemText or the
  bars of a \ref QCPBars plottable, a click inside the area should also be considered a hit. In
  these cases this function thus returns a constant value greater zero but still below the parent
  plot's selection tolerance. (typically the selectionTolerance multiplied by 0.99).
  
  Providing a constant value for area objects allows selecting line objects even when they are
  obscured by such area objects, by clicking close to the lines (i.e. closer than
  0.99*selectionTolerance).
  
  The actual setting of the selection state is not done by this function. This is handled by the
  parent QCustomPlot when the mouseReleaseEvent occurs, and the finally selected object is notified
  via the \ref selectEvent/\ref deselectEvent methods.
  
  \a details is an optional output parameter. Every layerable subclass may place any information
  in \a details. This information will be passed to \ref selectEvent when the parent QCustomPlot
  decides on the basis of this selectTest call, that the object was successfully selected. The
  subsequent call to \ref selectEvent will carry the \a details. This is useful for multi-part
  objects (like QCPAxis). This way, a possibly complex calculation to decide which part was clicked
  is only done once in \ref selectTest. The result (i.e. the actually clicked part) can then be
  placed in \a details. So in the subsequent \ref selectEvent, the decision which part was
  selected doesn't have to be done a second time for a single selection operation.
  
  In the case of 1D Plottables (\ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D, like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPBars) \a
  details will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data point to \a pos.
  
  You may pass \c nullptr as \a details to indicate that you are not interested in those selection
  details.
  
  \see selectEvent, deselectEvent, mousePressEvent, wheelEvent, QCustomPlot::setInteractions,
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTestRect
*/
double QCPLayerable::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(pos)
  Q_UNUSED(onlySelectable)
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  return -1.0;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Sets the parent plot of this layerable. Use this function once to set the parent plot if you have
  passed \c nullptr in the constructor. It can not be used to move a layerable from one QCustomPlot
  to another one.
  
  Note that, unlike when passing a non \c nullptr parent plot in the constructor, this function
  does not make \a parentPlot the QObject-parent of this layerable. If you want this, call
  QObject::setParent(\a parentPlot) in addition to this function.
  
  Further, you will probably want to set a layer (\ref setLayer) after calling this function, to
  make the layerable appear on the QCustomPlot.
  
  The parent plot change will be propagated to subclasses via a call to \ref parentPlotInitialized
  so they can react accordingly (e.g. also initialize the parent plot of child layerables, like
  QCPLayout does).
*/
void QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot(QCustomPlot *parentPlot)
{
  if (mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with mParentPlot already initialized";
    return;
  }
  
  if (!parentPlot)
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with parentPlot zero";
  
  mParentPlot = parentPlot;
  parentPlotInitialized(mParentPlot);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Sets the parent layerable of this layerable to \a parentLayerable. Note that \a parentLayerable does not
  become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable.
  
  The parent layerable has influence on the return value of the \ref realVisibility method. Only
  layerables with a fully visible parent tree will return true for \ref realVisibility, and thus be
  drawn.
  
  \see realVisibility
*/
void QCPLayerable::setParentLayerable(QCPLayerable *parentLayerable)
{
  mParentLayerable = parentLayerable;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Moves this layerable object to \a layer. If \a prepend is true, this object will be prepended to
  the new layer's list, i.e. it will be drawn below the objects already on the layer. If it is
  false, the object will be appended.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layer is a valid layer.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::moveToLayer(QCPLayer *layer, bool prepend)
{
  if (layer && !mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set";
    return false;
  }
  if (layer && layer->parentPlot() != mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer" << layer->name() << "is not in same QCustomPlot as this layerable";
    return false;
  }
  
  QCPLayer *oldLayer = mLayer;
  if (mLayer)
    mLayer->removeChild(this);
  mLayer = layer;
  if (mLayer)
    mLayer->addChild(this, prepend);
  if (mLayer != oldLayer)
    emit layerChanged(mLayer);
  return true;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Sets the QCPainter::setAntialiasing state on the provided \a painter, depending on the \a
  localAntialiased value as well as the overrides \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. Which override enum this function takes into account is
  controlled via \a overrideElement.
*/
void QCPLayerable::applyAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter, bool localAntialiased, QCP::AntialiasedElement overrideElement) const
{
  if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements().testFlag(overrideElement))
    painter->setAntialiasing(false);
  else if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->antialiasedElements().testFlag(overrideElement))
    painter->setAntialiasing(true);
  else
    painter->setAntialiasing(localAntialiased);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This function is called by \ref initializeParentPlot, to allow subclasses to react on the setting
  of a parent plot. This is the case when \c nullptr was passed as parent plot in the constructor,
  and the parent plot is set at a later time.
  
  For example, QCPLayoutElement/QCPLayout hierarchies may be created independently of any
  QCustomPlot at first. When they are then added to a layout inside the QCustomPlot, the top level
  element of the hierarchy gets its parent plot initialized with \ref initializeParentPlot. To
  propagate the parent plot to all the children of the hierarchy, the top level element then uses
  this function to pass the parent plot on to its child elements.
  
  The default implementation does nothing.
  
  \see initializeParentPlot
*/
void QCPLayerable::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot)
{
   Q_UNUSED(parentPlot)
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the selection category this layerable shall belong to. The selection category is used in
  conjunction with \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions to control which objects are selectable and
  which aren't.
  
  Subclasses that don't fit any of the normal \ref QCP::Interaction values can use \ref
  QCP::iSelectOther. This is what the default implementation returns.
  
  \see QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCP::Interaction QCPLayerable::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectOther;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the clipping rectangle of this layerable object. By default, this is the viewport of the
  parent QCustomPlot. Specific subclasses may reimplement this function to provide different
  clipping rects.
  
  The returned clipping rect is set on the painter before the draw function of the respective
  object is called.
*/
QRect QCPLayerable::clipRect() const
{
  if (mParentPlot)
    return mParentPlot->viewport();
  else
    return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This event is called when the layerable shall be selected, as a consequence of a click by the
  user. Subclasses should react to it by setting their selection state appropriately. The default
  implementation does nothing.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the selection. \a additive indicates, whether the user
  was holding the multi-select-modifier while performing the selection (see \ref
  QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier). if \a additive is true, the selection state must be toggled
  (i.e. become selected when unselected and unselected when selected).
  
  Every selectEvent is preceded by a call to \ref selectTest, which has returned positively (i.e.
  returned a value greater than 0 and less than the selection tolerance of the parent QCustomPlot).
  The \a details data you output from \ref selectTest is fed back via \a details here. You may
  use it to transport any kind of information from the selectTest to the possibly subsequent
  selectEvent. Usually \a details is used to transfer which part was clicked, if it is a layerable
  that has multiple individually selectable parts (like QCPAxis). This way selectEvent doesn't need
  to do the calculation again to find out which part was actually clicked.
  
  \a selectionStateChanged is an output parameter. If the pointer is non-null, this function must
  set the value either to true or false, depending on whether the selection state of this layerable
  was actually changed. For layerables that only are selectable as a whole and not in parts, this
  is simple: if \a additive is true, \a selectionStateChanged must also be set to true, because the
  selection toggles. If \a additive is false, \a selectionStateChanged is only set to true, if the
  layerable was previously unselected and now is switched to the selected state.
  
  \see selectTest, deselectEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(additive)
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  Q_UNUSED(selectionStateChanged)
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This event is called when the layerable shall be deselected, either as consequence of a user
  interaction or a call to \ref QCustomPlot::deselectAll. Subclasses should react to it by
  unsetting their selection appropriately.
  
  just as in \ref selectEvent, the output parameter \a selectionStateChanged (if non-null), must
  return true or false when the selection state of this layerable has changed or not changed,
  respectively.
  
  \see selectTest, selectEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(selectionStateChanged)
}
 
/*!
  This event gets called when the user presses a mouse button while the cursor is over the
  layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a preceding call to \ref
  selectTest.
 
  The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c
  event->pos(). The parameter \a details contains layerable-specific details about the hit, which
  were generated in the previous call to \ref selectTest. For example, One-dimensional plottables
  like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPBars convey the clicked data point in the \a details parameter, as
  \ref QCPDataSelection packed as QVariant. Multi-part objects convey the specific \c
  SelectablePart that was hit (e.g. \ref QCPAxis::SelectablePart in the case of axes).
 
  QCustomPlot uses an event propagation system that works the same as Qt's system. If your
  layerable doesn't reimplement the \ref mousePressEvent or explicitly calls \c event->ignore() in
  its reimplementation, the event will be propagated to the next layerable in the stacking order.
 
  Once a layerable has accepted the \ref mousePressEvent, it is considered the mouse grabber and
  will receive all following calls to \ref mouseMoveEvent or \ref mouseReleaseEvent for this mouse
  interaction (a "mouse interaction" in this context ends with the release).
 
  The default implementation does nothing except explicitly ignoring the event with \c
  event->ignore().
 
  \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  event->ignore();
}
 
/*!
  This event gets called when the user moves the mouse while holding a mouse button, after this
  layerable has become the mouse grabber by accepting the preceding \ref mousePressEvent.
 
  The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c
  event->pos(). The parameter \a startPos indicates the position where the initial \ref
  mousePressEvent occurred, that started the mouse interaction.
 
  The default implementation does nothing.
 
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  event->ignore();
}
 
/*!
  This event gets called when the user releases the mouse button, after this layerable has become
  the mouse grabber by accepting the preceding \ref mousePressEvent.
 
  The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c
  event->pos(). The parameter \a startPos indicates the position where the initial \ref
  mousePressEvent occurred, that started the mouse interaction.
 
  The default implementation does nothing.
 
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  event->ignore();
}
 
/*!
  This event gets called when the user presses the mouse button a second time in a double-click,
  while the cursor is over the layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a
  preceding call to \ref selectTest.
 
  The \ref mouseDoubleClickEvent is called instead of the second \ref mousePressEvent. So in the
  case of a double-click, the event succession is
  <i>pressEvent &ndash; releaseEvent &ndash; doubleClickEvent &ndash; releaseEvent</i>.
 
  The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c
  event->pos(). The parameter \a details contains layerable-specific details about the hit, which
  were generated in the previous call to \ref selectTest. For example, One-dimensional plottables
  like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPBars convey the clicked data point in the \a details parameter, as
  \ref QCPDataSelection packed as QVariant. Multi-part objects convey the specific \c
  SelectablePart that was hit (e.g. \ref QCPAxis::SelectablePart in the case of axes).
 
  Similarly to \ref mousePressEvent, once a layerable has accepted the \ref mouseDoubleClickEvent,
  it is considered the mouse grabber and will receive all following calls to \ref mouseMoveEvent
  and \ref mouseReleaseEvent for this mouse interaction (a "mouse interaction" in this context ends
  with the release).
 
  The default implementation does nothing except explicitly ignoring the event with \c
  event->ignore().
 
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, wheelEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  event->ignore();
}
 
/*!
  This event gets called when the user turns the mouse scroll wheel while the cursor is over the
  layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a preceding call to \ref
  selectTest.
 
  The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c
  event->pos().
 
  The \c event->angleDelta() indicates how far the mouse wheel was turned, which is usually +/- 120
  for single rotation steps. However, if the mouse wheel is turned rapidly, multiple steps may
  accumulate to one event, making the delta larger. On the other hand, if the wheel has very smooth
  steps or none at all, the delta may be smaller.
 
  The default implementation does nothing.
 
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  event->ignore();
}
/* end of 'src/layer.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/range.cpp'      */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 12221 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPRange
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPRange
  \brief Represents the range an axis is encompassing.
  
  contains a \a lower and \a upper double value and provides convenience input, output and
  modification functions.
  
  \see QCPAxis::setRange
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPRange::size() const
 
  Returns the size of the range, i.e. \a upper-\a lower
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPRange::center() const
 
  Returns the center of the range, i.e. (\a upper+\a lower)*0.5
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPRange::normalize()
 
  Makes sure \a lower is numerically smaller than \a upper. If this is not the case, the values are
  swapped.
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPRange::contains(double value) const
 
  Returns true when \a value lies within or exactly on the borders of the range.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator+=(const double& value)
 
  Adds \a value to both boundaries of the range.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator-=(const double& value)
 
  Subtracts \a value from both boundaries of the range.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator*=(const double& value)
 
  Multiplies both boundaries of the range by \a value.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator/=(const double& value)
 
  Divides both boundaries of the range by \a value.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Minimum range size (\a upper - \a lower) the range changing functions will accept. Smaller
  intervals would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double precision numbers,
  corresponding to a minimum magnitude of roughly 1e-308.
 
  \warning Do not use this constant to indicate "arbitrarily small" values in plotting logic (as
  values that will appear in the plot)! It is intended only as a bound to compare against, e.g. to
  prevent axis ranges from obtaining underflowing ranges.
 
  \see validRange, maxRange
*/
const double QCPRange::minRange = 1e-280;
 
/*!
  Maximum values (negative and positive) the range will accept in range-changing functions.
  Larger absolute values would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double precision numbers,
  corresponding to a maximum magnitude of roughly 1e308.
 
  \warning Do not use this constant to indicate "arbitrarily large" values in plotting logic (as
  values that will appear in the plot)! It is intended only as a bound to compare against, e.g. to
  prevent axis ranges from obtaining overflowing ranges.
 
  \see validRange, minRange
*/
const double QCPRange::maxRange = 1e250;
 
/*!
  Constructs a range with \a lower and \a upper set to zero.
*/
QCPRange::QCPRange() :
  lower(0),
  upper(0)
{
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Constructs a range with the specified \a lower and \a upper values.
 
  The resulting range will be normalized (see \ref normalize), so if \a lower is not numerically
  smaller than \a upper, they will be swapped.
*/
QCPRange::QCPRange(double lower, double upper) :
  lower(lower),
  upper(upper)
{
  normalize();
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Expands this range such that \a otherRange is contained in the new range. It is assumed that both
  this range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize).
 
  If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, it will be replaced by the respective bound
  of \a otherRange.
 
  If \a otherRange is already inside the current range, this function does nothing.
 
  \see expanded
*/
void QCPRange::expand(const QCPRange &otherRange)
{
  if (lower > otherRange.lower || qIsNaN(lower))
    lower = otherRange.lower;
  if (upper < otherRange.upper || qIsNaN(upper))
    upper = otherRange.upper;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Expands this range such that \a includeCoord is contained in the new range. It is assumed that
  this range is normalized (see \ref normalize).
 
  If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the respective bound will be set to \a
  includeCoord.
 
  If \a includeCoord is already inside the current range, this function does nothing.
 
  \see expand
*/
void QCPRange::expand(double includeCoord)
{
  if (lower > includeCoord || qIsNaN(lower))
    lower = includeCoord;
  if (upper < includeCoord || qIsNaN(upper))
    upper = includeCoord;
}
 
 
/*! \overload
 
  Returns an expanded range that contains this and \a otherRange. It is assumed that both this
  range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize).
 
  If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the returned range's bound will be taken from
  \a otherRange.
 
  \see expand
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::expanded(const QCPRange &otherRange) const
{
  QCPRange result = *this;
  result.expand(otherRange);
  return result;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Returns an expanded range that includes the specified \a includeCoord. It is assumed that this
  range is normalized (see \ref normalize).
 
  If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the returned range's bound will be set to \a
  includeCoord.
 
  \see expand
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::expanded(double includeCoord) const
{
  QCPRange result = *this;
  result.expand(includeCoord);
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns this range, possibly modified to not exceed the bounds provided as \a lowerBound and \a
  upperBound. If possible, the size of the current range is preserved in the process.
  
  If the range shall only be bounded at the lower side, you can set \a upperBound to \ref
  QCPRange::maxRange. If it shall only be bounded at the upper side, set \a lowerBound to -\ref
  QCPRange::maxRange.
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::bounded(double lowerBound, double upperBound) const
{
  if (lowerBound > upperBound)
    qSwap(lowerBound, upperBound);
  
  QCPRange result(lower, upper);
  if (result.lower < lowerBound)
  {
    result.lower = lowerBound;
    result.upper = lowerBound + size();
    if (result.upper > upperBound || qFuzzyCompare(size(), upperBound-lowerBound))
      result.upper = upperBound;
  } else if (result.upper > upperBound)
  {
    result.upper = upperBound;
    result.lower = upperBound - size();
    if (result.lower < lowerBound || qFuzzyCompare(size(), upperBound-lowerBound))
      result.lower = lowerBound;
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a sanitized version of the range. Sanitized means for logarithmic scales, that
  the range won't span the positive and negative sign domain, i.e. contain zero. Further
  \a lower will always be numerically smaller (or equal) to \a upper.
  
  If the original range does span positive and negative sign domains or contains zero,
  the returned range will try to approximate the original range as good as possible.
  If the positive interval of the original range is wider than the negative interval, the
  returned range will only contain the positive interval, with lower bound set to \a rangeFac or
  \a rangeFac *\a upper, whichever is closer to zero. Same procedure is used if the negative interval
  is wider than the positive interval, this time by changing the \a upper bound.
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::sanitizedForLogScale() const
{
  double rangeFac = 1e-3;
  QCPRange sanitizedRange(lower, upper);
  sanitizedRange.normalize();
  // can't have range spanning negative and positive values in log plot, so change range to fix it
  //if (qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.lower+1, 1) && !qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.upper+1, 1))
  if (sanitizedRange.lower == 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper != 0.0)
  {
    // case lower is 0
    if (rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac)
      sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac;
    else
      sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac;
  } //else if (!qFuzzyCompare(lower+1, 1) && qFuzzyCompare(upper+1, 1))
  else if (sanitizedRange.lower != 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper == 0.0)
  {
    // case upper is 0
    if (-rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac)
      sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac;
    else
      sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac;
  } else if (sanitizedRange.lower < 0 && sanitizedRange.upper > 0)
  {
    // find out whether negative or positive interval is wider to decide which sign domain will be chosen
    if (-sanitizedRange.lower > sanitizedRange.upper)
    {
      // negative is wider, do same as in case upper is 0
      if (-rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac)
        sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac;
      else
        sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac;
    } else
    {
      // positive is wider, do same as in case lower is 0
      if (rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac)
        sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac;
      else
        sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac;
    }
  }
  // due to normalization, case lower>0 && upper<0 should never occur, because that implies upper<lower
  return sanitizedRange;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a sanitized version of the range. Sanitized means for linear scales, that
  \a lower will always be numerically smaller (or equal) to \a upper.
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::sanitizedForLinScale() const
{
  QCPRange sanitizedRange(lower, upper);
  sanitizedRange.normalize();
  return sanitizedRange;
}
 
/*!
  Checks, whether the specified range is within valid bounds, which are defined
  as QCPRange::maxRange and QCPRange::minRange.
  A valid range means:
  \li range bounds within -maxRange and maxRange
  \li range size above minRange
  \li range size below maxRange
*/
bool QCPRange::validRange(double lower, double upper)
{
  return (lower > -maxRange &&
          upper < maxRange &&
          qAbs(lower-upper) > minRange &&
          qAbs(lower-upper) < maxRange &&
          !(lower > 0 && qIsInf(upper/lower)) &&
          !(upper < 0 && qIsInf(lower/upper)));
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  Checks, whether the specified range is within valid bounds, which are defined
  as QCPRange::maxRange and QCPRange::minRange.
  A valid range means:
  \li range bounds within -maxRange and maxRange
  \li range size above minRange
  \li range size below maxRange
*/
bool QCPRange::validRange(const QCPRange &range)
{
  return (range.lower > -maxRange &&
          range.upper < maxRange &&
          qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) > minRange &&
          qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) < maxRange &&
          !(range.lower > 0 && qIsInf(range.upper/range.lower)) &&
          !(range.upper < 0 && qIsInf(range.lower/range.upper)));
}
/* end of 'src/axis/range.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/selection.cpp'       */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 21837 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPDataRange
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPDataRange
  \brief Describes a data range given by begin and end index
  
  QCPDataRange holds two integers describing the begin (\ref setBegin) and end (\ref setEnd) index
  of a contiguous set of data points. The \a end index corresponds to the data point just after the
  last data point of the data range, like in standard iterators.
 
  Data Ranges are not bound to a certain plottable, thus they can be freely exchanged, created and
  modified. If a non-contiguous data set shall be described, the class \ref QCPDataSelection is
  used, which holds and manages multiple instances of \ref QCPDataRange. In most situations, \ref
  QCPDataSelection is thus used.
  
  Both \ref QCPDataRange and \ref QCPDataSelection offer convenience methods to work with them,
  e.g. \ref bounded, \ref expanded, \ref intersects, \ref intersection, \ref adjusted, \ref
  contains. Further, addition and subtraction operators (defined in \ref QCPDataSelection) can be
  used to join/subtract data ranges and data selections (or mixtures), to retrieve a corresponding
  \ref QCPDataSelection.
  
  %QCustomPlot's \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism" is based on \ref QCPDataSelection and
  QCPDataRange.
  
  \note Do not confuse \ref QCPDataRange with \ref QCPRange. A \ref QCPRange describes an interval
  in floating point plot coordinates, e.g. the current axis range.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn int QCPDataRange::size() const
  
  Returns the number of data points described by this data range. This is equal to the end index
  minus the begin index.
  
  \see length
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPDataRange::length() const
  
  Returns the number of data points described by this data range. Equivalent to \ref size.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPDataRange::setBegin(int begin)
  
  Sets the begin of this data range. The \a begin index points to the first data point that is part
  of the data range.
  
  No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid).
  
  \see setEnd
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPDataRange::setEnd(int end)
  
  Sets the end of this data range. The \a end index points to the data point just after the last
  data point that is part of the data range.
  
  No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid).
  
  \see setBegin
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPDataRange::isValid() const
  
  Returns whether this range is valid. A valid range has a begin index greater or equal to 0, and
  an end index greater or equal to the begin index.
  
  \note Invalid ranges should be avoided and are never the result of any of QCustomPlot's methods
  (unless they are themselves fed with invalid ranges). Do not pass invalid ranges to QCustomPlot's
  methods. The invalid range is not inherently prevented in QCPDataRange, to allow temporary
  invalid begin/end values while manipulating the range. An invalid range is not necessarily empty
  (\ref isEmpty), since its \ref length can be negative and thus non-zero.
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPDataRange::isEmpty() const
  
  Returns whether this range is empty, i.e. whether its begin index equals its end index.
  
  \see size, length
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::adjusted(int changeBegin, int changeEnd) const
  
  Returns a data range where \a changeBegin and \a changeEnd were added to the begin and end
  indices, respectively.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an empty QCPDataRange, with begin and end set to 0.
*/
QCPDataRange::QCPDataRange() :
  mBegin(0),
  mEnd(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPDataRange, initialized with the specified \a begin and \a end.
  
  No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid).
*/
QCPDataRange::QCPDataRange(int begin, int end) :
  mBegin(begin),
  mEnd(end)
{
}
 
/*!
  Returns a data range that matches this data range, except that parts exceeding \a other are
  excluded.
  
  This method is very similar to \ref intersection, with one distinction: If this range and the \a
  other range share no intersection, the returned data range will be empty with begin and end set
  to the respective boundary side of \a other, at which this range is residing. (\ref intersection
  would just return a range with begin and end set to 0.)
*/
QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::bounded(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
  QCPDataRange result(intersection(other));
  if (result.isEmpty()) // no intersection, preserve respective bounding side of otherRange as both begin and end of return value
  {
    if (mEnd <= other.mBegin)
      result = QCPDataRange(other.mBegin, other.mBegin);
    else
      result = QCPDataRange(other.mEnd, other.mEnd);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a data range that contains both this data range as well as \a other.
*/
QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::expanded(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
  return {qMin(mBegin, other.mBegin), qMax(mEnd, other.mEnd)};
}
 
/*!
  Returns the data range which is contained in both this data range and \a other.
  
  This method is very similar to \ref bounded, with one distinction: If this range and the \a other
  range share no intersection, the returned data range will be empty with begin and end set to 0.
  (\ref bounded would return a range with begin and end set to one of the boundaries of \a other,
  depending on which side this range is on.)
  
  \see QCPDataSelection::intersection
*/
QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
  QCPDataRange result(qMax(mBegin, other.mBegin), qMin(mEnd, other.mEnd));
  if (result.isValid())
    return result;
  else
    return {};
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this data range and \a other share common data points.
  
  \see intersection, contains
*/
bool QCPDataRange::intersects(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
   return !( (mBegin > other.mBegin && mBegin >= other.mEnd) ||
             (mEnd <= other.mBegin && mEnd < other.mEnd) );
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether all data points of \a other are also contained inside this data range.
  
  \see intersects
*/
bool QCPDataRange::contains(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
  return mBegin <= other.mBegin && mEnd >= other.mEnd;
}
 
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPDataSelection
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPDataSelection
  \brief Describes a data set by holding multiple QCPDataRange instances
  
  QCPDataSelection manages multiple instances of QCPDataRange in order to represent any (possibly
  disjoint) set of data selection.
  
  The data selection can be modified with addition and subtraction operators which take
  QCPDataSelection and QCPDataRange instances, as well as methods such as \ref addDataRange and
  \ref clear. Read access is provided by \ref dataRange, \ref dataRanges, \ref dataRangeCount, etc.
  
  The method \ref simplify is used to join directly adjacent or even overlapping QCPDataRange
  instances. QCPDataSelection automatically simplifies when using the addition/subtraction
  operators. The only case when \ref simplify is left to the user, is when calling \ref
  addDataRange, with the parameter \a simplify explicitly set to false. This is useful if many data
  ranges will be added to the selection successively and the overhead for simplifying after each
  iteration shall be avoided. In this case, you should make sure to call \ref simplify after
  completing the operation.
  
  Use \ref enforceType to bring the data selection into a state complying with the constraints for
  selections defined in \ref QCP::SelectionType.
  
  %QCustomPlot's \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism" is based on QCPDataSelection and
  QCPDataRange.
  
  \section qcpdataselection-iterating Iterating over a data selection
  
  As an example, the following code snippet calculates the average value of a graph's data
  \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selection "selection":
  
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpdataselection-iterating-1
  
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn int QCPDataSelection::dataRangeCount() const
  
  Returns the number of ranges that make up the data selection. The ranges can be accessed by \ref
  dataRange via their index.
  
  \see dataRange, dataPointCount
*/
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPDataRange> QCPDataSelection::dataRanges() const
  
  Returns all data ranges that make up the data selection. If the data selection is simplified (the
  usual state of the selection, see \ref simplify), the ranges are sorted by ascending data point
  index.
  
  \see dataRange
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPDataSelection::isEmpty() const
  
  Returns true if there are no data ranges, and thus no data points, in this QCPDataSelection
  instance.
  
  \see dataRangeCount
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an empty QCPDataSelection.
*/
QCPDataSelection::QCPDataSelection()
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPDataSelection containing the provided \a range.
*/
QCPDataSelection::QCPDataSelection(const QCPDataRange &range)
{
  mDataRanges.append(range);
}
 
/*!
  Returns true if this selection is identical (contains the same data ranges with the same begin
  and end indices) to \a other.
 
  Note that both data selections must be in simplified state (the usual state of the selection, see
  \ref simplify) for this operator to return correct results.
*/
bool QCPDataSelection::operator==(const QCPDataSelection &other) const
{
  if (mDataRanges.size() != other.mDataRanges.size())
    return false;
  for (int i=0; i<mDataRanges.size(); ++i)
  {
    if (mDataRanges.at(i) != other.mDataRanges.at(i))
      return false;
  }
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Adds the data selection of \a other to this data selection, and then simplifies this data
  selection (see \ref simplify).
*/
QCPDataSelection &QCPDataSelection::operator+=(const QCPDataSelection &other)
{
  mDataRanges << other.mDataRanges;
  simplify();
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Adds the data range \a other to this data selection, and then simplifies this data selection (see
  \ref simplify).
*/
QCPDataSelection &QCPDataSelection::operator+=(const QCPDataRange &other)
{
  addDataRange(other);
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Removes all data point indices that are described by \a other from this data selection.
*/
QCPDataSelection &QCPDataSelection::operator-=(const QCPDataSelection &other)
{
  for (int i=0; i<other.dataRangeCount(); ++i)
    *this -= other.dataRange(i);
  
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Removes all data point indices that are described by \a other from this data selection.
*/
QCPDataSelection &QCPDataSelection::operator-=(const QCPDataRange &other)
{
  if (other.isEmpty() || isEmpty())
    return *this;
  
  simplify();
  int i=0;
  while (i < mDataRanges.size())
  {
    const int thisBegin = mDataRanges.at(i).begin();
    const int thisEnd = mDataRanges.at(i).end();
    if (thisBegin >= other.end())
      break; // since data ranges are sorted after the simplify() call, no ranges which contain other will come after this
    
    if (thisEnd > other.begin()) // ranges which don't fulfill this are entirely before other and can be ignored
    {
      if (thisBegin >= other.begin()) // range leading segment is encompassed
      {
        if (thisEnd <= other.end()) // range fully encompassed, remove completely
        {
          mDataRanges.removeAt(i);
          continue;
        } else // only leading segment is encompassed, trim accordingly
          mDataRanges[i].setBegin(other.end());
      } else // leading segment is not encompassed
      {
        if (thisEnd <= other.end()) // only trailing segment is encompassed, trim accordingly
        {
          mDataRanges[i].setEnd(other.begin());
        } else // other lies inside this range, so split range
        {
          mDataRanges[i].setEnd(other.begin());
          mDataRanges.insert(i+1, QCPDataRange(other.end(), thisEnd));
          break; // since data ranges are sorted (and don't overlap) after simplify() call, we're done here
        }
      }
    }
    ++i;
  }
  
  return *this;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the total number of data points contained in all data ranges that make up this data
  selection.
*/
int QCPDataSelection::dataPointCount() const
{
  int result = 0;
  foreach (QCPDataRange dataRange, mDataRanges)
    result += dataRange.length();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the data range with the specified \a index.
  
  If the data selection is simplified (the usual state of the selection, see \ref simplify), the
  ranges are sorted by ascending data point index.
  
  \see dataRangeCount
*/
QCPDataRange QCPDataSelection::dataRange(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mDataRanges.size())
  {
    return mDataRanges.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of range:" << index;
    return {};
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns a \ref QCPDataRange which spans the entire data selection, including possible
  intermediate segments which are not part of the original data selection.
*/
QCPDataRange QCPDataSelection::span() const
{
  if (isEmpty())
    return {};
  else
    return {mDataRanges.first().begin(), mDataRanges.last().end()};
}
 
/*!
  Adds the given \a dataRange to this data selection. This is equivalent to the += operator but
  allows disabling immediate simplification by setting \a simplify to false. This can improve
  performance if adding a very large amount of data ranges successively. In this case, make sure to
  call \ref simplify manually, after the operation.
*/
void QCPDataSelection::addDataRange(const QCPDataRange &dataRange, bool simplify)
{
  mDataRanges.append(dataRange);
  if (simplify)
    this->simplify();
}
 
/*!
  Removes all data ranges. The data selection then contains no data points.
  
  \ref isEmpty
*/
void QCPDataSelection::clear()
{
  mDataRanges.clear();
}
 
/*!
  Sorts all data ranges by range begin index in ascending order, and then joins directly adjacent
  or overlapping ranges. This can reduce the number of individual data ranges in the selection, and
  prevents possible double-counting when iterating over the data points held by the data ranges.
 
  This method is automatically called when using the addition/subtraction operators. The only case
  when \ref simplify is left to the user, is when calling \ref addDataRange, with the parameter \a
  simplify explicitly set to false.
*/
void QCPDataSelection::simplify()
{
  // remove any empty ranges:
  for (int i=mDataRanges.size()-1; i>=0; --i)
  {
    if (mDataRanges.at(i).isEmpty())
      mDataRanges.removeAt(i);
  }
  if (mDataRanges.isEmpty())
    return;
  
  // sort ranges by starting value, ascending:
  std::sort(mDataRanges.begin(), mDataRanges.end(), lessThanDataRangeBegin);
  
  // join overlapping/contiguous ranges:
  int i = 1;
  while (i < mDataRanges.size())
  {
    if (mDataRanges.at(i-1).end() >= mDataRanges.at(i).begin()) // range i overlaps/joins with i-1, so expand range i-1 appropriately and remove range i from list
    {
      mDataRanges[i-1].setEnd(qMax(mDataRanges.at(i-1).end(), mDataRanges.at(i).end()));
      mDataRanges.removeAt(i);
    } else
      ++i;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Makes sure this data selection conforms to the specified \a type selection type. Before the type
  is enforced, \ref simplify is called.
  
  Depending on \a type, enforcing means adding new data points that were previously not part of the
  selection, or removing data points from the selection. If the current selection already conforms
  to \a type, the data selection is not changed.
  
  \see QCP::SelectionType
*/
void QCPDataSelection::enforceType(QCP::SelectionType type)
{
  simplify();
  switch (type)
  {
    case QCP::stNone:
    {
      mDataRanges.clear();
      break;
    }
    case QCP::stWhole:
    {
      // whole selection isn't defined by data range, so don't change anything (is handled in plottable methods)
      break;
    }
    case QCP::stSingleData:
    {
      // reduce all data ranges to the single first data point:
      if (!mDataRanges.isEmpty())
      {
        if (mDataRanges.size() > 1)
          mDataRanges = QList<QCPDataRange>() << mDataRanges.first();
        if (mDataRanges.first().length() > 1)
          mDataRanges.first().setEnd(mDataRanges.first().begin()+1);
      }
      break;
    }
    case QCP::stDataRange:
    {
      if (!isEmpty())
        mDataRanges = QList<QCPDataRange>() << span();
      break;
    }
    case QCP::stMultipleDataRanges:
    {
      // this is the selection type that allows all concievable combinations of ranges, so do nothing
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns true if the data selection \a other is contained entirely in this data selection, i.e.
  all data point indices that are in \a other are also in this data selection.
  
  \see QCPDataRange::contains
*/
bool QCPDataSelection::contains(const QCPDataSelection &other) const
{
  if (other.isEmpty()) return false;
  
  int otherIndex = 0;
  int thisIndex = 0;
  while (thisIndex < mDataRanges.size() && otherIndex < other.mDataRanges.size())
  {
    if (mDataRanges.at(thisIndex).contains(other.mDataRanges.at(otherIndex)))
      ++otherIndex;
    else
      ++thisIndex;
  }
  return thisIndex < mDataRanges.size(); // if thisIndex ran all the way to the end to find a containing range for the current otherIndex, other is not contained in this
}
 
/*!
  Returns a data selection containing the points which are both in this data selection and in the
  data range \a other.
 
  A common use case is to limit an unknown data selection to the valid range of a data container,
  using \ref QCPDataContainer::dataRange as \a other. One can then safely iterate over the returned
  data selection without exceeding the data container's bounds.
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPDataSelection::intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  foreach (QCPDataRange dataRange, mDataRanges)
    result.addDataRange(dataRange.intersection(other), false);
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a data selection containing the points which are both in this data selection and in the
  data selection \a other.
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPDataSelection::intersection(const QCPDataSelection &other) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  for (int i=0; i<other.dataRangeCount(); ++i)
    result += intersection(other.dataRange(i));
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a data selection which is the exact inverse of this data selection, with \a outerRange
  defining the base range on which to invert. If \a outerRange is smaller than the \ref span of
  this data selection, it is expanded accordingly.
 
  For example, this method can be used to retrieve all unselected segments by setting \a outerRange
  to the full data range of the plottable, and calling this method on a data selection holding the
  selected segments.
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPDataSelection::inverse(const QCPDataRange &outerRange) const
{
  if (isEmpty())
    return QCPDataSelection(outerRange);
  QCPDataRange fullRange = outerRange.expanded(span());
  
  QCPDataSelection result;
  // first unselected segment:
  if (mDataRanges.first().begin() != fullRange.begin())
    result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(fullRange.begin(), mDataRanges.first().begin()), false);
  // intermediate unselected segments:
  for (int i=1; i<mDataRanges.size(); ++i)
    result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(mDataRanges.at(i-1).end(), mDataRanges.at(i).begin()), false);
  // last unselected segment:
  if (mDataRanges.last().end() != fullRange.end())
    result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(mDataRanges.last().end(), fullRange.end()), false);
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/selection.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/selectionrect.cpp'  */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 9215 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPSelectionRect
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPSelectionRect
  \brief Provides rect/rubber-band data selection and range zoom interaction
  
  QCPSelectionRect is used by QCustomPlot when the \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode is not
  \ref QCP::srmNone. When the user drags the mouse across the plot, the current selection rect
  instance (\ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRect) is forwarded these events and makes sure an
  according rect shape is drawn. At the begin, during, and after completion of the interaction, it
  emits the corresponding signals \ref started, \ref changed, \ref canceled, and \ref accepted.
  
  The QCustomPlot instance connects own slots to the current selection rect instance, in order to
  react to an accepted selection rect interaction accordingly.
  
  \ref isActive can be used to check whether the selection rect is currently active. An ongoing
  selection interaction can be cancelled programmatically via calling \ref cancel at any time.
  
  The appearance of the selection rect can be controlled via \ref setPen and \ref setBrush.
 
  If you wish to provide custom behaviour, e.g. a different visual representation of the selection
  rect (\ref QCPSelectionRect::draw), you can subclass QCPSelectionRect and pass an instance of
  your subclass to \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRect.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn bool QCPSelectionRect::isActive() const
   
  Returns true if there is currently a selection going on, i.e. the user has started dragging a
  selection rect, but hasn't released the mouse button yet.
    
  \see cancel
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPSelectionRect::started(QMouseEvent *event);
   
  This signal is emitted when a selection rect interaction was initiated, i.e. the user just
  started dragging the selection rect with the mouse.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPSelectionRect::changed(const QRect &rect, QMouseEvent *event);
  
  This signal is emitted while the selection rect interaction is ongoing and the \a rect has
  changed its size due to the user moving the mouse.
  
  Note that \a rect may have a negative width or height, if the selection is being dragged to the
  upper or left side of the selection rect origin.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPSelectionRect::canceled(const QRect &rect, QInputEvent *event);
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection interaction was cancelled. Note that \a event is \c
  nullptr if the selection interaction was cancelled programmatically, by a call to \ref cancel.
  
  The user may cancel the selection interaction by pressing the escape key. In this case, \a event
  holds the respective input event.
  
  Note that \a rect may have a negative width or height, if the selection is being dragged to the
  upper or left side of the selection rect origin.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPSelectionRect::accepted(const QRect &rect, QMouseEvent *event);
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection interaction was completed by the user releasing the
  mouse button.
    
  Note that \a rect may have a negative width or height, if the selection is being dragged to the
  upper or left side of the selection rect origin.
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPSelectionRect instance. To make QCustomPlot use the selection rect instance,
  pass it to \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRect. \a parentPlot should be set to the same
  QCustomPlot widget.
*/
QCPSelectionRect::QCPSelectionRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayerable(parentPlot),
  mPen(QBrush(Qt::gray), 0, Qt::DashLine),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mActive(false)
{
}
 
QCPSelectionRect::~QCPSelectionRect()
{
  cancel();
}
 
/*!
  A convenience function which returns the coordinate range of the provided \a axis, that this
  selection rect currently encompasses.
*/
QCPRange QCPSelectionRect::range(const QCPAxis *axis) const
{
  if (axis)
  {
    if (axis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      return {axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.left()), axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.left()+mRect.width())};
    else
      return {axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.top()+mRect.height()), axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.top())};
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with axis zero";
    return {};
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the selection rect outline.
  
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill the selection rect. By default the selection rect is not
  filled, i.e. \a brush is <tt>Qt::NoBrush</tt>.
  
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  If there is currently a selection interaction going on (\ref isActive), the interaction is
  canceled. The selection rect will emit the \ref canceled signal.
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::cancel()
{
  if (mActive)
  {
    mActive = false;
    emit canceled(mRect, nullptr);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that a selection rect interaction was initiated.
  The default implementation sets the selection rect to active, initializes the selection rect
  geometry and emits the \ref started signal.
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::startSelection(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  mActive = true;
  mRect = QRect(event->pos(), event->pos());
  emit started(event);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that an ongoing selection rect interaction needs
  to update its geometry. The default implementation updates the rect and emits the \ref changed
  signal.
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::moveSelection(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  mRect.setBottomRight(event->pos());
  emit changed(mRect, event);
  layer()->replot();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that an ongoing selection rect interaction has
  finished by the user releasing the mouse button. The default implementation deactivates the
  selection rect and emits the \ref accepted signal.
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::endSelection(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  mRect.setBottomRight(event->pos());
  mActive = false;
  emit accepted(mRect, event);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is called by QCustomPlot when a key has been pressed by the user while the selection
  rect interaction is active. The default implementation allows to \ref cancel the interaction by
  hitting the escape key.
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::keyPressEvent(QKeyEvent *event)
{
  if (event->key() == Qt::Key_Escape && mActive)
  {
    mActive = false;
    emit canceled(mRect, event);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPSelectionRect::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeOther);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  If the selection rect is active (\ref isActive), draws the selection rect defined by \a mRect.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPSelectionRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (mActive)
  {
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    painter->setBrush(mBrush);
    painter->drawRect(mRect);
  }
}
/* end of 'src/selectionrect.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layout.cpp'          */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 78863 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPMarginGroup
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPMarginGroup
  \brief A margin group allows synchronization of margin sides if working with multiple layout elements.
  
  QCPMarginGroup allows you to tie a margin side of two or more layout elements together, such that
  they will all have the same size, based on the largest required margin in the group.
  
  \n
  \image html QCPMarginGroup.png "Demonstration of QCPMarginGroup"
  \n
  
  In certain situations it is desirable that margins at specific sides are synchronized across
  layout elements. For example, if one QCPAxisRect is below another one in a grid layout, it will
  provide a cleaner look to the user if the left and right margins of the two axis rects are of the
  same size. The left axis of the top axis rect will then be at the same horizontal position as the
  left axis of the lower axis rect, making them appear aligned. The same applies for the right
  axes. This is what QCPMarginGroup makes possible.
  
  To add/remove a specific side of a layout element to/from a margin group, use the \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup method. To completely break apart the margin group, either call
  \ref clear, or just delete the margin group.
  
  \section QCPMarginGroup-example Example
  
  First create a margin group:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpmargingroup-creation-1
  Then set this group on the layout element sides:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpmargingroup-creation-2
  Here, we've used the first two axis rects of the plot and synchronized their left margins with
  each other and their right margins with each other.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPMarginGroup::elements(QCP::MarginSide side) const
  
  Returns a list of all layout elements that have their margin \a side associated with this margin
  group.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPMarginGroup instance in \a parentPlot.
*/
QCPMarginGroup::QCPMarginGroup(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QObject(parentPlot),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot)
{
  mChildren.insert(QCP::msLeft, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>());
  mChildren.insert(QCP::msRight, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>());
  mChildren.insert(QCP::msTop, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>());
  mChildren.insert(QCP::msBottom, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>());
}
 
QCPMarginGroup::~QCPMarginGroup()
{
  clear();
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this margin group is empty. If this function returns true, no layout elements use
  this margin group to synchronize margin sides.
*/
bool QCPMarginGroup::isEmpty() const
{
  QHashIterator<QCP::MarginSide, QList<QCPLayoutElement*> > it(mChildren);
  while (it.hasNext())
  {
    it.next();
    if (!it.value().isEmpty())
      return false;
  }
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Clears this margin group. The synchronization of the margin sides that use this margin group is
  lifted and they will use their individual margin sizes again.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::clear()
{
  // make all children remove themselves from this margin group:
  QHashIterator<QCP::MarginSide, QList<QCPLayoutElement*> > it(mChildren);
  while (it.hasNext())
  {
    it.next();
    const QList<QCPLayoutElement*> elements = it.value();
    for (int i=elements.size()-1; i>=0; --i)
      elements.at(i)->setMarginGroup(it.key(), nullptr); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the synchronized common margin for \a side. This is the margin value that will be used by
  the layout element on the respective side, if it is part of this margin group.
  
  The common margin is calculated by requesting the automatic margin (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin) of each element associated with \a side in this margin
  group, and choosing the largest returned value. (QCPLayoutElement::minimumMargins is taken into
  account, too.)
*/
int QCPMarginGroup::commonMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) const
{
  // query all automatic margins of the layout elements in this margin group side and find maximum:
  int result = 0;
  foreach (QCPLayoutElement *el, mChildren.value(side))
  {
    if (!el->autoMargins().testFlag(side))
      continue;
    int m = qMax(el->calculateAutoMargin(side), QCP::getMarginValue(el->minimumMargins(), side));
    if (m > result)
      result = m;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Adds \a element to the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a side.
  
  This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::addChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (!mChildren[side].contains(element))
    mChildren[side].append(element);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is already child of this margin group side" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(element);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Removes \a element from the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a side.
  
  This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::removeChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (!mChildren[side].removeOne(element))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is not child of this margin group side" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(element);
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutElement
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLayoutElement
  \brief The abstract base class for all objects that form \ref thelayoutsystem "the layout system".
  
  This is an abstract base class. As such, it can't be instantiated directly, rather use one of its subclasses.
  
  A Layout element is a rectangular object which can be placed in layouts. It has an outer rect
  (QCPLayoutElement::outerRect) and an inner rect (\ref QCPLayoutElement::rect). The difference
  between outer and inner rect is called its margin. The margin can either be set to automatic or
  manual (\ref setAutoMargins) on a per-side basis. If a side is set to manual, that margin can be
  set explicitly with \ref setMargins and will stay fixed at that value. If it's set to automatic,
  the layout element subclass will control the value itself (via \ref calculateAutoMargin).
  
  Layout elements can be placed in layouts (base class QCPLayout) like QCPLayoutGrid. The top level
  layout is reachable via \ref QCustomPlot::plotLayout, and is a \ref QCPLayoutGrid. Since \ref
  QCPLayout itself derives from \ref QCPLayoutElement, layouts can be nested.
  
  Thus in QCustomPlot one can divide layout elements into two categories: The ones that are
  invisible by themselves, because they don't draw anything. Their only purpose is to manage the
  position and size of other layout elements. This category of layout elements usually use
  QCPLayout as base class. Then there is the category of layout elements which actually draw
  something. For example, QCPAxisRect, QCPLegend and QCPTextElement are of this category. This does
  not necessarily mean that the latter category can't have child layout elements. QCPLegend for
  instance, actually derives from QCPLayoutGrid and the individual legend items are child layout
  elements in the grid layout.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPLayout *QCPLayoutElement::layout() const
  
  Returns the parent layout of this layout element.
*/
 
/*! \fn QRect QCPLayoutElement::rect() const
  
  Returns the inner rect of this layout element. The inner rect is the outer rect (\ref outerRect, \ref
  setOuterRect) shrinked by the margins (\ref setMargins, \ref setAutoMargins).
  
  In some cases, the area between outer and inner rect is left blank. In other cases the margin
  area is used to display peripheral graphics while the main content is in the inner rect. This is
  where automatic margin calculation becomes interesting because it allows the layout element to
  adapt the margins to the peripheral graphics it wants to draw. For example, \ref QCPAxisRect
  draws the axis labels and tick labels in the margin area, thus needs to adjust the margins (if
  \ref setAutoMargins is enabled) according to the space required by the labels of the axes.
  
  \see outerRect
*/
 
/*! \fn QRect QCPLayoutElement::outerRect() const
  
  Returns the outer rect of this layout element. The outer rect is the inner rect expanded by the
  margins (\ref setMargins, \ref setAutoMargins). The outer rect is used (and set via \ref
  setOuterRect) by the parent \ref QCPLayout to control the size of this layout element.
  
  \see rect
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an instance of QCPLayoutElement and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutElement::QCPLayoutElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayerable(parentPlot), // parenthood is changed as soon as layout element gets inserted into a layout (except for top level layout)
  mParentLayout(nullptr),
  mMinimumSize(),
  mMaximumSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX),
  mSizeConstraintRect(scrInnerRect),
  mRect(0, 0, 0, 0),
  mOuterRect(0, 0, 0, 0),
  mMargins(0, 0, 0, 0),
  mMinimumMargins(0, 0, 0, 0),
  mAutoMargins(QCP::msAll)
{
}
 
QCPLayoutElement::~QCPLayoutElement()
{
  setMarginGroup(QCP::msAll, nullptr); // unregister at margin groups, if there are any
  // unregister at layout:
  if (qobject_cast<QCPLayout*>(mParentLayout)) // the qobject_cast is just a safeguard in case the layout forgets to call clear() in its dtor and this dtor is called by QObject dtor
    mParentLayout->take(this);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the outer rect of this layout element. If the layout element is inside a layout, the layout
  sets the position and size of this layout element using this function.
  
  Calling this function externally has no effect, since the layout will overwrite any changes to
  the outer rect upon the next replot.
  
  The layout element will adapt its inner \ref rect by applying the margins inward to the outer rect.
  
  \see rect
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect(const QRect &rect)
{
  if (mOuterRect != rect)
  {
    mOuterRect = rect;
    mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted(mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(), -mMargins.bottom());
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the margins of this layout element. If \ref setAutoMargins is disabled for some or all
  sides, this function is used to manually set the margin on those sides. Sides that are still set
  to be handled automatically are ignored and may have any value in \a margins.
  
  The margin is the distance between the outer rect (controlled by the parent layout via \ref
  setOuterRect) and the inner \ref rect (which usually contains the main content of this layout
  element).
  
  \see setAutoMargins
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMargins(const QMargins &margins)
{
  if (mMargins != margins)
  {
    mMargins = margins;
    mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted(mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(), -mMargins.bottom());
  }
}
 
/*!
  If \ref setAutoMargins is enabled on some or all margins, this function is used to provide
  minimum values for those margins.
  
  The minimum values are not enforced on margin sides that were set to be under manual control via
  \ref setAutoMargins.
  
  \see setAutoMargins
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumMargins(const QMargins &margins)
{
  if (mMinimumMargins != margins)
  {
    mMinimumMargins = margins;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets on which sides the margin shall be calculated automatically. If a side is calculated
  automatically, a minimum margin value may be provided with \ref setMinimumMargins. If a side is
  set to be controlled manually, the value may be specified with \ref setMargins.
  
  Margin sides that are under automatic control may participate in a \ref QCPMarginGroup (see \ref
  setMarginGroup), to synchronize (align) it with other layout elements in the plot.
  
  \see setMinimumMargins, setMargins, QCP::MarginSide
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setAutoMargins(QCP::MarginSides sides)
{
  mAutoMargins = sides;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the minimum size of this layout element. A parent layout tries to respect the \a size here
  by changing row/column sizes in the layout accordingly.
  
  If the parent layout size is not sufficient to satisfy all minimum size constraints of its child
  layout elements, the layout may set a size that is actually smaller than \a size. QCustomPlot
  propagates the layout's size constraints to the outside by setting its own minimum QWidget size
  accordingly, so violations of \a size should be exceptions.
  
  Whether this constraint applies to the inner or the outer rect can be specified with \ref
  setSizeConstraintRect (see \ref rect and \ref outerRect).
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize(const QSize &size)
{
  if (mMinimumSize != size)
  {
    mMinimumSize = size;
    if (mParentLayout)
      mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged();
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the minimum size of this layout element.
  
  Whether this constraint applies to the inner or the outer rect can be specified with \ref
  setSizeConstraintRect (see \ref rect and \ref outerRect).
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize(int width, int height)
{
  setMinimumSize(QSize(width, height));
}
 
/*!
  Sets the maximum size of this layout element. A parent layout tries to respect the \a size here
  by changing row/column sizes in the layout accordingly.
  
  Whether this constraint applies to the inner or the outer rect can be specified with \ref
  setSizeConstraintRect (see \ref rect and \ref outerRect).
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize(const QSize &size)
{
  if (mMaximumSize != size)
  {
    mMaximumSize = size;
    if (mParentLayout)
      mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged();
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the maximum size of this layout element.
  
  Whether this constraint applies to the inner or the outer rect can be specified with \ref
  setSizeConstraintRect (see \ref rect and \ref outerRect).
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize(int width, int height)
{
  setMaximumSize(QSize(width, height));
}
 
/*!
  Sets to which rect of a layout element the size constraints apply. Size constraints can be set
  via \ref setMinimumSize and \ref setMaximumSize.
  
  The outer rect (\ref outerRect) includes the margins (e.g. in the case of a QCPAxisRect the axis
  labels), whereas the inner rect (\ref rect) does not.
  
  \see setMinimumSize, setMaximumSize
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect(SizeConstraintRect constraintRect)
{
  if (mSizeConstraintRect != constraintRect)
  {
    mSizeConstraintRect = constraintRect;
    if (mParentLayout)
      mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the margin \a group of the specified margin \a sides.
  
  Margin groups allow synchronizing specified margins across layout elements, see the documentation
  of \ref QCPMarginGroup.
  
  To unset the margin group of \a sides, set \a group to \c nullptr.
  
  Note that margin groups only work for margin sides that are set to automatic (\ref
  setAutoMargins).
  
  \see QCP::MarginSide
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup(QCP::MarginSides sides, QCPMarginGroup *group)
{
  QVector<QCP::MarginSide> sideVector;
  if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msLeft)) sideVector.append(QCP::msLeft);
  if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msRight)) sideVector.append(QCP::msRight);
  if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msTop)) sideVector.append(QCP::msTop);
  if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msBottom)) sideVector.append(QCP::msBottom);
  
  foreach (QCP::MarginSide side, sideVector)
  {
    if (marginGroup(side) != group)
    {
      QCPMarginGroup *oldGroup = marginGroup(side);
      if (oldGroup) // unregister at old group
        oldGroup->removeChild(side, this);
      
      if (!group) // if setting to 0, remove hash entry. Else set hash entry to new group and register there
      {
        mMarginGroups.remove(side);
      } else // setting to a new group
      {
        mMarginGroups[side] = group;
        group->addChild(side, this);
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Updates the layout element and sub-elements. This function is automatically called before every
  replot by the parent layout element. It is called multiple times, once for every \ref
  UpdatePhase. The phases are run through in the order of the enum values. For details about what
  happens at the different phases, see the documentation of \ref UpdatePhase.
  
  Layout elements that have child elements should call the \ref update method of their child
  elements, and pass the current \a phase unchanged.
  
  The default implementation executes the automatic margin mechanism in the \ref upMargins phase.
  Subclasses should make sure to call the base class implementation.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::update(UpdatePhase phase)
{
  if (phase == upMargins)
  {
    if (mAutoMargins != QCP::msNone)
    {
      // set the margins of this layout element according to automatic margin calculation, either directly or via a margin group:
      QMargins newMargins = mMargins;
      const QList<QCP::MarginSide> allMarginSides = QList<QCP::MarginSide>() << QCP::msLeft << QCP::msRight << QCP::msTop << QCP::msBottom;
      foreach (QCP::MarginSide side, allMarginSides)
      {
        if (mAutoMargins.testFlag(side)) // this side's margin shall be calculated automatically
        {
          if (mMarginGroups.contains(side))
            QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, mMarginGroups[side]->commonMargin(side)); // this side is part of a margin group, so get the margin value from that group
          else
            QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, calculateAutoMargin(side)); // this side is not part of a group, so calculate the value directly
          // apply minimum margin restrictions:
          if (QCP::getMarginValue(newMargins, side) < QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side))
            QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side));
        }
      }
      setMargins(newMargins);
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the suggested minimum size this layout element (the \ref outerRect) may be compressed to,
  if no manual minimum size is set.
  
  if a minimum size (\ref setMinimumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts use the returned size
  (usually indirectly through \ref QCPLayout::getFinalMinimumOuterSize) to determine the minimum
  allowed size of this layout element.
 
  A manual minimum size is considered set if it is non-zero.
  
  The default implementation simply returns the sum of the horizontal margins for the width and the
  sum of the vertical margins for the height. Reimplementations may use their detailed knowledge
  about the layout element's content to provide size hints.
*/
QSize QCPLayoutElement::minimumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  return {mMargins.left()+mMargins.right(), mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom()};
}
 
/*!
  Returns the suggested maximum size this layout element (the \ref outerRect) may be expanded to,
  if no manual maximum size is set.
  
  if a maximum size (\ref setMaximumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts use the returned
  size (usually indirectly through \ref QCPLayout::getFinalMaximumOuterSize) to determine the
  maximum allowed size of this layout element.
 
  A manual maximum size is considered set if it is smaller than Qt's \c QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.
  
  The default implementation simply returns \c QWIDGETSIZE_MAX for both width and height, implying
  no suggested maximum size. Reimplementations may use their detailed knowledge about the layout
  element's content to provide size hints.
*/
QSize QCPLayoutElement::maximumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  return {QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX};
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all child elements in this layout element. If \a recursive is true, all
  sub-child elements are included in the list, too.
  
  \warning There may be \c nullptr entries in the returned list. For example, QCPLayoutGrid may
  have empty cells which yield \c nullptr at the respective index.
*/
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayoutElement::elements(bool recursive) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(recursive)
  return QList<QCPLayoutElement*>();
}
 
/*!
  Layout elements are sensitive to events inside their outer rect. If \a pos is within the outer
  rect, this method returns a value corresponding to 0.99 times the parent plot's selection
  tolerance. However, layout elements are not selectable by default. So if \a onlySelectable is
  true, -1.0 is returned.
  
  See \ref QCPLayerable::selectTest for a general explanation of this virtual method.
  
  QCPLayoutElement subclasses may reimplement this method to provide more specific selection test
  behaviour.
*/
double QCPLayoutElement::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  
  if (onlySelectable)
    return -1;
  
  if (QRectF(mOuterRect).contains(pos))
  {
    if (mParentPlot)
      return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
    else
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "parent plot not defined";
      return -1;
    }
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  propagates the parent plot initialization to all child elements, by calling \ref
  QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on them.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot)
{
  foreach (QCPLayoutElement *el, elements(false))
  {
    if (!el->parentPlot())
      el->initializeParentPlot(parentPlot);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the margin size for this \a side. It is used if automatic margins is enabled for this \a
  side (see \ref setAutoMargins). If a minimum margin was set with \ref setMinimumMargins, the
  returned value will not be smaller than the specified minimum margin.
  
  The default implementation just returns the respective manual margin (\ref setMargins) or the
  minimum margin, whichever is larger.
*/
int QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side)
{
  return qMax(QCP::getMarginValue(mMargins, side), QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side));
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This virtual method is called when this layout element was moved to a different QCPLayout, or
  when this layout element has changed its logical position (e.g. row and/or column) within the
  same QCPLayout. Subclasses may use this to react accordingly.
  
  Since this method is called after the completion of the move, you can access the new parent
  layout via \ref layout().
  
  The default implementation does nothing.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::layoutChanged()
{
}
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayout
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLayout
  \brief The abstract base class for layouts
  
  This is an abstract base class for layout elements whose main purpose is to define the position
  and size of other child layout elements. In most cases, layouts don't draw anything themselves
  (but there are exceptions to this, e.g. QCPLegend).
  
  QCPLayout derives from QCPLayoutElement, and thus can itself be nested in other layouts.
  
  QCPLayout introduces a common interface for accessing and manipulating the child elements. Those
  functions are most notably \ref elementCount, \ref elementAt, \ref takeAt, \ref take, \ref
  simplify, \ref removeAt, \ref remove and \ref clear. Individual subclasses may add more functions
  to this interface which are more specialized to the form of the layout. For example, \ref
  QCPLayoutGrid adds functions that take row and column indices to access cells of the layout grid
  more conveniently.
  
  Since this is an abstract base class, you can't instantiate it directly. Rather use one of its
  subclasses like QCPLayoutGrid or QCPLayoutInset.
  
  For a general introduction to the layout system, see the dedicated documentation page \ref
  thelayoutsystem "The Layout System".
*/
 
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual int QCPLayout::elementCount() const = 0
  
  Returns the number of elements/cells in the layout.
  
  \see elements, elementAt
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::elementAt(int index) const = 0
  
  Returns the element in the cell with the given \a index. If \a index is invalid, returns \c
  nullptr.
  
  Note that even if \a index is valid, the respective cell may be empty in some layouts (e.g.
  QCPLayoutGrid), so this function may return \c nullptr in those cases. You may use this function
  to check whether a cell is empty or not.
  
  \see elements, elementCount, takeAt
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::takeAt(int index) = 0
  
  Removes the element with the given \a index from the layout and returns it.
  
  If the \a index is invalid or the cell with that index is empty, returns \c nullptr.
  
  Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an empty cell after
  successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref simplify.
  
  \see elementAt, take
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual bool QCPLayout::take(QCPLayoutElement* element) = 0
  
  Removes the specified \a element from the layout and returns true on success.
  
  If the \a element isn't in this layout, returns false.
  
  Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an empty cell after
  successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref simplify.
  
  \see takeAt
*/
 
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an instance of QCPLayout and sets default values. Note that since QCPLayout
  is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated directly.
*/
QCPLayout::QCPLayout()
{
}
 
/*!
  If \a phase is \ref upLayout, calls \ref updateLayout, which subclasses may reimplement to
  reposition and resize their cells.
  
  Finally, the call is propagated down to all child \ref QCPLayoutElement "QCPLayoutElements".
  
  For details about this method and the update phases, see the documentation of \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::update.
*/
void QCPLayout::update(UpdatePhase phase)
{
  QCPLayoutElement::update(phase);
  
  // set child element rects according to layout:
  if (phase == upLayout)
    updateLayout();
  
  // propagate update call to child elements:
  const int elCount = elementCount();
  for (int i=0; i<elCount; ++i)
  {
    if (QCPLayoutElement *el = elementAt(i))
      el->update(phase);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayout::elements(bool recursive) const
{
  const int c = elementCount();
  QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0)
  result.reserve(c);
#endif
  for (int i=0; i<c; ++i)
    result.append(elementAt(i));
  if (recursive)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<c; ++i)
    {
      if (result.at(i))
        result << result.at(i)->elements(recursive);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Simplifies the layout by collapsing empty cells. The exact behavior depends on subclasses, the
  default implementation does nothing.
  
  Not all layouts need simplification. For example, QCPLayoutInset doesn't use explicit
  simplification while QCPLayoutGrid does.
*/
void QCPLayout::simplify()
{
}
 
/*!
  Removes and deletes the element at the provided \a index. Returns true on success. If \a index is
  invalid or points to an empty cell, returns false.
  
  This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the layout and then deletes
  the returned element. Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an
  empty cell after successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref
  simplify.
  
  \see remove, takeAt
*/
bool QCPLayout::removeAt(int index)
{
  if (QCPLayoutElement *el = takeAt(index))
  {
    delete el;
    return true;
  } else
    return false;
}
 
/*!
  Removes and deletes the provided \a element. Returns true on success. If \a element is not in the
  layout, returns false.
  
  This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the layout and then deletes
  the element. Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an
  empty cell after successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref
  simplify.
  
  \see removeAt, take
*/
bool QCPLayout::remove(QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (take(element))
  {
    delete element;
    return true;
  } else
    return false;
}
 
/*!
  Removes and deletes all layout elements in this layout. Finally calls \ref simplify to make sure
  all empty cells are collapsed.
  
  \see remove, removeAt
*/
void QCPLayout::clear()
{
  for (int i=elementCount()-1; i>=0; --i)
  {
    if (elementAt(i))
      removeAt(i);
  }
  simplify();
}
 
/*!
  Subclasses call this method to report changed (minimum/maximum) size constraints.
  
  If the parent of this layout is again a QCPLayout, forwards the call to the parent's \ref
  sizeConstraintsChanged. If the parent is a QWidget (i.e. is the \ref QCustomPlot::plotLayout of
  QCustomPlot), calls QWidget::updateGeometry, so if the QCustomPlot widget is inside a Qt QLayout,
  it may update itself and resize cells accordingly.
*/
void QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged() const
{
  if (QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(parent()))
    w->updateGeometry();
  else if (QCPLayout *l = qobject_cast<QCPLayout*>(parent()))
    l->sizeConstraintsChanged();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Subclasses reimplement this method to update the position and sizes of the child elements/cells
  via calling their \ref QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect. The default implementation does nothing.
  
  The geometry used as a reference is the inner \ref rect of this layout. Child elements should stay
  within that rect.
  
  \ref getSectionSizes may help with the reimplementation of this function.
  
  \see update
*/
void QCPLayout::updateLayout()
{
}
 
 
/*! \internal
  
  Associates \a el with this layout. This is done by setting the \ref QCPLayoutElement::layout, the
  \ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable and the QObject parent to this layout.
  
  Further, if \a el didn't previously have a parent plot, calls \ref
  QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on \a el to set the paret plot.
  
  This method is used by subclass specific methods that add elements to the layout. Note that this
  method only changes properties in \a el. The removal from the old layout and the insertion into
  the new layout must be done additionally.
*/
void QCPLayout::adoptElement(QCPLayoutElement *el)
{
  if (el)
  {
    el->mParentLayout = this;
    el->setParentLayerable(this);
    el->setParent(this);
    if (!el->parentPlot())
      el->initializeParentPlot(mParentPlot);
    el->layoutChanged();
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed";
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Disassociates \a el from this layout. This is done by setting the \ref QCPLayoutElement::layout
  and the \ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable to zero. The QObject parent is set to the parent
  QCustomPlot.
  
  This method is used by subclass specific methods that remove elements from the layout (e.g. \ref
  take or \ref takeAt). Note that this method only changes properties in \a el. The removal from
  the old layout must be done additionally.
*/
void QCPLayout::releaseElement(QCPLayoutElement *el)
{
  if (el)
  {
    el->mParentLayout = nullptr;
    el->setParentLayerable(nullptr);
    el->setParent(mParentPlot);
    // Note: Don't initializeParentPlot(0) here, because layout element will stay in same parent plot
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed";
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a helper function for the implementation of \ref updateLayout in subclasses.
  
  It calculates the sizes of one-dimensional sections with provided constraints on maximum section
  sizes, minimum section sizes, relative stretch factors and the final total size of all sections.
  
  The QVector entries refer to the sections. Thus all QVectors must have the same size.
  
  \a maxSizes gives the maximum allowed size of each section. If there shall be no maximum size
  imposed, set all vector values to Qt's QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.
  
  \a minSizes gives the minimum allowed size of each section. If there shall be no minimum size
  imposed, set all vector values to zero. If the \a minSizes entries add up to a value greater than
  \a totalSize, sections will be scaled smaller than the proposed minimum sizes. (In other words,
  not exceeding the allowed total size is taken to be more important than not going below minimum
  section sizes.)
  
  \a stretchFactors give the relative proportions of the sections to each other. If all sections
  shall be scaled equally, set all values equal. If the first section shall be double the size of
  each individual other section, set the first number of \a stretchFactors to double the value of
  the other individual values (e.g. {2, 1, 1, 1}).
  
  \a totalSize is the value that the final section sizes will add up to. Due to rounding, the
  actual sum may differ slightly. If you want the section sizes to sum up to exactly that value,
  you could distribute the remaining difference on the sections.
  
  The return value is a QVector containing the section sizes.
*/
QVector<int> QCPLayout::getSectionSizes(QVector<int> maxSizes, QVector<int> minSizes, QVector<double> stretchFactors, int totalSize) const
{
  if (maxSizes.size() != minSizes.size() || minSizes.size() != stretchFactors.size())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed vector sizes aren't equal:" << maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors;
    return QVector<int>();
  }
  if (stretchFactors.isEmpty())
    return QVector<int>();
  int sectionCount = stretchFactors.size();
  QVector<double> sectionSizes(sectionCount);
  // if provided total size is forced smaller than total minimum size, ignore minimum sizes (squeeze sections):
  int minSizeSum = 0;
  for (int i=0; i<sectionCount; ++i)
    minSizeSum += minSizes.at(i);
  if (totalSize < minSizeSum)
  {
    // new stretch factors are minimum sizes and minimum sizes are set to zero:
    for (int i=0; i<sectionCount; ++i)
    {
      stretchFactors[i] = minSizes.at(i);
      minSizes[i] = 0;
    }
  }
  
  QList<int> minimumLockedSections;
  QList<int> unfinishedSections;
  for (int i=0; i<sectionCount; ++i)
    unfinishedSections.append(i);
  double freeSize = totalSize;
  
  int outerIterations = 0;
  while (!unfinishedSections.isEmpty() && outerIterations < sectionCount*2) // the iteration check ist just a failsafe in case something really strange happens
  {
    ++outerIterations;
    int innerIterations = 0;
    while (!unfinishedSections.isEmpty() && innerIterations < sectionCount*2) // the iteration check ist just a failsafe in case something really strange happens
    {
      ++innerIterations;
      // find section that hits its maximum next:
      int nextId = -1;
      double nextMax = 1e12;
      foreach (int secId, unfinishedSections)
      {
        double hitsMaxAt = (maxSizes.at(secId)-sectionSizes.at(secId))/stretchFactors.at(secId);
        if (hitsMaxAt < nextMax)
        {
          nextMax = hitsMaxAt;
          nextId = secId;
        }
      }
      // check if that maximum is actually within the bounds of the total size (i.e. can we stretch all remaining sections so far that the found section
      // actually hits its maximum, without exceeding the total size when we add up all sections)
      double stretchFactorSum = 0;
      foreach (int secId, unfinishedSections)
        stretchFactorSum += stretchFactors.at(secId);
      double nextMaxLimit = freeSize/stretchFactorSum;
      if (nextMax < nextMaxLimit) // next maximum is actually hit, move forward to that point and fix the size of that section
      {
        foreach (int secId, unfinishedSections)
        {
          sectionSizes[secId] += nextMax*stretchFactors.at(secId); // increment all sections
          freeSize -= nextMax*stretchFactors.at(secId);
        }
        unfinishedSections.removeOne(nextId); // exclude the section that is now at maximum from further changes
      } else // next maximum isn't hit, just distribute rest of free space on remaining sections
      {
        foreach (int secId, unfinishedSections)
          sectionSizes[secId] += nextMaxLimit*stretchFactors.at(secId); // increment all sections
        unfinishedSections.clear();
      }
    }
    if (innerIterations == sectionCount*2)
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Exceeded maximum expected inner iteration count, layouting aborted. Input was:" << maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors << totalSize;
    
    // now check whether the resulting section sizes violate minimum restrictions:
    bool foundMinimumViolation = false;
    for (int i=0; i<sectionSizes.size(); ++i)
    {
      if (minimumLockedSections.contains(i))
        continue;
      if (sectionSizes.at(i) < minSizes.at(i)) // section violates minimum
      {
        sectionSizes[i] = minSizes.at(i); // set it to minimum
        foundMinimumViolation = true; // make sure we repeat the whole optimization process
        minimumLockedSections.append(i);
      }
    }
    if (foundMinimumViolation)
    {
      freeSize = totalSize;
      for (int i=0; i<sectionCount; ++i)
      {
        if (!minimumLockedSections.contains(i)) // only put sections that haven't hit their minimum back into the pool
          unfinishedSections.append(i);
        else
          freeSize -= sectionSizes.at(i); // remove size of minimum locked sections from available space in next round
      }
      // reset all section sizes to zero that are in unfinished sections (all others have been set to their minimum):
      foreach (int secId, unfinishedSections)
        sectionSizes[secId] = 0;
    }
  }
  if (outerIterations == sectionCount*2)
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Exceeded maximum expected outer iteration count, layouting aborted. Input was:" << maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors << totalSize;
  
  QVector<int> result(sectionCount);
  for (int i=0; i<sectionCount; ++i)
    result[i] = qRound(sectionSizes.at(i));
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a helper function for the implementation of subclasses.
  
  It returns the minimum size that should finally be used for the outer rect of the passed layout
  element \a el.
  
  It takes into account whether a manual minimum size is set (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize), which size constraint is set (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect), as well as the minimum size hint, if no manual minimum
  size was set (\ref QCPLayoutElement::minimumOuterSizeHint).
*/
QSize QCPLayout::getFinalMinimumOuterSize(const QCPLayoutElement *el)
{
  QSize minOuterHint = el->minimumOuterSizeHint();
  QSize minOuter = el->minimumSize(); // depending on sizeConstraitRect this might be with respect to inner rect, so possibly add margins in next four lines (preserving unset minimum of 0)
  if (minOuter.width() > 0 && el->sizeConstraintRect() == QCPLayoutElement::scrInnerRect)
    minOuter.rwidth() += el->margins().left() + el->margins().right();
  if (minOuter.height() > 0 && el->sizeConstraintRect() == QCPLayoutElement::scrInnerRect)
    minOuter.rheight() += el->margins().top() + el->margins().bottom();
  
  return {minOuter.width() > 0 ? minOuter.width() : minOuterHint.width(),
               minOuter.height() > 0 ? minOuter.height() : minOuterHint.height()};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a helper function for the implementation of subclasses.
  
  It returns the maximum size that should finally be used for the outer rect of the passed layout
  element \a el.
  
  It takes into account whether a manual maximum size is set (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), which size constraint is set (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect), as well as the maximum size hint, if no manual maximum
  size was set (\ref QCPLayoutElement::maximumOuterSizeHint).
*/
QSize QCPLayout::getFinalMaximumOuterSize(const QCPLayoutElement *el)
{
  QSize maxOuterHint = el->maximumOuterSizeHint();
  QSize maxOuter = el->maximumSize(); // depending on sizeConstraitRect this might be with respect to inner rect, so possibly add margins in next four lines (preserving unset maximum of QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
  if (maxOuter.width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX && el->sizeConstraintRect() == QCPLayoutElement::scrInnerRect)
    maxOuter.rwidth() += el->margins().left() + el->margins().right();
  if (maxOuter.height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX && el->sizeConstraintRect() == QCPLayoutElement::scrInnerRect)
    maxOuter.rheight() += el->margins().top() + el->margins().bottom();
  
  return {maxOuter.width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? maxOuter.width() : maxOuterHint.width(),
               maxOuter.height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? maxOuter.height() : maxOuterHint.height()};
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutGrid
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLayoutGrid
  \brief A layout that arranges child elements in a grid
 
  Elements are laid out in a grid with configurable stretch factors (\ref setColumnStretchFactor,
  \ref setRowStretchFactor) and spacing (\ref setColumnSpacing, \ref setRowSpacing).
 
  Elements can be added to cells via \ref addElement. The grid is expanded if the specified row or
  column doesn't exist yet. Whether a cell contains a valid layout element can be checked with \ref
  hasElement, that element can be retrieved with \ref element. If rows and columns that only have
  empty cells shall be removed, call \ref simplify. Removal of elements is either done by just
  adding the element to a different layout or by using the QCPLayout interface \ref take or \ref
  remove.
 
  If you use \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement*) without explicit parameters for \a row and \a
  column, the grid layout will choose the position according to the current \ref setFillOrder and
  the wrapping (\ref setWrap).
 
  Row and column insertion can be performed with \ref insertRow and \ref insertColumn.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn int QCPLayoutGrid::rowCount() const
 
  Returns the number of rows in the layout.
 
  \see columnCount
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPLayoutGrid::columnCount() const
 
  Returns the number of columns in the layout.
 
  \see rowCount
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an instance of QCPLayoutGrid and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutGrid::QCPLayoutGrid() :
  mColumnSpacing(5),
  mRowSpacing(5),
  mWrap(0),
  mFillOrder(foColumnsFirst)
{
}
 
QCPLayoutGrid::~QCPLayoutGrid()
{
  // clear all child layout elements. This is important because only the specific layouts know how
  // to handle removing elements (clear calls virtual removeAt method to do that).
  clear();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the element in the cell in \a row and \a column.
  
  Returns \c nullptr if either the row/column is invalid or if the cell is empty. In those cases, a
  qDebug message is printed. To check whether a cell exists and isn't empty, use \ref hasElement.
  
  \see addElement, hasElement
*/
QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutGrid::element(int row, int column) const
{
  if (row >= 0 && row < mElements.size())
  {
    if (column >= 0 && column < mElements.first().size())
    {
      if (QCPLayoutElement *result = mElements.at(row).at(column))
        return result;
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Requested cell is empty. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
  return nullptr;
}
 
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds the \a element to cell with \a row and \a column. If \a element is already in a layout, it
  is first removed from there. If \a row or \a column don't exist yet, the layout is expanded
  accordingly.
 
  Returns true if the element was added successfully, i.e. if the cell at \a row and \a column
  didn't already have an element.
 
  Use the overload of this method without explicit row/column index to place the element according
  to the configured fill order and wrapping settings.
 
  \see element, hasElement, take, remove
*/
bool QCPLayoutGrid::addElement(int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (!hasElement(row, column))
  {
    if (element && element->layout()) // remove from old layout first
      element->layout()->take(element);
    expandTo(row+1, column+1);
    mElements[row][column] = element;
    if (element)
      adoptElement(element);
    return true;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "There is already an element in the specified row/column:" << row << column;
  return false;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds the \a element to the next empty cell according to the current fill order (\ref
  setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap). If \a element is already in a layout, it is first
  removed from there. If necessary, the layout is expanded to hold the new element.
 
  Returns true if the element was added successfully.
 
  \see setFillOrder, setWrap, element, hasElement, take, remove
*/
bool QCPLayoutGrid::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  int rowIndex = 0;
  int colIndex = 0;
  if (mFillOrder == foColumnsFirst)
  {
    while (hasElement(rowIndex, colIndex))
    {
      ++colIndex;
      if (colIndex >= mWrap && mWrap > 0)
      {
        colIndex = 0;
        ++rowIndex;
      }
    }
  } else
  {
    while (hasElement(rowIndex, colIndex))
    {
      ++rowIndex;
      if (rowIndex >= mWrap && mWrap > 0)
      {
        rowIndex = 0;
        ++colIndex;
      }
    }
  }
  return addElement(rowIndex, colIndex, element);
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether the cell at \a row and \a column exists and contains a valid element, i.e. isn't
  empty.
  
  \see element
*/
bool QCPLayoutGrid::hasElement(int row, int column)
{
  if (row >= 0 && row < rowCount() && column >= 0 && column < columnCount())
    return mElements.at(row).at(column);
  else
    return false;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the stretch \a factor of \a column.
  
  Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond
  their minimum and maximum widths/heights, regardless of the stretch factor. (see \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize, \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect.)
  
  The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
  
  \see setColumnStretchFactors, setRowStretchFactor
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactor(int column, double factor)
{
  if (column >= 0 && column < columnCount())
  {
    if (factor > 0)
      mColumnStretchFactors[column] = factor;
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column:" << column;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the stretch \a factors of all columns. \a factors must have the size \ref columnCount.
  
  Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond
  their minimum and maximum widths/heights, regardless of the stretch factor. (see \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize, \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect.)
  
  The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
  
  \see setColumnStretchFactor, setRowStretchFactors
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactors(const QList<double> &factors)
{
  if (factors.size() == mColumnStretchFactors.size())
  {
    mColumnStretchFactors = factors;
    for (int i=0; i<mColumnStretchFactors.size(); ++i)
    {
      if (mColumnStretchFactors.at(i) <= 0)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << mColumnStretchFactors.at(i);
        mColumnStretchFactors[i] = 1;
      }
    }
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Column count not equal to passed stretch factor count:" << factors;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the stretch \a factor of \a row.
  
  Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond
  their minimum and maximum widths/heights, regardless of the stretch factor. (see \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize, \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect.)
  
  The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
  
  \see setColumnStretchFactors, setRowStretchFactor
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowStretchFactor(int row, double factor)
{
  if (row >= 0 && row < rowCount())
  {
    if (factor > 0)
      mRowStretchFactors[row] = factor;
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row:" << row;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the stretch \a factors of all rows. \a factors must have the size \ref rowCount.
  
  Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond
  their minimum and maximum widths/heights, regardless of the stretch factor. (see \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize, \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setSizeConstraintRect.)
  
  The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
  
  \see setRowStretchFactor, setColumnStretchFactors
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowStretchFactors(const QList<double> &factors)
{
  if (factors.size() == mRowStretchFactors.size())
  {
    mRowStretchFactors = factors;
    for (int i=0; i<mRowStretchFactors.size(); ++i)
    {
      if (mRowStretchFactors.at(i) <= 0)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << mRowStretchFactors.at(i);
        mRowStretchFactors[i] = 1;
      }
    }
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Row count not equal to passed stretch factor count:" << factors;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the gap that is left blank between columns to \a pixels.
  
  \see setRowSpacing
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnSpacing(int pixels)
{
  mColumnSpacing = pixels;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the gap that is left blank between rows to \a pixels.
  
  \see setColumnSpacing
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowSpacing(int pixels)
{
  mRowSpacing = pixels;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the maximum number of columns or rows that are used, before new elements added with \ref
  addElement(QCPLayoutElement*) will start to fill the next row or column, respectively. It depends
  on \ref setFillOrder, whether rows or columns are wrapped.
 
  If \a count is set to zero, no wrapping will ever occur.
  
  If you wish to re-wrap the elements currently in the layout, call \ref setFillOrder with \a
  rearrange set to true (the actual fill order doesn't need to be changed for the rearranging to be
  done).
 
  Note that the method \ref addElement(int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement *element) with
  explicitly stated row and column is not subject to wrapping and can place elements even beyond
  the specified wrapping point.
 
  \see setFillOrder
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setWrap(int count)
{
  mWrap = qMax(0, count);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the filling order and wrapping behaviour that is used when adding new elements with the
  method \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement*).
 
  The specified \a order defines whether rows or columns are filled first. Using \ref setWrap, you
  can control at which row/column count wrapping into the next column/row will occur. If you set it
  to zero, no wrapping will ever occur. Changing the fill order also changes the meaning of the
  linear index used e.g. in \ref elementAt and \ref takeAt. The default fill order for \ref
  QCPLayoutGrid is \ref foColumnsFirst.
 
  If you want to have all current elements arranged in the new order, set \a rearrange to true. The
  elements will be rearranged in a way that tries to preserve their linear index. However, empty
  cells are skipped during build-up of the new cell order, which shifts the succeeding element's
  index. The rearranging is performed even if the specified \a order is already the current fill
  order. Thus this method can be used to re-wrap the current elements.
 
  If \a rearrange is false, the current element arrangement is not changed, which means the
  linear indexes change (because the linear index is dependent on the fill order).
 
  Note that the method \ref addElement(int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement *element) with
  explicitly stated row and column is not subject to wrapping and can place elements even beyond
  the specified wrapping point.
 
  \see setWrap, addElement(QCPLayoutElement*)
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setFillOrder(FillOrder order, bool rearrange)
{
  // if rearranging, take all elements via linear index of old fill order:
  const int elCount = elementCount();
  QVector<QCPLayoutElement*> tempElements;
  if (rearrange)
  {
    tempElements.reserve(elCount);
    for (int i=0; i<elCount; ++i)
    {
      if (elementAt(i))
        tempElements.append(takeAt(i));
    }
    simplify();
  }
  // change fill order as requested:
  mFillOrder = order;
  // if rearranging, re-insert via linear index according to new fill order:
  if (rearrange)
  {
    foreach (QCPLayoutElement *tempElement, tempElements)
      addElement(tempElement);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Expands the layout to have \a newRowCount rows and \a newColumnCount columns. So the last valid
  row index will be \a newRowCount-1, the last valid column index will be \a newColumnCount-1.
  
  If the current column/row count is already larger or equal to \a newColumnCount/\a newRowCount,
  this function does nothing in that dimension.
  
  Newly created cells are empty, new rows and columns have the stretch factor 1.
  
  Note that upon a call to \ref addElement, the layout is expanded automatically to contain the
  specified row and column, using this function.
  
  \see simplify
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::expandTo(int newRowCount, int newColumnCount)
{
  // add rows as necessary:
  while (rowCount() < newRowCount)
  {
    mElements.append(QList<QCPLayoutElement*>());
    mRowStretchFactors.append(1);
  }
  // go through rows and expand columns as necessary:
  int newColCount = qMax(columnCount(), newColumnCount);
  for (int i=0; i<rowCount(); ++i)
  {
    while (mElements.at(i).size() < newColCount)
      mElements[i].append(nullptr);
  }
  while (mColumnStretchFactors.size() < newColCount)
    mColumnStretchFactors.append(1);
}
 
/*!
  Inserts a new row with empty cells at the row index \a newIndex. Valid values for \a newIndex
  range from 0 (inserts a row at the top) to \a rowCount (appends a row at the bottom).
  
  \see insertColumn
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::insertRow(int newIndex)
{
  if (mElements.isEmpty() || mElements.first().isEmpty()) // if grid is completely empty, add first cell
  {
    expandTo(1, 1);
    return;
  }
  
  if (newIndex < 0)
    newIndex = 0;
  if (newIndex > rowCount())
    newIndex = rowCount();
  
  mRowStretchFactors.insert(newIndex, 1);
  QList<QCPLayoutElement*> newRow;
  for (int col=0; col<columnCount(); ++col)
    newRow.append(nullptr);
  mElements.insert(newIndex, newRow);
}
 
/*!
  Inserts a new column with empty cells at the column index \a newIndex. Valid values for \a
  newIndex range from 0 (inserts a column at the left) to \a columnCount (appends a column at the
  right).
  
  \see insertRow
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::insertColumn(int newIndex)
{
  if (mElements.isEmpty() || mElements.first().isEmpty()) // if grid is completely empty, add first cell
  {
    expandTo(1, 1);
    return;
  }
  
  if (newIndex < 0)
    newIndex = 0;
  if (newIndex > columnCount())
    newIndex = columnCount();
  
  mColumnStretchFactors.insert(newIndex, 1);
  for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
    mElements[row].insert(newIndex, nullptr);
}
 
/*!
  Converts the given \a row and \a column to the linear index used by some methods of \ref
  QCPLayoutGrid and \ref QCPLayout.
 
  The way the cells are indexed depends on \ref setFillOrder. If it is \ref foRowsFirst, the
  indices increase left to right and then top to bottom. If it is \ref foColumnsFirst, the indices
  increase top to bottom and then left to right.
 
  For the returned index to be valid, \a row and \a column must be valid indices themselves, i.e.
  greater or equal to zero and smaller than the current \ref rowCount/\ref columnCount.
 
  \see indexToRowCol
*/
int QCPLayoutGrid::rowColToIndex(int row, int column) const
{
  if (row >= 0 && row < rowCount())
  {
    if (column >= 0 && column < columnCount())
    {
      switch (mFillOrder)
      {
        case foRowsFirst: return column*rowCount() + row;
        case foColumnsFirst: return row*columnCount() + column;
      }
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "row index out of bounds:" << row;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "column index out of bounds:" << column;
  return 0;
}
 
/*!
  Converts the linear index to row and column indices and writes the result to \a row and \a
  column.
 
  The way the cells are indexed depends on \ref setFillOrder. If it is \ref foRowsFirst, the
  indices increase left to right and then top to bottom. If it is \ref foColumnsFirst, the indices
  increase top to bottom and then left to right.
 
  If there are no cells (i.e. column or row count is zero), sets \a row and \a column to -1.
 
  For the retrieved \a row and \a column to be valid, the passed \a index must be valid itself,
  i.e. greater or equal to zero and smaller than the current \ref elementCount.
 
  \see rowColToIndex
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::indexToRowCol(int index, int &row, int &column) const
{
  row = -1;
  column = -1;
  const int nCols = columnCount();
  const int nRows = rowCount();
  if (nCols == 0 || nRows == 0)
    return;
  if (index < 0 || index >= elementCount())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return;
  }
  
  switch (mFillOrder)
  {
    case foRowsFirst:
    {
      column = index / nRows;
      row = index % nRows;
      break;
    }
    case foColumnsFirst:
    {
      row = index / nCols;
      column = index % nCols;
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLayoutGrid::updateLayout()
{
  QVector<int> minColWidths, minRowHeights, maxColWidths, maxRowHeights;
  getMinimumRowColSizes(&minColWidths, &minRowHeights);
  getMaximumRowColSizes(&maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights);
  
  int totalRowSpacing = (rowCount()-1) * mRowSpacing;
  int totalColSpacing = (columnCount()-1) * mColumnSpacing;
  QVector<int> colWidths = getSectionSizes(maxColWidths, minColWidths, mColumnStretchFactors.toVector(), mRect.width()-totalColSpacing);
  QVector<int> rowHeights = getSectionSizes(maxRowHeights, minRowHeights, mRowStretchFactors.toVector(), mRect.height()-totalRowSpacing);
  
  // go through cells and set rects accordingly:
  int yOffset = mRect.top();
  for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
  {
    if (row > 0)
      yOffset += rowHeights.at(row-1)+mRowSpacing;
    int xOffset = mRect.left();
    for (int col=0; col<columnCount(); ++col)
    {
      if (col > 0)
        xOffset += colWidths.at(col-1)+mColumnSpacing;
      if (mElements.at(row).at(col))
        mElements.at(row).at(col)->setOuterRect(QRect(xOffset, yOffset, colWidths.at(col), rowHeights.at(row)));
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  \seebaseclassmethod
 
  Note that the association of the linear \a index to the row/column based cells depends on the
  current setting of \ref setFillOrder.
 
  \see rowColToIndex
*/
QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutGrid::elementAt(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < elementCount())
  {
    int row, col;
    indexToRowCol(index, row, col);
    return mElements.at(row).at(col);
  } else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  \seebaseclassmethod
 
  Note that the association of the linear \a index to the row/column based cells depends on the
  current setting of \ref setFillOrder.
 
  \see rowColToIndex
*/
QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutGrid::takeAt(int index)
{
  if (QCPLayoutElement *el = elementAt(index))
  {
    releaseElement(el);
    int row, col;
    indexToRowCol(index, row, col);
    mElements[row][col] = nullptr;
    return el;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
bool QCPLayoutGrid::take(QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (element)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<elementCount(); ++i)
    {
      if (elementAt(i) == element)
      {
        takeAt(i);
        return true;
      }
    }
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Element not in this layout, couldn't take";
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't take nullptr element";
  return false;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayoutGrid::elements(bool recursive) const
{
  QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
  const int elCount = elementCount();
#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0)
  result.reserve(elCount);
#endif
  for (int i=0; i<elCount; ++i)
    result.append(elementAt(i));
  if (recursive)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<elCount; ++i)
    {
      if (result.at(i))
        result << result.at(i)->elements(recursive);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Simplifies the layout by collapsing rows and columns which only contain empty cells.
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::simplify()
{
  // remove rows with only empty cells:
  for (int row=rowCount()-1; row>=0; --row)
  {
    bool hasElements = false;
    for (int col=0; col<columnCount(); ++col)
    {
      if (mElements.at(row).at(col))
      {
        hasElements = true;
        break;
      }
    }
    if (!hasElements)
    {
      mRowStretchFactors.removeAt(row);
      mElements.removeAt(row);
      if (mElements.isEmpty()) // removed last element, also remove stretch factor (wouldn't happen below because also columnCount changed to 0 now)
        mColumnStretchFactors.clear();
    }
  }
  
  // remove columns with only empty cells:
  for (int col=columnCount()-1; col>=0; --col)
  {
    bool hasElements = false;
    for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
    {
      if (mElements.at(row).at(col))
      {
        hasElements = true;
        break;
      }
    }
    if (!hasElements)
    {
      mColumnStretchFactors.removeAt(col);
      for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
        mElements[row].removeAt(col);
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPLayoutGrid::minimumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  QVector<int> minColWidths, minRowHeights;
  getMinimumRowColSizes(&minColWidths, &minRowHeights);
  QSize result(0, 0);
  foreach (int w, minColWidths)
    result.rwidth() += w;
  foreach (int h, minRowHeights)
    result.rheight() += h;
  result.rwidth() += qMax(0, columnCount()-1) * mColumnSpacing;
  result.rheight() += qMax(0, rowCount()-1) * mRowSpacing;
  result.rwidth() += mMargins.left()+mMargins.right();
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPLayoutGrid::maximumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  QVector<int> maxColWidths, maxRowHeights;
  getMaximumRowColSizes(&maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights);
  
  QSize result(0, 0);
  foreach (int w, maxColWidths)
    result.setWidth(qMin(result.width()+w, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX));
  foreach (int h, maxRowHeights)
    result.setHeight(qMin(result.height()+h, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX));
  result.rwidth() += qMax(0, columnCount()-1) * mColumnSpacing;
  result.rheight() += qMax(0, rowCount()-1) * mRowSpacing;
  result.rwidth() += mMargins.left()+mMargins.right();
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  if (result.height() > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
    result.setHeight(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
  if (result.width() > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
    result.setWidth(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Places the minimum column widths and row heights into \a minColWidths and \a minRowHeights
  respectively.
  
  The minimum height of a row is the largest minimum height of any element's outer rect in that
  row. The minimum width of a column is the largest minimum width of any element's outer rect in
  that column.
  
  This is a helper function for \ref updateLayout.
  
  \see getMaximumRowColSizes
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::getMinimumRowColSizes(QVector<int> *minColWidths, QVector<int> *minRowHeights) const
{
  *minColWidths = QVector<int>(columnCount(), 0);
  *minRowHeights = QVector<int>(rowCount(), 0);
  for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
  {
    for (int col=0; col<columnCount(); ++col)
    {
      if (QCPLayoutElement *el = mElements.at(row).at(col))
      {
        QSize minSize = getFinalMinimumOuterSize(el);
        if (minColWidths->at(col) < minSize.width())
          (*minColWidths)[col] = minSize.width();
        if (minRowHeights->at(row) < minSize.height())
          (*minRowHeights)[row] = minSize.height();
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Places the maximum column widths and row heights into \a maxColWidths and \a maxRowHeights
  respectively.
  
  The maximum height of a row is the smallest maximum height of any element's outer rect in that
  row. The maximum width of a column is the smallest maximum width of any element's outer rect in
  that column.
  
  This is a helper function for \ref updateLayout.
  
  \see getMinimumRowColSizes
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::getMaximumRowColSizes(QVector<int> *maxColWidths, QVector<int> *maxRowHeights) const
{
  *maxColWidths = QVector<int>(columnCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
  *maxRowHeights = QVector<int>(rowCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
  for (int row=0; row<rowCount(); ++row)
  {
    for (int col=0; col<columnCount(); ++col)
    {
      if (QCPLayoutElement *el = mElements.at(row).at(col))
      {
        QSize maxSize = getFinalMaximumOuterSize(el);
        if (maxColWidths->at(col) > maxSize.width())
          (*maxColWidths)[col] = maxSize.width();
        if (maxRowHeights->at(row) > maxSize.height())
          (*maxRowHeights)[row] = maxSize.height();
      }
    }
  }
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutInset
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayoutInset
  \brief A layout that places child elements aligned to the border or arbitrarily positioned
  
  Elements are placed either aligned to the border or at arbitrary position in the area of the
  layout. Which placement applies is controlled with the \ref InsetPlacement (\ref
  setInsetPlacement).
 
  Elements are added via \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment) or
  addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect). If the first method is used, the inset
  placement will default to \ref ipBorderAligned and the element will be aligned according to the
  \a alignment parameter. The second method defaults to \ref ipFree and allows placing elements at
  arbitrary position and size, defined by \a rect.
  
  The alignment or rect can be set via \ref setInsetAlignment or \ref setInsetRect, respectively.
  
  This is the layout that every QCPAxisRect has as \ref QCPAxisRect::insetLayout.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutInset::simplify()
  
  The QCPInsetLayout does not need simplification since it can never have empty cells due to its
  linear index structure. This method does nothing.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates an instance of QCPLayoutInset and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutInset::QCPLayoutInset()
{
}
 
QCPLayoutInset::~QCPLayoutInset()
{
  // clear all child layout elements. This is important because only the specific layouts know how
  // to handle removing elements (clear calls virtual removeAt method to do that).
  clear();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the placement type of the element with the specified \a index.
*/
QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement QCPLayoutInset::insetPlacement(int index) const
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    return mInsetPlacement.at(index);
  else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
    return ipFree;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the alignment of the element with the specified \a index. The alignment only has a
  meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipBorderAligned.
*/
Qt::Alignment QCPLayoutInset::insetAlignment(int index) const
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    return mInsetAlignment.at(index);
  else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 2, 0)
    return nullptr;
#else
    return {};
#endif
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the rect of the element with the specified \a index. The rect only has a
  meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree.
*/
QRectF QCPLayoutInset::insetRect(int index) const
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    return mInsetRect.at(index);
  else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
    return {};
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the inset placement type of the element with the specified \a index to \a placement.
  
  \see InsetPlacement
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetPlacement(int index, QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement placement)
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    mInsetPlacement[index] = placement;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
 
/*!
  If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipBorderAligned, this function
  is used to set the alignment of the element with the specified \a index to \a alignment.
  
  \a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags: Qt::AlignLeft,
  Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter, Qt::AlignBottom. Any other
  alignment flags will be ignored.
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetAlignment(int index, Qt::Alignment alignment)
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    mInsetAlignment[index] = alignment;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
 
/*!
  If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree, this function is used to set the
  position and size of the element with the specified \a index to \a rect.
  
  \a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with rect (0, 0, 1, 1)
  will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be in the top right
  corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout.
  
  Note that the minimum and maximum sizes of the embedded element (\ref
  QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize) are enforced.
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetRect(int index, const QRectF &rect)
{
  if (elementAt(index))
    mInsetRect[index] = rect;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLayoutInset::updateLayout()
{
  for (int i=0; i<mElements.size(); ++i)
  {
    QCPLayoutElement *el = mElements.at(i);
    QRect insetRect;
    QSize finalMinSize = getFinalMinimumOuterSize(el);
    QSize finalMaxSize = getFinalMaximumOuterSize(el);
    if (mInsetPlacement.at(i) == ipFree)
    {
      insetRect = QRect(int( rect().x()+rect().width()*mInsetRect.at(i).x() ),
                        int( rect().y()+rect().height()*mInsetRect.at(i).y() ),
                        int( rect().width()*mInsetRect.at(i).width() ),
                        int( rect().height()*mInsetRect.at(i).height() ));
      if (insetRect.size().width() < finalMinSize.width())
        insetRect.setWidth(finalMinSize.width());
      if (insetRect.size().height() < finalMinSize.height())
        insetRect.setHeight(finalMinSize.height());
      if (insetRect.size().width() > finalMaxSize.width())
        insetRect.setWidth(finalMaxSize.width());
      if (insetRect.size().height() > finalMaxSize.height())
        insetRect.setHeight(finalMaxSize.height());
    } else if (mInsetPlacement.at(i) == ipBorderAligned)
    {
      insetRect.setSize(finalMinSize);
      Qt::Alignment al = mInsetAlignment.at(i);
      if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignLeft)) insetRect.moveLeft(rect().x());
      else if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignRight)) insetRect.moveRight(rect().x()+rect().width());
      else insetRect.moveLeft(int( rect().x()+rect().width()*0.5-finalMinSize.width()*0.5 )); // default to Qt::AlignHCenter
      if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignTop)) insetRect.moveTop(rect().y());
      else if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignBottom)) insetRect.moveBottom(rect().y()+rect().height());
      else insetRect.moveTop(int( rect().y()+rect().height()*0.5-finalMinSize.height()*0.5 )); // default to Qt::AlignVCenter
    }
    mElements.at(i)->setOuterRect(insetRect);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPLayoutInset::elementCount() const
{
  return mElements.size();
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutInset::elementAt(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mElements.size())
    return mElements.at(index);
  else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutInset::takeAt(int index)
{
  if (QCPLayoutElement *el = elementAt(index))
  {
    releaseElement(el);
    mElements.removeAt(index);
    mInsetPlacement.removeAt(index);
    mInsetAlignment.removeAt(index);
    mInsetRect.removeAt(index);
    return el;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
bool QCPLayoutInset::take(QCPLayoutElement *element)
{
  if (element)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<elementCount(); ++i)
    {
      if (elementAt(i) == element)
      {
        takeAt(i);
        return true;
      }
    }
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Element not in this layout, couldn't take";
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't take nullptr element";
  return false;
}
 
/*!
  The inset layout is sensitive to events only at areas where its (visible) child elements are
  sensitive. If the selectTest method of any of the child elements returns a positive number for \a
  pos, this method returns a value corresponding to 0.99 times the parent plot's selection
  tolerance. The inset layout is not selectable itself by default. So if \a onlySelectable is true,
  -1.0 is returned.
  
  See \ref QCPLayerable::selectTest for a general explanation of this virtual method.
*/
double QCPLayoutInset::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable)
    return -1;
  
  foreach (QCPLayoutElement *el, mElements)
  {
    // inset layout shall only return positive selectTest, if actually an inset object is at pos
    // else it would block the entire underlying QCPAxisRect with its surface.
    if (el->realVisibility() && el->selectTest(pos, onlySelectable) >= 0)
      return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/*!
  Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset aligned at the border (\ref
  setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipBorderAligned). The alignment is set to \a
  alignment.
  
  \a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags: Qt::AlignLeft,
  Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter, Qt::AlignBottom. Any other
  alignment flags will be ignored.
  
  \see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect)
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment)
{
  if (element)
  {
    if (element->layout()) // remove from old layout first
      element->layout()->take(element);
    mElements.append(element);
    mInsetPlacement.append(ipBorderAligned);
    mInsetAlignment.append(alignment);
    mInsetRect.append(QRectF(0.6, 0.6, 0.4, 0.4));
    adoptElement(element);
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add nullptr element";
}
 
/*!
  Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset with free positioning/sizing (\ref
  setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipFree). The position and size is set to \a
  rect.
  
  \a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with rect (0, 0, 1, 1)
  will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be in the top right
  corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout.
  
  \see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment)
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect)
{
  if (element)
  {
    if (element->layout()) // remove from old layout first
      element->layout()->take(element);
    mElements.append(element);
    mInsetPlacement.append(ipFree);
    mInsetAlignment.append(Qt::AlignRight|Qt::AlignTop);
    mInsetRect.append(rect);
    adoptElement(element);
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add nullptr element";
}
/* end of 'src/layout.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/lineending.cpp'      */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 11189 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLineEnding
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLineEnding
  \brief Handles the different ending decorations for line-like items
  
  \image html QCPLineEnding.png "The various ending styles currently supported"
  
  For every ending a line-like item has, an instance of this class exists. For example, QCPItemLine
  has two endings which can be set with QCPItemLine::setHead and QCPItemLine::setTail.
 
  The styles themselves are defined via the enum QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle. Most decorations can
  be modified regarding width and length, see \ref setWidth and \ref setLength. The direction of
  the ending decoration (e.g. direction an arrow is pointing) is controlled by the line-like item.
  For example, when both endings of a QCPItemLine are set to be arrows, they will point to opposite
  directions, e.g. "outward". This can be changed by \ref setInverted, which would make the
  respective arrow point inward.
  
  Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify a
  QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle where actually a QCPLineEnding is expected, e.g.
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcplineending-sethead
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with default values (style \ref esNone).
*/
QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding() :
  mStyle(esNone),
  mWidth(8),
  mLength(10),
  mInverted(false)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with the specified values.
*/
QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style, double width, double length, bool inverted) :
  mStyle(style),
  mWidth(width),
  mLength(length),
  mInverted(inverted)
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the style of the ending decoration.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setStyle(QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style)
{
  mStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows, for example, the
  width defines the size perpendicular to the arrow's pointing direction.
  
  \see setLength
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setWidth(double width)
{
  mWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows, for example, the
  length defines the size in pointing direction.
  
  \see setWidth
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setLength(double length)
{
  mLength = length;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the ending decoration shall be inverted. For example, an arrow decoration will point
  inward when \a inverted is set to true.
 
  Note that also the \a width direction is inverted. For symmetrical ending styles like arrows or
  discs, this doesn't make a difference. However, asymmetric styles like \ref esHalfBar are
  affected by it, which can be used to control to which side the half bar points to.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setInverted(bool inverted)
{
  mInverted = inverted;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the maximum pixel radius the ending decoration might cover, starting from the position
  the decoration is drawn at (typically a line ending/\ref QCPItemPosition of an item).
  
  This is relevant for clipping. Only omit painting of the decoration when the position where the
  decoration is supposed to be drawn is farther away from the clipping rect than the returned
  distance.
*/
double QCPLineEnding::boundingDistance() const
{
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case esNone:
      return 0;
      
    case esFlatArrow:
    case esSpikeArrow:
    case esLineArrow:
    case esSkewedBar:
      return qSqrt(mWidth*mWidth+mLength*mLength); // items that have width and length
      
    case esDisc:
    case esSquare:
    case esDiamond:
    case esBar:
    case esHalfBar:
      return mWidth*1.42; // items that only have a width -> width*sqrt(2)
 
  }
  return 0;
}
 
/*!
  Starting from the origin of this line ending (which is style specific), returns the length
  covered by the line ending symbol, in backward direction.
  
  For example, the \ref esSpikeArrow has a shorter real length than a \ref esFlatArrow, even if
  both have the same \ref setLength value, because the spike arrow has an inward curved back, which
  reduces the length along its center axis (the drawing origin for arrows is at the tip).
  
  This function is used for precise, style specific placement of line endings, for example in
  QCPAxes.
*/
double QCPLineEnding::realLength() const
{
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case esNone:
    case esLineArrow:
    case esSkewedBar:
    case esBar:
    case esHalfBar:
      return 0;
      
    case esFlatArrow:
      return mLength;
      
    case esDisc:
    case esSquare:
    case esDiamond:
      return mWidth*0.5;
      
    case esSpikeArrow:
      return mLength*0.8;
  }
  return 0;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the line ending with the specified \a painter at the position \a pos. The direction of the
  line ending is controlled with \a dir.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, const QCPVector2D &dir) const
{
  if (mStyle == esNone)
    return;
  
  QCPVector2D lengthVec = dir.normalized() * mLength*(mInverted ? -1 : 1);
  if (lengthVec.isNull())
    lengthVec = QCPVector2D(1, 0);
  QCPVector2D widthVec = dir.normalized().perpendicular() * mWidth*0.5*(mInverted ? -1 : 1);
  
  QPen penBackup = painter->pen();
  QBrush brushBackup = painter->brush();
  QPen miterPen = penBackup;
  miterPen.setJoinStyle(Qt::MiterJoin); // to make arrow heads spikey
  QBrush brush(painter->pen().color(), Qt::SolidPattern);
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case esNone: break;
    case esFlatArrow:
    {
      QPointF points[3] = {pos.toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF()
                          };
      painter->setPen(miterPen);
      painter->setBrush(brush);
      painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 3);
      painter->setBrush(brushBackup);
      painter->setPen(penBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esSpikeArrow:
    {
      QPointF points[4] = {pos.toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF()
                          };
      painter->setPen(miterPen);
      painter->setBrush(brush);
      painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4);
      painter->setBrush(brushBackup);
      painter->setPen(penBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esLineArrow:
    {
      QPointF points[3] = {(pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(),
                           pos.toPointF(),
                           (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF()
                          };
      painter->setPen(miterPen);
      painter->drawPolyline(points, 3);
      painter->setPen(penBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esDisc:
    {
      painter->setBrush(brush);
      painter->drawEllipse(pos.toPointF(),  mWidth*0.5, mWidth*0.5);
      painter->setBrush(brushBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esSquare:
    {
      QCPVector2D widthVecPerp = widthVec.perpendicular();
      QPointF points[4] = {(pos-widthVecPerp+widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos-widthVecPerp-widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos+widthVecPerp-widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos+widthVecPerp+widthVec).toPointF()
                          };
      painter->setPen(miterPen);
      painter->setBrush(brush);
      painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4);
      painter->setBrush(brushBackup);
      painter->setPen(penBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esDiamond:
    {
      QCPVector2D widthVecPerp = widthVec.perpendicular();
      QPointF points[4] = {(pos-widthVecPerp).toPointF(),
                           (pos-widthVec).toPointF(),
                           (pos+widthVecPerp).toPointF(),
                           (pos+widthVec).toPointF()
                          };
      painter->setPen(miterPen);
      painter->setBrush(brush);
      painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4);
      painter->setBrush(brushBackup);
      painter->setPen(penBackup);
      break;
    }
    case esBar:
    {
      painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec).toPointF(), (pos-widthVec).toPointF());
      break;
    }
    case esHalfBar:
    {
      painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec).toPointF(), pos.toPointF());
      break;
    }
    case esSkewedBar:
    {
      QCPVector2D shift;
      if (!qFuzzyIsNull(painter->pen().widthF()) || painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic))
        shift = dir.normalized()*qMax(qreal(1.0), painter->pen().widthF())*qreal(0.5);
      // if drawing with thick (non-cosmetic) pen, shift bar a little in line direction to prevent line from sticking through bar slightly
      painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec+lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)+shift).toPointF(),
                        (pos-widthVec-lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)+shift).toPointF());
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  \overload
  
  Draws the line ending. The direction is controlled with the \a angle parameter in radians.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, double angle) const
{
  draw(painter, pos, QCPVector2D(qCos(angle), qSin(angle)));
}
/* end of 'src/lineending.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/labelpainter.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 27519   */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLabelPainterPrivate
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLabelPainterPrivate
 
  \internal
  \brief (Private)
  
  This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface.
  
*/
 
const QChar QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolDot(183);
const QChar QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolCross(215);
 
/*!
  Constructs a QCPLabelPainterPrivate instance. Make sure to not create a new
  instance on every redraw, to utilize the caching mechanisms.
  
  the \a parentPlot does not take ownership of the label painter. Make sure
  to delete it appropriately.
*/
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::QCPLabelPainterPrivate(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  mAnchorMode(amRectangular),
  mAnchorSide(asLeft),
  mAnchorReferenceType(artNormal),
  mColor(Qt::black),
  mPadding(0),
  mRotation(0),
  mSubstituteExponent(true),
  mMultiplicationSymbol(QChar(215)),
  mAbbreviateDecimalPowers(false),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot),
  mLabelCache(16)
{
  analyzeFontMetrics();
}
 
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::~QCPLabelPainterPrivate()
{
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setAnchorSide(AnchorSide side)
{
  mAnchorSide = side;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setAnchorMode(AnchorMode mode)
{
  mAnchorMode = mode;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setAnchorReference(const QPointF &pixelPoint)
{
  mAnchorReference = pixelPoint;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setAnchorReferenceType(AnchorReferenceType type)
{
  mAnchorReferenceType = type;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (mFont != font)
  {
    mFont = font;
    analyzeFontMetrics();
  }
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mColor = color;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setPadding(int padding)
{
  mPadding = padding;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setRotation(double rotation)
{
  mRotation = qBound(-90.0, rotation, 90.0);
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setSubstituteExponent(bool enabled)
{
  mSubstituteExponent = enabled;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setMultiplicationSymbol(QChar symbol)
{
  mMultiplicationSymbol = symbol;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setAbbreviateDecimalPowers(bool enabled)
{
  mAbbreviateDecimalPowers = enabled;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::setCacheSize(int labelCount)
{
  mLabelCache.setMaxCost(labelCount);
}
 
int QCPLabelPainterPrivate::cacheSize() const
{
  return mLabelCache.maxCost();
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::drawTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &tickPos, const QString &text)
{
  double realRotation = mRotation;
  
  AnchorSide realSide = mAnchorSide;
  // for circular axes, the anchor side is determined depending on the quadrant of tickPos with respect to mCircularReference
  if (mAnchorMode == amSkewedUpright)
  {
    realSide = skewedAnchorSide(tickPos, 0.2, 0.3); 
  } else if (mAnchorMode == amSkewedRotated) // in this mode every label is individually rotated to match circle tangent
  {
    realSide = skewedAnchorSide(tickPos, 0, 0);
    realRotation += QCPVector2D(tickPos-mAnchorReference).angle()/M_PI*180.0;
    if (realRotation > 90) realRotation -= 180;
    else if (realRotation < -90) realRotation += 180;
  }
  
  realSide = rotationCorrectedSide(realSide, realRotation); // rotation angles may change the true anchor side of the label
  drawLabelMaybeCached(painter, mFont, mColor, getAnchorPos(tickPos), realSide, realRotation, text);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the size ("margin" in QCPAxisRect context, so measured perpendicular to the axis backbone
  direction) needed to fit the axis.
*/
/* TODO: needed?
int QCPLabelPainterPrivate::size() const
{
  int result = 0;
  // get length of tick marks pointing outwards:
  if (!tickPositions.isEmpty())
    result += qMax(0, qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut));
  
  // calculate size of tick labels:
  if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
  {
    QSize tickLabelsSize(0, 0);
    if (!tickLabels.isEmpty())
    {
      for (int i=0; i<tickLabels.size(); ++i)
        getMaxTickLabelSize(tickLabelFont, tickLabels.at(i), &tickLabelsSize);
      result += QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width();
    result += tickLabelPadding;
    }
  }
  
  // calculate size of axis label (only height needed, because left/right labels are rotated by 90 degrees):
  if (!label.isEmpty())
  {
    QFontMetrics fontMetrics(labelFont);
    QRect bounds;
    bounds = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignVCenter, label);
    result += bounds.height() + labelPadding;
  }
 
  return result;
}
*/
 
/*! \internal
  
  Clears the internal label cache. Upon the next \ref draw, all labels will be created new. This
  method is called automatically if any parameters have changed that invalidate the cached labels,
  such as font, color, etc. Usually you won't need to call this method manually.
*/
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::clearCache()
{
  mLabelCache.clear();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a hash that allows uniquely identifying whether the label parameters have changed such
  that the cached labels must be refreshed (\ref clearCache). It is used in \ref draw. If the
  return value of this method hasn't changed since the last redraw, the respective label parameters
  haven't changed and cached labels may be used.
*/
QByteArray QCPLabelPainterPrivate::generateLabelParameterHash() const
{
  QByteArray result;
  result.append(QByteArray::number(mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio()));
  result.append(QByteArray::number(mRotation));
  //result.append(QByteArray::number(int(tickLabelSide))); TODO: check whether this is really a cache-invalidating property
  result.append(QByteArray::number(int(mSubstituteExponent)));
  result.append(QString(mMultiplicationSymbol).toUtf8());
  result.append(mColor.name().toLatin1()+QByteArray::number(mColor.alpha(), 16));
  result.append(mFont.toString().toLatin1());
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws a single tick label with the provided \a painter, utilizing the internal label cache to
  significantly speed up drawing of labels that were drawn in previous calls. The tick label is
  always bound to an axis, the distance to the axis is controllable via \a distanceToAxis in
  pixels. The pixel position in the axis direction is passed in the \a position parameter. Hence
  for the bottom axis, \a position would indicate the horizontal pixel position (not coordinate),
  at which the label should be drawn.
  
  In order to later draw the axis label in a place that doesn't overlap with the tick labels, the
  largest tick label size is needed. This is acquired by passing a \a tickLabelsSize to the \ref
  drawTickLabel calls during the process of drawing all tick labels of one axis. In every call, \a
  tickLabelsSize is expanded, if the drawn label exceeds the value \a tickLabelsSize currently
  holds.
  
  The label is drawn with the font and pen that are currently set on the \a painter. To draw
  superscripted powers, the font is temporarily made smaller by a fixed factor (see \ref
  getTickLabelData).
*/
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::drawLabelMaybeCached(QCPPainter *painter, const QFont &font, const QColor &color, const QPointF &pos, AnchorSide side, double rotation, const QString &text)
{
  // warning: if you change anything here, also adapt getMaxTickLabelSize() accordingly!
  if (text.isEmpty()) return;
  QSize finalSize;
 
  if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching)) // label caching enabled
  {
    QByteArray key = cacheKey(text, color, rotation, side);
    CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.take(QString::fromUtf8(key)); // attempt to take label from cache (don't use object() because we want ownership/prevent deletion during our operations, we re-insert it afterwards)
    if (!cachedLabel)  // no cached label existed, create it
    {
      LabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(font, color, rotation, side, text);
      cachedLabel = createCachedLabel(labelData);
    }
    // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels):
    bool labelClippedByBorder = false;
    /*
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
    {
      if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
        labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x()+cachedLabel->pixmap.width()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.right() || labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x() < viewportRect.left();
      else
        labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y()+cachedLabel->pixmap.height()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.bottom() || labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y() < viewportRect.top();
    }
    */
    if (!labelClippedByBorder)
    {
      painter->drawPixmap(pos+cachedLabel->offset, cachedLabel->pixmap);
      finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio(); // TODO: collect this in a member rect list?
    }
    mLabelCache.insert(QString::fromUtf8(key), cachedLabel);
  } else // label caching disabled, draw text directly on surface:
  {
    LabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(font, color, rotation, side, text);
    // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels):
     bool labelClippedByBorder = false;
     /*
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
    {
      if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
        labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.x()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.width()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left()) > viewportRect.right() || finalPosition.x()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left() < viewportRect.left();
      else
        labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.y()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.height()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top()) > viewportRect.bottom() || finalPosition.y()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top() < viewportRect.top();
    }
    */
    if (!labelClippedByBorder)
    {
      drawText(painter, pos, labelData);
      finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
    }
  }
  /*
  // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
  if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width())
    tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width());
  if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height())
    tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height());
  */
}
 
QPointF QCPLabelPainterPrivate::getAnchorPos(const QPointF &tickPos)
{
  switch (mAnchorMode)
  {
    case amRectangular:
    {
      switch (mAnchorSide)
      {
        case asLeft:   return tickPos+QPointF(mPadding, 0);
        case asRight:  return tickPos+QPointF(-mPadding, 0);
        case asTop:    return tickPos+QPointF(0, mPadding);
        case asBottom: return tickPos+QPointF(0, -mPadding);
        case asTopLeft:     return tickPos+QPointF(mPadding*M_SQRT1_2, mPadding*M_SQRT1_2);
        case asTopRight:    return tickPos+QPointF(-mPadding*M_SQRT1_2, mPadding*M_SQRT1_2);
        case asBottomRight: return tickPos+QPointF(-mPadding*M_SQRT1_2, -mPadding*M_SQRT1_2);
        case asBottomLeft:  return tickPos+QPointF(mPadding*M_SQRT1_2, -mPadding*M_SQRT1_2);
        default: qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid mode for anchor side: " << mAnchorSide; break;
      }
      break;
    }
    case amSkewedUpright:
      // fall through
    case amSkewedRotated:
    {
      QCPVector2D anchorNormal(tickPos-mAnchorReference);
      if (mAnchorReferenceType == artTangent)
        anchorNormal = anchorNormal.perpendicular();
      anchorNormal.normalize();
      return tickPos+(anchorNormal*mPadding).toPointF();
    }
    default: qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid mode for anchor mode: " << mAnchorMode; break;
  }
  return tickPos;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
  
  Draws the tick label specified in \a labelData with \a painter at the pixel positions \a x and \a
  y. This function is used by \ref placeTickLabel to create new tick labels for the cache, or to
  directly draw the labels on the QCustomPlot surface when label caching is disabled, i.e. when
  QCP::phCacheLabels plotting hint is not set.
*/
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::drawText(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &pos, const LabelData &labelData) const
{
  // backup painter settings that we're about to change:
  QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
  QFont oldFont = painter->font();
  QPen oldPen = painter->pen();
  
  // transform painter to position/rotation:
  painter->translate(pos);
  painter->setTransform(labelData.transform, true);
  
  // draw text:
  painter->setFont(labelData.baseFont);
  painter->setPen(QPen(labelData.color));
  if (!labelData.expPart.isEmpty()) // use superscripted exponent typesetting
  {
    painter->drawText(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.basePart);
    if (!labelData.suffixPart.isEmpty())
      painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1+labelData.expBounds.width(), 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.suffixPart);
    painter->setFont(labelData.expFont);
    painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1, 0, labelData.expBounds.width(), labelData.expBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip,  labelData.expPart);
  } else
  {
    painter->drawText(0, 0, labelData.totalBounds.width(), labelData.totalBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, labelData.basePart);
  }
  
  /* Debug code to draw label bounding boxes, baseline, and capheight
  painter->save();
  painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(0, 0, 0, 150)));
  painter->drawRect(labelData.totalBounds);
  const int baseline = labelData.totalBounds.height()-mLetterDescent;
  painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(255, 0, 0, 150)));
  painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, baseline, labelData.totalBounds.width(), baseline));
  painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(0, 0, 255, 150)));
  painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, baseline-mLetterCapHeight, labelData.totalBounds.width(), baseline-mLetterCapHeight));
  painter->restore();
  */
  
  // reset painter settings to what it was before:
  painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
  painter->setFont(oldFont);
  painter->setPen(oldPen);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
  
  Transforms the passed \a text and \a font to a tickLabelData structure that can then be further
  processed by \ref getTickLabelDrawOffset and \ref drawTickLabel. It splits the text into base and
  exponent if necessary (member substituteExponent) and calculates appropriate bounding boxes.
*/
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::LabelData QCPLabelPainterPrivate::getTickLabelData(const QFont &font, const QColor &color, double rotation, AnchorSide side, const QString &text) const
{
  LabelData result;
  result.rotation = rotation;
  result.side = side;
  result.color = color;
  
  // determine whether beautiful decimal powers should be used
  bool useBeautifulPowers = false;
  int ePos = -1; // first index of exponent part, text before that will be basePart, text until eLast will be expPart
  int eLast = -1; // last index of exponent part, rest of text after this will be suffixPart
  if (mSubstituteExponent)
  {
    ePos = text.indexOf(QLatin1Char('e'));
    if (ePos > 0 && text.at(ePos-1).isDigit())
    {
      eLast = ePos;
      while (eLast+1 < text.size() && (text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('+') || text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('-') || text.at(eLast+1).isDigit()))
        ++eLast;
      if (eLast > ePos) // only if also to right of 'e' is a digit/+/- interpret it as beautifiable power
        useBeautifulPowers = true;
    }
  }
  
  // calculate text bounding rects and do string preparation for beautiful decimal powers:
  result.baseFont = font;
  if (result.baseFont.pointSizeF() > 0) // might return -1 if specified with setPixelSize, in that case we can't do correction in next line
    result.baseFont.setPointSizeF(result.baseFont.pointSizeF()+0.05); // QFontMetrics.boundingRect has a bug for exact point sizes that make the results oscillate due to internal rounding
  
  QFontMetrics baseFontMetrics(result.baseFont);
  if (useBeautifulPowers)
  {
    // split text into parts of number/symbol that will be drawn normally and part that will be drawn as exponent:
    result.basePart = text.left(ePos);
    result.suffixPart = text.mid(eLast+1); // also drawn normally but after exponent
    // in log scaling, we want to turn "1*10^n" into "10^n", else add multiplication sign and decimal base:
    if (mAbbreviateDecimalPowers && result.basePart == QLatin1String("1"))
      result.basePart = QLatin1String("10");
    else
      result.basePart += QString(mMultiplicationSymbol) + QLatin1String("10");
    result.expPart = text.mid(ePos+1, eLast-ePos);
    // clip "+" and leading zeros off expPart:
    while (result.expPart.length() > 2 && result.expPart.at(1) == QLatin1Char('0')) // length > 2 so we leave one zero when numberFormatChar is 'e'
      result.expPart.remove(1, 1);
    if (!result.expPart.isEmpty() && result.expPart.at(0) == QLatin1Char('+'))
      result.expPart.remove(0, 1);
    // prepare smaller font for exponent:
    result.expFont = font;
    if (result.expFont.pointSize() > 0)
      result.expFont.setPointSize(result.expFont.pointSize()*0.75);
    else
      result.expFont.setPixelSize(result.expFont.pixelSize()*0.75);
    // calculate bounding rects of base part(s), exponent part and total one:
    result.baseBounds = baseFontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.basePart);
    result.expBounds = QFontMetrics(result.expFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.expPart);
    if (!result.suffixPart.isEmpty())
      result.suffixBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.suffixPart);
    result.totalBounds = result.baseBounds.adjusted(0, 0, result.expBounds.width()+result.suffixBounds.width()+2, 0); // +2 consists of the 1 pixel spacing between base and exponent (see drawTickLabel) and an extra pixel to include AA
  } else // useBeautifulPowers == false
  {
    result.basePart = text;
    result.totalBounds = baseFontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, result.basePart);
  }
  result.totalBounds.moveTopLeft(QPoint(0, 0));
  applyAnchorTransform(result);
  result.rotatedTotalBounds = result.transform.mapRect(result.totalBounds);
  
  return result;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::applyAnchorTransform(LabelData &labelData) const
{
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(labelData.rotation))
    labelData.transform.rotate(labelData.rotation); // rotates effectively clockwise (due to flipped y axis of painter vs widget coordinate system)
  
  // from now on we translate in rotated label-local coordinate system.
  // shift origin of coordinate system to appropriate point on label:
  labelData.transform.translate(0, -labelData.totalBounds.height()+mLetterDescent+mLetterCapHeight); // shifts origin to true top of capital (or number) characters
  
  if (labelData.side == asLeft || labelData.side == asRight) // anchor is centered vertically
    labelData.transform.translate(0, -mLetterCapHeight/2.0);
  else if (labelData.side == asTop || labelData.side == asBottom) // anchor is centered horizontally
    labelData.transform.translate(-labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0, 0);
  
  if (labelData.side == asTopRight || labelData.side == asRight || labelData.side == asBottomRight) // anchor is at right
    labelData.transform.translate(-labelData.totalBounds.width(), 0);
  if (labelData.side == asBottomLeft || labelData.side == asBottom || labelData.side == asBottomRight) // anchor is at bottom (no elseif!)
    labelData.transform.translate(0, -mLetterCapHeight);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Simulates the steps done by \ref placeTickLabel by calculating bounding boxes of the text label
  to be drawn, depending on number format etc. Since only the largest tick label is wanted for the
  margin calculation, the passed \a tickLabelsSize is only expanded, if it's currently set to a
  smaller width/height.
*/
/*
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::getMaxTickLabelSize(const QFont &font, const QString &text,  QSize *tickLabelsSize) const
{
  // note: this function must return the same tick label sizes as the placeTickLabel function.
  QSize finalSize;
  if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && mLabelCache.contains(text)) // label caching enabled and have cached label
  {
    const CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.object(text);
    finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio();
  } else // label caching disabled or no label with this text cached:
  {
    // TODO: LabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(font, text);
    // TODO: finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
  }
  
  // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
  if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width())
    tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width());
  if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height())
    tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height());
}
*/
 
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::CachedLabel *QCPLabelPainterPrivate::createCachedLabel(const LabelData &labelData) const
{
  CachedLabel *result = new CachedLabel;
  
  // allocate pixmap with the correct size and pixel ratio:
  if (!qFuzzyCompare(1.0, mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio()))
  {
    result->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size()*mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio());
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
#  ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_FLOAT
    result->pixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(mParentPlot->devicePixelRatioF());
#  else
    result->pixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(mParentPlot->devicePixelRatio());
#  endif
#endif
  } else
    result->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size());
  result->pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent);
  
  // draw the label into the pixmap
  // offset is between label anchor and topleft of cache pixmap, so pixmap can be drawn at pos+offset to make the label anchor appear at pos.
  // We use rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft() because rotatedTotalBounds is in a coordinate system where the label anchor is at (0, 0)
  result->offset = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft();
  QCPPainter cachePainter(&result->pixmap);
  drawText(&cachePainter, -result->offset, labelData);
  return result;
}
 
QByteArray QCPLabelPainterPrivate::cacheKey(const QString &text, const QColor &color, double rotation, AnchorSide side) const
{
  return text.toUtf8()+
      QByteArray::number(color.red()+256*color.green()+65536*color.blue(), 36)+
      QByteArray::number(color.alpha()+256*int(side), 36)+
      QByteArray::number(int(rotation*100), 36);
}
 
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::AnchorSide QCPLabelPainterPrivate::skewedAnchorSide(const QPointF &tickPos, double sideExpandHorz, double sideExpandVert) const
{
  QCPVector2D anchorNormal = QCPVector2D(tickPos-mAnchorReference);
  if (mAnchorReferenceType == artTangent)
    anchorNormal = anchorNormal.perpendicular();
  const double radius = anchorNormal.length();
  const double sideHorz = sideExpandHorz*radius;
  const double sideVert = sideExpandVert*radius;
  if (anchorNormal.x() > sideHorz)
  {
    if (anchorNormal.y() > sideVert) return asTopLeft;
    else if (anchorNormal.y() < -sideVert) return asBottomLeft;
    else return asLeft;
  } else if (anchorNormal.x() < -sideHorz)
  {
    if (anchorNormal.y() > sideVert) return asTopRight;
    else if (anchorNormal.y() < -sideVert) return asBottomRight;
    else return asRight;
  } else
  {
    if (anchorNormal.y() > 0) return asTop;
    else return asBottom;
  }
  return asBottom; // should never be reached
}
 
QCPLabelPainterPrivate::AnchorSide QCPLabelPainterPrivate::rotationCorrectedSide(AnchorSide side, double rotation) const
{
  AnchorSide result = side;
  const bool rotateClockwise = rotation > 0;
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(rotation))
  {
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(qAbs(rotation), 90)) // avoid graphical collision with anchor tangent (e.g. axis line) when rotating, so change anchor side appropriately:
    {
      if (side == asTop) result = rotateClockwise ? asLeft : asRight;
      else if (side == asBottom) result = rotateClockwise ? asRight : asLeft;
      else if (side == asTopLeft) result = rotateClockwise ? asLeft : asTop;
      else if (side == asTopRight) result = rotateClockwise ? asTop : asRight;
      else if (side == asBottomLeft) result = rotateClockwise ? asBottom : asLeft;
      else if (side == asBottomRight) result = rotateClockwise ? asRight : asBottom;
    } else // for full rotation by +/-90 degrees, other sides are more appropriate for centering on anchor:
    {
      if (side == asLeft) result = rotateClockwise ? asBottom : asTop;
      else if (side == asRight) result = rotateClockwise ? asTop : asBottom;
      else if (side == asTop) result = rotateClockwise ? asLeft : asRight;
      else if (side == asBottom) result = rotateClockwise ? asRight : asLeft;
      else if (side == asTopLeft) result = rotateClockwise ? asBottomLeft : asTopRight;
      else if (side == asTopRight) result = rotateClockwise ? asTopLeft : asBottomRight;
      else if (side == asBottomLeft) result = rotateClockwise ? asBottomRight : asTopLeft;
      else if (side == asBottomRight) result = rotateClockwise ? asTopRight : asBottomLeft;
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
void QCPLabelPainterPrivate::analyzeFontMetrics()
{
  const QFontMetrics fm(mFont);
  mLetterCapHeight = fm.tightBoundingRect(QLatin1String("8")).height(); // this method is slow, that's why we query it only upon font change
  mLetterDescent = fm.descent();
}
/* end of 'src/axis/labelpainter.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axisticker.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 18693 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTicker
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTicker
  \brief The base class tick generator used by QCPAxis to create tick positions and tick labels
  
  Each QCPAxis has an internal QCPAxisTicker (or a subclass) in order to generate tick positions
  and tick labels for the current axis range. The ticker of an axis can be set via \ref
  QCPAxis::setTicker. Since that method takes a <tt>QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker></tt>, multiple
  axes can share the same ticker instance.
  
  This base class generates normal tick coordinates and numeric labels for linear axes. It picks a
  reasonable tick step (the separation between ticks) which results in readable tick labels. The
  number of ticks that should be approximately generated can be set via \ref setTickCount.
  Depending on the current tick step strategy (\ref setTickStepStrategy), the algorithm either
  sacrifices readability to better match the specified tick count (\ref
  QCPAxisTicker::tssMeetTickCount) or relaxes the tick count in favor of better tick steps (\ref
  QCPAxisTicker::tssReadability), which is the default.
  
  The following more specialized axis ticker subclasses are available, see details in the
  respective class documentation:
  
  <center>
  <table>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerFixed</td><td>\image html axisticker-fixed.png</td></tr>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerLog</td><td>\image html axisticker-log.png</td></tr>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerPi</td><td>\image html axisticker-pi.png</td></tr>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerText</td><td>\image html axisticker-text.png</td></tr>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerDateTime</td><td>\image html axisticker-datetime.png</td></tr>
  <tr><td style="text-align:right; padding: 0 1em">QCPAxisTickerTime</td><td>\image html axisticker-time.png
    \image html axisticker-time2.png</td></tr>
  </table>
  </center>
  
  \section axisticker-subclassing Creating own axis tickers
  
  Creating own axis tickers can be achieved very easily by sublassing QCPAxisTicker and
  reimplementing some or all of the available virtual methods.
 
  In the simplest case you might wish to just generate different tick steps than the other tickers,
  so you only reimplement the method \ref getTickStep. If you additionally want control over the
  string that will be shown as tick label, reimplement \ref getTickLabel.
  
  If you wish to have complete control, you can generate the tick vectors and tick label vectors
  yourself by reimplementing \ref createTickVector and \ref createLabelVector. The default
  implementations use the previously mentioned virtual methods \ref getTickStep and \ref
  getTickLabel, but your reimplementations don't necessarily need to do so. For example in the case
  of unequal tick steps, the method \ref getTickStep loses its usefulness and can be ignored.
  
  The sub tick count between major ticks can be controlled with \ref getSubTickCount. Full sub tick
  placement control is obtained by reimplementing \ref createSubTickVector.
  
  See the documentation of all these virtual methods in QCPAxisTicker for detailed information
  about the parameters and expected return values.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTicker::QCPAxisTicker() :
  mTickStepStrategy(tssReadability),
  mTickCount(5),
  mTickOrigin(0)
{
}
 
QCPAxisTicker::~QCPAxisTicker()
{
  
}
 
/*!
  Sets which strategy the axis ticker follows when choosing the size of the tick step. For the
  available strategies, see \ref TickStepStrategy.
*/
void QCPAxisTicker::setTickStepStrategy(QCPAxisTicker::TickStepStrategy strategy)
{
  mTickStepStrategy = strategy;
}
 
/*!
  Sets how many ticks this ticker shall aim to generate across the axis range. Note that \a count
  is not guaranteed to be matched exactly, as generating readable tick intervals may conflict with
  the requested number of ticks.
 
  Whether the readability has priority over meeting the requested \a count can be specified with
  \ref setTickStepStrategy.
*/
void QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount(int count)
{
  if (count > 0)
    mTickCount = count;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "tick count must be greater than zero:" << count;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the mathematical coordinate (or "offset") of the zeroth tick. This tick coordinate is just a
  concept and doesn't need to be inside the currently visible axis range.
  
  By default \a origin is zero, which for example yields ticks {-5, 0, 5, 10, 15,...} when the tick
  step is five. If \a origin is now set to 1 instead, the correspondingly generated ticks would be
  {-4, 1, 6, 11, 16,...}.
*/
void QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin(double origin)
{
  mTickOrigin = origin;
}
 
/*!
  This is the method called by QCPAxis in order to actually generate tick coordinates (\a ticks),
  tick label strings (\a tickLabels) and sub tick coordinates (\a subTicks).
  
  The ticks are generated for the specified \a range. The generated labels typically follow the
  specified \a locale, \a formatChar and number \a precision, however this might be different (or
  even irrelevant) for certain QCPAxisTicker subclasses.
  
  The output parameter \a ticks is filled with the generated tick positions in axis coordinates.
  The output parameters \a subTicks and \a tickLabels are optional (set them to \c nullptr if not
  needed) and are respectively filled with sub tick coordinates, and tick label strings belonging
  to \a ticks by index.
*/
void QCPAxisTicker::generate(const QCPRange &range, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision, QVector<double> &ticks, QVector<double> *subTicks, QVector<QString> *tickLabels)
{
  // generate (major) ticks:
  double tickStep = getTickStep(range);
  ticks = createTickVector(tickStep, range);
  trimTicks(range, ticks, true); // trim ticks to visible range plus one outer tick on each side (incase a subclass createTickVector creates more)
  
  // generate sub ticks between major ticks:
  if (subTicks)
  {
    if (!ticks.isEmpty())
    {
      *subTicks = createSubTickVector(getSubTickCount(tickStep), ticks);
      trimTicks(range, *subTicks, false);
    } else
      *subTicks = QVector<double>();
  }
  
  // finally trim also outliers (no further clipping happens in axis drawing):
  trimTicks(range, ticks, false);
  // generate labels for visible ticks if requested:
  if (tickLabels)
    *tickLabels = createLabelVector(ticks, locale, formatChar, precision);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Takes the entire currently visible axis range and returns a sensible tick step in
  order to provide readable tick labels as well as a reasonable number of tick counts (see \ref
  setTickCount, \ref setTickStepStrategy).
  
  If a QCPAxisTicker subclass only wants a different tick step behaviour than the default
  implementation, it should reimplement this method. See \ref cleanMantissa for a possible helper
  function.
*/
double QCPAxisTicker::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  double exactStep = range.size()/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
  return cleanMantissa(exactStep);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Takes the \a tickStep, i.e. the distance between two consecutive ticks, and returns
  an appropriate number of sub ticks for that specific tick step.
  
  Note that a returned sub tick count of e.g. 4 will split each tick interval into 5 sections.
*/
int QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  int result = 1; // default to 1, if no proper value can be found
  
  // separate integer and fractional part of mantissa:
  double epsilon = 0.01;
  double intPartf;
  int intPart;
  double fracPart = modf(getMantissa(tickStep), &intPartf);
  intPart = int(intPartf);
  
  // handle cases with (almost) integer mantissa:
  if (fracPart < epsilon || 1.0-fracPart < epsilon)
  {
    if (1.0-fracPart < epsilon)
      ++intPart;
    switch (intPart)
    {
      case 1: result = 4; break; // 1.0 -> 0.2 substep
      case 2: result = 3; break; // 2.0 -> 0.5 substep
      case 3: result = 2; break; // 3.0 -> 1.0 substep
      case 4: result = 3; break; // 4.0 -> 1.0 substep
      case 5: result = 4; break; // 5.0 -> 1.0 substep
      case 6: result = 2; break; // 6.0 -> 2.0 substep
      case 7: result = 6; break; // 7.0 -> 1.0 substep
      case 8: result = 3; break; // 8.0 -> 2.0 substep
      case 9: result = 2; break; // 9.0 -> 3.0 substep
    }
  } else
  {
    // handle cases with significantly fractional mantissa:
    if (qAbs(fracPart-0.5) < epsilon) // *.5 mantissa
    {
      switch (intPart)
      {
        case 1: result = 2; break; // 1.5 -> 0.5 substep
        case 2: result = 4; break; // 2.5 -> 0.5 substep
        case 3: result = 4; break; // 3.5 -> 0.7 substep
        case 4: result = 2; break; // 4.5 -> 1.5 substep
        case 5: result = 4; break; // 5.5 -> 1.1 substep (won't occur with default getTickStep from here on)
        case 6: result = 4; break; // 6.5 -> 1.3 substep
        case 7: result = 2; break; // 7.5 -> 2.5 substep
        case 8: result = 4; break; // 8.5 -> 1.7 substep
        case 9: result = 4; break; // 9.5 -> 1.9 substep
      }
    }
    // if mantissa fraction isn't 0.0 or 0.5, don't bother finding good sub tick marks, leave default
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method returns the tick label string as it should be printed under the \a tick coordinate.
  If a textual number is returned, it should respect the provided \a locale, \a formatChar and \a
  precision.
  
  If the returned value contains exponentials of the form "2e5" and beautifully typeset powers is
  enabled in the QCPAxis number format (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberFormat), the exponential part will
  be formatted accordingly using multiplication symbol and superscript during rendering of the
  label automatically.
*/
QString QCPAxisTicker::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  return locale.toString(tick, formatChar.toLatin1(), precision);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a vector containing all coordinates of sub ticks that should be drawn. It generates \a
  subTickCount sub ticks between each tick pair given in \a ticks.
  
  If a QCPAxisTicker subclass needs maximal control over the generated sub ticks, it should
  reimplement this method. Depending on the purpose of the subclass it doesn't necessarily need to
  base its result on \a subTickCount or \a ticks.
*/
QVector<double> QCPAxisTicker::createSubTickVector(int subTickCount, const QVector<double> &ticks)
{
  QVector<double> result;
  if (subTickCount <= 0 || ticks.size() < 2)
    return result;
  
  result.reserve((ticks.size()-1)*subTickCount);
  for (int i=1; i<ticks.size(); ++i)
  {
    double subTickStep = (ticks.at(i)-ticks.at(i-1))/double(subTickCount+1);
    for (int k=1; k<=subTickCount; ++k)
      result.append(ticks.at(i-1) + k*subTickStep);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a vector containing all coordinates of ticks that should be drawn. The default
  implementation generates ticks with a spacing of \a tickStep (mathematically starting at the tick
  step origin, see \ref setTickOrigin) distributed over the passed \a range.
  
  In order for the axis ticker to generate proper sub ticks, it is necessary that the first and
  last tick coordinates returned by this method are just below/above the provided \a range.
  Otherwise the outer intervals won't contain any sub ticks.
  
  If a QCPAxisTicker subclass needs maximal control over the generated ticks, it should reimplement
  this method. Depending on the purpose of the subclass it doesn't necessarily need to base its
  result on \a tickStep, e.g. when the ticks are spaced unequally like in the case of
  QCPAxisTickerLog.
*/
QVector<double> QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range)
{
  QVector<double> result;
  // Generate tick positions according to tickStep:
  qint64 firstStep = qint64(floor((range.lower-mTickOrigin)/tickStep)); // do not use qFloor here, or we'll lose 64 bit precision
  qint64 lastStep = qint64(ceil((range.upper-mTickOrigin)/tickStep)); // do not use qCeil here, or we'll lose 64 bit precision
  int tickcount = int(lastStep-firstStep+1);
  if (tickcount < 0) tickcount = 0;
  result.resize(tickcount);
  for (int i=0; i<tickcount; ++i)
    result[i] = mTickOrigin + (firstStep+i)*tickStep;
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a vector containing all tick label strings corresponding to the tick coordinates provided
  in \a ticks. The default implementation calls \ref getTickLabel to generate the respective
  strings.
  
  It is possible but uncommon for QCPAxisTicker subclasses to reimplement this method, as
  reimplementing \ref getTickLabel often achieves the intended result easier.
*/
QVector<QString> QCPAxisTicker::createLabelVector(const QVector<double> &ticks, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  QVector<QString> result;
  result.reserve(ticks.size());
  foreach (double tickCoord, ticks)
    result.append(getTickLabel(tickCoord, locale, formatChar, precision));
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Removes tick coordinates from \a ticks which lie outside the specified \a range. If \a
  keepOneOutlier is true, it preserves one tick just outside the range on both sides, if present.
  
  The passed \a ticks must be sorted in ascending order.
*/
void QCPAxisTicker::trimTicks(const QCPRange &range, QVector<double> &ticks, bool keepOneOutlier) const
{
  bool lowFound = false;
  bool highFound = false;
  int lowIndex = 0;
  int highIndex = -1;
  
  for (int i=0; i < ticks.size(); ++i)
  {
    if (ticks.at(i) >= range.lower)
    {
      lowFound = true;
      lowIndex = i;
      break;
    }
  }
  for (int i=ticks.size()-1; i >= 0; --i)
  {
    if (ticks.at(i) <= range.upper)
    {
      highFound = true;
      highIndex = i;
      break;
    }
  }
  
  if (highFound && lowFound)
  {
    int trimFront = qMax(0, lowIndex-(keepOneOutlier ? 1 : 0));
    int trimBack = qMax(0, ticks.size()-(keepOneOutlier ? 2 : 1)-highIndex);
    if (trimFront > 0 || trimBack > 0)
      ticks = ticks.mid(trimFront, ticks.size()-trimFront-trimBack);
  } else // all ticks are either all below or all above the range
    ticks.clear();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the coordinate contained in \a candidates which is closest to the provided \a target.
  
  This method assumes \a candidates is not empty and sorted in ascending order.
*/
double QCPAxisTicker::pickClosest(double target, const QVector<double> &candidates) const
{
  if (candidates.size() == 1)
    return candidates.first();
  QVector<double>::const_iterator it = std::lower_bound(candidates.constBegin(), candidates.constEnd(), target);
  if (it == candidates.constEnd())
    return *(it-1);
  else if (it == candidates.constBegin())
    return *it;
  else
    return target-*(it-1) < *it-target ? *(it-1) : *it;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the decimal mantissa of \a input. Optionally, if \a magnitude is not set to zero, it also
  returns the magnitude of \a input as a power of 10.
  
  For example, an input of 142.6 will return a mantissa of 1.426 and a magnitude of 100.
*/
double QCPAxisTicker::getMantissa(double input, double *magnitude) const
{
  const double mag = std::pow(10.0, std::floor(std::log10(input)));
  if (magnitude) *magnitude = mag;
  return input/mag;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a number that is close to \a input but has a clean, easier human readable mantissa. How
  strongly the mantissa is altered, and thus how strong the result deviates from the original \a
  input, depends on the current tick step strategy (see \ref setTickStepStrategy).
*/
double QCPAxisTicker::cleanMantissa(double input) const
{
  double magnitude;
  const double mantissa = getMantissa(input, &magnitude);
  switch (mTickStepStrategy)
  {
    case tssReadability:
    {
      return pickClosest(mantissa, QVector<double>() << 1.0 << 2.0 << 2.5 << 5.0 << 10.0)*magnitude;
    }
    case tssMeetTickCount:
    {
      // this gives effectively a mantissa of 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0
      if (mantissa <= 5.0)
        return int(mantissa*2)/2.0*magnitude; // round digit after decimal point to 0.5
      else
        return int(mantissa/2.0)*2.0*magnitude; // round to first digit in multiples of 2
    }
  }
  return input;
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axisticker.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 18829         */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerDateTime
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerDateTime
  \brief Specialized axis ticker for calendar dates and times as axis ticks
  
  \image html axisticker-datetime.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that correspond to real calendar dates and times. The
  plot axis coordinate is interpreted as Unix Time, so seconds since Epoch (January 1, 1970, 00:00
  UTC). This is also used for example by QDateTime in the <tt>toTime_t()/setTime_t()</tt> methods
  with a precision of one second. Since Qt 4.7, millisecond accuracy can be obtained from QDateTime
  by using <tt>QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0</tt>. The static methods \ref dateTimeToKey
  and \ref keyToDateTime conveniently perform this conversion achieving a precision of one
  millisecond on all Qt versions.
  
  The format of the date/time display in the tick labels is controlled with \ref setDateTimeFormat.
  If a different time spec or time zone shall be used for the tick label appearance, see \ref
  setDateTimeSpec or \ref setTimeZone, respectively.
  
  This ticker produces unequal tick spacing in order to provide intuitive date and time-of-day
  ticks. For example, if the axis range spans a few years such that there is one tick per year,
  ticks will be positioned on 1. January of every year. This is intuitive but, due to leap years,
  will result in slightly unequal tick intervals (visually unnoticeable). The same can be seen in
  the image above: even though the number of days varies month by month, this ticker generates
  ticks on the same day of each month.
  
  If you would like to change the date/time that is used as a (mathematical) starting date for the
  ticks, use the \ref setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin) method overload, which takes a
  QDateTime. If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method, the yearly ticks will end up on 15. July at
  9:45 of every year.
  
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerdatetime-creation
  
  \note If you rather wish to display relative times in terms of days, hours, minutes, seconds and
  milliseconds, and are not interested in the intricacies of real calendar dates with months and
  (leap) years, have a look at QCPAxisTickerTime instead.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerDateTime::QCPAxisTickerDateTime() :
  mDateTimeFormat(QLatin1String("hh:mm:ss\ndd.MM.yy")),
  mDateTimeSpec(Qt::LocalTime),
  mDateStrategy(dsNone)
{
  setTickCount(4);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the format in which dates and times are displayed as tick labels. For details about the \a
  format string, see the documentation of QDateTime::toString().
  
  Typical expressions are
  <table>
    <tr><td>\c d</td><td>The day as a number without a leading zero (1 to 31)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c dd</td><td>The day as a number with a leading zero (01 to 31)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c ddd</td><td>The abbreviated localized day name (e.g. 'Mon' to 'Sun'). Uses the system locale to localize the name, i.e. QLocale::system().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c dddd</td><td>The long localized day name (e.g. 'Monday' to 'Sunday'). Uses the system locale to localize the name, i.e. QLocale::system().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c M</td><td>The month as a number without a leading zero (1 to 12)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c MM</td><td>The month as a number with a leading zero (01 to 12)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c MMM</td><td>The abbreviated localized month name (e.g. 'Jan' to 'Dec'). Uses the system locale to localize the name, i.e. QLocale::system().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c MMMM</td><td>The long localized month name (e.g. 'January' to 'December'). Uses the system locale to localize the name, i.e. QLocale::system().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c yy</td><td>The year as a two digit number (00 to 99)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c yyyy</td><td>The year as a four digit number. If the year is negative, a minus sign is prepended, making five characters.</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c h</td><td>The hour without a leading zero (0 to 23 or 1 to 12 if AM/PM display)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c hh</td><td>The hour with a leading zero (00 to 23 or 01 to 12 if AM/PM display)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c H</td><td>The hour without a leading zero (0 to 23, even with AM/PM display)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c HH</td><td>The hour with a leading zero (00 to 23, even with AM/PM display)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c m</td><td>The minute without a leading zero (0 to 59)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c mm</td><td>The minute with a leading zero (00 to 59)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c s</td><td>The whole second, without any leading zero (0 to 59)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c ss</td><td>The whole second, with a leading zero where applicable (00 to 59)</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c z</td><td>The fractional part of the second, to go after a decimal point, without trailing zeroes (0 to 999). Thus "s.z" reports the seconds to full available (millisecond) precision without trailing zeroes.</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c zzz</td><td>The fractional part of the second, to millisecond precision, including trailing zeroes where applicable (000 to 999).</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c AP or \c A</td><td>Use AM/PM display. A/AP will be replaced by an upper-case version of either QLocale::amText() or QLocale::pmText().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c ap or \c a</td><td>Use am/pm display. a/ap will be replaced by a lower-case version of either QLocale::amText() or QLocale::pmText().</td></tr>
    <tr><td>\c t</td><td>The timezone (for example "CEST")</td></tr>
  </table>
  
  Newlines can be inserted with \c "\n", literal strings (even when containing above expressions)
  by encapsulating them using single-quotes. A literal single quote can be generated by using two
  consecutive single quotes in the format.
  
  \see setDateTimeSpec, setTimeZone
*/
void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setDateTimeFormat(const QString &format)
{
  mDateTimeFormat = format;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the time spec that is used for creating the tick labels from corresponding dates/times.
 
  The default value of QDateTime objects (and also QCPAxisTickerDateTime) is
  <tt>Qt::LocalTime</tt>. However, if the displayed tick labels shall be given in UTC, set \a spec
  to <tt>Qt::UTC</tt>.
  
  Tick labels corresponding to other time zones can be achieved with \ref setTimeZone (which sets
  \a spec to \c Qt::TimeZone internally). Note that if \a spec is afterwards set to not be \c
  Qt::TimeZone again, the \ref setTimeZone setting will be ignored accordingly.
  
  \see setDateTimeFormat, setTimeZone
*/
void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setDateTimeSpec(Qt::TimeSpec spec)
{
  mDateTimeSpec = spec;
}
 
# if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 2, 0)
/*!
  Sets the time zone that is used for creating the tick labels from corresponding dates/times. The
  time spec (\ref setDateTimeSpec) is set to \c Qt::TimeZone.
  
  \see setDateTimeFormat, setTimeZone
*/
void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setTimeZone(const QTimeZone &zone)
{
  mTimeZone = zone;
  mDateTimeSpec = Qt::TimeZone;
}
#endif
 
/*!
  Sets the tick origin (see \ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin) in seconds since Epoch (1. Jan 1970,
  00:00 UTC). For the date time ticker it might be more intuitive to use the overload which
  directly takes a QDateTime, see \ref setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin).
  
  This is useful to define the month/day/time recurring at greater tick interval steps. For
  example, If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method and the tick interval happens to be one tick
  per year, the ticks will end up on 15. July at 9:45 of every year.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setTickOrigin(double origin)
{
  QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin(origin);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the tick origin (see \ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin) as a QDateTime \a origin.
  
  This is useful to define the month/day/time recurring at greater tick interval steps. For
  example, If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method and the tick interval happens to be one tick
  per year, the ticks will end up on 15. July at 9:45 of every year.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin)
{
  setTickOrigin(dateTimeToKey(origin));
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a sensible tick step with intervals appropriate for a date-time-display, such as weekly,
  monthly, bi-monthly, etc.
  
  Note that this tick step isn't used exactly when generating the tick vector in \ref
  createTickVector, but only as a guiding value requiring some correction for each individual tick
  interval. Otherwise this would lead to unintuitive date displays, e.g. jumping between first day
  in the month to the last day in the previous month from tick to tick, due to the non-uniform
  length of months. The same problem arises with leap years.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  double result = range.size()/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
  
  mDateStrategy = dsNone; // leaving it at dsNone means tick coordinates will not be tuned in any special way in createTickVector
  if (result < 1) // ideal tick step is below 1 second -> use normal clean mantissa algorithm in units of seconds
  {
    result = cleanMantissa(result);
  } else if (result < 86400*30.4375*12) // below a year
  {
    result = pickClosest(result, QVector<double>()
                             << 1 << 2.5 << 5 << 10 << 15 << 30 << 60 << 2.5*60 << 5*60 << 10*60 << 15*60 << 30*60 << 60*60 // second, minute, hour range
                             << 3600*2 << 3600*3 << 3600*6 << 3600*12 << 3600*24 // hour to day range
                             << 86400*2 << 86400*5 << 86400*7 << 86400*14 << 86400*30.4375 << 86400*30.4375*2 << 86400*30.4375*3 << 86400*30.4375*6 << 86400*30.4375*12); // day, week, month range (avg. days per month includes leap years)
    if (result > 86400*30.4375-1) // month tick intervals or larger
      mDateStrategy = dsUniformDayInMonth;
    else if (result > 3600*24-1) // day tick intervals or larger
      mDateStrategy = dsUniformTimeInDay;
  } else // more than a year, go back to normal clean mantissa algorithm but in units of years
  {
    const double secondsPerYear = 86400*30.4375*12; // average including leap years
    result = cleanMantissa(result/secondsPerYear)*secondsPerYear;
    mDateStrategy = dsUniformDayInMonth;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a sensible sub tick count with intervals appropriate for a date-time-display, such as weekly,
  monthly, bi-monthly, etc.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
int QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  int result = QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep);
  switch (qRound(tickStep)) // hand chosen subticks for specific minute/hour/day/week/month range (as specified in getTickStep)
  {
    case 5*60: result = 4; break;
    case 10*60: result = 1; break;
    case 15*60: result = 2; break;
    case 30*60: result = 1; break;
    case 60*60: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*2: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*3: result = 2; break;
    case 3600*6: result = 1; break;
    case 3600*12: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*24: result = 3; break;
    case 86400*2: result = 1; break;
    case 86400*5: result = 4; break;
    case 86400*7: result = 6; break;
    case 86400*14: result = 1; break;
    case int(86400*30.4375+0.5): result = 3; break;
    case int(86400*30.4375*2+0.5): result = 1; break;
    case int(86400*30.4375*3+0.5): result = 2; break;
    case int(86400*30.4375*6+0.5): result = 5; break;
    case int(86400*30.4375*12+0.5): result = 3; break;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Generates a date/time tick label for tick coordinate \a tick, based on the currently set format
  (\ref setDateTimeFormat), time spec (\ref setDateTimeSpec), and possibly time zone (\ref
  setTimeZone).
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  Q_UNUSED(precision)
  Q_UNUSED(formatChar)
# if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 2, 0)
  if (mDateTimeSpec == Qt::TimeZone)
    return locale.toString(keyToDateTime(tick).toTimeZone(mTimeZone), mDateTimeFormat);
  else
    return locale.toString(keyToDateTime(tick).toTimeSpec(mDateTimeSpec), mDateTimeFormat);
# else
  return locale.toString(keyToDateTime(tick).toTimeSpec(mDateTimeSpec), mDateTimeFormat);
# endif
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Uses the passed \a tickStep as a guiding value and applies corrections in order to obtain
  non-uniform tick intervals but intuitive tick labels, e.g. falling on the same day of each month.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QVector<double> QCPAxisTickerDateTime::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range)
{
  QVector<double> result = QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(tickStep, range);
  if (!result.isEmpty())
  {
    if (mDateStrategy == dsUniformTimeInDay)
    {
      QDateTime uniformDateTime = keyToDateTime(mTickOrigin); // the time of this datetime will be set for all other ticks, if possible
      QDateTime tickDateTime;
      for (int i=0; i<result.size(); ++i)
      {
        tickDateTime = keyToDateTime(result.at(i));
        tickDateTime.setTime(uniformDateTime.time());
        result[i] = dateTimeToKey(tickDateTime);
      }
    } else if (mDateStrategy == dsUniformDayInMonth)
    {
      QDateTime uniformDateTime = keyToDateTime(mTickOrigin); // this day (in month) and time will be set for all other ticks, if possible
      QDateTime tickDateTime;
      for (int i=0; i<result.size(); ++i)
      {
        tickDateTime = keyToDateTime(result.at(i));
        tickDateTime.setTime(uniformDateTime.time());
        int thisUniformDay = uniformDateTime.date().day() <= tickDateTime.date().daysInMonth() ? uniformDateTime.date().day() : tickDateTime.date().daysInMonth(); // don't exceed month (e.g. try to set day 31 in February)
        if (thisUniformDay-tickDateTime.date().day() < -15) // with leap years involved, date month may jump backwards or forwards, and needs to be corrected before setting day
          tickDateTime = tickDateTime.addMonths(1);
        else if (thisUniformDay-tickDateTime.date().day() > 15) // with leap years involved, date month may jump backwards or forwards, and needs to be corrected before setting day
          tickDateTime = tickDateTime.addMonths(-1);
        tickDateTime.setDate(QDate(tickDateTime.date().year(), tickDateTime.date().month(), thisUniformDay));
        result[i] = dateTimeToKey(tickDateTime);
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  A convenience method which turns \a key (in seconds since Epoch 1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC) into a
  QDateTime object. This can be used to turn axis coordinates to actual QDateTimes.
  
  The accuracy achieved by this method is one millisecond, irrespective of the used Qt version (it
  works around the lack of a QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch in Qt 4.6)
  
  \see dateTimeToKey
*/
QDateTime QCPAxisTickerDateTime::keyToDateTime(double key)
{
# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0)
  return QDateTime::fromTime_t(key).addMSecs((key-(qint64)key)*1000);
# else
  return QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch(qint64(key*1000.0));
# endif
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  A convenience method which turns a QDateTime object into a double value that corresponds to
  seconds since Epoch (1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC). This is the format used as axis coordinates by
  QCPAxisTickerDateTime.
  
  The accuracy achieved by this method is one millisecond, irrespective of the used Qt version (it
  works around the lack of a QDateTime::toMSecsSinceEpoch in Qt 4.6)
  
  \see keyToDateTime
*/
double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::dateTimeToKey(const QDateTime &dateTime)
{
# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0)
  return dateTime.toTime_t()+dateTime.time().msec()/1000.0;
# else
  return dateTime.toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0;
# endif
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  A convenience method which turns a QDate object into a double value that corresponds to seconds
  since Epoch (1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC). This is the format used
  as axis coordinates by QCPAxisTickerDateTime.
  
  The returned value will be the start of the passed day of \a date, interpreted in the given \a
  timeSpec.
  
  \see keyToDateTime
*/
double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::dateTimeToKey(const QDate &date, Qt::TimeSpec timeSpec)
{
# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0)
  return QDateTime(date, QTime(0, 0), timeSpec).toTime_t();
# elif QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 14, 0)
  return QDateTime(date, QTime(0, 0), timeSpec).toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0;
# else
  return date.startOfDay(timeSpec).toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0;
# endif
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertime.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 11745     */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerTime
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerTime
  \brief Specialized axis ticker for time spans in units of milliseconds to days
  
  \image html axisticker-time.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that corresponds to time intervals.
  
  The format of the time display in the tick labels is controlled with \ref setTimeFormat and \ref
  setFieldWidth. The time coordinate is in the unit of seconds with respect to the time coordinate
  zero. Unlike with QCPAxisTickerDateTime, the ticks don't correspond to a specific calendar date
  and time.
  
  The time can be displayed in milliseconds, seconds, minutes, hours and days. Depending on the
  largest available unit in the format specified with \ref setTimeFormat, any time spans above will
  be carried in that largest unit. So for example if the format string is "%m:%s" and a tick at
  coordinate value 7815 (being 2 hours, 10 minutes and 15 seconds) is created, the resulting tick
  label will show "130:15" (130 minutes, 15 seconds). If the format string is "%h:%m:%s", the hour
  unit will be used and the label will thus be "02:10:15". Negative times with respect to the axis
  zero will carry a leading minus sign.
  
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertime-creation
  
  Here is an example of a time axis providing time information in days, hours and minutes. Due to
  the axis range spanning a few days and the wanted tick count (\ref setTickCount), the ticker
  decided to use tick steps of 12 hours:
  
  \image html axisticker-time2.png
  
  The format string for this example is
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertime-creation-2
  
  \note If you rather wish to display calendar dates and times, have a look at QCPAxisTickerDateTime
  instead.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerTime::QCPAxisTickerTime() :
  mTimeFormat(QLatin1String("%h:%m:%s")),
  mSmallestUnit(tuSeconds),
  mBiggestUnit(tuHours)
{
  setTickCount(4);
  mFieldWidth[tuMilliseconds] = 3;
  mFieldWidth[tuSeconds] = 2;
  mFieldWidth[tuMinutes] = 2;
  mFieldWidth[tuHours] = 2;
  mFieldWidth[tuDays] = 1;
  
  mFormatPattern[tuMilliseconds] = QLatin1String("%z");
  mFormatPattern[tuSeconds] = QLatin1String("%s");
  mFormatPattern[tuMinutes] = QLatin1String("%m");
  mFormatPattern[tuHours] = QLatin1String("%h");
  mFormatPattern[tuDays] = QLatin1String("%d");
}
 
/*!
  Sets the format that will be used to display time in the tick labels.
  
  The available patterns are:
  - %%z for milliseconds
  - %%s for seconds
  - %%m for minutes
  - %%h for hours
  - %%d for days
  
  The field width (zero padding) can be controlled for each unit with \ref setFieldWidth.
  
  The largest unit that appears in \a format will carry all the remaining time of a certain tick
  coordinate, even if it overflows the natural limit of the unit. For example, if %%m is the
  largest unit it might become larger than 59 in order to consume larger time values. If on the
  other hand %%h is available, the minutes will wrap around to zero after 59 and the time will
  carry to the hour digit.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerTime::setTimeFormat(const QString &format)
{
  mTimeFormat = format;
  
  // determine smallest and biggest unit in format, to optimize unit replacement and allow biggest
  // unit to consume remaining time of a tick value and grow beyond its modulo (e.g. min > 59)
  mSmallestUnit = tuMilliseconds;
  mBiggestUnit = tuMilliseconds;
  bool hasSmallest = false;
  for (int i = tuMilliseconds; i <= tuDays; ++i)
  {
    TimeUnit unit = static_cast<TimeUnit>(i);
    if (mTimeFormat.contains(mFormatPattern.value(unit)))
    {
      if (!hasSmallest)
      {
        mSmallestUnit = unit;
        hasSmallest = true;
      }
      mBiggestUnit = unit;
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the field widh of the specified \a unit to be \a width digits, when displayed in the tick
  label. If the number for the specific unit is shorter than \a width, it will be padded with an
  according number of zeros to the left in order to reach the field width.
  
  \see setTimeFormat
*/
void QCPAxisTickerTime::setFieldWidth(QCPAxisTickerTime::TimeUnit unit, int width)
{
  mFieldWidth[unit] = qMax(width, 1);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the tick step appropriate for time displays, depending on the provided \a range and the
  smallest available time unit in the current format (\ref setTimeFormat). For example if the unit
  of seconds isn't available in the format, this method will not generate steps (like 2.5 minutes)
  that require sub-minute precision to be displayed correctly.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPAxisTickerTime::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  double result = range.size()/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
  
  if (result < 1) // ideal tick step is below 1 second -> use normal clean mantissa algorithm in units of seconds
  {
    if (mSmallestUnit == tuMilliseconds)
      result = qMax(cleanMantissa(result), 0.001); // smallest tick step is 1 millisecond
    else // have no milliseconds available in format, so stick with 1 second tickstep
      result = 1.0;
  } else if (result < 3600*24) // below a day
  {
    // the filling of availableSteps seems a bit contorted but it fills in a sorted fashion and thus saves a post-fill sorting run
    QVector<double> availableSteps;
    // seconds range:
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds)
      availableSteps << 1;
    if (mSmallestUnit == tuMilliseconds)
      availableSteps << 2.5; // only allow half second steps if milliseconds are there to display it
    else if (mSmallestUnit == tuSeconds)
      availableSteps << 2;
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds)
      availableSteps << 5 << 10 << 15 << 30;
    // minutes range:
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuMinutes)
      availableSteps << 1*60;
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds)
      availableSteps << 2.5*60; // only allow half minute steps if seconds are there to display it
    else if (mSmallestUnit == tuMinutes)
      availableSteps << 2*60;
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuMinutes)
      availableSteps << 5*60 << 10*60 << 15*60 << 30*60;
    // hours range:
    if (mSmallestUnit <= tuHours)
      availableSteps << 1*3600 << 2*3600 << 3*3600 << 6*3600 << 12*3600 << 24*3600;
    // pick available step that is most appropriate to approximate ideal step:
    result = pickClosest(result, availableSteps);
  } else // more than a day, go back to normal clean mantissa algorithm but in units of days
  {
    const double secondsPerDay = 3600*24;
    result = cleanMantissa(result/secondsPerDay)*secondsPerDay;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the sub tick count appropriate for the provided \a tickStep and time displays.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
int QCPAxisTickerTime::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  int result = QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep);
  switch (qRound(tickStep)) // hand chosen subticks for specific minute/hour/day range (as specified in getTickStep)
  {
    case 5*60: result = 4; break;
    case 10*60: result = 1; break;
    case 15*60: result = 2; break;
    case 30*60: result = 1; break;
    case 60*60: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*2: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*3: result = 2; break;
    case 3600*6: result = 1; break;
    case 3600*12: result = 3; break;
    case 3600*24: result = 3; break;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the tick label corresponding to the provided \a tick and the configured format and field
  widths (\ref setTimeFormat, \ref setFieldWidth).
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerTime::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  Q_UNUSED(precision)
  Q_UNUSED(formatChar)
  Q_UNUSED(locale)
  bool negative = tick < 0;
  if (negative) tick *= -1;
  double values[tuDays+1]; // contains the msec/sec/min/... value with its respective modulo (e.g. minute 0..59)
  double restValues[tuDays+1]; // contains the msec/sec/min/... value as if it's the largest available unit and thus consumes the remaining time
  
  restValues[tuMilliseconds] = tick*1000;
  values[tuMilliseconds] = modf(restValues[tuMilliseconds]/1000, &restValues[tuSeconds])*1000;
  values[tuSeconds] = modf(restValues[tuSeconds]/60, &restValues[tuMinutes])*60;
  values[tuMinutes] = modf(restValues[tuMinutes]/60, &restValues[tuHours])*60;
  values[tuHours] = modf(restValues[tuHours]/24, &restValues[tuDays])*24;
  // no need to set values[tuDays] because days are always a rest value (there is no higher unit so it consumes all remaining time)
  
  QString result = mTimeFormat;
  for (int i = mSmallestUnit; i <= mBiggestUnit; ++i)
  {
    TimeUnit iUnit = static_cast<TimeUnit>(i);
    replaceUnit(result, iUnit, qRound(iUnit == mBiggestUnit ? restValues[iUnit] : values[iUnit]));
  }
  if (negative)
    result.prepend(QLatin1Char('-'));
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Replaces all occurrences of the format pattern belonging to \a unit in \a text with the specified
  \a value, using the field width as specified with \ref setFieldWidth for the \a unit.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerTime::replaceUnit(QString &text, QCPAxisTickerTime::TimeUnit unit, int value) const
{
  QString valueStr = QString::number(value);
  while (valueStr.size() < mFieldWidth.value(unit))
    valueStr.prepend(QLatin1Char('0'));
  
  text.replace(mFormatPattern.value(unit), valueStr);
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertime.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 5575       */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerFixed
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerFixed
  \brief Specialized axis ticker with a fixed tick step
  
  \image html axisticker-fixed.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks with a fixed tick step set with \ref setTickStep. It
  is also possible to allow integer multiples and integer powers of the specified tick step with
  \ref setScaleStrategy.
  
  A typical application of this ticker is to make an axis only display integers, by setting the
  tick step of the ticker to 1.0 and the scale strategy to \ref ssMultiples.
  
  Another case is when a certain number has a special meaning and axis ticks should only appear at
  multiples of that value. In this case you might also want to consider \ref QCPAxisTickerPi
  because despite the name it is not limited to only pi symbols/values.
  
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerfixed-creation
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerFixed::QCPAxisTickerFixed() :
  mTickStep(1.0),
  mScaleStrategy(ssNone)
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the fixed tick interval to \a step.
  
  The axis ticker will only use this tick step when generating axis ticks. This might cause a very
  high tick density and overlapping labels if the axis range is zoomed out. Using \ref
  setScaleStrategy it is possible to relax the fixed step and also allow multiples or powers of \a
  step. This will enable the ticker to reduce the number of ticks to a reasonable amount (see \ref
  setTickCount).
*/
void QCPAxisTickerFixed::setTickStep(double step)
{
  if (step > 0)
    mTickStep = step;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "tick step must be greater than zero:" << step;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the specified tick step (\ref setTickStep) is absolutely fixed or whether
  modifications may be applied to it before calculating the finally used tick step, such as
  permitting multiples or powers. See \ref ScaleStrategy for details.
  
  The default strategy is \ref ssNone, which means the tick step is absolutely fixed.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerFixed::setScaleStrategy(QCPAxisTickerFixed::ScaleStrategy strategy)
{
  mScaleStrategy = strategy;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Determines the actually used tick step from the specified tick step and scale strategy (\ref
  setTickStep, \ref setScaleStrategy).
  
  This method either returns the specified tick step exactly, or, if the scale strategy is not \ref
  ssNone, a modification of it to allow varying the number of ticks in the current axis range.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPAxisTickerFixed::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  switch (mScaleStrategy)
  {
    case ssNone:
    {
      return mTickStep;
    }
    case ssMultiples:
    {
      double exactStep = range.size()/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
      if (exactStep < mTickStep)
        return mTickStep;
      else
        return qint64(cleanMantissa(exactStep/mTickStep)+0.5)*mTickStep;
    }
    case ssPowers:
    {
      double exactStep = range.size()/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
      return qPow(mTickStep, int(qLn(exactStep)/qLn(mTickStep)+0.5));
    }
  }
  return mTickStep;
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertext.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 8742      */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerText
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerText
  \brief Specialized axis ticker which allows arbitrary labels at specified coordinates
  
  \image html axisticker-text.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks which can be directly specified by the user as
  coordinates and associated strings. They can be passed as a whole with \ref setTicks or one at a
  time with \ref addTick. Alternatively you can directly access the internal storage via \ref ticks
  and modify the tick/label data there.
  
  This is useful for cases where the axis represents categories rather than numerical values.
  
  If you are updating the ticks of this ticker regularly and in a dynamic fasion (e.g. dependent on
  the axis range), it is a sign that you should probably create an own ticker by subclassing
  QCPAxisTicker, instead of using this one.
  
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertext-creation
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QMap<double, QString> &QCPAxisTickerText::ticks()
  
  Returns a non-const reference to the internal map which stores the tick coordinates and their
  labels.
 
  You can access the map directly in order to add, remove or manipulate ticks, as an alternative to
  using the methods provided by QCPAxisTickerText, such as \ref setTicks and \ref addTick.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerText::QCPAxisTickerText() :
  mSubTickCount(0)
{
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the ticks that shall appear on the axis. The map key of \a ticks corresponds to the axis
  coordinate, and the map value is the string that will appear as tick label.
  
  An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks
  getter.
  
  \see addTicks, addTick, clear
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::setTicks(const QMap<double, QString> &ticks)
{
  mTicks = ticks;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the ticks that shall appear on the axis. The entries of \a positions correspond to the axis
  coordinates, and the entries of \a labels are the respective strings that will appear as tick
  labels.
  
  \see addTicks, addTick, clear
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::setTicks(const QVector<double> &positions, const QVector<QString> &labels)
{
  clear();
  addTicks(positions, labels);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number of sub ticks that shall appear between ticks. For QCPAxisTickerText, there is no
  automatic sub tick count calculation. So if sub ticks are needed, they must be configured with this
  method.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::setSubTickCount(int subTicks)
{
  if (subTicks >= 0)
    mSubTickCount = subTicks;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "sub tick count can't be negative:" << subTicks;
}
 
/*!
  Clears all ticks.
  
  An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks
  getter.
  
  \see setTicks, addTicks, addTick
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::clear()
{
  mTicks.clear();
}
 
/*!
  Adds a single tick to the axis at the given axis coordinate \a position, with the provided tick \a
  label.
  
  \see addTicks, setTicks, clear
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::addTick(double position, const QString &label)
{
  mTicks.insert(position, label);
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided \a ticks to the ones already existing. The map key of \a ticks corresponds to
  the axis coordinate, and the map value is the string that will appear as tick label.
  
  An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks
  getter.
  
  \see addTick, setTicks, clear
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::addTicks(const QMap<double, QString> &ticks)
{
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 15, 0)
  mTicks.unite(ticks);
#else
  mTicks.insert(ticks);
#endif
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided ticks to the ones already existing. The entries of \a positions correspond to
  the axis coordinates, and the entries of \a labels are the respective strings that will appear as
  tick labels.
  
  An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks
  getter.
  
  \see addTick, setTicks, clear
*/
void QCPAxisTickerText::addTicks(const QVector<double> &positions, const QVector<QString> &labels)
{
  if (positions.size() != labels.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed unequal length vectors for positions and labels:" << positions.size() << labels.size();
  int n = qMin(positions.size(), labels.size());
  for (int i=0; i<n; ++i)
    mTicks.insert(positions.at(i), labels.at(i));
}
 
/*!
  Since the tick coordinates are provided externally, this method implementation does nothing.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPAxisTickerText::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  // text axis ticker has manual tick positions, so doesn't need this method
  Q_UNUSED(range)
  return 1.0;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the sub tick count that was configured with \ref setSubTickCount.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
int QCPAxisTickerText::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  Q_UNUSED(tickStep)
  return mSubTickCount;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the tick label which corresponds to the key \a tick in the internal tick storage. Since
  the labels are provided externally, \a locale, \a formatChar, and \a precision are ignored.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerText::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  Q_UNUSED(locale)
  Q_UNUSED(formatChar)
  Q_UNUSED(precision)
  return mTicks.value(tick);
}
 
/*!
  Returns the externally provided tick coordinates which are in the specified \a range. If
  available, one tick above and below the range is provided in addition, to allow possible sub tick
  calculation. The parameter \a tickStep is ignored.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QVector<double> QCPAxisTickerText::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range)
{
  Q_UNUSED(tickStep)
  QVector<double> result;
  if (mTicks.isEmpty())
    return result;
 
  const QMap<double, QString> constTicks(mTicks);
  
  QMap<double, QString>::const_iterator start = constTicks.lowerBound(range.lower);
  QMap<double, QString>::const_iterator end = constTicks.upperBound(range.upper);
  // this method should try to give one tick outside of range so proper subticks can be generated:
  if (start != mTicks.constBegin()) --start;
  if (end != mTicks.constEnd()) ++end;
  for (QMap<double, QString>::const_iterator it = start; it != end; ++it)
    result.append(it.key());
  
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertext.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerpi.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 11177   */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerPi
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerPi
  \brief Specialized axis ticker to display ticks in units of an arbitrary constant, for example pi
  
  \image html axisticker-pi.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that are expressed with respect to a given symbolic
  constant with a numerical value specified with \ref setPiValue and an appearance in the tick
  labels specified with \ref setPiSymbol.
  
  Ticks may be generated at fractions of the symbolic constant. How these fractions appear in the
  tick label can be configured with \ref setFractionStyle.
  
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerpi-creation
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerPi::QCPAxisTickerPi() :
  mPiSymbol(QLatin1String(" ")+QChar(0x03C0)),
  mPiValue(M_PI),
  mPeriodicity(0),
  mFractionStyle(fsUnicodeFractions),
  mPiTickStep(0)
{
  setTickCount(4);
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the symbol part (which is always a suffix to the number) shall appear in the axis tick
  label.
  
  If a space shall appear between the number and the symbol, make sure the space is contained in \a
  symbol.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPiSymbol(QString symbol)
{
  mPiSymbol = symbol;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the numerical value that the symbolic constant has.
 
  This will be used to place the appropriate fractions of the symbol at the respective axis
  coordinates.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPiValue(double pi)
{
  mPiValue = pi;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis labels shall appear periodicly and if so, at which multiplicity of the
  symbolic constant.
  
  To disable periodicity, set \a multiplesOfPi to zero.
  
  For example, an axis that identifies 0 with 2pi would set \a multiplesOfPi to two.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPeriodicity(int multiplesOfPi)
{
  mPeriodicity = qAbs(multiplesOfPi);
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant is displayed in tick
  labels. See \ref FractionStyle for the various options.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerPi::setFractionStyle(QCPAxisTickerPi::FractionStyle style)
{
  mFractionStyle = style;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the tick step, using the constant's value (\ref setPiValue) as base unit. In consequence
  the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant is made to have a readable
  mantissa.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPAxisTickerPi::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range)
{
  mPiTickStep = range.size()/mPiValue/double(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers
  mPiTickStep = cleanMantissa(mPiTickStep);
  return mPiTickStep*mPiValue;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the sub tick count, using the constant's value (\ref setPiValue) as base unit. In
  consequence the sub ticks divide the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant
  reasonably, and not the total tick coordinate.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
int QCPAxisTickerPi::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  return QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep/mPiValue);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the tick label as a fractional/numerical part and a symbolic string as suffix. The
  formatting of the fraction is done according to the specified \ref setFractionStyle. The appended
  symbol is specified with \ref setPiSymbol.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerPi::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision)
{
  double tickInPis = tick/mPiValue;
  if (mPeriodicity > 0)
    tickInPis = fmod(tickInPis, mPeriodicity);
  
  if (mFractionStyle != fsFloatingPoint && mPiTickStep > 0.09 && mPiTickStep < 50)
  {
    // simply construct fraction from decimal like 1.234 -> 1234/1000 and then simplify fraction, smaller digits are irrelevant due to mPiTickStep conditional above
    int denominator = 1000;
    int numerator = qRound(tickInPis*denominator);
    simplifyFraction(numerator, denominator);
    if (qAbs(numerator) == 1 && denominator == 1)
      return (numerator < 0 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) + mPiSymbol.trimmed();
    else if (numerator == 0)
      return QLatin1String("0");
    else
      return fractionToString(numerator, denominator) + mPiSymbol;
  } else
  {
    if (qFuzzyIsNull(tickInPis))
      return QLatin1String("0");
    else if (qFuzzyCompare(qAbs(tickInPis), 1.0))
      return (tickInPis < 0 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) + mPiSymbol.trimmed();
    else
      return QCPAxisTicker::getTickLabel(tickInPis, locale, formatChar, precision) + mPiSymbol;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Takes the fraction given by \a numerator and \a denominator and modifies the values to make sure
  the fraction is in irreducible form, i.e. numerator and denominator don't share any common
  factors which could be cancelled.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerPi::simplifyFraction(int &numerator, int &denominator) const
{
  if (numerator == 0 || denominator == 0)
    return;
  
  int num = numerator;
  int denom = denominator;
  while (denom != 0) // euclidean gcd algorithm
  {
    int oldDenom = denom;
    denom = num % denom;
    num = oldDenom;
  }
  // num is now gcd of numerator and denominator
  numerator /= num;
  denominator /= num;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Takes the fraction given by \a numerator and \a denominator and returns a string representation.
  The result depends on the configured fraction style (\ref setFractionStyle).
  
  This method is used to format the numerical/fractional part when generating tick labels. It
  simplifies the passed fraction to an irreducible form using \ref simplifyFraction and factors out
  any integer parts of the fraction (e.g. "10/4" becomes "2 1/2").
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerPi::fractionToString(int numerator, int denominator) const
{
  if (denominator == 0)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with zero denominator";
    return QString();
  }
  if (mFractionStyle == fsFloatingPoint) // should never be the case when calling this function
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "shouldn't be called with fraction style fsDecimal";
    return QString::number(numerator/double(denominator)); // failsafe
  }
  int sign = numerator*denominator < 0 ? -1 : 1;
  numerator = qAbs(numerator);
  denominator = qAbs(denominator);
  
  if (denominator == 1)
  {
    return QString::number(sign*numerator);
  } else
  {
    int integerPart = numerator/denominator;
    int remainder = numerator%denominator;
    if (remainder == 0)
    {
      return QString::number(sign*integerPart);
    } else
    {
      if (mFractionStyle == fsAsciiFractions)
      {
        return QString(QLatin1String("%1%2%3/%4"))
            .arg(sign == -1 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String(""))
            .arg(integerPart > 0 ? QString::number(integerPart)+QLatin1String(" ") : QString(QLatin1String("")))
            .arg(remainder)
            .arg(denominator);
      } else if (mFractionStyle == fsUnicodeFractions)
      {
        return QString(QLatin1String("%1%2%3"))
            .arg(sign == -1 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String(""))
            .arg(integerPart > 0 ? QString::number(integerPart) : QLatin1String(""))
            .arg(unicodeFraction(remainder, denominator));
      }
    }
  }
  return QString();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the unicode string representation of the fraction given by \a numerator and \a
  denominator. This is the representation used in \ref fractionToString when the fraction style
  (\ref setFractionStyle) is \ref fsUnicodeFractions.
  
  This method doesn't use the single-character common fractions but builds each fraction from a
  superscript unicode number, the unicode fraction character, and a subscript unicode number.
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeFraction(int numerator, int denominator) const
{
  return unicodeSuperscript(numerator)+QChar(0x2044)+unicodeSubscript(denominator);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the unicode string representing \a number as superscript. This is used to build
  unicode fractions in \ref unicodeFraction.
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeSuperscript(int number) const
{
  if (number == 0)
    return QString(QChar(0x2070));
  
  QString result;
  while (number > 0)
  {
    const int digit = number%10;
    switch (digit)
    {
      case 1: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B9)); break; }
      case 2: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B2)); break; }
      case 3: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B3)); break; }
      default: { result.prepend(QChar(0x2070+digit)); break; }
    }
    number /= 10;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the unicode string representing \a number as subscript. This is used to build unicode
  fractions in \ref unicodeFraction.
*/
QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeSubscript(int number) const
{
  if (number == 0)
    return QString(QChar(0x2080));
  
  QString result;
  while (number > 0)
  {
    result.prepend(QChar(0x2080+number%10));
    number /= 10;
  }
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerpi.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerlog.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 7890     */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerLog
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisTickerLog
  \brief Specialized axis ticker suited for logarithmic axes
  
  \image html axisticker-log.png
  
  This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks with unequal tick intervals suited for logarithmic
  axis scales. The ticks are placed at powers of the specified log base (\ref setLogBase).
  
  Especially in the case of a log base equal to 10 (the default), it might be desirable to have
  tick labels in the form of powers of ten without mantissa display. To achieve this, set the
  number precision (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision) to zero and the number format (\ref
  QCPAxis::setNumberFormat) to scientific (exponential) display with beautifully typeset decimal
  powers, so a format string of <tt>"eb"</tt>. This will result in the following axis tick labels:
  
  \image html axisticker-log-powers.png
 
  The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerlog-creation
  
  Note that the nature of logarithmic ticks imply that there exists a smallest possible tick step,
  corresponding to one multiplication by the log base. If the user zooms in further than that, no
  new ticks would appear, leading to very sparse or even no axis ticks on the axis. To prevent this
  situation, this ticker falls back to regular tick generation if the axis range would be covered
  by too few logarithmically placed ticks.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created
  managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker.
*/
QCPAxisTickerLog::QCPAxisTickerLog() :
  mLogBase(10.0),
  mSubTickCount(8), // generates 10 intervals
  mLogBaseLnInv(1.0/qLn(mLogBase))
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the logarithm base used for tick coordinate generation. The ticks will be placed at integer
  powers of \a base.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerLog::setLogBase(double base)
{
  if (base > 0)
  {
    mLogBase = base;
    mLogBaseLnInv = 1.0/qLn(mLogBase);
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "log base has to be greater than zero:" << base;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number of sub ticks in a tick interval. Within each interval, the sub ticks are spaced
  linearly to provide a better visual guide, so the sub tick density increases toward the higher
  tick.
  
  Note that \a subTicks is the number of sub ticks (not sub intervals) in one tick interval. So in
  the case of logarithm base 10 an intuitive sub tick spacing would be achieved with eight sub
  ticks (the default). This means e.g. between the ticks 10 and 100 there will be eight ticks,
  namely at 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90.
*/
void QCPAxisTickerLog::setSubTickCount(int subTicks)
{
  if (subTicks >= 0)
    mSubTickCount = subTicks;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "sub tick count can't be negative:" << subTicks;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the sub tick count specified in \ref setSubTickCount. For QCPAxisTickerLog, there is no
  automatic sub tick count calculation necessary.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
int QCPAxisTickerLog::getSubTickCount(double tickStep)
{
  Q_UNUSED(tickStep)
  return mSubTickCount;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Creates ticks with a spacing given by the logarithm base and an increasing integer power in the
  provided \a range. The step in which the power increases tick by tick is chosen in order to keep
  the total number of ticks as close as possible to the tick count (\ref setTickCount).
 
  The parameter \a tickStep is ignored for the normal logarithmic ticker generation. Only when
  zoomed in very far such that not enough logarithmically placed ticks would be visible, this
  function falls back to the regular QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector, which then uses \a tickStep.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QVector<double> QCPAxisTickerLog::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range)
{
  QVector<double> result;
  if (range.lower > 0 && range.upper > 0) // positive range
  {
    const double baseTickCount = qLn(range.upper/range.lower)*mLogBaseLnInv;
    if (baseTickCount < 1.6) // if too few log ticks would be visible in axis range, fall back to regular tick vector generation
      return QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(tickStep, range);
    const double exactPowerStep =  baseTickCount/double(mTickCount+1e-10);
    const double newLogBase = qPow(mLogBase, qMax(int(cleanMantissa(exactPowerStep)), 1));
    double currentTick = qPow(newLogBase, qFloor(qLn(range.lower)/qLn(newLogBase)));
    result.append(currentTick);
    while (currentTick < range.upper && currentTick > 0) // currentMag might be zero for ranges ~1e-300, just cancel in that case
    {
      currentTick *= newLogBase;
      result.append(currentTick);
    }
  } else if (range.lower < 0 && range.upper < 0) // negative range
  {
    const double baseTickCount = qLn(range.lower/range.upper)*mLogBaseLnInv;
    if (baseTickCount < 1.6) // if too few log ticks would be visible in axis range, fall back to regular tick vector generation
      return QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(tickStep, range);
    const double exactPowerStep =  baseTickCount/double(mTickCount+1e-10);
    const double newLogBase = qPow(mLogBase, qMax(int(cleanMantissa(exactPowerStep)), 1));
    double currentTick = -qPow(newLogBase, qCeil(qLn(-range.lower)/qLn(newLogBase)));
    result.append(currentTick);
    while (currentTick < range.upper && currentTick < 0) // currentMag might be zero for ranges ~1e-300, just cancel in that case
    {
      currentTick /= newLogBase;
      result.append(currentTick);
    }
  } else // invalid range for logarithmic scale, because lower and upper have different sign
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid range for logarithmic plot: " << range.lower << ".." << range.upper;
  }
  
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerlog.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/axis/axis.cpp'       */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 99911 */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPGrid
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPGrid
  \brief Responsible for drawing the grid of a QCPAxis.
  
  This class is tightly bound to QCPAxis. Every axis owns a grid instance and uses it to draw the
  grid lines, sub grid lines and zero-line. You can interact with the grid of an axis via \ref
  QCPAxis::grid. Normally, you don't need to create an instance of QCPGrid yourself.
  
  The axis and grid drawing was split into two classes to allow them to be placed on different
  layers (both QCPAxis and QCPGrid inherit from QCPLayerable). Thus it is possible to have the grid
  in the background and the axes in the foreground, and any plottables/items in between. This
  described situation is the default setup, see the QCPLayer documentation.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPGrid instance and sets default values.
  
  You shouldn't instantiate grids on their own, since every QCPAxis brings its own QCPGrid.
*/
QCPGrid::QCPGrid(QCPAxis *parentAxis) :
  QCPLayerable(parentAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), parentAxis),
  mSubGridVisible{},
  mAntialiasedSubGrid{},
  mAntialiasedZeroLine{},
  mParentAxis(parentAxis)
{
  // warning: this is called in QCPAxis constructor, so parentAxis members should not be accessed/called
  setParent(parentAxis);
  setPen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  setSubGridPen(QPen(QColor(220,220,220), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  setZeroLinePen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::SolidLine));
  setSubGridVisible(false);
  setAntialiased(false);
  setAntialiasedSubGrid(false);
  setAntialiasedZeroLine(false);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether grid lines at sub tick marks are drawn.
  
  \see setSubGridPen
*/
void QCPGrid::setSubGridVisible(bool visible)
{
  mSubGridVisible = visible;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether sub grid lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedSubGrid(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedSubGrid = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether zero lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedZeroLine(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedZeroLine = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen with which (major) grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPGrid::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen with which sub grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPGrid::setSubGridPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSubGridPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen with which zero lines are drawn.
  
  Zero lines are lines at value coordinate 0 which may be drawn with a different pen than other grid
  lines. To disable zero lines and just draw normal grid lines at zero, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen.
*/
void QCPGrid::setZeroLinePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mZeroLinePen = pen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing the major grid lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPGrid::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeGrid);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws grid lines and sub grid lines at the positions of (sub) ticks of the parent axis, spanning
  over the complete axis rect. Also draws the zero line, if appropriate (\ref setZeroLinePen).
*/
void QCPGrid::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; }
  
  if (mParentAxis->subTicks() && mSubGridVisible)
    drawSubGridLines(painter);
  drawGridLines(painter);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the main grid lines and possibly a zero line with the specified painter.
  
  This is a helper function called by \ref draw.
*/
void QCPGrid::drawGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; }
  
  const int tickCount = mParentAxis->mTickVector.size();
  double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms
  if (mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    // draw zeroline:
    int zeroLineIndex = -1;
    if (mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 && mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0)
    {
      applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine);
      painter->setPen(mZeroLinePen);
      double epsilon = mParentAxis->range().size()*1E-6; // for comparing double to zero
      for (int i=0; i<tickCount; ++i)
      {
        if (qAbs(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)) < epsilon)
        {
          zeroLineIndex = i;
          t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // x
          painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top()));
          break;
        }
      }
    }
    // draw grid lines:
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    for (int i=0; i<tickCount; ++i)
    {
      if (i == zeroLineIndex) continue; // don't draw a gridline on top of the zeroline
      t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // x
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top()));
    }
  } else
  {
    // draw zeroline:
    int zeroLineIndex = -1;
    if (mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 && mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0)
    {
      applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine);
      painter->setPen(mZeroLinePen);
      double epsilon = mParentAxis->mRange.size()*1E-6; // for comparing double to zero
      for (int i=0; i<tickCount; ++i)
      {
        if (qAbs(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)) < epsilon)
        {
          zeroLineIndex = i;
          t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // y
          painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t));
          break;
        }
      }
    }
    // draw grid lines:
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    for (int i=0; i<tickCount; ++i)
    {
      if (i == zeroLineIndex) continue; // don't draw a gridline on top of the zeroline
      t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // y
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the sub grid lines with the specified painter.
  
  This is a helper function called by \ref draw.
*/
void QCPGrid::drawSubGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; }
  
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedSubGrid, QCP::aeSubGrid);
  double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms
  painter->setPen(mSubGridPen);
  if (mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    foreach (double tickCoord, mParentAxis->mSubTickVector)
    {
      t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(tickCoord); // x
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top()));
    }
  } else
  {
    foreach (double tickCoord, mParentAxis->mSubTickVector)
    {
      t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(tickCoord); // y
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t));
    }
  }
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxis
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAxis
  \brief Manages a single axis inside a QCustomPlot.
 
  Usually doesn't need to be instantiated externally. Access %QCustomPlot's default four axes via
  QCustomPlot::xAxis (bottom), QCustomPlot::yAxis (left), QCustomPlot::xAxis2 (top) and
  QCustomPlot::yAxis2 (right).
  
  Axes are always part of an axis rect, see QCPAxisRect.
  \image html AxisNamesOverview.png
  <center>Naming convention of axis parts</center>
  \n
    
  \image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png
  <center>Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an axis. The dashed gray line
  on the left represents the QCustomPlot widget border.</center>
  
  Each axis holds an instance of QCPAxisTicker which is used to generate the tick coordinates and
  tick labels. You can access the currently installed \ref ticker or set a new one (possibly one of
  the specialized subclasses, or your own subclass) via \ref setTicker. For details, see the
  documentation of QCPAxisTicker.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation() const
 
  Returns the orientation of this axis. The axis orientation (horizontal or vertical) is deduced
  from the axis type (left, top, right or bottom).
 
  \see orientation(AxisType type), pixelOrientation
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPGrid *QCPAxis::grid() const
  
  Returns the \ref QCPGrid instance belonging to this axis. Access it to set details about the way the
  grid is displayed.
*/
 
/*! \fn static Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation(AxisType type)
 
  Returns the orientation of the specified axis type
 
  \see orientation(), pixelOrientation
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxis::pixelOrientation() const
 
  Returns which direction points towards higher coordinate values/keys, in pixel space.
 
  This method returns either 1 or -1. If it returns 1, then going in the positive direction along
  the orientation of the axis in pixels corresponds to going from lower to higher axis coordinates.
  On the other hand, if this method returns -1, going to smaller pixel values corresponds to going
  from lower to higher axis coordinates.
 
  For example, this is useful to easily shift axis coordinates by a certain amount given in pixels,
  without having to care about reversed or vertically aligned axes:
 
  \code
  double newKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(oldKey)+10*keyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  \endcode
 
  \a newKey will then contain a key that is ten pixels towards higher keys, starting from \a oldKey.
*/
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> QCPAxis::ticker() const
 
  Returns a modifiable shared pointer to the currently installed axis ticker. The axis ticker is
  responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels of this axis. You can access the
  \ref QCPAxisTicker with this method and modify basic properties such as the approximate tick count
  (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount).
 
  You can gain more control over the axis ticks by setting a different \ref QCPAxisTicker subclass, see
  the documentation there. A new axis ticker can be set with \ref setTicker.
 
  Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis
  ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes.
 
  \see setTicker
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange)
 
  This signal is emitted when the range of this axis has changed. You can connect it to the \ref
  setRange slot of another axis to communicate the new range to the other axis, in order for it to
  be synchronized.
  
  You may also manipulate/correct the range with \ref setRange in a slot connected to this signal.
  This is useful if for example a maximum range span shall not be exceeded, or if the lower/upper
  range shouldn't go beyond certain values (see \ref QCPRange::bounded). For example, the following
  slot would limit the x axis to ranges between 0 and 10:
  \code
  customPlot->xAxis->setRange(newRange.bounded(0, 10))
  \endcode
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange, const QCPRange &oldRange)
  \overload
  
  Additionally to the new range, this signal also provides the previous range held by the axis as
  \a oldRange.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
  
  This signal is emitted when the scale type changes, by calls to \ref setScaleType
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selection)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this axis has changed, either by user interaction
  or by a direct call to \ref setSelectedParts.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectableChanged(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &parts);
  
  This signal is emitted when the selectability changes, by calls to \ref setSelectableParts
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs an Axis instance of Type \a type for the axis rect \a parent.
  
  Usually it isn't necessary to instantiate axes directly, because you can let QCustomPlot create
  them for you with \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis. If you want to use own QCPAxis-subclasses however,
  create them manually and then inject them also via \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis.
*/
QCPAxis::QCPAxis(QCPAxisRect *parent, AxisType type) :
  QCPLayerable(parent->parentPlot(), QString(), parent),
  // axis base:
  mAxisType(type),
  mAxisRect(parent),
  mPadding(5),
  mOrientation(orientation(type)),
  mSelectableParts(spAxis | spTickLabels | spAxisLabel),
  mSelectedParts(spNone),
  mBasePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedBasePen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // axis label:
  mLabel(),
  mLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedLabelFont(QFont(mLabelFont.family(), mLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  // tick labels:
  mTickLabels(true),
  mTickLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedTickLabelFont(QFont(mTickLabelFont.family(), mTickLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mTickLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedTickLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  mNumberPrecision(6),
  mNumberFormatChar('g'),
  mNumberBeautifulPowers(true),
  // ticks and subticks:
  mTicks(true),
  mSubTicks(true),
  mTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  mSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // scale and range:
  mRange(0, 5),
  mRangeReversed(false),
  mScaleType(stLinear),
  // internal members:
  mGrid(new QCPGrid(this)),
  mAxisPainter(new QCPAxisPainterPrivate(parent->parentPlot())),
  mTicker(new QCPAxisTicker),
  mCachedMarginValid(false),
  mCachedMargin(0),
  mDragging(false)
{
  setParent(parent);
  mGrid->setVisible(false);
  setAntialiased(false);
  setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer()); // it's actually on that layer already, but we want it in front of the grid, so we place it on there again
  
  if (type == atTop)
  {
    setTickLabelPadding(3);
    setLabelPadding(6);
  } else if (type == atRight)
  {
    setTickLabelPadding(7);
    setLabelPadding(12);
  } else if (type == atBottom)
  {
    setTickLabelPadding(3);
    setLabelPadding(3);
  } else if (type == atLeft)
  {
    setTickLabelPadding(5);
    setLabelPadding(10);
  }
}
 
QCPAxis::~QCPAxis()
{
  delete mAxisPainter;
  delete mGrid; // delete grid here instead of via parent ~QObject for better defined deletion order
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLabelPadding() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
double QCPAxis::tickLabelRotation() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QCPAxis::LabelSide QCPAxis::tickLabelSide() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->tickLabelSide;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QString QCPAxis::numberFormat() const
{
  QString result;
  result.append(mNumberFormatChar);
  if (mNumberBeautifulPowers)
  {
    result.append(QLatin1Char('b'));
    if (mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross)
      result.append(QLatin1Char('c'));
  }
  return result;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLengthIn() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLengthOut() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::subTickLengthIn() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::subTickLengthOut() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::labelPadding() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->labelPadding;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::offset() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->offset;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::lowerEnding() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->lowerEnding;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::upperEnding() const
{
  return mAxisPainter->upperEnding;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis uses a linear scale or a logarithmic scale.
  
  Note that this method controls the coordinate transformation. For logarithmic scales, you will
  likely also want to use a logarithmic tick spacing and labeling, which can be achieved by setting
  the axis ticker to an instance of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog :
  
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpaxisticker-log-creation
  
  See the documentation of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog about the details of logarithmic axis tick
  creation.
  
  \ref setNumberPrecision
*/
void QCPAxis::setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType type)
{
  if (mScaleType != type)
  {
    mScaleType = type;
    if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
      setRange(mRange.sanitizedForLogScale());
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
    emit scaleTypeChanged(mScaleType);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  This slot may be connected with the \ref rangeChanged signal of another axis so this axis
  is always synchronized with the other axis range, when it changes.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange(const QCPRange &range)
{
  if (range.lower == mRange.lower && range.upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(range)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = range.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = range.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface.
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes.)
  
  However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part,
  it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts
  directly.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable)
{
  if (mSelectableParts != selectable)
  {
    mSelectableParts = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the selected state of the respective axis parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part
  is selected, it uses a different pen/font.
  
  The entire selection mechanism for axes is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes. You only need to call this function when you
  wish to change the selection state manually.
  
  This function can change the selection state of a part, independent of the \ref setSelectableParts setting.
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBasePen, setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen,
  setSelectedTickLabelFont, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelColor, setSelectedLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected)
{
  if (mSelectedParts != selected)
  {
    mSelectedParts = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the lower and upper bound of the axis range.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
  
  There is also a slot to set a range, see \ref setRange(const QCPRange &range).
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange(double lower, double upper)
{
  if (lower == mRange.lower && upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(lower, upper)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  The \a position coordinate indicates together with the \a alignment parameter, where the new
  range will be positioned. \a size defines the size of the new axis range. \a alignment may be
  Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight or Qt::AlignCenter. This will cause the left border, right border,
  or center of the range to be aligned with \a position. Any other values of \a alignment will
  default to Qt::AlignCenter.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange(double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment)
{
  if (alignment == Qt::AlignLeft)
    setRange(position, position+size);
  else if (alignment == Qt::AlignRight)
    setRange(position-size, position);
  else // alignment == Qt::AlignCenter
    setRange(position-size/2.0, position+size/2.0);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the lower bound of the axis range. The upper bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeLower(double lower)
{
  if (mRange.lower == lower)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the upper bound of the axis range. The lower bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeUpper(double upper)
{
  if (mRange.upper == upper)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis range (direction) is displayed reversed. Normally, the values on horizontal
  axes increase left to right, on vertical axes bottom to top. When \a reversed is set to true, the
  direction of increasing values is inverted.
 
  Note that the range and data interface stays the same for reversed axes, e.g. the \a lower part
  of the \ref setRange interface will still reference the mathematically smaller number than the \a
  upper part.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeReversed(bool reversed)
{
  mRangeReversed = reversed;
}
 
/*!
  The axis ticker is responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels. See the
  documentation of QCPAxisTicker for details on how to work with axis tickers.
  
  You can change the tick positioning/labeling behaviour of this axis by setting a different
  QCPAxisTicker subclass using this method. If you only wish to modify the currently installed axis
  ticker, access it via \ref ticker.
  
  Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis
  ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes.
  
  \see ticker
*/
void QCPAxis::setTicker(QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> ticker)
{
  if (ticker)
    mTicker = ticker;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can not set nullptr as axis ticker";
  // no need to invalidate margin cache here because produced tick labels are checked for changes in setupTickVector
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick marks are displayed.
 
  Note that setting \a show to false does not imply that tick labels are invisible, too. To achieve
  that, see \ref setTickLabels.
  
  \see setSubTicks
*/
void QCPAxis::setTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mTicks != show)
  {
    mTicks = show;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick labels are displayed. Tick labels are the numbers drawn next to tick marks.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabels(bool show)
{
  if (mTickLabels != show)
  {
    mTickLabels = show;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
    if (!mTickLabels)
      mTickVectorLabels.clear();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the axis base line (including any outward ticks) and the tick labels.
  \see setLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding != padding)
  {
    mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding = padding;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (font != mTickLabelFont)
  {
    mTickLabelFont = font;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelFont
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTickLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the rotation of the tick labels. If \a degrees is zero, the labels are drawn normally. Else,
  the tick labels are drawn rotated by \a degrees clockwise. The specified angle is bound to values
  from -90 to 90 degrees.
  
  If \a degrees is exactly -90, 0 or 90, the tick labels are centered on the tick coordinate. For
  other angles, the label is drawn with an offset such that it seems to point toward or away from
  the tick mark.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelRotation(double degrees)
{
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(degrees-mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation))
  {
    mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation = qBound(-90.0, degrees, 90.0);
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the tick labels (numbers) shall appear inside or outside the axis rect.
  
  The usual and default setting is \ref lsOutside. Very compact plots sometimes require tick labels
  to be inside the axis rect, to save space. If \a side is set to \ref lsInside, the tick labels
  appear on the inside are additionally clipped to the axis rect.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelSide(LabelSide side)
{
  mAxisPainter->tickLabelSide = side;
  mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number format for the numbers in tick labels. This \a formatCode is an extended version
  of the format code used e.g. by QString::number() and QLocale::toString(). For reference about
  that, see the "Argument Formats" section in the detailed description of the QString class.
  
  \a formatCode is a string of one, two or three characters.
 
  <b>The first character</b> is identical to
  the normal format code used by Qt. In short, this means: 'e'/'E' scientific format, 'f' fixed
  format, 'g'/'G' scientific or fixed, whichever is shorter. For the 'e', 'E', and 'f' formats,
  the precision set by \ref setNumberPrecision represents the number of digits after the decimal
  point. For the 'g' and 'G' formats, the precision represents the maximum number of significant
  digits, trailing zeroes are omitted.
 
  <b>The second and third characters</b> are optional and specific to QCustomPlot:\n
  If the first char was 'e' or 'g', numbers are/might be displayed in the scientific format, e.g.
  "5.5e9", which is ugly in a plot. So when the second char of \a formatCode is set to 'b' (for
  "beautiful"), those exponential numbers are formatted in a more natural way, i.e. "5.5
  [multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] 9". By default, the multiplication sign is a centered dot.
  If instead a cross should be shown (as is usual in the USA), the third char of \a formatCode can
  be set to 'c'. The inserted multiplication signs are the UTF-8 characters 215 (0xD7) for the
  cross and 183 (0xB7) for the dot.
  
  Examples for \a formatCode:
  \li \c g normal format code behaviour. If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large,
  normal scientific format is used
  \li \c gb If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large, scientific format is used with
  beautifully typeset decimal powers and a dot as multiplication sign
  \li \c ebc All numbers are in scientific format with beautifully typeset decimal power and a cross as
  multiplication sign
  \li \c fb illegal format code, since fixed format doesn't support (or need) beautifully typeset decimal
  powers. Format code will be reduced to 'f'.
  \li \c hello illegal format code, since first char is not 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' or 'G'. Current format
  code will not be changed.
*/
void QCPAxis::setNumberFormat(const QString &formatCode)
{
  if (formatCode.isEmpty())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed formatCode is empty";
    return;
  }
  mCachedMarginValid = false;
  
  // interpret first char as number format char:
  QString allowedFormatChars(QLatin1String("eEfgG"));
  if (allowedFormatChars.contains(formatCode.at(0)))
  {
    mNumberFormatChar = QLatin1Char(formatCode.at(0).toLatin1());
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (first char not in 'eEfgG'):" << formatCode;
    return;
  }
  if (formatCode.length() < 2)
  {
    mNumberBeautifulPowers = false;
    mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
    return;
  }
  
  // interpret second char as indicator for beautiful decimal powers:
  if (formatCode.at(1) == QLatin1Char('b') && (mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('e') || mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('g')))
  {
    mNumberBeautifulPowers = true;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (second char not 'b' or first char neither 'e' nor 'g'):" << formatCode;
    return;
  }
  if (formatCode.length() < 3)
  {
    mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
    return;
  }
  
  // interpret third char as indicator for dot or cross multiplication symbol:
  if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('c'))
  {
    mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = true;
  } else if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('d'))
  {
    mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (third char neither 'c' nor 'd'):" << formatCode;
    return;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the precision of the tick label numbers. See QLocale::toString(double i, char f, int prec)
  for details. The effect of precisions are most notably for number Formats starting with 'e', see
  \ref setNumberFormat
*/
void QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision(int precision)
{
  if (mNumberPrecision != precision)
  {
    mNumberPrecision = precision;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach inside the
  plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than
  zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so
  they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLength, setTickLengthIn, setTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setTickLengthIn(inside);
  setTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach
  inside the plot.
  
  \see setTickLengthOut, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward ticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the ticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels and axis label will
  increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLengthIn, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut = outside;
    mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether sub tick marks are displayed.
  
  Sub ticks are only potentially visible if (major) ticks are also visible (see \ref setTicks)
  
  \see setTicks
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mSubTicks != show)
  {
    mSubTicks = show;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater
  than zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly,
  so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLength, setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setSubTickLengthIn(inside);
  setSubTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthOut, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward subticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the subticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels will increase their
  distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut = outside;
    mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, the axis base line is drawn with.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSubTickPen
*/
void QCPAxis::setBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, tick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, subtick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setSubTickCount, setSubTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (mLabelFont != font)
  {
    mLabelFont = font;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelFont
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the text of the axis label that will be shown below/above or next to the axis, depending on
  its orientation. To disable axis labels, pass an empty string as \a str.
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabel(const QString &str)
{
  if (mLabel != str)
  {
    mLabel = str;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the tick labels and the axis label.
  
  \see setTickLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  if (mAxisPainter->labelPadding != padding)
  {
    mAxisPainter->labelPadding = padding;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the padding of the axis.
 
  When \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is enabled, the padding is the additional outer most space,
  that is left blank.
  
  The axis padding has no meaning if \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is disabled.
  
  \see setLabelPadding, setTickLabelPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setPadding(int padding)
{
  if (mPadding != padding)
  {
    mPadding = padding;
    mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the offset the axis has to its axis rect side.
  
  If an axis rect side has multiple axes and automatic margin calculation is enabled for that side,
  only the offset of the inner most axis has meaning (even if it is set to be invisible). The
  offset of the other, outer axes is controlled automatically, to place them at appropriate
  positions.
*/
void QCPAxis::setOffset(int offset)
{
  mAxisPainter->offset = offset;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (font != mSelectedTickLabelFont)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelFont = font;
    // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedLabelFont = font;
  // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  if (color != mSelectedTickLabelColor)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelColor = color;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the axis base line when selected.
  
  \see setBasePen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks when selected.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the subticks when selected.
  
  \see setSubTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the style for the lower axis ending. See the documentation of QCPLineEnding for available
  styles.
  
  For horizontal axes, this method refers to the left ending, for vertical axes the bottom ending.
  Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with \ref
  setRangeReversed.
  
  \see setUpperEnding
*/
void QCPAxis::setLowerEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending)
{
  mAxisPainter->lowerEnding = ending;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the style for the upper axis ending. See the documentation of QCPLineEnding for available
  styles.
  
  For horizontal axes, this method refers to the right ending, for vertical axes the top ending.
  Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with \ref
  setRangeReversed.
  
  \see setLowerEnding
*/
void QCPAxis::setUpperEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending)
{
  mAxisPainter->upperEnding = ending;
}
 
/*!
  If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLinear, \a diff is added to the lower and upper
  bounds of the range. The range is simply moved by \a diff.
  
  If the scale type is \ref stLogarithmic, the range bounds are multiplied by \a diff. This
  corresponds to an apparent "linear" move in logarithmic scaling by a distance of log(diff).
*/
void QCPAxis::moveRange(double diff)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    mRange.lower += diff;
    mRange.upper += diff;
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    mRange.lower *= diff;
    mRange.upper *= diff;
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the center of the current axis range. For
  example, if \a factor is 2.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at the axis
  range center won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates around
  the center will have moved symmetrically closer).
 
  If you wish to scale around a different coordinate than the current axis range center, use the
  overload \ref scaleRange(double factor, double center).
*/
void QCPAxis::scaleRange(double factor)
{
  scaleRange(factor, range().center());
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the coordinate \a center. For example, if \a
  factor is 2.0, \a center is 1.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at
  coordinate 1.0 won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates
  around 1.0 will have moved symmetrically closer to 1.0).
 
  \see scaleRange(double factor)
*/
void QCPAxis::scaleRange(double factor, double center)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    QCPRange newRange;
    newRange.lower = (mRange.lower-center)*factor + center;
    newRange.upper = (mRange.upper-center)*factor + center;
    if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange))
      mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    if ((mRange.upper < 0 && center < 0) || (mRange.upper > 0 && center > 0)) // make sure center has same sign as range
    {
      QCPRange newRange;
      newRange.lower = qPow(mRange.lower/center, factor)*center;
      newRange.upper = qPow(mRange.upper/center, factor)*center;
      if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange))
        mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Center of scaling operation doesn't lie in same logarithmic sign domain as range:" << center;
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Scales the range of this axis to have a certain scale \a ratio to \a otherAxis. The scaling will
  be done around the center of the current axis range.
 
  For example, if \a ratio is 1, this axis is the \a yAxis and \a otherAxis is \a xAxis, graphs
  plotted with those axes will appear in a 1:1 aspect ratio, independent of the aspect ratio the
  axis rect has.
 
  This is an operation that changes the range of this axis once, it doesn't fix the scale ratio
  indefinitely. Note that calling this function in the constructor of the QCustomPlot's parent
  won't have the desired effect, since the widget dimensions aren't defined yet, and a resizeEvent
  will follow.
*/
void QCPAxis::setScaleRatio(const QCPAxis *otherAxis, double ratio)
{
  int otherPixelSize, ownPixelSize;
  
  if (otherAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->width();
  else
    otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->height();
  
  if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    ownPixelSize = axisRect()->width();
  else
    ownPixelSize = axisRect()->height();
  
  double newRangeSize = ratio*otherAxis->range().size()*ownPixelSize/double(otherPixelSize);
  setRange(range().center(), newRangeSize, Qt::AlignCenter);
}
 
/*!
  Changes the axis range such that all plottables associated with this axis are fully visible in
  that dimension.
  
  \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes
*/
void QCPAxis::rescale(bool onlyVisiblePlottables)
{
  QCPRange newRange;
  bool haveRange = false;
  foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, plottables())
  {
    if (!plottable->realVisibility() && onlyVisiblePlottables)
      continue;
    QCPRange plottableRange;
    bool currentFoundRange;
    QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth;
    if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
      signDomain = (mRange.upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
    if (plottable->keyAxis() == this)
      plottableRange = plottable->getKeyRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain);
    else
      plottableRange = plottable->getValueRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain);
    if (currentFoundRange)
    {
      if (!haveRange)
        newRange = plottableRange;
      else
        newRange.expand(plottableRange);
      haveRange = true;
    }
  }
  if (haveRange)
  {
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (mScaleType == stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-mRange.size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+mRange.size()/2.0;
      } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower);
      }
    }
    setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget, to axis coordinates.
*/
double QCPAxis::pixelToCoord(double value) const
{
  if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    if (mScaleType == stLinear)
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return (value-mAxisRect->left())/double(mAxisRect->width())*mRange.size()+mRange.lower;
      else
        return -(value-mAxisRect->left())/double(mAxisRect->width())*mRange.size()+mRange.upper;
    } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (value-mAxisRect->left())/double(mAxisRect->width()))*mRange.lower;
      else
        return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (mAxisRect->left()-value)/double(mAxisRect->width()))*mRange.upper;
    }
  } else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    if (mScaleType == stLinear)
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return (mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/double(mAxisRect->height())*mRange.size()+mRange.lower;
      else
        return -(mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/double(mAxisRect->height())*mRange.size()+mRange.upper;
    } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/double(mAxisRect->height()))*mRange.lower;
      else
        return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (value-mAxisRect->bottom())/double(mAxisRect->height()))*mRange.upper;
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in coordinates of the axis, to pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget.
*/
double QCPAxis::coordToPixel(double value) const
{
  if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    if (mScaleType == stLinear)
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return (value-mRange.lower)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left();
      else
        return (mRange.upper-value)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left();
    } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
    {
      if (value >= 0.0 && mRange.upper < 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range
        return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->right()+200 : mAxisRect->left()-200;
      else if (value <= 0.0 && mRange.upper >= 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range
        return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->left()-200 : mAxisRect->right()+200;
      else
      {
        if (!mRangeReversed)
          return qLn(value/mRange.lower)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left();
        else
          return qLn(mRange.upper/value)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left();
      }
    }
  } else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    if (mScaleType == stLinear)
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return mAxisRect->bottom()-(value-mRange.lower)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->height();
      else
        return mAxisRect->bottom()-(mRange.upper-value)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->height();
    } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
    {
      if (value >= 0.0 && mRange.upper < 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range
        return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->top()-200 : mAxisRect->bottom()+200;
      else if (value <= 0.0 && mRange.upper >= 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range
        return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->bottom()+200 : mAxisRect->top()-200;
      else
      {
        if (!mRangeReversed)
          return mAxisRect->bottom()-qLn(value/mRange.lower)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->height();
        else
          return mAxisRect->bottom()-qLn(mRange.upper/value)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->height();
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the part of the axis that is hit by \a pos (in pixels). The return value of this function
  is independent of the user-selectable parts defined with \ref setSelectableParts. Further, this
  function does not change the current selection state of the axis.
  
  If the axis is not visible (\ref setVisible), this function always returns \ref spNone.
  
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCPAxis::SelectablePart QCPAxis::getPartAt(const QPointF &pos) const
{
  if (!mVisible)
    return spNone;
  
  if (mAxisPainter->axisSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxis;
  else if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelsSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spTickLabels;
  else if (mAxisPainter->labelSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxisLabel;
  else
    return spNone;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPAxis::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return -1;
  SelectablePart part = getPartAt(pos);
  if ((onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(part)) || part == spNone)
    return -1;
  
  if (details)
    details->setValue(part);
  return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the plottables that have this axis as key or value axis.
  
  If you are only interested in plottables of type QCPGraph, see \ref graphs.
  
  \see graphs, items
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCPAxis::plottables() const
{
  QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
  if (!mParentPlot) return result;
  
  foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, mParentPlot->mPlottables)
  {
    if (plottable->keyAxis() == this || plottable->valueAxis() == this)
      result.append(plottable);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the graphs that have this axis as key or value axis.
  
  \see plottables, items
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCPAxis::graphs() const
{
  QList<QCPGraph*> result;
  if (!mParentPlot) return result;
  
  foreach (QCPGraph *graph, mParentPlot->mGraphs)
  {
    if (graph->keyAxis() == this || graph->valueAxis() == this)
      result.append(graph);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis. An item is considered
  associated with an axis if at least one of its positions uses the axis as key or value axis.
  
  \see plottables, graphs
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> QCPAxis::items() const
{
  QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
  if (!mParentPlot) return result;
  
  foreach (QCPAbstractItem *item, mParentPlot->mItems)
  {
    foreach (QCPItemPosition *position, item->positions())
    {
      if (position->keyAxis() == this || position->valueAxis() == this)
      {
        result.append(item);
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Transforms a margin side to the logically corresponding axis type. (QCP::msLeft to
  QCPAxis::atLeft, QCP::msRight to QCPAxis::atRight, etc.)
*/
QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(QCP::MarginSide side)
{
  switch (side)
  {
    case QCP::msLeft: return atLeft;
    case QCP::msRight: return atRight;
    case QCP::msTop: return atTop;
    case QCP::msBottom: return atBottom;
    default: break;
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid margin side passed:" << static_cast<int>(side);
  return atLeft;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the axis type that describes the opposite axis of an axis with the specified \a type.
*/
QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::opposite(QCPAxis::AxisType type)
{
  switch (type)
  {
    case atLeft: return atRight;
    case atRight: return atLeft;
    case atBottom: return atTop;
    case atTop: return atBottom;
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis type";
  return atLeft;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxis::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  SelectablePart part = details.value<SelectablePart>();
  if (mSelectableParts.testFlag(part))
  {
    SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
    setSelectedParts(additive ? mSelectedParts^part : part);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxis::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
  setSelectedParts(mSelectedParts & ~mSelectableParts);
  if (selectionStateChanged)
    *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
 
  For the axis to accept this event and perform the single axis drag, the parent \ref QCPAxisRect
  must be configured accordingly, i.e. it must allow range dragging in the orientation of this axis
  (\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag) and this axis must be a draggable axis (\ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes)
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
*/
void QCPAxis::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (!mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag) ||
      !mAxisRect->rangeDrag().testFlag(orientation()) ||
      !mAxisRect->rangeDragAxes(orientation()).contains(this))
  {
    event->ignore();
    return;
  }
  
  if (event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton)
  {
    mDragging = true;
    // initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging:
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
    {
      mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements();
      mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements();
    }
    // Mouse range dragging interaction:
    if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
      mDragStartRange = mRange;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
  
  \see QCPAxis::mousePressEvent
*/
void QCPAxis::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  if (mDragging)
  {
    const double startPixel = orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? startPos.x() : startPos.y();
    const double currentPixel = orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? event->pos().x() : event->pos().y();
    if (mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear)
    {
      const double diff = pixelToCoord(startPixel) - pixelToCoord(currentPixel);
      setRange(mDragStartRange.lower+diff, mDragStartRange.upper+diff);
    } else if (mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
    {
      const double diff = pixelToCoord(startPixel) / pixelToCoord(currentPixel);
      setRange(mDragStartRange.lower*diff, mDragStartRange.upper*diff);
    }
    
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
      mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll);
    mParentPlot->replot(QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
  
  \see QCPAxis::mousePressEvent
*/
void QCPAxis::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  mDragging = false;
  if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
  {
    mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements(mAADragBackup);
    mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(mNotAADragBackup);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user zoom individual axes
  exclusively, by performing the wheel event on top of the axis.
 
  For the axis to accept this event and perform the single axis zoom, the parent \ref QCPAxisRect
  must be configured accordingly, i.e. it must allow range zooming in the orientation of this axis
  (\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom) and this axis must be a zoomable axis (\ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes)
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The zooming of possibly multiple axes at once by performing the wheel event anywhere in the
  axis rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent.
*/
void QCPAxis::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  // Mouse range zooming interaction:
  if (!mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeZoom) ||
      !mAxisRect->rangeZoom().testFlag(orientation()) ||
      !mAxisRect->rangeZoomAxes(orientation()).contains(this))
  {
    event->ignore();
    return;
  }
  
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0)
  const double delta = event->delta();
#else
  const double delta = event->angleDelta().y();
#endif
  
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 14, 0)
  const QPointF pos = event->pos();
#else
  const QPointF pos = event->position();
#endif
  
  const double wheelSteps = delta/120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually
  const double factor = qPow(mAxisRect->rangeZoomFactor(orientation()), wheelSteps);
  scaleRange(factor, pixelToCoord(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? pos.x() : pos.y()));
  mParentPlot->replot();
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing axis lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPAxis::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeAxes);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the axis with the specified \a painter, using the internal QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPAxis::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QVector<double> subTickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
  QVector<double> tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
  QVector<QString> tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
  tickPositions.reserve(mTickVector.size());
  tickLabels.reserve(mTickVector.size());
  subTickPositions.reserve(mSubTickVector.size());
  
  if (mTicks)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<mTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      tickPositions.append(coordToPixel(mTickVector.at(i)));
      if (mTickLabels)
        tickLabels.append(mTickVectorLabels.at(i));
    }
 
    if (mSubTicks)
    {
      const int subTickCount = mSubTickVector.size();
      for (int i=0; i<subTickCount; ++i)
        subTickPositions.append(coordToPixel(mSubTickVector.at(i)));
    }
  }
  
  // transfer all properties of this axis to QCPAxisPainterPrivate which it needs to draw the axis.
  // Note that some axis painter properties are already set by direct feed-through with QCPAxis setters
  mAxisPainter->type = mAxisType;
  mAxisPainter->basePen = getBasePen();
  mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont();
  mAxisPainter->labelColor = getLabelColor();
  mAxisPainter->label = mLabel;
  mAxisPainter->substituteExponent = mNumberBeautifulPowers;
  mAxisPainter->tickPen = getTickPen();
  mAxisPainter->subTickPen = getSubTickPen();
  mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = getTickLabelFont();
  mAxisPainter->tickLabelColor = getTickLabelColor();
  mAxisPainter->axisRect = mAxisRect->rect();
  mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport();
  mAxisPainter->abbreviateDecimalPowers = mScaleType == stLogarithmic;
  mAxisPainter->reversedEndings = mRangeReversed;
  mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions;
  mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels;
  mAxisPainter->subTickPositions = subTickPositions;
  mAxisPainter->draw(painter);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Prepares the internal tick vector, sub tick vector and tick label vector. This is done by calling
  QCPAxisTicker::generate on the currently installed ticker.
  
  If a change in the label text/count is detected, the cached axis margin is invalidated to make
  sure the next margin calculation recalculates the label sizes and returns an up-to-date value.
*/
void QCPAxis::setupTickVectors()
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return;
  if ((!mTicks && !mTickLabels && !mGrid->visible()) || mRange.size() <= 0) return;
  
  QVector<QString> oldLabels = mTickVectorLabels;
  mTicker->generate(mRange, mParentPlot->locale(), mNumberFormatChar, mNumberPrecision, mTickVector, mSubTicks ? &mSubTickVector : nullptr, mTickLabels ? &mTickVectorLabels : nullptr);
  mCachedMarginValid &= mTickVectorLabels == oldLabels; // if labels have changed, margin might have changed, too
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the axis base line. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedBasePen or mBasePen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getBasePen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedBasePen : mBasePen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickPen or mTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedTickPen : mTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the subticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedSubTickPen or mSubTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getSubTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedSubTickPen : mSubTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelFont or mTickLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPAxis::getTickLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelFont : mTickLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelFont or mLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPAxis::getLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelFont : mLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelColor or mTickLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPAxis::getTickLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelColor : mTickLabelColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelColor or mLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPAxis::getLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelColor : mLabelColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the appropriate outward margin for this axis. It is needed if \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is set to true on the parent axis rect. An axis with axis type \ref
  atLeft will return an appropriate left margin, \ref atBottom will return an appropriate bottom
  margin and so forth. For the calculation, this function goes through similar steps as \ref draw,
  so changing one function likely requires the modification of the other one as well.
  
  The margin consists of the outward tick length, tick label padding, tick label size, label
  padding, label size, and padding.
  
  The margin is cached internally, so repeated calls while leaving the axis range, fonts, etc.
  unchanged are very fast.
*/
int QCPAxis::calculateMargin()
{
  if (!mVisible) // if not visible, directly return 0, don't cache 0 because we can't react to setVisible in QCPAxis
    return 0;
  
  if (mCachedMarginValid)
    return mCachedMargin;
  
  // run through similar steps as QCPAxis::draw, and calculate margin needed to fit axis and its labels
  int margin = 0;
  
  QVector<double> tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
  QVector<QString> tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
  tickPositions.reserve(mTickVector.size());
  tickLabels.reserve(mTickVector.size());
  
  if (mTicks)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<mTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      tickPositions.append(coordToPixel(mTickVector.at(i)));
      if (mTickLabels)
        tickLabels.append(mTickVectorLabels.at(i));
    }
  }
  // transfer all properties of this axis to QCPAxisPainterPrivate which it needs to calculate the size.
  // Note that some axis painter properties are already set by direct feed-through with QCPAxis setters
  mAxisPainter->type = mAxisType;
  mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont();
  mAxisPainter->label = mLabel;
  mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = mTickLabelFont;
  mAxisPainter->axisRect = mAxisRect->rect();
  mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport();
  mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions;
  mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels;
  margin += mAxisPainter->size();
  margin += mPadding;
 
  mCachedMargin = margin;
  mCachedMarginValid = true;
  return margin;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAxis::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectAxes;
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisPainterPrivate
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAxisPainterPrivate
 
  \internal
  \brief (Private)
  
  This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface.
  
  It is used by QCPAxis to do the low-level drawing of axis backbone, tick marks, tick labels and
  axis label. It also buffers the labels to reduce replot times. The parameters are configured by
  directly accessing the public member variables.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs a QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance. Make sure to not create a new instance on every
  redraw, to utilize the caching mechanisms.
*/
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::QCPAxisPainterPrivate(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  type(QCPAxis::atLeft),
  basePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  lowerEnding(QCPLineEnding::esNone),
  upperEnding(QCPLineEnding::esNone),
  labelPadding(0),
  tickLabelPadding(0),
  tickLabelRotation(0),
  tickLabelSide(QCPAxis::lsOutside),
  substituteExponent(true),
  numberMultiplyCross(false),
  tickLengthIn(5),
  tickLengthOut(0),
  subTickLengthIn(2),
  subTickLengthOut(0),
  tickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  subTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  offset(0),
  abbreviateDecimalPowers(false),
  reversedEndings(false),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot),
  mLabelCache(16) // cache at most 16 (tick) labels
{
}
 
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::~QCPAxisPainterPrivate()
{
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the axis with the specified \a painter.
  
  The selection boxes (mAxisSelectionBox, mTickLabelsSelectionBox, mLabelSelectionBox) are set
  here, too.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QByteArray newHash = generateLabelParameterHash();
  if (newHash != mLabelParameterHash)
  {
    mLabelCache.clear();
    mLabelParameterHash = newHash;
  }
  
  QPoint origin;
  switch (type)
  {
    case QCPAxis::atLeft:   origin = axisRect.bottomLeft() +QPoint(-offset, 0); break;
    case QCPAxis::atRight:  origin = axisRect.bottomRight()+QPoint(+offset, 0); break;
    case QCPAxis::atTop:    origin = axisRect.topLeft()    +QPoint(0, -offset); break;
    case QCPAxis::atBottom: origin = axisRect.bottomLeft() +QPoint(0, +offset); break;
  }
 
  double xCor = 0, yCor = 0; // paint system correction, for pixel exact matches (affects baselines and ticks of top/right axes)
  switch (type)
  {
    case QCPAxis::atTop: yCor = -1; break;
    case QCPAxis::atRight: xCor = 1; break;
    default: break;
  }
  int margin = 0;
  // draw baseline:
  QLineF baseLine;
  painter->setPen(basePen);
  if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
    baseLine.setPoints(origin+QPointF(xCor, yCor), origin+QPointF(axisRect.width()+xCor, yCor));
  else
    baseLine.setPoints(origin+QPointF(xCor, yCor), origin+QPointF(xCor, -axisRect.height()+yCor));
  if (reversedEndings)
    baseLine = QLineF(baseLine.p2(), baseLine.p1()); // won't make a difference for line itself, but for line endings later
  painter->drawLine(baseLine);
  
  // draw ticks:
  if (!tickPositions.isEmpty())
  {
    painter->setPen(tickPen);
    int tickDir = (type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight) ? -1 : 1; // direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left axis and left for right axis)
    if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
    {
      foreach (double tickPos, tickPositions)
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(tickPos+xCor, origin.y()-tickLengthOut*tickDir+yCor, tickPos+xCor, origin.y()+tickLengthIn*tickDir+yCor));
    } else
    {
      foreach (double tickPos, tickPositions)
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(origin.x()-tickLengthOut*tickDir+xCor, tickPos+yCor, origin.x()+tickLengthIn*tickDir+xCor, tickPos+yCor));
    }
  }
  
  // draw subticks:
  if (!subTickPositions.isEmpty())
  {
    painter->setPen(subTickPen);
    // direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left axis and left for right axis)
    int tickDir = (type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight) ? -1 : 1;
    if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
    {
      foreach (double subTickPos, subTickPositions)
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(subTickPos+xCor, origin.y()-subTickLengthOut*tickDir+yCor, subTickPos+xCor, origin.y()+subTickLengthIn*tickDir+yCor));
    } else
    {
      foreach (double subTickPos, subTickPositions)
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(origin.x()-subTickLengthOut*tickDir+xCor, subTickPos+yCor, origin.x()+subTickLengthIn*tickDir+xCor, subTickPos+yCor));
    }
  }
  margin += qMax(0, qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut));
  
  // draw axis base endings:
  bool antialiasingBackup = painter->antialiasing();
  painter->setAntialiasing(true); // always want endings to be antialiased, even if base and ticks themselves aren't
  painter->setBrush(QBrush(basePen.color()));
  QCPVector2D baseLineVector(baseLine.dx(), baseLine.dy());
  if (lowerEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
    lowerEnding.draw(painter, QCPVector2D(baseLine.p1())-baseLineVector.normalized()*lowerEnding.realLength()*(lowerEnding.inverted()?-1:1), -baseLineVector);
  if (upperEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
    upperEnding.draw(painter, QCPVector2D(baseLine.p2())+baseLineVector.normalized()*upperEnding.realLength()*(upperEnding.inverted()?-1:1), baseLineVector);
  painter->setAntialiasing(antialiasingBackup);
  
  // tick labels:
  QRect oldClipRect;
  if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside) // if using inside labels, clip them to the axis rect
  {
    oldClipRect = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect();
    painter->setClipRect(axisRect);
  }
  QSize tickLabelsSize(0, 0); // size of largest tick label, for offset calculation of axis label
  if (!tickLabels.isEmpty())
  {
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
      margin += tickLabelPadding;
    painter->setFont(tickLabelFont);
    painter->setPen(QPen(tickLabelColor));
    const int maxLabelIndex = qMin(tickPositions.size(), tickLabels.size());
    int distanceToAxis = margin;
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)
      distanceToAxis = -(qMax(tickLengthIn, subTickLengthIn)+tickLabelPadding);
    for (int i=0; i<maxLabelIndex; ++i)
      placeTickLabel(painter, tickPositions.at(i), distanceToAxis, tickLabels.at(i), &tickLabelsSize);
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
      margin += (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width();
  }
  if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)
    painter->setClipRect(oldClipRect);
  
  // axis label:
  QRect labelBounds;
  if (!label.isEmpty())
  {
    margin += labelPadding;
    painter->setFont(labelFont);
    painter->setPen(QPen(labelColor));
    labelBounds = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, label);
    if (type == QCPAxis::atLeft)
    {
      QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
      painter->translate((origin.x()-margin-labelBounds.height()), origin.y());
      painter->rotate(-90);
      painter->drawText(0, 0, axisRect.height(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label);
      painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
    }
    else if (type == QCPAxis::atRight)
    {
      QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
      painter->translate((origin.x()+margin+labelBounds.height()), origin.y()-axisRect.height());
      painter->rotate(90);
      painter->drawText(0, 0, axisRect.height(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label);
      painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
    }
    else if (type == QCPAxis::atTop)
      painter->drawText(origin.x(), origin.y()-margin-labelBounds.height(), axisRect.width(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label);
    else if (type == QCPAxis::atBottom)
      painter->drawText(origin.x(), origin.y()+margin, axisRect.width(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label);
  }
  
  // set selection boxes:
  int selectionTolerance = 0;
  if (mParentPlot)
    selectionTolerance = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance();
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "mParentPlot is null";
  int selAxisOutSize = qMax(qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut), selectionTolerance);
  int selAxisInSize = selectionTolerance;
  int selTickLabelSize;
  int selTickLabelOffset;
  if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
  {
    selTickLabelSize = (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width());
    selTickLabelOffset = qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)+tickLabelPadding;
  } else
  {
    selTickLabelSize = -(QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width());
    selTickLabelOffset = -(qMax(tickLengthIn, subTickLengthIn)+tickLabelPadding);
  }
  int selLabelSize = labelBounds.height();
  int selLabelOffset = qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)+(!tickLabels.isEmpty() && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside ? tickLabelPadding+selTickLabelSize : 0)+labelPadding;
  if (type == QCPAxis::atLeft)
  {
    mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selAxisOutSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selAxisInSize, axisRect.bottom());
    mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selTickLabelOffset-selTickLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()-selTickLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom());
    mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selLabelOffset-selLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()-selLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom());
  } else if (type == QCPAxis::atRight)
  {
    mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selAxisInSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selAxisOutSize, axisRect.bottom());
    mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()+selTickLabelOffset+selTickLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selTickLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom());
    mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()+selLabelOffset+selLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom());
  } else if (type == QCPAxis::atTop)
  {
    mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selAxisOutSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selAxisInSize);
    mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selTickLabelOffset-selTickLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()-selTickLabelOffset);
    mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selLabelOffset-selLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()-selLabelOffset);
  } else if (type == QCPAxis::atBottom)
  {
    mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selAxisInSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selAxisOutSize);
    mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()+selTickLabelOffset+selTickLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selTickLabelOffset);
    mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()+selLabelOffset+selLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selLabelOffset);
  }
  mAxisSelectionBox = mAxisSelectionBox.normalized();
  mTickLabelsSelectionBox = mTickLabelsSelectionBox.normalized();
  mLabelSelectionBox = mLabelSelectionBox.normalized();
  // draw hitboxes for debug purposes:
  //painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  //painter->drawRects(QVector<QRect>() << mAxisSelectionBox << mTickLabelsSelectionBox << mLabelSelectionBox);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the size ("margin" in QCPAxisRect context, so measured perpendicular to the axis backbone
  direction) needed to fit the axis.
*/
int QCPAxisPainterPrivate::size()
{
  int result = 0;
 
  QByteArray newHash = generateLabelParameterHash();
  if (newHash != mLabelParameterHash)
  {
    mLabelCache.clear();
    mLabelParameterHash = newHash;
  }
  
  // get length of tick marks pointing outwards:
  if (!tickPositions.isEmpty())
    result += qMax(0, qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut));
  
  // calculate size of tick labels:
  if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
  {
    QSize tickLabelsSize(0, 0);
    if (!tickLabels.isEmpty())
    {
      foreach (const QString &tickLabel, tickLabels)
        getMaxTickLabelSize(tickLabelFont, tickLabel, &tickLabelsSize);
      result += QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width();
    result += tickLabelPadding;
    }
  }
  
  // calculate size of axis label (only height needed, because left/right labels are rotated by 90 degrees):
  if (!label.isEmpty())
  {
    QFontMetrics fontMetrics(labelFont);
    QRect bounds;
    bounds = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignVCenter, label);
    result += bounds.height() + labelPadding;
  }
 
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Clears the internal label cache. Upon the next \ref draw, all labels will be created new. This
  method is called automatically in \ref draw, if any parameters have changed that invalidate the
  cached labels, such as font, color, etc.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::clearCache()
{
  mLabelCache.clear();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a hash that allows uniquely identifying whether the label parameters have changed such
  that the cached labels must be refreshed (\ref clearCache). It is used in \ref draw. If the
  return value of this method hasn't changed since the last redraw, the respective label parameters
  haven't changed and cached labels may be used.
*/
QByteArray QCPAxisPainterPrivate::generateLabelParameterHash() const
{
  QByteArray result;
  result.append(QByteArray::number(mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio()));
  result.append(QByteArray::number(tickLabelRotation));
  result.append(QByteArray::number(int(tickLabelSide)));
  result.append(QByteArray::number(int(substituteExponent)));
  result.append(QByteArray::number(int(numberMultiplyCross)));
  result.append(tickLabelColor.name().toLatin1()+QByteArray::number(tickLabelColor.alpha(), 16));
  result.append(tickLabelFont.toString().toLatin1());
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws a single tick label with the provided \a painter, utilizing the internal label cache to
  significantly speed up drawing of labels that were drawn in previous calls. The tick label is
  always bound to an axis, the distance to the axis is controllable via \a distanceToAxis in
  pixels. The pixel position in the axis direction is passed in the \a position parameter. Hence
  for the bottom axis, \a position would indicate the horizontal pixel position (not coordinate),
  at which the label should be drawn.
  
  In order to later draw the axis label in a place that doesn't overlap with the tick labels, the
  largest tick label size is needed. This is acquired by passing a \a tickLabelsSize to the \ref
  drawTickLabel calls during the process of drawing all tick labels of one axis. In every call, \a
  tickLabelsSize is expanded, if the drawn label exceeds the value \a tickLabelsSize currently
  holds.
  
  The label is drawn with the font and pen that are currently set on the \a painter. To draw
  superscripted powers, the font is temporarily made smaller by a fixed factor (see \ref
  getTickLabelData).
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::placeTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double position, int distanceToAxis, const QString &text, QSize *tickLabelsSize)
{
  // warning: if you change anything here, also adapt getMaxTickLabelSize() accordingly!
  if (text.isEmpty()) return;
  QSize finalSize;
  QPointF labelAnchor;
  switch (type)
  {
    case QCPAxis::atLeft:   labelAnchor = QPointF(axisRect.left()-distanceToAxis-offset, position); break;
    case QCPAxis::atRight:  labelAnchor = QPointF(axisRect.right()+distanceToAxis+offset, position); break;
    case QCPAxis::atTop:    labelAnchor = QPointF(position, axisRect.top()-distanceToAxis-offset); break;
    case QCPAxis::atBottom: labelAnchor = QPointF(position, axisRect.bottom()+distanceToAxis+offset); break;
  }
  if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching)) // label caching enabled
  {
    CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.take(text); // attempt to get label from cache
    if (!cachedLabel)  // no cached label existed, create it
    {
      cachedLabel = new CachedLabel;
      TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(painter->font(), text);
      cachedLabel->offset = getTickLabelDrawOffset(labelData)+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft();
      if (!qFuzzyCompare(1.0, mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio()))
      {
        cachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size()*mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio());
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
#  ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_FLOAT
        cachedLabel->pixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(mParentPlot->devicePixelRatioF());
#  else
        cachedLabel->pixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(mParentPlot->devicePixelRatio());
#  endif
#endif
      } else
        cachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size());
      cachedLabel->pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent);
      QCPPainter cachePainter(&cachedLabel->pixmap);
      cachePainter.setPen(painter->pen());
      drawTickLabel(&cachePainter, -labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().x(), -labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().y(), labelData);
    }
    // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels):
    bool labelClippedByBorder = false;
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
    {
      if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
        labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x()+cachedLabel->pixmap.width()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.right() || labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x() < viewportRect.left();
      else
        labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y()+cachedLabel->pixmap.height()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.bottom() || labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y() < viewportRect.top();
    }
    if (!labelClippedByBorder)
    {
      painter->drawPixmap(labelAnchor+cachedLabel->offset, cachedLabel->pixmap);
      finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio();
    }
    mLabelCache.insert(text, cachedLabel); // return label to cache or insert for the first time if newly created
  } else // label caching disabled, draw text directly on surface:
  {
    TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(painter->font(), text);
    QPointF finalPosition = labelAnchor + getTickLabelDrawOffset(labelData);
    // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels):
     bool labelClippedByBorder = false;
    if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside)
    {
      if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal)
        labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.x()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.width()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left()) > viewportRect.right() || finalPosition.x()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left() < viewportRect.left();
      else
        labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.y()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.height()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top()) > viewportRect.bottom() || finalPosition.y()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top() < viewportRect.top();
    }
    if (!labelClippedByBorder)
    {
      drawTickLabel(painter, finalPosition.x(), finalPosition.y(), labelData);
      finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
    }
  }
  
  // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
  if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width())
    tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width());
  if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height())
    tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height());
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
  
  Draws the tick label specified in \a labelData with \a painter at the pixel positions \a x and \a
  y. This function is used by \ref placeTickLabel to create new tick labels for the cache, or to
  directly draw the labels on the QCustomPlot surface when label caching is disabled, i.e. when
  QCP::phCacheLabels plotting hint is not set.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::drawTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y, const TickLabelData &labelData) const
{
  // backup painter settings that we're about to change:
  QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
  QFont oldFont = painter->font();
  
  // transform painter to position/rotation:
  painter->translate(x, y);
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation))
    painter->rotate(tickLabelRotation);
  
  // draw text:
  if (!labelData.expPart.isEmpty()) // indicator that beautiful powers must be used
  {
    painter->setFont(labelData.baseFont);
    painter->drawText(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.basePart);
    if (!labelData.suffixPart.isEmpty())
      painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1+labelData.expBounds.width(), 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.suffixPart);
    painter->setFont(labelData.expFont);
    painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1, 0, labelData.expBounds.width(), labelData.expBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip,  labelData.expPart);
  } else
  {
    painter->setFont(labelData.baseFont);
    painter->drawText(0, 0, labelData.totalBounds.width(), labelData.totalBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, labelData.basePart);
  }
  
  // reset painter settings to what it was before:
  painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
  painter->setFont(oldFont);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
  
  Transforms the passed \a text and \a font to a tickLabelData structure that can then be further
  processed by \ref getTickLabelDrawOffset and \ref drawTickLabel. It splits the text into base and
  exponent if necessary (member substituteExponent) and calculates appropriate bounding boxes.
*/
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::TickLabelData QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelData(const QFont &font, const QString &text) const
{
  TickLabelData result;
  
  // determine whether beautiful decimal powers should be used
  bool useBeautifulPowers = false;
  int ePos = -1; // first index of exponent part, text before that will be basePart, text until eLast will be expPart
  int eLast = -1; // last index of exponent part, rest of text after this will be suffixPart
  if (substituteExponent)
  {
    ePos = text.indexOf(QString(mParentPlot->locale().exponential()));
    if (ePos > 0 && text.at(ePos-1).isDigit())
    {
      eLast = ePos;
      while (eLast+1 < text.size() && (text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('+') || text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('-') || text.at(eLast+1).isDigit()))
        ++eLast;
      if (eLast > ePos) // only if also to right of 'e' is a digit/+/- interpret it as beautifiable power
        useBeautifulPowers = true;
    }
  }
  
  // calculate text bounding rects and do string preparation for beautiful decimal powers:
  result.baseFont = font;
  if (result.baseFont.pointSizeF() > 0) // might return -1 if specified with setPixelSize, in that case we can't do correction in next line
    result.baseFont.setPointSizeF(result.baseFont.pointSizeF()+0.05); // QFontMetrics.boundingRect has a bug for exact point sizes that make the results oscillate due to internal rounding
  if (useBeautifulPowers)
  {
    // split text into parts of number/symbol that will be drawn normally and part that will be drawn as exponent:
    result.basePart = text.left(ePos);
    result.suffixPart = text.mid(eLast+1); // also drawn normally but after exponent
    // in log scaling, we want to turn "1*10^n" into "10^n", else add multiplication sign and decimal base:
    if (abbreviateDecimalPowers && result.basePart == QLatin1String("1"))
      result.basePart = QLatin1String("10");
    else
      result.basePart += (numberMultiplyCross ? QString(QChar(215)) : QString(QChar(183))) + QLatin1String("10");
    result.expPart = text.mid(ePos+1, eLast-ePos);
    // clip "+" and leading zeros off expPart:
    while (result.expPart.length() > 2 && result.expPart.at(1) == QLatin1Char('0')) // length > 2 so we leave one zero when numberFormatChar is 'e'
      result.expPart.remove(1, 1);
    if (!result.expPart.isEmpty() && result.expPart.at(0) == QLatin1Char('+'))
      result.expPart.remove(0, 1);
    // prepare smaller font for exponent:
    result.expFont = font;
    if (result.expFont.pointSize() > 0)
      result.expFont.setPointSize(int(result.expFont.pointSize()*0.75));
    else
      result.expFont.setPixelSize(int(result.expFont.pixelSize()*0.75));
    // calculate bounding rects of base part(s), exponent part and total one:
    result.baseBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.basePart);
    result.expBounds = QFontMetrics(result.expFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.expPart);
    if (!result.suffixPart.isEmpty())
      result.suffixBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.suffixPart);
    result.totalBounds = result.baseBounds.adjusted(0, 0, result.expBounds.width()+result.suffixBounds.width()+2, 0); // +2 consists of the 1 pixel spacing between base and exponent (see drawTickLabel) and an extra pixel to include AA
  } else // useBeautifulPowers == false
  {
    result.basePart = text;
    result.totalBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, result.basePart);
  }
  result.totalBounds.moveTopLeft(QPoint(0, 0)); // want bounding box aligned top left at origin, independent of how it was created, to make further processing simpler
  
  // calculate possibly different bounding rect after rotation:
  result.rotatedTotalBounds = result.totalBounds;
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation))
  {
    QTransform transform;
    transform.rotate(tickLabelRotation);
    result.rotatedTotalBounds = transform.mapRect(result.rotatedTotalBounds);
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
  
  Calculates the offset at which the top left corner of the specified tick label shall be drawn.
  The offset is relative to a point right next to the tick the label belongs to.
  
  This function is thus responsible for e.g. centering tick labels under ticks and positioning them
  appropriately when they are rotated.
*/
QPointF QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelDrawOffset(const TickLabelData &labelData) const
{
  /*
    calculate label offset from base point at tick (non-trivial, for best visual appearance): short
    explanation for bottom axis: The anchor, i.e. the point in the label that is placed
    horizontally under the corresponding tick is always on the label side that is closer to the
    axis (e.g. the left side of the text when we're rotating clockwise). On that side, the height
    is halved and the resulting point is defined the anchor. This way, a 90 degree rotated text
    will be centered under the tick (i.e. displaced horizontally by half its height). At the same
    time, a 45 degree rotated text will "point toward" its tick, as is typical for rotated tick
    labels.
  */
  bool doRotation = !qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation);
  bool flip = qFuzzyCompare(qAbs(tickLabelRotation), 90.0); // perfect +/-90 degree flip. Indicates vertical label centering on vertical axes.
  double radians = tickLabelRotation/180.0*M_PI;
  double x = 0;
  double y = 0;
  if ((type == QCPAxis::atLeft && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atRight && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at right side of tick label
  {
    if (doRotation)
    {
      if (tickLabelRotation > 0)
      {
        x = -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width();
        y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
      } else
      {
        x = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height();
        y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : +qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
      }
    } else
    {
      x = -labelData.totalBounds.width();
      y = -labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
    }
  } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atRight && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atLeft && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at left side of tick label
  {
    if (doRotation)
    {
      if (tickLabelRotation > 0)
      {
        x = +qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height();
        y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
      } else
      {
        x = 0;
        y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
      }
    } else
    {
      x = 0;
      y = -labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
    }
  } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atTop && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atBottom && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at bottom side of tick label
  {
    if (doRotation)
    {
      if (tickLabelRotation > 0)
      {
        x = -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()+qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
        y = -qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height();
      } else
      {
        x = -qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
        y = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height();
      }
    } else
    {
      x = -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0;
      y = -labelData.totalBounds.height();
    }
  } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atBottom && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atTop && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at top side of tick label
  {
    if (doRotation)
    {
      if (tickLabelRotation > 0)
      {
        x = +qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
        y = 0;
      } else
      {
        x = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0;
        y = +qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width();
      }
    } else
    {
      x = -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0;
      y = 0;
    }
  }
  
  return {x, y};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Simulates the steps done by \ref placeTickLabel by calculating bounding boxes of the text label
  to be drawn, depending on number format etc. Since only the largest tick label is wanted for the
  margin calculation, the passed \a tickLabelsSize is only expanded, if it's currently set to a
  smaller width/height.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getMaxTickLabelSize(const QFont &font, const QString &text,  QSize *tickLabelsSize) const
{
  // note: this function must return the same tick label sizes as the placeTickLabel function.
  QSize finalSize;
  if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && mLabelCache.contains(text)) // label caching enabled and have cached label
  {
    const CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.object(text);
    finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio();
  } else // label caching disabled or no label with this text cached:
  {
    TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(font, text);
    finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
  }
  
  // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
  if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width())
    tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width());
  if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height())
    tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height());
}
/* end of 'src/axis/axis.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/scatterstyle.cpp'    */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 17466 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPScatterStyle
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPScatterStyle
  \brief Represents the visual appearance of scatter points
  
  This class holds information about shape, color and size of scatter points. In plottables like
  QCPGraph it is used to store how scatter points shall be drawn. For example, \ref
  QCPGraph::setScatterStyle takes a QCPScatterStyle instance.
  
  A scatter style consists of a shape (\ref setShape), a line color (\ref setPen) and possibly a
  fill (\ref setBrush), if the shape provides a fillable area. Further, the size of the shape can
  be controlled with \ref setSize.
 
  \section QCPScatterStyle-defining Specifying a scatter style
  
  You can set all these configurations either by calling the respective functions on an instance:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-creation-1
  
  Or you can use one of the various constructors that take different parameter combinations, making
  it easy to specify a scatter style in a single call, like so:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-creation-2
  
  \section QCPScatterStyle-undefinedpen Leaving the color/pen up to the plottable
  
  There are two constructors which leave the pen undefined: \ref QCPScatterStyle() and \ref
  QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size). If those constructors are used, a call to \ref
  isPenDefined will return false. It leads to scatter points that inherit the pen from the
  plottable that uses the scatter style. Thus, if such a scatter style is passed to QCPGraph, the line
  color of the graph (\ref QCPGraph::setPen) will be used by the scatter points. This makes
  it very convenient to set up typical scatter settings:
  
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-shortcreation
 
  Notice that it wasn't even necessary to explicitly call a QCPScatterStyle constructor. This works
  because QCPScatterStyle provides a constructor that can transform a \ref ScatterShape directly
  into a QCPScatterStyle instance (that's the \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size)
  constructor with a default for \a size). In those cases, C++ allows directly supplying a \ref
  ScatterShape, where actually a QCPScatterStyle is expected.
  
  \section QCPScatterStyle-custompath-and-pixmap Custom shapes and pixmaps
  
  QCPScatterStyle supports drawing custom shapes and arbitrary pixmaps as scatter points.
 
  For custom shapes, you can provide a QPainterPath with the desired shape to the \ref
  setCustomPath function or call the constructor that takes a painter path. The scatter shape will
  automatically be set to \ref ssCustom.
  
  For pixmaps, you call \ref setPixmap with the desired QPixmap. Alternatively you can use the
  constructor that takes a QPixmap. The scatter shape will automatically be set to \ref ssPixmap.
  Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isNone() const
  
  Returns whether the scatter shape is \ref ssNone.
  
  \see setShape
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isPenDefined() const
  
  Returns whether a pen has been defined for this scatter style.
  
  The pen is undefined if a constructor is called that does not carry \a pen as parameter. Those
  are \ref QCPScatterStyle() and \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size). If the pen
  is undefined, the pen of the respective plottable will be used for drawing scatters.
  
  If a pen was defined for this scatter style instance, and you now wish to undefine the pen, call
  \ref undefinePen.
  
  \see setPen
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with size set to 6. No shape, pen or brush is defined.
  
  Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter color will be inherited
  from the plottable that uses this scatter style.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle() :
  mSize(6),
  mShape(ssNone),
  mPen(Qt::NoPen),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mPenDefined(false)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape and size to \a size. No pen or
  brush is defined.
  
  Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter color will be inherited
  from the plottable that uses this scatter style.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size) :
  mSize(size),
  mShape(shape),
  mPen(Qt::NoPen),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mPenDefined(false)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen color set to \a color,
  and size to \a size. No brush is defined, i.e. the scatter point will not be filled.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, double size) :
  mSize(size),
  mShape(shape),
  mPen(QPen(color)),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mPenDefined(true)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen color set to \a color,
  the brush color to \a fill (with a solid pattern), and size to \a size.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor &fill, double size) :
  mSize(size),
  mShape(shape),
  mPen(QPen(color)),
  mBrush(QBrush(fill)),
  mPenDefined(true)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen set to \a pen, the
  brush to \a brush, and size to \a size.
  
  \warning In some cases it might be tempting to directly use a pen style like <tt>Qt::NoPen</tt> as \a pen
  and a color like <tt>Qt::blue</tt> as \a brush. Notice however, that the corresponding call\n
  <tt>QCPScatterStyle(QCPScatterShape::ssCircle, Qt::NoPen, Qt::blue, 5)</tt>\n
  doesn't necessarily lead C++ to use this constructor in some cases, but might mistake
  <tt>Qt::NoPen</tt> for a QColor and use the
  \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor &fill, double size)
  constructor instead (which will lead to an unexpected look of the scatter points). To prevent
  this, be more explicit with the parameter types. For example, use <tt>QBrush(Qt::blue)</tt>
  instead of just <tt>Qt::blue</tt>, to clearly point out to the compiler that this constructor is
  wanted.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush, double size) :
  mSize(size),
  mShape(shape),
  mPen(pen),
  mBrush(brush),
  mPenDefined(pen.style() != Qt::NoPen)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance which will show the specified \a pixmap. The scatter shape
  is set to \ref ssPixmap.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(const QPixmap &pixmap) :
  mSize(5),
  mShape(ssPixmap),
  mPen(Qt::NoPen),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mPixmap(pixmap),
  mPenDefined(false)
{
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with a custom shape that is defined via \a customPath. The
  scatter shape is set to \ref ssCustom.
  
  The custom shape line will be drawn with \a pen and filled with \a brush. The size has a slightly
  different meaning than for built-in scatter points: The custom path will be drawn scaled by a
  factor of \a size/6.0. Since the default \a size is 6, the custom path will appear in its
  original size by default. To for example double the size of the path, set \a size to 12.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(const QPainterPath &customPath, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush, double size) :
  mSize(size),
  mShape(ssCustom),
  mPen(pen),
  mBrush(brush),
  mCustomPath(customPath),
  mPenDefined(pen.style() != Qt::NoPen)
{
}
 
/*!
  Copies the specified \a properties from the \a other scatter style to this scatter style.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setFromOther(const QCPScatterStyle &other, ScatterProperties properties)
{
  if (properties.testFlag(spPen))
  {
    setPen(other.pen());
    if (!other.isPenDefined())
      undefinePen();
  }
  if (properties.testFlag(spBrush))
    setBrush(other.brush());
  if (properties.testFlag(spSize))
    setSize(other.size());
  if (properties.testFlag(spShape))
  {
    setShape(other.shape());
    if (other.shape() == ssPixmap)
      setPixmap(other.pixmap());
    else if (other.shape() == ssCustom)
      setCustomPath(other.customPath());
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the size (pixel diameter) of the drawn scatter points to \a size.
  
  \see setShape
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setSize(double size)
{
  mSize = size;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the shape to \a shape.
  
  Note that the calls \ref setPixmap and \ref setCustomPath automatically set the shape to \ref
  ssPixmap and \ref ssCustom, respectively.
  
  \see setSize
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setShape(QCPScatterStyle::ScatterShape shape)
{
  mShape = shape;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw scatter points to \a pen.
  
  If the pen was previously undefined (see \ref isPenDefined), the pen is considered defined after
  a call to this function, even if \a pen is <tt>Qt::NoPen</tt>. If you have defined a pen
  previously by calling this function and now wish to undefine the pen, call \ref undefinePen.
  
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPenDefined = true;
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill scatter points to \a brush. Note that not all scatter
  shapes have fillable areas. For example, \ref ssPlus does not while \ref ssCircle does.
  
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pixmap that will be drawn as scatter point to \a pixmap.
  
  Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap.
  
  The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssPixmap.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
  setShape(ssPixmap);
  mPixmap = pixmap;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the custom shape that will be drawn as scatter point to \a customPath.
  
  The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssCustom.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setCustomPath(const QPainterPath &customPath)
{
  setShape(ssCustom);
  mCustomPath = customPath;
}
 
/*!
  Sets this scatter style to have an undefined pen (see \ref isPenDefined for what an undefined pen
  implies).
 
  A call to \ref setPen will define a pen.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::undefinePen()
{
  mPenDefined = false;
}
 
/*!
  Applies the pen and the brush of this scatter style to \a painter. If this scatter style has an
  undefined pen (\ref isPenDefined), sets the pen of \a painter to \a defaultPen instead.
  
  This function is used by plottables (or any class that wants to draw scatters) just before a
  number of scatters with this style shall be drawn with the \a painter.
  
  \see drawShape
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::applyTo(QCPPainter *painter, const QPen &defaultPen) const
{
  painter->setPen(mPenDefined ? mPen : defaultPen);
  painter->setBrush(mBrush);
}
 
/*!
  Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a pos.
  
  This function does not modify the pen or the brush on the painter, as \ref applyTo is meant to be
  called before scatter points are drawn with \ref drawShape.
  
  \see applyTo
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &pos) const
{
  drawShape(painter, pos.x(), pos.y());
}
 
/*! \overload
  Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a x and \a y.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y) const
{
  double w = mSize/2.0;
  switch (mShape)
  {
    case ssNone: break;
    case ssDot:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(x, y), QPointF(x+0.0001, y));
      break;
    }
    case ssCross:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y-w, x+w, y+w));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y+w, x+w, y-w));
      break;
    }
    case ssPlus:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w,   y, x+w,   y));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(  x, y+w,   x, y-w));
      break;
    }
    case ssCircle:
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x , y), w, w);
      break;
    }
    case ssDisc:
    {
      QBrush b = painter->brush();
      painter->setBrush(painter->pen().color());
      painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x , y), w, w);
      painter->setBrush(b);
      break;
    }
    case ssSquare:
    {
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize));
      break;
    }
    case ssDiamond:
    {
      QPointF lineArray[4] = {QPointF(x-w,   y),
                              QPointF(  x, y-w),
                              QPointF(x+w,   y),
                              QPointF(  x, y+w)};
      painter->drawPolygon(lineArray, 4);
      break;
    }
    case ssStar:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w,   y, x+w,   y));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(  x, y+w,   x, y-w));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y-w*0.707, x+w*0.707, y+w*0.707));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y+w*0.707, x+w*0.707, y-w*0.707));
      break;
    }
    case ssTriangle:
    {
      QPointF lineArray[3] = {QPointF(x-w, y+0.755*w),
                              QPointF(x+w, y+0.755*w),
                              QPointF(  x, y-0.977*w)};
      painter->drawPolygon(lineArray, 3);
      break;
    }
    case ssTriangleInverted:
    {
      QPointF lineArray[3] = {QPointF(x-w, y-0.755*w),
                              QPointF(x+w, y-0.755*w),
                              QPointF(  x, y+0.977*w)};
      painter->drawPolygon(lineArray, 3);
      break;
    }
    case ssCrossSquare:
    {
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y-w, x+w*0.95, y+w*0.95));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y+w*0.95, x+w*0.95, y-w));
      break;
    }
    case ssPlusSquare:
    {
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w,   y, x+w*0.95,   y));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(  x, y+w,        x, y-w));
      break;
    }
    case ssCrossCircle:
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w);
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y-w*0.707, x+w*0.670, y+w*0.670));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y+w*0.670, x+w*0.670, y-w*0.707));
      break;
    }
    case ssPlusCircle:
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w);
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w,   y, x+w,   y));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(  x, y+w,   x, y-w));
      break;
    }
    case ssPeace:
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w);
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x, y-w,         x,       y+w));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x,   y, x-w*0.707, y+w*0.707));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(x,   y, x+w*0.707, y+w*0.707));
      break;
    }
    case ssPixmap:
    {
      const double widthHalf = mPixmap.width()*0.5;
      const double heightHalf = mPixmap.height()*0.5;
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 8, 0)
      const QRectF clipRect = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect().adjusted(-widthHalf, -heightHalf, widthHalf, heightHalf);
#else
      const QRectF clipRect = painter->clipBoundingRect().adjusted(-widthHalf, -heightHalf, widthHalf, heightHalf);
#endif
      if (clipRect.contains(x, y))
        painter->drawPixmap(qRound(x-widthHalf), qRound(y-heightHalf), mPixmap);
      break;
    }
    case ssCustom:
    {
      QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
      painter->translate(x, y);
      painter->scale(mSize/6.0, mSize/6.0);
      painter->drawPath(mCustomPath);
      painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
      break;
    }
  }
}
/* end of 'src/scatterstyle.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottable.cpp'       */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 38818 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPSelectionDecorator
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPSelectionDecorator
  \brief Controls how a plottable's data selection is drawn
  
  Each \ref QCPAbstractPlottable instance has one \ref QCPSelectionDecorator (accessible via \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionDecorator) and uses it when drawing selected segments of its data.
  
  The selection decorator controls both pen (\ref setPen) and brush (\ref setBrush), as well as the
  scatter style (\ref setScatterStyle) if the plottable draws scatters. Since a \ref
  QCPScatterStyle is itself composed of different properties such as color shape and size, the
  decorator allows specifying exactly which of those properties shall be used for the selected data
  point, via \ref setUsedScatterProperties.
  
  A \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass instance can be passed to a plottable via \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator, allowing greater customizability of the appearance
  of selected segments.
  
  Use \ref copyFrom to easily transfer the settings of one decorator to another one. This is
  especially useful since plottables take ownership of the passed selection decorator, and thus the
  same decorator instance can not be passed to multiple plottables.
  
  Selection decorators can also themselves perform drawing operations by reimplementing \ref
  drawDecoration, which is called by the plottable's draw method. The base class \ref
  QCPSelectionDecorator does not make use of this however. For example, \ref
  QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket draws brackets around selected data segments.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPSelectionDecorator instance with default values
*/
QCPSelectionDecorator::QCPSelectionDecorator() :
  mPen(QColor(80, 80, 255), 2.5),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mUsedScatterProperties(QCPScatterStyle::spNone),
  mPlottable(nullptr)
{
}
 
QCPSelectionDecorator::~QCPSelectionDecorator()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used by the parent plottable to draw selected data segments.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used by the parent plottable to draw selected data segments.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the scatter style that will be used by the parent plottable to draw scatters in selected
  data segments.
  
  \a usedProperties specifies which parts of the passed \a scatterStyle will be used by the
  plottable. The used properties can also be changed via \ref setUsedScatterProperties.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &scatterStyle, QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties usedProperties)
{
  mScatterStyle = scatterStyle;
  setUsedScatterProperties(usedProperties);
}
 
/*!
  Use this method to define which properties of the scatter style (set via \ref setScatterStyle)
  will be used for selected data segments. All properties of the scatter style that are not
  specified in \a properties will remain as specified in the plottable's original scatter style.
  
  \see QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperty
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::setUsedScatterProperties(const QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties &properties)
{
  mUsedScatterProperties = properties;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen of \a painter to the pen of this selection decorator.
  
  \see applyBrush, getFinalScatterStyle
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::applyPen(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  painter->setPen(mPen);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush of \a painter to the brush of this selection decorator.
  
  \see applyPen, getFinalScatterStyle
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::applyBrush(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  painter->setBrush(mBrush);
}
 
/*!
  Returns the scatter style that the parent plottable shall use for selected scatter points. The
  plottable's original (unselected) scatter style must be passed as \a unselectedStyle. Depending
  on the setting of \ref setUsedScatterProperties, the returned scatter style is a mixture of this
  selecion decorator's scatter style (\ref setScatterStyle), and \a unselectedStyle.
  
  \see applyPen, applyBrush, setScatterStyle
*/
QCPScatterStyle QCPSelectionDecorator::getFinalScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &unselectedStyle) const
{
  QCPScatterStyle result(unselectedStyle);
  result.setFromOther(mScatterStyle, mUsedScatterProperties);
  
  // if style shall inherit pen from plottable (has no own pen defined), give it the selected
  // plottable pen explicitly, so it doesn't use the unselected plottable pen when used in the
  // plottable:
  if (!result.isPenDefined())
    result.setPen(mPen);
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Copies all properties (e.g. color, fill, scatter style) of the \a other selection decorator to
  this selection decorator.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::copyFrom(const QCPSelectionDecorator *other)
{
  setPen(other->pen());
  setBrush(other->brush());
  setScatterStyle(other->scatterStyle(), other->usedScatterProperties());
}
 
/*!
  This method is called by all plottables' draw methods to allow custom selection decorations to be
  drawn. Use the passed \a painter to perform the drawing operations. \a selection carries the data
  selection for which the decoration shall be drawn.
  
  The default base class implementation of \ref QCPSelectionDecorator has no special decoration, so
  this method does nothing.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecorator::drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection)
{
  Q_UNUSED(painter)
  Q_UNUSED(selection)
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is called as soon as a selection decorator is associated with a plottable, by a call
  to \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator. This way the selection decorator can obtain a pointer to the plottable that uses it (e.g. to access
  data points via the \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D interface).
  
  If the selection decorator was already added to a different plottable before, this method aborts
  the registration and returns false.
*/
bool QCPSelectionDecorator::registerWithPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable)
{
  if (!mPlottable)
  {
    mPlottable = plottable;
    return true;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "This selection decorator is already registered with plottable:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(mPlottable);
    return false;
  }
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractPlottable
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAbstractPlottable
  \brief The abstract base class for all data representing objects in a plot.
 
  It defines a very basic interface like name, pen, brush, visibility etc. Since this class is
  abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or create a subclass yourself to
  create new ways of displaying data (see "Creating own plottables" below). Plottables that display
  one-dimensional data (i.e. data points have a single key dimension and one or multiple values at
  each key) are based off of the template subclass \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D, see details
  there.
  
  All further specifics are in the subclasses, for example:
  \li A normal graph with possibly a line and/or scatter points \ref QCPGraph
  (typically created with \ref QCustomPlot::addGraph)
  \li A parametric curve: \ref QCPCurve
  \li A bar chart: \ref QCPBars
  \li A statistical box plot: \ref QCPStatisticalBox
  \li A color encoded two-dimensional map: \ref QCPColorMap
  \li An OHLC/Candlestick chart: \ref QCPFinancial
  
  \section plottables-subclassing Creating own plottables
  
  Subclassing directly from QCPAbstractPlottable is only recommended if you wish to display
  two-dimensional data like \ref QCPColorMap, i.e. two logical key dimensions and one (or more)
  data dimensions. If you want to display data with only one logical key dimension, you should
  rather derive from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D.
  
  If subclassing QCPAbstractPlottable directly, these are the pure virtual functions you must
  implement:
  \li \ref selectTest
  \li \ref draw
  \li \ref drawLegendIcon
  \li \ref getKeyRange
  \li \ref getValueRange
  
  See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do.
  
  For drawing your plot, you can use the \ref coordsToPixels functions to translate a point in plot
  coordinates to pixel coordinates. This function is quite convenient, because it takes the
  orientation of the key and value axes into account for you (x and y are swapped when the key axis
  is vertical and the value axis horizontal). If you are worried about performance (i.e. you need
  to translate many points in a loop like QCPGraph), you can directly use \ref
  QCPAxis::coordToPixel. However, you must then take care about the orientation of the axis
  yourself.
  
  Here are some important members you inherit from QCPAbstractPlottable:
  <table>
  <tr>
    <td>QCustomPlot *\b mParentPlot</td>
    <td>A pointer to the parent QCustomPlot instance. The parent plot is inferred from the axes that are passed in the constructor.</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>QString \b mName</td>
    <td>The name of the plottable.</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>QPen \b mPen</td>
    <td>The generic pen of the plottable. You should use this pen for the most prominent data representing lines in the plottable
        (e.g QCPGraph uses this pen for its graph lines and scatters)</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>QBrush \b mBrush</td>
    <td>The generic brush of the plottable. You should use this brush for the most prominent fillable structures in the plottable
        (e.g. QCPGraph uses this brush to control filling under the graph)</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>QPointer<\ref QCPAxis> \b mKeyAxis, \b mValueAxis</td>
    <td>The key and value axes this plottable is attached to. Call their QCPAxis::coordToPixel functions to translate coordinates
        to pixels in either the key or value dimension. Make sure to check whether the pointer is \c nullptr before using it. If one of
        the axes is null, don't draw the plottable.</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>\ref QCPSelectionDecorator \b mSelectionDecorator</td>
    <td>The currently set selection decorator which specifies how selected data of the plottable shall be drawn and decorated.
        When drawing your data, you must consult this decorator for the appropriate pen/brush before drawing unselected/selected data segments.
        Finally, you should call its \ref QCPSelectionDecorator::drawDecoration method at the end of your \ref draw implementation.</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>\ref QCP::SelectionType \b mSelectable</td>
    <td>In which composition, if at all, this plottable's data may be selected. Enforcing this setting on the data selection is done
        by QCPAbstractPlottable automatically.</td>
  </tr><tr>
    <td>\ref QCPDataSelection \b mSelection</td>
    <td>Holds the current selection state of the plottable's data, i.e. the selected data ranges (\ref QCPDataRange).</td>
  </tr>
  </table>
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPSelectionDecorator *QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionDecorator() const
  
  Provides access to the selection decorator of this plottable. The selection decorator controls
  how selected data ranges are drawn (e.g. their pen color and fill), see \ref
  QCPSelectionDecorator for details.
  
  If you wish to use an own \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass, pass an instance of it to \ref
  setSelectionDecorator.
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPAbstractPlottable::selected() const
  
  Returns true if there are any data points of the plottable currently selected. Use \ref selection
  to retrieve the current \ref QCPDataSelection.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPDataSelection QCPAbstractPlottable::selection() const
  
  Returns a \ref QCPDataSelection encompassing all the data points that are currently selected on
  this plottable.
  
  \see selected, setSelection, setSelectable
*/
 
/*! \fn virtual QCPPlottableInterface1D *QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D()
  
  If this plottable is a one-dimensional plottable, i.e. it implements the \ref
  QCPPlottableInterface1D, returns the \a this pointer with that type. Otherwise (e.g. in the case
  of a \ref QCPColorMap) returns zero.
  
  You can use this method to gain read access to data coordinates while holding a pointer to the
  abstract base class only.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRect &rect) const = 0
  \internal
  
  called by QCPLegend::draw (via QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw) to create a graphical representation
  of this plottable inside \a rect, next to the plottable name.
  
  The passed \a painter has its cliprect set to \a rect, so painting outside of \a rect won't
  appear outside the legend icon border.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const = 0
  
  Returns the coordinate range that all data in this plottable span in the key axis dimension. For
  logarithmic plots, one can set \a inSignDomain to either \ref QCP::sdNegative or \ref
  QCP::sdPositive in order to restrict the returned range to that sign domain. E.g. when only
  negative range is wanted, set \a inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdNegative and all positive points
  will be ignored for range calculation. For no restriction, just set \a inSignDomain to \ref
  QCP::sdBoth (default). \a foundRange is an output parameter that indicates whether a range could
  be found or not. If this is false, you shouldn't use the returned range (e.g. no points in data).
 
  Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since the range returned by
  this function may have size zero (e.g. when there is only one data point). In this case \a
  foundRange would return true, but the returned range is not a valid range in terms of \ref
  QCPRange::validRange.
  
  \see rescaleAxes, getValueRange
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const = 0
  
  Returns the coordinate range that the data points in the specified key range (\a inKeyRange) span
  in the value axis dimension. For logarithmic plots, one can set \a inSignDomain to either \ref
  QCP::sdNegative or \ref QCP::sdPositive in order to restrict the returned range to that sign
  domain. E.g. when only negative range is wanted, set \a inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdNegative and
  all positive points will be ignored for range calculation. For no restriction, just set \a
  inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdBoth (default). \a foundRange is an output parameter that indicates
  whether a range could be found or not. If this is false, you shouldn't use the returned range
  (e.g. no points in data).
  
  If \a inKeyRange has both lower and upper bound set to zero (is equal to <tt>QCPRange()</tt>),
  all data points are considered, without any restriction on the keys.
 
  Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since the range returned by
  this function may have size zero (e.g. when there is only one data point). In this case \a
  foundRange would return true, but the returned range is not a valid range in terms of \ref
  QCPRange::validRange.
  
  \see rescaleAxes, getKeyRange
*/
 
/* end of documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged(bool selected)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this plottable has changed, either by user
  interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelection. The parameter \a selected indicates whether
  there are any points selected or not.
  
  \see selectionChanged(const QCPDataSelection &selection)
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged(const QCPDataSelection &selection)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this plottable has changed, either by user
  interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelection. The parameter \a selection holds the
  currently selected data ranges.
  
  \see selectionChanged(bool selected)
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectableChanged(QCP::SelectionType selectable);
  
  This signal is emitted when the selectability of this plottable has changed.
  
  \see setSelectable
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs an abstract plottable which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as
  its value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance
  and have perpendicular orientations. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding
  message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  Since QCPAbstractPlottable is an abstract class that defines the basic interface to plottables,
  it can't be directly instantiated.
  
  You probably want one of the subclasses like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPCurve instead.
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable::QCPAbstractPlottable(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPLayerable(keyAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), keyAxis->axisRect()),
  mName(),
  mAntialiasedFill(true),
  mAntialiasedScatters(true),
  mPen(Qt::black),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mKeyAxis(keyAxis),
  mValueAxis(valueAxis),
  mSelectable(QCP::stWhole),
  mSelectionDecorator(nullptr)
{
  if (keyAxis->parentPlot() != valueAxis->parentPlot())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Parent plot of keyAxis is not the same as that of valueAxis.";
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == valueAxis->orientation())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keyAxis and valueAxis must be orthogonal to each other.";
  
  mParentPlot->registerPlottable(this);
  setSelectionDecorator(new QCPSelectionDecorator);
}
 
QCPAbstractPlottable::~QCPAbstractPlottable()
{
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
  {
    delete mSelectionDecorator;
    mSelectionDecorator = nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
   The name is the textual representation of this plottable as it is displayed in the legend
   (\ref QCPLegend). It may contain any UTF-8 characters, including newlines.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setName(const QString &name)
{
  mName = name;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether fills of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not.
  
  Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedFill(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedFill = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the scatter symbols of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not.
  
  Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedScatters(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedScatters = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  The pen is used to draw basic lines that make up the plottable representation in the
  plot.
  
  For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws its graph lines with this pen.
 
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  The brush is used to draw basic fills of the plottable representation in the
  plot. The Fill can be a color, gradient or texture, see the usage of QBrush.
  
  For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws the fill under the graph with this brush, when
  it's not set to Qt::NoBrush.
 
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  The key axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is orthogonal
  to the plottable's value axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the case.
  The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and the
  y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
  
  Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref
  QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface).
 
  \see setValueAxis
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setKeyAxis(QCPAxis *axis)
{
  mKeyAxis = axis;
}
 
/*!
  The value axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is
  orthogonal to the plottable's key axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the
  case. The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and
  the y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
 
  Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref
  QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface).
  
  \see setKeyAxis
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setValueAxis(QCPAxis *axis)
{
  mValueAxis = axis;
}
 
 
/*!
  Sets which data ranges of this plottable are selected. Selected data ranges are drawn differently
  (e.g. color) in the plot. This can be controlled via the selection decorator (see \ref
  selectionDecorator).
  
  The entire selection mechanism for plottables is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectPlottables. You only need to call this function when
  you wish to change the selection state programmatically.
  
  Using \ref setSelectable you can further specify for each plottable whether and to which
  granularity it is selectable. If \a selection is not compatible with the current \ref
  QCP::SelectionType set via \ref setSelectable, the resulting selection will be adjusted
  accordingly (see \ref QCPDataSelection::enforceType).
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see setSelectable, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection(QCPDataSelection selection)
{
  selection.enforceType(mSelectable);
  if (mSelection != selection)
  {
    mSelection = selection;
    emit selectionChanged(selected());
    emit selectionChanged(mSelection);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Use this method to set an own QCPSelectionDecorator (subclass) instance. This allows you to
  customize the visual representation of selected data ranges further than by using the default
  QCPSelectionDecorator.
  
  The plottable takes ownership of the \a decorator.
  
  The currently set decorator can be accessed via \ref selectionDecorator.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator(QCPSelectionDecorator *decorator)
{
  if (decorator)
  {
    if (decorator->registerWithPlottable(this))
    {
      delete mSelectionDecorator; // delete old decorator if necessary
      mSelectionDecorator = decorator;
    }
  } else if (mSelectionDecorator) // just clear decorator
  {
    delete mSelectionDecorator;
    mSelectionDecorator = nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether and to which granularity this plottable can be selected.
 
  A selection can happen by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface (When \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables), by dragging a selection rect
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode is \ref QCP::srmSelect), or programmatically by
  calling \ref setSelection.
  
  \see setSelection, QCP::SelectionType
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable(QCP::SelectionType selectable)
{
  if (mSelectable != selectable)
  {
    mSelectable = selectable;
    QCPDataSelection oldSelection = mSelection;
    mSelection.enforceType(mSelectable);
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectable);
    if (mSelection != oldSelection)
    {
      emit selectionChanged(selected());
      emit selectionChanged(mSelection);
    }
  }
}
 
 
/*!
  Convenience function for transforming a key/value pair to pixels on the QCustomPlot surface,
  taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into account (e.g. whether key
  represents x or y).
 
  \a key and \a value are transformed to the coodinates in pixels and are written to \a x and \a y.
 
  \see pixelsToCoords, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels(double key, double value, double &x, double &y) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    x = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key);
    y = valueAxis->coordToPixel(value);
  } else
  {
    y = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key);
    x = valueAxis->coordToPixel(value);
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Transforms the given \a key and \a value to pixel coordinates and returns them in a QPointF.
*/
const QPointF QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels(double key, double value) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(); }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    return QPointF(keyAxis->coordToPixel(key), valueAxis->coordToPixel(value));
  else
    return QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(value), keyAxis->coordToPixel(key));
}
 
/*!
  Convenience function for transforming a x/y pixel pair on the QCustomPlot surface to plot coordinates,
  taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into account (e.g. whether key
  represents x or y).
 
  \a x and \a y are transformed to the plot coodinates and are written to \a key and \a value.
 
  \see coordsToPixels, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords(double x, double y, double &key, double &value) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(x);
    value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(y);
  } else
  {
    key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(y);
    value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(x);
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Returns the pixel input \a pixelPos as plot coordinates \a key and \a value.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords(const QPointF &pixelPos, double &key, double &value) const
{
  pixelsToCoords(pixelPos.x(), pixelPos.y(), key, value);
}
 
/*!
  Rescales the key and value axes associated with this plottable to contain all displayed data, so
  the whole plottable is visible. If the scaling of an axis is logarithmic, rescaleAxes will make
  sure not to rescale to an illegal range i.e. a range containing different signs and/or zero.
  Instead it will stay in the current sign domain and ignore all parts of the plottable that lie
  outside of that domain.
  
  \a onlyEnlarge makes sure the ranges are only expanded, never reduced. So it's possible to show
  multiple plottables in their entirety by multiple calls to rescaleAxes where the first call has
  \a onlyEnlarge set to false (the default), and all subsequent set to true.
  
  \see rescaleKeyAxis, rescaleValueAxis, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes, QCPAxis::rescale
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes(bool onlyEnlarge) const
{
  rescaleKeyAxis(onlyEnlarge);
  rescaleValueAxis(onlyEnlarge);
}
 
/*!
  Rescales the key axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible.
  
  See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleKeyAxis(bool onlyEnlarge) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; return; }
  
  QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth;
  if (keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
    signDomain = (keyAxis->range().upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
  
  bool foundRange;
  QCPRange newRange = getKeyRange(foundRange, signDomain);
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (onlyEnlarge)
      newRange.expand(keyAxis->range());
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-keyAxis->range().size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+keyAxis->range().size()/2.0;
      } else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(keyAxis->range().upper/keyAxis->range().lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(keyAxis->range().upper/keyAxis->range().lower);
      }
    }
    keyAxis->setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Rescales the value axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible. If \a inKeyRange is
  set to true, only the data points which are in the currently visible key axis range are
  considered.
 
  Returns true if the axis was actually scaled. This might not be the case if this plottable has an
  invalid range, e.g. because it has no data points.
 
  See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleValueAxis(bool onlyEnlarge, bool inKeyRange) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth;
  if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
    signDomain = (valueAxis->range().upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
  
  bool foundRange;
  QCPRange newRange = getValueRange(foundRange, signDomain, inKeyRange ? keyAxis->range() : QCPRange());
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (onlyEnlarge)
      newRange.expand(valueAxis->range());
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-valueAxis->range().size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+valueAxis->range().size()/2.0;
      } else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower);
      }
    }
    valueAxis->setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds this plottable to the specified \a legend.
 
  Creates a QCPPlottableLegendItem which is inserted into the legend. Returns true on success, i.e.
  when the legend exists and a legend item associated with this plottable isn't already in the
  legend.
 
  If the plottable needs a more specialized representation in the legend, you can create a
  corresponding subclass of \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem and add it to the legend manually instead
  of calling this method.
 
  \see removeFromLegend, QCPLegend::addItem
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend(QCPLegend *legend)
{
  if (!legend)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null";
    return false;
  }
  if (legend->parentPlot() != mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend isn't in the same QCustomPlot as this plottable";
    return false;
  }
  
  if (!legend->hasItemWithPlottable(this))
  {
    legend->addItem(new QCPPlottableLegendItem(legend, this));
    return true;
  } else
    return false;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds this plottable to the legend of the parent QCustomPlot (\ref QCustomPlot::legend).
 
  \see removeFromLegend
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend()
{
  if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend)
    return false;
  else
    return addToLegend(mParentPlot->legend);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Removes the plottable from the specifed \a legend. This means the \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem
  that is associated with this plottable is removed.
 
  Returns true on success, i.e. if the legend exists and a legend item associated with this
  plottable was found and removed.
 
  \see addToLegend, QCPLegend::removeItem
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend(QCPLegend *legend) const
{
  if (!legend)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null";
    return false;
  }
  
  if (QCPPlottableLegendItem *lip = legend->itemWithPlottable(this))
    return legend->removeItem(lip);
  else
    return false;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Removes the plottable from the legend of the parent QCustomPlot.
 
  \see addToLegend
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend() const
{
  if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend)
    return false;
  else
    return removeFromLegend(mParentPlot->legend);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QRect QCPAbstractPlottable::clipRect() const
{
  if (mKeyAxis && mValueAxis)
    return mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect() & mValueAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect();
  else
    return {};
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectPlottables;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing plottable lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing plottable fills.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \see setAntialiased, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyFillAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedFill, QCP::aeFills);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing plottable scatter points.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyScattersAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedScatters, QCP::aeScatters);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  
  if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone)
  {
    QCPDataSelection newSelection = details.value<QCPDataSelection>();
    QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection;
    if (additive)
    {
      if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // in whole selection mode, we toggle to no selection even if currently unselected point was hit
      {
        if (selected())
          setSelection(QCPDataSelection());
        else
          setSelection(newSelection);
      } else // in all other selection modes we toggle selections of homogeneously selected/unselected segments
      {
        if (mSelection.contains(newSelection)) // if entire newSelection is already selected, toggle selection
          setSelection(mSelection-newSelection);
        else
          setSelection(mSelection+newSelection);
      }
    } else
      setSelection(newSelection);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractPlottable::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone)
  {
    QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection;
    setSelection(QCPDataSelection());
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore;
  }
}
/* end of 'src/plottable.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/item.cpp'            */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 49486 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemAnchor
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemAnchor
  \brief An anchor of an item to which positions can be attached to.
  
  An item (QCPAbstractItem) may have one or more anchors. Unlike QCPItemPosition, an anchor doesn't
  control anything on its item, but provides a way to tie other items via their positions to the
  anchor.
 
  For example, a QCPItemRect is defined by its positions \a topLeft and \a bottomRight.
  Additionally it has various anchors like \a top, \a topRight or \a bottomLeft etc. So you can
  attach the \a start (which is a QCPItemPosition) of a QCPItemLine to one of the anchors by
  calling QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor on \a start, passing the wanted anchor of the
  QCPItemRect. This way the start of the line will now always follow the respective anchor location
  on the rect item.
  
  Note that QCPItemPosition derives from QCPItemAnchor, so every position can also serve as an
  anchor to other positions.
  
  To learn how to provide anchors in your own item subclasses, see the subclassing section of the
  QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn virtual QCPItemPosition *QCPItemAnchor::toQCPItemPosition()
  
  Returns \c nullptr if this instance is merely a QCPItemAnchor, and a valid pointer of type
  QCPItemPosition* if it actually is a QCPItemPosition (which is a subclass of QCPItemAnchor).
  
  This safe downcast functionality could also be achieved with a dynamic_cast. However, QCustomPlot avoids
  dynamic_cast to work with projects that don't have RTTI support enabled (e.g. -fno-rtti flag with
  gcc compiler).
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPItemAnchor. You shouldn't create QCPItemAnchor instances directly, even if
  you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor instead, as
  explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
QCPItemAnchor::QCPItemAnchor(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name, int anchorId) :
  mName(name),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot),
  mParentItem(parentItem),
  mAnchorId(anchorId)
{
}
 
QCPItemAnchor::~QCPItemAnchor()
{
  // unregister as parent at children:
  foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenX.values())
  {
    if (child->parentAnchorX() == this)
      child->setParentAnchorX(nullptr); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenX
  }
  foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenY.values())
  {
    if (child->parentAnchorY() == this)
      child->setParentAnchorY(nullptr); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenY
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemAnchor on the QCustomPlot surface.
  
  The pixel information is internally retrieved via QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition of the
  parent item, QCPItemAnchor is just an intermediary.
*/
QPointF QCPItemAnchor::pixelPosition() const
{
  if (mParentItem)
  {
    if (mAnchorId > -1)
    {
      return mParentItem->anchorPixelPosition(mAnchorId);
    } else
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid anchor id set:" << mAnchorId;
      return {};
    }
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent item set";
    return {};
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Adds \a pos to the childX list of this anchor, which keeps track of which children use this
  anchor as parent anchor for the respective coordinate. This is necessary to notify the children
  prior to destruction of the anchor.
  
  Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::addChildX(QCPItemPosition *pos)
{
  if (!mChildrenX.contains(pos))
    mChildrenX.insert(pos);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos is child already" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(pos);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Removes \a pos from the childX list of this anchor.
  
  Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::removeChildX(QCPItemPosition *pos)
{
  if (!mChildrenX.remove(pos))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos isn't child" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(pos);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Adds \a pos to the childY list of this anchor, which keeps track of which children use this
  anchor as parent anchor for the respective coordinate. This is necessary to notify the children
  prior to destruction of the anchor.
  
  Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::addChildY(QCPItemPosition *pos)
{
  if (!mChildrenY.contains(pos))
    mChildrenY.insert(pos);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos is child already" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(pos);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Removes \a pos from the childY list of this anchor.
  
  Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::removeChildY(QCPItemPosition *pos)
{
  if (!mChildrenY.remove(pos))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos isn't child" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(pos);
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemPosition
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemPosition
  \brief Manages the position of an item.
  
  Every item has at least one public QCPItemPosition member pointer which provides ways to position the
  item on the QCustomPlot surface. Some items have multiple positions, for example QCPItemRect has two:
  \a topLeft and \a bottomRight.
 
  QCPItemPosition has a type (\ref PositionType) that can be set with \ref setType. This type
  defines how coordinates passed to \ref setCoords are to be interpreted, e.g. as absolute pixel
  coordinates, as plot coordinates of certain axes (\ref QCPItemPosition::setAxes), as fractions of
  the axis rect (\ref QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect), etc. For more advanced plots it is also
  possible to assign different types per X/Y coordinate of the position (see \ref setTypeX, \ref
  setTypeY). This way an item could be positioned for example at a fixed pixel distance from the
  top in the Y direction, while following a plot coordinate in the X direction.
 
  A QCPItemPosition may have a parent QCPItemAnchor, see \ref setParentAnchor. This way you can tie
  multiple items together. If the QCPItemPosition has a parent, its coordinates (\ref setCoords)
  are considered to be absolute pixels in the reference frame of the parent anchor, where (0, 0)
  means directly ontop of the parent anchor. For example, You could attach the \a start position of
  a QCPItemLine to the \a bottom anchor of a QCPItemText to make the starting point of the line
  always be centered under the text label, no matter where the text is moved to. For more advanced
  plots, it is possible to assign different parent anchors per X/Y coordinate of the position, see
  \ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY. This way an item could follow another item in the X
  direction but stay at a fixed position in the Y direction. Or even follow item A in X, and item B
  in Y.
 
  Note that every QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor and thus can itself be used as parent
  anchor for other positions.
 
  To set the apparent pixel position on the QCustomPlot surface directly, use \ref setPixelPosition. This
  works no matter what type this QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child situation it is in, as \ref
  setPixelPosition transforms the coordinates appropriately, to make the position appear at the specified
  pixel values.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPItemPosition::PositionType *QCPItemPosition::type() const
  
  Returns the current position type.
  
  If different types were set for X and Y (\ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY), this method returns the
  type of the X coordinate. In that case rather use \a typeX() and \a typeY().
  
  \see setType
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPItemAnchor *QCPItemPosition::parentAnchor() const
  
  Returns the current parent anchor.
  
  If different parent anchors were set for X and Y (\ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY),
  this method returns the parent anchor of the Y coordinate. In that case rather use \a
  parentAnchorX() and \a parentAnchorY().
  
  \see setParentAnchor
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPItemPosition. You shouldn't create QCPItemPosition instances directly, even if
  you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createPosition instead, as
  explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
QCPItemPosition::QCPItemPosition(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name) :
  QCPItemAnchor(parentPlot, parentItem, name),
  mPositionTypeX(ptAbsolute),
  mPositionTypeY(ptAbsolute),
  mKey(0),
  mValue(0),
  mParentAnchorX(nullptr),
  mParentAnchorY(nullptr)
{
}
 
QCPItemPosition::~QCPItemPosition()
{
  // unregister as parent at children:
  // Note: this is done in ~QCPItemAnchor again, but it's important QCPItemPosition does it itself, because only then
  //       the setParentAnchor(0) call the correct QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition function instead of QCPItemAnchor::pixelPosition
  foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenX.values())
  {
    if (child->parentAnchorX() == this)
      child->setParentAnchorX(nullptr); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenX
  }
  foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenY.values())
  {
    if (child->parentAnchorY() == this)
      child->setParentAnchorY(nullptr); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenY
  }
  // unregister as child in parent:
  if (mParentAnchorX)
    mParentAnchorX->removeChildX(this);
  if (mParentAnchorY)
    mParentAnchorY->removeChildY(this);
}
 
/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */
QCPAxisRect *QCPItemPosition::axisRect() const
{
  return mAxisRect.data();
}
 
/*!
  Sets the type of the position. The type defines how the coordinates passed to \ref setCoords
  should be handled and how the QCPItemPosition should behave in the plot.
  
  The possible values for \a type can be separated in two main categories:
 
  \li The position is regarded as a point in plot coordinates. This corresponds to \ref ptPlotCoords
  and requires two axes that define the plot coordinate system. They can be specified with \ref setAxes.
  By default, the QCustomPlot's x- and yAxis are used.
  
  \li The position is fixed on the QCustomPlot surface, i.e. independent of axis ranges. This
  corresponds to all other types, i.e. \ref ptAbsolute, \ref ptViewportRatio and \ref
  ptAxisRectRatio. They differ only in the way the absolute position is described, see the
  documentation of \ref PositionType for details. For \ref ptAxisRectRatio, note that you can specify
  the axis rect with \ref setAxisRect. By default this is set to the main axis rect.
  
  Note that the position type \ref ptPlotCoords is only available (and sensible) when the position
  has no parent anchor (\ref setParentAnchor).
  
  If the type is changed, the apparent pixel position on the plot is preserved. This means
  the coordinates as retrieved with coords() and set with \ref setCoords may change in the process.
  
  This method sets the type for both X and Y directions. It is also possible to set different types
  for X and Y, see \ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setType(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type)
{
  setTypeX(type);
  setTypeY(type);
}
 
/*!
  This method sets the position type of the X coordinate to \a type.
  
  For a detailed description of what a position type is, see the documentation of \ref setType.
  
  \see setType, setTypeY
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setTypeX(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type)
{
  if (mPositionTypeX != type)
  {
    // if switching from or to coordinate type that isn't valid (e.g. because axes or axis rect
    // were deleted), don't try to recover the pixelPosition() because it would output a qDebug warning.
    bool retainPixelPosition = true;
    if ((mPositionTypeX == ptPlotCoords || type == ptPlotCoords) && (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis))
      retainPixelPosition = false;
    if ((mPositionTypeX == ptAxisRectRatio || type == ptAxisRectRatio) && (!mAxisRect))
      retainPixelPosition = false;
    
    QPointF pixel;
    if (retainPixelPosition)
      pixel = pixelPosition();
    
    mPositionTypeX = type;
    
    if (retainPixelPosition)
      setPixelPosition(pixel);
  }
}
 
/*!
  This method sets the position type of the Y coordinate to \a type.
  
  For a detailed description of what a position type is, see the documentation of \ref setType.
  
  \see setType, setTypeX
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setTypeY(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type)
{
  if (mPositionTypeY != type)
  {
    // if switching from or to coordinate type that isn't valid (e.g. because axes or axis rect
    // were deleted), don't try to recover the pixelPosition() because it would output a qDebug warning.
    bool retainPixelPosition = true;
    if ((mPositionTypeY == ptPlotCoords || type == ptPlotCoords) && (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis))
      retainPixelPosition = false;
    if ((mPositionTypeY == ptAxisRectRatio || type == ptAxisRectRatio) && (!mAxisRect))
      retainPixelPosition = false;
    
    QPointF pixel;
    if (retainPixelPosition)
      pixel = pixelPosition();
    
    mPositionTypeY = type;
    
    if (retainPixelPosition)
      setPixelPosition(pixel);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the parent of this QCPItemPosition to \a parentAnchor. This means the position will now
  follow any position changes of the anchor. The local coordinate system of positions with a parent
  anchor always is absolute pixels, with (0, 0) being exactly on top of the parent anchor. (Hence
  the type shouldn't be set to \ref ptPlotCoords for positions with parent anchors.)
  
  if \a keepPixelPosition is true, the current pixel position of the QCPItemPosition is preserved
  during reparenting. If it's set to false, the coordinates are set to (0, 0), i.e. the position
  will be exactly on top of the parent anchor.
  
  To remove this QCPItemPosition from any parent anchor, set \a parentAnchor to \c nullptr.
  
  If the QCPItemPosition previously had no parent and the type is \ref ptPlotCoords, the type is
  set to \ref ptAbsolute, to keep the position in a valid state.
  
  This method sets the parent anchor for both X and Y directions. It is also possible to set
  different parents for X and Y, see \ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY.
*/
bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition)
{
  bool successX = setParentAnchorX(parentAnchor, keepPixelPosition);
  bool successY = setParentAnchorY(parentAnchor, keepPixelPosition);
  return successX && successY;
}
 
/*!
  This method sets the parent anchor of the X coordinate to \a parentAnchor.
  
  For a detailed description of what a parent anchor is, see the documentation of \ref setParentAnchor.
  
  \see setParentAnchor, setParentAnchorY
*/
bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorX(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition)
{
  // make sure self is not assigned as parent:
  if (parentAnchor == this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set self as parent anchor" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
    return false;
  }
  // make sure no recursive parent-child-relationships are created:
  QCPItemAnchor *currentParent = parentAnchor;
  while (currentParent)
  {
    if (QCPItemPosition *currentParentPos = currentParent->toQCPItemPosition())
    {
      // is a QCPItemPosition, might have further parent, so keep iterating
      if (currentParentPos == this)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't create recursive parent-child-relationship" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
        return false;
      }
      currentParent = currentParentPos->parentAnchorX();
    } else
    {
      // is a QCPItemAnchor, can't have further parent. Now make sure the parent items aren't the
      // same, to prevent a position being child of an anchor which itself depends on the position,
      // because they're both on the same item:
      if (currentParent->mParentItem == mParentItem)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set parent to be an anchor which itself depends on this position" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
        return false;
      }
      break;
    }
  }
  
  // if previously no parent set and PosType is still ptPlotCoords, set to ptAbsolute:
  if (!mParentAnchorX && mPositionTypeX == ptPlotCoords)
    setTypeX(ptAbsolute);
  
  // save pixel position:
  QPointF pixelP;
  if (keepPixelPosition)
    pixelP = pixelPosition();
  // unregister at current parent anchor:
  if (mParentAnchorX)
    mParentAnchorX->removeChildX(this);
  // register at new parent anchor:
  if (parentAnchor)
    parentAnchor->addChildX(this);
  mParentAnchorX = parentAnchor;
  // restore pixel position under new parent:
  if (keepPixelPosition)
    setPixelPosition(pixelP);
  else
    setCoords(0, coords().y());
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  This method sets the parent anchor of the Y coordinate to \a parentAnchor.
  
  For a detailed description of what a parent anchor is, see the documentation of \ref setParentAnchor.
  
  \see setParentAnchor, setParentAnchorX
*/
bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorY(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition)
{
  // make sure self is not assigned as parent:
  if (parentAnchor == this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set self as parent anchor" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
    return false;
  }
  // make sure no recursive parent-child-relationships are created:
  QCPItemAnchor *currentParent = parentAnchor;
  while (currentParent)
  {
    if (QCPItemPosition *currentParentPos = currentParent->toQCPItemPosition())
    {
      // is a QCPItemPosition, might have further parent, so keep iterating
      if (currentParentPos == this)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't create recursive parent-child-relationship" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
        return false;
      }
      currentParent = currentParentPos->parentAnchorY();
    } else
    {
      // is a QCPItemAnchor, can't have further parent. Now make sure the parent items aren't the
      // same, to prevent a position being child of an anchor which itself depends on the position,
      // because they're both on the same item:
      if (currentParent->mParentItem == mParentItem)
      {
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set parent to be an anchor which itself depends on this position" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(parentAnchor);
        return false;
      }
      break;
    }
  }
  
  // if previously no parent set and PosType is still ptPlotCoords, set to ptAbsolute:
  if (!mParentAnchorY && mPositionTypeY == ptPlotCoords)
    setTypeY(ptAbsolute);
  
  // save pixel position:
  QPointF pixelP;
  if (keepPixelPosition)
    pixelP = pixelPosition();
  // unregister at current parent anchor:
  if (mParentAnchorY)
    mParentAnchorY->removeChildY(this);
  // register at new parent anchor:
  if (parentAnchor)
    parentAnchor->addChildY(this);
  mParentAnchorY = parentAnchor;
  // restore pixel position under new parent:
  if (keepPixelPosition)
    setPixelPosition(pixelP);
  else
    setCoords(coords().x(), 0);
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the coordinates of this QCPItemPosition. What the coordinates mean, is defined by the type
  (\ref setType, \ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY).
  
  For example, if the type is \ref ptAbsolute, \a key and \a value mean the x and y pixel position
  on the QCustomPlot surface. In that case the origin (0, 0) is in the top left corner of the
  QCustomPlot viewport. If the type is \ref ptPlotCoords, \a key and \a value mean a point in the
  plot coordinate system defined by the axes set by \ref setAxes. By default those are the
  QCustomPlot's xAxis and yAxis. See the documentation of \ref setType for other available
  coordinate types and their meaning.
  
  If different types were configured for X and Y (\ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY), \a key and \a
  value must also be provided in the different coordinate systems. Here, the X type refers to \a
  key, and the Y type refers to \a value.
 
  \see setPixelPosition
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setCoords(double key, double value)
{
  mKey = key;
  mValue = value;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Sets the coordinates as a QPointF \a pos where pos.x has the meaning of \a key and pos.y the
  meaning of \a value of the \ref setCoords(double key, double value) method.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setCoords(const QPointF &pos)
{
  setCoords(pos.x(), pos.y());
}
 
/*!
  Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemPosition on the QCustomPlot surface. It
  includes all effects of type (\ref setType) and possible parent anchors (\ref setParentAnchor).
 
  \see setPixelPosition
*/
QPointF QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition() const
{
  QPointF result;
  
  // determine X:
  switch (mPositionTypeX)
  {
    case ptAbsolute:
    {
      result.rx() = mKey;
      if (mParentAnchorX)
        result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
      break;
    }
    case ptViewportRatio:
    {
      result.rx() = mKey*mParentPlot->viewport().width();
      if (mParentAnchorX)
        result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
      else
        result.rx() += mParentPlot->viewport().left();
      break;
    }
    case ptAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mAxisRect)
      {
        result.rx() = mKey*mAxisRect.data()->width();
        if (mParentAnchorX)
          result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
        else
          result.rx() += mAxisRect.data()->left();
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined";
      break;
    }
    case ptPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        result.rx() = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKey);
      else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        result.rx() = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mValue);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined";
      break;
    }
  }
  
  // determine Y:
  switch (mPositionTypeY)
  {
    case ptAbsolute:
    {
      result.ry() = mValue;
      if (mParentAnchorY)
        result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
      break;
    }
    case ptViewportRatio:
    {
      result.ry() = mValue*mParentPlot->viewport().height();
      if (mParentAnchorY)
        result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
      else
        result.ry() += mParentPlot->viewport().top();
      break;
    }
    case ptAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mAxisRect)
      {
        result.ry() = mValue*mAxisRect.data()->height();
        if (mParentAnchorY)
          result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
        else
          result.ry() += mAxisRect.data()->top();
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined";
      break;
    }
    case ptPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
        result.ry() = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKey);
      else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
        result.ry() = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mValue);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined";
      break;
    }
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  When \ref setType is \ref ptPlotCoords, this function may be used to specify the axes the
  coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default they are set to the initial xAxis and
  yAxis of the QCustomPlot.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setAxes(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis)
{
  mKeyAxis = keyAxis;
  mValueAxis = valueAxis;
}
 
/*!
  When \ref setType is \ref ptAxisRectRatio, this function may be used to specify the axis rect the
  coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default this is set to the main axis rect of
  the QCustomPlot.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *axisRect)
{
  mAxisRect = axisRect;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the apparent pixel position. This works no matter what type (\ref setType) this
  QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child situation it is in, as coordinates are transformed
  appropriately, to make the position finally appear at the specified pixel values.
 
  Only if the type is \ref ptAbsolute and no parent anchor is set, this function's effect is
  identical to that of \ref setCoords.
 
  \see pixelPosition, setCoords
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setPixelPosition(const QPointF &pixelPosition)
{
  double x = pixelPosition.x();
  double y = pixelPosition.y();
  
  switch (mPositionTypeX)
  {
    case ptAbsolute:
    {
      if (mParentAnchorX)
        x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
      break;
    }
    case ptViewportRatio:
    {
      if (mParentAnchorX)
        x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
      else
        x -= mParentPlot->viewport().left();
      x /= double(mParentPlot->viewport().width());
      break;
    }
    case ptAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mAxisRect)
      {
        if (mParentAnchorX)
          x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x();
        else
          x -= mAxisRect.data()->left();
        x /= double(mAxisRect.data()->width());
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined";
      break;
    }
    case ptPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        x = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(x);
      else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        y = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(x);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined";
      break;
    }
  }
  
  switch (mPositionTypeY)
  {
    case ptAbsolute:
    {
      if (mParentAnchorY)
        y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
      break;
    }
    case ptViewportRatio:
    {
      if (mParentAnchorY)
        y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
      else
        y -= mParentPlot->viewport().top();
      y /= double(mParentPlot->viewport().height());
      break;
    }
    case ptAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mAxisRect)
      {
        if (mParentAnchorY)
          y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y();
        else
          y -= mAxisRect.data()->top();
        y /= double(mAxisRect.data()->height());
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined";
      break;
    }
    case ptPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
        x = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(y);
      else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
        y = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(y);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined";
      break;
    }
  }
  
  setCoords(x, y);
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAbstractItem
  \brief The abstract base class for all items in a plot.
  
  In QCustomPlot, items are supplemental graphical elements that are neither plottables
  (QCPAbstractPlottable) nor axes (QCPAxis). While plottables are always tied to two axes and thus
  plot coordinates, items can also be placed in absolute coordinates independent of any axes. Each
  specific item has at least one QCPItemPosition member which controls the positioning. Some items
  are defined by more than one coordinate and thus have two or more QCPItemPosition members (For
  example, QCPItemRect has \a topLeft and \a bottomRight).
  
  This abstract base class defines a very basic interface like visibility and clipping. Since this
  class is abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or create a subclass
  yourself to create new items.
  
  The built-in items are:
  <table>
  <tr><td>QCPItemLine</td><td>A line defined by a start and an end point. May have different ending styles on each side (e.g. arrows).</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemStraightLine</td><td>A straight line defined by a start and a direction point. Unlike QCPItemLine, the straight line is infinitely long and has no endings.</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemCurve</td><td>A curve defined by start, end and two intermediate control points. May have different ending styles on each side (e.g. arrows).</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemRect</td><td>A rectangle</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemEllipse</td><td>An ellipse</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemPixmap</td><td>An arbitrary pixmap</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemText</td><td>A text label</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemBracket</td><td>A bracket which may be used to reference/highlight certain parts in the plot.</td></tr>
  <tr><td>QCPItemTracer</td><td>An item that can be attached to a QCPGraph and sticks to its data points, given a key coordinate.</td></tr>
  </table>
  
  \section items-clipping Clipping
 
  Items are by default clipped to the main axis rect (they are only visible inside the axis rect).
  To make an item visible outside that axis rect, disable clipping via \ref setClipToAxisRect
  "setClipToAxisRect(false)".
 
  On the other hand if you want the item to be clipped to a different axis rect, specify it via
  \ref setClipAxisRect. This clipAxisRect property of an item is only used for clipping behaviour, and
  in principle is independent of the coordinate axes the item might be tied to via its position
  members (\ref QCPItemPosition::setAxes). However, it is common that the axis rect for clipping
  also contains the axes used for the item positions.
  
  \section items-using Using items
  
  First you instantiate the item you want to use and add it to the plot:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-1
  by default, the positions of the item are bound to the x- and y-Axis of the plot. So we can just
  set the plot coordinates where the line should start/end:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-2
  If we don't want the line to be positioned in plot coordinates but a different coordinate system,
  e.g. absolute pixel positions on the QCustomPlot surface, we need to change the position type like this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-3
  Then we can set the coordinates, this time in pixels:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-4
  and make the line visible on the entire QCustomPlot, by disabling clipping to the axis rect:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-5
  
  For more advanced plots, it is even possible to set different types and parent anchors per X/Y
  coordinate of an item position, using for example \ref QCPItemPosition::setTypeX or \ref
  QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorX. For details, see the documentation of \ref QCPItemPosition.
  
  \section items-subclassing Creating own items
  
  To create an own item, you implement a subclass of QCPAbstractItem. These are the pure
  virtual functions, you must implement:
  \li \ref selectTest
  \li \ref draw
  
  See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do.
  
  \subsection items-positioning Allowing the item to be positioned
  
  As mentioned, item positions are represented by QCPItemPosition members. Let's assume the new item shall
  have only one point as its position (as opposed to two like a rect or multiple like a polygon). You then add
  a public member of type QCPItemPosition like so:
  
  \code QCPItemPosition * const myPosition;\endcode
  
  the const makes sure the pointer itself can't be modified from the user of your new item (the QCPItemPosition
  instance it points to, can be modified, of course).
  The initialization of this pointer is made easy with the \ref createPosition function. Just assign
  the return value of this function to each QCPItemPosition in the constructor of your item. \ref createPosition
  takes a string which is the name of the position, typically this is identical to the variable name.
  For example, the constructor of QCPItemExample could look like this:
  
  \code
  QCPItemExample::QCPItemExample(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
    QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
    myPosition(createPosition("myPosition"))
  {
    // other constructor code
  }
  \endcode
  
  \subsection items-drawing The draw function
  
  To give your item a visual representation, reimplement the \ref draw function and use the passed
  QCPPainter to draw the item. You can retrieve the item position in pixel coordinates from the
  position member(s) via \ref QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition.
 
  To optimize performance you should calculate a bounding rect first (don't forget to take the pen
  width into account), check whether it intersects the \ref clipRect, and only draw the item at all
  if this is the case.
  
  \subsection items-selection The selectTest function
  
  Your implementation of the \ref selectTest function may use the helpers \ref
  QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine and \ref rectDistance. With these, the implementation of the
  selection test becomes significantly simpler for most items. See the documentation of \ref
  selectTest for what the function parameters mean and what the function should return.
  
  \subsection anchors Providing anchors
  
  Providing anchors (QCPItemAnchor) starts off like adding a position. First you create a public
  member, e.g.
  
  \code QCPItemAnchor * const bottom;\endcode
 
  and create it in the constructor with the \ref createAnchor function, assigning it a name and an
  anchor id (an integer enumerating all anchors on the item, you may create an own enum for this).
  Since anchors can be placed anywhere, relative to the item's position(s), your item needs to
  provide the position of every anchor with the reimplementation of the \ref anchorPixelPosition(int
  anchorId) function.
  
  In essence the QCPItemAnchor is merely an intermediary that itself asks your item for the pixel
  position when anything attached to the anchor needs to know the coordinates.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPItemPosition*> QCPAbstractItem::positions() const
  
  Returns all positions of the item in a list.
  
  \see anchors, position
*/
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPItemAnchor*> QCPAbstractItem::anchors() const
  
  Returns all anchors of the item in a list. Note that since a position (QCPItemPosition) is always
  also an anchor, the list will also contain the positions of this item.
  
  \see positions, anchor
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter) = 0
  \internal
  
  Draws this item with the provided \a painter.
  
  The cliprect of the provided painter is set to the rect returned by \ref clipRect before this
  function is called. The clipRect depends on the clipping settings defined by \ref
  setClipToAxisRect and \ref setClipAxisRect.
*/
 
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::selectionChanged(bool selected)
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this item has changed, either by user interaction
  or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Base class constructor which initializes base class members.
*/
QCPAbstractItem::QCPAbstractItem(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayerable(parentPlot),
  mClipToAxisRect(false),
  mSelectable(true),
  mSelected(false)
{
  parentPlot->registerItem(this);
  
  QList<QCPAxisRect*> rects = parentPlot->axisRects();
  if (!rects.isEmpty())
  {
    setClipToAxisRect(true);
    setClipAxisRect(rects.first());
  }
}
 
QCPAbstractItem::~QCPAbstractItem()
{
  // don't delete mPositions because every position is also an anchor and thus in mAnchors
  qDeleteAll(mAnchors);
}
 
/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */
QCPAxisRect *QCPAbstractItem::clipAxisRect() const
{
  return mClipAxisRect.data();
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the item shall be clipped to an axis rect or whether it shall be visible on the
  entire QCustomPlot. The axis rect can be set with \ref setClipAxisRect.
  
  \see setClipAxisRect
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setClipToAxisRect(bool clip)
{
  mClipToAxisRect = clip;
  if (mClipToAxisRect)
    setParentLayerable(mClipAxisRect.data());
}
 
/*!
  Sets the clip axis rect. It defines the rect that will be used to clip the item when \ref
  setClipToAxisRect is set to true.
  
  \see setClipToAxisRect
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *rect)
{
  mClipAxisRect = rect;
  if (mClipToAxisRect)
    setParentLayerable(mClipAxisRect.data());
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can (de-)select this item by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface.
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems.)
  
  However, even when \a selectable was set to false, it is possible to set the selection manually,
  by calling \ref setSelected.
  
  \see QCustomPlot::setInteractions, setSelected
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable(bool selectable)
{
  if (mSelectable != selectable)
  {
    mSelectable = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectable);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this item is selected or not. When selected, it might use a different visual
  appearance (e.g. pen and brush), this depends on the specific item though.
 
  The entire selection mechanism for items is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems. You only need to call this
  function when you wish to change the selection state manually.
  
  This function can change the selection state even when \ref setSelectable was set to false.
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see setSelectable, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setSelected(bool selected)
{
  if (mSelected != selected)
  {
    mSelected = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelected);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the QCPItemPosition with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't have a position by
  that name, returns \c nullptr.
  
  This function provides an alternative way to access item positions. Normally, you access
  positions direcly by their member pointers (which typically have the same variable name as \a
  name).
  
  \see positions, anchor
*/
QCPItemPosition *QCPAbstractItem::position(const QString &name) const
{
  foreach (QCPItemPosition *position, mPositions)
  {
    if (position->name() == name)
      return position;
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "position with name not found:" << name;
  return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the QCPItemAnchor with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't have an anchor by
  that name, returns \c nullptr.
  
  This function provides an alternative way to access item anchors. Normally, you access
  anchors direcly by their member pointers (which typically have the same variable name as \a
  name).
  
  \see anchors, position
*/
QCPItemAnchor *QCPAbstractItem::anchor(const QString &name) const
{
  foreach (QCPItemAnchor *anchor, mAnchors)
  {
    if (anchor->name() == name)
      return anchor;
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor with name not found:" << name;
  return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this item has an anchor with the specified \a name.
  
  Note that you can check for positions with this function, too. This is because every position is
  also an anchor (QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor).
  
  \see anchor, position
*/
bool QCPAbstractItem::hasAnchor(const QString &name) const
{
  foreach (QCPItemAnchor *anchor, mAnchors)
  {
    if (anchor->name() == name)
      return true;
  }
  return false;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the rect the visual representation of this item is clipped to. This depends on the
  current setting of \ref setClipToAxisRect as well as the axis rect set with \ref setClipAxisRect.
  
  If the item is not clipped to an axis rect, QCustomPlot's viewport rect is returned.
  
  \see draw
*/
QRect QCPAbstractItem::clipRect() const
{
  if (mClipToAxisRect && mClipAxisRect)
    return mClipAxisRect.data()->rect();
  else
    return mParentPlot->viewport();
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing item lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeItems);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function which returns the selectTest value for a specified \a rect and a specified
  click position \a pos. \a filledRect defines whether a click inside the rect should also be
  considered a hit or whether only the rect border is sensitive to hits.
  
  This function may be used to help with the implementation of the \ref selectTest function for
  specific items.
  
  For example, if your item consists of four rects, call this function four times, once for each
  rect, in your \ref selectTest reimplementation. Finally, return the minimum (non -1) of all four
  returned values.
*/
double QCPAbstractItem::rectDistance(const QRectF &rect, const QPointF &pos, bool filledRect) const
{
  double result = -1;
 
  // distance to border:
  const QList<QLineF> lines = QList<QLineF>() << QLineF(rect.topLeft(), rect.topRight()) << QLineF(rect.bottomLeft(), rect.bottomRight())
                                              << QLineF(rect.topLeft(), rect.bottomLeft()) << QLineF(rect.topRight(), rect.bottomRight());
  const QCPVector2D posVec(pos);
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  foreach (const QLineF &line, lines)
  {
    double distSqr = posVec.distanceSquaredToLine(line.p1(), line.p2());
    if (distSqr < minDistSqr)
      minDistSqr = distSqr;
  }
  result = qSqrt(minDistSqr);
  
  // filled rect, allow click inside to count as hit:
  if (filledRect && result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99)
  {
    if (rect.contains(pos))
      result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pixel position of the anchor with Id \a anchorId. This function must be reimplemented in
  item subclasses if they want to provide anchors (QCPItemAnchor).
  
  For example, if the item has two anchors with id 0 and 1, this function takes one of these anchor
  ids and returns the respective pixel points of the specified anchor.
  
  \see createAnchor
*/
QPointF QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called on item which shouldn't have any anchors (this method not reimplemented). anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Creates a QCPItemPosition, registers it with this item and returns a pointer to it. The specified
  \a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name of the position
  member (This is needed to provide the name-based \ref position access to positions).
  
  Don't delete positions created by this function manually, as the item will take care of it.
  
  Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific item subclass to
  create each position member. Don't create QCPItemPositions with \b new yourself, because they
  won't be registered with the item properly.
  
  \see createAnchor
*/
QCPItemPosition *QCPAbstractItem::createPosition(const QString &name)
{
  if (hasAnchor(name))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name;
  QCPItemPosition *newPosition = new QCPItemPosition(mParentPlot, this, name);
  mPositions.append(newPosition);
  mAnchors.append(newPosition); // every position is also an anchor
  newPosition->setAxes(mParentPlot->xAxis, mParentPlot->yAxis);
  newPosition->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords);
  if (mParentPlot->axisRect())
    newPosition->setAxisRect(mParentPlot->axisRect());
  newPosition->setCoords(0, 0);
  return newPosition;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Creates a QCPItemAnchor, registers it with this item and returns a pointer to it. The specified
  \a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name of the anchor
  member (This is needed to provide the name based \ref anchor access to anchors).
  
  The \a anchorId must be a number identifying the created anchor. It is recommended to create an
  enum (e.g. "AnchorIndex") for this on each item that uses anchors. This id is used by the anchor
  to identify itself when it calls QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition. That function then returns
  the correct pixel coordinates for the passed anchor id.
  
  Don't delete anchors created by this function manually, as the item will take care of it.
  
  Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific item subclass to
  create each anchor member. Don't create QCPItemAnchors with \b new yourself, because then they
  won't be registered with the item properly.
  
  \see createPosition
*/
QCPItemAnchor *QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor(const QString &name, int anchorId)
{
  if (hasAnchor(name))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name;
  QCPItemAnchor *newAnchor = new QCPItemAnchor(mParentPlot, this, name, anchorId);
  mAnchors.append(newAnchor);
  return newAnchor;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractItem::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (mSelectable)
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractItem::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  if (mSelectable)
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(false);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractItem::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectItems;
}
/* end of 'src/item.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/core.cpp'             */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 127625 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCustomPlot
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCustomPlot
  
  \brief The central class of the library. This is the QWidget which displays the plot and
  interacts with the user.
  
  For tutorials on how to use QCustomPlot, see the website\n
  https://www.qcustomplot.com/
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPSelectionRect *QCustomPlot::selectionRect() const
  
  Allows access to the currently used QCPSelectionRect instance (or subclass thereof), that is used
  to handle and draw selection rect interactions (see \ref setSelectionRectMode).
  
  \see setSelectionRect
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPLayoutGrid *QCustomPlot::plotLayout() const
  
  Returns the top level layout of this QCustomPlot instance. It is a \ref QCPLayoutGrid, initially containing just
  one cell with the main QCPAxisRect inside.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClick(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse double click event.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mousePress(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse press event.
  
  It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range dragging. So a slot
  connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseMove(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse move event.
  
  It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range dragging. So a slot
  connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes.
  
  \warning It is discouraged to change the drag-axes with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes here,
  because the dragging starting point was saved the moment the mouse was pressed. Thus it only has
  a meaning for the range drag axes that were set at that moment. If you want to change the drag
  axes, consider doing this in the \ref mousePress signal instead.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseRelease(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse release event.
  
  It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like object selection. So a
  slot connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref setInteractions or
  \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseWheel(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse wheel event.
  
  It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like range zooming. So a slot
  connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes or \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when a plottable is clicked.
 
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the plottable that received
  the click. The parameter \a dataIndex indicates the data point that was closest to the click
  position.
 
  \see plottableDoubleClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableDoubleClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when a plottable is double clicked.
 
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the plottable that received
  the click. The parameter \a dataIndex indicates the data point that was closest to the click
  position.
 
  \see plottableClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
  
  This signal is emitted when an item is clicked.
 
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that received the
  click.
  
  \see itemDoubleClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemDoubleClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
  
  This signal is emitted when an item is double clicked.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that received the
  click.
  
  \see itemClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event)
  
  This signal is emitted when an axis is clicked.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that received the click and
  \a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked.
  
  \see axisDoubleClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisDoubleClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when an axis is double clicked.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that received the click and
  \a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked.
  
  \see axisClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is clicked.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend that received the
  click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the legend and no item is
  clicked, \a item is \c nullptr. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or the space
  between two items.
  
  \see legendDoubleClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendDoubleClick(QCPLegend *legend,  QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is double clicked.
  
  \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend that received the
  click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the legend and no item is
  clicked, \a item is \c nullptr. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or the space
  between two items.
  
  \see legendClick
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::selectionChangedByUser()
  
  This signal is emitted after the user has changed the selection in the QCustomPlot, e.g. by
  clicking. It is not emitted when the selection state of an object has changed programmatically by
  a direct call to <tt>setSelected()</tt>/<tt>setSelection()</tt> on an object or by calling \ref
  deselectAll.
  
  In addition to this signal, selectable objects also provide individual signals, for example \ref
  QCPAxis::selectionChanged or \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged. Note that those signals
  are emitted even if the selection state is changed programmatically.
  
  See the documentation of \ref setInteractions for details about the selection mechanism.
  
  \see selectedPlottables, selectedGraphs, selectedItems, selectedAxes, selectedLegends
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::beforeReplot()
  
  This signal is emitted immediately before a replot takes place (caused by a call to the slot \ref
  replot).
  
  It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two QCustomPlots to make them
  replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion.
  
  \see replot, afterReplot, afterLayout
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::afterLayout()
 
  This signal is emitted immediately after the layout step has been completed, which occurs right
  before drawing the plot. This is typically during a call to \ref replot, and in such cases this
  signal is emitted in between the signals \ref beforeReplot and \ref afterReplot. Unlike those
  signals however, this signal is also emitted during off-screen painting, such as when calling
  \ref toPixmap or \ref savePdf.
 
  The layout step queries all layouts and layout elements in the plot for their proposed size and
  arranges the objects accordingly as preparation for the subsequent drawing step. Through this
  signal, you have the opportunity to update certain things in your plot that depend crucially on
  the exact dimensions/positioning of layout elements such as axes and axis rects.
 
  \warning However, changing any parameters of this QCustomPlot instance which would normally
  affect the layouting (e.g. axis range order of magnitudes, tick label sizes, etc.) will not issue
  a second run of the layout step. It will propagate directly to the draw step and may cause
  graphical inconsistencies such as overlapping objects, if sizes or positions have changed.
 
  \see updateLayout, beforeReplot, afterReplot
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::afterReplot()
  
  This signal is emitted immediately after a replot has taken place (caused by a call to the slot \ref
  replot).
  
  It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two QCustomPlots to make them
  replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion.
  
  \see replot, beforeReplot, afterLayout
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
/* start of documentation of public members */
 
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis
 
  A pointer to the primary x Axis (bottom) of the main axis rect of the plot.
  
  QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref
  yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single
  axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the
  layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref
  QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the
  default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main
  axis rect), the corresponding pointers become \c nullptr.
  
  If an axis convenience pointer is currently \c nullptr and a new axis rect or a corresponding
  axis is added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to
  the according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend
  is added after the main legend was removed before.
*/
 
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis
 
  A pointer to the primary y Axis (left) of the main axis rect of the plot.
  
  QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref
  yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single
  axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the
  layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref
  QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the
  default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main
  axis rect), the corresponding pointers become \c nullptr.
  
  If an axis convenience pointer is currently \c nullptr and a new axis rect or a corresponding
  axis is added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to
  the according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend
  is added after the main legend was removed before.
*/
 
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis2
 
  A pointer to the secondary x Axis (top) of the main axis rect of the plot. Secondary axes are
  invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox).
  
  QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref
  yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single
  axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the
  layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref
  QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the
  default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main
  axis rect), the corresponding pointers become \c nullptr.
  
  If an axis convenience pointer is currently \c nullptr and a new axis rect or a corresponding
  axis is added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to
  the according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend
  is added after the main legend was removed before.
*/
 
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis2
 
  A pointer to the secondary y Axis (right) of the main axis rect of the plot. Secondary axes are
  invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox).
  
  QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref
  yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single
  axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the
  layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref
  QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the
  default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main
  axis rect), the corresponding pointers become \c nullptr.
  
  If an axis convenience pointer is currently \c nullptr and a new axis rect or a corresponding
  axis is added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to
  the according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend
  is added after the main legend was removed before.
*/
 
/*! \var QCPLegend *QCustomPlot::legend
 
  A pointer to the default legend of the main axis rect. The legend is invisible by default. Use
  QCPLegend::setVisible to change this.
  
  QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref
  yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single
  axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the
  layout system\endlink to add multiple legends to the plot, use the layout system interface to
  access the new legend. For example, legends can be placed inside an axis rect's \ref
  QCPAxisRect::insetLayout "inset layout", and must then also be accessed via the inset layout. If
  the default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main
  axis rect), the corresponding pointer becomes \c nullptr.
  
  If an axis convenience pointer is currently \c nullptr and a new axis rect or a corresponding
  axis is added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to
  the according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend
  is added after the main legend was removed before.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of public members */
 
/*!
  Constructs a QCustomPlot and sets reasonable default values.
*/
QCustomPlot::QCustomPlot(QWidget *parent) :
  QWidget(parent),
  xAxis(nullptr),
  yAxis(nullptr),
  xAxis2(nullptr),
  yAxis2(nullptr),
  legend(nullptr),
  mBufferDevicePixelRatio(1.0), // will be adapted to true value below
  mPlotLayout(nullptr),
  mAutoAddPlottableToLegend(true),
  mAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeNone),
  mNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeNone),
  mInteractions(QCP::iNone),
  mSelectionTolerance(8),
  mNoAntialiasingOnDrag(false),
  mBackgroundBrush(Qt::white, Qt::SolidPattern),
  mBackgroundScaled(true),
  mBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding),
  mCurrentLayer(nullptr),
  mPlottingHints(QCP::phCacheLabels|QCP::phImmediateRefresh),
  mMultiSelectModifier(Qt::ControlModifier),
  mSelectionRectMode(QCP::srmNone),
  mSelectionRect(nullptr),
  mOpenGl(false),
  mMouseHasMoved(false),
  mMouseEventLayerable(nullptr),
  mMouseSignalLayerable(nullptr),
  mReplotting(false),
  mReplotQueued(false),
  mReplotTime(0),
  mReplotTimeAverage(0),
  mOpenGlMultisamples(16),
  mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup(QCP::aeNone),
  mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup(true)
{
  setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation);
  setFocusPolicy(Qt::ClickFocus);
  setMouseTracking(true);
  QLocale currentLocale = locale();
  currentLocale.setNumberOptions(QLocale::OmitGroupSeparator);
  setLocale(currentLocale);
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
#  ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_FLOAT
  setBufferDevicePixelRatio(QWidget::devicePixelRatioF());
#  else
  setBufferDevicePixelRatio(QWidget::devicePixelRatio());
#  endif
#endif
  
  mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup = mAntialiasedElements;
  mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup = mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels);
  // create initial layers:
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("background")));
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("grid")));
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("main")));
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("axes")));
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("legend")));
  mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("overlay")));
  updateLayerIndices();
  setCurrentLayer(QLatin1String("main"));
  layer(QLatin1String("overlay"))->setMode(QCPLayer::lmBuffered);
  
  // create initial layout, axis rect and legend:
  mPlotLayout = new QCPLayoutGrid;
  mPlotLayout->initializeParentPlot(this);
  mPlotLayout->setParent(this); // important because if parent is QWidget, QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged will call QWidget::updateGeometry
  mPlotLayout->setLayer(QLatin1String("main"));
  QCPAxisRect *defaultAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect(this, true);
  mPlotLayout->addElement(0, 0, defaultAxisRect);
  xAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
  yAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
  xAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atTop);
  yAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atRight);
  legend = new QCPLegend;
  legend->setVisible(false);
  defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->addElement(legend, Qt::AlignRight|Qt::AlignTop);
  defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->setMargins(QMargins(12, 12, 12, 12));
  
  defaultAxisRect->setLayer(QLatin1String("background"));
  xAxis->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes"));
  yAxis->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes"));
  xAxis2->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes"));
  yAxis2->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes"));
  xAxis->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid"));
  yAxis->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid"));
  xAxis2->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid"));
  yAxis2->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid"));
  legend->setLayer(QLatin1String("legend"));
  
  // create selection rect instance:
  mSelectionRect = new QCPSelectionRect(this);
  mSelectionRect->setLayer(QLatin1String("overlay"));
  
  setViewport(rect()); // needs to be called after mPlotLayout has been created
  
  replot(rpQueuedReplot);
}
 
QCustomPlot::~QCustomPlot()
{
  clearPlottables();
  clearItems();
 
  if (mPlotLayout)
  {
    delete mPlotLayout;
    mPlotLayout = nullptr;
  }
  
  mCurrentLayer = nullptr;
  qDeleteAll(mLayers); // don't use removeLayer, because it would prevent the last layer to be removed
  mLayers.clear();
}
 
/*!
  Sets which elements are forcibly drawn antialiased as an \a or combination of QCP::AntialiasedElement.
  
  This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally controlled with the
  \a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is neither specified in
  \ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the antialiasing setting on
  each individual element instance is used.
  
  For example, if \a antialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, all plottables will be
  drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set
  to.
  
  if an element in \a antialiasedElements is already set in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, it is
  removed from there.
  
  \see setNotAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements &antialiasedElements)
{
  mAntialiasedElements = antialiasedElements;
  
  // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
  if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0)
    mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the specified \a antialiasedElement is forcibly drawn antialiased.
  
  See \ref setAntialiasedElements for details.
  
  \see setNotAntialiasedElement
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement antialiasedElement, bool enabled)
{
  if (!enabled && mAntialiasedElements.testFlag(antialiasedElement))
    mAntialiasedElements &= ~antialiasedElement;
  else if (enabled && !mAntialiasedElements.testFlag(antialiasedElement))
    mAntialiasedElements |= antialiasedElement;
  
  // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
  if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0)
    mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements;
}
 
/*!
  Sets which elements are forcibly drawn not antialiased as an \a or combination of
  QCP::AntialiasedElement.
  
  This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally controlled with the
  \a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is neither specified in
  \ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the antialiasing setting on
  each individual element instance is used.
  
  For example, if \a notAntialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, no plottables will be
  drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set
  to.
  
  if an element in \a notAntialiasedElements is already set in \ref setAntialiasedElements, it is
  removed from there.
  
  \see setAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements &notAntialiasedElements)
{
  mNotAntialiasedElements = notAntialiasedElements;
  
  // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
  if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0)
    mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the specified \a notAntialiasedElement is forcibly drawn not antialiased.
  
  See \ref setNotAntialiasedElements for details.
  
  \see setAntialiasedElement
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement notAntialiasedElement, bool enabled)
{
  if (!enabled && mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag(notAntialiasedElement))
    mNotAntialiasedElements &= ~notAntialiasedElement;
  else if (enabled && !mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag(notAntialiasedElement))
    mNotAntialiasedElements |= notAntialiasedElement;
  
  // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
  if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0)
    mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements;
}
 
/*!
  If set to true, adding a plottable (e.g. a graph) to the QCustomPlot automatically also adds the
  plottable to the legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
  
  \see addGraph, QCPLegend::addItem
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAutoAddPlottableToLegend(bool on)
{
  mAutoAddPlottableToLegend = on;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the possible interactions of this QCustomPlot as an or-combination of \ref QCP::Interaction
  enums. There are the following types of interactions:
  
  <b>Axis range manipulation</b> is controlled via \ref QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref QCP::iRangeZoom. When the
  respective interaction is enabled, the user may drag axes ranges and zoom with the mouse wheel.
  For details how to control which axes the user may drag/zoom and in what orientations, see \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes,
  \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes.
  
  <b>Plottable data selection</b> is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables. If \ref
  QCP::iSelectPlottables is set, the user may select plottables (graphs, curves, bars,...) and
  their data by clicking on them or in their vicinity (\ref setSelectionTolerance). Whether the
  user can actually select a plottable and its data can further be restricted with the \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable method on the specific plottable. For details, see the
  special page about the \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism". To retrieve a list of all
  currently selected plottables, call \ref selectedPlottables. If you're only interested in
  QCPGraphs, you may use the convenience function \ref selectedGraphs.
  
  <b>Item selection</b> is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectItems. If \ref QCP::iSelectItems is set, the user
  may select items (QCPItemLine, QCPItemText,...) by clicking on them or in their vicinity. To find
  out whether a specific item is selected, call QCPAbstractItem::selected(). To retrieve a list of
  all currently selected items, call \ref selectedItems.
  
  <b>Axis selection</b> is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectAxes. If \ref QCP::iSelectAxes is set, the user
  may select parts of the axes by clicking on them. What parts exactly (e.g. Axis base line, tick
  labels, axis label) are selectable can be controlled via \ref QCPAxis::setSelectableParts for
  each axis. To retrieve a list of all axes that currently contain selected parts, call \ref
  selectedAxes. Which parts of an axis are selected, can be retrieved with QCPAxis::selectedParts().
  
  <b>Legend selection</b> is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectLegend. If this is set, the user may
  select the legend itself or individual items by clicking on them. What parts exactly are
  selectable can be controlled via \ref QCPLegend::setSelectableParts. To find out whether the
  legend or any of its child items are selected, check the value of QCPLegend::selectedParts. To
  find out which child items are selected, call \ref QCPLegend::selectedItems.
  
  <b>All other selectable elements</b> The selection of all other selectable objects (e.g.
  QCPTextElement, or your own layerable subclasses) is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectOther. If set, the
  user may select those objects by clicking on them. To find out which are currently selected, you
  need to check their selected state explicitly.
  
  If the selection state has changed by user interaction, the \ref selectionChangedByUser signal is
  emitted. Each selectable object additionally emits an individual selectionChanged signal whenever
  their selection state has changed, i.e. not only by user interaction.
  
  To allow multiple objects to be selected by holding the selection modifier (\ref
  setMultiSelectModifier), set the flag \ref QCP::iMultiSelect.
  
  \note In addition to the selection mechanism presented here, QCustomPlot always emits
  corresponding signals, when an object is clicked or double clicked. see \ref plottableClick and
  \ref plottableDoubleClick for example.
  
  \see setInteraction, setSelectionTolerance
*/
void QCustomPlot::setInteractions(const QCP::Interactions &interactions)
{
  mInteractions = interactions;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the single \a interaction of this QCustomPlot to \a enabled.
  
  For details about the interaction system, see \ref setInteractions.
  
  \see setInteractions
*/
void QCustomPlot::setInteraction(const QCP::Interaction &interaction, bool enabled)
{
  if (!enabled && mInteractions.testFlag(interaction))
    mInteractions &= ~interaction;
  else if (enabled && !mInteractions.testFlag(interaction))
    mInteractions |= interaction;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the tolerance that is used to decide whether a click selects an object (e.g. a plottable) or
  not.
  
  If the user clicks in the vicinity of the line of e.g. a QCPGraph, it's only regarded as a
  potential selection when the minimum distance between the click position and the graph line is
  smaller than \a pixels. Objects that are defined by an area (e.g. QCPBars) only react to clicks
  directly inside the area and ignore this selection tolerance. In other words, it only has meaning
  for parts of objects that are too thin to exactly hit with a click and thus need such a
  tolerance.
  
  \see setInteractions, QCPLayerable::selectTest
*/
void QCustomPlot::setSelectionTolerance(int pixels)
{
  mSelectionTolerance = pixels;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether antialiasing is disabled for this QCustomPlot while the user is dragging axes
  ranges. If many objects, especially plottables, are drawn antialiased, this greatly improves
  performance during dragging. Thus it creates a more responsive user experience. As soon as the
  user stops dragging, the last replot is done with normal antialiasing, to restore high image
  quality.
  
  \see setAntialiasedElements, setNotAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag(bool enabled)
{
  mNoAntialiasingOnDrag = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the plotting hints for this QCustomPlot instance as an \a or combination of QCP::PlottingHint.
  
  \see setPlottingHint
*/
void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints(const QCP::PlottingHints &hints)
{
  mPlottingHints = hints;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the specified plotting \a hint to \a enabled.
  
  \see setPlottingHints
*/
void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHint(QCP::PlottingHint hint, bool enabled)
{
  QCP::PlottingHints newHints = mPlottingHints;
  if (!enabled)
    newHints &= ~hint;
  else
    newHints |= hint;
  
  if (newHints != mPlottingHints)
    setPlottingHints(newHints);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the keyboard modifier that will be recognized as multi-select-modifier.
  
  If \ref QCP::iMultiSelect is specified in \ref setInteractions, the user may select multiple
  objects (or data points) by clicking on them one after the other while holding down \a modifier.
  
  By default the multi-select-modifier is set to Qt::ControlModifier.
  
  \see setInteractions
*/
void QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier(Qt::KeyboardModifier modifier)
{
  mMultiSelectModifier = modifier;
}
 
/*!
  Sets how QCustomPlot processes mouse click-and-drag interactions by the user.
 
  If \a mode is \ref QCP::srmNone, the mouse drag is forwarded to the underlying objects. For
  example, QCPAxisRect may process a mouse drag by dragging axis ranges, see \ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag. If \a mode is not \ref QCP::srmNone, the current selection rect (\ref
  selectionRect) becomes activated and allows e.g. rect zooming and data point selection.
  
  If you wish to provide your user both with axis range dragging and data selection/range zooming,
  use this method to switch between the modes just before the interaction is processed, e.g. in
  reaction to the \ref mousePress or \ref mouseMove signals. For example you could check whether
  the user is holding a certain keyboard modifier, and then decide which \a mode shall be set.
  
  If a selection rect interaction is currently active, and \a mode is set to \ref QCP::srmNone, the
  interaction is canceled (\ref QCPSelectionRect::cancel). Switching between any of the other modes
  will keep the selection rect active. Upon completion of the interaction, the behaviour is as
  defined by the currently set \a mode, not the mode that was set when the interaction started.
  
  \see setInteractions, setSelectionRect, QCPSelectionRect
*/
void QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode(QCP::SelectionRectMode mode)
{
  if (mSelectionRect)
  {
    if (mode == QCP::srmNone)
      mSelectionRect->cancel(); // when switching to none, we immediately want to abort a potentially active selection rect
    
    // disconnect old connections:
    if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmSelect)
      disconnect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
    else if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmZoom)
      disconnect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
    
    // establish new ones:
    if (mode == QCP::srmSelect)
      connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
    else if (mode == QCP::srmZoom)
      connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
  }
  
  mSelectionRectMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \ref QCPSelectionRect instance that QCustomPlot will use if \a mode is not \ref
  QCP::srmNone and the user performs a click-and-drag interaction. QCustomPlot takes ownership of
  the passed \a selectionRect. It can be accessed later via \ref selectionRect.
  
  This method is useful if you wish to replace the default QCPSelectionRect instance with an
  instance of a QCPSelectionRect subclass, to introduce custom behaviour of the selection rect.
  
  \see setSelectionRectMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setSelectionRect(QCPSelectionRect *selectionRect)
{
  delete mSelectionRect;
  
  mSelectionRect = selectionRect;
  
  if (mSelectionRect)
  {
    // establish connections with new selection rect:
    if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmSelect)
      connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
    else if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmZoom)
      connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*)));
  }
}
 
/*!
  \warning This is still an experimental feature and its performance depends on the system that it
  runs on. Having multiple QCustomPlot widgets in one application with enabled OpenGL rendering
  might cause context conflicts on some systems.
  
  This method allows to enable OpenGL plot rendering, for increased plotting performance of
  graphically demanding plots (thick lines, translucent fills, etc.).
 
  If \a enabled is set to true, QCustomPlot will try to initialize OpenGL and, if successful,
  continue plotting with hardware acceleration. The parameter \a multisampling controls how many
  samples will be used per pixel, it essentially controls the antialiasing quality. If \a
  multisampling is set too high for the current graphics hardware, the maximum allowed value will
  be used.
 
  You can test whether switching to OpenGL rendering was successful by checking whether the
  according getter \a QCustomPlot::openGl() returns true. If the OpenGL initialization fails,
  rendering continues with the regular software rasterizer, and an according qDebug output is
  generated.
 
  If switching to OpenGL was successful, this method disables label caching (\ref setPlottingHint
  "setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, false)") and turns on QCustomPlot's antialiasing override
  for all elements (\ref setAntialiasedElements "setAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll)"), leading to a
  higher quality output. The antialiasing override allows for pixel-grid aligned drawing in the
  OpenGL paint device. As stated before, in OpenGL rendering the actual antialiasing of the plot is
  controlled with \a multisampling. If \a enabled is set to false, the antialiasing/label caching
  settings are restored to what they were before OpenGL was enabled, if they weren't altered in the
  meantime.
 
  \note OpenGL support is only enabled if QCustomPlot is compiled with the macro \c QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL
  defined. This define must be set before including the QCustomPlot header both during compilation
  of the QCustomPlot library as well as when compiling your application. It is best to just include
  the line <tt>DEFINES += QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL</tt> in the respective qmake project files.
  \note If you are using a Qt version before 5.0, you must also add the module "opengl" to your \c
  QT variable in the qmake project files. For Qt versions 5.0 and higher, QCustomPlot switches to a
  newer OpenGL interface which is already in the "gui" module.
*/
void QCustomPlot::setOpenGl(bool enabled, int multisampling)
{
  mOpenGlMultisamples = qMax(0, multisampling);
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL
  mOpenGl = enabled;
  if (mOpenGl)
  {
    if (setupOpenGl())
    {
      // backup antialiasing override and labelcaching setting so we can restore upon disabling OpenGL
      mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup = mAntialiasedElements;
      mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup = mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels);
      // set antialiasing override to antialias all (aligns gl pixel grid properly), and disable label caching (would use software rasterizer for pixmap caches):
      setAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll);
      setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, false);
    } else
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to enable OpenGL, continuing plotting without hardware acceleration.";
      mOpenGl = false;
    }
  } else
  {
    // restore antialiasing override and labelcaching to what it was before enabling OpenGL, if nobody changed it in the meantime:
    if (mAntialiasedElements == QCP::aeAll)
      setAntialiasedElements(mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup);
    if (!mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels))
      setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup);
    freeOpenGl();
  }
  // recreate all paint buffers:
  mPaintBuffers.clear();
  setupPaintBuffers();
#else
  Q_UNUSED(enabled)
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "QCustomPlot can't use OpenGL because QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL was not defined during compilation (add 'DEFINES += QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL' to your qmake .pro file)";
#endif
}
 
/*!
  Sets the viewport of this QCustomPlot. Usually users of QCustomPlot don't need to change the
  viewport manually.
 
  The viewport is the area in which the plot is drawn. All mechanisms, e.g. margin calculation take
  the viewport to be the outer border of the plot. The viewport normally is the rect() of the
  QCustomPlot widget, i.e. a rect with top left (0, 0) and size of the QCustomPlot widget.
 
  Don't confuse the viewport with the axis rect (QCustomPlot::axisRect). An axis rect is typically
  an area enclosed by four axes, where the graphs/plottables are drawn in. The viewport is larger
  and contains also the axes themselves, their tick numbers, their labels, or even additional axis
  rects, color scales and other layout elements.
 
  This function is used to allow arbitrary size exports with \ref toPixmap, \ref savePng, \ref
  savePdf, etc. by temporarily changing the viewport size.
*/
void QCustomPlot::setViewport(const QRect &rect)
{
  mViewport = rect;
  if (mPlotLayout)
    mPlotLayout->setOuterRect(mViewport);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the device pixel ratio used by the paint buffers of this QCustomPlot instance.
 
  Normally, this doesn't need to be set manually, because it is initialized with the regular \a
  QWidget::devicePixelRatio which is configured by Qt to fit the display device (e.g. 1 for normal
  displays, 2 for High-DPI displays).
 
  Device pixel ratios are supported by Qt only for Qt versions since 5.4. If this method is called
  when QCustomPlot is being used with older Qt versions, outputs an according qDebug message and
  leaves the internal buffer device pixel ratio at 1.0.
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBufferDevicePixelRatio(double ratio)
{
  if (!qFuzzyCompare(ratio, mBufferDevicePixelRatio))
  {
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    mBufferDevicePixelRatio = ratio;
    foreach (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> buffer, mPaintBuffers)
      buffer->setDevicePixelRatio(mBufferDevicePixelRatio);
    // Note: axis label cache has devicePixelRatio as part of cache hash, so no need to manually clear cache here
#else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4";
    mBufferDevicePixelRatio = 1.0;
#endif
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets \a pm as the viewport background pixmap (see \ref setViewport). The pixmap is always drawn
  below all other objects in the plot.
 
  For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the viewport, scaling can be
  enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (whether and how the aspect ratio is
  preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these options in one call,
  consider using the overloaded version of this function.
  
  If a background brush was set with \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), the viewport will
  first be filled with that brush, before drawing the background pixmap. This can be useful for
  background pixmaps with translucent areas.
 
  \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
}
 
/*!
  Sets the background brush of the viewport (see \ref setViewport).
 
  Before drawing everything else, the background is filled with \a brush. If a background pixmap
  was set with \ref setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), this brush will be used to fill the viewport
  before the background pixmap is drawn. This can be useful for background pixmaps with translucent
  areas.
  
  Set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush or Qt::Transparent to leave background transparent. This can be
  useful for exporting to image formats which support transparency, e.g. \ref savePng.
 
  \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBackgroundBrush = brush;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Allows setting the background pixmap of the viewport, whether it shall be scaled and how it
  shall be scaled in one call.
 
  \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the viewport background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the viewport. If \a scaled is
  set to true, control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is preserved with
  \ref setBackgroundScaledMode.
  
  Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is no performance
  penalty on replots. (Except when the viewport dimensions are changed continuously.)
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled)
{
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
}
 
/*!
  If scaling of the viewport background pixmap is enabled (\ref setBackgroundScaled), use this
  function to define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is preserved.
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the plottable with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns \c nullptr.
  
  There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last added
  plottable, see QCustomPlot::plottable()
  
  \see plottableCount
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottable(int index)
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size())
  {
    return mPlottables.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the last plottable that was added to the plot. If there are no plottables in the plot,
  returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see plottableCount
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottable()
{
  if (!mPlottables.isEmpty())
  {
    return mPlottables.last();
  } else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified plottable from the plot and deletes it. If necessary, the corresponding
  legend item is also removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
  
  Returns true on success.
  
  \see clearPlottables
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable)
{
  if (!mPlottables.contains(plottable))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not in list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(plottable);
    return false;
  }
  
  // remove plottable from legend:
  plottable->removeFromLegend();
  // special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface:
  if (QCPGraph *graph = qobject_cast<QCPGraph*>(plottable))
    mGraphs.removeOne(graph);
  // remove plottable:
  delete plottable;
  mPlottables.removeOne(plottable);
  return true;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Removes and deletes the plottable by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable(int index)
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size())
    return removePlottable(mPlottables[index]);
  else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Removes all plottables from the plot and deletes them. Corresponding legend items are also
  removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
  
  Returns the number of plottables removed.
  
  \see removePlottable
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearPlottables()
{
  int c = mPlottables.size();
  for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i)
    removePlottable(mPlottables[i]);
  return c;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of currently existing plottables in the plot
  
  \see plottable
*/
int QCustomPlot::plottableCount() const
{
  return mPlottables.size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of the selected plottables. If no plottables are currently selected, the list is empty.
  
  There is a convenience function if you're only interested in selected graphs, see \ref selectedGraphs.
  
  \see setInteractions, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCustomPlot::selectedPlottables() const
{
  QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
  foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, mPlottables)
  {
    if (plottable->selected())
      result.append(plottable);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns any plottable at the pixel position \a pos. Since it can capture all plottables, the
  return type is the abstract base class of all plottables, QCPAbstractPlottable.
  
  For details, and if you wish to specify a certain plottable type (e.g. QCPGraph), see the
  template method plottableAt<PlottableType>()
  
  \see plottableAt<PlottableType>(), itemAt, layoutElementAt
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, int *dataIndex) const
{
  return plottableAt<QCPAbstractPlottable>(pos, onlySelectable, dataIndex);
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this QCustomPlot instance contains the \a plottable.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::hasPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const
{
  return mPlottables.contains(plottable);
}
 
/*!
  Returns the graph with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns \c nullptr.
  
  There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last created
  graph, see QCustomPlot::graph()
  
  \see graphCount, addGraph
*/
QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::graph(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size())
  {
    return mGraphs.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the last graph, that was created with \ref addGraph. If there are no graphs in the plot,
  returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see graphCount, addGraph
*/
QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::graph() const
{
  if (!mGraphs.isEmpty())
  {
    return mGraphs.last();
  } else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Creates a new graph inside the plot. If \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis are left unspecified (0), the
  bottom (xAxis) is used as key and the left (yAxis) is used as value axis. If specified, \a
  keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in this QCustomPlot.
  
  \a keyAxis will be used as key axis (typically "x") and \a valueAxis as value axis (typically
  "y") for the graph.
  
  Returns a pointer to the newly created graph, or \c nullptr if adding the graph failed.
  
  \see graph, graphCount, removeGraph, clearGraphs
*/
QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::addGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis)
{
  if (!keyAxis) keyAxis = xAxis;
  if (!valueAxis) valueAxis = yAxis;
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't use default QCustomPlot xAxis or yAxis, because at least one is invalid (has been deleted)";
    return nullptr;
  }
  if (keyAxis->parentPlot() != this || valueAxis->parentPlot() != this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed keyAxis or valueAxis doesn't have this QCustomPlot as parent";
    return nullptr;
  }
  
  QCPGraph *newGraph = new QCPGraph(keyAxis, valueAxis);
  newGraph->setName(QLatin1String("Graph ")+QString::number(mGraphs.size()));
  return newGraph;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified \a graph from the plot and deletes it. If necessary, the corresponding
  legend item is also removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend). If any other graphs in
  the plot have a channel fill set towards the removed graph, the channel fill property of those
  graphs is reset to \c nullptr (no channel fill).
  
  Returns true on success.
  
  \see clearGraphs
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph(QCPGraph *graph)
{
  return removePlottable(graph);
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Removes and deletes the graph by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph(int index)
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size())
    return removeGraph(mGraphs[index]);
  else
    return false;
}
 
/*!
  Removes all graphs from the plot and deletes them. Corresponding legend items are also removed
  from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
 
  Returns the number of graphs removed.
  
  \see removeGraph
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearGraphs()
{
  int c = mGraphs.size();
  for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i)
    removeGraph(mGraphs[i]);
  return c;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of currently existing graphs in the plot
  
  \see graph, addGraph
*/
int QCustomPlot::graphCount() const
{
  return mGraphs.size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of the selected graphs. If no graphs are currently selected, the list is empty.
  
  If you are not only interested in selected graphs but other plottables like QCPCurve, QCPBars,
  etc., use \ref selectedPlottables.
  
  \see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCustomPlot::selectedGraphs() const
{
  QList<QCPGraph*> result;
  foreach (QCPGraph *graph, mGraphs)
  {
    if (graph->selected())
      result.append(graph);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the item with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns \c nullptr.
  
  There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last added
  item, see QCustomPlot::item()
  
  \see itemCount
*/
QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::item(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mItems.size())
  {
    return mItems.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the last item that was added to this plot. If there are no items in the plot,
  returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see itemCount
*/
QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::item() const
{
  if (!mItems.isEmpty())
  {
    return mItems.last();
  } else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified item from the plot and deletes it.
  
  Returns true on success.
  
  \see clearItems
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeItem(QCPAbstractItem *item)
{
  if (mItems.contains(item))
  {
    delete item;
    mItems.removeOne(item);
    return true;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item not in list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(item);
    return false;
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Removes and deletes the item by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeItem(int index)
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mItems.size())
    return removeItem(mItems[index]);
  else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Removes all items from the plot and deletes them.
  
  Returns the number of items removed.
  
  \see removeItem
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearItems()
{
  int c = mItems.size();
  for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i)
    removeItem(mItems[i]);
  return c;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of currently existing items in the plot
  
  \see item
*/
int QCustomPlot::itemCount() const
{
  return mItems.size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of the selected items. If no items are currently selected, the list is empty.
  
  \see setInteractions, QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable, QCPAbstractItem::setSelected
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> QCustomPlot::selectedItems() const
{
  QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
  foreach (QCPAbstractItem *item, mItems)
  {
    if (item->selected())
      result.append(item);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the item at the pixel position \a pos. Since it can capture all items, the
  return type is the abstract base class of all items, QCPAbstractItem.
  
  For details, and if you wish to specify a certain item type (e.g. QCPItemLine), see the
  template method itemAt<ItemType>()
  
  \see itemAt<ItemType>(), plottableAt, layoutElementAt
*/
QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::itemAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable) const
{
  return itemAt<QCPAbstractItem>(pos, onlySelectable);
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether this QCustomPlot contains the \a item.
  
  \see item
*/
bool QCustomPlot::hasItem(QCPAbstractItem *item) const
{
  return mItems.contains(item);
}
 
/*!
  Returns the layer with the specified \a name. If there is no layer with the specified name, \c
  nullptr is returned.
  
  Layer names are case-sensitive.
  
  \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::layer(const QString &name) const
{
  foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
  {
    if (layer->name() == name)
      return layer;
  }
  return nullptr;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns the layer by \a index. If the index is invalid, \c nullptr is returned.
  
  \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::layer(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mLayers.size())
  {
    return mLayers.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the layer that is set as current layer (see \ref setCurrentLayer).
*/
QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::currentLayer() const
{
  return mCurrentLayer;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the layer with the specified \a name to be the current layer. All layerables (\ref
  QCPLayerable), e.g. plottables and items, are created on the current layer.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if there is a layer with the specified \a name in the QCustomPlot.
  
  Layer names are case-sensitive.
  
  \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer, QCPLayerable::setLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer(const QString &name)
{
  if (QCPLayer *newCurrentLayer = layer(name))
  {
    return setCurrentLayer(newCurrentLayer);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer with name doesn't exist:" << name;
    return false;
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the provided \a layer to be the current layer.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. when \a layer is a valid layer in the QCustomPlot.
  
  \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer(QCPLayer *layer)
{
  if (!mLayers.contains(layer))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(layer);
    return false;
  }
  
  mCurrentLayer = layer;
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of currently existing layers in the plot
  
  \see layer, addLayer
*/
int QCustomPlot::layerCount() const
{
  return mLayers.size();
}
 
/*!
  Adds a new layer to this QCustomPlot instance. The new layer will have the name \a name, which
  must be unique. Depending on \a insertMode, it is positioned either below or above \a otherLayer.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if there is no other layer named \a name and \a otherLayer is a
  valid layer inside this QCustomPlot.
  
  If \a otherLayer is 0, the highest layer in the QCustomPlot will be used.
  
  For an explanation of what layers are in QCustomPlot, see the documentation of \ref QCPLayer.
  
  \see layer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::addLayer(const QString &name, QCPLayer *otherLayer, QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode)
{
  if (!otherLayer)
    otherLayer = mLayers.last();
  if (!mLayers.contains(otherLayer))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(otherLayer);
    return false;
  }
  if (layer(name))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "A layer exists already with the name" << name;
    return false;
  }
    
  QCPLayer *newLayer = new QCPLayer(this, name);
  mLayers.insert(otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 1:0), newLayer);
  updateLayerIndices();
  setupPaintBuffers(); // associates new layer with the appropriate paint buffer
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified \a layer and returns true on success.
  
  All layerables (e.g. plottables and items) on the removed layer will be moved to the layer below
  \a layer. If \a layer is the bottom layer, the layerables are moved to the layer above. In both
  cases, the total rendering order of all layerables in the QCustomPlot is preserved.
  
  If \a layer is the current layer (\ref setCurrentLayer), the layer below (or above, if bottom
  layer) becomes the new current layer.
  
  It is not possible to remove the last layer of the plot.
  
  \see layer, addLayer, moveLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeLayer(QCPLayer *layer)
{
  if (!mLayers.contains(layer))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(layer);
    return false;
  }
  if (mLayers.size() < 2)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't remove last layer";
    return false;
  }
  
  // append all children of this layer to layer below (if this is lowest layer, prepend to layer above)
  int removedIndex = layer->index();
  bool isFirstLayer = removedIndex==0;
  QCPLayer *targetLayer = isFirstLayer ? mLayers.at(removedIndex+1) : mLayers.at(removedIndex-1);
  QList<QCPLayerable*> children = layer->children();
  if (isFirstLayer) // prepend in reverse order (such that relative order stays the same)
    std::reverse(children.begin(), children.end());
  foreach (QCPLayerable *child, children)
    child->moveToLayer(targetLayer, isFirstLayer); // prepend if isFirstLayer, otherwise append
  
  // if removed layer is current layer, change current layer to layer below/above:
  if (layer == mCurrentLayer)
    setCurrentLayer(targetLayer);
  
  // invalidate the paint buffer that was responsible for this layer:
  if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = layer->mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
    pb->setInvalidated();
  
  // remove layer:
  delete layer;
  mLayers.removeOne(layer);
  updateLayerIndices();
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Moves the specified \a layer either above or below \a otherLayer. Whether it's placed above or
  below is controlled with \a insertMode.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. when both \a layer and \a otherLayer are valid layers in the
  QCustomPlot.
  
  \see layer, addLayer, moveLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::moveLayer(QCPLayer *layer, QCPLayer *otherLayer, QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode)
{
  if (!mLayers.contains(layer))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(layer);
    return false;
  }
  if (!mLayers.contains(otherLayer))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(otherLayer);
    return false;
  }
  
  if (layer->index() > otherLayer->index())
    mLayers.move(layer->index(), otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 1:0));
  else if (layer->index() < otherLayer->index())
    mLayers.move(layer->index(), otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 0:-1));
  
  // invalidate the paint buffers that are responsible for the layers:
  if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = layer->mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
    pb->setInvalidated();
  if (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> pb = otherLayer->mPaintBuffer.toStrongRef())
    pb->setInvalidated();
  
  updateLayerIndices();
  return true;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of axis rects in the plot.
  
  All axis rects can be accessed via QCustomPlot::axisRect().
  
  Initially, only one axis rect exists in the plot.
  
  \see axisRect, axisRects
*/
int QCustomPlot::axisRectCount() const
{
  return axisRects().size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the axis rect with \a index.
  
  Initially, only one axis rect (with index 0) exists in the plot. If multiple axis rects were
  added, all of them may be accessed with this function in a linear fashion (even when they are
  nested in a layout hierarchy or inside other axis rects via QCPAxisRect::insetLayout).
  
  The order of the axis rects is given by the fill order of the \ref QCPLayout that is holding
  them. For example, if the axis rects are in the top level grid layout (accessible via \ref
  QCustomPlot::plotLayout), they are ordered from left to right, top to bottom, if the layout's
  default \ref QCPLayoutGrid::setFillOrder "setFillOrder" of \ref QCPLayoutGrid::foColumnsFirst
  "foColumnsFirst" wasn't changed.
  
  If you want to access axis rects by their row and column index, use the layout interface. For
  example, use \ref QCPLayoutGrid::element of the top level grid layout, and \c qobject_cast the
  returned layout element to \ref QCPAxisRect. (See also \ref thelayoutsystem.)
  
  \see axisRectCount, axisRects, QCPLayoutGrid::setFillOrder
*/
QCPAxisRect *QCustomPlot::axisRect(int index) const
{
  const QList<QCPAxisRect*> rectList = axisRects();
  if (index >= 0 && index < rectList.size())
  {
    return rectList.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis rect index" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns all axis rects in the plot.
  
  The order of the axis rects is given by the fill order of the \ref QCPLayout that is holding
  them. For example, if the axis rects are in the top level grid layout (accessible via \ref
  QCustomPlot::plotLayout), they are ordered from left to right, top to bottom, if the layout's
  default \ref QCPLayoutGrid::setFillOrder "setFillOrder" of \ref QCPLayoutGrid::foColumnsFirst
  "foColumnsFirst" wasn't changed.
  
  \see axisRectCount, axisRect, QCPLayoutGrid::setFillOrder
*/
QList<QCPAxisRect*> QCustomPlot::axisRects() const
{
  QList<QCPAxisRect*> result;
  QStack<QCPLayoutElement*> elementStack;
  if (mPlotLayout)
    elementStack.push(mPlotLayout);
  
  while (!elementStack.isEmpty())
  {
    foreach (QCPLayoutElement *element, elementStack.pop()->elements(false))
    {
      if (element)
      {
        elementStack.push(element);
        if (QCPAxisRect *ar = qobject_cast<QCPAxisRect*>(element))
          result.append(ar);
      }
    }
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the layout element at pixel position \a pos. If there is no element at that position,
  returns \c nullptr.
  
  Only visible elements are used. If \ref QCPLayoutElement::setVisible on the element itself or on
  any of its parent elements is set to false, it will not be considered.
  
  \see itemAt, plottableAt
*/
QCPLayoutElement *QCustomPlot::layoutElementAt(const QPointF &pos) const
{
  QCPLayoutElement *currentElement = mPlotLayout;
  bool searchSubElements = true;
  while (searchSubElements && currentElement)
  {
    searchSubElements = false;
    foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, currentElement->elements(false))
    {
      if (subElement && subElement->realVisibility() && subElement->selectTest(pos, false) >= 0)
      {
        currentElement = subElement;
        searchSubElements = true;
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  return currentElement;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the layout element of type \ref QCPAxisRect at pixel position \a pos. This method ignores
  other layout elements even if they are visually in front of the axis rect (e.g. a \ref
  QCPLegend). If there is no axis rect at that position, returns \c nullptr.
 
  Only visible axis rects are used. If \ref QCPLayoutElement::setVisible on the axis rect itself or
  on any of its parent elements is set to false, it will not be considered.
 
  \see layoutElementAt
*/
QCPAxisRect *QCustomPlot::axisRectAt(const QPointF &pos) const
{
  QCPAxisRect *result = nullptr;
  QCPLayoutElement *currentElement = mPlotLayout;
  bool searchSubElements = true;
  while (searchSubElements && currentElement)
  {
    searchSubElements = false;
    foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, currentElement->elements(false))
    {
      if (subElement && subElement->realVisibility() && subElement->selectTest(pos, false) >= 0)
      {
        currentElement = subElement;
        searchSubElements = true;
        if (QCPAxisRect *ar = qobject_cast<QCPAxisRect*>(currentElement))
          result = ar;
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the axes that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection state is not \ref
  QCPAxis::spNone.
  
  \see selectedPlottables, selectedLegends, setInteractions, QCPAxis::setSelectedParts,
  QCPAxis::setSelectableParts
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCustomPlot::selectedAxes() const
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result, allAxes;
  foreach (QCPAxisRect *rect, axisRects())
    allAxes << rect->axes();
  
  foreach (QCPAxis *axis, allAxes)
  {
    if (axis->selectedParts() != QCPAxis::spNone)
      result.append(axis);
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the legends that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection state is not \ref
  QCPLegend::spNone.
  
  \see selectedPlottables, selectedAxes, setInteractions, QCPLegend::setSelectedParts,
  QCPLegend::setSelectableParts, QCPLegend::selectedItems
*/
QList<QCPLegend*> QCustomPlot::selectedLegends() const
{
  QList<QCPLegend*> result;
  
  QStack<QCPLayoutElement*> elementStack;
  if (mPlotLayout)
    elementStack.push(mPlotLayout);
  
  while (!elementStack.isEmpty())
  {
    foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, elementStack.pop()->elements(false))
    {
      if (subElement)
      {
        elementStack.push(subElement);
        if (QCPLegend *leg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>(subElement))
        {
          if (leg->selectedParts() != QCPLegend::spNone)
            result.append(leg);
        }
      }
    }
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Deselects all layerables (plottables, items, axes, legends,...) of the QCustomPlot.
  
  Since calling this function is not a user interaction, this does not emit the \ref
  selectionChangedByUser signal. The individual selectionChanged signals are emitted though, if the
  objects were previously selected.
  
  \see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, selectedItems, selectedAxes, selectedLegends
*/
void QCustomPlot::deselectAll()
{
  foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
  {
    foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children())
      layerable->deselectEvent(nullptr);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Causes a complete replot into the internal paint buffer(s). Finally, the widget surface is
  refreshed with the new buffer contents. This is the method that must be called to make changes to
  the plot, e.g. on the axis ranges or data points of graphs, visible.
 
  The parameter \a refreshPriority can be used to fine-tune the timing of the replot. For example
  if your application calls \ref replot very quickly in succession (e.g. multiple independent
  functions change some aspects of the plot and each wants to make sure the change gets replotted),
  it is advisable to set \a refreshPriority to \ref QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot. This way, the
  actual replotting is deferred to the next event loop iteration. Multiple successive calls of \ref
  replot with this priority will only cause a single replot, avoiding redundant replots and
  improving performance.
 
  Under a few circumstances, QCustomPlot causes a replot by itself. Those are resize events of the
  QCustomPlot widget and user interactions (object selection and range dragging/zooming).
 
  Before the replot happens, the signal \ref beforeReplot is emitted. After the replot, \ref
  afterReplot is emitted. It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with any of those two
  signals on two QCustomPlots to make them replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite
  recursion.
 
  If a layer is in mode \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered (\ref QCPLayer::setMode), it is also possible to
  replot only that specific layer via \ref QCPLayer::replot. See the documentation there for
  details.
  
  \see replotTime
*/
void QCustomPlot::replot(QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority refreshPriority)
{
  if (refreshPriority == QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot)
  {
    if (!mReplotQueued)
    {
      mReplotQueued = true;
      QTimer::singleShot(0, this, SLOT(replot()));
    }
    return;
  }
  
  if (mReplotting) // incase signals loop back to replot slot
    return;
  mReplotting = true;
  mReplotQueued = false;
  emit beforeReplot();
  
# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 8, 0)
  QTime replotTimer;
  replotTimer.start();
# else
  QElapsedTimer replotTimer;
  replotTimer.start();
# endif
  
  updateLayout();
  // draw all layered objects (grid, axes, plottables, items, legend,...) into their buffers:
  setupPaintBuffers();
  foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
    layer->drawToPaintBuffer();
  foreach (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> buffer, mPaintBuffers)
    buffer->setInvalidated(false);
  
  if ((refreshPriority == rpRefreshHint && mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phImmediateRefresh)) || refreshPriority==rpImmediateRefresh)
    repaint();
  else
    update();
  
# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 8, 0)
  mReplotTime = replotTimer.elapsed();
# else
  mReplotTime = replotTimer.nsecsElapsed()*1e-6;
# endif
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(mReplotTimeAverage))
    mReplotTimeAverage = mReplotTimeAverage*0.9 + mReplotTime*0.1; // exponential moving average with a time constant of 10 last replots
  else
    mReplotTimeAverage = mReplotTime; // no previous replots to average with, so initialize with replot time
  
  emit afterReplot();
  mReplotting = false;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the time in milliseconds that the last replot took. If \a average is set to true, an
  exponential moving average over the last couple of replots is returned.
  
  \see replot
*/
double QCustomPlot::replotTime(bool average) const
{
  return average ? mReplotTimeAverage : mReplotTime;
}
 
/*!
  Rescales the axes such that all plottables (like graphs) in the plot are fully visible.
  
  if \a onlyVisiblePlottables is set to true, only the plottables that have their visibility set to true
  (QCPLayerable::setVisible), will be used to rescale the axes.
  
  \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCPAxis::rescale
*/
void QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes(bool onlyVisiblePlottables)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> allAxes;
  foreach (QCPAxisRect *rect, axisRects())
    allAxes << rect->axes();
  
  foreach (QCPAxis *axis, allAxes)
    axis->rescale(onlyVisiblePlottables);
}
 
/*!
  Saves a PDF with the vectorized plot to the file \a fileName. The axis ratio as well as the scale
  of texts and lines will be derived from the specified \a width and \a height. This means, the
  output will look like the normal on-screen output of a QCustomPlot widget with the corresponding
  pixel width and height. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported image will have the
  same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has.
 
  Setting \a exportPen to \ref QCP::epNoCosmetic allows to disable the use of cosmetic pens when
  drawing to the PDF file. Cosmetic pens are pens with numerical width 0, which are always drawn as
  a one pixel wide line, no matter what zoom factor is set in the PDF-Viewer. For more information
  about cosmetic pens, see the QPainter and QPen documentation.
 
  The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any
  selected objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll
  before calling this function.
 
  Returns true on success.
 
  \warning
  \li If you plan on editing the exported PDF file with a vector graphics editor like Inkscape, it
  is advised to set \a exportPen to \ref QCP::epNoCosmetic to avoid losing those cosmetic lines
  (which might be quite many, because cosmetic pens are the default for e.g. axes and tick marks).
  \li If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget
  (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide
  explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this
  function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these
  aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange
  widths/heights.
 
  \a pdfCreator and \a pdfTitle may be used to set the according metadata fields in the resulting
  PDF file.
 
  \note On Android systems, this method does nothing and issues an according qDebug warning
  message. This is also the case if for other reasons the define flag \c QT_NO_PRINTER is set.
 
  \see savePng, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::savePdf(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, QCP::ExportPen exportPen, const QString &pdfCreator, const QString &pdfTitle)
{
  bool success = false;
#ifdef QT_NO_PRINTER
  Q_UNUSED(fileName)
  Q_UNUSED(exportPen)
  Q_UNUSED(width)
  Q_UNUSED(height)
  Q_UNUSED(pdfCreator)
  Q_UNUSED(pdfTitle)
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Qt was built without printer support (QT_NO_PRINTER). PDF not created.";
#else
  int newWidth, newHeight;
  if (width == 0 || height == 0)
  {
    newWidth = this->width();
    newHeight = this->height();
  } else
  {
    newWidth = width;
    newHeight = height;
  }
  
  QPrinter printer(QPrinter::ScreenResolution);
  printer.setOutputFileName(fileName);
  printer.setOutputFormat(QPrinter::PdfFormat);
  printer.setColorMode(QPrinter::Color);
  printer.printEngine()->setProperty(QPrintEngine::PPK_Creator, pdfCreator);
  printer.printEngine()->setProperty(QPrintEngine::PPK_DocumentName, pdfTitle);
  QRect oldViewport = viewport();
  setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight));
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 3, 0)
  printer.setFullPage(true);
  printer.setPaperSize(viewport().size(), QPrinter::DevicePixel);
#else
  QPageLayout pageLayout;
  pageLayout.setMode(QPageLayout::FullPageMode);
  pageLayout.setOrientation(QPageLayout::Portrait);
  pageLayout.setMargins(QMarginsF(0, 0, 0, 0));
  pageLayout.setPageSize(QPageSize(viewport().size(), QPageSize::Point, QString(), QPageSize::ExactMatch));
  printer.setPageLayout(pageLayout);
#endif
  QCPPainter printpainter;
  if (printpainter.begin(&printer))
  {
    printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmVectorized);
    printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching);
    printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic, exportPen==QCP::epNoCosmetic);
    printpainter.setWindow(mViewport);
    if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush &&
        mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::white &&
        mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::transparent &&
        mBackgroundBrush.color().alpha() > 0) // draw pdf background color if not white/transparent
      printpainter.fillRect(viewport(), mBackgroundBrush);
    draw(&printpainter);
    printpainter.end();
    success = true;
  }
  setViewport(oldViewport);
#endif // QT_NO_PRINTER
  return success;
}
 
/*!
  Saves a PNG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width
  and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the
  current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc.
  are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale
  parameter.
 
  For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an
  image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths,
  texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full
  200*200 pixel resolution.
 
  If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by
  temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows
  QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
 
  image compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be between 0 and 100
  or -1 to use the default setting.
 
  The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the
  quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata,
  it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch,
  centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is
  given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected
  resolution unit internally.
 
  Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the PNG format isn't supported by
  the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
 
  The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected
  objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling
  this function.
 
  If you want the PNG to have a transparent background, call \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
  with no brush (Qt::NoBrush) or a transparent color (Qt::transparent), before saving.
 
  \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget
  (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide
  explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this
  function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these
  aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange
  widths/heights.
 
  \see savePdf, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::savePng(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit)
{
  return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "PNG", quality, resolution, resolutionUnit);
}
 
/*!
  Saves a JPEG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width
  and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the
  current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc.
  are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale
  parameter.
 
  For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an
  image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths,
  texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full
  200*200 pixel resolution.
 
  If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by
  temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows
  QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
 
  image compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be between 0 and 100
  or -1 to use the default setting.
 
  The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the
  quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata,
  it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch,
  centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is
  given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected
  resolution unit internally.
 
  Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the JPEG format isn't supported by
  the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
 
  The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected
  objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling
  this function.
 
  \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget
  (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide
  explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this
  function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these
  aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange
  widths/heights.
 
  \see savePdf, savePng, saveBmp, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveJpg(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit)
{
  return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "JPG", quality, resolution, resolutionUnit);
}
 
/*!
  Saves a BMP image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width
  and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the
  current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc.
  are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale
  parameter.
 
  For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an
  image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths,
  texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full
  200*200 pixel resolution.
 
  If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by
  temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows
  QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
 
  The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the
  quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata,
  it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch,
  centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is
  given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected
  resolution unit internally.
 
  Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the BMP format isn't supported by
  the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
 
  The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected
  objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling
  this function.
 
  \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget
  (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide
  explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this
  function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these
  aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange
  widths/heights.
 
  \see savePdf, savePng, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveBmp(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit)
{
  return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "BMP", -1, resolution, resolutionUnit);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a minimum size hint that corresponds to the minimum size of the top level layout
  (\ref plotLayout). To prevent QCustomPlot from being collapsed to size/width zero, set a minimum
  size (setMinimumSize) either on the whole QCustomPlot or on any layout elements inside the plot.
  This is especially important, when placed in a QLayout where other components try to take in as
  much space as possible (e.g. QMdiArea).
*/
QSize QCustomPlot::minimumSizeHint() const
{
  return mPlotLayout->minimumOuterSizeHint();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns a size hint that is the same as \ref minimumSizeHint.
  
*/
QSize QCustomPlot::sizeHint() const
{
  return mPlotLayout->minimumOuterSizeHint();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when the QCustomPlot widget needs repainting. This does not cause a \ref replot, but
  draws the internal buffer on the widget surface.
*/
void QCustomPlot::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *event)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  
  // detect if the device pixel ratio has changed (e.g. moving window between different DPI screens), and adapt buffers if necessary:
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
#  ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_FLOAT
  double newDpr = devicePixelRatioF();
#  else
  double newDpr = devicePixelRatio();
#  endif
  if (!qFuzzyCompare(mBufferDevicePixelRatio, newDpr))
  {
    setBufferDevicePixelRatio(newDpr);
    replot(QCustomPlot::rpQueuedRefresh);
    return;
  }
#endif
  
  QCPPainter painter(this);
  if (painter.isActive())
  {
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(6, 0, 0)
  painter.setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing); // to make Antialiasing look good if using the OpenGL graphicssystem
#endif
    if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush)
      painter.fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush);
    drawBackground(&painter);
    foreach (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> buffer, mPaintBuffers)
      buffer->draw(&painter);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for a resize of the QCustomPlot widget. The viewport (which becomes the outer rect
  of mPlotLayout) is resized appropriately. Finally a \ref replot is performed.
*/
void QCustomPlot::resizeEvent(QResizeEvent *event)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  // resize and repaint the buffer:
  setViewport(rect());
  replot(rpQueuedRefresh); // queued refresh is important here, to prevent painting issues in some contexts (e.g. MDI subwindow)
}
 
/*! \internal
  
 Event handler for when a double click occurs. Emits the \ref mouseDoubleClick signal, then
 determines the layerable under the cursor and forwards the event to it. Finally, emits the
 specialized signals when certain objecs are clicked (e.g. \ref plottableDoubleClick, \ref
 axisDoubleClick, etc.).
 
 \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  emit mouseDoubleClick(event);
  mMouseHasMoved = false;
  mMousePressPos = event->pos();
  
  // determine layerable under the cursor (this event is called instead of the second press event in a double-click):
  QList<QVariant> details;
  QList<QCPLayerable*> candidates = layerableListAt(mMousePressPos, false, &details);
  for (int i=0; i<candidates.size(); ++i)
  {
    event->accept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events ignore the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list
    candidates.at(i)->mouseDoubleClickEvent(event, details.at(i));
    if (event->isAccepted())
    {
      mMouseEventLayerable = candidates.at(i);
      mMouseEventLayerableDetails = details.at(i);
      break;
    }
  }
  
  // emit specialized object double click signals:
  if (!candidates.isEmpty())
  {
    if (QCPAbstractPlottable *ap = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractPlottable*>(candidates.first()))
    {
      int dataIndex = 0;
      if (!details.first().value<QCPDataSelection>().isEmpty())
        dataIndex = details.first().value<QCPDataSelection>().dataRange().begin();
      emit plottableDoubleClick(ap, dataIndex, event);
    } else if (QCPAxis *ax = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>(candidates.first()))
      emit axisDoubleClick(ax, details.first().value<QCPAxis::SelectablePart>(), event);
    else if (QCPAbstractItem *ai = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractItem*>(candidates.first()))
      emit itemDoubleClick(ai, event);
    else if (QCPLegend *lg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>(candidates.first()))
      emit legendDoubleClick(lg, nullptr, event);
    else if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *li = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>(candidates.first()))
      emit legendDoubleClick(li->parentLegend(), li, event);
  }
  
  event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event.
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed. Emits the mousePress signal.
 
  If the current \ref setSelectionRectMode is not \ref QCP::srmNone, passes the event to the
  selection rect. Otherwise determines the layerable under the cursor and forwards the event to it.
  
  \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  emit mousePress(event);
  // save some state to tell in releaseEvent whether it was a click:
  mMouseHasMoved = false;
  mMousePressPos = event->pos();
  
  if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRectMode != QCP::srmNone)
  {
    if (mSelectionRectMode != QCP::srmZoom || qobject_cast<QCPAxisRect*>(axisRectAt(mMousePressPos))) // in zoom mode only activate selection rect if on an axis rect
      mSelectionRect->startSelection(event);
  } else
  {
    // no selection rect interaction, prepare for click signal emission and forward event to layerable under the cursor:
    QList<QVariant> details;
    QList<QCPLayerable*> candidates = layerableListAt(mMousePressPos, false, &details);
    if (!candidates.isEmpty())
    {
      mMouseSignalLayerable = candidates.first(); // candidate for signal emission is always topmost hit layerable (signal emitted in release event)
      mMouseSignalLayerableDetails = details.first();
    }
    // forward event to topmost candidate which accepts the event:
    for (int i=0; i<candidates.size(); ++i)
    {
      event->accept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events call ignore() on the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list
      candidates.at(i)->mousePressEvent(event, details.at(i));
      if (event->isAccepted())
      {
        mMouseEventLayerable = candidates.at(i);
        mMouseEventLayerableDetails = details.at(i);
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  
  event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event.
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when the cursor is moved. Emits the \ref mouseMove signal.
 
  If the selection rect (\ref setSelectionRect) is currently active, the event is forwarded to it
  in order to update the rect geometry.
  
  Otherwise, if a layout element has mouse capture focus (a mousePressEvent happened on top of the
  layout element before), the mouseMoveEvent is forwarded to that element.
  
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  emit mouseMove(event);
  
  if (!mMouseHasMoved && (mMousePressPos-event->pos()).manhattanLength() > 3)
    mMouseHasMoved = true; // moved too far from mouse press position, don't handle as click on mouse release
  
  if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive())
    mSelectionRect->moveSelection(event);
  else if (mMouseEventLayerable) // call event of affected layerable:
    mMouseEventLayerable->mouseMoveEvent(event, mMousePressPos);
  
  event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event.
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Event handler for when a mouse button is released. Emits the \ref mouseRelease signal.
 
  If the mouse was moved less than a certain threshold in any direction since the \ref
  mousePressEvent, it is considered a click which causes the selection mechanism (if activated via
  \ref setInteractions) to possibly change selection states accordingly. Further, specialized mouse
  click signals are emitted (e.g. \ref plottableClick, \ref axisClick, etc.)
 
  If a layerable is the mouse capturer (a \ref mousePressEvent happened on top of the layerable
  before), the \ref mouseReleaseEvent is forwarded to that element.
 
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  emit mouseRelease(event);
  
  if (!mMouseHasMoved) // mouse hasn't moved (much) between press and release, so handle as click
  {
    if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive()) // a simple click shouldn't successfully finish a selection rect, so cancel it here
      mSelectionRect->cancel();
    if (event->button() == Qt::LeftButton)
      processPointSelection(event);
    
    // emit specialized click signals of QCustomPlot instance:
    if (QCPAbstractPlottable *ap = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractPlottable*>(mMouseSignalLayerable))
    {
      int dataIndex = 0;
      if (!mMouseSignalLayerableDetails.value<QCPDataSelection>().isEmpty())
        dataIndex = mMouseSignalLayerableDetails.value<QCPDataSelection>().dataRange().begin();
      emit plottableClick(ap, dataIndex, event);
    } else if (QCPAxis *ax = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>(mMouseSignalLayerable))
      emit axisClick(ax, mMouseSignalLayerableDetails.value<QCPAxis::SelectablePart>(), event);
    else if (QCPAbstractItem *ai = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractItem*>(mMouseSignalLayerable))
      emit itemClick(ai, event);
    else if (QCPLegend *lg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>(mMouseSignalLayerable))
      emit legendClick(lg, nullptr, event);
    else if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *li = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>(mMouseSignalLayerable))
      emit legendClick(li->parentLegend(), li, event);
    mMouseSignalLayerable = nullptr;
  }
  
  if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive()) // Note: if a click was detected above, the selection rect is canceled there
  {
    // finish selection rect, the appropriate action will be taken via signal-slot connection:
    mSelectionRect->endSelection(event);
  } else
  {
    // call event of affected layerable:
    if (mMouseEventLayerable)
    {
      mMouseEventLayerable->mouseReleaseEvent(event, mMousePressPos);
      mMouseEventLayerable = nullptr;
    }
  }
  
  if (noAntialiasingOnDrag())
    replot(rpQueuedReplot);
  
  event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event.
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Event handler for mouse wheel events. First, the \ref mouseWheel signal is emitted. Then
  determines the affected layerable and forwards the event to it.
*/
void QCustomPlot::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  emit mouseWheel(event);
  
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 14, 0)
  const QPointF pos = event->pos();
#else
  const QPointF pos = event->position();
#endif
  
  // forward event to layerable under cursor:
  foreach (QCPLayerable *candidate, layerableListAt(pos, false))
  {
    event->accept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events ignore the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list
    candidate->wheelEvent(event);
    if (event->isAccepted())
      break;
  }
  event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event.
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function draws the entire plot, including background pixmap, with the specified \a painter.
  It does not make use of the paint buffers like \ref replot, so this is the function typically
  used by saving/exporting methods such as \ref savePdf or \ref toPainter.
 
  Note that it does not fill the background with the background brush (as the user may specify with
  \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)), this is up to the respective functions calling this
  method.
*/
void QCustomPlot::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  updateLayout();
  
  // draw viewport background pixmap:
  drawBackground(painter);
 
  // draw all layered objects (grid, axes, plottables, items, legend,...):
  foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
    layer->draw(painter);
  
  /* Debug code to draw all layout element rects
  foreach (QCPLayoutElement *el, findChildren<QCPLayoutElement*>())
  {
    painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
    painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(0, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine));
    painter->drawRect(el->rect());
    painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(255, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine));
    painter->drawRect(el->outerRect());
  }
  */
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Performs the layout update steps defined by \ref QCPLayoutElement::UpdatePhase, by calling \ref
  QCPLayoutElement::update on the main plot layout.
 
  Here, the layout elements calculate their positions and margins, and prepare for the following
  draw call.
*/
void QCustomPlot::updateLayout()
{
  // run through layout phases:
  mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upPreparation);
  mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upMargins);
  mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upLayout);
 
  emit afterLayout();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the viewport background pixmap of the plot.
  
  If a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the scaled version
  depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and then draws it inside
  the viewport with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is only updated, when
  the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background pixmap (this is
  dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a differend axis background pixmap was
  set.
  
  Note that this function does not draw a fill with the background brush
  (\ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)) beneath the pixmap.
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  // Note: background color is handled in individual replot/save functions
 
  // draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified):
  if (!mBackgroundPixmap.isNull())
  {
    if (mBackgroundScaled)
    {
      // check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated:
      QSize scaledSize(mBackgroundPixmap.size());
      scaledSize.scale(mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode);
      if (mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize)
        mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled(mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation);
      painter->drawPixmap(mViewport.topLeft(), mScaledBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height()) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect());
    } else
    {
      painter->drawPixmap(mViewport.topLeft(), mBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height()));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Goes through the layers and makes sure this QCustomPlot instance holds the correct number of
  paint buffers and that they have the correct configuration (size, pixel ratio, etc.).
  Allocations, reallocations and deletions of paint buffers are performed as necessary. It also
  associates the paint buffers with the layers, so they draw themselves into the right buffer when
  \ref QCPLayer::drawToPaintBuffer is called. This means it associates adjacent \ref
  QCPLayer::lmLogical layers to a mutual paint buffer and creates dedicated paint buffers for
  layers in \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered mode.
 
  This method uses \ref createPaintBuffer to create new paint buffers.
 
  After this method, the paint buffers are empty (filled with \c Qt::transparent) and invalidated
  (so an attempt to replot only a single buffered layer causes a full replot).
 
  This method is called in every \ref replot call, prior to actually drawing the layers (into their
  associated paint buffer). If the paint buffers don't need changing/reallocating, this method
  basically leaves them alone and thus finishes very fast.
*/
void QCustomPlot::setupPaintBuffers()
{
  int bufferIndex = 0;
  if (mPaintBuffers.isEmpty())
    mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer>(createPaintBuffer()));
  
  for (int layerIndex = 0; layerIndex < mLayers.size(); ++layerIndex)
  {
    QCPLayer *layer = mLayers.at(layerIndex);
    if (layer->mode() == QCPLayer::lmLogical)
    {
      layer->mPaintBuffer = mPaintBuffers.at(bufferIndex).toWeakRef();
    } else if (layer->mode() == QCPLayer::lmBuffered)
    {
      ++bufferIndex;
      if (bufferIndex >= mPaintBuffers.size())
        mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer>(createPaintBuffer()));
      layer->mPaintBuffer = mPaintBuffers.at(bufferIndex).toWeakRef();
      if (layerIndex < mLayers.size()-1 && mLayers.at(layerIndex+1)->mode() == QCPLayer::lmLogical) // not last layer, and next one is logical, so prepare another buffer for next layerables
      {
        ++bufferIndex;
        if (bufferIndex >= mPaintBuffers.size())
          mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer>(createPaintBuffer()));
      }
    }
  }
  // remove unneeded buffers:
  while (mPaintBuffers.size()-1 > bufferIndex)
    mPaintBuffers.removeLast();
  // resize buffers to viewport size and clear contents:
  foreach (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> buffer, mPaintBuffers)
  {
    buffer->setSize(viewport().size()); // won't do anything if already correct size
    buffer->clear(Qt::transparent);
    buffer->setInvalidated();
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method is used by \ref setupPaintBuffers when it needs to create new paint buffers.
 
  Depending on the current setting of \ref setOpenGl, and the current Qt version, different
  backends (subclasses of \ref QCPAbstractPaintBuffer) are created, initialized with the proper
  size and device pixel ratio, and returned.
*/
QCPAbstractPaintBuffer *QCustomPlot::createPaintBuffer()
{
  if (mOpenGl)
  {
#if defined(QCP_OPENGL_FBO)
    return new QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio, mGlContext, mGlPaintDevice);
#elif defined(QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER)
    return new QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio, mOpenGlMultisamples);
#else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL enabled even though no support for it compiled in, this shouldn't have happened. Falling back to pixmap paint buffer.";
    return new QCPPaintBufferPixmap(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio);
#endif
  } else
    return new QCPPaintBufferPixmap(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio);
}
 
/*!
  This method returns whether any of the paint buffers held by this QCustomPlot instance are
  invalidated.
 
  If any buffer is invalidated, a partial replot (\ref QCPLayer::replot) is not allowed and always
  causes a full replot (\ref QCustomPlot::replot) of all layers. This is the case when for example
  the layer order has changed, new layers were added or removed, layer modes were changed (\ref
  QCPLayer::setMode), or layerables were added or removed.
 
  \see QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setInvalidated
*/
bool QCustomPlot::hasInvalidatedPaintBuffers()
{
  foreach (QSharedPointer<QCPAbstractPaintBuffer> buffer, mPaintBuffers)
  {
    if (buffer->invalidated())
      return true;
  }
  return false;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  When \ref setOpenGl is set to true, this method is used to initialize OpenGL (create a context,
  surface, paint device).
 
  Returns true on success.
 
  If this method is successful, all paint buffers should be deleted and then reallocated by calling
  \ref setupPaintBuffers, so the OpenGL-based paint buffer subclasses (\ref
  QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer, \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo) are used for subsequent replots.
 
  \see freeOpenGl
*/
bool QCustomPlot::setupOpenGl()
{
#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO
  freeOpenGl();
  QSurfaceFormat proposedSurfaceFormat;
  proposedSurfaceFormat.setSamples(mOpenGlMultisamples);
#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_OFFSCREENSURFACE
  QOffscreenSurface *surface = new QOffscreenSurface;
#else
  QWindow *surface = new QWindow;
  surface->setSurfaceType(QSurface::OpenGLSurface);
#endif
  surface->setFormat(proposedSurfaceFormat);
  surface->create();
  mGlSurface = QSharedPointer<QSurface>(surface);
  mGlContext = QSharedPointer<QOpenGLContext>(new QOpenGLContext);
  mGlContext->setFormat(mGlSurface->format());
  if (!mGlContext->create())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to create OpenGL context";
    mGlContext.clear();
    mGlSurface.clear();
    return false;
  }
  if (!mGlContext->makeCurrent(mGlSurface.data())) // context needs to be current to create paint device
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to make opengl context current";
    mGlContext.clear();
    mGlSurface.clear();
    return false;
  }
  if (!QOpenGLFramebufferObject::hasOpenGLFramebufferObjects())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL of this system doesn't support frame buffer objects";
    mGlContext.clear();
    mGlSurface.clear();
    return false;
  }
  mGlPaintDevice = QSharedPointer<QOpenGLPaintDevice>(new QOpenGLPaintDevice);
  return true;
#elif defined(QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER)
  return QGLFormat::hasOpenGL();
#else
  return false;
#endif
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  When \ref setOpenGl is set to false, this method is used to deinitialize OpenGL (releases the
  context and frees resources).
 
  After OpenGL is disabled, all paint buffers should be deleted and then reallocated by calling
  \ref setupPaintBuffers, so the standard software rendering paint buffer subclass (\ref
  QCPPaintBufferPixmap) is used for subsequent replots.
 
  \see setupOpenGl
*/
void QCustomPlot::freeOpenGl()
{
#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO
  mGlPaintDevice.clear();
  mGlContext.clear();
  mGlSurface.clear();
#endif
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is used by \ref QCPAxisRect::removeAxis to report removed axes to the QCustomPlot
  so it may clear its QCustomPlot::xAxis, yAxis, xAxis2 and yAxis2 members accordingly.
*/
void QCustomPlot::axisRemoved(QCPAxis *axis)
{
  if (xAxis == axis)
    xAxis = nullptr;
  if (xAxis2 == axis)
    xAxis2 = nullptr;
  if (yAxis == axis)
    yAxis = nullptr;
  if (yAxis2 == axis)
    yAxis2 = nullptr;
  
  // Note: No need to take care of range drag axes and range zoom axes, because they are stored in smart pointers
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is used by the QCPLegend destructor to report legend removal to the QCustomPlot so
  it may clear its QCustomPlot::legend member accordingly.
*/
void QCustomPlot::legendRemoved(QCPLegend *legend)
{
  if (this->legend == legend)
    this->legend = nullptr;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This slot is connected to the selection rect's \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted signal when \ref
  setSelectionRectMode is set to \ref QCP::srmSelect.
 
  First, it determines which axis rect was the origin of the selection rect judging by the starting
  point of the selection. Then it goes through the plottables (\ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D to be
  precise) associated with that axis rect and finds the data points that are in \a rect. It does
  this by querying their \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTestRect method.
  
  Then, the actual selection is done by calling the plottables' \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::selectEvent, placing the found selected data points in the \a details
  parameter as <tt>QVariant(\ref QCPDataSelection)</tt>. All plottables that weren't touched by \a
  rect receive a \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::deselectEvent.
  
  \see processRectZoom
*/
void QCustomPlot::processRectSelection(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event)
{
  typedef QPair<QCPAbstractPlottable*, QCPDataSelection> SelectionCandidate;
  typedef QMultiMap<int, SelectionCandidate> SelectionCandidates; // map key is number of selected data points, so we have selections sorted by size
  
  bool selectionStateChanged = false;
  
  if (mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottables))
  {
    SelectionCandidates potentialSelections;
    QRectF rectF(rect.normalized());
    if (QCPAxisRect *affectedAxisRect = axisRectAt(rectF.topLeft()))
    {
      // determine plottables that were hit by the rect and thus are candidates for selection:
      foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, affectedAxisRect->plottables())
      {
        if (QCPPlottableInterface1D *plottableInterface = plottable->interface1D())
        {
          QCPDataSelection dataSel = plottableInterface->selectTestRect(rectF, true);
          if (!dataSel.isEmpty())
            potentialSelections.insert(dataSel.dataPointCount(), SelectionCandidate(plottable, dataSel));
        }
      }
      
      if (!mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iMultiSelect))
      {
        // only leave plottable with most selected points in map, since we will only select a single plottable:
        if (!potentialSelections.isEmpty())
        {
          SelectionCandidates::iterator it = potentialSelections.begin();
          while (it != std::prev(potentialSelections.end())) // erase all except last element
            it = potentialSelections.erase(it);
        }
      }
      
      bool additive = event->modifiers().testFlag(mMultiSelectModifier);
      // deselect all other layerables if not additive selection:
      if (!additive)
      {
        // emit deselection except to those plottables who will be selected afterwards:
        foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
        {
          foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children())
          {
            if ((potentialSelections.isEmpty() || potentialSelections.constBegin()->first != layerable) && mInteractions.testFlag(layerable->selectionCategory()))
            {
              bool selChanged = false;
              layerable->deselectEvent(&selChanged);
              selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
            }
          }
        }
      }
      
      // go through selections in reverse (largest selection first) and emit select events:
      SelectionCandidates::const_iterator it = potentialSelections.constEnd();
      while (it != potentialSelections.constBegin())
      {
        --it;
        if (mInteractions.testFlag(it.value().first->selectionCategory()))
        {
          bool selChanged = false;
          it.value().first->selectEvent(event, additive, QVariant::fromValue(it.value().second), &selChanged);
          selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
        }
      }
    }
  }
  
  if (selectionStateChanged)
  {
    emit selectionChangedByUser();
    replot(rpQueuedReplot);
  } else if (mSelectionRect)
    mSelectionRect->layer()->replot();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This slot is connected to the selection rect's \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted signal when \ref
  setSelectionRectMode is set to \ref QCP::srmZoom.
 
  It determines which axis rect was the origin of the selection rect judging by the starting point
  of the selection, and then zooms the axes defined via \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes to the
  provided \a rect (see \ref QCPAxisRect::zoom).
  
  \see processRectSelection
*/
void QCustomPlot::processRectZoom(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  if (QCPAxisRect *axisRect = axisRectAt(rect.topLeft()))
  {
    QList<QCPAxis*> affectedAxes = QList<QCPAxis*>() << axisRect->rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Horizontal) << axisRect->rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Vertical);
    affectedAxes.removeAll(static_cast<QCPAxis*>(nullptr));
    axisRect->zoom(QRectF(rect), affectedAxes);
  }
  replot(rpQueuedReplot); // always replot to make selection rect disappear
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method is called when a simple left mouse click was detected on the QCustomPlot surface.
 
  It first determines the layerable that was hit by the click, and then calls its \ref
  QCPLayerable::selectEvent. All other layerables receive a QCPLayerable::deselectEvent (unless the
  multi-select modifier was pressed, see \ref setMultiSelectModifier).
 
  In this method the hit layerable is determined a second time using \ref layerableAt (after the
  one in \ref mousePressEvent), because we want \a onlySelectable set to true this time. This
  implies that the mouse event grabber (mMouseEventLayerable) may be a different one from the
  clicked layerable determined here. For example, if a non-selectable layerable is in front of a
  selectable layerable at the click position, the front layerable will receive mouse events but the
  selectable one in the back will receive the \ref QCPLayerable::selectEvent.
 
  \see processRectSelection, QCPLayerable::selectTest
*/
void QCustomPlot::processPointSelection(QMouseEvent *event)
{
  QVariant details;
  QCPLayerable *clickedLayerable = layerableAt(event->pos(), true, &details);
  bool selectionStateChanged = false;
  bool additive = mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iMultiSelect) && event->modifiers().testFlag(mMultiSelectModifier);
  // deselect all other layerables if not additive selection:
  if (!additive)
  {
    foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers)
    {
      foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children())
      {
        if (layerable != clickedLayerable && mInteractions.testFlag(layerable->selectionCategory()))
        {
          bool selChanged = false;
          layerable->deselectEvent(&selChanged);
          selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
        }
      }
    }
  }
  if (clickedLayerable && mInteractions.testFlag(clickedLayerable->selectionCategory()))
  {
    // a layerable was actually clicked, call its selectEvent:
    bool selChanged = false;
    clickedLayerable->selectEvent(event, additive, details, &selChanged);
    selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
  }
  if (selectionStateChanged)
  {
    emit selectionChangedByUser();
    replot(rpQueuedReplot);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Registers the specified plottable with this QCustomPlot and, if \ref setAutoAddPlottableToLegend
  is enabled, adds it to the legend (QCustomPlot::legend). QCustomPlot takes ownership of the
  plottable.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. when \a plottable isn't already in this plot and the parent plot of
  \a plottable is this QCustomPlot.
  
  This method is called automatically in the QCPAbstractPlottable base class constructor.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::registerPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable)
{
  if (mPlottables.contains(plottable))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable already added to this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(plottable);
    return false;
  }
  if (plottable->parentPlot() != this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not created with this QCustomPlot as parent:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(plottable);
    return false;
  }
  
  mPlottables.append(plottable);
  // possibly add plottable to legend:
  if (mAutoAddPlottableToLegend)
    plottable->addToLegend();
  if (!plottable->layer()) // usually the layer is already set in the constructor of the plottable (via QCPLayerable constructor)
    plottable->setLayer(currentLayer());
  return true;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  In order to maintain the simplified graph interface of QCustomPlot, this method is called by the
  QCPGraph constructor to register itself with this QCustomPlot's internal graph list. Returns true
  on success, i.e. if \a graph is valid and wasn't already registered with this QCustomPlot.
  
  This graph specific registration happens in addition to the call to \ref registerPlottable by the
  QCPAbstractPlottable base class.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::registerGraph(QCPGraph *graph)
{
  if (!graph)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed graph is zero";
    return false;
  }
  if (mGraphs.contains(graph))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph already registered with this QCustomPlot";
    return false;
  }
  
  mGraphs.append(graph);
  return true;
}
 
 
/*! \internal
 
  Registers the specified item with this QCustomPlot. QCustomPlot takes ownership of the item.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. when \a item wasn't already in the plot and the parent plot of \a
  item is this QCustomPlot.
  
  This method is called automatically in the QCPAbstractItem base class constructor.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::registerItem(QCPAbstractItem *item)
{
  if (mItems.contains(item))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item already added to this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(item);
    return false;
  }
  if (item->parentPlot() != this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item not created with this QCustomPlot as parent:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(item);
    return false;
  }
  
  mItems.append(item);
  if (!item->layer()) // usually the layer is already set in the constructor of the item (via QCPLayerable constructor)
    item->setLayer(currentLayer());
  return true;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Assigns all layers their index (QCPLayer::mIndex) in the mLayers list. This method is thus called
  after every operation that changes the layer indices, like layer removal, layer creation, layer
  moving.
*/
void QCustomPlot::updateLayerIndices() const
{
  for (int i=0; i<mLayers.size(); ++i)
    mLayers.at(i)->mIndex = i;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the top-most layerable at pixel position \a pos. If \a onlySelectable is set to true,
  only those layerables that are selectable will be considered. (Layerable subclasses communicate
  their selectability via the QCPLayerable::selectTest method, by returning -1.)
 
  \a selectionDetails is an output parameter that contains selection specifics of the affected
  layerable. This is useful if the respective layerable shall be given a subsequent
  QCPLayerable::selectEvent (like in \ref mouseReleaseEvent). \a selectionDetails usually contains
  information about which part of the layerable was hit, in multi-part layerables (e.g.
  QCPAxis::SelectablePart). If the layerable is a plottable, \a selectionDetails contains a \ref
  QCPDataSelection instance with the single data point which is closest to \a pos.
  
  \see layerableListAt, layoutElementAt, axisRectAt
*/
QCPLayerable *QCustomPlot::layerableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *selectionDetails) const
{
  QList<QVariant> details;
  QList<QCPLayerable*> candidates = layerableListAt(pos, onlySelectable, selectionDetails ? &details : nullptr);
  if (selectionDetails && !details.isEmpty())
    *selectionDetails = details.first();
  if (!candidates.isEmpty())
    return candidates.first();
  else
    return nullptr;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the layerables at pixel position \a pos. If \a onlySelectable is set to true, only those
  layerables that are selectable will be considered. (Layerable subclasses communicate their
  selectability via the QCPLayerable::selectTest method, by returning -1.)
 
  The returned list is sorted by the layerable/drawing order such that the layerable that appears
  on top in the plot is at index 0 of the returned list. If you only need to know the top
  layerable, rather use \ref layerableAt.
 
  \a selectionDetails is an output parameter that contains selection specifics of the affected
  layerable. This is useful if the respective layerable shall be given a subsequent
  QCPLayerable::selectEvent (like in \ref mouseReleaseEvent). \a selectionDetails usually contains
  information about which part of the layerable was hit, in multi-part layerables (e.g.
  QCPAxis::SelectablePart). If the layerable is a plottable, \a selectionDetails contains a \ref
  QCPDataSelection instance with the single data point which is closest to \a pos.
  
  \see layerableAt, layoutElementAt, axisRectAt
*/
QList<QCPLayerable*> QCustomPlot::layerableListAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QList<QVariant> *selectionDetails) const
{
  QList<QCPLayerable*> result;
  for (int layerIndex=mLayers.size()-1; layerIndex>=0; --layerIndex)
  {
    const QList<QCPLayerable*> layerables = mLayers.at(layerIndex)->children();
    for (int i=layerables.size()-1; i>=0; --i)
    {
      if (!layerables.at(i)->realVisibility())
        continue;
      QVariant details;
      double dist = layerables.at(i)->selectTest(pos, onlySelectable, selectionDetails ? &details : nullptr);
      if (dist >= 0 && dist < selectionTolerance())
      {
        result.append(layerables.at(i));
        if (selectionDetails)
          selectionDetails->append(details);
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Saves the plot to a rastered image file \a fileName in the image format \a format. The plot is
  sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a scale. (width 100 and scale 2.0 lead
  to a full resolution file with width 200.) If the \a format supports compression, \a quality may
  be between 0 and 100 to control it.
 
  Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the given \a format isn't supported
  by the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
 
  The \a resolution will be written to the image file header (if the file format supports this) and
  has no direct consequence for the quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a
  tool which respects the metadata, it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size
  in real units of length (inch, centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in
  which units \a resolution is given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted
  to the format's expected resolution unit internally.
 
  \see saveBmp, saveJpg, savePng, savePdf
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveRastered(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, const char *format, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit)
{
  QImage buffer = toPixmap(width, height, scale).toImage();
  
  int dotsPerMeter = 0;
  switch (resolutionUnit)
  {
    case QCP::ruDotsPerMeter: dotsPerMeter = resolution; break;
    case QCP::ruDotsPerCentimeter: dotsPerMeter = resolution*100; break;
    case QCP::ruDotsPerInch: dotsPerMeter = int(resolution/0.0254); break;
  }
  buffer.setDotsPerMeterX(dotsPerMeter); // this is saved together with some image formats, e.g. PNG, and is relevant when opening image in other tools
  buffer.setDotsPerMeterY(dotsPerMeter); // this is saved together with some image formats, e.g. PNG, and is relevant when opening image in other tools
  if (!buffer.isNull())
    return buffer.save(fileName, format, quality);
  else
    return false;
}
 
/*!
  Renders the plot to a pixmap and returns it.
  
  The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a scale. (width 100 and
  scale 2.0 lead to a full resolution pixmap with width 200.)
  
  \see toPainter, saveRastered, saveBmp, savePng, saveJpg, savePdf
*/
QPixmap QCustomPlot::toPixmap(int width, int height, double scale)
{
  // this method is somewhat similar to toPainter. Change something here, and a change in toPainter might be necessary, too.
  int newWidth, newHeight;
  if (width == 0 || height == 0)
  {
    newWidth = this->width();
    newHeight = this->height();
  } else
  {
    newWidth = width;
    newHeight = height;
  }
  int scaledWidth = qRound(scale*newWidth);
  int scaledHeight = qRound(scale*newHeight);
 
  QPixmap result(scaledWidth, scaledHeight);
  result.fill(mBackgroundBrush.style() == Qt::SolidPattern ? mBackgroundBrush.color() : Qt::transparent); // if using non-solid pattern, make transparent now and draw brush pattern later
  QCPPainter painter;
  painter.begin(&result);
  if (painter.isActive())
  {
    QRect oldViewport = viewport();
    setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight));
    painter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching);
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(scale, 1.0))
    {
      if (scale > 1.0) // for scale < 1 we always want cosmetic pens where possible, because else lines might disappear for very small scales
        painter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic);
      painter.scale(scale, scale);
    }
    if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::SolidPattern && mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) // solid fills were done a few lines above with QPixmap::fill
      painter.fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush);
    draw(&painter);
    setViewport(oldViewport);
    painter.end();
  } else // might happen if pixmap has width or height zero
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Couldn't activate painter on pixmap";
    return QPixmap();
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Renders the plot using the passed \a painter.
  
  The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels. If the \a painter's scale is not 1.0, the resulting plot will
  appear scaled accordingly.
  
  \note If you are restricted to using a QPainter (instead of QCPPainter), create a temporary QPicture and open a QCPPainter
  on it. Then call \ref toPainter with this QCPPainter. After ending the paint operation on the picture, draw it with
  the QPainter. This will reproduce the painter actions the QCPPainter took, with a QPainter.
  
  \see toPixmap
*/
void QCustomPlot::toPainter(QCPPainter *painter, int width, int height)
{
  // this method is somewhat similar to toPixmap. Change something here, and a change in toPixmap might be necessary, too.
  int newWidth, newHeight;
  if (width == 0 || height == 0)
  {
    newWidth = this->width();
    newHeight = this->height();
  } else
  {
    newWidth = width;
    newHeight = height;
  }
 
  if (painter->isActive())
  {
    QRect oldViewport = viewport();
    setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight));
    painter->setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching);
    if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) // unlike in toPixmap, we can't do QPixmap::fill for Qt::SolidPattern brush style, so we also draw solid fills with fillRect here
      painter->fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush);
    draw(painter);
    setViewport(oldViewport);
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed painter is not active";
}
/* end of 'src/core.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/colorgradient.cpp'   */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 25408 */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorGradient
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPColorGradient
  \brief Defines a color gradient for use with e.g. \ref QCPColorMap
  
  This class describes a color gradient which can be used to encode data with color. For example,
  QCPColorMap and QCPColorScale have \ref QCPColorMap::setGradient "setGradient" methods which
  take an instance of this class. Colors are set with \ref setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color)
  with a \a position from 0 to 1. In between these defined color positions, the
  color will be interpolated linearly either in RGB or HSV space, see \ref setColorInterpolation.
 
  Alternatively, load one of the preset color gradients shown in the image below, with \ref
  loadPreset, or by directly specifying the preset in the constructor.
  
  Apart from red, green and blue components, the gradient also interpolates the alpha values of the
  configured color stops. This allows to display some portions of the data range as transparent in
  the plot.
  
  How NaN values are interpreted can be configured with \ref setNanHandling.
  
  \image html QCPColorGradient.png
  
  The constructor \ref QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset) allows directly converting a \ref
  GradientPreset to a QCPColorGradient. This means that you can directly pass \ref GradientPreset
  to all the \a setGradient methods, e.g.:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorgradient-setgradient
  
  The total number of levels used in the gradient can be set with \ref setLevelCount. Whether the
  color gradient shall be applied periodically (wrapping around) to data values that lie outside
  the data range specified on the plottable instance can be controlled with \ref setPeriodic.
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs a new, empty QCPColorGradient with no predefined color stops. You can add own color
  stops with \ref setColorStopAt.
 
  The color level count is initialized to 350.
*/
QCPColorGradient::QCPColorGradient() :
  mLevelCount(350),
  mColorInterpolation(ciRGB),
  mNanHandling(nhNone),
  mNanColor(Qt::black),
  mPeriodic(false),
  mColorBufferInvalidated(true)
{
  mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0), mLevelCount);
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a new QCPColorGradient initialized with the colors and color interpolation according
  to \a preset.
 
  The color level count is initialized to 350.
*/
QCPColorGradient::QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset) :
  mLevelCount(350),
  mColorInterpolation(ciRGB),
  mNanHandling(nhNone),
  mNanColor(Qt::black),
  mPeriodic(false),
  mColorBufferInvalidated(true)
{
  mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0), mLevelCount);
  loadPreset(preset);
}
 
/* undocumented operator */
bool QCPColorGradient::operator==(const QCPColorGradient &other) const
{
  return ((other.mLevelCount == this->mLevelCount) &&
          (other.mColorInterpolation == this->mColorInterpolation) &&
          (other.mNanHandling == this ->mNanHandling) &&
          (other.mNanColor == this->mNanColor) &&
          (other.mPeriodic == this->mPeriodic) &&
          (other.mColorStops == this->mColorStops));
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number of discretization levels of the color gradient to \a n. The default is 350 which
  is typically enough to create a smooth appearance. The minimum number of levels is 2.
 
  \image html QCPColorGradient-levelcount.png
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setLevelCount(int n)
{
  if (n < 2)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "n must be greater or equal 2 but was" << n;
    n = 2;
  }
  if (n != mLevelCount)
  {
    mLevelCount = n;
    mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets at which positions from 0 to 1 which color shall occur. The positions are the keys, the
  colors are the values of the passed QMap \a colorStops. In between these color stops, the color
  is interpolated according to \ref setColorInterpolation.
  
  A more convenient way to create a custom gradient may be to clear all color stops with \ref
  clearColorStops (or creating a new, empty QCPColorGradient) and then adding them one by one with
  \ref setColorStopAt.
  
  \see clearColorStops
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorStops(const QMap<double, QColor> &colorStops)
{
  mColorStops = colorStops;
  mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a color the gradient will have at the specified \a position (from 0 to 1). In between
  these color stops, the color is interpolated according to \ref setColorInterpolation.
  
  \see setColorStops, clearColorStops
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color)
{
  mColorStops.insert(position, color);
  mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the colors in between the configured color stops (see \ref setColorStopAt) shall be
  interpolated linearly in RGB or in HSV color space.
  
  For example, a sweep in RGB space from red to green will have a muddy brown intermediate color,
  whereas in HSV space the intermediate color is yellow.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorInterpolation(QCPColorGradient::ColorInterpolation interpolation)
{
  if (interpolation != mColorInterpolation)
  {
    mColorInterpolation = interpolation;
    mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets how NaNs in the data are displayed in the plot.
  
  \see setNanColor
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setNanHandling(QCPColorGradient::NanHandling handling)
{
  mNanHandling = handling;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that NaN data is represented by, if \ref setNanHandling is set
  to ref nhNanColor.
  
  \see setNanHandling
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setNanColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mNanColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether data points that are outside the configured data range (e.g. \ref
  QCPColorMap::setDataRange) are colored by periodically repeating the color gradient or whether
  they all have the same color, corresponding to the respective gradient boundary color.
  
  \image html QCPColorGradient-periodic.png
  
  As shown in the image above, gradients that have the same start and end color are especially
  suitable for a periodic gradient mapping, since they produce smooth color transitions throughout
  the color map. A preset that has this property is \ref gpHues.
  
  In practice, using periodic color gradients makes sense when the data corresponds to a periodic
  dimension, such as an angle or a phase. If this is not the case, the color encoding might become
  ambiguous, because multiple different data values are shown as the same color.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic(bool enabled)
{
  mPeriodic = enabled;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  This method is used to quickly convert a \a data array to colors. The colors will be output in
  the array \a scanLine. Both \a data and \a scanLine must have the length \a n when passed to this
  function. The data range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the gradient is passed
  in \a range. \a logarithmic indicates whether the data values shall be mapped to colors
  logarithmically.
 
  if \a data actually contains 2D-data linearized via <tt>[row*columnCount + column]</tt>, you can
  set \a dataIndexFactor to <tt>columnCount</tt> to convert a column instead of a row of the data
  array, in \a scanLine. \a scanLine will remain a regular (1D) array. This works because \a data
  is addressed <tt>data[i*dataIndexFactor]</tt>.
  
  Use the overloaded method to additionally provide alpha map data.
 
  The QRgb values that are placed in \a scanLine have their r, g, and b components premultiplied
  with alpha (see QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied).
*/
void QCPColorGradient::colorize(const double *data, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor, bool logarithmic)
{
  // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt color() and the other colorize() overload
  if (!data)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as data";
    return;
  }
  if (!scanLine)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as scanLine";
    return;
  }
  if (mColorBufferInvalidated)
    updateColorBuffer();
  
  const bool skipNanCheck = mNanHandling == nhNone;
  const double posToIndexFactor = !logarithmic ? (mLevelCount-1)/range.size() : (mLevelCount-1)/qLn(range.upper/range.lower);
  for (int i=0; i<n; ++i)
  {
    const double value = data[dataIndexFactor*i];
    if (skipNanCheck || !std::isnan(value))
    {
      qint64 index = qint64((!logarithmic ? value-range.lower : qLn(value/range.lower)) * posToIndexFactor);
      if (!mPeriodic)
      {
        index = qBound(qint64(0), index, qint64(mLevelCount-1));
      } else
      {
        index %= mLevelCount;
        if (index < 0)
          index += mLevelCount;
      }
      scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index);
    } else
    {
      switch(mNanHandling)
      {
      case nhLowestColor: scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.first(); break;
      case nhHighestColor: scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.last(); break;
      case nhTransparent: scanLine[i] = qRgba(0, 0, 0, 0); break;
      case nhNanColor: scanLine[i] = mNanColor.rgba(); break;
      case nhNone: break; // shouldn't happen
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Additionally to the other overload of \ref colorize, this method takes the array \a alpha, which
  has the same size and structure as \a data and encodes the alpha information per data point.
 
  The QRgb values that are placed in \a scanLine have their r, g and b components premultiplied
  with alpha (see QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied).
*/
void QCPColorGradient::colorize(const double *data, const unsigned char *alpha, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor, bool logarithmic)
{
  // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt color() and the other colorize() overload
  if (!data)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as data";
    return;
  }
  if (!alpha)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as alpha";
    return;
  }
  if (!scanLine)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as scanLine";
    return;
  }
  if (mColorBufferInvalidated)
    updateColorBuffer();
  
  const bool skipNanCheck = mNanHandling == nhNone;
  const double posToIndexFactor = !logarithmic ? (mLevelCount-1)/range.size() : (mLevelCount-1)/qLn(range.upper/range.lower);
  for (int i=0; i<n; ++i)
  {
    const double value = data[dataIndexFactor*i];
    if (skipNanCheck || !std::isnan(value))
    {
      qint64 index = qint64((!logarithmic ? value-range.lower : qLn(value/range.lower)) * posToIndexFactor);
      if (!mPeriodic)
      {
        index = qBound(qint64(0), index, qint64(mLevelCount-1));
      } else
      {
        index %= mLevelCount;
        if (index < 0)
          index += mLevelCount;
      }
      if (alpha[dataIndexFactor*i] == 255)
      {
        scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index);
      } else
      {
        const QRgb rgb = mColorBuffer.at(index);
        const float alphaF = alpha[dataIndexFactor*i]/255.0f;
        scanLine[i] = qRgba(int(qRed(rgb)*alphaF), int(qGreen(rgb)*alphaF), int(qBlue(rgb)*alphaF), int(qAlpha(rgb)*alphaF)); // also multiply r,g,b with alpha, to conform to Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied
      }
    } else
    {
      switch(mNanHandling)
      {
      case nhLowestColor: scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.first(); break;
      case nhHighestColor: scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.last(); break;
      case nhTransparent: scanLine[i] = qRgba(0, 0, 0, 0); break;
      case nhNanColor: scanLine[i] = mNanColor.rgba(); break;
      case nhNone: break; // shouldn't happen
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method is used to colorize a single data value given in \a position, to colors. The data
  range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the gradient is passed in \a range. \a
  logarithmic indicates whether the data value shall be mapped to a color logarithmically.
 
  If an entire array of data values shall be converted, rather use \ref colorize, for better
  performance.
 
  The returned QRgb has its r, g and b components premultiplied with alpha (see
  QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied).
*/
QRgb QCPColorGradient::color(double position, const QCPRange &range, bool logarithmic)
{
  // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt ::colorize()
  if (mColorBufferInvalidated)
    updateColorBuffer();
  
  const bool skipNanCheck = mNanHandling == nhNone;
  if (!skipNanCheck && std::isnan(position))
  {
    switch(mNanHandling)
    {
    case nhLowestColor: return mColorBuffer.first();
    case nhHighestColor: return mColorBuffer.last();
    case nhTransparent: return qRgba(0, 0, 0, 0);
    case nhNanColor: return mNanColor.rgba();
    case nhNone: return qRgba(0, 0, 0, 0); // shouldn't happen
    }
  }
  
  const double posToIndexFactor = !logarithmic ? (mLevelCount-1)/range.size() : (mLevelCount-1)/qLn(range.upper/range.lower);
  int index = int((!logarithmic ? position-range.lower : qLn(position/range.lower)) * posToIndexFactor);
  if (!mPeriodic)
  {
    index = qBound(0, index, mLevelCount-1);
  } else
  {
    index %= mLevelCount;
    if (index < 0)
      index += mLevelCount;
  }
  return mColorBuffer.at(index);
}
 
/*!
  Clears the current color stops and loads the specified \a preset. A preset consists of predefined
  color stops and the corresponding color interpolation method.
  
  The available presets are:
  \image html QCPColorGradient.png
*/
void QCPColorGradient::loadPreset(GradientPreset preset)
{
  clearColorStops();
  switch (preset)
  {
    case gpGrayscale:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, Qt::black);
      setColorStopAt(1, Qt::white);
      break;
    case gpHot:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 0, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.2, QColor(180, 10, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.4, QColor(245, 50, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 150, 10));
      setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(255, 255, 50));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255));
      break;
    case gpCold:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 50));
      setColorStopAt(0.2, QColor(0, 10, 180));
      setColorStopAt(0.4, QColor(0, 50, 245));
      setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(10, 150, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(50, 255, 255));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255));
      break;
    case gpNight:
      setColorInterpolation(ciHSV);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(10, 20, 30));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(250, 255, 250));
      break;
    case gpCandy:
      setColorInterpolation(ciHSV);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 255));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 250, 250));
      break;
    case gpGeography:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(70, 170, 210));
      setColorStopAt(0.20, QColor(90, 160, 180));
      setColorStopAt(0.25, QColor(45, 130, 175));
      setColorStopAt(0.30, QColor(100, 140, 125));
      setColorStopAt(0.5, QColor(100, 140, 100));
      setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(130, 145, 120));
      setColorStopAt(0.7, QColor(140, 130, 120));
      setColorStopAt(0.9, QColor(180, 190, 190));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(210, 210, 230));
      break;
    case gpIon:
      setColorInterpolation(ciHSV);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 10, 10));
      setColorStopAt(0.45, QColor(0, 0, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(0, 255, 255));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(0, 255, 0));
      break;
    case gpThermal:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 50));
      setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(20, 0, 120));
      setColorStopAt(0.33, QColor(200, 30, 140));
      setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 100, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.85, QColor(255, 255, 40));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255));
      break;
    case gpPolar:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 255, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.18, QColor(10, 70, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.28, QColor(10, 10, 190));
      setColorStopAt(0.5, QColor(0, 0, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.72, QColor(190, 10, 10));
      setColorStopAt(0.82, QColor(255, 70, 10));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 50));
      break;
    case gpSpectrum:
      setColorInterpolation(ciHSV);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 0, 50));
      setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(0, 0, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.35, QColor(0, 255, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 255, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.75, QColor(255, 30, 0));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(50, 0, 0));
      break;
    case gpJet:
      setColorInterpolation(ciRGB);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 100));
      setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(0, 50, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.35, QColor(0, 255, 255));
      setColorStopAt(0.65, QColor(255, 255, 0));
      setColorStopAt(0.85, QColor(255, 30, 0));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(100, 0, 0));
      break;
    case gpHues:
      setColorInterpolation(ciHSV);
      setColorStopAt(0, QColor(255, 0, 0));
      setColorStopAt(1.0/3.0, QColor(0, 0, 255));
      setColorStopAt(2.0/3.0, QColor(0, 255, 0));
      setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 0, 0));
      break;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Clears all color stops.
  
  \see setColorStops, setColorStopAt
*/
void QCPColorGradient::clearColorStops()
{
  mColorStops.clear();
  mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
 
/*!
  Returns an inverted gradient. The inverted gradient has all properties as this \ref
  QCPColorGradient, but the order of the color stops is inverted.
  
  \see setColorStops, setColorStopAt
*/
QCPColorGradient QCPColorGradient::inverted() const
{
  QCPColorGradient result(*this);
  result.clearColorStops();
  for (QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator it=mColorStops.constBegin(); it!=mColorStops.constEnd(); ++it)
    result.setColorStopAt(1.0-it.key(), it.value());
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns true if the color gradient uses transparency, i.e. if any of the configured color stops
  has an alpha value below 255.
*/
bool QCPColorGradient::stopsUseAlpha() const
{
  for (QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator it=mColorStops.constBegin(); it!=mColorStops.constEnd(); ++it)
  {
    if (it.value().alpha() < 255)
      return true;
  }
  return false;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Updates the internal color buffer which will be used by \ref colorize and \ref color, to quickly
  convert positions to colors. This is where the interpolation between color stops is calculated.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::updateColorBuffer()
{
  if (mColorBuffer.size() != mLevelCount)
    mColorBuffer.resize(mLevelCount);
  if (mColorStops.size() > 1)
  {
    double indexToPosFactor = 1.0/double(mLevelCount-1);
    const bool useAlpha = stopsUseAlpha();
    for (int i=0; i<mLevelCount; ++i)
    {
      double position = i*indexToPosFactor;
      QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator it = const_cast<const QMap<double, QColor>*>(&mColorStops)->lowerBound(position); // force using the const lowerBound method
      if (it == mColorStops.constEnd()) // position is on or after last stop, use color of last stop
      {
        if (useAlpha)
        {
          const QColor col = std::prev(it).value();
          const double alphaPremultiplier = col.alpha()/255.0; // since we use QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied
          mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(int(col.red()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  int(col.green()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  int(col.blue()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  col.alpha());
        } else
          mColorBuffer[i] = std::prev(it).value().rgba();
      } else if (it == mColorStops.constBegin()) // position is on or before first stop, use color of first stop
      {
        if (useAlpha)
        {
          const QColor &col = it.value();
          const double alphaPremultiplier = col.alpha()/255.0; // since we use QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied
          mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(int(col.red()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  int(col.green()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  int(col.blue()*alphaPremultiplier),
                                  col.alpha());
        } else
          mColorBuffer[i] = it.value().rgba();
      } else // position is in between stops (or on an intermediate stop), interpolate color
      {
        QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator high = it;
        QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator low = std::prev(it);
        double t = (position-low.key())/(high.key()-low.key()); // interpolation factor 0..1
        switch (mColorInterpolation)
        {
          case ciRGB:
          {
            if (useAlpha)
            {
              const int alpha = int((1-t)*low.value().alpha() + t*high.value().alpha());
              const double alphaPremultiplier = alpha/255.0; // since we use QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied
              mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(int( ((1-t)*low.value().red() + t*high.value().red())*alphaPremultiplier ),
                                      int( ((1-t)*low.value().green() + t*high.value().green())*alphaPremultiplier ),
                                      int( ((1-t)*low.value().blue() + t*high.value().blue())*alphaPremultiplier ),
                                      alpha);
            } else
            {
              mColorBuffer[i] = qRgb(int( ((1-t)*low.value().red() + t*high.value().red()) ),
                                     int( ((1-t)*low.value().green() + t*high.value().green()) ),
                                     int( ((1-t)*low.value().blue() + t*high.value().blue())) );
            }
            break;
          }
          case ciHSV:
          {
            QColor lowHsv = low.value().toHsv();
            QColor highHsv = high.value().toHsv();
            double hue = 0;
            double hueDiff = highHsv.hueF()-lowHsv.hueF();
            if (hueDiff > 0.5)
              hue = lowHsv.hueF() - t*(1.0-hueDiff);
            else if (hueDiff < -0.5)
              hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t*(1.0+hueDiff);
            else
              hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t*hueDiff;
            if (hue < 0) hue += 1.0;
            else if (hue >= 1.0) hue -= 1.0;
            if (useAlpha)
            {
              const QRgb rgb = QColor::fromHsvF(hue,
                                                (1-t)*lowHsv.saturationF() + t*highHsv.saturationF(),
                                                (1-t)*lowHsv.valueF() + t*highHsv.valueF()).rgb();
              const double alpha = (1-t)*lowHsv.alphaF() + t*highHsv.alphaF();
              mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(int(qRed(rgb)*alpha), int(qGreen(rgb)*alpha), int(qBlue(rgb)*alpha), int(255*alpha));
            }
            else
            {
              mColorBuffer[i] = QColor::fromHsvF(hue,
                                                 (1-t)*lowHsv.saturationF() + t*highHsv.saturationF(),
                                                 (1-t)*lowHsv.valueF() + t*highHsv.valueF()).rgb();
            }
            break;
          }
        }
      }
    }
  } else if (mColorStops.size() == 1)
  {
    const QRgb rgb = mColorStops.constBegin().value().rgb();
    const double alpha = mColorStops.constBegin().value().alphaF();
    mColorBuffer.fill(qRgba(int(qRed(rgb)*alpha), int(qGreen(rgb)*alpha), int(qBlue(rgb)*alpha), int(255*alpha)));
  } else // mColorStops is empty, fill color buffer with black
  {
    mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0));
  }
  mColorBufferInvalidated = false;
}
/* end of 'src/colorgradient.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 12308            */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket
  \brief A selection decorator which draws brackets around each selected data segment
  
  Additionally to the regular highlighting of selected segments via color, fill and scatter style,
  this \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass draws markers at the begin and end of each selected data
  segment of the plottable.
  
  The shape of the markers can be controlled with \ref setBracketStyle, \ref setBracketWidth and
  \ref setBracketHeight. The color/fill can be controlled with \ref setBracketPen and \ref
  setBracketBrush.
  
  To introduce custom bracket styles, it is only necessary to sublcass \ref
  QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket and reimplement \ref drawBracket. The rest will be managed by the
  base class.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a new QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket instance with default values.
*/
QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket() :
  mBracketPen(QPen(Qt::black)),
  mBracketBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mBracketWidth(5),
  mBracketHeight(50),
  mBracketStyle(bsSquareBracket),
  mTangentToData(false),
  mTangentAverage(2)
{
  
}
 
QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::~QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the brackets at the beginning and end of each selected
  data segment.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mBracketPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to draw the brackets at the beginning and end of each selected
  data segment.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBracketBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the drawn bracket. The width dimension is always parallel to the key axis of
  the data, or the tangent direction of the current data slope, if \ref setTangentToData is
  enabled.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketWidth(int width)
{
  mBracketWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the height of the drawn bracket. The height dimension is always perpendicular to the key axis
  of the data, or the tangent direction of the current data slope, if \ref setTangentToData is
  enabled.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketHeight(int height)
{
  mBracketHeight = height;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the shape that the bracket/marker will have.
  
  \see setBracketWidth, setBracketHeight
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketStyle(QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::BracketStyle style)
{
  mBracketStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the brackets will be rotated such that they align with the slope of the data at the
  position that they appear in.
  
  For noisy data, it might be more visually appealing to average the slope over multiple data
  points. This can be configured via \ref setTangentAverage.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setTangentToData(bool enabled)
{
  mTangentToData = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Controls over how many data points the slope shall be averaged, when brackets shall be aligned
  with the data (if \ref setTangentToData is true).
  
  From the position of the bracket, \a pointCount points towards the selected data range will be
  taken into account. The smallest value of \a pointCount is 1, which is effectively equivalent to
  disabling \ref setTangentToData.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setTangentAverage(int pointCount)
{
  mTangentAverage = pointCount;
  if (mTangentAverage < 1)
    mTangentAverage = 1;
}
 
/*!
  Draws the bracket shape with \a painter. The parameter \a direction is either -1 or 1 and
  indicates whether the bracket shall point to the left or the right (i.e. is a closing or opening
  bracket, respectively).
  
  The passed \a painter already contains all transformations that are necessary to position and
  rotate the bracket appropriately. Painting operations can be performed as if drawing upright
  brackets on flat data with horizontal key axis, with (0, 0) being the center of the bracket.
  
  If you wish to sublcass \ref QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket in order to provide custom bracket
  shapes (see \ref QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::bsUserStyle), this is the method you should
  reimplement.
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::drawBracket(QCPPainter *painter, int direction) const
{
  switch (mBracketStyle)
  {
    case bsSquareBracket:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(mBracketWidth*direction, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, -mBracketHeight*0.5));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(mBracketWidth*direction, mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5));
      break;
    }
    case bsHalfEllipse:
    {
      painter->drawArc(QRectF(-mBracketWidth*0.5, -mBracketHeight*0.5, mBracketWidth, mBracketHeight), -90*16, -180*16*direction);
      break;
    }
    case bsEllipse:
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(QRectF(-mBracketWidth*0.5, -mBracketHeight*0.5, mBracketWidth, mBracketHeight));
      break;
    }
    case bsPlus:
    {
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(-mBracketWidth*0.5, 0, mBracketWidth*0.5, 0));
      break;
    }
    default:
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "unknown/custom bracket style can't be handeld by default implementation:" << static_cast<int>(mBracketStyle);
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Draws the bracket decoration on the data points at the begin and end of each selected data
  segment given in \a seletion.
  
  It uses the method \ref drawBracket to actually draw the shapes.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection)
{
  if (!mPlottable || selection.isEmpty()) return;
  
  if (QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d = mPlottable->interface1D())
  {
    foreach (const QCPDataRange &dataRange, selection.dataRanges())
    {
      // determine position and (if tangent mode is enabled) angle of brackets:
      int openBracketDir = (mPlottable->keyAxis() && !mPlottable->keyAxis()->rangeReversed()) ? 1 : -1;
      int closeBracketDir = -openBracketDir;
      QPointF openBracketPos = getPixelCoordinates(interface1d, dataRange.begin());
      QPointF closeBracketPos = getPixelCoordinates(interface1d, dataRange.end()-1);
      double openBracketAngle = 0;
      double closeBracketAngle = 0;
      if (mTangentToData)
      {
        openBracketAngle = getTangentAngle(interface1d, dataRange.begin(), openBracketDir);
        closeBracketAngle = getTangentAngle(interface1d, dataRange.end()-1, closeBracketDir);
      }
      // draw opening bracket:
      QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
      painter->setPen(mBracketPen);
      painter->setBrush(mBracketBrush);
      painter->translate(openBracketPos);
      painter->rotate(openBracketAngle/M_PI*180.0);
      drawBracket(painter, openBracketDir);
      painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
      // draw closing bracket:
      painter->setPen(mBracketPen);
      painter->setBrush(mBracketBrush);
      painter->translate(closeBracketPos);
      painter->rotate(closeBracketAngle/M_PI*180.0);
      drawBracket(painter, closeBracketDir);
      painter->setTransform(oldTransform);
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  If \ref setTangentToData is enabled, brackets need to be rotated according to the data slope.
  This method returns the angle in radians by which a bracket at the given \a dataIndex must be
  rotated.
  
  The parameter \a direction must be set to either -1 or 1, representing whether it is an opening
  or closing bracket. Since for slope calculation multiple data points are required, this defines
  the direction in which the algorithm walks, starting at \a dataIndex, to average those data
  points. (see \ref setTangentToData and \ref setTangentAverage)
  
  \a interface1d is the interface to the plottable's data which is used to query data coordinates.
*/
double QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::getTangentAngle(const QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d, int dataIndex, int direction) const
{
  if (!interface1d || dataIndex < 0 || dataIndex >= interface1d->dataCount())
    return 0;
  direction = direction < 0 ? -1 : 1; // enforce direction is either -1 or 1
  
  // how many steps we can actually go from index in the given direction without exceeding data bounds:
  int averageCount;
  if (direction < 0)
    averageCount = qMin(mTangentAverage, dataIndex);
  else
    averageCount = qMin(mTangentAverage, interface1d->dataCount()-1-dataIndex);
  qDebug() << averageCount;
  // calculate point average of averageCount points:
  QVector<QPointF> points(averageCount);
  QPointF pointsAverage;
  int currentIndex = dataIndex;
  for (int i=0; i<averageCount; ++i)
  {
    points[i] = getPixelCoordinates(interface1d, currentIndex);
    pointsAverage += points[i];
    currentIndex += direction;
  }
  pointsAverage /= double(averageCount);
  
  // calculate slope of linear regression through points:
  double numSum = 0;
  double denomSum = 0;
  for (int i=0; i<averageCount; ++i)
  {
    const double dx = points.at(i).x()-pointsAverage.x();
    const double dy = points.at(i).y()-pointsAverage.y();
    numSum += dx*dy;
    denomSum += dx*dx;
  }
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(denomSum) && !qFuzzyIsNull(numSum))
  {
    return qAtan2(numSum, denomSum);
  } else // undetermined angle, probably mTangentAverage == 1, so using only one data point
    return 0;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pixel coordinates of the data point at \a dataIndex, using \a interface1d to access
  the data points.
*/
QPointF QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::getPixelCoordinates(const QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d, int dataIndex) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mPlottable->keyAxis();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mPlottable->valueAxis();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return {0, 0}; }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    return {keyAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainKey(dataIndex)), valueAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainValue(dataIndex))};
  else
    return {valueAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainValue(dataIndex)), keyAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainKey(dataIndex))};
}
/* end of 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 47193                       */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisRect
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAxisRect
  \brief Holds multiple axes and arranges them in a rectangular shape.
  
  This class represents an axis rect, a rectangular area that is bounded on all sides with an
  arbitrary number of axes.
  
  Initially QCustomPlot has one axis rect, accessible via QCustomPlot::axisRect(). However, the
  layout system allows to have multiple axis rects, e.g. arranged in a grid layout
  (QCustomPlot::plotLayout).
  
  By default, QCPAxisRect comes with four axes, at bottom, top, left and right. They can be
  accessed via \ref axis by providing the respective axis type (\ref QCPAxis::AxisType) and index.
  If you need all axes in the axis rect, use \ref axes. The top and right axes are set to be
  invisible initially (QCPAxis::setVisible). To add more axes to a side, use \ref addAxis or \ref
  addAxes. To remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis.
  
  The axis rect layerable itself only draws a background pixmap or color, if specified (\ref
  setBackground). It is placed on the "background" layer initially (see \ref QCPLayer for an
  explanation of the QCustomPlot layer system). The axes that are held by the axis rect can be
  placed on other layers, independently of the axis rect.
  
  Every axis rect has a child layout of type \ref QCPLayoutInset. It is accessible via \ref
  insetLayout and can be used to have other layout elements (or even other layouts with multiple
  elements) hovering inside the axis rect.
  
  If an axis rect is clicked and dragged, it processes this by moving certain axis ranges. The
  behaviour can be controlled with \ref setRangeDrag and \ref setRangeDragAxes. If the mouse wheel
  is scrolled while the cursor is on the axis rect, certain axes are scaled. This is controllable
  via \ref setRangeZoom, \ref setRangeZoomAxes and \ref setRangeZoomFactor. These interactions are
  only enabled if \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref
  QCP::iRangeZoom.
  
  \image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png
  <center>Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an axis. The dashed
  line on the far left indicates the viewport/widget border.</center>
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPLayoutInset *QCPAxisRect::insetLayout() const
  
  Returns the inset layout of this axis rect. It can be used to place other layout elements (or
  even layouts with multiple other elements) inside/on top of an axis rect.
  
  \see QCPLayoutInset
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::left() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the left border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::right() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the right border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::top() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the top border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::bottom() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the bottom border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::width() const
  
  Returns the pixel width of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::height() const
  
  Returns the pixel height of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QSize QCPAxisRect::size() const
  
  Returns the pixel size of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topLeft() const
  
  Returns the top left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here,
  so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topRight() const
  
  Returns the top right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomLeft() const
  
  Returns the bottom left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomRight() const
  
  Returns the bottom right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::center() const
  
  Returns the center of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPAxisRect instance and sets default values. An axis is added for each of the four
  sides, the top and right axes are set invisible initially.
*/
QCPAxisRect::QCPAxisRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, bool setupDefaultAxes) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mBackgroundBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mBackgroundScaled(true),
  mBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding),
  mInsetLayout(new QCPLayoutInset),
  mRangeDrag(Qt::Horizontal|Qt::Vertical),
  mRangeZoom(Qt::Horizontal|Qt::Vertical),
  mRangeZoomFactorHorz(0.85),
  mRangeZoomFactorVert(0.85),
  mDragging(false)
{
  mInsetLayout->initializeParentPlot(mParentPlot);
  mInsetLayout->setParentLayerable(this);
  mInsetLayout->setParent(this);
  
  setMinimumSize(50, 50);
  setMinimumMargins(QMargins(15, 15, 15, 15));
  mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atLeft, QList<QCPAxis*>());
  mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atRight, QList<QCPAxis*>());
  mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atTop, QList<QCPAxis*>());
  mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atBottom, QList<QCPAxis*>());
  
  if (setupDefaultAxes)
  {
    QCPAxis *xAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
    QCPAxis *yAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
    QCPAxis *xAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop);
    QCPAxis *yAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight);
    setRangeDragAxes(xAxis, yAxis);
    setRangeZoomAxes(xAxis, yAxis);
    xAxis2->setVisible(false);
    yAxis2->setVisible(false);
    xAxis->grid()->setVisible(true);
    yAxis->grid()->setVisible(true);
    xAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false);
    yAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false);
    xAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen(Qt::NoPen);
    yAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen(Qt::NoPen);
    xAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false);
    yAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false);
  }
}
 
QCPAxisRect::~QCPAxisRect()
{
  delete mInsetLayout;
  mInsetLayout = nullptr;
  
  foreach (QCPAxis *axis, axes())
    removeAxis(axis);
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of axes on the axis rect side specified with \a type.
  
  \see axis
*/
int QCPAxisRect::axisCount(QCPAxis::AxisType type) const
{
  return mAxes.value(type).size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the axis with the given \a index on the axis rect side specified with \a type.
  
  \see axisCount, axes
*/
QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::axis(QCPAxis::AxisType type, int index) const
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> ax(mAxes.value(type));
  if (index >= 0 && index < ax.size())
  {
    return ax.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns all axes on the axis rect sides specified with \a types.
  
  \a types may be a single \ref QCPAxis::AxisType or an <tt>or</tt>-combination, to get the axes of
  multiple sides.
  
  \see axis
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::axes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types) const
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result;
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atLeft))
    result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atLeft);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atRight))
    result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atRight);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atTop))
    result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atTop);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atBottom))
    result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atBottom);
  return result;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Returns all axes of this axis rect.
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::axes() const
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result;
  QHashIterator<QCPAxis::AxisType, QList<QCPAxis*> > it(mAxes);
  while (it.hasNext())
  {
    it.next();
    result << it.value();
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Adds a new axis to the axis rect side specified with \a type, and returns it. If \a axis is 0, a
  new QCPAxis instance is created internally. QCustomPlot owns the returned axis, so if you want to
  remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis instead of deleting it manually.
 
  You may inject QCPAxis instances (or subclasses of QCPAxis) by setting \a axis to an axis that was
  previously created outside QCustomPlot. It is important to note that QCustomPlot takes ownership
  of the axis, so you may not delete it afterwards. Further, the \a axis must have been created
  with this axis rect as parent and with the same axis type as specified in \a type. If this is not
  the case, a debug output is generated, the axis is not added, and the method returns \c nullptr.
 
  This method can not be used to move \a axis between axis rects. The same \a axis instance must
  not be added multiple times to the same or different axis rects.
 
  If an axis rect side already contains one or more axes, the lower and upper endings of the new
  axis (\ref QCPAxis::setLowerEnding, \ref QCPAxis::setUpperEnding) are set to \ref
  QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar.
 
  \see addAxes, setupFullAxesBox
*/
QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::addAxis(QCPAxis::AxisType type, QCPAxis *axis)
{
  QCPAxis *newAxis = axis;
  if (!newAxis)
  {
    newAxis = new QCPAxis(this, type);
  } else // user provided existing axis instance, do some sanity checks
  {
    if (newAxis->axisType() != type)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis has different axis type than specified in type parameter";
      return nullptr;
    }
    if (newAxis->axisRect() != this)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis doesn't have this axis rect as parent axis rect";
      return nullptr;
    }
    if (axes().contains(newAxis))
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis is already owned by this axis rect";
      return nullptr;
    }
  }
  if (!mAxes[type].isEmpty()) // multiple axes on one side, add half-bar axis ending to additional axes with offset
  {
    bool invert = (type == QCPAxis::atRight) || (type == QCPAxis::atBottom);
    newAxis->setLowerEnding(QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, !invert));
    newAxis->setUpperEnding(QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, invert));
  }
  mAxes[type].append(newAxis);
  
  // reset convenience axis pointers on parent QCustomPlot if they are unset:
  if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->axisRectCount() > 0 && mParentPlot->axisRect(0) == this)
  {
    switch (type)
    {
      case QCPAxis::atBottom: { if (!mParentPlot->xAxis) mParentPlot->xAxis = newAxis; break; }
      case QCPAxis::atLeft: { if (!mParentPlot->yAxis) mParentPlot->yAxis = newAxis; break; }
      case QCPAxis::atTop: { if (!mParentPlot->xAxis2) mParentPlot->xAxis2 = newAxis; break; }
      case QCPAxis::atRight: { if (!mParentPlot->yAxis2) mParentPlot->yAxis2 = newAxis; break; }
    }
  }
  
  return newAxis;
}
 
/*!
  Adds a new axis with \ref addAxis to each axis rect side specified in \a types. This may be an
  <tt>or</tt>-combination of QCPAxis::AxisType, so axes can be added to multiple sides at once.
  
  Returns a list of the added axes.
  
  \see addAxis, setupFullAxesBox
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::addAxes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result;
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atLeft))
    result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atRight))
    result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atTop))
    result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop);
  if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atBottom))
    result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified \a axis from the axis rect and deletes it.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if \a axis was a valid axis in this axis rect.
  
  \see addAxis
*/
bool QCPAxisRect::removeAxis(QCPAxis *axis)
{
  // don't access axis->axisType() to provide safety when axis is an invalid pointer, rather go through all axis containers:
  QHashIterator<QCPAxis::AxisType, QList<QCPAxis*> > it(mAxes);
  while (it.hasNext())
  {
    it.next();
    if (it.value().contains(axis))
    {
      if (it.value().first() == axis && it.value().size() > 1) // if removing first axis, transfer axis offset to the new first axis (which at this point is the second axis, if it exists)
        it.value()[1]->setOffset(axis->offset());
      mAxes[it.key()].removeOne(axis);
      if (qobject_cast<QCustomPlot*>(parentPlot())) // make sure this isn't called from QObject dtor when QCustomPlot is already destructed (happens when the axis rect is not in any layout and thus QObject-child of QCustomPlot)
        parentPlot()->axisRemoved(axis);
      delete axis;
      return true;
    }
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis isn't in axis rect:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(axis);
  return false;
}
 
/*!
  Zooms in (or out) to the passed rectangular region \a pixelRect, given in pixel coordinates.
 
  All axes of this axis rect will have their range zoomed accordingly. If you only wish to zoom
  specific axes, use the overloaded version of this method.
  
  \see QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect)
{
  zoom(pixelRect, axes());
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Zooms in (or out) to the passed rectangular region \a pixelRect, given in pixel coordinates.
  
  Only the axes passed in \a affectedAxes will have their ranges zoomed accordingly.
  
  \see QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QList<QCPAxis*> &affectedAxes)
{
  foreach (QCPAxis *axis, affectedAxes)
  {
    if (!axis)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "a passed axis was zero";
      continue;
    }
    QCPRange pixelRange;
    if (axis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      pixelRange = QCPRange(pixelRect.left(), pixelRect.right());
    else
      pixelRange = QCPRange(pixelRect.top(), pixelRect.bottom());
    axis->setRange(axis->pixelToCoord(pixelRange.lower), axis->pixelToCoord(pixelRange.upper));
  }
}
 
/*!
  Convenience function to create an axis on each side that doesn't have any axes yet and set their
  visibility to true. Further, the top/right axes are assigned the following properties of the
  bottom/left axes:
 
  \li range (\ref QCPAxis::setRange)
  \li range reversed (\ref QCPAxis::setRangeReversed)
  \li scale type (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType)
  \li tick visibility (\ref QCPAxis::setTicks)
  \li number format (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberFormat)
  \li number precision (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision)
  \li tick count of ticker (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount)
  \li tick origin of ticker (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin)
 
  Tick label visibility (\ref QCPAxis::setTickLabels) of the right and top axes are set to false.
 
  If \a connectRanges is true, the \ref QCPAxis::rangeChanged "rangeChanged" signals of the bottom
  and left axes are connected to the \ref QCPAxis::setRange slots of the top and right axes.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox(bool connectRanges)
{
  QCPAxis *xAxis, *yAxis, *xAxis2, *yAxis2;
  if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atBottom) == 0)
    xAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
  else
    xAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
  
  if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atLeft) == 0)
    yAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
  else
    yAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
  
  if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atTop) == 0)
    xAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop);
  else
    xAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atTop);
  
  if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atRight) == 0)
    yAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight);
  else
    yAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atRight);
  
  xAxis->setVisible(true);
  yAxis->setVisible(true);
  xAxis2->setVisible(true);
  yAxis2->setVisible(true);
  xAxis2->setTickLabels(false);
  yAxis2->setTickLabels(false);
  
  xAxis2->setRange(xAxis->range());
  xAxis2->setRangeReversed(xAxis->rangeReversed());
  xAxis2->setScaleType(xAxis->scaleType());
  xAxis2->setTicks(xAxis->ticks());
  xAxis2->setNumberFormat(xAxis->numberFormat());
  xAxis2->setNumberPrecision(xAxis->numberPrecision());
  xAxis2->ticker()->setTickCount(xAxis->ticker()->tickCount());
  xAxis2->ticker()->setTickOrigin(xAxis->ticker()->tickOrigin());
  
  yAxis2->setRange(yAxis->range());
  yAxis2->setRangeReversed(yAxis->rangeReversed());
  yAxis2->setScaleType(yAxis->scaleType());
  yAxis2->setTicks(yAxis->ticks());
  yAxis2->setNumberFormat(yAxis->numberFormat());
  yAxis2->setNumberPrecision(yAxis->numberPrecision());
  yAxis2->ticker()->setTickCount(yAxis->ticker()->tickCount());
  yAxis2->ticker()->setTickOrigin(yAxis->ticker()->tickOrigin());
  
  if (connectRanges)
  {
    connect(xAxis, SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), xAxis2, SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
    connect(yAxis, SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), yAxis2, SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the plottables that are associated with this axis rect.
  
  A plottable is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value axis (or both) is in
  this axis rect.
  
  \see graphs, items
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCPAxisRect::plottables() const
{
  // Note: don't append all QCPAxis::plottables() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries
  QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
  foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, mParentPlot->mPlottables)
  {
    if (plottable->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this || plottable->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this)
      result.append(plottable);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the graphs that are associated with this axis rect.
  
  A graph is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value axis (or both) is in
  this axis rect.
  
  \see plottables, items
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCPAxisRect::graphs() const
{
  // Note: don't append all QCPAxis::graphs() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries
  QList<QCPGraph*> result;
  foreach (QCPGraph *graph, mParentPlot->mGraphs)
  {
    if (graph->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this || graph->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this)
      result.append(graph);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis rect.
  
  An item is considered associated with an axis rect if any of its positions has key or value axis
  set to an axis that is in this axis rect, or if any of its positions has \ref
  QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect set to the axis rect, or if the clip axis rect (\ref
  QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect) is set to this axis rect.
  
  \see plottables, graphs
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem *> QCPAxisRect::items() const
{
  // Note: don't just append all QCPAxis::items() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries
  //       and miss those items that have this axis rect as clipAxisRect.
  QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
  foreach (QCPAbstractItem *item, mParentPlot->mItems)
  {
    if (item->clipAxisRect() == this)
    {
      result.append(item);
      continue;
    }
    foreach (QCPItemPosition *position, item->positions())
    {
      if (position->axisRect() == this ||
          position->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this ||
          position->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this)
      {
        result.append(item);
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  This method is called automatically upon replot and doesn't need to be called by users of
  QCPAxisRect.
  
  Calls the base class implementation to update the margins (see \ref QCPLayoutElement::update),
  and finally passes the \ref rect to the inset layout (\ref insetLayout) and calls its
  QCPInsetLayout::update function.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPAxisRect::update(UpdatePhase phase)
{
  QCPLayoutElement::update(phase);
  
  switch (phase)
  {
    case upPreparation:
    {
      foreach (QCPAxis *axis, axes())
        axis->setupTickVectors();
      break;
    }
    case upLayout:
    {
      mInsetLayout->setOuterRect(rect());
      break;
    }
    default: break;
  }
  
  // pass update call on to inset layout (doesn't happen automatically, because QCPAxisRect doesn't derive from QCPLayout):
  mInsetLayout->update(phase);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPAxisRect::elements(bool recursive) const
{
  QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
  if (mInsetLayout)
  {
    result << mInsetLayout;
    if (recursive)
      result << mInsetLayout->elements(recursive);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  painter->setAntialiasing(false);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  drawBackground(painter);
}
 
/*!
  Sets \a pm as the axis background pixmap. The axis background pixmap will be drawn inside the
  axis rect. Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect
  backgrounds are usually drawn below everything else.
 
  For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the axis rect, scaling can be
  enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (i.e. whether and how the aspect ratio
  is preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these options in one call,
  consider using the overloaded version of this function.
 
  Below the pixmap, the axis rect may be optionally filled with a brush, if specified with \ref
  setBackground(const QBrush &brush).
  
  \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode, setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets \a brush as the background brush. The axis rect background will be filled with this brush.
  Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect backgrounds
  are usually drawn below everything else.
 
  The brush will be drawn before (under) any background pixmap, which may be specified with \ref
  setBackground(const QPixmap &pm).
 
  To disable drawing of a background brush, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBackgroundBrush = brush;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Allows setting the background pixmap of the axis rect, whether it shall be scaled and how it
  shall be scaled in one call.
 
  \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the axis rect or not. If \a scaled
  is set to true, you may control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is
  preserved with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode.
  
  Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is no performance
  penalty on replots. (Except when the axis rect dimensions are changed continuously.)
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled)
{
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
}
 
/*!
  If scaling of the axis background pixmap is enabled (\ref setBackgroundScaled), use this function to
  define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap passed to \ref setBackground is preserved.
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the range drag axis of the \a orientation provided. If multiple axes were set, returns
  the first one (use \ref rangeDragAxes to retrieve a list with all set axes).
 
  \see setRangeDragAxes
*/
QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::rangeDragAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation)
{
  if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal)
    return mRangeDragHorzAxis.isEmpty() ? nullptr : mRangeDragHorzAxis.first().data();
  else
    return mRangeDragVertAxis.isEmpty() ? nullptr : mRangeDragVertAxis.first().data();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the range zoom axis of the \a orientation provided. If multiple axes were set, returns
  the first one (use \ref rangeZoomAxes to retrieve a list with all set axes).
 
  \see setRangeZoomAxes
*/
QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation)
{
  if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal)
    return mRangeZoomHorzAxis.isEmpty() ? nullptr : mRangeZoomHorzAxis.first().data();
  else
    return mRangeZoomVertAxis.isEmpty() ? nullptr : mRangeZoomVertAxis.first().data();
}
 
/*!
  Returns all range drag axes of the \a orientation provided.
 
  \see rangeZoomAxis, setRangeZoomAxes
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::rangeDragAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result;
  if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeDragHorzAxis)
    {
      if (!axis.isNull())
        result.append(axis.data());
    }
  } else
  {
    foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeDragVertAxis)
    {
      if (!axis.isNull())
        result.append(axis.data());
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns all range zoom axes of the \a orientation provided.
 
  \see rangeDragAxis, setRangeDragAxes
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> result;
  if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeZoomHorzAxis)
    {
      if (!axis.isNull())
        result.append(axis.data());
    }
  } else
  {
    foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeZoomVertAxis)
    {
      if (!axis.isNull())
        result.append(axis.data());
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the range zoom factor of the \a orientation provided.
  
  \see setRangeZoomFactor
*/
double QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomFactor(Qt::Orientation orientation)
{
  return (orientation == Qt::Horizontal ? mRangeZoomFactorHorz : mRangeZoomFactorVert);
}
 
/*!
  Sets which axis orientation may be range dragged by the user with mouse interaction.
  What orientation corresponds to which specific axis can be set with
  \ref setRangeDragAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical). By
  default, the horizontal axis is the bottom axis (xAxis) and the vertical axis
  is the left axis (yAxis).
  
  To disable range dragging entirely, pass \c nullptr as \a orientations or remove \ref
  QCP::iRangeDrag from \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions. To enable range dragging for both
  directions, pass <tt>Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical</tt> as \a orientations.
  
  In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions
  contains \ref QCP::iRangeDrag to enable the range dragging interaction.
  
  \see setRangeZoom, setRangeDragAxes, QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag(Qt::Orientations orientations)
{
  mRangeDrag = orientations;
}
 
/*!
  Sets which axis orientation may be zoomed by the user with the mouse wheel. What orientation
  corresponds to which specific axis can be set with \ref setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal,
  QCPAxis *vertical). By default, the horizontal axis is the bottom axis (xAxis) and the vertical
  axis is the left axis (yAxis).
 
  To disable range zooming entirely, pass \c nullptr as \a orientations or remove \ref
  QCP::iRangeZoom from \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions. To enable range zooming for both
  directions, pass <tt>Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical</tt> as \a orientations.
  
  In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions
  contains \ref QCP::iRangeZoom to enable the range zooming interaction.
  
  \see setRangeZoomFactor, setRangeZoomAxes, setRangeDrag
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom(Qt::Orientations orientations)
{
  mRangeZoom = orientations;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets the axes whose range will be dragged when \ref setRangeDrag enables mouse range dragging on
  the QCustomPlot widget. Pass \c nullptr if no axis shall be dragged in the respective
  orientation.
 
  Use the overload taking a list of axes, if multiple axes (more than one per orientation) shall
  react to dragging interactions.
 
  \see setRangeZoomAxes
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> horz, vert;
  if (horizontal)
    horz.append(horizontal);
  if (vertical)
    vert.append(vertical);
  setRangeDragAxes(horz, vert);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  This method allows to set up multiple axes to react to horizontal and vertical dragging. The drag
  orientation that the respective axis will react to is deduced from its orientation (\ref
  QCPAxis::orientation).
 
  In the unusual case that you wish to e.g. drag a vertically oriented axis with a horizontal drag
  motion, use the overload taking two separate lists for horizontal and vertical dragging.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QList<QCPAxis*> axes)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> horz, vert;
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, axes)
  {
    if (ax->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      horz.append(ax);
    else
      vert.append(ax);
  }
  setRangeDragAxes(horz, vert);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  This method allows to set multiple axes up to react to horizontal and vertical dragging, and
  define specifically which axis reacts to which drag orientation (irrespective of the axis
  orientation).
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QList<QCPAxis*> horizontal, QList<QCPAxis*> vertical)
{
  mRangeDragHorzAxis.clear();
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, horizontal)
  {
    QPointer<QCPAxis> axPointer(ax);
    if (!axPointer.isNull())
      mRangeDragHorzAxis.append(axPointer);
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in horizontal list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(ax);
  }
  mRangeDragVertAxis.clear();
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, vertical)
  {
    QPointer<QCPAxis> axPointer(ax);
    if (!axPointer.isNull())
      mRangeDragVertAxis.append(axPointer);
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in vertical list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(ax);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the axes whose range will be zoomed when \ref setRangeZoom enables mouse wheel zooming on
  the QCustomPlot widget. Pass \c nullptr if no axis shall be zoomed in the respective orientation.
 
  The two axes can be zoomed with different strengths, when different factors are passed to \ref
  setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor).
 
  Use the overload taking a list of axes, if multiple axes (more than one per orientation) shall
  react to zooming interactions.
 
  \see setRangeDragAxes
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> horz, vert;
  if (horizontal)
    horz.append(horizontal);
  if (vertical)
    vert.append(vertical);
  setRangeZoomAxes(horz, vert);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  This method allows to set up multiple axes to react to horizontal and vertical range zooming. The
  zoom orientation that the respective axis will react to is deduced from its orientation (\ref
  QCPAxis::orientation).
 
  In the unusual case that you wish to e.g. zoom a vertically oriented axis with a horizontal zoom
  interaction, use the overload taking two separate lists for horizontal and vertical zooming.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QList<QCPAxis*> axes)
{
  QList<QCPAxis*> horz, vert;
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, axes)
  {
    if (ax->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      horz.append(ax);
    else
      vert.append(ax);
  }
  setRangeZoomAxes(horz, vert);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  This method allows to set multiple axes up to react to horizontal and vertical zooming, and
  define specifically which axis reacts to which zoom orientation (irrespective of the axis
  orientation).
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QList<QCPAxis*> horizontal, QList<QCPAxis*> vertical)
{
  mRangeZoomHorzAxis.clear();
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, horizontal)
  {
    QPointer<QCPAxis> axPointer(ax);
    if (!axPointer.isNull())
      mRangeZoomHorzAxis.append(axPointer);
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in horizontal list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(ax);
  }
  mRangeZoomVertAxis.clear();
  foreach (QCPAxis *ax, vertical)
  {
    QPointer<QCPAxis> axPointer(ax);
    if (!axPointer.isNull())
      mRangeZoomVertAxis.append(axPointer);
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in vertical list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(ax);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets how strong one rotation step of the mouse wheel zooms, when range zoom was activated with
  \ref setRangeZoom. The two parameters \a horizontalFactor and \a verticalFactor provide a way to
  let the horizontal axis zoom at different rates than the vertical axis. Which axis is horizontal
  and which is vertical, can be set with \ref setRangeZoomAxes.
 
  When the zoom factor is greater than one, scrolling the mouse wheel backwards (towards the user)
  will zoom in (make the currently visible range smaller). For zoom factors smaller than one, the
  same scrolling direction will zoom out.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor)
{
  mRangeZoomFactorHorz = horizontalFactor;
  mRangeZoomFactorVert = verticalFactor;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets both the horizontal and vertical zoom \a factor.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor(double factor)
{
  mRangeZoomFactorHorz = factor;
  mRangeZoomFactorVert = factor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the background of this axis rect. It may consist of a background fill (a QBrush) and a
  pixmap.
  
  If a brush was given via \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), this function first draws an
  according filling inside the axis rect with the provided \a painter.
  
  Then, if a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the scaled version
  depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and then draws it inside
  the axis rect with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is only updated, when
  the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background pixmap (this is
  dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a differend axis background pixmap was
  set.
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  // draw background fill:
  if (mBackgroundBrush != Qt::NoBrush)
    painter->fillRect(mRect, mBackgroundBrush);
  
  // draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified):
  if (!mBackgroundPixmap.isNull())
  {
    if (mBackgroundScaled)
    {
      // check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated:
      QSize scaledSize(mBackgroundPixmap.size());
      scaledSize.scale(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode);
      if (mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize)
        mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation);
      painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mScaledBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height()) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect());
    } else
    {
      painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height()));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function makes sure multiple axes on the side specified with \a type don't collide, but are
  distributed according to their respective space requirement (QCPAxis::calculateMargin).
  
  It does this by setting an appropriate offset (\ref QCPAxis::setOffset) on all axes except the
  one with index zero.
  
  This function is called by \ref calculateAutoMargin.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::updateAxesOffset(QCPAxis::AxisType type)
{
  const QList<QCPAxis*> axesList = mAxes.value(type);
  if (axesList.isEmpty())
    return;
  
  bool isFirstVisible = !axesList.first()->visible(); // if the first axis is visible, the second axis (which is where the loop starts) isn't the first visible axis, so initialize with false
  for (int i=1; i<axesList.size(); ++i)
  {
    int offset = axesList.at(i-1)->offset() + axesList.at(i-1)->calculateMargin();
    if (axesList.at(i)->visible()) // only add inner tick length to offset if this axis is visible and it's not the first visible one (might happen if true first axis is invisible)
    {
      if (!isFirstVisible)
        offset += axesList.at(i)->tickLengthIn();
      isFirstVisible = false;
    }
    axesList.at(i)->setOffset(offset);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPAxisRect::calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side)
{
  if (!mAutoMargins.testFlag(side))
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Called with side that isn't specified as auto margin";
  
  updateAxesOffset(QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(side));
  
  // note: only need to look at the last (outer most) axis to determine the total margin, due to updateAxisOffset call
  const QList<QCPAxis*> axesList = mAxes.value(QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(side));
  if (!axesList.isEmpty())
    return axesList.last()->offset() + axesList.last()->calculateMargin();
  else
    return 0;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Reacts to a change in layout to potentially set the convenience axis pointers \ref
  QCustomPlot::xAxis, \ref QCustomPlot::yAxis, etc. of the parent QCustomPlot to the respective
  axes of this axis rect. This is only done if the respective convenience pointer is currently zero
  and if there is no QCPAxisRect at position (0, 0) of the plot layout.
  
  This automation makes it simpler to replace the main axis rect with a newly created one, without
  the need to manually reset the convenience pointers.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::layoutChanged()
{
  if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->axisRectCount() > 0 && mParentPlot->axisRect(0) == this)
  {
    if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atBottom) > 0 && !mParentPlot->xAxis)
      mParentPlot->xAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atBottom);
    if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atLeft) > 0 && !mParentPlot->yAxis)
      mParentPlot->yAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atLeft);
    if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atTop) > 0 && !mParentPlot->xAxis2)
      mParentPlot->xAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atTop);
    if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atRight) > 0 && !mParentPlot->yAxis2)
      mParentPlot->yAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atRight);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed on the axis rect. If the left mouse button is
  pressed, the range dragging interaction is initialized (the actual range manipulation happens in
  the \ref mouseMoveEvent).
 
  The mDragging flag is set to true and some anchor points are set that are needed to determine the
  distance the mouse was dragged in the mouse move/release events later.
  
  \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton)
  {
    mDragging = true;
    // initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging:
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
    {
      mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements();
      mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements();
    }
    // Mouse range dragging interaction:
    if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
    {
      mDragStartHorzRange.clear();
      foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeDragHorzAxis)
        mDragStartHorzRange.append(axis.isNull() ? QCPRange() : axis->range());
      mDragStartVertRange.clear();
      foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeDragVertAxis)
        mDragStartVertRange.append(axis.isNull() ? QCPRange() : axis->range());
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when the mouse is moved on the axis rect. If range dragging was activated in a
  preceding \ref mousePressEvent, the range is moved accordingly.
  
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPAxisRect::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  // Mouse range dragging interaction:
  if (mDragging && mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
  {
    
    if (mRangeDrag.testFlag(Qt::Horizontal))
    {
      for (int i=0; i<mRangeDragHorzAxis.size(); ++i)
      {
        QCPAxis *ax = mRangeDragHorzAxis.at(i).data();
        if (!ax)
          continue;
        if (i >= mDragStartHorzRange.size())
          break;
        if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear)
        {
          double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(startPos.x()) - ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().x());
          ax->setRange(mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).lower+diff, mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).upper+diff);
        } else if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
        {
          double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(startPos.x()) / ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().x());
          ax->setRange(mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).lower*diff, mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).upper*diff);
        }
      }
    }
    
    if (mRangeDrag.testFlag(Qt::Vertical))
    {
      for (int i=0; i<mRangeDragVertAxis.size(); ++i)
      {
        QCPAxis *ax = mRangeDragVertAxis.at(i).data();
        if (!ax)
          continue;
        if (i >= mDragStartVertRange.size())
          break;
        if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear)
        {
          double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(startPos.y()) - ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().y());
          ax->setRange(mDragStartVertRange.at(i).lower+diff, mDragStartVertRange.at(i).upper+diff);
        } else if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
        {
          double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(startPos.y()) / ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().y());
          ax->setRange(mDragStartVertRange.at(i).lower*diff, mDragStartVertRange.at(i).upper*diff);
        }
      }
    }
    
    if (mRangeDrag != 0) // if either vertical or horizontal drag was enabled, do a replot
    {
      if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
        mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll);
      mParentPlot->replot(QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot);
    }
    
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  mDragging = false;
  if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
  {
    mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements(mAADragBackup);
    mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(mNotAADragBackup);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for mouse wheel events. If rangeZoom is Qt::Horizontal, Qt::Vertical or both, the
  ranges of the axes defined as rangeZoomHorzAxis and rangeZoomVertAxis are scaled. The center of
  the scaling operation is the current cursor position inside the axis rect. The scaling factor is
  dependent on the mouse wheel delta (which direction the wheel was rotated) to provide a natural
  zooming feel. The Strength of the zoom can be controlled via \ref setRangeZoomFactor.
  
  Note, that event->angleDelta() is usually +/-120 for single rotation steps. However, if the mouse
  wheel is turned rapidly, many steps may bunch up to one event, so the delta may then be multiples
  of 120. This is taken into account here, by calculating \a wheelSteps and using it as exponent of
  the range zoom factor. This takes care of the wheel direction automatically, by inverting the
  factor, when the wheel step is negative (f^-1 = 1/f).
*/
void QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0)
  const double delta = event->delta();
#else
  const double delta = event->angleDelta().y();
#endif
  
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 14, 0)
  const QPointF pos = event->pos();
#else
  const QPointF pos = event->position();
#endif
  
  // Mouse range zooming interaction:
  if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeZoom))
  {
    if (mRangeZoom != 0)
    {
      double factor;
      double wheelSteps = delta/120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually
      if (mRangeZoom.testFlag(Qt::Horizontal))
      {
        factor = qPow(mRangeZoomFactorHorz, wheelSteps);
        foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeZoomHorzAxis)
        {
          if (!axis.isNull())
            axis->scaleRange(factor, axis->pixelToCoord(pos.x()));
        }
      }
      if (mRangeZoom.testFlag(Qt::Vertical))
      {
        factor = qPow(mRangeZoomFactorVert, wheelSteps);
        foreach (QPointer<QCPAxis> axis, mRangeZoomVertAxis)
        {
          if (!axis.isNull())
            axis->scaleRange(factor, axis->pixelToCoord(pos.y()));
        }
      }
      mParentPlot->replot();
    }
  }
}
/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 31762                     */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractLegendItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPAbstractLegendItem
  \brief The abstract base class for all entries in a QCPLegend.
  
  It defines a very basic interface for entries in a QCPLegend. For representing plottables in the
  legend, the subclass \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem is more suitable.
  
  Only derive directly from this class when you need absolute freedom (e.g. a custom legend entry
  that's not even associated with a plottable).
 
  You must implement the following pure virtual functions:
  \li \ref draw (from QCPLayerable)
  
  You inherit the following members you may use:
  <table>
    <tr>
      <td>QCPLegend *\b mParentLegend</td>
      <td>A pointer to the parent QCPLegend.</td>
    </tr><tr>
      <td>QFont \b mFont</td>
      <td>The generic font of the item. You should use this font for all or at least the most prominent text of the item.</td>
    </tr>
  </table>
*/
 
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionChanged(bool selected)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend item has changed, either by user
  interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs a QCPAbstractLegendItem and associates it with the QCPLegend \a parent. This does not
  cause the item to be added to \a parent, so \ref QCPLegend::addItem must be called separately.
*/
QCPAbstractLegendItem::QCPAbstractLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parent->parentPlot()),
  mParentLegend(parent),
  mFont(parent->font()),
  mTextColor(parent->textColor()),
  mSelectedFont(parent->selectedFont()),
  mSelectedTextColor(parent->selectedTextColor()),
  mSelectable(true),
  mSelected(false)
{
  setLayer(QLatin1String("legend"));
  setMargins(QMargins(0, 0, 0, 0));
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default font of this specific legend item to \a font.
  
  \see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setFont
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default text color of this specific legend item to \a color.
  
  \see setFont, QCPLegend::setTextColor
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTextColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  When this legend item is selected, \a font is used to draw generic text, instead of the normal
  font set with \ref setFont.
  
  \see setFont, QCPLegend::setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  When this legend item is selected, \a color is used to draw generic text, instead of the normal
  color set with \ref setTextColor.
  
  \see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedTextColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this specific legend item is selectable.
  
  \see setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectable(bool selectable)
{
  if (mSelectable != selectable)
  {
    mSelectable = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectable);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this specific legend item is selected.
  
  It is possible to set the selection state of this item by calling this function directly, even if
  setSelectable is set to false.
  
  \see setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected(bool selected)
{
  if (mSelected != selected)
  {
    mSelected = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelected);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (!mParentPlot) return -1;
  if (onlySelectable && (!mSelectable || !mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems)))
    return -1;
  
  if (mRect.contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  else
    return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegendItems);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QRect QCPAbstractLegendItem::clipRect() const
{
  return mOuterRect;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems))
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  if (mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems))
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(false);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPlottableLegendItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPlottableLegendItem
  \brief A legend item representing a plottable with an icon and the plottable name.
  
  This is the standard legend item for plottables. It displays an icon of the plottable next to the
  plottable name. The icon is drawn by the respective plottable itself (\ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon), and tries to give an intuitive symbol for the plottable.
  For example, the QCPGraph draws a centered horizontal line and/or a single scatter point in the
  middle.
  
  Legend items of this type are always associated with one plottable (retrievable via the
  plottable() function and settable with the constructor). You may change the font of the plottable
  name with \ref setFont. Icon padding and border pen is taken from the parent QCPLegend, see \ref
  QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen and \ref QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding.
 
  The function \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend/\ref QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend
  creates/removes legend items of this type.
  
  Since QCPLegend is based on QCPLayoutGrid, a legend item itself is just a subclass of
  QCPLayoutElement. While it could be added to a legend (or any other layout) via the normal layout
  interface, QCPLegend has specialized functions for handling legend items conveniently, see the
  documentation of \ref QCPLegend.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a new legend item associated with \a plottable.
  
  Once it's created, it can be added to the legend via \ref QCPLegend::addItem.
  
  A more convenient way of adding/removing a plottable to/from the legend is via the functions \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend and \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend.
*/
QCPPlottableLegendItem::QCPPlottableLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent, QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) :
  QCPAbstractLegendItem(parent),
  mPlottable(plottable)
{
  setAntialiased(false);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that shall be used to draw the icon border, taking into account the selection
  state of this item.
*/
QPen QCPPlottableLegendItem::getIconBorderPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mParentLegend->selectedIconBorderPen() : mParentLegend->iconBorderPen();
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the text color that shall be used to draw text, taking into account the selection state
  of this item.
*/
QColor QCPPlottableLegendItem::getTextColor() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that shall be used to draw text, taking into account the selection state of this
  item.
*/
QFont QCPPlottableLegendItem::getFont() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the item with \a painter. The size and position of the drawn legend item is defined by the
  parent layout (typically a \ref QCPLegend) and the \ref minimumOuterSizeHint and \ref
  maximumOuterSizeHint of this legend item.
*/
void QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mPlottable) return;
  painter->setFont(getFont());
  painter->setPen(QPen(getTextColor()));
  QSize iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
  QRect textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name());
  QRect iconRect(mRect.topLeft(), iconSize);
  int textHeight = qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height());  // if text has smaller height than icon, center text vertically in icon height, else align tops
  painter->drawText(mRect.x()+iconSize.width()+mParentLegend->iconTextPadding(), mRect.y(), textRect.width(), textHeight, Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name());
  // draw icon:
  painter->save();
  painter->setClipRect(iconRect, Qt::IntersectClip);
  mPlottable->drawLegendIcon(painter, iconRect);
  painter->restore();
  // draw icon border:
  if (getIconBorderPen().style() != Qt::NoPen)
  {
    painter->setPen(getIconBorderPen());
    painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
    int halfPen = qCeil(painter->pen().widthF()*0.5)+1;
    painter->setClipRect(mOuterRect.adjusted(-halfPen, -halfPen, halfPen, halfPen)); // extend default clip rect so thicker pens (especially during selection) are not clipped
    painter->drawRect(iconRect);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Calculates and returns the size of this item. This includes the icon, the text and the padding in
  between.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
QSize QCPPlottableLegendItem::minimumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  if (!mPlottable) return {};
  QSize result(0, 0);
  QRect textRect;
  QFontMetrics fontMetrics(getFont());
  QSize iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
  textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name());
  result.setWidth(iconSize.width() + mParentLegend->iconTextPadding() + textRect.width());
  result.setHeight(qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height()));
  result.rwidth() += mMargins.left()+mMargins.right();
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  return result;
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLegend
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPLegend
  \brief Manages a legend inside a QCustomPlot.
 
  A legend is a small box somewhere in the plot which lists plottables with their name and icon.
 
  A legend is populated with legend items by calling \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend on the
  plottable, for which a legend item shall be created. In the case of the main legend (\ref
  QCustomPlot::legend), simply adding plottables to the plot while \ref
  QCustomPlot::setAutoAddPlottableToLegend is set to true (the default) creates corresponding
  legend items. The legend item associated with a certain plottable can be removed with \ref
  QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend. However, QCPLegend also offers an interface to add and
  manipulate legend items directly: \ref item, \ref itemWithPlottable, \ref itemCount, \ref
  addItem, \ref removeItem, etc.
 
  Since \ref QCPLegend derives from \ref QCPLayoutGrid, it can be placed in any position a \ref
  QCPLayoutElement may be positioned. The legend items are themselves \ref QCPLayoutElement
  "QCPLayoutElements" which are placed in the grid layout of the legend. \ref QCPLegend only adds
  an interface specialized for handling child elements of type \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem, as
  mentioned above. In principle, any other layout elements may also be added to a legend via the
  normal \ref QCPLayoutGrid interface. See the special page about \link thelayoutsystem The Layout
  System\endlink for examples on how to add other elements to the legend and move it outside the axis
  rect.
 
  Use the methods \ref setFillOrder and \ref setWrap inherited from \ref QCPLayoutGrid to control
  in which order (column first or row first) the legend is filled up when calling \ref addItem, and
  at which column or row wrapping occurs. The default fill order for legends is \ref foRowsFirst.
 
  By default, every QCustomPlot has one legend (\ref QCustomPlot::legend) which is placed in the
  inset layout of the main axis rect (\ref QCPAxisRect::insetLayout). To move the legend to another
  position inside the axis rect, use the methods of the \ref QCPLayoutInset. To move the legend
  outside of the axis rect, place it anywhere else with the \ref QCPLayout/\ref QCPLayoutElement
  interface.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPLegend::selectionChanged(QCPLegend::SelectableParts selection);
 
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend has changed.
  
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs a new QCPLegend instance with default values.
  
  Note that by default, QCustomPlot already contains a legend ready to be used as \ref
  QCustomPlot::legend
*/
QCPLegend::QCPLegend() :
  mIconTextPadding{}
{
  setFillOrder(QCPLayoutGrid::foRowsFirst);
  setWrap(0);
  
  setRowSpacing(3);
  setColumnSpacing(8);
  setMargins(QMargins(7, 5, 7, 4));
  setAntialiased(false);
  setIconSize(32, 18);
  
  setIconTextPadding(7);
  
  setSelectableParts(spLegendBox | spItems);
  setSelectedParts(spNone);
  
  setBorderPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0));
  setSelectedBorderPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2));
  setIconBorderPen(Qt::NoPen);
  setSelectedIconBorderPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2));
  setBrush(Qt::white);
  setSelectedBrush(Qt::white);
  setTextColor(Qt::black);
  setSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue);
}
 
QCPLegend::~QCPLegend()
{
  clearItems();
  if (qobject_cast<QCustomPlot*>(mParentPlot)) // make sure this isn't called from QObject dtor when QCustomPlot is already destructed (happens when the legend is not in any layout and thus QObject-child of QCustomPlot)
    mParentPlot->legendRemoved(this);
}
 
/* no doc for getter, see setSelectedParts */
QCPLegend::SelectableParts QCPLegend::selectedParts() const
{
  // check whether any legend elements selected, if yes, add spItems to return value
  bool hasSelectedItems = false;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item(i) && item(i)->selected())
    {
      hasSelectedItems = true;
      break;
    }
  }
  if (hasSelectedItems)
    return mSelectedParts | spItems;
  else
    return mSelectedParts & ~spItems;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, the border of the entire legend is drawn with.
*/
void QCPLegend::setBorderPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mBorderPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush of the legend background.
*/
void QCPLegend::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default font of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the name of a graph) will
  use this font by default. However, a different font can be specified on a per-item-basis by
  accessing the specific legend item.
  
  This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items.
  
  \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mFont = font;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item(i))
      item(i)->setFont(mFont);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default color of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the name of a graph)
  will use this color by default. However, a different colors can be specified on a per-item-basis
  by accessing the specific legend item.
  
  This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items.
  
  \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor
*/
void QCPLegend::setTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTextColor = color;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item(i))
      item(i)->setTextColor(color);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the size of legend icons. Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual
  representation of the graph) will use this size by default.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconSize(const QSize &size)
{
  mIconSize = size;
}
 
/*! \overload
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconSize(int width, int height)
{
  mIconSize.setWidth(width);
  mIconSize.setHeight(height);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the horizontal space in pixels between the legend icon and the text next to it.
  Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) and text (e.g. the
  name of the graph) will use this space by default.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding(int padding)
{
  mIconTextPadding = padding;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen used to draw a border around each legend icon. Legend items that draw an
  icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) will use this pen by default.
  
  If no border is wanted, set this to \a Qt::NoPen.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mIconBorderPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface.
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectLegend.)
  
  However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part,
  it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts
  directly.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable)
{
  if (mSelectableParts != selectable)
  {
    mSelectableParts = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the selected state of the respective legend parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part
  is selected, it uses a different pen/font and brush. If some legend items are selected and \a selected
  doesn't contain \ref spItems, those items become deselected.
  
  The entire selection mechanism is handled automatically when \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions
  contains iSelectLegend. You only need to call this function when you wish to change the selection
  state manually.
  
  This function can change the selection state of a part even when \ref setSelectableParts was set to a
  value that actually excludes the part.
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  Note that it doesn't make sense to set the selected state \ref spItems here when it wasn't set
  before, because there's no way to specify which exact items to newly select. Do this by calling
  \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected directly on the legend item you wish to select.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBorderPen, setSelectedIconBorderPen, setSelectedBrush,
  setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected)
{
  SelectableParts newSelected = selected;
  mSelectedParts = this->selectedParts(); // update mSelectedParts in case item selection changed
 
  if (mSelectedParts != newSelected)
  {
    if (!mSelectedParts.testFlag(spItems) && newSelected.testFlag(spItems)) // attempt to set spItems flag (can't do that)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "spItems flag can not be set, it can only be unset with this function";
      newSelected &= ~spItems;
    }
    if (mSelectedParts.testFlag(spItems) && !newSelected.testFlag(spItems)) // spItems flag was unset, so clear item selection
    {
      for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
      {
        if (item(i))
          item(i)->setSelected(false);
      }
    }
    mSelectedParts = newSelected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  When the legend box is selected, this pen is used to draw the border instead of the normal pen
  set via \ref setBorderPen.
 
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBrush
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedBorderPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedBorderPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen legend items will use to draw their icon borders, when they are selected.
 
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedIconBorderPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  When the legend box is selected, this brush is used to draw the legend background instead of the normal brush
  set via \ref setBrush.
 
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBorderPen
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default font that is used by legend items when they are selected.
  
  This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items.
 
  \see setFont, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedFont = font;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item(i))
      item(i)->setSelectedFont(font);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the default text color that is used by legend items when they are selected.
  
  This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items.
 
  \see setTextColor, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedTextColor = color;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item(i))
      item(i)->setSelectedTextColor(color);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the item with index \a i. If non-legend items were added to the legend, and the element
  at the specified cell index is not a QCPAbstractLegendItem, returns \c nullptr.
 
  Note that the linear index depends on the current fill order (\ref setFillOrder).
 
  \see itemCount, addItem, itemWithPlottable
*/
QCPAbstractLegendItem *QCPLegend::item(int index) const
{
  return qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>(elementAt(index));
}
 
/*!
  Returns the QCPPlottableLegendItem which is associated with \a plottable (e.g. a \ref QCPGraph*).
  If such an item isn't in the legend, returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see hasItemWithPlottable
*/
QCPPlottableLegendItem *QCPLegend::itemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const
{
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (QCPPlottableLegendItem *pli = qobject_cast<QCPPlottableLegendItem*>(item(i)))
    {
      if (pli->plottable() == plottable)
        return pli;
    }
  }
  return nullptr;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of items currently in the legend. It is identical to the base class
  QCPLayoutGrid::elementCount(), and unlike the other "item" interface methods of QCPLegend,
  doesn't only address elements which can be cast to QCPAbstractLegendItem.
 
  Note that if empty cells are in the legend (e.g. by calling methods of the \ref QCPLayoutGrid
  base class which allows creating empty cells), they are included in the returned count.
 
  \see item
*/
int QCPLegend::itemCount() const
{
  return elementCount();
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether the legend contains \a item.
  
  \see hasItemWithPlottable
*/
bool QCPLegend::hasItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item) const
{
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (item == this->item(i))
        return true;
  }
  return false;
}
 
/*!
  Returns whether the legend contains a QCPPlottableLegendItem which is associated with \a plottable (e.g. a \ref QCPGraph*).
  If such an item isn't in the legend, returns false.
  
  \see itemWithPlottable
*/
bool QCPLegend::hasItemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const
{
  return itemWithPlottable(plottable);
}
 
/*!
  Adds \a item to the legend, if it's not present already. The element is arranged according to the
  current fill order (\ref setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap).
 
  Returns true on sucess, i.e. if the item wasn't in the list already and has been successfuly added.
 
  The legend takes ownership of the item.
 
  \see removeItem, item, hasItem
*/
bool QCPLegend::addItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item)
{
  return addElement(item);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Removes the item with the specified \a index from the legend and deletes it.
 
  After successful removal, the legend is reordered according to the current fill order (\ref
  setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap), so no empty cell remains where the removed \a item
  was. If you don't want this, rather use the raw element interface of \ref QCPLayoutGrid.
 
  Returns true, if successful. Unlike \ref QCPLayoutGrid::removeAt, this method only removes
  elements derived from \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem.
 
  \see itemCount, clearItems
*/
bool QCPLegend::removeItem(int index)
{
  if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *ali = item(index))
  {
    bool success = remove(ali);
    if (success)
      setFillOrder(fillOrder(), true); // gets rid of empty cell by reordering
    return success;
  } else
    return false;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Removes \a item from the legend and deletes it.
 
  After successful removal, the legend is reordered according to the current fill order (\ref
  setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap), so no empty cell remains where the removed \a item
  was. If you don't want this, rather use the raw element interface of \ref QCPLayoutGrid.
 
  Returns true, if successful.
 
  \see clearItems
*/
bool QCPLegend::removeItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item)
{
  bool success = remove(item);
  if (success)
    setFillOrder(fillOrder(), true); // gets rid of empty cell by reordering
  return success;
}
 
/*!
  Removes all items from the legend.
*/
void QCPLegend::clearItems()
{
  for (int i=elementCount()-1; i>=0; --i)
  {
    if (item(i))
      removeAt(i); // don't use removeItem() because it would unnecessarily reorder the whole legend for each item
  }
  setFillOrder(fillOrder(), true); // get rid of empty cells by reordering once after all items are removed
}
 
/*!
  Returns the legend items that are currently selected. If no items are selected,
  the list is empty.
  
  \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected, setSelectable
*/
QList<QCPAbstractLegendItem *> QCPLegend::selectedItems() const
{
  QList<QCPAbstractLegendItem*> result;
  for (int i=0; i<itemCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *ali = item(i))
    {
      if (ali->selected())
        result.append(ali);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing main legend elements.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPLegend::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegend);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen used to paint the border of the legend, taking into account the selection state
  of the legend box.
*/
QPen QCPLegend::getBorderPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spLegendBox) ? mSelectedBorderPen : mBorderPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the brush used to paint the background of the legend, taking into account the selection
  state of the legend box.
*/
QBrush QCPLegend::getBrush() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spLegendBox) ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the legend box with the provided \a painter. The individual legend items are layerables
  themselves, thus are drawn independently.
*/
void QCPLegend::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  // draw background rect:
  painter->setBrush(getBrush());
  painter->setPen(getBorderPen());
  painter->drawRect(mOuterRect);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPLegend::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return -1;
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox))
    return -1;
  
  if (mOuterRect.contains(pos.toPoint()))
  {
    if (details) details->setValue(spLegendBox);
    return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed
  if (details.value<SelectablePart>() == spLegendBox && mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox))
  {
    SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
    setSelectedParts(additive ? mSelectedParts^spLegendBox : mSelectedParts|spLegendBox); // no need to unset spItems in !additive case, because they will be deselected by QCustomPlot (they're normal QCPLayerables with own deselectEvent)
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed
  if (mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox))
  {
    SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
    setSelectedParts(selectedParts() & ~spLegendBox);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPLegend::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectLegend;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectLegend;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot)
{
  if (parentPlot && !parentPlot->legend)
    parentPlot->legend = this;
}
/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 12925                          */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPTextElement
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPTextElement
  \brief A layout element displaying a text
 
  The text may be specified with \ref setText, the formatting can be controlled with \ref setFont,
  \ref setTextColor, and \ref setTextFlags.
 
  A text element can be added as follows:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcptextelement-creation
*/
 
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::selectionChanged(bool selected)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state has changed to \a selected, either by user
  interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
  
  \see setSelected, setSelectable
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::clicked(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the text element is clicked.
 
  \see doubleClicked, selectTest
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::doubleClicked(QMouseEvent *event)
 
  This signal is emitted when the text element is double clicked.
 
  \see clicked, selectTest
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*! \overload
  
  Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. The initial text is empty (\ref
  setText).
*/
QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mText(),
  mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mTextColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue),
  mSelectable(false),
  mSelected(false)
{
  if (parentPlot)
  {
    mFont = parentPlot->font();
    mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font();
  }
  setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2));
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values.
 
  The initial text is set to \a text.
*/
QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mText(text),
  mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mTextColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue),
  mSelectable(false),
  mSelected(false)
{
  if (parentPlot)
  {
    mFont = parentPlot->font();
    mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font();
  }
  setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2));
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values.
 
  The initial text is set to \a text with \a pointSize.
*/
QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, double pointSize) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mText(text),
  mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), int(pointSize))), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mTextColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), int(pointSize))), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below
  mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue),
  mSelectable(false),
  mSelected(false)
{
  mFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize); // set here again as floating point, because constructor above only takes integer
  if (parentPlot)
  {
    mFont = parentPlot->font();
    mFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize);
    mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font();
    mSelectedFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize);
  }
  setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2));
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values.
 
  The initial text is set to \a text with \a pointSize and the specified \a fontFamily.
*/
QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QString &fontFamily, double pointSize) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mText(text),
  mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mFont(QFont(fontFamily, int(pointSize))),
  mTextColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedFont(QFont(fontFamily, int(pointSize))),
  mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue),
  mSelectable(false),
  mSelected(false)
{
  mFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize); // set here again as floating point, because constructor above only takes integer
  setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2));
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values.
 
  The initial text is set to \a text with the specified \a font.
*/
QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QFont &font) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mText(text),
  mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mFont(font),
  mTextColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedFont(font),
  mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue),
  mSelectable(false),
  mSelected(false)
{
  setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2));
}
 
/*!
  Sets the text that will be displayed to \a text. Multiple lines can be created by insertion of "\n".
  
  \see setFont, setTextColor, setTextFlags
*/
void QCPTextElement::setText(const QString &text)
{
  mText = text;
}
 
/*!
  Sets options for text alignment and wrapping behaviour. \a flags is a bitwise OR-combination of
  \c Qt::AlignmentFlag and \c Qt::TextFlag enums.
  
  Possible enums are:
  - Qt::AlignLeft
  - Qt::AlignRight
  - Qt::AlignHCenter
  - Qt::AlignJustify
  - Qt::AlignTop
  - Qt::AlignBottom
  - Qt::AlignVCenter
  - Qt::AlignCenter
  - Qt::TextDontClip
  - Qt::TextSingleLine
  - Qt::TextExpandTabs
  - Qt::TextShowMnemonic
  - Qt::TextWordWrap
  - Qt::TextIncludeTrailingSpaces
*/
void QCPTextElement::setTextFlags(int flags)
{
  mTextFlags = flags;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a font of the text.
  
  \see setTextColor, setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPTextElement::setFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a color of the text.
  
  \see setFont, setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPTextElement::setTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTextColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a font of the text that will be used if the text element is selected (\ref setSelected).
  
  \see setFont
*/
void QCPTextElement::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a color of the text that will be used if the text element is selected (\ref setSelected).
  
  \see setTextColor
*/
void QCPTextElement::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedTextColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user may select this text element.
 
  Note that even when \a selectable is set to <tt>false</tt>, the selection state may be changed
  programmatically via \ref setSelected.
*/
void QCPTextElement::setSelectable(bool selectable)
{
  if (mSelectable != selectable)
  {
    mSelectable = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectable);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the selection state of this text element to \a selected. If the selection has changed, \ref
  selectionChanged is emitted.
  
  Note that this function can change the selection state independently of the current \ref
  setSelectable state.
*/
void QCPTextElement::setSelected(bool selected)
{
  if (mSelected != selected)
  {
    mSelected = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelected);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPTextElement::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeOther);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPTextElement::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  painter->setFont(mainFont());
  painter->setPen(QPen(mainTextColor()));
  painter->drawText(mRect, mTextFlags, mText, &mTextBoundingRect);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPTextElement::minimumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  QFontMetrics metrics(mFont);
  QSize result(metrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, mText).size());
  result.rwidth() += mMargins.left()+mMargins.right();
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPTextElement::maximumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  QFontMetrics metrics(mFont);
  QSize result(metrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, mText).size());
  result.setWidth(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPTextElement::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (mSelectable)
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPTextElement::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  if (mSelectable)
  {
    bool selBefore = mSelected;
    setSelected(false);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns 0.99*selectionTolerance (see \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionTolerance) when \a pos is
  within the bounding box of the text element's text. Note that this bounding box is updated in the
  draw call.
 
  If \a pos is outside the text's bounding box or if \a onlySelectable is true and this text
  element is not selectable (\ref setSelectable), returns -1.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
double QCPTextElement::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  if (mTextBoundingRect.contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  else
    return -1;
}
 
/*!
  Accepts the mouse event in order to emit the according click signal in the \ref
  mouseReleaseEvent.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPTextElement::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  event->accept();
}
 
/*!
  Emits the \ref clicked signal if the cursor hasn't moved by more than a few pixels since the \ref
  mousePressEvent.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPTextElement::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  if ((QPointF(event->pos())-startPos).manhattanLength() <= 3)
    emit clicked(event);
}
 
/*!
  Emits the \ref doubleClicked signal.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPTextElement::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  emit doubleClicked(event);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the main font to be used. This is mSelectedFont if \ref setSelected is set to
  <tt>true</tt>, else mFont is returned.
*/
QFont QCPTextElement::mainFont() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the main color to be used. This is mSelectedTextColor if \ref setSelected is set to
  <tt>true</tt>, else mTextColor is returned.
*/
QColor QCPTextElement::mainTextColor() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor;
}
/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 26531                         */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorScale
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPColorScale
  \brief A color scale for use with color coding data such as QCPColorMap
  
  This layout element can be placed on the plot to correlate a color gradient with data values. It
  is usually used in combination with one or multiple \ref QCPColorMap "QCPColorMaps".
 
  \image html QCPColorScale.png
  
  The color scale can be either horizontal or vertical, as shown in the image above. The
  orientation and the side where the numbers appear is controlled with \ref setType.
  
  Use \ref QCPColorMap::setColorScale to connect a color map with a color scale. Once they are
  connected, they share their gradient, data range and data scale type (\ref setGradient, \ref
  setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType). Multiple color maps may be associated with a single color
  scale, to make them all synchronize these properties.
  
  To have finer control over the number display and axis behaviour, you can directly access the
  \ref axis. See the documentation of QCPAxis for details about configuring axes. For example, if
  you want to change the number of automatically generated ticks, call
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-tickcount
  
  Placing a color scale next to the main axis rect works like with any other layout element:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-creation
  In this case we have placed it to the right of the default axis rect, so it wasn't necessary to
  call \ref setType, since \ref QCPAxis::atRight is already the default. The text next to the color
  scale can be set with \ref setLabel.
  
  For optimum appearance (like in the image above), it may be desirable to line up the axis rect and
  the borders of the color scale. Use a \ref QCPMarginGroup to achieve this:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-margingroup
  
  Color scales are initialized with a non-zero minimum top and bottom margin (\ref
  setMinimumMargins), because vertical color scales are most common and the minimum top/bottom
  margin makes sure it keeps some distance to the top/bottom widget border. So if you change to a
  horizontal color scale by setting \ref setType to \ref QCPAxis::atBottom or \ref QCPAxis::atTop, you
  might want to also change the minimum margins accordingly, e.g. <tt>setMinimumMargins(QMargins(6, 0, 6, 0))</tt>.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPAxis *QCPColorScale::axis() const
  
  Returns the internal \ref QCPAxis instance of this color scale. You can access it to alter the
  appearance and behaviour of the axis. \ref QCPColorScale duplicates some properties in its
  interface for convenience. Those are \ref setDataRange (\ref QCPAxis::setRange), \ref
  setDataScaleType (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType), and the method \ref setLabel (\ref
  QCPAxis::setLabel). As they each are connected, it does not matter whether you use the method on
  the QCPColorScale or on its QCPAxis.
  
  If the type of the color scale is changed with \ref setType, the axis returned by this method
  will change, too, to either the left, right, bottom or top axis, depending on which type was set.
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataRangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange);
  
  This signal is emitted when the data range changes.
  
  \see setDataRange
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
  
  This signal is emitted when the data scale type changes.
  
  \see setDataScaleType
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::gradientChanged(const QCPColorGradient &newGradient);
  
  This signal is emitted when the gradient changes.
  
  \see setGradient
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs a new QCPColorScale.
*/
QCPColorScale::QCPColorScale(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mType(QCPAxis::atTop), // set to atTop such that setType(QCPAxis::atRight) below doesn't skip work because it thinks it's already atRight
  mDataScaleType(QCPAxis::stLinear),
  mGradient(QCPColorGradient::gpCold),
  mBarWidth(20),
  mAxisRect(new QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate(this))
{
  setMinimumMargins(QMargins(0, 6, 0, 6)); // for default right color scale types, keep some room at bottom and top (important if no margin group is used)
  setType(QCPAxis::atRight);
  setDataRange(QCPRange(0, 6));
}
 
QCPColorScale::~QCPColorScale()
{
  delete mAxisRect;
}
 
/* undocumented getter */
QString QCPColorScale::label() const
{
  if (!mColorAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined";
    return QString();
  }
  
  return mColorAxis.data()->label();
}
 
/* undocumented getter */
bool QCPColorScale::rangeDrag() const
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return false;
  }
  
  return mAxisRect.data()->rangeDrag().testFlag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) &&
      mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) &&
      mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType))->orientation() == QCPAxis::orientation(mType);
}
 
/* undocumented getter */
bool QCPColorScale::rangeZoom() const
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return false;
  }
  
  return mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoom().testFlag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) &&
      mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) &&
      mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType))->orientation() == QCPAxis::orientation(mType);
}
 
/*!
  Sets at which side of the color scale the axis is placed, and thus also its orientation.
  
  Note that after setting \a type to a different value, the axis returned by \ref axis() will
  be a different one. The new axis will adopt the following properties from the previous axis: The
  range, scale type, label and ticker (the latter will be shared and not copied).
*/
void QCPColorScale::setType(QCPAxis::AxisType type)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  if (mType != type)
  {
    mType = type;
    QCPRange rangeTransfer(0, 6);
    QString labelTransfer;
    QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> tickerTransfer;
    // transfer/revert some settings on old axis if it exists:
    bool doTransfer = !mColorAxis.isNull();
    if (doTransfer)
    {
      rangeTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->range();
      labelTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->label();
      tickerTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->ticker();
      mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(QString());
      disconnect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
      disconnect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
    }
    const QList<QCPAxis::AxisType> allAxisTypes = QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>() << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop;
    foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType atype, allAxisTypes)
    {
      mAxisRect.data()->axis(atype)->setTicks(atype == mType);
      mAxisRect.data()->axis(atype)->setTickLabels(atype== mType);
    }
    // set new mColorAxis pointer:
    mColorAxis = mAxisRect.data()->axis(mType);
    // transfer settings to new axis:
    if (doTransfer)
    {
      mColorAxis.data()->setRange(rangeTransfer); // range transfer necessary if axis changes from vertical to horizontal or vice versa (axes with same orientation are synchronized via signals)
      mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(labelTransfer);
      mColorAxis.data()->setTicker(tickerTransfer);
    }
    connect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
    connect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDragAxes(QList<QCPAxis*>() << mColorAxis.data());
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the range spanned by the color gradient and that is shown by the axis in the color scale.
  
  It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataRange on any of the connected color maps. It is
  also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its range with \ref
  QCPAxis::setRange.
  
  \see setDataScaleType, setGradient, rescaleDataRange
*/
void QCPColorScale::setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange)
{
  if (mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper)
  {
    mDataRange = dataRange;
    if (mColorAxis)
      mColorAxis.data()->setRange(mDataRange);
    emit dataRangeChanged(mDataRange);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the scale type of the color scale, i.e. whether values are associated with colors linearly
  or logarithmically.
  
  It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType on any of the connected color maps. It is
  also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its scale type with \ref
  QCPAxis::setScaleType.
  
  Note that this method controls the coordinate transformation. For logarithmic scales, you will
  likely also want to use a logarithmic tick spacing and labeling, which can be achieved by setting
  the color scale's \ref axis ticker to an instance of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog :
  
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpaxisticker-log-colorscale
  
  See the documentation of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog about the details of logarithmic axis tick
  creation.
  
  \see setDataRange, setGradient
*/
void QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType)
{
  if (mDataScaleType != scaleType)
  {
    mDataScaleType = scaleType;
    if (mColorAxis)
      mColorAxis.data()->setScaleType(mDataScaleType);
    if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
      setDataRange(mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale());
    emit dataScaleTypeChanged(mDataScaleType);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color gradient that will be used to represent data values.
  
  It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setGradient on any of the connected color maps.
  
  \see setDataRange, setDataScaleType
*/
void QCPColorScale::setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient)
{
  if (mGradient != gradient)
  {
    mGradient = gradient;
    if (mAxisRect)
      mAxisRect.data()->mGradientImageInvalidated = true;
    emit gradientChanged(mGradient);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the axis label of the color scale. This is equivalent to calling \ref QCPAxis::setLabel on
  the internal \ref axis.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setLabel(const QString &str)
{
  if (!mColorAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined";
    return;
  }
  
  mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(str);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width (or height, for horizontal color scales) the bar where the gradient is displayed
  will have.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setBarWidth(int width)
{
  mBarWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can drag the data range (\ref setDataRange).
  
  Note that \ref QCP::iRangeDrag must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setRangeDrag(bool enabled)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  
  if (enabled)
  {
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType));
  } else
  {
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 2, 0)
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag(nullptr);
#else
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag({});
#endif
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can zoom the data range (\ref setDataRange) by scrolling the mouse wheel.
  
  Note that \ref QCP::iRangeZoom must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setRangeZoom(bool enabled)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  
  if (enabled)
  {
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom(QCPAxis::orientation(mType));
  } else
  {
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 2, 0)
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag(nullptr);
#else
    mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom({});
#endif
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns a list of all the color maps associated with this color scale.
*/
QList<QCPColorMap*> QCPColorScale::colorMaps() const
{
  QList<QCPColorMap*> result;
  for (int i=0; i<mParentPlot->plottableCount(); ++i)
  {
    if (QCPColorMap *cm = qobject_cast<QCPColorMap*>(mParentPlot->plottable(i)))
      if (cm->colorScale() == this)
        result.append(cm);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Changes the data range such that all color maps associated with this color scale are fully mapped
  to the gradient in the data dimension.
  
  \see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorScale::rescaleDataRange(bool onlyVisibleMaps)
{
  QList<QCPColorMap*> maps = colorMaps();
  QCPRange newRange;
  bool haveRange = false;
  QCP::SignDomain sign = QCP::sdBoth;
  if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
    sign = (mDataRange.upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
  foreach (QCPColorMap *map, maps)
  {
    if (!map->realVisibility() && onlyVisibleMaps)
      continue;
    QCPRange mapRange;
    if (map->colorScale() == this)
    {
      bool currentFoundRange = true;
      mapRange = map->data()->dataBounds();
      if (sign == QCP::sdPositive)
      {
        if (mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper > 0)
          mapRange.lower = mapRange.upper*1e-3;
        else if (mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper <= 0)
          currentFoundRange = false;
      } else if (sign == QCP::sdNegative)
      {
        if (mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower < 0)
          mapRange.upper = mapRange.lower*1e-3;
        else if (mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower >= 0)
          currentFoundRange = false;
      }
      if (currentFoundRange)
      {
        if (!haveRange)
          newRange = mapRange;
        else
          newRange.expand(mapRange);
        haveRange = true;
      }
    }
  }
  if (haveRange)
  {
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this dimension), shift current range to at least center the data
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-mDataRange.size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+mDataRange.size()/2.0;
      } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(mDataRange.upper/mDataRange.lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(mDataRange.upper/mDataRange.lower);
      }
    }
    setDataRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::update(UpdatePhase phase)
{
  QCPLayoutElement::update(phase);
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  
  mAxisRect.data()->update(phase);
  
  switch (phase)
  {
    case upMargins:
    {
      if (mType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mType == QCPAxis::atTop)
      {
        setMaximumSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().top()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom());
        setMinimumSize(0,               mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().top()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom());
      } else
      {
        setMaximumSize(mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().left()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().right(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
        setMinimumSize(mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().left()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().right(), 0);
      }
      break;
    }
    case upLayout:
    {
      mAxisRect.data()->setOuterRect(rect());
      break;
    }
    default: break;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  painter->setAntialiasing(false);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  mAxisRect.data()->mousePressEvent(event, details);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  mAxisRect.data()->mouseMoveEvent(event, startPos);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  mAxisRect.data()->mouseReleaseEvent(event, startPos);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  if (!mAxisRect)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
    return;
  }
  mAxisRect.data()->wheelEvent(event);
}
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate
 
  \internal
  \brief An axis rect subclass for use in a QCPColorScale
  
  This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface.
  
  It provides the axis rect functionality for the QCPColorScale class.
*/
 
 
/*!
  Creates a new instance, as a child of \a parentColorScale.
*/
QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate(QCPColorScale *parentColorScale) :
  QCPAxisRect(parentColorScale->parentPlot(), true),
  mParentColorScale(parentColorScale),
  mGradientImageInvalidated(true)
{
  setParentLayerable(parentColorScale);
  setMinimumMargins(QMargins(0, 0, 0, 0));
  const QList<QCPAxis::AxisType> allAxisTypes = QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight;
  foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes)
  {
    axis(type)->setVisible(true);
    axis(type)->grid()->setVisible(false);
    axis(type)->setPadding(0);
    connect(axis(type), SIGNAL(selectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)), this, SLOT(axisSelectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)));
    connect(axis(type), SIGNAL(selectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)), this, SLOT(axisSelectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)));
  }
 
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  connect(axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  
  // make layer transfers of color scale transfer to axis rect and axes
  // the axes must be set after axis rect, such that they appear above color gradient drawn by axis rect:
  connect(parentColorScale, SIGNAL(layerChanged(QCPLayer*)), this, SLOT(setLayer(QCPLayer*)));
  foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes)
    connect(parentColorScale, SIGNAL(layerChanged(QCPLayer*)), axis(type), SLOT(setLayer(QCPLayer*)));
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Updates the color gradient image if necessary, by calling \ref updateGradientImage, then draws
  it. Then the axes are drawn by calling the \ref QCPAxisRect::draw base class implementation.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (mGradientImageInvalidated)
    updateGradientImage();
  
  bool mirrorHorz = false;
  bool mirrorVert = false;
  if (mParentColorScale->mColorAxis)
  {
    mirrorHorz = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && (mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atBottom || mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atTop);
    mirrorVert = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && (mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atLeft || mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atRight);
  }
  
  painter->drawImage(rect().adjusted(0, -1, 0, -1), mGradientImage.mirrored(mirrorHorz, mirrorVert));
  QCPAxisRect::draw(painter);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Uses the current gradient of the parent \ref QCPColorScale (specified in the constructor) to
  generate a gradient image. This gradient image will be used in the \ref draw method.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::updateGradientImage()
{
  if (rect().isEmpty())
    return;
  
  const QImage::Format format = QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied;
  int n = mParentColorScale->mGradient.levelCount();
  int w, h;
  QVector<double> data(n);
  for (int i=0; i<n; ++i)
    data[i] = i;
  if (mParentColorScale->mType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mParentColorScale->mType == QCPAxis::atTop)
  {
    w = n;
    h = rect().height();
    mGradientImage = QImage(w, h, format);
    QVector<QRgb*> pixels;
    for (int y=0; y<h; ++y)
      pixels.append(reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>(mGradientImage.scanLine(y)));
    mParentColorScale->mGradient.colorize(data.constData(), QCPRange(0, n-1), pixels.first(), n);
    for (int y=1; y<h; ++y)
      memcpy(pixels.at(y), pixels.first(), size_t(n)*sizeof(QRgb));
  } else
  {
    w = rect().width();
    h = n;
    mGradientImage = QImage(w, h, format);
    for (int y=0; y<h; ++y)
    {
      QRgb *pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>(mGradientImage.scanLine(y));
      const QRgb lineColor = mParentColorScale->mGradient.color(data[h-1-y], QCPRange(0, n-1));
      for (int x=0; x<w; ++x)
        pixels[x] = lineColor;
    }
  }
  mGradientImageInvalidated = false;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This slot is connected to the selectionChanged signals of the four axes in the constructor. It
  synchronizes the selection state of the axes.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::axisSelectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectedParts)
{
  // axis bases of four axes shall always (de-)selected synchronously:
  const QList<QCPAxis::AxisType> allAxisTypes = QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight;
  foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes)
  {
    if (QCPAxis *senderAxis = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>(sender()))
      if (senderAxis->axisType() == type)
        continue;
    
    if (axis(type)->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis))
    {
      if (selectedParts.testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis))
        axis(type)->setSelectedParts(axis(type)->selectedParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis);
      else
        axis(type)->setSelectedParts(axis(type)->selectedParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis);
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This slot is connected to the selectableChanged signals of the four axes in the constructor. It
  synchronizes the selectability of the axes.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::axisSelectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectableParts)
{
  // synchronize axis base selectability:
  const QList<QCPAxis::AxisType> allAxisTypes = QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight;
  foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes)
  {
    if (QCPAxis *senderAxis = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>(sender()))
      if (senderAxis->axisType() == type)
        continue;
    
    if (axis(type)->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis))
    {
      if (selectableParts.testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis))
        axis(type)->setSelectableParts(axis(type)->selectableParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis);
      else
        axis(type)->setSelectableParts(axis(type)->selectableParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis);
    }
  }
}
/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 74926            */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPGraphData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPGraphData
  \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPGraph.
  
  The stored data is:
  \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey)
  \li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this data point (this is the \a mainValue)
  
  The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPGraphDataContainer. It is a typedef for
  \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPGraphData as the DataType template parameter. See the
  documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods.
  
  \see QCPGraphDataContainer
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::sortKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static QCPGraphData QCPGraphData::fromSortKey(double sortKey)
  
  Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static static bool QCPGraphData::sortKeyIsMainKey()
  
  Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter,
  this method returns true.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::mainKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::mainValue() const
  
  Returns the \a value member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPGraphData::valueRange() const
  
  Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with key and value set to zero.
*/
QCPGraphData::QCPGraphData() :
  key(0),
  value(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with the specified \a key and \a value.
*/
QCPGraphData::QCPGraphData(double key, double value) :
  key(key),
  value(value)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPGraph
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPGraph
  \brief A plottable representing a graph in a plot.
 
  \image html QCPGraph.png
  
  Usually you create new graphs by calling QCustomPlot::addGraph. The resulting instance can be
  accessed via QCustomPlot::graph.
 
  To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can
  also access and modify the data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the internal
  \ref QCPGraphDataContainer.
  
  Graphs are used to display single-valued data. Single-valued means that there should only be one
  data point per unique key coordinate. In other words, the graph can't have \a loops. If you do
  want to plot non-single-valued curves, rather use the QCPCurve plottable.
  
  Gaps in the graph line can be created by adding data points with NaN as value
  (<tt>qQNaN()</tt> or <tt>std::numeric_limits<double>::quiet_NaN()</tt>) in between the two data points that shall be
  separated.
  
  \section qcpgraph-appearance Changing the appearance
  
  The appearance of the graph is mainly determined by the line style, scatter style, brush and pen
  of the graph (\ref setLineStyle, \ref setScatterStyle, \ref setBrush, \ref setPen).
  
  \subsection filling Filling under or between graphs
  
  QCPGraph knows two types of fills: Normal graph fills towards the zero-value-line parallel to
  the key axis of the graph, and fills between two graphs, called channel fills. To enable a fill,
  just set a brush with \ref setBrush which is neither Qt::NoBrush nor fully transparent.
  
  By default, a normal fill towards the zero-value-line will be drawn. To set up a channel fill
  between this graph and another one, call \ref setChannelFillGraph with the other graph as
  parameter.
 
  \see QCustomPlot::addGraph, QCustomPlot::graph
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPGraphDataContainer> QCPGraph::data() const
  
  Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPGraphDataContainer. You may
  use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the
  regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a graph which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value
  axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have
  the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is
  printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  The created QCPGraph is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a
  keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPGraph, so do not delete it manually
  but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
  
  To directly create a graph inside a plot, you can also use the simpler QCustomPlot::addGraph function.
*/
QCPGraph::QCPGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D<QCPGraphData>(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mLineStyle{},
  mScatterSkip{},
  mAdaptiveSampling{}
{
  // special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface:
  mParentPlot->registerGraph(this);
 
  setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 0));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  
  setLineStyle(lsLine);
  setScatterSkip(0);
  setChannelFillGraph(nullptr);
  setAdaptiveSampling(true);
}
 
QCPGraph::~QCPGraph()
{
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPGraphs may share the same data container safely.
  Modifying the data in the container will then affect all graphs that share the container. Sharing
  can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpgraph-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the graph's data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpgraph-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPGraph::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPGraphDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided
  vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the
  smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPGraph::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, values, alreadySorted);
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot. For scatter-only plots, set \a ls to
  \ref lsNone and \ref setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style.
  
  \see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setLineStyle(LineStyle ls)
{
  mLineStyle = ls;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points
  are drawn (e.g. for line-only-plots with appropriate line style).
  
  \see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style)
{
  mScatterStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  If scatters are displayed (scatter style not \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone), \a skip number of
  scatter points are skipped/not drawn after every drawn scatter point.
 
  This can be used to make the data appear sparser while for example still having a smooth line,
  and to improve performance for very high density plots.
 
  If \a skip is set to 0 (default), all scatter points are drawn.
 
  \see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setScatterSkip(int skip)
{
  mScatterSkip = qMax(0, skip);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the target graph for filling the area between this graph and \a targetGraph with the current
  brush (\ref setBrush).
  
  When \a targetGraph is set to 0, a normal graph fill to the zero-value-line will be shown. To
  disable any filling, set the brush to Qt::NoBrush.
 
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPGraph::setChannelFillGraph(QCPGraph *targetGraph)
{
  // prevent setting channel target to this graph itself:
  if (targetGraph == this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph is this graph itself";
    mChannelFillGraph = nullptr;
    return;
  }
  // prevent setting channel target to a graph not in the plot:
  if (targetGraph && targetGraph->mParentPlot != mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph not in same plot";
    mChannelFillGraph = nullptr;
    return;
  }
  
  mChannelFillGraph = targetGraph;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether adaptive sampling shall be used when plotting this graph. QCustomPlot's adaptive
  sampling technique can drastically improve the replot performance for graphs with a larger number
  of points (e.g. above 10,000), without notably changing the appearance of the graph.
  
  By default, adaptive sampling is enabled. Even if enabled, QCustomPlot decides whether adaptive
  sampling shall actually be used on a per-graph basis. So leaving adaptive sampling enabled has no
  disadvantage in almost all cases.
  
  \image html adaptive-sampling-line.png "A line plot of 500,000 points without and with adaptive sampling"
  
  As can be seen, line plots experience no visual degradation from adaptive sampling. Outliers are
  reproduced reliably, as well as the overall shape of the data set. The replot time reduces
  dramatically though. This allows QCustomPlot to display large amounts of data in realtime.
  
  \image html adaptive-sampling-scatter.png "A scatter plot of 100,000 points without and with adaptive sampling"
  
  Care must be taken when using high-density scatter plots in combination with adaptive sampling.
  The adaptive sampling algorithm treats scatter plots more carefully than line plots which still
  gives a significant reduction of replot times, but not quite as much as for line plots. This is
  because scatter plots inherently need more data points to be preserved in order to still resemble
  the original, non-adaptive-sampling plot. As shown above, the results still aren't quite
  identical, as banding occurs for the outer data points. This is in fact intentional, such that
  the boundaries of the data cloud stay visible to the viewer. How strong the banding appears,
  depends on the point density, i.e. the number of points in the plot.
  
  For some situations with scatter plots it might thus be desirable to manually turn adaptive
  sampling off. For example, when saving the plot to disk. This can be achieved by setting \a
  enabled to false before issuing a command like \ref QCustomPlot::savePng, and setting \a enabled
  back to true afterwards.
*/
void QCPGraph::setAdaptiveSampling(bool enabled)
{
  mAdaptiveSampling = enabled;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors
  should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest
  vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPGraph::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (keys.size() != values.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size());
  QVector<QCPGraphData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPGraphData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPGraphData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->value = values[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPGraph::addData(double key, double value)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPGraphData(key, value));
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPGraph::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint);
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = int(closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin());
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return result;
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPGraph::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  return mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPGraph::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPGraph::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone()) return;
  
  QVector<QPointF> lines, scatters; // line and (if necessary) scatter pixel coordinates will be stored here while iterating over segments
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    // get line pixel points appropriate to line style:
    QCPDataRange lineDataRange = isSelectedSegment ? allSegments.at(i) : allSegments.at(i).adjusted(-1, 1); // unselected segments extend lines to bordering selected data point (safe to exceed total data bounds in first/last segment, getLines takes care)
    getLines(&lines, lineDataRange);
    
    // check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it;
    for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it)
    {
      if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value))
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
    }
#endif
    
    // draw fill of graph:
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
    else
      painter->setBrush(mBrush);
    painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen);
    drawFill(painter, &lines);
    
    // draw line:
    if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
    {
      if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
      else
        painter->setPen(mPen);
      painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
      if (mLineStyle == lsImpulse)
        drawImpulsePlot(painter, lines);
      else
        drawLinePlot(painter, lines); // also step plots can be drawn as a line plot
    }
    
    // draw scatters:
    QCPScatterStyle finalScatterStyle = mScatterStyle;
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      finalScatterStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mScatterStyle);
    if (!finalScatterStyle.isNone())
    {
      getScatters(&scatters, allSegments.at(i));
      drawScatterPlot(painter, scatters, finalScatterStyle);
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPGraph::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  // draw fill:
  if (mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush)
  {
    applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->fillRect(QRectF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.width(), rect.height()/3.0), mBrush);
  }
  // draw line vertically centered:
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.right()+5, rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0)); // +5 on x2 else last segment is missing from dashed/dotted pens
  }
  // draw scatter symbol:
  if (!mScatterStyle.isNone())
  {
    applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
    // scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect:
    if (mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap && (mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() || mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height()))
    {
      QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle(mScatterStyle);
      scaledStyle.setPixmap(scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::SmoothTransformation));
      scaledStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      scaledStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    } else
    {
      mScatterStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      mScatterStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method retrieves an optimized set of data points via \ref getOptimizedLineData, and branches
  out to the line style specific functions such as \ref dataToLines, \ref dataToStepLeftLines, etc.
  according to the line style of the graph.
 
  \a lines will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with the according
  draw functions like \ref drawLinePlot and \ref drawImpulsePlot. The points returned in \a lines
  aren't necessarily the original data points. For example, step line styles require additional
  points to form the steps when drawn. If the line style of the graph is \ref lsNone, the \a
  lines vector will be empty.
 
  \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for
  conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm:
  a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this
  function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref
  getDataSegments.
 
  \see getScatters
*/
void QCPGraph::getLines(QVector<QPointF> *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const
{
  if (!lines) return;
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
  getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange);
  if (begin == end)
  {
    lines->clear();
    return;
  }
  
  QVector<QCPGraphData> lineData;
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
    getOptimizedLineData(&lineData, begin, end);
  
  if (mKeyAxis->rangeReversed() != (mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)) // make sure key pixels are sorted ascending in lineData (significantly simplifies following processing)
    std::reverse(lineData.begin(), lineData.end());
 
  switch (mLineStyle)
  {
    case lsNone: lines->clear(); break;
    case lsLine: *lines = dataToLines(lineData); break;
    case lsStepLeft: *lines = dataToStepLeftLines(lineData); break;
    case lsStepRight: *lines = dataToStepRightLines(lineData); break;
    case lsStepCenter: *lines = dataToStepCenterLines(lineData); break;
    case lsImpulse: *lines = dataToImpulseLines(lineData); break;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method retrieves an optimized set of data points via \ref getOptimizedScatterData and then
  converts them to pixel coordinates. The resulting points are returned in \a scatters, and can be
  passed to \ref drawScatterPlot.
 
  \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for
  conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm:
  a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this
  function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref
  getDataSegments.
*/
void QCPGraph::getScatters(QVector<QPointF> *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const
{
  if (!scatters) return;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; scatters->clear(); return; }
  
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
  getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange);
  if (begin == end)
  {
    scatters->clear();
    return;
  }
  
  QVector<QCPGraphData> data;
  getOptimizedScatterData(&data, begin, end);
  
  if (mKeyAxis->rangeReversed() != (mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)) // make sure key pixels are sorted ascending in data (significantly simplifies following processing)
    std::reverse(data.begin(), data.end());
  
  scatters->resize(data.size());
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      if (!qIsNaN(data.at(i).value))
      {
        (*scatters)[i].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value));
        (*scatters)[i].setY(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key));
      }
    }
  } else
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      if (!qIsNaN(data.at(i).value))
      {
        (*scatters)[i].setX(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key));
        (*scatters)[i].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value));
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsLine.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPGraph::dataToLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
 
  result.resize(data.size());
  
  // transform data points to pixels:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      result[i].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value));
      result[i].setY(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key));
    }
  } else // key axis is horizontal
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      result[i].setX(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key));
      result[i].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value));
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepLeft.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPGraph::dataToStepLeftLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
  
  result.resize(data.size()*2);
  
  // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value);
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double key = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+0].setX(lastValue);
      result[i*2+0].setY(key);
      lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      result[i*2+1].setX(lastValue);
      result[i*2+1].setY(key);
    }
  } else // key axis is horizontal
  {
    double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value);
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double key = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+0].setX(key);
      result[i*2+0].setY(lastValue);
      lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      result[i*2+1].setX(key);
      result[i*2+1].setY(lastValue);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepRight.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPGraph::dataToStepRightLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
  
  result.resize(data.size()*2);
  
  // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key);
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double value = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      result[i*2+0].setX(value);
      result[i*2+0].setY(lastKey);
      lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+1].setX(value);
      result[i*2+1].setY(lastKey);
    }
  } else // key axis is horizontal
  {
    double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key);
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double value = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      result[i*2+0].setX(lastKey);
      result[i*2+0].setY(value);
      lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+1].setX(lastKey);
      result[i*2+1].setY(value);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepCenter.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPGraph::dataToStepCenterLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
  
  result.resize(data.size()*2);
  
  // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key);
    double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value);
    result[0].setX(lastValue);
    result[0].setY(lastKey);
    for (int i=1; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double key = (keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key)+lastKey)*0.5;
      result[i*2-1].setX(lastValue);
      result[i*2-1].setY(key);
      lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+0].setX(lastValue);
      result[i*2+0].setY(key);
    }
    result[data.size()*2-1].setX(lastValue);
    result[data.size()*2-1].setY(lastKey);
  } else // key axis is horizontal
  {
    double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key);
    double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value);
    result[0].setX(lastKey);
    result[0].setY(lastValue);
    for (int i=1; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double key = (keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key)+lastKey)*0.5;
      result[i*2-1].setX(key);
      result[i*2-1].setY(lastValue);
      lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value);
      lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
      result[i*2+0].setX(key);
      result[i*2+0].setY(lastValue);
    }
    result[data.size()*2-1].setX(lastKey);
    result[data.size()*2-1].setY(lastValue);
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsImpulse.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, getLines, drawImpulsePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPGraph::dataToImpulseLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
  
  result.resize(data.size()*2);
  
  // transform data points to pixels:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const QCPGraphData &current = data.at(i);
      if (!qIsNaN(current.value))
      {
        const double key = keyAxis->coordToPixel(current.key);
        result[i*2+0].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0));
        result[i*2+0].setY(key);
        result[i*2+1].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(current.value));
        result[i*2+1].setY(key);
      } else
      {
        result[i*2+0] = QPointF(0, 0);
        result[i*2+1] = QPointF(0, 0);
      }
    }
  } else // key axis is horizontal
  {
    for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    {
      const QCPGraphData &current = data.at(i);
      if (!qIsNaN(current.value))
      {
        const double key = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key);
        result[i*2+0].setX(key);
        result[i*2+0].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0));
        result[i*2+1].setX(key);
        result[i*2+1].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value));
      } else
      {
        result[i*2+0] = QPointF(0, 0);
        result[i*2+1] = QPointF(0, 0);
      }
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the fill of the graph using the specified \a painter, with the currently set brush.
  
  Depending on whether a normal fill or a channel fill (\ref setChannelFillGraph) is needed, \ref
  getFillPolygon or \ref getChannelFillPolygon are used to find the according fill polygons.
  
  In order to handle NaN Data points correctly (the fill needs to be split into disjoint areas),
  this method first determines a list of non-NaN segments with \ref getNonNanSegments, on which to
  operate. In the channel fill case, \ref getOverlappingSegments is used to consolidate the non-NaN
  segments of the two involved graphs, before passing the overlapping pairs to \ref
  getChannelFillPolygon.
  
  Pass the points of this graph's line as \a lines, in pixel coordinates.
 
  \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot, drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawFill(QCPPainter *painter, QVector<QPointF> *lines) const
{
  if (mLineStyle == lsImpulse) return; // fill doesn't make sense for impulse plot
  if (painter->brush().style() == Qt::NoBrush || painter->brush().color().alpha() == 0) return;
  
  applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
  const QVector<QCPDataRange> segments = getNonNanSegments(lines, keyAxis()->orientation());
  if (!mChannelFillGraph)
  {
    // draw base fill under graph, fill goes all the way to the zero-value-line:
    foreach (QCPDataRange segment, segments)
      painter->drawPolygon(getFillPolygon(lines, segment));
  } else
  {
    // draw fill between this graph and mChannelFillGraph:
    QVector<QPointF> otherLines;
    mChannelFillGraph->getLines(&otherLines, QCPDataRange(0, mChannelFillGraph->dataCount()));
    if (!otherLines.isEmpty())
    {
      QVector<QCPDataRange> otherSegments = getNonNanSegments(&otherLines, mChannelFillGraph->keyAxis()->orientation());
      QVector<QPair<QCPDataRange, QCPDataRange> > segmentPairs = getOverlappingSegments(segments, lines, otherSegments, &otherLines);
      for (int i=0; i<segmentPairs.size(); ++i)
        painter->drawPolygon(getChannelFillPolygon(lines, segmentPairs.at(i).first, &otherLines, segmentPairs.at(i).second));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws scatter symbols at every point passed in \a scatters, given in pixel coordinates. The
  scatters will be drawn with \a painter and have the appearance as specified in \a style.
 
  \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &scatters, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const
{
  applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
  style.applyTo(painter, mPen);
  foreach (const QPointF &scatter, scatters)
    style.drawShape(painter, scatter.x(), scatter.y());
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  Draws lines between the points in \a lines, given in pixel coordinates.
  
  \see drawScatterPlot, drawImpulsePlot, QCPAbstractPlottable1D::drawPolyline
*/
void QCPGraph::drawLinePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &lines) const
{
  if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    drawPolyline(painter, lines);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws impulses from the provided data, i.e. it connects all line pairs in \a lines, given in
  pixel coordinates. The \a lines necessary for impulses are generated by \ref dataToImpulseLines
  from the regular graph data points.
 
  \see drawLinePlot, drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawImpulsePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &lines) const
{
  if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    QPen oldPen = painter->pen();
    QPen newPen = painter->pen();
    newPen.setCapStyle(Qt::FlatCap); // so impulse line doesn't reach beyond zero-line
    painter->setPen(newPen);
    painter->drawLines(lines);
    painter->setPen(oldPen);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns via \a lineData the data points that need to be visualized for this graph when plotting
  graph lines, taking into consideration the currently visible axis ranges and, if \ref
  setAdaptiveSampling is enabled, local point densities. The considered data can be restricted
  further by \a begin and \a end, e.g. to only plot a certain segment of the data (see \ref
  getDataSegments).
 
  This method is used by \ref getLines to retrieve the basic working set of data.
 
  \see getOptimizedScatterData
*/
void QCPGraph::getOptimizedLineData(QVector<QCPGraphData> *lineData, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const
{
  if (!lineData) return;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  if (begin == end) return;
  
  int dataCount = int(end-begin);
  int maxCount = (std::numeric_limits<int>::max)();
  if (mAdaptiveSampling)
  {
    double keyPixelSpan = qAbs(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)-keyAxis->coordToPixel((end-1)->key));
    if (2*keyPixelSpan+2 < static_cast<double>((std::numeric_limits<int>::max)()))
      maxCount = int(2*keyPixelSpan+2);
  }
  
  if (mAdaptiveSampling && dataCount >= maxCount) // use adaptive sampling only if there are at least two points per pixel on average
  {
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
    double minValue = it->value;
    double maxValue = it->value;
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator currentIntervalFirstPoint = it;
    int reversedFactor = keyAxis->pixelOrientation(); // is used to calculate keyEpsilon pixel into the correct direction
    int reversedRound = reversedFactor==-1 ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor (normal) and ceil (reversed) rounding of currentIntervalStartKey
    double currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(int(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)+reversedRound));
    double lastIntervalEndKey = currentIntervalStartKey;
    double keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); // interval of one pixel on screen when mapped to plot key coordinates
    bool keyEpsilonVariable = keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs to be updated after every interval (for log axes)
    int intervalDataCount = 1;
    ++it; // advance iterator to second data point because adaptive sampling works in 1 point retrospect
    while (it != end)
    {
      if (it->key < currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon) // data point is still within same pixel, so skip it and expand value span of this cluster if necessary
      {
        if (it->value < minValue)
          minValue = it->value;
        else if (it->value > maxValue)
          maxValue = it->value;
        ++intervalDataCount;
      } else // new pixel interval started
      {
        if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them to a cluster
        {
          if (lastIntervalEndKey < currentIntervalStartKey-keyEpsilon) // last point is further away, so first point of this cluster must be at a real data point
            lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.2, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value));
          lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.25, minValue));
          lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.75, maxValue));
          if (it->key > currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*2) // new pixel started further away from previous cluster, so make sure the last point of the cluster is at a real data point
            lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.8, (it-1)->value));
        } else
          lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalFirstPoint->key, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value));
        lastIntervalEndKey = (it-1)->key;
        minValue = it->value;
        maxValue = it->value;
        currentIntervalFirstPoint = it;
        currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(int(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key)+reversedRound));
        if (keyEpsilonVariable)
          keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor));
        intervalDataCount = 1;
      }
      ++it;
    }
    // handle last interval:
    if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them to a cluster
    {
      if (lastIntervalEndKey < currentIntervalStartKey-keyEpsilon) // last point wasn't a cluster, so first point of this cluster must be at a real data point
        lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.2, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value));
      lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.25, minValue));
      lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.75, maxValue));
    } else
      lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalFirstPoint->key, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value));
    
  } else // don't use adaptive sampling algorithm, transfer points one-to-one from the data container into the output
  {
    lineData->resize(dataCount);
    std::copy(begin, end, lineData->begin());
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns via \a scatterData the data points that need to be visualized for this graph when
  plotting scatter points, taking into consideration the currently visible axis ranges and, if \ref
  setAdaptiveSampling is enabled, local point densities. The considered data can be restricted
  further by \a begin and \a end, e.g. to only plot a certain segment of the data (see \ref
  getDataSegments).
 
  This method is used by \ref getScatters to retrieve the basic working set of data.
 
  \see getOptimizedLineData
*/
void QCPGraph::getOptimizedScatterData(QVector<QCPGraphData> *scatterData, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end) const
{
  if (!scatterData) return;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  const int scatterModulo = mScatterSkip+1;
  const bool doScatterSkip = mScatterSkip > 0;
  int beginIndex = int(begin-mDataContainer->constBegin());
  int endIndex = int(end-mDataContainer->constBegin());
  while (doScatterSkip && begin != end && beginIndex % scatterModulo != 0) // advance begin iterator to first non-skipped scatter
  {
    ++beginIndex;
    ++begin;
  }
  if (begin == end) return;
  int dataCount = int(end-begin);
  int maxCount = (std::numeric_limits<int>::max)();
  if (mAdaptiveSampling)
  {
    int keyPixelSpan = int(qAbs(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)-keyAxis->coordToPixel((end-1)->key)));
    maxCount = 2*keyPixelSpan+2;
  }
  
  if (mAdaptiveSampling && dataCount >= maxCount) // use adaptive sampling only if there are at least two points per pixel on average
  {
    double valueMaxRange = valueAxis->range().upper;
    double valueMinRange = valueAxis->range().lower;
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
    int itIndex = int(beginIndex);
    double minValue = it->value;
    double maxValue = it->value;
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator minValueIt = it;
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator maxValueIt = it;
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator currentIntervalStart = it;
    int reversedFactor = keyAxis->pixelOrientation(); // is used to calculate keyEpsilon pixel into the correct direction
    int reversedRound = reversedFactor==-1 ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor (normal) and ceil (reversed) rounding of currentIntervalStartKey
    double currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(int(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)+reversedRound));
    double keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); // interval of one pixel on screen when mapped to plot key coordinates
    bool keyEpsilonVariable = keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs to be updated after every interval (for log axes)
    int intervalDataCount = 1;
    // advance iterator to second (non-skipped) data point because adaptive sampling works in 1 point retrospect:
    if (!doScatterSkip)
      ++it;
    else
    {
      itIndex += scatterModulo;
      if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end
        it += scatterModulo;
      else
      {
        it = end;
        itIndex = endIndex;
      }
    }
    // main loop over data points:
    while (it != end)
    {
      if (it->key < currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon) // data point is still within same pixel, so skip it and expand value span of this pixel if necessary
      {
        if (it->value < minValue && it->value > valueMinRange && it->value < valueMaxRange)
        {
          minValue = it->value;
          minValueIt = it;
        } else if (it->value > maxValue && it->value > valueMinRange && it->value < valueMaxRange)
        {
          maxValue = it->value;
          maxValueIt = it;
        }
        ++intervalDataCount;
      } else // new pixel started
      {
        if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them
        {
          // determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to maintain certain vertical data density (this is specific to scatter plot):
          double valuePixelSpan = qAbs(valueAxis->coordToPixel(minValue)-valueAxis->coordToPixel(maxValue));
          int dataModulo = qMax(1, qRound(intervalDataCount/(valuePixelSpan/4.0))); // approximately every 4 value pixels one data point on average
          QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart;
          int c = 0;
          while (intervalIt != it)
          {
            if ((c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt) && intervalIt->value > valueMinRange && intervalIt->value < valueMaxRange)
              scatterData->append(*intervalIt);
            ++c;
            if (!doScatterSkip)
              ++intervalIt;
            else
              intervalIt += scatterModulo; // since we know indices of "currentIntervalStart", "intervalIt" and "it" are multiples of scatterModulo, we can't accidentally jump over "it" here
          }
        } else if (currentIntervalStart->value > valueMinRange && currentIntervalStart->value < valueMaxRange)
          scatterData->append(*currentIntervalStart);
        minValue = it->value;
        maxValue = it->value;
        currentIntervalStart = it;
        currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(int(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key)+reversedRound));
        if (keyEpsilonVariable)
          keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor));
        intervalDataCount = 1;
      }
      // advance to next data point:
      if (!doScatterSkip)
        ++it;
      else
      {
        itIndex += scatterModulo;
        if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end
          it += scatterModulo;
        else
        {
          it = end;
          itIndex = endIndex;
        }
      }
    }
    // handle last interval:
    if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them
    {
      // determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to maintain certain vertical data density (this is specific to scatter plot):
      double valuePixelSpan = qAbs(valueAxis->coordToPixel(minValue)-valueAxis->coordToPixel(maxValue));
      int dataModulo = qMax(1, qRound(intervalDataCount/(valuePixelSpan/4.0))); // approximately every 4 value pixels one data point on average
      QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart;
      int intervalItIndex = int(intervalIt-mDataContainer->constBegin());
      int c = 0;
      while (intervalIt != it)
      {
        if ((c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt) && intervalIt->value > valueMinRange && intervalIt->value < valueMaxRange)
          scatterData->append(*intervalIt);
        ++c;
        if (!doScatterSkip)
          ++intervalIt;
        else // here we can't guarantee that adding scatterModulo doesn't exceed "it" (because "it" is equal to "end" here, and "end" isn't scatterModulo-aligned), so check via index comparison:
        {
          intervalItIndex += scatterModulo;
          if (intervalItIndex < itIndex)
            intervalIt += scatterModulo;
          else
          {
            intervalIt = it;
            intervalItIndex = itIndex;
          }
        }
      }
    } else if (currentIntervalStart->value > valueMinRange && currentIntervalStart->value < valueMaxRange)
      scatterData->append(*currentIntervalStart);
    
  } else // don't use adaptive sampling algorithm, transfer points one-to-one from the data container into the output
  {
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
    int itIndex = beginIndex;
    scatterData->reserve(dataCount);
    while (it != end)
    {
      scatterData->append(*it);
      // advance to next data point:
      if (!doScatterSkip)
        ++it;
      else
      {
        itIndex += scatterModulo;
        if (itIndex < endIndex)
          it += scatterModulo;
        else
        {
          it = end;
          itIndex = endIndex;
        }
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  This method outputs the currently visible data range via \a begin and \a end. The returned range
  will also never exceed \a rangeRestriction.
 
  This method takes into account that the drawing of data lines at the axis rect border always
  requires the points just outside the visible axis range. So \a begin and \a end may actually
  indicate a range that contains one additional data point to the left and right of the visible
  axis range.
*/
void QCPGraph::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const
{
  if (rangeRestriction.isEmpty())
  {
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    begin = end;
  } else
  {
    QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
    QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
    if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
    // get visible data range:
    begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(keyAxis->range().lower);
    end = mDataContainer->findEnd(keyAxis->range().upper);
    // limit lower/upperEnd to rangeRestriction:
    mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, rangeRestriction); // this also ensures rangeRestriction outside data bounds doesn't break anything
  }
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  This method goes through the passed points in \a lineData and returns a list of the segments
  which don't contain NaN data points.
  
  \a keyOrientation defines whether the \a x or \a y member of the passed QPointF is used to check
  for NaN. If \a keyOrientation is \c Qt::Horizontal, the \a y member is checked, if it is \c
  Qt::Vertical, the \a x member is checked.
  
  \see getOverlappingSegments, drawFill
*/
QVector<QCPDataRange> QCPGraph::getNonNanSegments(const QVector<QPointF> *lineData, Qt::Orientation keyOrientation) const
{
  QVector<QCPDataRange> result;
  const int n = lineData->size();
  
  QCPDataRange currentSegment(-1, -1);
  int i = 0;
  
  if (keyOrientation == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    while (i < n)
    {
      while (i < n && qIsNaN(lineData->at(i).y())) // seek next non-NaN data point
        ++i;
      if (i == n)
        break;
      currentSegment.setBegin(i++);
      while (i < n && !qIsNaN(lineData->at(i).y())) // seek next NaN data point or end of data
        ++i;
      currentSegment.setEnd(i++);
      result.append(currentSegment);
    }
  } else // keyOrientation == Qt::Vertical
  {
    while (i < n)
    {
      while (i < n && qIsNaN(lineData->at(i).x())) // seek next non-NaN data point
        ++i;
      if (i == n)
        break;
      currentSegment.setBegin(i++);
      while (i < n && !qIsNaN(lineData->at(i).x())) // seek next NaN data point or end of data
        ++i;
      currentSegment.setEnd(i++);
      result.append(currentSegment);
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  This method takes two segment lists (e.g. created by \ref getNonNanSegments) \a thisSegments and
  \a otherSegments, and their associated point data \a thisData and \a otherData.
 
  It returns all pairs of segments (the first from \a thisSegments, the second from \a
  otherSegments), which overlap in plot coordinates.
  
  This method is useful in the case of a channel fill between two graphs, when only those non-NaN
  segments which actually overlap in their key coordinate shall be considered for drawing a channel
  fill polygon.
  
  It is assumed that the passed segments in \a thisSegments are ordered ascending by index, and
  that the segments don't overlap themselves. The same is assumed for the segments in \a
  otherSegments. This is fulfilled when the segments are obtained via \ref getNonNanSegments.
  
  \see getNonNanSegments, segmentsIntersect, drawFill, getChannelFillPolygon
*/
QVector<QPair<QCPDataRange, QCPDataRange> > QCPGraph::getOverlappingSegments(QVector<QCPDataRange> thisSegments, const QVector<QPointF> *thisData, QVector<QCPDataRange> otherSegments, const QVector<QPointF> *otherData) const
{
  QVector<QPair<QCPDataRange, QCPDataRange> > result;
  if (thisData->isEmpty() || otherData->isEmpty() || thisSegments.isEmpty() || otherSegments.isEmpty())
    return result;
  
  int thisIndex = 0;
  int otherIndex = 0;
  const bool verticalKey = mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical;
  while (thisIndex < thisSegments.size() && otherIndex < otherSegments.size())
  {
    if (thisSegments.at(thisIndex).size() < 2) // segments with fewer than two points won't have a fill anyhow
    {
      ++thisIndex;
      continue;
    }
    if (otherSegments.at(otherIndex).size() < 2) // segments with fewer than two points won't have a fill anyhow
    {
      ++otherIndex;
      continue;
    }
    double thisLower, thisUpper, otherLower, otherUpper;
    if (!verticalKey)
    {
      thisLower = thisData->at(thisSegments.at(thisIndex).begin()).x();
      thisUpper = thisData->at(thisSegments.at(thisIndex).end()-1).x();
      otherLower = otherData->at(otherSegments.at(otherIndex).begin()).x();
      otherUpper = otherData->at(otherSegments.at(otherIndex).end()-1).x();
    } else
    {
      thisLower = thisData->at(thisSegments.at(thisIndex).begin()).y();
      thisUpper = thisData->at(thisSegments.at(thisIndex).end()-1).y();
      otherLower = otherData->at(otherSegments.at(otherIndex).begin()).y();
      otherUpper = otherData->at(otherSegments.at(otherIndex).end()-1).y();
    }
    
    int bPrecedence;
    if (segmentsIntersect(thisLower, thisUpper, otherLower, otherUpper, bPrecedence))
      result.append(QPair<QCPDataRange, QCPDataRange>(thisSegments.at(thisIndex), otherSegments.at(otherIndex)));
    
    if (bPrecedence <= 0) // otherSegment doesn't reach as far as thisSegment, so continue with next otherSegment, keeping current thisSegment
      ++otherIndex;
    else // otherSegment reaches further than thisSegment, so continue with next thisSegment, keeping current otherSegment
      ++thisIndex;
  }
  
  return result;
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  Returns whether the segments defined by the coordinates (aLower, aUpper) and (bLower, bUpper)
  have overlap.
  
  The output parameter \a bPrecedence indicates whether the \a b segment reaches farther than the
  \a a segment or not. If \a bPrecedence returns 1, segment \a b reaches the farthest to higher
  coordinates (i.e. bUpper > aUpper). If it returns -1, segment \a a reaches the farthest. Only if
  both segment's upper bounds are identical, 0 is returned as \a bPrecedence.
  
  It is assumed that the lower bounds always have smaller or equal values than the upper bounds.
  
  \see getOverlappingSegments
*/
bool QCPGraph::segmentsIntersect(double aLower, double aUpper, double bLower, double bUpper, int &bPrecedence) const
{
  bPrecedence = 0;
  if (aLower > bUpper)
  {
    bPrecedence = -1;
    return false;
  } else if (bLower > aUpper)
  {
    bPrecedence = 1;
    return false;
  } else
  {
    if (aUpper > bUpper)
      bPrecedence = -1;
    else if (aUpper < bUpper)
      bPrecedence = 1;
    
    return true;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the point which closes the fill polygon on the zero-value-line parallel to the key axis.
  The logarithmic axis scale case is a bit special, since the zero-value-line in pixel coordinates
  is in positive or negative infinity. So this case is handled separately by just closing the fill
  polygon on the axis which lies in the direction towards the zero value.
 
  \a matchingDataPoint will provide the key (in pixels) of the returned point. Depending on whether
  the key axis of this graph is horizontal or vertical, \a matchingDataPoint will provide the x or
  y value of the returned point, respectively.
*/
QPointF QCPGraph::getFillBasePoint(QPointF matchingDataPoint) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return {}; }
  
  QPointF result;
  if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear)
  {
    if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    {
      result.setX(matchingDataPoint.x());
      result.setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0));
    } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
    {
      result.setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0));
      result.setY(matchingDataPoint.y());
    }
  } else // valueAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic
  {
    // In logarithmic scaling we can't just draw to value 0 so we just fill all the way
    // to the axis which is in the direction towards 0
    if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
    {
      if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) ||
          (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis
        result.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->right());
      else
        result.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->left());
      result.setY(matchingDataPoint.y());
    } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop || keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom)
    {
      result.setX(matchingDataPoint.x());
      if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) ||
          (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis
        result.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->top());
      else
        result.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->bottom());
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the polygon needed for drawing normal fills between this graph and the key axis.
  
  Pass the graph's data points (in pixel coordinates) as \a lineData, and specify the \a segment
  which shall be used for the fill. The collection of \a lineData points described by \a segment
  must not contain NaN data points (see \ref getNonNanSegments).
  
  The returned fill polygon will be closed at the key axis (the zero-value line) for linear value
  axes. For logarithmic value axes the polygon will reach just beyond the corresponding axis rect
  side (see \ref getFillBasePoint).
 
  For increased performance (due to implicit sharing), keep the returned QPolygonF const.
  
  \see drawFill, getNonNanSegments
*/
const QPolygonF QCPGraph::getFillPolygon(const QVector<QPointF> *lineData, QCPDataRange segment) const
{
  if (segment.size() < 2)
    return QPolygonF();
  QPolygonF result(segment.size()+2);
  
  result[0] = getFillBasePoint(lineData->at(segment.begin()));
  std::copy(lineData->constBegin()+segment.begin(), lineData->constBegin()+segment.end(), result.begin()+1);
  result[result.size()-1] = getFillBasePoint(lineData->at(segment.end()-1));
  
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the polygon needed for drawing (partial) channel fills between this graph and the graph
  specified by \ref setChannelFillGraph.
  
  The data points of this graph are passed as pixel coordinates via \a thisData, the data of the
  other graph as \a otherData. The returned polygon will be calculated for the specified data
  segments \a thisSegment and \a otherSegment, pertaining to the respective \a thisData and \a
  otherData, respectively.
  
  The passed \a thisSegment and \a otherSegment should correspond to the segment pairs returned by
  \ref getOverlappingSegments, to make sure only segments that actually have key coordinate overlap
  need to be processed here.
  
  For increased performance due to implicit sharing, keep the returned QPolygonF const.
  
  \see drawFill, getOverlappingSegments, getNonNanSegments
*/
const QPolygonF QCPGraph::getChannelFillPolygon(const QVector<QPointF> *thisData, QCPDataRange thisSegment, const QVector<QPointF> *otherData, QCPDataRange otherSegment) const
{
  if (!mChannelFillGraph)
    return QPolygonF();
  
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPolygonF(); }
  if (!mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "channel fill target key axis invalid"; return QPolygonF(); }
  
  if (mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() != keyAxis->orientation())
    return QPolygonF(); // don't have same axis orientation, can't fill that (Note: if keyAxis fits, valueAxis will fit too, because it's always orthogonal to keyAxis)
  
  if (thisData->isEmpty()) return QPolygonF();
  QVector<QPointF> thisSegmentData(thisSegment.size());
  QVector<QPointF> otherSegmentData(otherSegment.size());
  std::copy(thisData->constBegin()+thisSegment.begin(), thisData->constBegin()+thisSegment.end(), thisSegmentData.begin());
  std::copy(otherData->constBegin()+otherSegment.begin(), otherData->constBegin()+otherSegment.end(), otherSegmentData.begin());
  // pointers to be able to swap them, depending which data range needs cropping:
  QVector<QPointF> *staticData = &thisSegmentData;
  QVector<QPointF> *croppedData = &otherSegmentData;
  
  // crop both vectors to ranges in which the keys overlap (which coord is key, depends on axisType):
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    // x is key
    // crop lower bound:
    if (staticData->first().x() < croppedData->first().x()) // other one must be cropped
      qSwap(staticData, croppedData);
    const int lowBound = findIndexBelowX(croppedData, staticData->first().x());
    if (lowBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
    croppedData->remove(0, lowBound);
    // set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first static data point via linear interpolation:
    if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
    double slope;
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(croppedData->at(1).x(), croppedData->at(0).x()))
      slope = (croppedData->at(1).y()-croppedData->at(0).y())/(croppedData->at(1).x()-croppedData->at(0).x());
    else
      slope = 0;
    (*croppedData)[0].setY(croppedData->at(0).y()+slope*(staticData->first().x()-croppedData->at(0).x()));
    (*croppedData)[0].setX(staticData->first().x());
    
    // crop upper bound:
    if (staticData->last().x() > croppedData->last().x()) // other one must be cropped
      qSwap(staticData, croppedData);
    int highBound = findIndexAboveX(croppedData, staticData->last().x());
    if (highBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
    croppedData->remove(highBound+1, croppedData->size()-(highBound+1));
    // set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last static data point via linear interpolation:
    if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
    const int li = croppedData->size()-1; // last index
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(croppedData->at(li).x(), croppedData->at(li-1).x()))
      slope = (croppedData->at(li).y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y())/(croppedData->at(li).x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x());
    else
      slope = 0;
    (*croppedData)[li].setY(croppedData->at(li-1).y()+slope*(staticData->last().x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x()));
    (*croppedData)[li].setX(staticData->last().x());
  } else // mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    // y is key
    // crop lower bound:
    if (staticData->first().y() < croppedData->first().y()) // other one must be cropped
      qSwap(staticData, croppedData);
    int lowBound = findIndexBelowY(croppedData, staticData->first().y());
    if (lowBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
    croppedData->remove(0, lowBound);
    // set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first static data point via linear interpolation:
    if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
    double slope;
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(croppedData->at(1).y(), croppedData->at(0).y())) // avoid division by zero in step plots
      slope = (croppedData->at(1).x()-croppedData->at(0).x())/(croppedData->at(1).y()-croppedData->at(0).y());
    else
      slope = 0;
    (*croppedData)[0].setX(croppedData->at(0).x()+slope*(staticData->first().y()-croppedData->at(0).y()));
    (*croppedData)[0].setY(staticData->first().y());
    
    // crop upper bound:
    if (staticData->last().y() > croppedData->last().y()) // other one must be cropped
      qSwap(staticData, croppedData);
    int highBound = findIndexAboveY(croppedData, staticData->last().y());
    if (highBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
    croppedData->remove(highBound+1, croppedData->size()-(highBound+1));
    // set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last static data point via linear interpolation:
    if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
    int li = croppedData->size()-1; // last index
    if (!qFuzzyCompare(croppedData->at(li).y(), croppedData->at(li-1).y())) // avoid division by zero in step plots
      slope = (croppedData->at(li).x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x())/(croppedData->at(li).y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y());
    else
      slope = 0;
    (*croppedData)[li].setX(croppedData->at(li-1).x()+slope*(staticData->last().y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y()));
    (*croppedData)[li].setY(staticData->last().y());
  }
  
  // return joined:
  for (int i=otherSegmentData.size()-1; i>=0; --i) // insert reversed, otherwise the polygon will be twisted
    thisSegmentData << otherSegmentData.at(i);
  return QPolygonF(thisSegmentData);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points x value is just above \a x. Assumes x values in
  \a data points are ordered ascending, as is ensured by \ref getLines/\ref getScatters if the key
  axis is horizontal.
 
  Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveX(const QVector<QPointF> *data, double x) const
{
  for (int i=data->size()-1; i>=0; --i)
  {
    if (data->at(i).x() < x)
    {
      if (i<data->size()-1)
        return i+1;
      else
        return data->size()-1;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Finds the highest index of \a data, whose points x value is just below \a x. Assumes x values in
  \a data points are ordered ascending, as is ensured by \ref getLines/\ref getScatters if the key
  axis is horizontal.
  
  Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexBelowX(const QVector<QPointF> *data, double x) const
{
  for (int i=0; i<data->size(); ++i)
  {
    if (data->at(i).x() > x)
    {
      if (i>0)
        return i-1;
      else
        return 0;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points y value is just above \a y. Assumes y values in
  \a data points are ordered ascending, as is ensured by \ref getLines/\ref getScatters if the key
  axis is vertical.
  
  Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveY(const QVector<QPointF> *data, double y) const
{
  for (int i=data->size()-1; i>=0; --i)
  {
    if (data->at(i).y() < y)
    {
      if (i<data->size()-1)
        return i+1;
      else
        return data->size()-1;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Calculates the minimum distance in pixels the graph's representation has from the given \a
  pixelPoint. This is used to determine whether the graph was clicked or not, e.g. in \ref
  selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData. Note that if
  the graph has a line representation, the returned distance may be smaller than the distance to
  the \a closestData point, since the distance to the graph line is also taken into account.
  
  If either the graph has no data or if the line style is \ref lsNone and the scatter style's shape
  is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone (i.e. there is no visual representation of the graph), returns -1.0.
*/
double QCPGraph::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const
{
  closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1.0;
  if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone())
    return -1.0;
  
  // calculate minimum distances to graph data points and find closestData iterator:
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  // determine which key range comes into question, taking selection tolerance around pos into account:
  double posKeyMin, posKeyMax, dummy;
  pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint-QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMin, dummy);
  pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint+QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMax, dummy);
  if (posKeyMin > posKeyMax)
    qSwap(posKeyMin, posKeyMax);
  // iterate over found data points and then choose the one with the shortest distance to pos:
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(posKeyMin, true);
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->findEnd(posKeyMax, true);
  for (QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
  {
    const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)-pixelPoint).lengthSquared();
    if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
    {
      minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
      closestData = it;
    }
  }
    
  // calculate distance to graph line if there is one (if so, will probably be smaller than distance to closest data point):
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    // line displayed, calculate distance to line segments:
    QVector<QPointF> lineData;
    getLines(&lineData, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())); // don't limit data range further since with sharp data spikes, line segments may be closer to test point than segments with closer key coordinate
    QCPVector2D p(pixelPoint);
    const int step = mLineStyle==lsImpulse ? 2 : 1; // impulse plot differs from other line styles in that the lineData points are only pairwise connected
    for (int i=0; i<lineData.size()-1; i+=step)
    {
      const double currentDistSqr = p.distanceSquaredToLine(lineData.at(i), lineData.at(i+1));
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
    }
  }
  
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Finds the highest index of \a data, whose points y value is just below \a y. Assumes y values in
  \a data points are ordered ascending, as is ensured by \ref getLines/\ref getScatters if the key
  axis is vertical.
 
  Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexBelowY(const QVector<QPointF> *data, double y) const
{
  for (int i=0; i<data->size(); ++i)
  {
    if (data->at(i).y() > y)
    {
      if (i>0)
        return i-1;
      else
        return 0;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-curve.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 63851            */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPCurveData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPCurveData
  \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPCurve.
  
  The stored data is:
  \li \a t: the free ordering parameter of this curve point, like in the mathematical vector <em>(x(t), y(t))</em>. (This is the \a sortKey)
  \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this curve point (this is the \a mainKey)
  \li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this curve point (this is the \a mainValue)
  
  The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPCurveDataContainer. It is a typedef for
  \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPCurveData as the DataType template parameter. See the
  documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods.
  
  \see QCPCurveDataContainer
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::sortKey() const
  
  Returns the \a t member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static QCPCurveData QCPCurveData::fromSortKey(double sortKey)
  
  Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey (assigned to the data point's \a t member).
  All other members are set to zero.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static static bool QCPCurveData::sortKeyIsMainKey()
  
  Since the member \a key is the data point key coordinate and the member \a t is the data ordering
  parameter, this method returns false.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::mainKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::mainValue() const
  
  Returns the \a value member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPCurveData::valueRange() const
  
  Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a curve data point with t, key and value set to zero.
*/
QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData() :
  t(0),
  key(0),
  value(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a curve data point with the specified \a t, \a key and \a value.
*/
QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData(double t, double key, double value) :
  t(t),
  key(key),
  value(value)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPCurve
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPCurve
  \brief A plottable representing a parametric curve in a plot.
  
  \image html QCPCurve.png
  
  Unlike QCPGraph, plottables of this type may have multiple points with the same key coordinate,
  so their visual representation can have \a loops. This is realized by introducing a third
  coordinate \a t, which defines the order of the points described by the other two coordinates \a
  x and \a y.
 
  To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can
  also access and modify the curve's data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the
  internal \ref QCPCurveDataContainer.
  
  Gaps in the curve can be created by adding data points with NaN as key and value
  (<tt>qQNaN()</tt> or <tt>std::numeric_limits<double>::quiet_NaN()</tt>) in between the two data points that shall be
  separated.
  
  \section qcpcurve-appearance Changing the appearance
  
  The appearance of the curve is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref setPen, \ref setBrush).
  
  \section qcpcurve-usage Usage
  
  Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPCurve is a plottable
  (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
  (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
  
  Usually, you first create an instance:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-creation-1
  which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
  The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-creation-2
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPCurveDataContainer> QCPCurve::data() const
  
  Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPCurveDataContainer. You may
  use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the
  regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a curve which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value
  axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have
  the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is
  printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  The created QCPCurve is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a
  keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPCurve, so do not delete it manually
  but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPCurve::QCPCurve(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D<QCPCurveData>(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mScatterSkip{},
  mLineStyle{}
{
  // modify inherited properties from abstract plottable:
  setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 0));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  
  setScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle());
  setLineStyle(lsLine);
  setScatterSkip(0);
}
 
QCPCurve::~QCPCurve()
{
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPCurves may share the same data container safely.
  Modifying the data in the container will then affect all curves that share the container. Sharing
  can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the curve's data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPCurve::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPCurveDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a t, \a keys and \a values. The provided
  vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the
  smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a t in ascending order, you can
  set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPCurve::setData(const QVector<double> &t, const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(t, keys, values, alreadySorted);
}
 
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided vectors
  should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest
  vector.
  
  The t parameter of each data point will be set to the integer index of the respective key/value
  pair.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPCurve::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, values);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref
  QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points are drawn (e.g. for line-only plots with appropriate
  line style).
  
  \see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle
*/
void QCPCurve::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style)
{
  mScatterStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  If scatters are displayed (scatter style not \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone), \a skip number of
  scatter points are skipped/not drawn after every drawn scatter point.
 
  This can be used to make the data appear sparser while for example still having a smooth line,
  and to improve performance for very high density plots.
 
  If \a skip is set to 0 (default), all scatter points are drawn.
 
  \see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPCurve::setScatterSkip(int skip)
{
  mScatterSkip = qMax(0, skip);
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot or how they are represented visually
  apart from the scatter symbol. For scatter-only plots, set \a style to \ref lsNone and \ref
  setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style.
  
  \see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPCurve::setLineStyle(QCPCurve::LineStyle style)
{
  mLineStyle = style;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided points in \a t, \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors
  should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest
  vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPCurve::addData(const QVector<double> &t, const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (t.size() != keys.size() || t.size() != values.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "ts, keys and values have different sizes:" << t.size() << keys.size() << values.size();
  const int n = qMin(qMin(t.size(), keys.size()), values.size());
  QVector<QCPCurveData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPCurveData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPCurveData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->t = t[i];
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->value = values[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors
  should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest
  vector.
  
  The t parameter of each data point will be set to the integer index of the respective key/value
  pair.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPCurve::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values)
{
  if (keys.size() != values.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size());
  double tStart;
  if (!mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    tStart = (mDataContainer->constEnd()-1)->t + 1.0;
  else
    tStart = 0;
  QVector<QCPCurveData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPCurveData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPCurveData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->t = tStart + i;
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->value = values[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, true); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  Adds the provided data point as \a t, \a key and \a value to the current data.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPCurve::addData(double t, double key, double value)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData(t, key, value));
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data.
  
  The t parameter is generated automatically by increments of 1 for each point, starting at the
  highest t of previously existing data or 0, if the curve data is empty.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPCurve::addData(double key, double value)
{
  if (!mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData((mDataContainer->constEnd()-1)->t + 1.0, key, value));
  else
    mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData(0.0, key, value));
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPCurve::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint);
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = int( closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin() );
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return result;
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPCurve::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  return mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPCurve::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPCurve::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  
  // allocate line vector:
  QVector<QPointF> lines, scatters;
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    
    // fill with curve data:
    QPen finalCurvePen = mPen; // determine the final pen already here, because the line optimization depends on its stroke width
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      finalCurvePen = mSelectionDecorator->pen();
    
    QCPDataRange lineDataRange = isSelectedSegment ? allSegments.at(i) : allSegments.at(i).adjusted(-1, 1); // unselected segments extend lines to bordering selected data point (safe to exceed total data bounds in first/last segment, getCurveLines takes care)
    getCurveLines(&lines, lineDataRange, finalCurvePen.widthF());
    
    // check data validity if flag set:
  #ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
    for (QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it)
    {
      if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->t) ||
          QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value))
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
    }
  #endif
    
    // draw curve fill:
    applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
    else
      painter->setBrush(mBrush);
    painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen);
    if (painter->brush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && painter->brush().color().alpha() != 0)
      painter->drawPolygon(QPolygonF(lines));
    
    // draw curve line:
    if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
    {
      painter->setPen(finalCurvePen);
      painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
      drawCurveLine(painter, lines);
    }
    
    // draw scatters:
    QCPScatterStyle finalScatterStyle = mScatterStyle;
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      finalScatterStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mScatterStyle);
    if (!finalScatterStyle.isNone())
    {
      getScatters(&scatters, allSegments.at(i), finalScatterStyle.size());
      drawScatterPlot(painter, scatters, finalScatterStyle);
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPCurve::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  // draw fill:
  if (mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush)
  {
    applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->fillRect(QRectF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.width(), rect.height()/3.0), mBrush);
  }
  // draw line vertically centered:
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.right()+5, rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0)); // +5 on x2 else last segment is missing from dashed/dotted pens
  }
  // draw scatter symbol:
  if (!mScatterStyle.isNone())
  {
    applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
    // scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect:
    if (mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap && (mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() || mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height()))
    {
      QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle(mScatterStyle);
      scaledStyle.setPixmap(scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::SmoothTransformation));
      scaledStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      scaledStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    } else
    {
      mScatterStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      mScatterStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    }
  }
}
 
/*!  \internal
 
  Draws lines between the points in \a lines, given in pixel coordinates.
 
  \see drawScatterPlot, getCurveLines
*/
void QCPCurve::drawCurveLine(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &lines) const
{
  if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    drawPolyline(painter, lines);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws scatter symbols at every point passed in \a points, given in pixel coordinates. The
  scatters will be drawn with \a painter and have the appearance as specified in \a style.
 
  \see drawCurveLine, getCurveLines
*/
void QCPCurve::drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &points, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const
{
  // draw scatter point symbols:
  applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
  style.applyTo(painter, mPen);
  foreach (const QPointF &point, points)
    if (!qIsNaN(point.x()) && !qIsNaN(point.y()))
      style.drawShape(painter,  point);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Called by \ref draw to generate points in pixel coordinates which represent the line of the
  curve.
 
  Line segments that aren't visible in the current axis rect are handled in an optimized way. They
  are projected onto a rectangle slightly larger than the visible axis rect and simplified
  regarding point count. The algorithm makes sure to preserve appearance of lines and fills inside
  the visible axis rect by generating new temporary points on the outer rect if necessary.
 
  \a lines will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with \ref
  drawCurveLine.
 
  \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for
  conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm:
  a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this
  function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref
  getDataSegments.
 
  \a penWidth specifies the pen width that will be used to later draw the lines generated by this
  function. This is needed here to calculate an accordingly wider margin around the axis rect when
  performing the line optimization.
 
  Methods that are also involved in the algorithm are: \ref getRegion, \ref getOptimizedPoint, \ref
  getOptimizedCornerPoints \ref mayTraverse, \ref getTraverse, \ref getTraverseCornerPoints.
 
  \see drawCurveLine, drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPCurve::getCurveLines(QVector<QPointF> *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double penWidth) const
{
  if (!lines) return;
  lines->clear();
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  // add margins to rect to compensate for stroke width
  const double strokeMargin = qMax(qreal(1.0), qreal(penWidth*0.75)); // stroke radius + 50% safety
  const double keyMin = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyAxis->range().lower)-strokeMargin*keyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  const double keyMax = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyAxis->range().upper)+strokeMargin*keyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  const double valueMin = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueAxis->range().lower)-strokeMargin*valueAxis->pixelOrientation());
  const double valueMax = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueAxis->range().upper)+strokeMargin*valueAxis->pixelOrientation());
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(itBegin, itEnd, dataRange);
  if (itBegin == itEnd)
    return;
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin;
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator prevIt = itEnd-1;
  int prevRegion = getRegion(prevIt->key, prevIt->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin);
  QVector<QPointF> trailingPoints; // points that must be applied after all other points (are generated only when handling first point to get virtual segment between last and first point right)
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    const int currentRegion = getRegion(it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin);
    if (currentRegion != prevRegion) // changed region, possibly need to add some optimized edge points or original points if entering R
    {
      if (currentRegion != 5) // segment doesn't end in R, so it's a candidate for removal
      {
        QPointF crossA, crossB;
        if (prevRegion == 5) // we're coming from R, so add this point optimized
        {
          lines->append(getOptimizedPoint(currentRegion, it->key, it->value, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin));
          // in the situations 5->1/7/9/3 the segment may leave R and directly cross through two outer regions. In these cases we need to add an additional corner point
          *lines << getOptimizedCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin);
        } else if (mayTraverse(prevRegion, currentRegion) &&
                   getTraverse(prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin, crossA, crossB))
        {
          // add the two cross points optimized if segment crosses R and if segment isn't virtual zeroth segment between last and first curve point:
          QVector<QPointF> beforeTraverseCornerPoints, afterTraverseCornerPoints;
          getTraverseCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin, beforeTraverseCornerPoints, afterTraverseCornerPoints);
          if (it != itBegin)
          {
            *lines << beforeTraverseCornerPoints;
            lines->append(crossA);
            lines->append(crossB);
            *lines << afterTraverseCornerPoints;
          } else
          {
            lines->append(crossB);
            *lines << afterTraverseCornerPoints;
            trailingPoints << beforeTraverseCornerPoints << crossA ;
          }
        } else // doesn't cross R, line is just moving around in outside regions, so only need to add optimized point(s) at the boundary corner(s)
        {
          *lines << getOptimizedCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin);
        }
      } else // segment does end in R, so we add previous point optimized and this point at original position
      {
        if (it == itBegin) // it is first point in curve and prevIt is last one. So save optimized point for adding it to the lineData in the end
          trailingPoints << getOptimizedPoint(prevRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin);
        else
          lines->append(getOptimizedPoint(prevRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin));
        lines->append(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value));
      }
    } else // region didn't change
    {
      if (currentRegion == 5) // still in R, keep adding original points
      {
        lines->append(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value));
      } else // still outside R, no need to add anything
      {
        // see how this is not doing anything? That's the main optimization...
      }
    }
    prevIt = it;
    prevRegion = currentRegion;
    ++it;
  }
  *lines << trailingPoints;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Called by \ref draw to generate points in pixel coordinates which represent the scatters of the
  curve. If a scatter skip is configured (\ref setScatterSkip), the returned points are accordingly
  sparser.
 
  Scatters that aren't visible in the current axis rect are optimized away.
 
  \a scatters will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with \ref
  drawScatterPlot.
 
  \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for
  conversion.
 
  \a scatterWidth specifies the scatter width that will be used to later draw the scatters at pixel
  coordinates generated by this function. This is needed here to calculate an accordingly wider
  margin around the axis rect when performing the data point reduction.
 
  \see draw, drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPCurve::getScatters(QVector<QPointF> *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double scatterWidth) const
{
  if (!scatters) return;
  scatters->clear();
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, dataRange);
  if (begin == end)
    return;
  const int scatterModulo = mScatterSkip+1;
  const bool doScatterSkip = mScatterSkip > 0;
  int endIndex = int( end-mDataContainer->constBegin() );
  
  QCPRange keyRange = keyAxis->range();
  QCPRange valueRange = valueAxis->range();
  // extend range to include width of scatter symbols:
  keyRange.lower = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyRange.lower)-scatterWidth*keyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  keyRange.upper = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyRange.upper)+scatterWidth*keyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  valueRange.lower = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueRange.lower)-scatterWidth*valueAxis->pixelOrientation());
  valueRange.upper = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueRange.upper)+scatterWidth*valueAxis->pixelOrientation());
  
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
  int itIndex = int( begin-mDataContainer->constBegin() );
  while (doScatterSkip && it != end && itIndex % scatterModulo != 0) // advance begin iterator to first non-skipped scatter
  {
    ++itIndex;
    ++it;
  }
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    while (it != end)
    {
      if (!qIsNaN(it->value) && keyRange.contains(it->key) && valueRange.contains(it->value))
        scatters->append(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->value), keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key)));
      
      // advance iterator to next (non-skipped) data point:
      if (!doScatterSkip)
        ++it;
      else
      {
        itIndex += scatterModulo;
        if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end
          it += scatterModulo;
        else
        {
          it = end;
          itIndex = endIndex;
        }
      }
    }
  } else
  {
    while (it != end)
    {
      if (!qIsNaN(it->value) && keyRange.contains(it->key) && valueRange.contains(it->value))
        scatters->append(QPointF(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key), valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->value)));
      
      // advance iterator to next (non-skipped) data point:
      if (!doScatterSkip)
        ++it;
      else
      {
        itIndex += scatterModulo;
        if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end
          it += scatterModulo;
        else
        {
          it = end;
          itIndex = endIndex;
        }
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
 
  It returns the region of the given point (\a key, \a value) with respect to a rectangle defined
  by \a keyMin, \a keyMax, \a valueMin, and \a valueMax.
 
  The regions are enumerated from top to bottom (\a valueMin to \a valueMax) and left to right (\a
  keyMin to \a keyMax):
 
  <table style="width:10em; text-align:center">
    <tr><td>1</td><td>4</td><td>7</td></tr>
    <tr><td>2</td><td style="border:1px solid black">5</td><td>8</td></tr>
    <tr><td>3</td><td>6</td><td>9</td></tr>
  </table>
 
  With the rectangle being region 5, and the outer regions extending infinitely outwards. In the
  curve optimization algorithm, region 5 is considered to be the visible portion of the plot.
*/
int QCPCurve::getRegion(double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const
{
  if (key < keyMin) // region 123
  {
    if (value > valueMax)
      return 1;
    else if (value < valueMin)
      return 3;
    else
      return 2;
  } else if (key > keyMax) // region 789
  {
    if (value > valueMax)
      return 7;
    else if (value < valueMin)
      return 9;
    else
      return 8;
  } else // region 456
  {
    if (value > valueMax)
      return 4;
    else if (value < valueMin)
      return 6;
    else
      return 5;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
  
  This method is used in case the current segment passes from inside the visible rect (region 5,
  see \ref getRegion) to any of the outer regions (\a otherRegion). The current segment is given by
  the line connecting (\a key, \a value) with (\a otherKey, \a otherValue).
  
  It returns the intersection point of the segment with the border of region 5.
  
  For this function it doesn't matter whether (\a key, \a value) is the point inside region 5 or
  whether it's (\a otherKey, \a otherValue), i.e. whether the segment is coming from region 5 or
  leaving it. It is important though that \a otherRegion correctly identifies the other region not
  equal to 5.
*/
QPointF QCPCurve::getOptimizedPoint(int otherRegion, double otherKey, double otherValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const
{
  // The intersection point interpolation here is done in pixel coordinates, so we don't need to
  // differentiate between different axis scale types. Note that the nomenclature
  // top/left/bottom/right/min/max is with respect to the rect in plot coordinates, wich may be
  // different in pixel coordinates (horz/vert key axes, reversed ranges)
  
  const double keyMinPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(keyMin);
  const double keyMaxPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(keyMax);
  const double valueMinPx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(valueMin);
  const double valueMaxPx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(valueMax);
  const double otherValuePx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(otherValue);
  const double valuePx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(value);
  const double otherKeyPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(otherKey);
  const double keyPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(key);
  double intersectKeyPx = keyMinPx; // initial key just a fail-safe
  double intersectValuePx = valueMinPx; // initial value just a fail-safe
  switch (otherRegion)
  {
    case 1: // top and left edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMaxPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      if (intersectKeyPx < qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) || intersectKeyPx > qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // check whether top edge is not intersected, then it must be left edge (qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed)
      {
        intersectKeyPx = keyMinPx;
        intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      }
      break;
    }
    case 2: // left edge
    {
      intersectKeyPx = keyMinPx;
      intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      break;
    }
    case 3: // bottom and left edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMinPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      if (intersectKeyPx < qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) || intersectKeyPx > qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // check whether bottom edge is not intersected, then it must be left edge (qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed)
      {
        intersectKeyPx = keyMinPx;
        intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      }
      break;
    }
    case 4: // top edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMaxPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      break;
    }
    case 5:
    {
      break; // case 5 shouldn't happen for this function but we add it anyway to prevent potential discontinuity in branch table
    }
    case 6: // bottom edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMinPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      break;
    }
    case 7: // top and right edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMaxPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      if (intersectKeyPx < qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) || intersectKeyPx > qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // check whether top edge is not intersected, then it must be right edge (qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed)
      {
        intersectKeyPx = keyMaxPx;
        intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      }
      break;
    }
    case 8: // right edge
    {
      intersectKeyPx = keyMaxPx;
      intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      break;
    }
    case 9: // bottom and right edge
    {
      intersectValuePx = valueMinPx;
      intersectKeyPx = otherKeyPx + (keyPx-otherKeyPx)/(valuePx-otherValuePx)*(intersectValuePx-otherValuePx);
      if (intersectKeyPx < qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) || intersectKeyPx > qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // check whether bottom edge is not intersected, then it must be right edge (qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed)
      {
        intersectKeyPx = keyMaxPx;
        intersectValuePx = otherValuePx + (valuePx-otherValuePx)/(keyPx-otherKeyPx)*(intersectKeyPx-otherKeyPx);
      }
      break;
    }
  }
  if (mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    return {intersectKeyPx, intersectValuePx};
  else
    return {intersectValuePx, intersectKeyPx};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
  
  In situations where a single segment skips over multiple regions it might become necessary to add
  extra points at the corners of region 5 (see \ref getRegion) such that the optimized segment
  doesn't unintentionally cut through the visible area of the axis rect and create plot artifacts.
  This method provides these points that must be added, assuming the original segment doesn't
  start, end, or traverse region 5. (Corner points where region 5 is traversed are calculated by
  \ref getTraverseCornerPoints.)
  
  For example, consider a segment which directly goes from region 4 to 2 but originally is far out
  to the top left such that it doesn't cross region 5. Naively optimizing these points by
  projecting them on the top and left borders of region 5 will create a segment that surely crosses
  5, creating a visual artifact in the plot. This method prevents this by providing extra points at
  the top left corner, making the optimized curve correctly pass from region 4 to 1 to 2 without
  traversing 5.
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPCurve::getOptimizedCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  switch (prevRegion)
  {
    case 1:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 9: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points
          if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMin-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); }
          else
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); }
          break;
        }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 2:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 3:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 7: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points
          if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMax-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); }
          else
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); }
          break;
        }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 4:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 5:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 6:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 7:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 3: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points
          if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMax-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); }
          else
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); }
          break;
        }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 8:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 9:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; }
        case 1: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points
          if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMin-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); }
          else
          { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); }
          break;
        }
      }
      break;
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
  
  This method returns whether a segment going from \a prevRegion to \a currentRegion (see \ref
  getRegion) may traverse the visible region 5. This function assumes that neither \a prevRegion
  nor \a currentRegion is 5 itself.
  
  If this method returns false, the segment for sure doesn't pass region 5. If it returns true, the
  segment may or may not pass region 5 and a more fine-grained calculation must be used (\ref
  getTraverse).
*/
bool QCPCurve::mayTraverse(int prevRegion, int currentRegion) const
{
  switch (prevRegion)
  {
    case 1:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 4:
        case 7:
        case 2:
        case 3: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 2:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1:
        case 3: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 3:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1:
        case 2:
        case 6:
        case 9: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 4:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1:
        case 7: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 5: return false; // should never occur
    case 6:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 3:
        case 9: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 7:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1:
        case 4:
        case 8:
        case 9: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 8:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 7:
        case 9: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    case 9:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 3:
        case 6:
        case 8:
        case 7: return false;
        default: return true;
      }
    }
    default: return true;
  }
}
 
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
  
  This method assumes that the \ref mayTraverse test has returned true, so there is a chance the
  segment defined by (\a prevKey, \a prevValue) and (\a key, \a value) goes through the visible
  region 5.
  
  The return value of this method indicates whether the segment actually traverses region 5 or not.
  
  If the segment traverses 5, the output parameters \a crossA and \a crossB indicate the entry and
  exit points of region 5. They will become the optimized points for that segment.
*/
bool QCPCurve::getTraverse(double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QPointF &crossA, QPointF &crossB) const
{
  // The intersection point interpolation here is done in pixel coordinates, so we don't need to
  // differentiate between different axis scale types. Note that the nomenclature
  // top/left/bottom/right/min/max is with respect to the rect in plot coordinates, wich may be
  // different in pixel coordinates (horz/vert key axes, reversed ranges)
  
  QList<QPointF> intersections;
  const double valueMinPx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(valueMin);
  const double valueMaxPx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(valueMax);
  const double keyMinPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(keyMin);
  const double keyMaxPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(keyMax);
  const double keyPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(key);
  const double valuePx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(value);
  const double prevKeyPx = mKeyAxis->coordToPixel(prevKey);
  const double prevValuePx = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(prevValue);
  if (qFuzzyIsNull(keyPx-prevKeyPx)) // line is parallel to value axis
  {
    // due to region filter in mayTraverse(), if line is parallel to value or key axis, region 5 is traversed here
    intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyPx, valueMinPx) : QPointF(valueMinPx, keyPx)); // direction will be taken care of at end of method
    intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyPx, valueMaxPx) : QPointF(valueMaxPx, keyPx));
  } else if (qFuzzyIsNull(valuePx-prevValuePx)) // line is parallel to key axis
  {
    // due to region filter in mayTraverse(), if line is parallel to value or key axis, region 5 is traversed here
    intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyMinPx, valuePx) : QPointF(valuePx, keyMinPx)); // direction will be taken care of at end of method
    intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyMaxPx, valuePx) : QPointF(valuePx, keyMaxPx));
  } else // line is skewed
  {
    double gamma;
    double keyPerValuePx = (keyPx-prevKeyPx)/(valuePx-prevValuePx);
    // check top of rect:
    gamma = prevKeyPx + (valueMaxPx-prevValuePx)*keyPerValuePx;
    if (gamma >= qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) && gamma <= qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed
      intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(gamma, valueMaxPx) : QPointF(valueMaxPx, gamma));
    // check bottom of rect:
    gamma = prevKeyPx + (valueMinPx-prevValuePx)*keyPerValuePx;
    if (gamma >= qMin(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx) && gamma <= qMax(keyMinPx, keyMaxPx)) // qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed
      intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(gamma, valueMinPx) : QPointF(valueMinPx, gamma));
    const double valuePerKeyPx = 1.0/keyPerValuePx;
    // check left of rect:
    gamma = prevValuePx + (keyMinPx-prevKeyPx)*valuePerKeyPx;
    if (gamma >= qMin(valueMinPx, valueMaxPx) && gamma <= qMax(valueMinPx, valueMaxPx)) // qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed
      intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyMinPx, gamma) : QPointF(gamma, keyMinPx));
    // check right of rect:
    gamma = prevValuePx + (keyMaxPx-prevKeyPx)*valuePerKeyPx;
    if (gamma >= qMin(valueMinPx, valueMaxPx) && gamma <= qMax(valueMinPx, valueMaxPx)) // qMin/qMax necessary since axes may be reversed
      intersections.append(mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? QPointF(keyMaxPx, gamma) : QPointF(gamma, keyMaxPx));
  }
  
  // handle cases where found points isn't exactly 2:
  if (intersections.size() > 2)
  {
    // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got duplicate points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance in between:
    double distSqrMax = 0;
    QPointF pv1, pv2;
    for (int i=0; i<intersections.size()-1; ++i)
    {
      for (int k=i+1; k<intersections.size(); ++k)
      {
        QPointF distPoint = intersections.at(i)-intersections.at(k);
        double distSqr = distPoint.x()*distPoint.x()+distPoint.y()+distPoint.y();
        if (distSqr > distSqrMax)
        {
          pv1 = intersections.at(i);
          pv2 = intersections.at(k);
          distSqrMax = distSqr;
        }
      }
    }
    intersections = QList<QPointF>() << pv1 << pv2;
  } else if (intersections.size() != 2)
  {
    // one or even zero points found (shouldn't happen unless line perfectly tangent to corner), no need to draw segment
    return false;
  }
  
  // possibly re-sort points so optimized point segment has same direction as original segment:
  double xDelta = keyPx-prevKeyPx;
  double yDelta = valuePx-prevValuePx;
  if (mKeyAxis->orientation() != Qt::Horizontal)
    qSwap(xDelta, yDelta);
  if (xDelta*(intersections.at(1).x()-intersections.at(0).x()) + yDelta*(intersections.at(1).y()-intersections.at(0).y()) < 0) // scalar product of both segments < 0 -> opposite direction
    intersections.move(0, 1);
  crossA = intersections.at(0);
  crossB = intersections.at(1);
  return true;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines.
  
  This method assumes that the \ref getTraverse test has returned true, so the segment definitely
  traverses the visible region 5 when going from \a prevRegion to \a currentRegion.
  
  In certain situations it is not sufficient to merely generate the entry and exit points of the
  segment into/out of region 5, as \ref getTraverse provides. It may happen that a single segment, in
  addition to traversing region 5, skips another region outside of region 5, which makes it
  necessary to add an optimized corner point there (very similar to the job \ref
  getOptimizedCornerPoints does for segments that are completely in outside regions and don't
  traverse 5).
  
  As an example, consider a segment going from region 1 to region 6, traversing the lower left
  corner of region 5. In this configuration, the segment additionally crosses the border between
  region 1 and 2 before entering region 5. This makes it necessary to add an additional point in
  the top left corner, before adding the optimized traverse points. So in this case, the output
  parameter \a beforeTraverse will contain the top left corner point, and \a afterTraverse will be
  empty.
  
  In some cases, such as when going from region 1 to 9, it may even be necessary to add additional
  corner points before and after the traverse. Then both \a beforeTraverse and \a afterTraverse
  return the respective corner points.
*/
void QCPCurve::getTraverseCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QVector<QPointF> &beforeTraverse, QVector<QPointF> &afterTraverse) const
{
  switch (prevRegion)
  {
    case 1:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 6: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 8: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 2:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 7: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 9: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 3:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 4: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 7: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 8: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 4:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 3: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 9: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 5: { break; } // shouldn't happen because this method only handles full traverses
    case 6:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 7: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 7:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 2: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
        case 3: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
        case 6: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 8:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 1: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 3: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
    case 9:
    {
      switch (currentRegion)
      {
        case 2: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
        case 1: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; }
        case 4: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; }
      }
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Calculates the (minimum) distance (in pixels) the curve's representation has from the given \a
  pixelPoint in pixels. This is used to determine whether the curve was clicked or not, e.g. in
  \ref selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData. Note that
  if the curve has a line representation, the returned distance may be smaller than the distance to
  the \a closestData point, since the distance to the curve line is also taken into account.
  
  If either the curve has no data or if the line style is \ref lsNone and the scatter style's shape
  is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone (i.e. there is no visual representation of the curve), returns
  -1.0.
*/
double QCPCurve::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const
{
  closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1.0;
  if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone())
    return -1.0;
  
  if (mDataContainer->size() == 1)
  {
    QPointF dataPoint = coordsToPixels(mDataContainer->constBegin()->key, mDataContainer->constBegin()->value);
    closestData = mDataContainer->constBegin();
    return QCPVector2D(dataPoint-pixelPoint).length();
  }
  
  // calculate minimum distances to curve data points and find closestData iterator:
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  // iterate over found data points and then choose the one with the shortest distance to pos:
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
  QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  for (QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
  {
    const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)-pixelPoint).lengthSquared();
    if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
    {
      minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
      closestData = it;
    }
  }
  
  // calculate distance to line if there is one (if so, will probably be smaller than distance to closest data point):
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    QVector<QPointF> lines;
    getCurveLines(&lines, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*1.2); // optimized lines outside axis rect shouldn't respond to clicks at the edge, so use 1.2*tolerance as pen width
    for (int i=0; i<lines.size()-1; ++i)
    {
      double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pixelPoint).distanceSquaredToLine(lines.at(i), lines.at(i+1));
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
    }
  }
  
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-curve.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-bars.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 43907           */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPBarsGroup
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPBarsGroup
  \brief Groups multiple QCPBars together so they appear side by side
  
  \image html QCPBarsGroup.png
  
  When showing multiple QCPBars in one plot which have bars at identical keys, it may be desirable
  to have them appearing next to each other at each key. This is what adding the respective QCPBars
  plottables to a QCPBarsGroup achieves. (An alternative approach is to stack them on top of each
  other, see \ref QCPBars::moveAbove.)
  
  \section qcpbarsgroup-usage Usage
  
  To add a QCPBars plottable to the group, create a new group and then add the respective bars
  intances:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbarsgroup-creation
  Alternatively to appending to the group like shown above, you can also set the group on the
  QCPBars plottable via \ref QCPBars::setBarsGroup.
  
  The spacing between the bars can be configured via \ref setSpacingType and \ref setSpacing. The
  bars in this group appear in the plot in the order they were appended. To insert a bars plottable
  at a certain index position, or to reposition a bars plottable which is already in the group, use
  \ref insert.
  
  To remove specific bars from the group, use either \ref remove or call \ref
  QCPBars::setBarsGroup "QCPBars::setBarsGroup(0)" on the respective bars plottable.
  
  To clear the entire group, call \ref clear, or simply delete the group.
  
  \section qcpbarsgroup-example Example
  
  The image above is generated with the following code:
  \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp qcpbarsgroup-example
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QList<QCPBars*> QCPBarsGroup::bars() const
  
  Returns all bars currently in this group.
  
  \see bars(int index)
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPBarsGroup::size() const
  
  Returns the number of QCPBars plottables that are part of this group.
  
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPBarsGroup::isEmpty() const
  
  Returns whether this bars group is empty.
  
  \see size
*/
 
/*! \fn bool QCPBarsGroup::contains(QCPBars *bars)
  
  Returns whether the specified \a bars plottable is part of this group.
  
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a new bars group for the specified QCustomPlot instance.
*/
QCPBarsGroup::QCPBarsGroup(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QObject(parentPlot),
  mParentPlot(parentPlot),
  mSpacingType(stAbsolute),
  mSpacing(4)
{
}
 
QCPBarsGroup::~QCPBarsGroup()
{
  clear();
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the spacing between adjacent bars is interpreted. See \ref SpacingType.
  
  The actual spacing can then be specified with \ref setSpacing.
 
  \see setSpacing
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::setSpacingType(SpacingType spacingType)
{
  mSpacingType = spacingType;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the spacing between adjacent bars. What the number passed as \a spacing actually means, is
  defined by the current \ref SpacingType, which can be set with \ref setSpacingType.
 
  \see setSpacingType
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::setSpacing(double spacing)
{
  mSpacing = spacing;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the QCPBars instance with the specified \a index in this group. If no such QCPBars
  exists, returns \c nullptr.
 
  \see bars(), size
*/
QCPBars *QCPBarsGroup::bars(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mBars.size())
  {
    return mBars.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
    return nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Removes all QCPBars plottables from this group.
 
  \see isEmpty
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::clear()
{
  const QList<QCPBars*> oldBars = mBars;
  foreach (QCPBars *bars, oldBars)
    bars->setBarsGroup(nullptr); // removes itself from mBars via removeBars
}
 
/*!
  Adds the specified \a bars plottable to this group. Alternatively, you can also use \ref
  QCPBars::setBarsGroup on the \a bars instance.
 
  \see insert, remove
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::append(QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (!bars)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0";
    return;
  }
    
  if (!mBars.contains(bars))
    bars->setBarsGroup(this);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars plottable is already in this bars group:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(bars);
}
 
/*!
  Inserts the specified \a bars plottable into this group at the specified index position \a i.
  This gives you full control over the ordering of the bars.
  
  \a bars may already be part of this group. In that case, \a bars is just moved to the new index
  position.
 
  \see append, remove
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::insert(int i, QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (!bars)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0";
    return;
  }
  
  // first append to bars list normally:
  if (!mBars.contains(bars))
    bars->setBarsGroup(this);
  // then move to according position:
  mBars.move(mBars.indexOf(bars), qBound(0, i, mBars.size()-1));
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified \a bars plottable from this group.
  
  \see contains, clear
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::remove(QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (!bars)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0";
    return;
  }
  
  if (mBars.contains(bars))
    bars->setBarsGroup(nullptr);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars plottable is not in this bars group:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(bars);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Adds the specified \a bars to the internal mBars list of bars. This method does not change the
  barsGroup property on \a bars.
  
  \see unregisterBars
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::registerBars(QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (!mBars.contains(bars))
    mBars.append(bars);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Removes the specified \a bars from the internal mBars list of bars. This method does not change
  the barsGroup property on \a bars.
  
  \see registerBars
*/
void QCPBarsGroup::unregisterBars(QCPBars *bars)
{
  mBars.removeOne(bars);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pixel offset in the key dimension the specified \a bars plottable should have at the
  given key coordinate \a keyCoord. The offset is relative to the pixel position of the key
  coordinate \a keyCoord.
*/
double QCPBarsGroup::keyPixelOffset(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord)
{
  // find list of all base bars in case some mBars are stacked:
  QList<const QCPBars*> baseBars;
  foreach (const QCPBars *b, mBars)
  {
    while (b->barBelow())
      b = b->barBelow();
    if (!baseBars.contains(b))
      baseBars.append(b);
  }
  // find base bar this "bars" is stacked on:
  const QCPBars *thisBase = bars;
  while (thisBase->barBelow())
    thisBase = thisBase->barBelow();
  
  // determine key pixel offset of this base bars considering all other base bars in this barsgroup:
  double result = 0;
  int index = baseBars.indexOf(thisBase);
  if (index >= 0)
  {
    if (baseBars.size() % 2 == 1 && index == (baseBars.size()-1)/2) // is center bar (int division on purpose)
    {
      return result;
    } else
    {
      double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth;
      int startIndex;
      int dir = (index <= (baseBars.size()-1)/2) ? -1 : 1; // if bar is to lower keys of center, dir is negative
      if (baseBars.size() % 2 == 0) // even number of bars
      {
        startIndex = baseBars.size()/2 + (dir < 0 ? -1 : 0);
        result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at(startIndex), keyCoord)*0.5; // half of middle spacing
      } else // uneven number of bars
      {
        startIndex = (baseBars.size()-1)/2+dir;
        baseBars.at((baseBars.size()-1)/2)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
        result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth)*0.5; // half of center bar
        result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at((baseBars.size()-1)/2), keyCoord); // center bar spacing
      }
      for (int i = startIndex; i != index; i += dir) // add widths and spacings of bars in between center and our bars
      {
        baseBars.at(i)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
        result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth);
        result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at(i), keyCoord);
      }
      // finally half of our bars width:
      baseBars.at(index)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
      result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth)*0.5;
      // correct sign of result depending on orientation and direction of key axis:
      result *= dir*thisBase->keyAxis()->pixelOrientation();
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the spacing in pixels which is between this \a bars and the following one, both at the
  key coordinate \a keyCoord.
  
  \note Typically the returned value doesn't depend on \a bars or \a keyCoord. \a bars is only
  needed to get access to the key axis transformation and axis rect for the modes \ref
  stAxisRectRatio and \ref stPlotCoords. The \a keyCoord is only relevant for spacings given in
  \ref stPlotCoords on a logarithmic axis.
*/
double QCPBarsGroup::getPixelSpacing(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord)
{
  switch (mSpacingType)
  {
    case stAbsolute:
    {
      return mSpacing;
    }
    case stAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (bars->keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        return bars->keyAxis()->axisRect()->width()*mSpacing;
      else
        return bars->keyAxis()->axisRect()->height()*mSpacing;
    }
    case stPlotCoords:
    {
      double keyPixel = bars->keyAxis()->coordToPixel(keyCoord);
      return qAbs(bars->keyAxis()->coordToPixel(keyCoord+mSpacing)-keyPixel);
    }
  }
  return 0;
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPBarsData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPBarsData
  \brief Holds the data of one single data point (one bar) for QCPBars.
  
  The stored data is:
  \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this bar (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey)
  \li \a value: height coordinate on the value axis of this bar (this is the \a mainValue)
  
  The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPBarsDataContainer. It is a typedef for
  \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPBarsData as the DataType template parameter. See the
  documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods.
  
  \see QCPBarsDataContainer
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::sortKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static QCPBarsData QCPBarsData::fromSortKey(double sortKey)
  
  Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static static bool QCPBarsData::sortKeyIsMainKey()
  
  Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter,
  this method returns true.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::mainKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::mainValue() const
  
  Returns the \a value member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPBarsData::valueRange() const
  
  Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a bar data point with key and value set to zero.
*/
QCPBarsData::QCPBarsData() :
  key(0),
  value(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a bar data point with the specified \a key and \a value.
*/
QCPBarsData::QCPBarsData(double key, double value) :
  key(key),
  value(value)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPBars
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPBars
  \brief A plottable representing a bar chart in a plot.
 
  \image html QCPBars.png
  
  To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions.
  
  \section qcpbars-appearance Changing the appearance
  
  The appearance of the bars is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref setPen, \ref setBrush).
  The width of the individual bars can be controlled with \ref setWidthType and \ref setWidth.
  
  Bar charts are stackable. This means, two QCPBars plottables can be placed on top of each other
  (see \ref QCPBars::moveAbove). So when two bars are at the same key position, they will appear
  stacked.
  
  If you would like to group multiple QCPBars plottables together so they appear side by side as
  shown below, use QCPBarsGroup.
  
  \image html QCPBarsGroup.png
  
  \section qcpbars-usage Usage
  
  Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPBars is a plottable
  (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
  (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
  
  Usually, you first create an instance:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-creation-1
  which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
  The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-creation-2
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPBarsDataContainer> QCPBars::data() const
  
  Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPBarsDataContainer. You may
  use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the
  regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barBelow() const
  Returns the bars plottable that is directly below this bars plottable.
  If there is no such plottable, returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see barAbove, moveBelow, moveAbove
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barAbove() const
  Returns the bars plottable that is directly above this bars plottable.
  If there is no such plottable, returns \c nullptr.
  
  \see barBelow, moveBelow, moveAbove
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a bar chart which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value
  axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have
  the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is
  printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  The created QCPBars is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a
  keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPBars, so do not delete it manually
  but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPBars::QCPBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D<QCPBarsData>(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mWidth(0.75),
  mWidthType(wtPlotCoords),
  mBarsGroup(nullptr),
  mBaseValue(0),
  mStackingGap(1)
{
  // modify inherited properties from abstract plottable:
  mPen.setColor(Qt::blue);
  mPen.setStyle(Qt::SolidLine);
  mBrush.setColor(QColor(40, 50, 255, 30));
  mBrush.setStyle(Qt::SolidPattern);
  mSelectionDecorator->setBrush(QBrush(QColor(160, 160, 255)));
}
 
QCPBars::~QCPBars()
{
  setBarsGroup(nullptr);
  if (mBarBelow || mBarAbove)
    connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // take this bar out of any stacking
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPBars may share the same data container safely.
  Modifying the data in the container will then affect all bars that share the container. Sharing
  can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the bar's data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPBars::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPBarsDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided
  vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the
  smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPBars::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, values, alreadySorted);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the bars.
 
  How the number passed as \a width is interpreted (e.g. screen pixels, plot coordinates,...),
  depends on the currently set width type, see \ref setWidthType and \ref WidthType.
*/
void QCPBars::setWidth(double width)
{
  mWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the width of the bars is defined. See the documentation of \ref WidthType for an
  explanation of the possible values for \a widthType.
  
  The default value is \ref wtPlotCoords.
  
  \see setWidth
*/
void QCPBars::setWidthType(QCPBars::WidthType widthType)
{
  mWidthType = widthType;
}
 
/*!
  Sets to which QCPBarsGroup this QCPBars instance belongs to. Alternatively, you can also use \ref
  QCPBarsGroup::append.
  
  To remove this QCPBars from any group, set \a barsGroup to \c nullptr.
*/
void QCPBars::setBarsGroup(QCPBarsGroup *barsGroup)
{
  // deregister at old group:
  if (mBarsGroup)
    mBarsGroup->unregisterBars(this);
  mBarsGroup = barsGroup;
  // register at new group:
  if (mBarsGroup)
    mBarsGroup->registerBars(this);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the base value of this bars plottable.
 
  The base value defines where on the value coordinate the bars start. How far the bars extend from
  the base value is given by their individual value data. For example, if the base value is set to
  1, a bar with data value 2 will have its lowest point at value coordinate 1 and highest point at
  3.
  
  For stacked bars, only the base value of the bottom-most QCPBars has meaning.
  
  The default base value is 0.
*/
void QCPBars::setBaseValue(double baseValue)
{
  mBaseValue = baseValue;
}
 
/*!
  If this bars plottable is stacked on top of another bars plottable (\ref moveAbove), this method
  allows specifying a distance in \a pixels, by which the drawn bar rectangles will be separated by
  the bars below it.
*/
void QCPBars::setStackingGap(double pixels)
{
  mStackingGap = pixels;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors
  should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest
  vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPBars::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (keys.size() != values.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size());
  QVector<QCPBarsData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPBarsData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPBarsData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->value = values[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPBars::addData(double key, double value)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPBarsData(key, value));
}
 
/*!
  Moves this bars plottable below \a bars. In other words, the bars of this plottable will appear
  below the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and value axis as this
  plottable.
  
  Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully. If \a bars already
  has a bars object below itself, this bars object is inserted between the two. If this bars object
  is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top of each other after
  the operation.
  
  To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to \c nullptr.
  
  \see moveBelow, barAbove, barBelow
*/
void QCPBars::moveBelow(QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (bars == this) return;
  if (bars && (bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data()))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and value axis as this QCPBars";
    return;
  }
  // remove from stacking:
  connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0
  // if new bar given, insert this bar below it:
  if (bars)
  {
    if (bars->mBarBelow)
      connectBars(bars->mBarBelow.data(), this);
    connectBars(this, bars);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Moves this bars plottable above \a bars. In other words, the bars of this plottable will appear
  above the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and value axis as this
  plottable.
  
  Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully. If \a bars already
  has a bars object above itself, this bars object is inserted between the two. If this bars object
  is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top of each other after
  the operation.
  
  To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to \c nullptr.
  
  \see moveBelow, barBelow, barAbove
*/
void QCPBars::moveAbove(QCPBars *bars)
{
  if (bars == this) return;
  if (bars && (bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data()))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and value axis as this QCPBars";
    return;
  }
  // remove from stacking:
  connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0
  // if new bar given, insert this bar above it:
  if (bars)
  {
    if (bars->mBarAbove)
      connectBars(this, bars->mBarAbove.data());
    connectBars(bars, this);
  }
}
 
/*!
  \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPBars::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return result;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return result;
  
  QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
  {
    if (rect.intersects(getBarRect(it->key, it->value)))
      result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()), int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1)), false);
  }
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPBars::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    // get visible data range:
    QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
    getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
    for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
    {
      if (getBarRect(it->key, it->value).contains(pos))
      {
        if (details)
        {
          int pointIndex = int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin());
          details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
        }
        return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
      }
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPBars::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  /* Note: If this QCPBars uses absolute pixels as width (or is in a QCPBarsGroup with spacing in
  absolute pixels), using this method to adapt the key axis range to fit the bars into the
  currently visible axis range will not work perfectly. Because in the moment the axis range is
  changed to the new range, the fixed pixel widths/spacings will represent different coordinate
  spans than before, which in turn would require a different key range to perfectly fit, and so on.
  The only solution would be to iteratively approach the perfect fitting axis range, but the
  mismatch isn't large enough in most applications, to warrant this here. If a user does need a
  better fit, he should call the corresponding axis rescale multiple times in a row.
  */
  QCPRange range;
  range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
  
  // determine exact range of bars by including bar width and barsgroup offset:
  if (foundRange && mKeyAxis)
  {
    double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth, keyPixel;
    // lower range bound:
    getPixelWidth(range.lower, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
    keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(range.lower) + lowerPixelWidth;
    if (mBarsGroup)
      keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, range.lower);
    const double lowerCorrected = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(keyPixel);
    if (!qIsNaN(lowerCorrected) && qIsFinite(lowerCorrected) && range.lower > lowerCorrected)
      range.lower = lowerCorrected;
    // upper range bound:
    getPixelWidth(range.upper, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
    keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(range.upper) + upperPixelWidth;
    if (mBarsGroup)
      keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, range.upper);
    const double upperCorrected = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(keyPixel);
    if (!qIsNaN(upperCorrected) && qIsFinite(upperCorrected) && range.upper < upperCorrected)
      range.upper = upperCorrected;
  }
  return range;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPBars::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  // Note: can't simply use mDataContainer->valueRange here because we need to
  // take into account bar base value and possible stacking of multiple bars
  QCPRange range;
  range.lower = mBaseValue;
  range.upper = mBaseValue;
  bool haveLower = true; // set to true, because baseValue should always be visible in bar charts
  bool haveUpper = true; // set to true, because baseValue should always be visible in bar charts
  QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
  QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (inKeyRange != QCPRange())
  {
    itBegin = mDataContainer->findBegin(inKeyRange.lower, false);
    itEnd = mDataContainer->findEnd(inKeyRange.upper, false);
  }
  for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it)
  {
    const double current = it->value + getStackedBaseValue(it->key, it->value >= 0);
    if (qIsNaN(current)) continue;
    if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
    {
      if (current < range.lower || !haveLower)
      {
        range.lower = current;
        haveLower = true;
      }
      if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper)
      {
        range.upper = current;
        haveUpper = true;
      }
    }
  }
  
  foundRange = true; // return true because bar charts always have the 0-line visible
  return range;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPBars::dataPixelPosition(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size())
  {
    QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
    QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
    if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return {}; }
    
    const QCPDataContainer<QCPBarsData>::const_iterator it = mDataContainer->constBegin()+index;
    const double valuePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(getStackedBaseValue(it->key, it->value >= 0) + it->value);
    const double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key) + (mBarsGroup ? mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, it->key) : 0);
    if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      return {keyPixel, valuePixel};
    else
      return {valuePixel, keyPixel};
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index;
    return {};
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPBars::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  
  QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin;
    QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd;
    mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i));
    if (begin == end)
      continue;
    
    for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      // check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
      if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value))
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "of drawn range invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
#endif
      // draw bar:
      if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      {
        mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
      } else
      {
        painter->setBrush(mBrush);
        painter->setPen(mPen);
      }
      applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
      painter->drawPolygon(getBarRect(it->key, it->value));
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPBars::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  // draw filled rect:
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  painter->setBrush(mBrush);
  painter->setPen(mPen);
  QRectF r = QRectF(0, 0, rect.width()*0.67, rect.height()*0.67);
  r.moveCenter(rect.center());
  painter->drawRect(r);
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  called by \ref draw to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key axis range
  setting, so only that needs to be processed. It also takes into account the bar width.
  
  \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when
  plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a
  lower may still be just outside the visible range.
  
  \a end returns an iterator one higher than the highest visible data point. Same as before, \a end
  may also lie just outside of the visible range.
  
  if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to constEnd.
*/
void QCPBars::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const
{
  if (!mKeyAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
    begin = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    return;
  }
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
  {
    begin = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    return;
  }
  
  // get visible data range as QMap iterators
  begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower);
  end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper);
  double lowerPixelBound = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower);
  double upperPixelBound = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper);
  bool isVisible = false;
  // walk left from begin to find lower bar that actually is completely outside visible pixel range:
  QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
  while (it != mDataContainer->constBegin())
  {
    --it;
    const QRectF barRect = getBarRect(it->key, it->value);
    if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.right() >= lowerPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.left() <= lowerPixelBound));
    else // keyaxis is vertical
      isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.top() <= lowerPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.bottom() >= lowerPixelBound));
    if (isVisible)
      begin = it;
    else
      break;
  }
  // walk right from ubound to find upper bar that actually is completely outside visible pixel range:
  it = end;
  while (it != mDataContainer->constEnd())
  {
    const QRectF barRect = getBarRect(it->key, it->value);
    if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
      isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.left() <= upperPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.right() >= upperPixelBound));
    else // keyaxis is vertical
      isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.bottom() >= upperPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.top() <= upperPixelBound));
    if (isVisible)
      end = it+1;
    else
      break;
    ++it;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the rect in pixel coordinates of a single bar with the specified \a key and \a value. The
  rect is shifted according to the bar stacking (see \ref moveAbove) and base value (see \ref
  setBaseValue), and to have non-overlapping border lines with the bars stacked below.
*/
QRectF QCPBars::getBarRect(double key, double value) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return {}; }
  
  double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth;
  getPixelWidth(key, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth);
  double base = getStackedBaseValue(key, value >= 0);
  double basePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(base);
  double valuePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(base+value);
  double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key);
  if (mBarsGroup)
    keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, key);
  double bottomOffset = (mBarBelow && mPen != Qt::NoPen ? 1 : 0)*(mPen.isCosmetic() ? 1 : mPen.widthF());
  bottomOffset += mBarBelow ? mStackingGap : 0;
  bottomOffset *= (value<0 ? -1 : 1)*valueAxis->pixelOrientation();
  if (qAbs(valuePixel-basePixel) <= qAbs(bottomOffset))
    bottomOffset = valuePixel-basePixel;
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    return QRectF(QPointF(keyPixel+lowerPixelWidth, valuePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+upperPixelWidth, basePixel+bottomOffset)).normalized();
  } else
  {
    return QRectF(QPointF(basePixel+bottomOffset, keyPixel+lowerPixelWidth), QPointF(valuePixel, keyPixel+upperPixelWidth)).normalized();
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is used to determine the width of the bar at coordinate \a key, according to the
  specified width (\ref setWidth) and width type (\ref setWidthType).
  
  The output parameters \a lower and \a upper return the number of pixels the bar extends to lower
  and higher keys, relative to the \a key coordinate (so with a non-reversed horizontal axis, \a
  lower is negative and \a upper positive).
*/
void QCPBars::getPixelWidth(double key, double &lower, double &upper) const
{
  lower = 0;
  upper = 0;
  switch (mWidthType)
  {
    case wtAbsolute:
    {
      upper = mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
      lower = -upper;
      break;
    }
    case wtAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect())
      {
        if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
          upper = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->width()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
        else
          upper = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->height()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
        lower = -upper;
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis or axis rect defined";
      break;
    }
    case wtPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis)
      {
        double keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key);
        upper = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key+mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel;
        lower = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key-mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel;
        // no need to qSwap(lower, higher) when range reversed, because higher/lower are gained by
        // coordinate transform which includes range direction
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis defined";
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This function is called to find at which value to start drawing the base of a bar at \a key, when
  it is stacked on top of another QCPBars (e.g. with \ref moveAbove).
  
  positive and negative bars are separated per stack (positive are stacked above baseValue upwards,
  negative are stacked below baseValue downwards). This can be indicated with \a positive. So if the
  bar for which we need the base value is negative, set \a positive to false.
*/
double QCPBars::getStackedBaseValue(double key, bool positive) const
{
  if (mBarBelow)
  {
    double max = 0; // don't initialize with mBaseValue here because only base value of bottom-most bar has meaning in a bar stack
    // find bars of mBarBelow that are approximately at key and find largest one:
    double epsilon = qAbs(key)*(sizeof(key)==4 ? 1e-6 : 1e-14); // should be safe even when changed to use float at some point
    if (key == 0)
      epsilon = (sizeof(key)==4 ? 1e-6 : 1e-14);
    QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = mBarBelow.data()->mDataContainer->findBegin(key-epsilon);
    QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mBarBelow.data()->mDataContainer->findEnd(key+epsilon);
    while (it != itEnd)
    {
      if (it->key > key-epsilon && it->key < key+epsilon)
      {
        if ((positive && it->value > max) ||
            (!positive && it->value < max))
          max = it->value;
      }
      ++it;
    }
    // recurse down the bar-stack to find the total height:
    return max + mBarBelow.data()->getStackedBaseValue(key, positive);
  } else
    return mBaseValue;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Connects \a below and \a above to each other via their mBarAbove/mBarBelow properties. The bar(s)
  currently above lower and below upper will become disconnected to lower/upper.
  
  If lower is zero, upper will be disconnected at the bottom.
  If upper is zero, lower will be disconnected at the top.
*/
void QCPBars::connectBars(QCPBars *lower, QCPBars *upper)
{
  if (!lower && !upper) return;
  
  if (!lower) // disconnect upper at bottom
  {
    // disconnect old bar below upper:
    if (upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper)
      upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = nullptr;
    upper->mBarBelow = nullptr;
  } else if (!upper) // disconnect lower at top
  {
    // disconnect old bar above lower:
    if (lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower)
      lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = nullptr;
    lower->mBarAbove = nullptr;
  } else // connect lower and upper
  {
    // disconnect old bar above lower:
    if (lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower)
      lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = nullptr;
    // disconnect old bar below upper:
    if (upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper)
      upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = nullptr;
    lower->mBarAbove = upper;
    upper->mBarBelow = lower;
  }
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-bars.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 28951                     */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPStatisticalBoxData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPStatisticalBoxData
  \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPStatisticalBox.
  
  The stored data is:
  
  \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey)
  
  \li \a minimum: the position of the lower whisker, typically the minimum measurement of the
  sample that's not considered an outlier.
  
  \li \a lowerQuartile: the lower end of the box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two
  statistical quartiles around the median of the sample, they should contain 50% of the sample
  data.
  
  \li \a median: the value of the median mark inside the quartile box. The median separates the
  sample data in half (50% of the sample data is below/above the median). (This is the \a mainValue)
  
  \li \a upperQuartile: the upper end of the box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two
  statistical quartiles around the median of the sample, they should contain 50% of the sample
  data.
  
  \li \a maximum: the position of the upper whisker, typically the maximum measurement of the
  sample that's not considered an outlier.
  
  \li \a outliers: a QVector of outlier values that will be drawn as scatter points at the \a key
  coordinate of this data point (see \ref QCPStatisticalBox::setOutlierStyle)
  
  The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer. It is a
  typedef for \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPStatisticalBoxData as the DataType template
  parameter. See the documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic
  methods.
  
  \see QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::sortKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static QCPStatisticalBoxData QCPStatisticalBoxData::fromSortKey(double sortKey)
  
  Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static static bool QCPStatisticalBoxData::sortKeyIsMainKey()
  
  Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter,
  this method returns true.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::mainKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::mainValue() const
  
  Returns the \a median member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPStatisticalBoxData::valueRange() const
  
  Returns a QCPRange spanning from the \a minimum to the \a maximum member of this statistical box
  data point, possibly further expanded by outliers.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with key and all values set to zero.
*/
QCPStatisticalBoxData::QCPStatisticalBoxData() :
  key(0),
  minimum(0),
  lowerQuartile(0),
  median(0),
  upperQuartile(0),
  maximum(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with the specified \a key, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a
  upperQuartile, \a maximum and optionally a number of \a outliers.
*/
QCPStatisticalBoxData::QCPStatisticalBoxData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector<double> &outliers) :
  key(key),
  minimum(minimum),
  lowerQuartile(lowerQuartile),
  median(median),
  upperQuartile(upperQuartile),
  maximum(maximum),
  outliers(outliers)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPStatisticalBox
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPStatisticalBox
  \brief A plottable representing a single statistical box in a plot.
 
  \image html QCPStatisticalBox.png
  
  To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can
  also access and modify the data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the internal
  \ref QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer.
  
  Additionally each data point can itself have a list of outliers, drawn as scatter points at the
  key coordinate of the respective statistical box data point. They can either be set by using the
  respective \ref addData(double,double,double,double,double,double,const QVector<double>&)
  "addData" method or accessing the individual data points through \ref data, and setting the
  <tt>QVector<double> outliers</tt> of the data points directly.
  
  \section qcpstatisticalbox-appearance Changing the appearance
  
  The appearance of each data point box, ranging from the lower to the upper quartile, is
  controlled via \ref setPen and \ref setBrush. You may change the width of the boxes with \ref
  setWidth in plot coordinates.
 
  Each data point's visual representation also consists of two whiskers. Whiskers are the lines
  which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower quartile to the minimum.
  The appearance of the whiskers can be modified with: \ref setWhiskerPen, \ref setWhiskerBarPen,
  \ref setWhiskerWidth. The whisker width is the width of the bar perpendicular to the whisker at
  the top (for maximum) and bottom (for minimum). If the whisker pen is changed, make sure to set
  the \c capStyle to \c Qt::FlatCap. Otherwise the backbone line might exceed the whisker bars by a
  few pixels due to the pen cap being not perfectly flat.
  
  The median indicator line inside the box has its own pen, \ref setMedianPen.
  
  The outlier data points are drawn as normal scatter points. Their look can be controlled with
  \ref setOutlierStyle
  
  \section qcpstatisticalbox-usage Usage
  
  Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPStatisticalBox is a plottable
  (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
  (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
  
  Usually, you first create an instance:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-creation-1
  which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
  The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-creation-2
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer> QCPStatisticalBox::data() const
  
  Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref
  QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer. You may use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more
  convenient and faster than using the regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a statistical box which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its
  value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and
  not have the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding
  message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  The created QCPStatisticalBox is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred
  from \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPStatisticalBox, so do not
  delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPStatisticalBox::QCPStatisticalBox(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D<QCPStatisticalBoxData>(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mWidth(0.5),
  mWhiskerWidth(0.2),
  mWhiskerPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::DashLine, Qt::FlatCap),
  mWhiskerBarPen(Qt::black),
  mWhiskerAntialiased(false),
  mMedianPen(Qt::black, 3, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::FlatCap),
  mOutlierStyle(QCPScatterStyle::ssCircle, Qt::blue, 6)
{
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPStatisticalBoxes may share the same data container
  safely. Modifying the data in the container will then affect all statistical boxes that share the
  container. Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared
  pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the statistical box data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a
  median, \a upperQuartile and \a maximum. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the
  number of added points will be the size of the smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &minimum, const QVector<double> &lowerQuartile, const QVector<double> &median, const QVector<double> &upperQuartile, const QVector<double> &maximum, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum, alreadySorted);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the boxes in key coordinates.
  
  \see setWhiskerWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWidth(double width)
{
  mWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the whiskers in key coordinates.
  
  Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower
  quartile to the minimum.
  
  \see setWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerWidth(double width)
{
  mWhiskerWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker backbone.
  
  Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower
  quartile to the minimum.
  
  Make sure to set the \c capStyle of the passed \a pen to \c Qt::FlatCap. Otherwise the backbone
  line might exceed the whisker bars by a few pixels due to the pen cap being not perfectly flat.
  
  \see setWhiskerBarPen
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mWhiskerPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker bars. Those are the lines parallel to the key axis at
  each end of the whisker backbone.
  
  Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower
  quartile to the minimum.
  
  \see setWhiskerPen
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerBarPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mWhiskerBarPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the statistical boxes whiskers are drawn with antialiasing or not.
 
  Note that antialiasing settings may be overridden by QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerAntialiased(bool enabled)
{
  mWhiskerAntialiased = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen used for drawing the median indicator line inside the statistical boxes.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setMedianPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mMedianPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the appearance of the outlier data points.
 
  Outliers can be specified with the method
  \ref addData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector<double> &outliers)
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setOutlierStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style)
{
  mOutlierStyle = style;
}
 
/*! \overload
   
  Adds the provided points in \a keys, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a upperQuartile and
  \a maximum to the current data. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number
  of added points will be the size of the smallest vector.
   
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
   
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &minimum, const QVector<double> &lowerQuartile, const QVector<double> &median, const QVector<double> &upperQuartile, const QVector<double> &maximum, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (keys.size() != minimum.size() || minimum.size() != lowerQuartile.size() || lowerQuartile.size() != median.size() ||
      median.size() != upperQuartile.size() || upperQuartile.size() != maximum.size() || maximum.size() != keys.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum have different sizes:"
             << keys.size() << minimum.size() << lowerQuartile.size() << median.size() << upperQuartile.size() << maximum.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), qMin(minimum.size(), qMin(lowerQuartile.size(), qMin(median.size(), qMin(upperQuartile.size(), maximum.size())))));
  QVector<QCPStatisticalBoxData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPStatisticalBoxData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPStatisticalBoxData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->minimum = minimum[i];
    it->lowerQuartile = lowerQuartile[i];
    it->median = median[i];
    it->upperQuartile = upperQuartile[i];
    it->maximum = maximum[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided data point as \a key, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a upperQuartile
  and \a maximum to the current data.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::addData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector<double> &outliers)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPStatisticalBoxData(key, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum, outliers));
}
 
/*!
  \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPStatisticalBox::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return result;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return result;
  
  QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
  {
    if (rect.intersects(getQuartileBox(it)))
      result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()), int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1)), false);
  }
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPStatisticalBox::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    // get visible data range:
    QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
    QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
    double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
    for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
    {
      if (getQuartileBox(it).contains(pos)) // quartile box
      {
        double currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
        if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
        {
          minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
          closestDataPoint = it;
        }
      } else // whiskers
      {
        const QVector<QLineF> whiskerBackbones = getWhiskerBackboneLines(it);
        const QCPVector2D posVec(pos);
        foreach (const QLineF &backbone, whiskerBackbones)
        {
          double currentDistSqr = posVec.distanceSquaredToLine(backbone);
          if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
          {
            minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
            closestDataPoint = it;
          }
        }
      }
    }
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = int(closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin());
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  QCPRange range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
  // determine exact range by including width of bars/flags:
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdPositive || range.lower-mWidth*0.5 > 0)
      range.lower -= mWidth*0.5;
    if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdNegative || range.upper+mWidth*0.5 < 0)
      range.upper += mWidth*0.5;
  }
  return range;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPStatisticalBox::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin;
    QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd;
    mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i));
    if (begin == end)
      continue;
    
    for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      // check data validity if flag set:
# ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
      if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->minimum) ||
          QCP::isInvalidData(it->lowerQuartile, it->median) ||
          QCP::isInvalidData(it->upperQuartile, it->maximum))
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "of drawn range has invalid data." << "Plottable name:" << name();
      for (int i=0; i<it->outliers.size(); ++i)
        if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->outliers.at(i)))
          qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point outlier at" << it->key << "of drawn range invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
# endif
      
      if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      {
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
        mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
      } else
      {
        painter->setPen(mPen);
        painter->setBrush(mBrush);
      }
      QCPScatterStyle finalOutlierStyle = mOutlierStyle;
      if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
        finalOutlierStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mOutlierStyle);
      drawStatisticalBox(painter, it, finalOutlierStyle);
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  // draw filled rect:
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  painter->setPen(mPen);
  painter->setBrush(mBrush);
  QRectF r = QRectF(0, 0, rect.width()*0.67, rect.height()*0.67);
  r.moveCenter(rect.center());
  painter->drawRect(r);
}
 
/*!
  Draws the graphical representation of a single statistical box with the data given by the
  iterator \a it with the provided \a painter.
 
  If the statistical box has a set of outlier data points, they are drawn with \a outlierStyle.
 
  \see getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines, getWhiskerBarLines
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawStatisticalBox(QCPPainter *painter, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it, const QCPScatterStyle &outlierStyle) const
{
  // draw quartile box:
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  const QRectF quartileBox = getQuartileBox(it);
  painter->drawRect(quartileBox);
  // draw median line with cliprect set to quartile box:
  painter->save();
  painter->setClipRect(quartileBox, Qt::IntersectClip);
  painter->setPen(mMedianPen);
  painter->drawLine(QLineF(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->median), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWidth*0.5, it->median)));
  painter->restore();
  // draw whisker lines:
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mWhiskerAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables);
  painter->setPen(mWhiskerPen);
  painter->drawLines(getWhiskerBackboneLines(it));
  painter->setPen(mWhiskerBarPen);
  painter->drawLines(getWhiskerBarLines(it));
  // draw outliers:
  applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
  outlierStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
  for (int i=0; i<it->outliers.size(); ++i)
    outlierStyle.drawShape(painter, coordsToPixels(it->key, it->outliers.at(i)));
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  called by \ref draw to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key axis range
  setting, so only that needs to be processed. It also takes into account the bar width.
  
  \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when
  plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a
  lower may still be just outside the visible range.
  
  \a end returns an iterator one higher than the highest visible data point. Same as before, \a end
  may also lie just outside of the visible range.
  
  if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to constEnd.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const
{
  if (!mKeyAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
    begin = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    return;
  }
  begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower-mWidth*0.5); // subtract half width of box to include partially visible data points
  end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper+mWidth*0.5); // add half width of box to include partially visible data points
}
 
/*!  \internal
 
  Returns the box in plot coordinates (keys in x, values in y of the returned rect) that covers the
  value range from the lower to the upper quartile, of the data given by \a it.
 
  \see drawStatisticalBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines, getWhiskerBarLines
*/
QRectF QCPStatisticalBox::getQuartileBox(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const
{
  QRectF result;
  result.setTopLeft(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->upperQuartile));
  result.setBottomRight(coordsToPixels(it->key+mWidth*0.5, it->lowerQuartile));
  return result;
}
 
/*!  \internal
 
  Returns the whisker backbones (keys in x, values in y of the returned lines) that cover the value
  range from the minimum to the lower quartile, and from the upper quartile to the maximum of the
  data given by \a it.
 
  \see drawStatisticalBox, getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBarLines
*/
QVector<QLineF> QCPStatisticalBox::getWhiskerBackboneLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const
{
  QVector<QLineF> result(2);
  result[0].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->lowerQuartile), coordsToPixels(it->key, it->minimum)); // min backbone
  result[1].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->upperQuartile), coordsToPixels(it->key, it->maximum)); // max backbone
  return result;
}
 
/*!  \internal
 
  Returns the whisker bars (keys in x, values in y of the returned lines) that are placed at the
  end of the whisker backbones, at the minimum and maximum of the data given by \a it.
 
  \see drawStatisticalBox, getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines
*/
QVector<QLineF> QCPStatisticalBox::getWhiskerBarLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const
{
  QVector<QLineF> result(2);
  result[0].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->minimum), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->minimum)); // min bar
  result[1].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->maximum), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->maximum)); // max bar
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 48189               */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorMapData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPColorMapData
  \brief Holds the two-dimensional data of a QCPColorMap plottable.
  
  This class is a data storage for \ref QCPColorMap. It holds a two-dimensional array, which \ref
  QCPColorMap then displays as a 2D image in the plot, where the array values are represented by a
  color, depending on the value.
  
  The size of the array can be controlled via \ref setSize (or \ref setKeySize, \ref setValueSize).
  Which plot coordinates these cells correspond to can be configured with \ref setRange (or \ref
  setKeyRange, \ref setValueRange).
  
  The data cells can be accessed in two ways: They can be directly addressed by an integer index
  with \ref setCell. This is the fastest method. Alternatively, they can be addressed by their plot
  coordinate with \ref setData. plot coordinate to cell index transformations and vice versa are
  provided by the functions \ref coordToCell and \ref cellToCoord.
  
  A \ref QCPColorMapData also holds an on-demand two-dimensional array of alpha values which (if
  allocated) has the same size as the data map. It can be accessed via \ref setAlpha, \ref
  fillAlpha and \ref clearAlpha. The memory for the alpha map is only allocated if needed, i.e. on
  the first call of \ref setAlpha. \ref clearAlpha restores full opacity and frees the alpha map.
  
  This class also buffers the minimum and maximum values that are in the data set, to provide
  QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange with the necessary information quickly. Setting a cell to a value
  that is greater than the current maximum increases this maximum to the new value. However,
  setting the cell that currently holds the maximum value to a smaller value doesn't decrease the
  maximum again, because finding the true new maximum would require going through the entire data
  array, which might be time consuming. The same holds for the data minimum. This functionality is
  given by \ref recalculateDataBounds, such that you can decide when it is sensible to find the
  true current minimum and maximum. The method QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange offers a convenience
  parameter \a recalculateDataBounds which may be set to true to automatically call \ref
  recalculateDataBounds internally.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn bool QCPColorMapData::isEmpty() const
  
  Returns whether this instance carries no data. This is equivalent to having a size where at least
  one of the dimensions is 0 (see \ref setSize).
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance. The instance has \a keySize cells in the key direction
  and \a valueSize cells in the value direction. These cells will be displayed by the \ref QCPColorMap
  at the coordinates \a keyRange and \a valueRange.
  
  \see setSize, setKeySize, setValueSize, setRange, setKeyRange, setValueRange
*/
QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData(int keySize, int valueSize, const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange) :
  mKeySize(0),
  mValueSize(0),
  mKeyRange(keyRange),
  mValueRange(valueRange),
  mIsEmpty(true),
  mData(nullptr),
  mAlpha(nullptr),
  mDataModified(true)
{
  setSize(keySize, valueSize);
  fill(0);
}
 
QCPColorMapData::~QCPColorMapData()
{
  delete[] mData;
  delete[] mAlpha;
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance copying the data and range of \a other.
*/
QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData(const QCPColorMapData &other) :
  mKeySize(0),
  mValueSize(0),
  mIsEmpty(true),
  mData(nullptr),
  mAlpha(nullptr),
  mDataModified(true)
{
  *this = other;
}
 
/*!
  Overwrites this color map data instance with the data stored in \a other. The alpha map state is
  transferred, too.
*/
QCPColorMapData &QCPColorMapData::operator=(const QCPColorMapData &other)
{
  if (&other != this)
  {
    const int keySize = other.keySize();
    const int valueSize = other.valueSize();
    if (!other.mAlpha && mAlpha)
      clearAlpha();
    setSize(keySize, valueSize);
    if (other.mAlpha && !mAlpha)
      createAlpha(false);
    setRange(other.keyRange(), other.valueRange());
    if (!isEmpty())
    {
      memcpy(mData, other.mData, sizeof(mData[0])*size_t(keySize*valueSize));
      if (mAlpha)
        memcpy(mAlpha, other.mAlpha, sizeof(mAlpha[0])*size_t(keySize*valueSize));
    }
    mDataBounds = other.mDataBounds;
    mDataModified = true;
  }
  return *this;
}
 
/* undocumented getter */
double QCPColorMapData::data(double key, double value)
{
  int keyCell = int( (key-mKeyRange.lower)/(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)*(mKeySize-1)+0.5 );
  int valueCell = int( (value-mValueRange.lower)/(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)*(mValueSize-1)+0.5 );
  if (keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize)
    return mData[valueCell*mKeySize + keyCell];
  else
    return 0;
}
 
/* undocumented getter */
double QCPColorMapData::cell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex)
{
  if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize)
    return mData[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex];
  else
    return 0;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the alpha map value of the cell with the indices \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex.
 
  If this color map data doesn't have an alpha map (because \ref setAlpha was never called after
  creation or after a call to \ref clearAlpha), returns 255, which corresponds to full opacity.
 
  \see setAlpha
*/
unsigned char QCPColorMapData::alpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex)
{
  if (mAlpha && keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize)
    return mAlpha[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex];
  else
    return 255;
}
 
/*!
  Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension and \a valueSize cells in
  the value dimension.
 
  The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the
  requested size.
  
  Setting at least one of \a keySize or \a valueSize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref
  isEmpty returns true.
 
  \see setRange, setKeySize, setValueSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setSize(int keySize, int valueSize)
{
  if (keySize != mKeySize || valueSize != mValueSize)
  {
    mKeySize = keySize;
    mValueSize = valueSize;
    delete[] mData;
    mIsEmpty = mKeySize == 0 || mValueSize == 0;
    if (!mIsEmpty)
    {
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
      try { // 2D arrays get memory intensive fast. So if the allocation fails, at least output debug message
#endif
      mData = new double[size_t(mKeySize*mValueSize)];
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
      } catch (...) { mData = nullptr; }
#endif
      if (mData)
        fill(0);
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "out of memory for data dimensions "<< mKeySize << "*" << mValueSize;
    } else
      mData = nullptr;
    
    if (mAlpha) // if we had an alpha map, recreate it with new size
      createAlpha();
    
    mDataModified = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension.
 
  The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the
  requested size.
  
  Setting \a keySize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty returns true.
 
  \see setKeyRange, setSize, setValueSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setKeySize(int keySize)
{
  setSize(keySize, mValueSize);
}
 
/*!
  Resizes the data array to have \a valueSize cells in the value dimension.
 
  The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the
  requested size.
  
  Setting \a valueSize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty returns true.
 
  \see setValueRange, setSize, setKeySize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setValueSize(int valueSize)
{
  setSize(mKeySize, valueSize);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the coordinate ranges the data shall be distributed over. This defines the rectangular area
  covered by the color map in plot coordinates.
  
  The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if
  the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to <tt>QCPRange(2, 3)</tt> there will
  be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
 
  \see setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setRange(const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange)
{
  setKeyRange(keyRange);
  setValueRange(valueRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the key dimension. Together with
  the value range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in plot coordinates.
  
  The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if
  the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to <tt>QCPRange(2, 3)</tt> there will
  be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
 
  \see setRange, setValueRange, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange(const QCPRange &keyRange)
{
  mKeyRange = keyRange;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the value dimension. Together with
  the key range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in plot coordinates.
  
  The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if
  the value size (\ref setValueSize) is 3 and \a valueRange is set to <tt>QCPRange(2, 3)</tt> there
  will be cells centered on the value coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
 
  \see setRange, setKeyRange, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setValueRange(const QCPRange &valueRange)
{
  mValueRange = valueRange;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the data of the cell, which lies at the plot coordinates given by \a key and \a value, to \a
  z.
  
  \note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals, even if the key or
  value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap with logarithmic axes,
  you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::setData method as it uses a linear transformation to
  determine the cell index. Rather directly access the cell index with \ref
  QCPColorMapData::setCell.
 
  \see setCell, setRange
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setData(double key, double value, double z)
{
  int keyCell = int( (key-mKeyRange.lower)/(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)*(mKeySize-1)+0.5 );
  int valueCell = int( (value-mValueRange.lower)/(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)*(mValueSize-1)+0.5 );
  if (keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize)
  {
    mData[valueCell*mKeySize + keyCell] = z;
    if (z < mDataBounds.lower)
      mDataBounds.lower = z;
    if (z > mDataBounds.upper)
      mDataBounds.upper = z;
     mDataModified = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the data of the cell with indices \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to \a z. The indices
  enumerate the cells starting from zero, up to the map's size-1 in the respective dimension (see
  \ref setSize).
  
  In the standard plot configuration (horizontal key axis and vertical value axis, both not
  range-reversed), the cell with indices (0, 0) is in the bottom left corner and the cell with
  indices (keySize-1, valueSize-1) is in the top right corner of the color map.
  
  \see setData, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setCell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double z)
{
  if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize)
  {
    mData[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex] = z;
    if (z < mDataBounds.lower)
      mDataBounds.lower = z;
    if (z > mDataBounds.upper)
      mDataBounds.upper = z;
     mDataModified = true;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << keyIndex << valueIndex;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the alpha of the color map cell given by \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to \a alpha. A value
  of 0 for \a alpha results in a fully transparent cell, and a value of 255 results in a fully
  opaque cell.
 
  If an alpha map doesn't exist yet for this color map data, it will be created here. If you wish
  to restore full opacity and free any allocated memory of the alpha map, call \ref clearAlpha.
 
  Note that the cell-wise alpha which can be configured here is independent of any alpha configured
  in the color map's gradient (\ref QCPColorGradient). If a cell is affected both by the cell-wise
  and gradient alpha, the alpha values will be blended accordingly during rendering of the color
  map.
 
  \see fillAlpha, clearAlpha
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setAlpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, unsigned char alpha)
{
  if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize)
  {
    if (mAlpha || createAlpha())
    {
      mAlpha[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex] = alpha;
      mDataModified = true;
    }
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << keyIndex << valueIndex;
}
 
/*!
  Goes through the data and updates the buffered minimum and maximum data values.
  
  Calling this method is only advised if you are about to call \ref QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange
  and can not guarantee that the cells holding the maximum or minimum data haven't been overwritten
  with a smaller or larger value respectively, since the buffered maximum/minimum values have been
  updated the last time. Why this is the case is explained in the class description (\ref
  QCPColorMapData).
  
  Note that the method \ref QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange provides a parameter \a
  recalculateDataBounds for convenience. Setting this to true will call this method for you, before
  doing the rescale.
*/
void QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds()
{
  if (mKeySize > 0 && mValueSize > 0)
  {
    double minHeight = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
    double maxHeight = -std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
    const int dataCount = mValueSize*mKeySize;
    for (int i=0; i<dataCount; ++i)
    {
      if (mData[i] > maxHeight)
        maxHeight = mData[i];
      if (mData[i] < minHeight)
        minHeight = mData[i];
    }
    mDataBounds.lower = minHeight;
    mDataBounds.upper = maxHeight;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Frees the internal data memory.
  
  This is equivalent to calling \ref setSize "setSize(0, 0)".
*/
void QCPColorMapData::clear()
{
  setSize(0, 0);
}
 
/*!
  Frees the internal alpha map. The color map will have full opacity again.
*/
void QCPColorMapData::clearAlpha()
{
  if (mAlpha)
  {
    delete[] mAlpha;
    mAlpha = nullptr;
    mDataModified = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets all cells to the value \a z.
*/
void QCPColorMapData::fill(double z)
{
  const int dataCount = mValueSize*mKeySize;
  memset(mData, z, dataCount*sizeof(*mData));
  mDataBounds = QCPRange(z, z);
  mDataModified = true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the opacity of all color map cells to \a alpha. A value of 0 for \a alpha results in a fully
  transparent color map, and a value of 255 results in a fully opaque color map.
 
  If you wish to restore opacity to 100% and free any used memory for the alpha map, rather use
  \ref clearAlpha.
 
  \see setAlpha
*/
void QCPColorMapData::fillAlpha(unsigned char alpha)
{
  if (mAlpha || createAlpha(false))
  {
    const int dataCount = mValueSize*mKeySize;
    memset(mAlpha, alpha, dataCount*sizeof(*mAlpha));
    mDataModified = true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Transforms plot coordinates given by \a key and \a value to cell indices of this QCPColorMapData
  instance. The resulting cell indices are returned via the output parameters \a keyIndex and \a
  valueIndex.
  
  The retrieved key/value cell indices can then be used for example with \ref setCell.
  
  If you are only interested in a key or value index, you may pass \c nullptr as \a valueIndex or
  \a keyIndex.
  
  \note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals, even if the key or
  value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap with logarithmic axes,
  you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::coordToCell method as it uses a linear transformation to
  determine the cell index.
  
  \see cellToCoord, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPColorMapData::coordToCell(double key, double value, int *keyIndex, int *valueIndex) const
{
  if (keyIndex)
    *keyIndex = int( (key-mKeyRange.lower)/(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)*(mKeySize-1)+0.5 );
  if (valueIndex)
    *valueIndex = int( (value-mValueRange.lower)/(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)*(mValueSize-1)+0.5 );
}
 
/*!
  Transforms cell indices given by \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to cell indices of this QCPColorMapData
  instance. The resulting coordinates are returned via the output parameters \a key and \a
  value.
  
  If you are only interested in a key or value coordinate, you may pass \c nullptr as \a key or \a
  value.
  
  \note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals, even if the key or
  value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap with logarithmic axes,
  you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::cellToCoord method as it uses a linear transformation to
  determine the cell index.
  
  \see coordToCell, QCPAxis::pixelToCoord
*/
void QCPColorMapData::cellToCoord(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double *key, double *value) const
{
  if (key)
    *key = keyIndex/double(mKeySize-1)*(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)+mKeyRange.lower;
  if (value)
    *value = valueIndex/double(mValueSize-1)*(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)+mValueRange.lower;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Allocates the internal alpha map with the current data map key/value size and, if \a
  initializeOpaque is true, initializes all values to 255. If \a initializeOpaque is false, the
  values are not initialized at all. In this case, the alpha map should be initialized manually,
  e.g. with \ref fillAlpha.
 
  If an alpha map exists already, it is deleted first. If this color map is empty (has either key
  or value size zero, see \ref isEmpty), the alpha map is cleared.
 
  The return value indicates the existence of the alpha map after the call. So this method returns
  true if the data map isn't empty and an alpha map was successfully allocated.
*/
bool QCPColorMapData::createAlpha(bool initializeOpaque)
{
  clearAlpha();
  if (isEmpty())
    return false;
  
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
  try { // 2D arrays get memory intensive fast. So if the allocation fails, at least output debug message
#endif
    mAlpha = new unsigned char[size_t(mKeySize*mValueSize)];
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
  } catch (...) { mAlpha = nullptr; }
#endif
  if (mAlpha)
  {
    if (initializeOpaque)
      fillAlpha(255);
    return true;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "out of memory for data dimensions "<< mKeySize << "*" << mValueSize;
    return false;
  }
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorMap
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPColorMap
  \brief A plottable representing a two-dimensional color map in a plot.
 
  \image html QCPColorMap.png
  
  The data is stored in the class \ref QCPColorMapData, which can be accessed via the data()
  method.
  
  A color map has three dimensions to represent a data point: The \a key dimension, the \a value
  dimension and the \a data dimension. As with other plottables such as graphs, \a key and \a value
  correspond to two orthogonal axes on the QCustomPlot surface that you specify in the QCPColorMap
  constructor. The \a data dimension however is encoded as the color of the point at (\a key, \a
  value).
 
  Set the number of points (or \a cells) in the key/value dimension via \ref
  QCPColorMapData::setSize. The plot coordinate range over which these points will be displayed is
  specified via \ref QCPColorMapData::setRange. The first cell will be centered on the lower range
  boundary and the last cell will be centered on the upper range boundary. The data can be set by
  either accessing the cells directly with QCPColorMapData::setCell or by addressing the cells via
  their plot coordinates with \ref QCPColorMapData::setData. If possible, you should prefer
  setCell, since it doesn't need to do any coordinate transformation and thus performs a bit
  better.
  
  The cell with index (0, 0) is at the bottom left, if the color map uses normal (i.e. not reversed)
  key and value axes.
  
  To show the user which colors correspond to which \a data values, a \ref QCPColorScale is
  typically placed to the right of the axis rect. See the documentation there for details on how to
  add and use a color scale.
  
  \section qcpcolormap-appearance Changing the appearance
  
  Most important to the appearance is the color gradient, which can be specified via \ref
  setGradient. See the documentation of \ref QCPColorGradient for details on configuring a color
  gradient.
  
  The \a data range that is mapped to the colors of the gradient can be specified with \ref
  setDataRange. To make the data range encompass the whole data set minimum to maximum, call \ref
  rescaleDataRange. If your data may contain NaN values, use \ref QCPColorGradient::setNanHandling
  to define how they are displayed.
  
  \section qcpcolormap-transparency Transparency
  
  Transparency in color maps can be achieved by two mechanisms. On one hand, you can specify alpha
  values for color stops of the \ref QCPColorGradient, via the regular QColor interface. This will
  cause the color map data which gets mapped to colors around those color stops to appear with the
  accordingly interpolated transparency.
  
  On the other hand you can also directly apply an alpha value to each cell independent of its
  data, by using the alpha map feature of \ref QCPColorMapData. The relevant methods are \ref
  QCPColorMapData::setAlpha, QCPColorMapData::fillAlpha and \ref QCPColorMapData::clearAlpha().
  
  The two transparencies will be joined together in the plot and otherwise not interfere with each
  other. They are mixed in a multiplicative matter, so an alpha of e.g. 50% (128/255) in both modes
  simultaneously, will result in a total transparency of 25% (64/255).
  
  \section qcpcolormap-usage Usage
  
  Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPColorMap is a plottable
  (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
  (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
  
  Usually, you first create an instance:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolormap-creation-1
  which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
  The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolormap-creation-2
  
  \note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals, even if the key or
  value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap with logarithmic axes,
  you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::setData method as it uses a linear transformation to
  determine the cell index. Rather directly access the cell index with \ref
  QCPColorMapData::setCell.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPColorMapData *QCPColorMap::data() const
  
  Returns a pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPColorMapData. Access this to
  modify data points (cells) and the color map key/value range.
  
  \see setData
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/* start documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::dataRangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange);
  
  This signal is emitted when the data range changes.
  
  \see setDataRange
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
  
  This signal is emitted when the data scale type changes.
  
  \see setDataScaleType
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::gradientChanged(const QCPColorGradient &newGradient);
  
  This signal is emitted when the gradient changes.
  
  \see setGradient
*/
 
/* end documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs a color map with the specified \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis.
  
  The created QCPColorMap is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from
  \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPColorMap, so do not delete it
  manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPColorMap::QCPColorMap(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mDataScaleType(QCPAxis::stLinear),
  mMapData(new QCPColorMapData(10, 10, QCPRange(0, 5), QCPRange(0, 5))),
  mGradient(QCPColorGradient::gpCold),
  mInterpolate(true),
  mTightBoundary(false),
  mMapImageInvalidated(true)
{
}
 
QCPColorMap::~QCPColorMap()
{
  delete mMapData;
}
 
/*!
  Replaces the current \ref data with the provided \a data.
  
  If \a copy is set to true, the \a data object will only be copied. if false, the color map
  takes ownership of the passed data and replaces the internal data pointer with it. This is
  significantly faster than copying for large datasets.
*/
void QCPColorMap::setData(QCPColorMapData *data, bool copy)
{
  if (mMapData == data)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "The data pointer is already in (and owned by) this plottable" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(data);
    return;
  }
  if (copy)
  {
    *mMapData = *data;
  } else
  {
    delete mMapData;
    mMapData = data;
  }
  mMapImageInvalidated = true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the data range of this color map to \a dataRange. The data range defines which data values
  are mapped to the color gradient.
  
  To make the data range span the full range of the data set, use \ref rescaleDataRange.
  
  \see QCPColorScale::setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange)
{
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(dataRange)) return;
  if (mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper)
  {
    if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
      mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
    else
      mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
    mMapImageInvalidated = true;
    emit dataRangeChanged(mDataRange);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the data is correlated with the color gradient linearly or logarithmically.
  
  \see QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType
*/
void QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType)
{
  if (mDataScaleType != scaleType)
  {
    mDataScaleType = scaleType;
    mMapImageInvalidated = true;
    emit dataScaleTypeChanged(mDataScaleType);
    if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic)
      setDataRange(mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale());
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color gradient that is used to represent the data. For more details on how to create an
  own gradient or use one of the preset gradients, see \ref QCPColorGradient.
  
  The colors defined by the gradient will be used to represent data values in the currently set
  data range, see \ref setDataRange. Data points that are outside this data range will either be
  colored uniformly with the respective gradient boundary color, or the gradient will repeat,
  depending on \ref QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic.
  
  \see QCPColorScale::setGradient
*/
void QCPColorMap::setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient)
{
  if (mGradient != gradient)
  {
    mGradient = gradient;
    mMapImageInvalidated = true;
    emit gradientChanged(mGradient);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the color map image shall use bicubic interpolation when displaying the color map
  shrinked or expanded, and not at a 1:1 pixel-to-data scale.
  
  \image html QCPColorMap-interpolate.png "A 10*10 color map, with interpolation and without interpolation enabled"
*/
void QCPColorMap::setInterpolate(bool enabled)
{
  mInterpolate = enabled;
  mMapImageInvalidated = true; // because oversampling factors might need to change
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the outer most data rows and columns are clipped to the specified key and value
  range (see \ref QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange, \ref QCPColorMapData::setValueRange).
  
  if \a enabled is set to false, the data points at the border of the color map are drawn with the
  same width and height as all other data points. Since the data points are represented by
  rectangles of one color centered on the data coordinate, this means that the shown color map
  extends by half a data point over the specified key/value range in each direction.
  
  \image html QCPColorMap-tightboundary.png "A color map, with tight boundary enabled and disabled"
*/
void QCPColorMap::setTightBoundary(bool enabled)
{
  mTightBoundary = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Associates the color scale \a colorScale with this color map.
  
  This means that both the color scale and the color map synchronize their gradient, data range and
  data scale type (\ref setGradient, \ref setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType). Multiple color maps
  can be associated with one single color scale. This causes the color maps to also synchronize
  those properties, via the mutual color scale.
  
  This function causes the color map to adopt the current color gradient, data range and data scale
  type of \a colorScale. After this call, you may change these properties at either the color map
  or the color scale, and the setting will be applied to both.
  
  Pass \c nullptr as \a colorScale to disconnect the color scale from this color map again.
*/
void QCPColorMap::setColorScale(QCPColorScale *colorScale)
{
  if (mColorScale) // unconnect signals from old color scale
  {
    disconnect(this, SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
    disconnect(this, SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
    disconnect(this, SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient)));
    disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
    disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), this, SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient)));
    disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  }
  mColorScale = colorScale;
  if (mColorScale) // connect signals to new color scale
  {
    setGradient(mColorScale.data()->gradient());
    setDataRange(mColorScale.data()->dataRange());
    setDataScaleType(mColorScale.data()->dataScaleType());
    connect(this, SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
    connect(this, SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
    connect(this, SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient)));
    connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange)));
    connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), this, SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient)));
    connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType)));
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the data range (\ref setDataRange) to span the minimum and maximum values that occur in the
  current data set. This corresponds to the \ref rescaleKeyAxis or \ref rescaleValueAxis methods,
  only for the third data dimension of the color map.
  
  The minimum and maximum values of the data set are buffered in the internal QCPColorMapData
  instance (\ref data). As data is updated via its \ref QCPColorMapData::setCell or \ref
  QCPColorMapData::setData, the buffered minimum and maximum values are updated, too. For
  performance reasons, however, they are only updated in an expanding fashion. So the buffered
  maximum can only increase and the buffered minimum can only decrease. In consequence, changes to
  the data that actually lower the maximum of the data set (by overwriting the cell holding the
  current maximum with a smaller value), aren't recognized and the buffered maximum overestimates
  the true maximum of the data set. The same happens for the buffered minimum. To recalculate the
  true minimum and maximum by explicitly looking at each cell, the method
  QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds can be used. For convenience, setting the parameter \a
  recalculateDataBounds calls this method before setting the data range to the buffered minimum and
  maximum.
  
  \see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange(bool recalculateDataBounds)
{
  if (recalculateDataBounds)
    mMapData->recalculateDataBounds();
  setDataRange(mMapData->dataBounds());
}
 
/*!
  Takes the current appearance of the color map and updates the legend icon, which is used to
  represent this color map in the legend (see \ref QCPLegend).
  
  The \a transformMode specifies whether the rescaling is done by a faster, low quality image
  scaling algorithm (Qt::FastTransformation) or by a slower, higher quality algorithm
  (Qt::SmoothTransformation).
  
  The current color map appearance is scaled down to \a thumbSize. Ideally, this should be equal to
  the size of the legend icon (see \ref QCPLegend::setIconSize). If it isn't exactly the configured
  legend icon size, the thumb will be rescaled during drawing of the legend item.
  
  \see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::updateLegendIcon(Qt::TransformationMode transformMode, const QSize &thumbSize)
{
  if (mMapImage.isNull() && !data()->isEmpty())
    updateMapImage(); // try to update map image if it's null (happens if no draw has happened yet)
  
  if (!mMapImage.isNull()) // might still be null, e.g. if data is empty, so check here again
  {
    bool mirrorX = (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis())->rangeReversed();
    bool mirrorY = (valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis())->rangeReversed();
    mLegendIcon = QPixmap::fromImage(mMapImage.mirrored(mirrorX, mirrorY)).scaled(thumbSize, Qt::KeepAspectRatio, transformMode);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPColorMap::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mMapData->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    double posKey, posValue;
    pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue);
    if (mMapData->keyRange().contains(posKey) && mMapData->valueRange().contains(posValue))
    {
      if (details)
        details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(0, 1))); // temporary solution, to facilitate whole-plottable selection. Replace in future version with segmented 2D selection.
      return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPColorMap::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  foundRange = true;
  QCPRange result = mMapData->keyRange();
  result.normalize();
  if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive)
  {
    if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0)
      result.lower = result.upper*1e-3;
    else if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0)
      foundRange = false;
  } else if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative)
  {
    if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0)
      result.upper = result.lower*1e-3;
    else if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0)
      foundRange = false;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPColorMap::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  if (inKeyRange != QCPRange())
  {
    if (mMapData->keyRange().upper < inKeyRange.lower || mMapData->keyRange().lower > inKeyRange.upper)
    {
      foundRange = false;
      return {};
    }
  }
  
  foundRange = true;
  QCPRange result = mMapData->valueRange();
  result.normalize();
  if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive)
  {
    if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0)
      result.lower = result.upper*1e-3;
    else if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0)
      foundRange = false;
  } else if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative)
  {
    if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0)
      result.upper = result.lower*1e-3;
    else if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0)
      foundRange = false;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Updates the internal map image buffer by going through the internal \ref QCPColorMapData and
  turning the data values into color pixels with \ref QCPColorGradient::colorize.
  
  This method is called by \ref QCPColorMap::draw if either the data has been modified or the map image
  has been invalidated for a different reason (e.g. a change of the data range with \ref
  setDataRange).
  
  If the map cell count is low, the image created will be oversampled in order to avoid a
  QPainter::drawImage bug which makes inner pixel boundaries jitter when stretch-drawing images
  without smooth transform enabled. Accordingly, oversampling isn't performed if \ref
  setInterpolate is true.
*/
void QCPColorMap::updateMapImage()
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis) return;
  if (mMapData->isEmpty()) return;
  
  const QImage::Format format = QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied;
  const int keySize = mMapData->keySize();
  const int valueSize = mMapData->valueSize();
  int keyOversamplingFactor = mInterpolate ? 1 : int(1.0+100.0/double(keySize)); // make mMapImage have at least size 100, factor becomes 1 if size > 200 or interpolation is on
  int valueOversamplingFactor = mInterpolate ? 1 : int(1.0+100.0/double(valueSize)); // make mMapImage have at least size 100, factor becomes 1 if size > 200 or interpolation is on
  
  // resize mMapImage to correct dimensions including possible oversampling factors, according to key/value axes orientation:
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && (mMapImage.width() != keySize*keyOversamplingFactor || mMapImage.height() != valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor))
    mMapImage = QImage(QSize(keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor), format);
  else if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && (mMapImage.width() != valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor || mMapImage.height() != keySize*keyOversamplingFactor))
    mMapImage = QImage(QSize(valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, keySize*keyOversamplingFactor), format);
  
  if (mMapImage.isNull())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Couldn't create map image (possibly too large for memory)";
    mMapImage = QImage(QSize(10, 10), format);
    mMapImage.fill(Qt::black);
  } else
  {
    QImage *localMapImage = &mMapImage; // this is the image on which the colorization operates. Either the final mMapImage, or if we need oversampling, mUndersampledMapImage
    if (keyOversamplingFactor > 1 || valueOversamplingFactor > 1)
    {
      // resize undersampled map image to actual key/value cell sizes:
      if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && (mUndersampledMapImage.width() != keySize || mUndersampledMapImage.height() != valueSize))
        mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(QSize(keySize, valueSize), format);
      else if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && (mUndersampledMapImage.width() != valueSize || mUndersampledMapImage.height() != keySize))
        mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(QSize(valueSize, keySize), format);
      localMapImage = &mUndersampledMapImage; // make the colorization run on the undersampled image
    } else if (!mUndersampledMapImage.isNull())
      mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(); // don't need oversampling mechanism anymore (map size has changed) but mUndersampledMapImage still has nonzero size, free it
    
    const double *rawData = mMapData->mData;
    const unsigned char *rawAlpha = mMapData->mAlpha;
    if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    {
      const int lineCount = valueSize;
      const int rowCount = keySize;
      for (int line=0; line<lineCount; ++line)
      {
        QRgb* pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>(localMapImage->scanLine(lineCount-1-line)); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical coordinate system)
        if (rawAlpha)
          mGradient.colorize(rawData+line*rowCount, rawAlpha+line*rowCount, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, 1, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic);
        else
          mGradient.colorize(rawData+line*rowCount, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, 1, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic);
      }
    } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
    {
      const int lineCount = keySize;
      const int rowCount = valueSize;
      for (int line=0; line<lineCount; ++line)
      {
        QRgb* pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>(localMapImage->scanLine(lineCount-1-line)); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical coordinate system)
        if (rawAlpha)
          mGradient.colorize(rawData+line, rawAlpha+line, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, lineCount, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic);
        else
          mGradient.colorize(rawData+line, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, lineCount, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic);
      }
    }
    
    if (keyOversamplingFactor > 1 || valueOversamplingFactor > 1)
    {
      if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
        mMapImage = mUndersampledMapImage.scaled(keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation);
      else
        mMapImage = mUndersampledMapImage.scaled(valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation);
    }
  }
  mMapData->mDataModified = false;
  mMapImageInvalidated = false;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorMap::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (mMapData->isEmpty()) return;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) return;
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  
  if (mMapData->mDataModified || mMapImageInvalidated)
    updateMapImage();
  
  // use buffer if painting vectorized (PDF):
  const bool useBuffer = painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmVectorized);
  QCPPainter *localPainter = painter; // will be redirected to paint on mapBuffer if painting vectorized
  QRectF mapBufferTarget; // the rect in absolute widget coordinates where the visible map portion/buffer will end up in
  QPixmap mapBuffer;
  if (useBuffer)
  {
    const double mapBufferPixelRatio = 3; // factor by which DPI is increased in embedded bitmaps
    mapBufferTarget = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect();
    mapBuffer = QPixmap((mapBufferTarget.size()*mapBufferPixelRatio).toSize());
    mapBuffer.fill(Qt::transparent);
    localPainter = new QCPPainter(&mapBuffer);
    localPainter->scale(mapBufferPixelRatio, mapBufferPixelRatio);
    localPainter->translate(-mapBufferTarget.topLeft());
  }
  
  QRectF imageRect = QRectF(coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().lower, mMapData->valueRange().lower),
                            coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().upper, mMapData->valueRange().upper)).normalized();
  // extend imageRect to contain outer halves/quarters of bordering/cornering pixels (cells are centered on map range boundary):
  double halfCellWidth = 0; // in pixels
  double halfCellHeight = 0; // in pixels
  if (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    if (mMapData->keySize() > 1)
      halfCellWidth = 0.5*imageRect.width()/double(mMapData->keySize()-1);
    if (mMapData->valueSize() > 1)
      halfCellHeight = 0.5*imageRect.height()/double(mMapData->valueSize()-1);
  } else // keyAxis orientation is Qt::Vertical
  {
    if (mMapData->keySize() > 1)
      halfCellHeight = 0.5*imageRect.height()/double(mMapData->keySize()-1);
    if (mMapData->valueSize() > 1)
      halfCellWidth = 0.5*imageRect.width()/double(mMapData->valueSize()-1);
  }
  imageRect.adjust(-halfCellWidth, -halfCellHeight, halfCellWidth, halfCellHeight);
  const bool mirrorX = (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis())->rangeReversed();
  const bool mirrorY = (valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis())->rangeReversed();
  const bool smoothBackup = localPainter->renderHints().testFlag(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform);
  localPainter->setRenderHint(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, mInterpolate);
  QRegion clipBackup;
  if (mTightBoundary)
  {
    clipBackup = localPainter->clipRegion();
    QRectF tightClipRect = QRectF(coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().lower, mMapData->valueRange().lower),
                                  coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().upper, mMapData->valueRange().upper)).normalized();
    localPainter->setClipRect(tightClipRect, Qt::IntersectClip);
  }
  localPainter->drawImage(imageRect, mMapImage.mirrored(mirrorX, mirrorY));
  if (mTightBoundary)
    localPainter->setClipRegion(clipBackup);
  localPainter->setRenderHint(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, smoothBackup);
  
  if (useBuffer) // localPainter painted to mapBuffer, so now draw buffer with original painter
  {
    delete localPainter;
    painter->drawPixmap(mapBufferTarget.toRect(), mapBuffer);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorMap::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  // draw map thumbnail:
  if (!mLegendIcon.isNull())
  {
    QPixmap scaledIcon = mLegendIcon.scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation);
    QRectF iconRect = QRectF(0, 0, scaledIcon.width(), scaledIcon.height());
    iconRect.moveCenter(rect.center());
    painter->drawPixmap(iconRect.topLeft(), scaledIcon);
  }
  /*
  // draw frame:
  painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  painter->setPen(Qt::black);
  painter->drawRect(rect.adjusted(1, 1, 0, 0));
  */
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 42914                */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPFinancialData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPFinancialData
  \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPFinancial.
  
  The stored data is:
  \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey)
  \li \a open: The opening value at the data point (this is the \a mainValue)
  \li \a high: The high/maximum value at the data point
  \li \a low: The low/minimum value at the data point
  \li \a close: The closing value at the data point
  
  The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer. It is a typedef
  for \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPFinancialData as the DataType template parameter. See the
  documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods.
  
  \see QCPFinancialDataContainer
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::sortKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static QCPFinancialData QCPFinancialData::fromSortKey(double sortKey)
  
  Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn static static bool QCPFinancialData::sortKeyIsMainKey()
  
  Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter,
  this method returns true.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::mainKey() const
  
  Returns the \a key member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::mainValue() const
  
  Returns the \a open member of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPFinancialData::valueRange() const
  
  Returns a QCPRange spanning from the \a low to the \a high value of this data point.
  
  For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container,
  see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with key and all values set to zero.
*/
QCPFinancialData::QCPFinancialData() :
  key(0),
  open(0),
  high(0),
  low(0),
  close(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs a data point with the specified \a key and OHLC values.
*/
QCPFinancialData::QCPFinancialData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close) :
  key(key),
  open(open),
  high(high),
  low(low),
  close(close)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPFinancial
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPFinancial
  \brief A plottable representing a financial stock chart
 
  \image html QCPFinancial.png
 
  This plottable represents time series data binned to certain intervals, mainly used for stock
  charts. The two common representations OHLC (Open-High-Low-Close) bars and Candlesticks can be
  set via \ref setChartStyle.
 
  The data is passed via \ref setData as a set of open/high/low/close values at certain keys
  (typically times). This means the data must be already binned appropriately. If data is only
  available as a series of values (e.g. \a price against \a time), you can use the static
  convenience function \ref timeSeriesToOhlc to generate binned OHLC-data which can then be passed
  to \ref setData.
 
  The width of the OHLC bars/candlesticks can be controlled with \ref setWidth and \ref
  setWidthType. A typical choice is to set the width type to \ref wtPlotCoords (the default) and
  the width to (or slightly less than) one time bin interval width.
 
  \section qcpfinancial-appearance Changing the appearance
 
  Charts can be either single- or two-colored (\ref setTwoColored). If set to be single-colored,
  lines are drawn with the plottable's pen (\ref setPen) and fills with the brush (\ref setBrush).
 
  If set to two-colored, positive changes of the value during an interval (\a close >= \a open) are
  represented with a different pen and brush than negative changes (\a close < \a open). These can
  be configured with \ref setPenPositive, \ref setPenNegative, \ref setBrushPositive, and \ref
  setBrushNegative. In two-colored mode, the normal plottable pen/brush is ignored. Upon selection
  however, the normal selected pen/brush (provided by the \ref selectionDecorator) is used,
  irrespective of whether the chart is single- or two-colored.
 
  \section qcpfinancial-usage Usage
 
  Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPFinancial is a plottable
  (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
  (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
 
  Usually, you first create an instance:
 
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-creation-1
  which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot
  instance takes ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use
  QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.:
 
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-creation-2
  Here we have used the static helper method \ref timeSeriesToOhlc, to turn a time-price data
  series into a 24-hour binned open-high-low-close data series as QCPFinancial uses.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPFinancialDataContainer *QCPFinancial::data() const
  
  Returns a pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer. You may
  use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the
  regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods, in certain situations.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a financial chart which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value
  axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have
  the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is
  printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
  
  The created QCPFinancial is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a
  keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPFinancial, so do not delete it manually
  but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPFinancial::QCPFinancial(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable1D<QCPFinancialData>(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mChartStyle(csCandlestick),
  mWidth(0.5),
  mWidthType(wtPlotCoords),
  mTwoColored(true),
  mBrushPositive(QBrush(QColor(50, 160, 0))),
  mBrushNegative(QBrush(QColor(180, 0, 15))),
  mPenPositive(QPen(QColor(40, 150, 0))),
  mPenNegative(QPen(QColor(170, 5, 5)))
{
  mSelectionDecorator->setBrush(QBrush(QColor(160, 160, 255)));
}
 
QCPFinancial::~QCPFinancial()
{
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPFinancials may share the same data container safely.
  Modifying the data in the container will then affect all financials that share the container.
  Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the financial's data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData, timeSeriesToOhlc
*/
void QCPFinancial::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPFinancialDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a
  close. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be
  the size of the smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData, timeSeriesToOhlc
*/
void QCPFinancial::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &open, const QVector<double> &high, const QVector<double> &low, const QVector<double> &close, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, open, high, low, close, alreadySorted);
}
 
/*!
  Sets which representation style shall be used to display the OHLC data.
*/
void QCPFinancial::setChartStyle(QCPFinancial::ChartStyle style)
{
  mChartStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the individual bars/candlesticks to \a width in plot key coordinates.
  
  A typical choice is to set it to (or slightly less than) one bin interval width.
*/
void QCPFinancial::setWidth(double width)
{
  mWidth = width;
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the width of the financial bars is defined. See the documentation of \ref WidthType for
  an explanation of the possible values for \a widthType.
 
  The default value is \ref wtPlotCoords.
 
  \see setWidth
*/
void QCPFinancial::setWidthType(QCPFinancial::WidthType widthType)
{
  mWidthType = widthType;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether this chart shall contrast positive from negative trends per data point by using two
  separate colors to draw the respective bars/candlesticks.
  
  If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref
  setBrush).
  
  \see setPenPositive, setPenNegative, setBrushPositive, setBrushNegative
*/
void QCPFinancial::setTwoColored(bool twoColored)
{
  mTwoColored = twoColored;
}
 
/*!
  If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the brush that is used to draw fills
  of data points with a positive trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close >= open).
  
  If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref
  setBrush).
  
  \see setBrushNegative, setPenPositive, setPenNegative
*/
void QCPFinancial::setBrushPositive(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrushPositive = brush;
}
 
/*!
  If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the brush that is used to draw fills
  of data points with a negative trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close < open).
  
  If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref
  setBrush).
  
  \see setBrushPositive, setPenNegative, setPenPositive
*/
void QCPFinancial::setBrushNegative(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrushNegative = brush;
}
 
/*!
  If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the pen that is used to draw
  outlines of data points with a positive trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close >= open).
  
  If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref
  setBrush).
  
  \see setPenNegative, setBrushPositive, setBrushNegative
*/
void QCPFinancial::setPenPositive(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPenPositive = pen;
}
 
/*!
  If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the pen that is used to draw
  outlines of data points with a negative trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close < open).
  
  If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref
  setBrush).
  
  \see setPenPositive, setBrushNegative, setBrushPositive
*/
void QCPFinancial::setPenNegative(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPenNegative = pen;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided points in \a keys, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a close to the current data.
  The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size
  of the smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
  
  \see timeSeriesToOhlc
*/
void QCPFinancial::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &open, const QVector<double> &high, const QVector<double> &low, const QVector<double> &close, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (keys.size() != open.size() || open.size() != high.size() || high.size() != low.size() || low.size() != close.size() || close.size() != keys.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys, open, high, low, close have different sizes:" << keys.size() << open.size() << high.size() << low.size() << close.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), qMin(open.size(), qMin(high.size(), qMin(low.size(), close.size()))));
  QVector<QCPFinancialData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPFinancialData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPFinancialData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->open = open[i];
    it->high = high[i];
    it->low = low[i];
    it->close = close[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Adds the provided data point as \a key, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a close to the current
  data.
  
  Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which
  returns a pointer to the internal data container.
  
  \see timeSeriesToOhlc
*/
void QCPFinancial::addData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPFinancialData(key, open, high, low, close));
}
 
/*!
  \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPFinancial::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return result;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return result;
  
  QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
  {
    if (rect.intersects(selectionHitBox(it)))
      result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()), int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1)), false);
  }
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPFinancial::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    // get visible data range:
    QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
    QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
    // perform select test according to configured style:
    double result = -1;
    switch (mChartStyle)
    {
      case QCPFinancial::csOhlc:
        result = ohlcSelectTest(pos, visibleBegin, visibleEnd, closestDataPoint); break;
      case QCPFinancial::csCandlestick:
        result = candlestickSelectTest(pos, visibleBegin, visibleEnd, closestDataPoint); break;
    }
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = int(closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin());
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return result;
  }
  
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPFinancial::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  QCPRange range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
  // determine exact range by including width of bars/flags:
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdPositive || range.lower-mWidth*0.5 > 0)
      range.lower -= mWidth*0.5;
    if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdNegative || range.upper+mWidth*0.5 < 0)
      range.upper += mWidth*0.5;
  }
  return range;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPFinancial::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange);
}
 
/*!
  A convenience function that converts time series data (\a value against \a time) to OHLC binned
  data points. The return value can then be passed on to \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer::set(const
  QCPFinancialDataContainer&).
  
  The size of the bins can be controlled with \a timeBinSize in the same units as \a time is given.
  For example, if the unit of \a time is seconds and single OHLC/Candlesticks should span an hour
  each, set \a timeBinSize to 3600.
  
  \a timeBinOffset allows to control precisely at what \a time coordinate a bin should start. The
  value passed as \a timeBinOffset doesn't need to be in the range encompassed by the \a time keys.
  It merely defines the mathematical offset/phase of the bins that will be used to process the
  data.
*/
QCPFinancialDataContainer QCPFinancial::timeSeriesToOhlc(const QVector<double> &time, const QVector<double> &value, double timeBinSize, double timeBinOffset)
{
  QCPFinancialDataContainer data;
  int count = qMin(time.size(), value.size());
  if (count == 0)
    return QCPFinancialDataContainer();
  
  QCPFinancialData currentBinData(0, value.first(), value.first(), value.first(), value.first());
  int currentBinIndex = qFloor((time.first()-timeBinOffset)/timeBinSize+0.5);
  for (int i=0; i<count; ++i)
  {
    int index = qFloor((time.at(i)-timeBinOffset)/timeBinSize+0.5);
    if (currentBinIndex == index) // data point still in current bin, extend high/low:
    {
      if (value.at(i) < currentBinData.low) currentBinData.low = value.at(i);
      if (value.at(i) > currentBinData.high) currentBinData.high = value.at(i);
      if (i == count-1) // last data point is in current bin, finalize bin:
      {
        currentBinData.close = value.at(i);
        currentBinData.key = timeBinOffset+(index)*timeBinSize;
        data.add(currentBinData);
      }
    } else // data point not anymore in current bin, set close of old and open of new bin, and add old to map:
    {
      // finalize current bin:
      currentBinData.close = value.at(i-1);
      currentBinData.key = timeBinOffset+(index-1)*timeBinSize;
      data.add(currentBinData);
      // start next bin:
      currentBinIndex = index;
      currentBinData.open = value.at(i);
      currentBinData.high = value.at(i);
      currentBinData.low = value.at(i);
    }
  }
  
  return data;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPFinancial::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  // get visible data range:
  QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd);
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin;
    QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd;
    mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i));
    if (begin == end)
      continue;
    
    // draw data segment according to configured style:
    switch (mChartStyle)
    {
      case QCPFinancial::csOhlc:
        drawOhlcPlot(painter, begin, end, isSelectedSegment); break;
      case QCPFinancial::csCandlestick:
        drawCandlestickPlot(painter, begin, end, isSelectedSegment); break;
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPFinancial::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  painter->setAntialiasing(false); // legend icon especially of csCandlestick looks better without antialiasing
  if (mChartStyle == csOhlc)
  {
    if (mTwoColored)
    {
      // draw upper left half icon with positive color:
      painter->setBrush(mBrushPositive);
      painter->setPen(mPenPositive);
      painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.topLeft().toPoint()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      // draw bottom right half icon with negative color:
      painter->setBrush(mBrushNegative);
      painter->setPen(mPenNegative);
      painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.bottomRight().toPoint()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft()));
    } else
    {
      painter->setBrush(mBrush);
      painter->setPen(mPen);
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft()));
    }
  } else if (mChartStyle == csCandlestick)
  {
    if (mTwoColored)
    {
      // draw upper left half icon with positive color:
      painter->setBrush(mBrushPositive);
      painter->setPen(mPenPositive);
      painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.topLeft().toPoint()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      // draw bottom right half icon with negative color:
      painter->setBrush(mBrushNegative);
      painter->setPen(mPenNegative);
      painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.bottomRight().toPoint()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
    } else
    {
      painter->setBrush(mBrush);
      painter->setPen(mPen);
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft()));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the data from \a begin to \a end-1 as OHLC bars with the provided \a painter.
 
  This method is a helper function for \ref draw. It is used when the chart style is \ref csOhlc.
*/
void QCPFinancial::drawOhlcPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected)
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it)
    {
      if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator)
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
      else if (mTwoColored)
        painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative);
      else
        painter->setPen(mPen);
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open);
      double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close);
      // draw backbone:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)));
      // draw open:
      double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); // sign of this makes sure open/close are on correct sides
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel-pixelWidth, openPixel), QPointF(keyPixel, openPixel));
      // draw close:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, closePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+pixelWidth, closePixel));
    }
  } else
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it)
    {
      if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator)
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
      else if (mTwoColored)
        painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative);
      else
        painter->setPen(mPen);
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open);
      double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close);
      // draw backbone:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel));
      // draw open:
      double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); // sign of this makes sure open/close are on correct sides
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel-pixelWidth), QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel));
      // draw close:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel), QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel+pixelWidth));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the data from \a begin to \a end-1 as Candlesticks with the provided \a painter.
 
  This method is a helper function for \ref draw. It is used when the chart style is \ref csCandlestick.
*/
void QCPFinancial::drawCandlestickPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected)
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it)
    {
      if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator)
      {
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
        mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
      } else if (mTwoColored)
      {
        painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative);
        painter->setBrush(it->close >= it->open ? mBrushPositive : mBrushNegative);
      } else
      {
        painter->setPen(mPen);
        painter->setBrush(mBrush);
      }
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open);
      double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close);
      // draw high:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close))));
      // draw low:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close))));
      // draw open-close box:
      double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel);
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(QPointF(keyPixel-pixelWidth, closePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+pixelWidth, openPixel)));
    }
  } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it)
    {
      if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator)
      {
        mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
        mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
      } else if (mTwoColored)
      {
        painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative);
        painter->setBrush(it->close >= it->open ? mBrushPositive : mBrushNegative);
      } else
      {
        painter->setPen(mPen);
        painter->setBrush(mBrush);
      }
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open);
      double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close);
      // draw high:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel));
      // draw low:
      painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel));
      // draw open-close box:
      double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel);
      painter->drawRect(QRectF(QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel-pixelWidth), QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel+pixelWidth)));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This function is used to determine the width of the bar at coordinate \a key, according to the
  specified width (\ref setWidth) and width type (\ref setWidthType). Provide the pixel position of
  \a key in \a keyPixel (because usually this was already calculated via \ref QCPAxis::coordToPixel
  when this function is called).
 
  It returns the number of pixels the bar extends to higher keys, relative to the \a key
  coordinate. So with a non-reversed horizontal axis, the return value is positive. With a reversed
  horizontal axis, the return value is negative. This is important so the open/close flags on the
  \ref csOhlc bar are drawn to the correct side.
*/
double QCPFinancial::getPixelWidth(double key, double keyPixel) const
{
  double result = 0;
  switch (mWidthType)
  {
    case wtAbsolute:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis)
        result = mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
      break;
    }
    case wtAxisRectRatio:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect())
      {
        if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
          result = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->width()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
        else
          result = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->height()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation();
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis or axis rect defined";
      break;
    }
    case wtPlotCoords:
    {
      if (mKeyAxis)
        result = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key+mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel;
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis defined";
      break;
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method is a helper function for \ref selectTest. It is used to test for selection when the
  chart style is \ref csOhlc. It only tests against the data points between \a begin and \a end.
  
  Like \ref selectTest, this method returns the shortest distance of \a pos to the graphical
  representation of the plottable, and \a closestDataPoint will point to the respective data point.
*/
double QCPFinancial::ohlcSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const
{
  closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return -1; }
 
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      // calculate distance to backbone:
      double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)));
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
      {
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
        closestDataPoint = it;
      }
    }
  } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
      // calculate distance to backbone:
      double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel));
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
      {
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
        closestDataPoint = it;
      }
    }
  }
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This method is a helper function for \ref selectTest. It is used to test for selection when the
  chart style is \ref csCandlestick. It only tests against the data points between \a begin and \a
  end.
  
  Like \ref selectTest, this method returns the shortest distance of \a pos to the graphical
  representation of the plottable, and \a closestDataPoint will point to the respective data point.
*/
double QCPFinancial::candlestickSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const
{
  closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return -1; }
 
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      double currentDistSqr;
      // determine whether pos is in open-close-box:
      QCPRange boxKeyRange(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->key+mWidth*0.5);
      QCPRange boxValueRange(it->close, it->open);
      double posKey, posValue;
      pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue);
      if (boxKeyRange.contains(posKey) && boxValueRange.contains(posValue)) // is in open-close-box
      {
        currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
      } else
      {
        // calculate distance to high/low lines:
        double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
        double highLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close))));
        double lowLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close))));
        currentDistSqr = qMin(highLineDistSqr, lowLineDistSqr);
      }
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
      {
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
        closestDataPoint = it;
      }
    }
  } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
  {
    for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      double currentDistSqr;
      // determine whether pos is in open-close-box:
      QCPRange boxKeyRange(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->key+mWidth*0.5);
      QCPRange boxValueRange(it->close, it->open);
      double posKey, posValue;
      pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue);
      if (boxKeyRange.contains(posKey) && boxValueRange.contains(posValue)) // is in open-close-box
      {
        currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
      } else
      {
        // calculate distance to high/low lines:
        double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
        double highLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel));
        double lowLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel));
        currentDistSqr = qMin(highLineDistSqr, lowLineDistSqr);
      }
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
      {
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
        closestDataPoint = it;
      }
    }
  }
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  called by the drawing methods to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key
  axis range setting, so only that needs to be processed.
  
  \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when
  plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a
  begin may still be just outside the visible range.
  
  \a end returns the iterator just above the highest data point that needs to be taken into
  account. Same as before, \a end may also lie just outside of the visible range
  
  if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to \c constEnd.
*/
void QCPFinancial::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const
{
  if (!mKeyAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
    begin = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    return;
  }
  begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower-mWidth*0.5); // subtract half width of ohlc/candlestick to include partially visible data points
  end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper+mWidth*0.5); // add half width of ohlc/candlestick to include partially visible data points
}
 
/*!  \internal
 
  Returns the hit box in pixel coordinates that will be used for data selection with the selection
  rect (\ref selectTestRect), of the data point given by \a it.
*/
QRectF QCPFinancial::selectionHitBox(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return {}; }
  
  double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key);
  double highPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high);
  double lowPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low);
  double keyWidthPixels = keyPixel-keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key-mWidth*0.5);
  if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
    return QRectF(keyPixel-keyWidthPixels, highPixel, keyWidthPixels*2, lowPixel-highPixel).normalized();
  else
    return QRectF(highPixel, keyPixel-keyWidthPixels, lowPixel-highPixel, keyWidthPixels*2).normalized();
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 37679               */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPErrorBarsData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPErrorBarsData
  \brief Holds the data of one single error bar for QCPErrorBars.
 
  The stored data is:
  \li \a errorMinus: how much the error bar extends towards negative coordinates from the data
  point position
  \li \a errorPlus: how much the error bar extends towards positive coordinates from the data point
  position
 
  The container for storing the error bar information is \ref QCPErrorBarsDataContainer. It is a
  typedef for <tt>QVector<\ref QCPErrorBarsData></tt>.
 
  \see QCPErrorBarsDataContainer
*/
 
/*!
  Constructs an error bar with errors set to zero.
*/
QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData() :
  errorMinus(0),
  errorPlus(0)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs an error bar with equal \a error in both negative and positive direction.
*/
QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData(double error) :
  errorMinus(error),
  errorPlus(error)
{
}
 
/*!
  Constructs an error bar with negative and positive errors set to \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus,
  respectively.
*/
QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus) :
  errorMinus(errorMinus),
  errorPlus(errorPlus)
{
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPErrorBars
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPErrorBars
  \brief A plottable that adds a set of error bars to other plottables.
 
  \image html QCPErrorBars.png
 
  The \ref QCPErrorBars plottable can be attached to other one-dimensional plottables (e.g. \ref
  QCPGraph, \ref QCPCurve, \ref QCPBars, etc.) and equips them with error bars.
 
  Use \ref setDataPlottable to define for which plottable the \ref QCPErrorBars shall display the
  error bars. The orientation of the error bars can be controlled with \ref setErrorType.
 
  By using \ref setData, you can supply the actual error data, either as symmetric error or
  plus/minus asymmetric errors. \ref QCPErrorBars only stores the error data. The absolute
  key/value position of each error bar will be adopted from the configured data plottable. The
  error data of the \ref QCPErrorBars are associated one-to-one via their index to the data points
  of the data plottable. You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  Set either of the plus/minus errors to NaN (<tt>qQNaN()</tt> or
  <tt>std::numeric_limits<double>::quiet_NaN()</tt>) to not show the respective error bar on the data point at
  that index.
 
  \section qcperrorbars-appearance Changing the appearance
 
  The appearance of the error bars is defined by the pen (\ref setPen), and the width of the
  whiskers (\ref setWhiskerWidth). Further, the error bar backbones may leave a gap around the data
  point center to prevent that error bars are drawn too close to or even through scatter points.
  This gap size can be controlled via \ref setSymbolGap.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPErrorBarsDataContainer> QCPErrorBars::data() const
 
  Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPErrorBarsDataContainer. You
  may use it to directly manipulate the error values, which may be more convenient and faster than
  using the regular \ref setData methods.
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs an error bars plottable which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value
  axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have
  the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is
  printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
 
  It is also important that the \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis are the same for the error bars
  plottable and the data plottable that the error bars shall be drawn on (\ref setDataPlottable).
 
  The created \ref QCPErrorBars is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred
  from \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the \ref QCPErrorBars, so do not
  delete it manually but use \ref QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead.
*/
QCPErrorBars::QCPErrorBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) :
  QCPAbstractPlottable(keyAxis, valueAxis),
  mDataContainer(new QVector<QCPErrorBarsData>),
  mErrorType(etValueError),
  mWhiskerWidth(9),
  mSymbolGap(10)
{
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
}
 
QCPErrorBars::~QCPErrorBars()
{
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
 
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple \ref QCPErrorBars instances may share the same data
  container safely. Modifying the data in the container will then affect all \ref QCPErrorBars
  instances that share the container. Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data
  containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcperrorbars-datasharing-1
 
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, assign the
  data containers directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcperrorbars-datasharing-2
  (This uses different notation compared with other plottables, because the \ref QCPErrorBars
  uses a \c QVector<QCPErrorBarsData> as its data container, instead of a \ref QCPDataContainer.)
 
  \see addData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPErrorBarsDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Sets symmetrical error values as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated one-to-one
  by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see addData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setData(const QVector<double> &error)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(error);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Sets asymmetrical errors as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors will be
  associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref
  setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see addData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setData(const QVector<double> &errorMinus, const QVector<double> &errorPlus)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(errorMinus, errorPlus);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the data plottable to which the error bars will be applied. The error values specified e.g.
  via \ref setData will be associated one-to-one by the data point index to the data points of \a
  plottable. This means that the error bars will adopt the key/value coordinates of the data point
  with the same index.
 
  The passed \a plottable must be a one-dimensional plottable, i.e. it must implement the \ref
  QCPPlottableInterface1D. Further, it must not be a \ref QCPErrorBars instance itself. If either
  of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding qDebug output is generated, and the data
  plottable of this \ref QCPErrorBars instance is set to zero.
 
  For proper display, care must also be taken that the key and value axes of the \a plottable match
  those configured for this \ref QCPErrorBars instance.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setDataPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable)
{
  if (plottable && qobject_cast<QCPErrorBars*>(plottable))
  {
    mDataPlottable = nullptr;
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set another QCPErrorBars instance as data plottable";
    return;
  }
  if (plottable && !plottable->interface1D())
  {
    mDataPlottable = nullptr;
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed plottable doesn't implement 1d interface, can't associate with QCPErrorBars";
    return;
  }
  
  mDataPlottable = plottable;
}
 
/*!
  Sets in which orientation the error bars shall appear on the data points. If your data needs both
  error dimensions, create two \ref QCPErrorBars with different \a type.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setErrorType(ErrorType type)
{
  mErrorType = type;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the width of the whiskers (the short bars at the end of the actual error bar backbones) to
  \a pixels.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setWhiskerWidth(double pixels)
{
  mWhiskerWidth = pixels;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the gap diameter around the data points that will be left out when drawing the error bar
  backbones. This gap prevents that error bars are drawn too close to or even through scatter
  points.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::setSymbolGap(double pixels)
{
  mSymbolGap = pixels;
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds symmetrical error values as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated one-to-one
  by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see setData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::addData(const QVector<double> &error)
{
  addData(error, error);
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds asymmetrical errors as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors will be
  associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref
  setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see setData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::addData(const QVector<double> &errorMinus, const QVector<double> &errorPlus)
{
  if (errorMinus.size() != errorPlus.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "minus and plus error vectors have different sizes:" << errorMinus.size() << errorPlus.size();
  const int n = qMin(errorMinus.size(), errorPlus.size());
  mDataContainer->reserve(n);
  for (int i=0; i<n; ++i)
    mDataContainer->append(QCPErrorBarsData(errorMinus.at(i), errorPlus.at(i)));
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds a single symmetrical error bar as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated
  one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see setData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::addData(double error)
{
  mDataContainer->append(QCPErrorBarsData(error));
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Adds a single asymmetrical error bar as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors
  will be associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref
  setDataPlottable).
 
  You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data.
 
  \see setData
*/
void QCPErrorBars::addData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus)
{
  mDataContainer->append(QCPErrorBarsData(errorMinus, errorPlus));
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPErrorBars::dataCount() const
{
  return mDataContainer->size();
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPErrorBars::dataMainKey(int index) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
    return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(index);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return 0;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPErrorBars::dataSortKey(int index) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
    return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataSortKey(index);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return 0;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPErrorBars::dataMainValue(int index) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
    return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(index);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return 0;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPErrorBars::dataValueRange(int index) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
  {
    const double value = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(index);
    if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size() && mErrorType == etValueError)
      return {value-mDataContainer->at(index).errorMinus, value+mDataContainer->at(index).errorPlus};
    else
      return {value, value};
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
    return {};
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPErrorBars::dataPixelPosition(int index) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
    return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return {};
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
bool QCPErrorBars::sortKeyIsMainKey() const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
  {
    return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey();
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
    return true;
  }
}
 
/*!
  \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect
*/
QCPDataSelection QCPErrorBars::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const
{
  QCPDataSelection result;
  if (!mDataPlottable)
    return result;
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return result;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return result;
  
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd;
  getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()));
  
  QVector<QLineF> backbones, whiskers;
  for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it)
  {
    backbones.clear();
    whiskers.clear();
    getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers);
    foreach (const QLineF &backbone, backbones)
    {
      if (rectIntersectsLine(rect, backbone))
      {
        result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()), int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1)), false);
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  result.simplify();
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPErrorBars::findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
  {
    if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
      return 0;
    int beginIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findBegin(sortKey, expandedRange);
    if (beginIndex >= mDataContainer->size())
      beginIndex = mDataContainer->size()-1;
    return beginIndex;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return 0;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPErrorBars::findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const
{
  if (mDataPlottable)
  {
    if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
      return 0;
    int endIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findEnd(sortKey, expandedRange);
    if (endIndex > mDataContainer->size())
      endIndex = mDataContainer->size();
    return endIndex;
  } else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set";
  return 0;
}
 
/*!
  Implements a selectTest specific to this plottable's point geometry.
 
  If \a details is not 0, it will be set to a \ref QCPDataSelection, describing the closest data
  point to \a pos.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest
*/
double QCPErrorBars::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if (!mDataPlottable) return -1;
  
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()) || mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottablesBeyondAxisRect))
  {
    QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint);
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = int(closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin());
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return result;
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPErrorBars::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mDataPlottable) return;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  
  // if the sort key isn't the main key, we must check the visibility for each data point/error bar individually
  // (getVisibleDataBounds applies range restriction, but otherwise can only return full data range):
  bool checkPointVisibility = !mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey();
      
    // check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it;
  for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it)
  {
    if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->errorMinus, it->errorPlus))
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at index" << it-mDataContainer->constBegin() << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
  }
#endif
  
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  QVector<QLineF> backbones, whiskers;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
    getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, allSegments.at(i));
    if (begin == end)
      continue;
    
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
    else
      painter->setPen(mPen);
    if (painter->pen().capStyle() == Qt::SquareCap)
    {
      QPen capFixPen(painter->pen());
      capFixPen.setCapStyle(Qt::FlatCap);
      painter->setPen(capFixPen);
    }
    backbones.clear();
    whiskers.clear();
    for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
    {
      if (!checkPointVisibility || errorBarVisible(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin())))
        getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers);
    }
    painter->drawLines(backbones);
    painter->drawLines(whiskers);
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
    mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPErrorBars::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
  painter->setPen(mPen);
  if (mErrorType == etValueError && mValueAxis && mValueAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
  {
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x(), rect.top()+2, rect.center().x(), rect.bottom()-1));
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x()-4, rect.top()+2, rect.center().x()+4, rect.top()+2));
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x()-4, rect.bottom()-1, rect.center().x()+4, rect.bottom()-1));
  } else
  {
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left()+2, rect.center().y(), rect.right()-2, rect.center().y()));
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left()+2, rect.center().y()-4, rect.left()+2, rect.center().y()+4));
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.right()-2, rect.center().y()-4, rect.right()-2, rect.center().y()+4));
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPErrorBars::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  if (!mDataPlottable)
  {
    foundRange = false;
    return {};
  }
  
  QCPRange range;
  bool haveLower = false;
  bool haveUpper = false;
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it;
  for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it)
  {
    if (mErrorType == etValueError)
    {
      // error bar doesn't extend in key dimension (except whisker but we ignore that here), so only use data point center
      const double current = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()));
      if (qIsNaN(current)) continue;
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current < range.lower || !haveLower)
        {
          range.lower = current;
          haveLower = true;
        }
        if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper)
        {
          range.upper = current;
          haveUpper = true;
        }
      }
    } else // mErrorType == etKeyError
    {
      const double dataKey = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()));
      if (qIsNaN(dataKey)) continue;
      // plus error:
      double current = dataKey + (qIsNaN(it->errorPlus) ? 0 : it->errorPlus);
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper)
        {
          range.upper = current;
          haveUpper = true;
        }
      }
      // minus error:
      current = dataKey - (qIsNaN(it->errorMinus) ? 0 : it->errorMinus);
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current < range.lower || !haveLower)
        {
          range.lower = current;
          haveLower = true;
        }
      }
    }
  }
  
  if (haveUpper && !haveLower)
  {
    range.lower = range.upper;
    haveLower = true;
  } else if (haveLower && !haveUpper)
  {
    range.upper = range.lower;
    haveUpper = true;
  }
  
  foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
  return range;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPErrorBars::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  if (!mDataPlottable)
  {
    foundRange = false;
    return {};
  }
  
  QCPRange range;
  const bool restrictKeyRange = inKeyRange != QCPRange();
  bool haveLower = false;
  bool haveUpper = false;
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey() && restrictKeyRange)
  {
    itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+findBegin(inKeyRange.lower, false);
    itEnd = mDataContainer->constBegin()+findEnd(inKeyRange.upper, false);
  }
  for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it)
  {
    if (restrictKeyRange)
    {
      const double dataKey = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()));
      if (dataKey < inKeyRange.lower || dataKey > inKeyRange.upper)
        continue;
    }
    if (mErrorType == etValueError)
    {
      const double dataValue = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()));
      if (qIsNaN(dataValue)) continue;
      // plus error:
      double current = dataValue + (qIsNaN(it->errorPlus) ? 0 : it->errorPlus);
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper)
        {
          range.upper = current;
          haveUpper = true;
        }
      }
      // minus error:
      current = dataValue - (qIsNaN(it->errorMinus) ? 0 : it->errorMinus);
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current < range.lower || !haveLower)
        {
          range.lower = current;
          haveLower = true;
        }
      }
    } else // mErrorType == etKeyError
    {
      // error bar doesn't extend in value dimension (except whisker but we ignore that here), so only use data point center
      const double current = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()));
      if (qIsNaN(current)) continue;
      if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0))
      {
        if (current < range.lower || !haveLower)
        {
          range.lower = current;
          haveLower = true;
        }
        if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper)
        {
          range.upper = current;
          haveUpper = true;
        }
      }
    }
  }
  
  if (haveUpper && !haveLower)
  {
    range.lower = range.upper;
    haveLower = true;
  } else if (haveLower && !haveUpper)
  {
    range.upper = range.lower;
    haveUpper = true;
  }
  
  foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
  return range;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Calculates the lines that make up the error bar belonging to the data point \a it.
 
  The resulting lines are added to \a backbones and \a whiskers. The vectors are not cleared, so
  calling this method with different \a it but the same \a backbones and \a whiskers allows to
  accumulate lines for multiple data points.
 
  This method assumes that \a it is a valid iterator within the bounds of this \ref QCPErrorBars
  instance and within the bounds of the associated data plottable.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::getErrorBarLines(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it, QVector<QLineF> &backbones, QVector<QLineF> &whiskers) const
{
  if (!mDataPlottable) return;
  
  int index = int(it-mDataContainer->constBegin());
  QPointF centerPixel = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index);
  if (qIsNaN(centerPixel.x()) || qIsNaN(centerPixel.y()))
    return;
  QCPAxis *errorAxis = mErrorType == etValueError ? mValueAxis.data() : mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *orthoAxis = mErrorType == etValueError ? mKeyAxis.data() : mValueAxis.data();
  const double centerErrorAxisPixel = errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y();
  const double centerOrthoAxisPixel = orthoAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y();
  const double centerErrorAxisCoord = errorAxis->pixelToCoord(centerErrorAxisPixel); // depending on plottable, this might be different from just mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey/Value
  const double symbolGap = mSymbolGap*0.5*errorAxis->pixelOrientation();
  // plus error:
  double errorStart, errorEnd;
  if (!qIsNaN(it->errorPlus))
  {
    errorStart = centerErrorAxisPixel+symbolGap;
    errorEnd = errorAxis->coordToPixel(centerErrorAxisCoord+it->errorPlus);
    if (errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
    {
      if ((errorStart > errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed())
        backbones.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd));
      whiskers.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd));
    } else
    {
      if ((errorStart < errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed())
        backbones.append(QLineF(errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel));
      whiskers.append(QLineF(errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5));
    }
  }
  // minus error:
  if (!qIsNaN(it->errorMinus))
  {
    errorStart = centerErrorAxisPixel-symbolGap;
    errorEnd = errorAxis->coordToPixel(centerErrorAxisCoord-it->errorMinus);
    if (errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical)
    {
      if ((errorStart < errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed())
        backbones.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd));
      whiskers.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd));
    } else
    {
      if ((errorStart > errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed())
        backbones.append(QLineF(errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel));
      whiskers.append(QLineF(errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5));
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method outputs the currently visible data range via \a begin and \a end. The returned range
  will also never exceed \a rangeRestriction.
 
  Since error bars with type \ref etKeyError may extend to arbitrarily positive and negative key
  coordinates relative to their data point key, this method checks all outer error bars whether
  they truly don't reach into the visible portion of the axis rect, by calling \ref
  errorBarVisible. On the other hand error bars with type \ref etValueError that are associated
  with data plottables whose sort key is equal to the main key (see \ref qcpdatacontainer-datatype
  "QCPDataContainer DataType") can be handled very efficiently by finding the visible range of
  error bars through binary search (\ref QCPPlottableInterface1D::findBegin and \ref
  QCPPlottableInterface1D::findEnd).
 
  If the plottable's sort key is not equal to the main key, this method returns the full data
  range, only restricted by \a rangeRestriction. Drawing optimization then has to be done on a
  point-by-point basis in the \ref draw method.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const
{
  QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    begin = end;
    return;
  }
  if (!mDataPlottable || rangeRestriction.isEmpty())
  {
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    begin = end;
    return;
  }
  if (!mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey())
  {
    // if the sort key isn't the main key, it's not possible to find a contiguous range of visible
    // data points, so this method then only applies the range restriction and otherwise returns
    // the full data range. Visibility checks must be done on a per-datapoin-basis during drawing
    QCPDataRange dataRange(0, mDataContainer->size());
    dataRange = dataRange.bounded(rangeRestriction);
    begin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.begin();
    end = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.end();
    return;
  }
  
  // get visible data range via interface from data plottable, and then restrict to available error data points:
  const int n = qMin(mDataContainer->size(), mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataCount());
  int beginIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findBegin(keyAxis->range().lower);
  int endIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findEnd(keyAxis->range().upper);
  int i = beginIndex;
  while (i > 0 && i < n && i > rangeRestriction.begin())
  {
    if (errorBarVisible(i))
      beginIndex = i;
    --i;
  }
  i = endIndex;
  while (i >= 0 && i < n && i < rangeRestriction.end())
  {
    if (errorBarVisible(i))
      endIndex = i+1;
    ++i;
  }
  QCPDataRange dataRange(beginIndex, endIndex);
  dataRange = dataRange.bounded(rangeRestriction.bounded(QCPDataRange(0, mDataContainer->size())));
  begin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.begin();
  end = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.end();
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Calculates the minimum distance in pixels the error bars' representation has from the given \a
  pixelPoint. This is used to determine whether the error bar was clicked or not, e.g. in \ref
  selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData.
*/
double QCPErrorBars::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const
{
  closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (!mDataPlottable || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1.0;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
    return -1.0;
  }
  
  QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
  getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()));
  
  // calculate minimum distances to error backbones (whiskers are ignored for speed) and find closestData iterator:
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  QVector<QLineF> backbones, whiskers;
  for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
  {
    getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers);
    foreach (const QLineF &backbone, backbones)
    {
      const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pixelPoint).distanceSquaredToLine(backbone);
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
      {
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
        closestData = it;
      }
    }
  }
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  \note This method is identical to \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D::getDataSegments but needs to be
  reproduced here since the \ref QCPErrorBars plottable, as a special case that doesn't have its
  own key/value data coordinates, doesn't derive from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D. See the
  documentation there for details.
*/
void QCPErrorBars::getDataSegments(QList<QCPDataRange> &selectedSegments, QList<QCPDataRange> &unselectedSegments) const
{
  selectedSegments.clear();
  unselectedSegments.clear();
  if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // stWhole selection type draws the entire plottable with selected style if mSelection isn't empty
  {
    if (selected())
      selectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount());
    else
      unselectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount());
  } else
  {
    QCPDataSelection sel(selection());
    sel.simplify();
    selectedSegments = sel.dataRanges();
    unselectedSegments = sel.inverse(QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())).dataRanges();
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns whether the error bar at the specified \a index is visible within the current key axis
  range.
 
  This method assumes for performance reasons without checking that the key axis, the value axis,
  and the data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable) are not \c nullptr and that \a index is within
  valid bounds of this \ref QCPErrorBars instance and the bounds of the data plottable.
*/
bool QCPErrorBars::errorBarVisible(int index) const
{
  QPointF centerPixel = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index);
  const double centerKeyPixel = mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y();
  if (qIsNaN(centerKeyPixel))
    return false;
  
  double keyMin, keyMax;
  if (mErrorType == etKeyError)
  {
    const double centerKey = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel);
    const double errorPlus = mDataContainer->at(index).errorPlus;
    const double errorMinus = mDataContainer->at(index).errorMinus;
    keyMax = centerKey+(qIsNaN(errorPlus) ? 0 : errorPlus);
    keyMin = centerKey-(qIsNaN(errorMinus) ? 0 : errorMinus);
  } else // mErrorType == etValueError
  {
    keyMax = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis->pixelOrientation());
    keyMin = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis->pixelOrientation());
  }
  return ((keyMax > mKeyAxis->range().lower) && (keyMin < mKeyAxis->range().upper));
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns whether \a line intersects (or is contained in) \a pixelRect.
 
  \a line is assumed to be either perfectly horizontal or perfectly vertical, as is the case for
  error bar lines.
*/
bool QCPErrorBars::rectIntersectsLine(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QLineF &line) const
{
  if (pixelRect.left() > line.x1() && pixelRect.left() > line.x2())
    return false;
  else if (pixelRect.right() < line.x1() && pixelRect.right() < line.x2())
    return false;
  else if (pixelRect.top() > line.y1() && pixelRect.top() > line.y2())
    return false;
  else if (pixelRect.bottom() < line.y1() && pixelRect.bottom() < line.y2())
    return false;
  else
    return true;
}
/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-straightline.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 7596          */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemStraightLine
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemStraightLine
  \brief A straight line that spans infinitely in both directions
 
  \image html QCPItemStraightLine.png "Straight line example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a point1 and \a point2, which define the straight line.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a straight line item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemStraightLine::QCPItemStraightLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  point1(createPosition(QLatin1String("point1"))),
  point2(createPosition(QLatin1String("point2")))
{
  point1->setCoords(0, 0);
  point2->setCoords(1, 1);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2));
}
 
QCPItemStraightLine::~QCPItemStraightLine()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
  
  \see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemStraightLine::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemStraightLine::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemStraightLine::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  return QCPVector2D(pos).distanceToStraightLine(point1->pixelPosition(), point2->pixelPosition()-point1->pixelPosition());
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemStraightLine::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QCPVector2D start(point1->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D end(point2->pixelPosition());
  // get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect:
  int clipPad = qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QLineF line = getRectClippedStraightLine(start, end-start, clipRect().adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad));
  // paint visible segment, if existent:
  if (!line.isNull())
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    painter->drawLine(line);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the section of the straight line defined by \a base and direction vector \a
  vec, that is visible in the specified \a rect.
  
  This is a helper function for \ref draw.
*/
QLineF QCPItemStraightLine::getRectClippedStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &base, const QCPVector2D &vec, const QRect &rect) const
{
  double bx, by;
  double gamma;
  QLineF result;
  if (vec.x() == 0 && vec.y() == 0)
    return result;
  if (qFuzzyIsNull(vec.x())) // line is vertical
  {
    // check top of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width())
      result.setLine(bx+gamma, rect.top(), bx+gamma, rect.bottom()); // no need to check bottom because we know line is vertical
  } else if (qFuzzyIsNull(vec.y())) // line is horizontal
  {
    // check left of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height())
      result.setLine(rect.left(), by+gamma, rect.right(), by+gamma); // no need to check right because we know line is horizontal
  } else // line is skewed
  {
    QList<QCPVector2D> pointVectors;
    // check top of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width())
      pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by));
    // check bottom of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.bottom();
    gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width())
      pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by));
    // check left of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height())
      pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma));
    // check right of rect:
    bx = rect.right();
    by = rect.top();
    gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x();
    if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height())
      pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma));
    
    // evaluate points:
    if (pointVectors.size() == 2)
    {
      result.setPoints(pointVectors.at(0).toPointF(), pointVectors.at(1).toPointF());
    } else if (pointVectors.size() > 2)
    {
      // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance:
      double distSqrMax = 0;
      QCPVector2D pv1, pv2;
      for (int i=0; i<pointVectors.size()-1; ++i)
      {
        for (int k=i+1; k<pointVectors.size(); ++k)
        {
          double distSqr = (pointVectors.at(i)-pointVectors.at(k)).lengthSquared();
          if (distSqr > distSqrMax)
          {
            pv1 = pointVectors.at(i);
            pv2 = pointVectors.at(k);
            distSqrMax = distSqr;
          }
        }
      }
      result.setPoints(pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF());
    }
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
  item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemStraightLine::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-straightline.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-line.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 8525  */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemLine
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemLine
  \brief A line from one point to another
 
  \image html QCPItemLine.png "Line example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the line.
  
  With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles, e.g. to create an arrow.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a line item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemLine::QCPItemLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  start(createPosition(QLatin1String("start"))),
  end(createPosition(QLatin1String("end")))
{
  start->setCoords(0, 0);
  end->setCoords(1, 1);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2));
}
 
QCPItemLine::~QCPItemLine()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
  
  \see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemLine::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemLine::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end position.
  
  Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify
  a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
  
  \see setTail
*/
void QCPItemLine::setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head)
{
  mHead = head;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start position.
  
  Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify
  a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
  
  \see setHead
*/
void QCPItemLine::setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail)
{
  mTail = tail;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemLine::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  return qSqrt(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(start->pixelPosition(), end->pixelPosition()));
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemLine::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QCPVector2D startVec(start->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D endVec(end->pixelPosition());
  if (qFuzzyIsNull((startVec-endVec).lengthSquared()))
    return;
  // get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect:
  int clipPad = int(qMax(mHead.boundingDistance(), mTail.boundingDistance()));
  clipPad = qMax(clipPad, qCeil(mainPen().widthF()));
  QLineF line = getRectClippedLine(startVec, endVec, clipRect().adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad));
  // paint visible segment, if existent:
  if (!line.isNull())
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    painter->drawLine(line);
    painter->setBrush(Qt::SolidPattern);
    if (mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
      mTail.draw(painter, startVec, startVec-endVec);
    if (mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
      mHead.draw(painter, endVec, endVec-startVec);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the section of the line defined by \a start and \a end, that is visible in the specified
  \a rect.
  
  This is a helper function for \ref draw.
*/
QLineF QCPItemLine::getRectClippedLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end, const QRect &rect) const
{
  bool containsStart = rect.contains(qRound(start.x()), qRound(start.y()));
  bool containsEnd = rect.contains(qRound(end.x()), qRound(end.y()));
  if (containsStart && containsEnd)
    return {start.toPointF(), end.toPointF()};
  
  QCPVector2D base = start;
  QCPVector2D vec = end-start;
  double bx, by;
  double gamma, mu;
  QLineF result;
  QList<QCPVector2D> pointVectors;
 
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vec.y())) // line is not horizontal
  {
    // check top of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    mu = (by-base.y())/vec.y();
    if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1)
    {
      gamma = base.x()-bx + mu*vec.x();
      if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width())
        pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by));
    }
    // check bottom of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.bottom();
    mu = (by-base.y())/vec.y();
    if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1)
    {
      gamma = base.x()-bx + mu*vec.x();
      if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width())
        pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by));
    }
  }
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vec.x())) // line is not vertical
  {
    // check left of rect:
    bx = rect.left();
    by = rect.top();
    mu = (bx-base.x())/vec.x();
    if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1)
    {
      gamma = base.y()-by + mu*vec.y();
      if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height())
        pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma));
    }
    // check right of rect:
    bx = rect.right();
    by = rect.top();
    mu = (bx-base.x())/vec.x();
    if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1)
    {
      gamma = base.y()-by + mu*vec.y();
      if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height())
        pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma));
    }
  }
  
  if (containsStart)
    pointVectors.append(start);
  if (containsEnd)
    pointVectors.append(end);
  
  // evaluate points:
  if (pointVectors.size() == 2)
  {
    result.setPoints(pointVectors.at(0).toPointF(), pointVectors.at(1).toPointF());
  } else if (pointVectors.size() > 2)
  {
    // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance:
    double distSqrMax = 0;
    QCPVector2D pv1, pv2;
    for (int i=0; i<pointVectors.size()-1; ++i)
    {
      for (int k=i+1; k<pointVectors.size(); ++k)
      {
        double distSqr = (pointVectors.at(i)-pointVectors.at(k)).lengthSquared();
        if (distSqr > distSqrMax)
        {
          pv1 = pointVectors.at(i);
          pv2 = pointVectors.at(k);
          distSqrMax = distSqr;
        }
      }
    }
    result.setPoints(pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF());
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
  item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemLine::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-line.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-curve.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 7273   */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemCurve
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemCurve
  \brief A curved line from one point to another
 
  \image html QCPItemCurve.png "Curve example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has four positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the line, and two
  control points which define the direction the line exits from the start and the direction from
  which it approaches the end: \a startDir and \a endDir.
  
  With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles, e.g. to create an
  arrow.
  
  Often it is desirable for the control points to stay at fixed relative positions to the start/end
  point. This can be achieved by setting the parent anchor e.g. of \a startDir simply to \a start,
  and then specify the desired pixel offset with QCPItemPosition::setCoords on \a startDir.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a curve item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemCurve::QCPItemCurve(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  start(createPosition(QLatin1String("start"))),
  startDir(createPosition(QLatin1String("startDir"))),
  endDir(createPosition(QLatin1String("endDir"))),
  end(createPosition(QLatin1String("end")))
{
  start->setCoords(0, 0);
  startDir->setCoords(0.5, 0);
  endDir->setCoords(0, 0.5);
  end->setCoords(1, 1);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2));
}
 
QCPItemCurve::~QCPItemCurve()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
  
  \see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end position.
  
  Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify
  a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
  
  \see setTail
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head)
{
  mHead = head;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start position.
  
  Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify
  a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
  
  \see setHead
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail)
{
  mTail = tail;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemCurve::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  QPointF startVec(start->pixelPosition());
  QPointF startDirVec(startDir->pixelPosition());
  QPointF endDirVec(endDir->pixelPosition());
  QPointF endVec(end->pixelPosition());
 
  QPainterPath cubicPath(startVec);
  cubicPath.cubicTo(startDirVec, endDirVec, endVec);
  
  QList<QPolygonF> polygons = cubicPath.toSubpathPolygons();
  if (polygons.isEmpty())
    return -1;
  const QPolygonF polygon = polygons.first();
  QCPVector2D p(pos);
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  for (int i=1; i<polygon.size(); ++i)
  {
    double distSqr = p.distanceSquaredToLine(polygon.at(i-1), polygon.at(i));
    if (distSqr < minDistSqr)
      minDistSqr = distSqr;
  }
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemCurve::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QCPVector2D startVec(start->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D startDirVec(startDir->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D endDirVec(endDir->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D endVec(end->pixelPosition());
  if ((endVec-startVec).length() > 1e10) // too large curves cause crash
    return;
 
  QPainterPath cubicPath(startVec.toPointF());
  cubicPath.cubicTo(startDirVec.toPointF(), endDirVec.toPointF(), endVec.toPointF());
 
  // paint visible segment, if existent:
  const int clipEnlarge = qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-clipEnlarge, -clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge);
  QRect cubicRect = cubicPath.controlPointRect().toRect();
  if (cubicRect.isEmpty()) // may happen when start and end exactly on same x or y position
    cubicRect.adjust(0, 0, 1, 1);
  if (clip.intersects(cubicRect))
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    painter->drawPath(cubicPath);
    painter->setBrush(Qt::SolidPattern);
    if (mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
      mTail.draw(painter, startVec, M_PI-cubicPath.angleAtPercent(0)/180.0*M_PI);
    if (mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone)
      mHead.draw(painter, endVec, -cubicPath.angleAtPercent(1)/180.0*M_PI);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
  item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemCurve::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-curve.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-rect.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 6472  */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemRect
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemRect
  \brief A rectangle
 
  \image html QCPItemRect.png "Rectangle example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rectangle.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a rectangle item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemRect::QCPItemRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))),
  bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))),
  top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)),
  topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)),
  right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)),
  bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)),
  bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)),
  left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft))
{
  topLeft->setCoords(0, 1);
  bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
}
 
QCPItemRect::~QCPItemRect()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle
  
  \see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemRect::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemRect::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle. To disable filling, set \a brush to
  Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemRect::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle when selected. To disable filling, set \a
  brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemRect::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemRect::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition()).normalized();
  bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0;
  return rectDistance(rect, pos, filledRect);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition();
  QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition();
  if (p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint())
    return;
  QRectF rect = QRectF(p1, p2).normalized();
  double clipPad = mainPen().widthF();
  QRectF boundingRect = rect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad);
  if (boundingRect.intersects(clipRect())) // only draw if bounding rect of rect item is visible in cliprect
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    painter->setBrush(mainBrush());
    painter->drawRect(rect);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemRect::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition());
  switch (anchorId)
  {
    case aiTop:         return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5;
    case aiTopRight:    return rect.topRight();
    case aiRight:       return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottom:      return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottomLeft:  return rect.bottomLeft();
    case aiLeft:        return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5;
  }
  
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemRect::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item
  is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemRect::mainBrush() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-rect.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-text.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 13335 */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemText
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemText
  \brief A text label
 
  \image html QCPItemText.png "Text example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  Its position is defined by the member \a position and the setting of \ref setPositionAlignment.
  The latter controls which part of the text rect shall be aligned with \a position.
  
  The text alignment itself (i.e. left, center, right) can be controlled with \ref
  setTextAlignment.
  
  The text may be rotated around the \a position point with \ref setRotation.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a text item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemText::QCPItemText(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  position(createPosition(QLatin1String("position"))),
  topLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topLeft"), aiTopLeft)),
  top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)),
  topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)),
  right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)),
  bottomRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomRight"), aiBottomRight)),
  bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)),
  bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)),
  left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)),
  mText(QLatin1String("text")),
  mPositionAlignment(Qt::AlignCenter),
  mTextAlignment(Qt::AlignTop|Qt::AlignHCenter),
  mRotation(0)
{
  position->setCoords(0, 0);
  
  setPen(Qt::NoPen);
  setSelectedPen(Qt::NoPen);
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setColor(Qt::black);
  setSelectedColor(Qt::blue);
}
 
QCPItemText::~QCPItemText()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the text.
*/
void QCPItemText::setColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the text that will be used when the item is selected.
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text. To disable the
  border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen.
  
  \see setSelectedPen, setBrush, setPadding
*/
void QCPItemText::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text, when the item is
  selected. To disable the border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen.
  
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text. To disable the
  background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setSelectedBrush, setPen, setPadding
*/
void QCPItemText::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text, when the item is selected. To disable the
  background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the text.
  
  \see setSelectedFont, setColor
*/
void QCPItemText::setFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the text that will be used when the item is selected.
  
  \see setFont
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the text that will be displayed. Multi-line texts are supported by inserting a line break
  character, e.g. '\n'.
  
  \see setFont, setColor, setTextAlignment
*/
void QCPItemText::setText(const QString &text)
{
  mText = text;
}
 
/*!
  Sets which point of the text rect shall be aligned with \a position.
  
  Examples:
  \li If \a alignment is <tt>Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignTop</tt>, the text will be positioned such
  that the top of the text rect will be horizontally centered on \a position.
  \li If \a alignment is <tt>Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignBottom</tt>, \a position will indicate the
  bottom left corner of the text rect.
  
  If you want to control the alignment of (multi-lined) text within the text rect, use \ref
  setTextAlignment.
*/
void QCPItemText::setPositionAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment)
{
  mPositionAlignment = alignment;
}
 
/*!
  Controls how (multi-lined) text is aligned inside the text rect (typically Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignCenter or Qt::AlignRight).
*/
void QCPItemText::setTextAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment)
{
  mTextAlignment = alignment;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the angle in degrees by which the text (and the text rectangle, if visible) will be rotated
  around \a position.
*/
void QCPItemText::setRotation(double degrees)
{
  mRotation = degrees;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the border of the text rectangle and the text. The appearance (and
  visibility) of the text rectangle can be controlled with \ref setPen and \ref setBrush.
*/
void QCPItemText::setPadding(const QMargins &padding)
{
  mPadding = padding;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemText::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  // The rect may be rotated, so we transform the actual clicked pos to the rotated
  // coordinate system, so we can use the normal rectDistance function for non-rotated rects:
  QPointF positionPixels(position->pixelPosition());
  QTransform inputTransform;
  inputTransform.translate(positionPixels.x(), positionPixels.y());
  inputTransform.rotate(-mRotation);
  inputTransform.translate(-positionPixels.x(), -positionPixels.y());
  QPointF rotatedPos = inputTransform.map(pos);
  QFontMetrics fontMetrics(mFont);
  QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText);
  QRect textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom());
  QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(positionPixels, textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment);
  textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint());
 
  return rectDistance(textBoxRect, rotatedPos, true);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemText::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QPointF pos(position->pixelPosition());
  QTransform transform = painter->transform();
  transform.translate(pos.x(), pos.y());
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(mRotation))
    transform.rotate(mRotation);
  painter->setFont(mainFont());
  QRect textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText);
  QRect textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom());
  QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(QPointF(0, 0), textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation
  textRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint()+QPoint(mPadding.left(), mPadding.top()));
  textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint());
  int clipPad = qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QRect boundingRect = textBoxRect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad);
  if (transform.mapRect(boundingRect).intersects(painter->transform().mapRect(clipRect())))
  {
    painter->setTransform(transform);
    if ((mainBrush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && mainBrush().color().alpha() != 0) ||
        (mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0))
    {
      painter->setPen(mainPen());
      painter->setBrush(mainBrush());
      painter->drawRect(textBoxRect);
    }
    painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
    painter->setPen(QPen(mainColor()));
    painter->drawText(textRect, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText);
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemText::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  // get actual rect points (pretty much copied from draw function):
  QPointF pos(position->pixelPosition());
  QTransform transform;
  transform.translate(pos.x(), pos.y());
  if (!qFuzzyIsNull(mRotation))
    transform.rotate(mRotation);
  QFontMetrics fontMetrics(mainFont());
  QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText);
  QRectF textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom());
  QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(QPointF(0, 0), textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation
  textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint());
  QPolygonF rectPoly = transform.map(QPolygonF(textBoxRect));
  
  switch (anchorId)
  {
    case aiTopLeft:     return rectPoly.at(0);
    case aiTop:         return (rectPoly.at(0)+rectPoly.at(1))*0.5;
    case aiTopRight:    return rectPoly.at(1);
    case aiRight:       return (rectPoly.at(1)+rectPoly.at(2))*0.5;
    case aiBottomRight: return rectPoly.at(2);
    case aiBottom:      return (rectPoly.at(2)+rectPoly.at(3))*0.5;
    case aiBottomLeft:  return rectPoly.at(3);
    case aiLeft:        return (rectPoly.at(3)+rectPoly.at(0))*0.5;
  }
  
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the point that must be given to the QPainter::drawText function (which expects the top
  left point of the text rect), according to the position \a pos, the text bounding box \a rect and
  the requested \a positionAlignment.
  
  For example, if \a positionAlignment is <tt>Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignBottom</tt> the returned point
  will be shifted upward by the height of \a rect, starting from \a pos. So if the text is finally
  drawn at that point, the lower left corner of the resulting text rect is at \a pos.
*/
QPointF QCPItemText::getTextDrawPoint(const QPointF &pos, const QRectF &rect, Qt::Alignment positionAlignment) const
{
  if (positionAlignment == 0 || positionAlignment == (Qt::AlignLeft|Qt::AlignTop))
    return pos;
  
  QPointF result = pos; // start at top left
  if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignHCenter))
    result.rx() -= rect.width()/2.0;
  else if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignRight))
    result.rx() -= rect.width();
  if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignVCenter))
    result.ry() -= rect.height()/2.0;
  else if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignBottom))
    result.ry() -= rect.height();
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the font that should be used for drawing text. Returns mFont when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedFont when it is.
*/
QFont QCPItemText::mainFont() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the color that should be used for drawing text. Returns mColor when the item is not
  selected and mSelectedColor when it is.
*/
QColor QCPItemText::mainColor() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedColor : mColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemText::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item
  is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemText::mainBrush() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-text.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-ellipse.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 7881     */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemEllipse
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemEllipse
  \brief An ellipse
 
  \image html QCPItemEllipse.png "Ellipse example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rect the ellipse will be drawn in.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates an ellipse item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemEllipse::QCPItemEllipse(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))),
  bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))),
  topLeftRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topLeftRim"), aiTopLeftRim)),
  top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)),
  topRightRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRightRim"), aiTopRightRim)),
  right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)),
  bottomRightRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomRightRim"), aiBottomRightRim)),
  bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)),
  bottomLeftRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeftRim"), aiBottomLeftRim)),
  left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)),
  center(createAnchor(QLatin1String("center"), aiCenter))
{
  topLeft->setCoords(0, 1);
  bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
}
 
QCPItemEllipse::~QCPItemEllipse()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse
  
  \see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse. To disable filling, set \a brush to
  Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse when selected. To disable filling, set \a
  brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemEllipse::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition();
  QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition();
  QPointF center((p1+p2)/2.0);
  double a = qAbs(p1.x()-p2.x())/2.0;
  double b = qAbs(p1.y()-p2.y())/2.0;
  double x = pos.x()-center.x();
  double y = pos.y()-center.y();
  
  // distance to border:
  double c = 1.0/qSqrt(x*x/(a*a)+y*y/(b*b));
  double result = qAbs(c-1)*qSqrt(x*x+y*y);
  // filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit:
  if (result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0)
  {
    if (x*x/(a*a) + y*y/(b*b) <= 1)
      result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  }
  return result;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemEllipse::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition();
  QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition();
  if (p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint())
    return;
  QRectF ellipseRect = QRectF(p1, p2).normalized();
  const int clipEnlarge = qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-clipEnlarge, -clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge);
  if (ellipseRect.intersects(clip)) // only draw if bounding rect of ellipse is visible in cliprect
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    painter->setBrush(mainBrush());
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
    try // drawEllipse sometimes throws exceptions if ellipse is too big
    {
#endif
      painter->drawEllipse(ellipseRect);
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
    } catch (...)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item too large for memory, setting invisible";
      setVisible(false);
    }
#endif
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemEllipse::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition());
  switch (anchorId)
  {
    case aiTopLeftRim:     return rect.center()+(rect.topLeft()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2);
    case aiTop:            return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5;
    case aiTopRightRim:    return rect.center()+(rect.topRight()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2);
    case aiRight:          return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottomRightRim: return rect.center()+(rect.bottomRight()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2);
    case aiBottom:         return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottomLeftRim:  return rect.center()+(rect.bottomLeft()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2);
    case aiLeft:           return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5;
    case aiCenter:         return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
  }
  
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemEllipse::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item
  is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemEllipse::mainBrush() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-ellipse.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-pixmap.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 10622   */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemPixmap
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemPixmap
  \brief An arbitrary pixmap
 
  \image html QCPItemPixmap.png "Pixmap example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rectangle the pixmap will
  be drawn in. Depending on the scale setting (\ref setScaled), the pixmap will be either scaled to
  fit the rectangle or be drawn aligned to the topLeft position.
  
  If scaling is enabled and \a topLeft is further to the bottom/right than \a bottomRight (as shown
  on the right side of the example image), the pixmap will be flipped in the respective
  orientations.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a rectangle item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemPixmap::QCPItemPixmap(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))),
  bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))),
  top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)),
  topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)),
  right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)),
  bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)),
  bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)),
  left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)),
  mScaled(false),
  mScaledPixmapInvalidated(true),
  mAspectRatioMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatio),
  mTransformationMode(Qt::SmoothTransformation)
{
  topLeft->setCoords(0, 1);
  bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0);
  
  setPen(Qt::NoPen);
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue));
}
 
QCPItemPixmap::~QCPItemPixmap()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pixmap that will be displayed.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
  mPixmap = pixmap;
  mScaledPixmapInvalidated = true;
  if (mPixmap.isNull())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "pixmap is null";
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the pixmap will be scaled to fit the rectangle defined by the \a topLeft and \a
  bottomRight positions.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setScaled(bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode, Qt::TransformationMode transformationMode)
{
  mScaled = scaled;
  mAspectRatioMode = aspectRatioMode;
  mTransformationMode = transformationMode;
  mScaledPixmapInvalidated = true;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap.
  
  \see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemPixmap::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  return rectDistance(getFinalRect(), pos, true);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemPixmap::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  bool flipHorz = false;
  bool flipVert = false;
  QRect rect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert);
  int clipPad = mainPen().style() == Qt::NoPen ? 0 : qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QRect boundingRect = rect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad);
  if (boundingRect.intersects(clipRect()))
  {
    updateScaledPixmap(rect, flipHorz, flipVert);
    painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), mScaled ? mScaledPixmap : mPixmap);
    QPen pen = mainPen();
    if (pen.style() != Qt::NoPen)
    {
      painter->setPen(pen);
      painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
      painter->drawRect(rect);
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemPixmap::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  bool flipHorz = false;
  bool flipVert = false;
  QRect rect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert);
  // we actually want denormal rects (negative width/height) here, so restore
  // the flipped state:
  if (flipHorz)
    rect.adjust(rect.width(), 0, -rect.width(), 0);
  if (flipVert)
    rect.adjust(0, rect.height(), 0, -rect.height());
  
  switch (anchorId)
  {
    case aiTop:         return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5;
    case aiTopRight:    return rect.topRight();
    case aiRight:       return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottom:      return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5;
    case aiBottomLeft:  return rect.bottomLeft();
    case aiLeft:        return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5;
  }
  
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Creates the buffered scaled image (\a mScaledPixmap) to fit the specified \a finalRect. The
  parameters \a flipHorz and \a flipVert control whether the resulting image shall be flipped
  horizontally or vertically. (This is used when \a topLeft is further to the bottom/right than \a
  bottomRight.)
  
  This function only creates the scaled pixmap when the buffered pixmap has a different size than
  the expected result, so calling this function repeatedly, e.g. in the \ref draw function, does
  not cause expensive rescaling every time.
  
  If scaling is disabled, sets mScaledPixmap to a null QPixmap.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::updateScaledPixmap(QRect finalRect, bool flipHorz, bool flipVert)
{
  if (mPixmap.isNull())
    return;
  
  if (mScaled)
  {
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    double devicePixelRatio = mPixmap.devicePixelRatio();
#else
    double devicePixelRatio = 1.0;
#endif
    if (finalRect.isNull())
      finalRect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert);
    if (mScaledPixmapInvalidated || finalRect.size() != mScaledPixmap.size()/devicePixelRatio)
    {
      mScaledPixmap = mPixmap.scaled(finalRect.size()*devicePixelRatio, mAspectRatioMode, mTransformationMode);
      if (flipHorz || flipVert)
        mScaledPixmap = QPixmap::fromImage(mScaledPixmap.toImage().mirrored(flipHorz, flipVert));
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
      mScaledPixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(devicePixelRatio);
#endif
    }
  } else if (!mScaledPixmap.isNull())
    mScaledPixmap = QPixmap();
  mScaledPixmapInvalidated = false;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the final (tight) rect the pixmap is drawn in, depending on the current item positions
  and scaling settings.
  
  The output parameters \a flippedHorz and \a flippedVert return whether the pixmap should be drawn
  flipped horizontally or vertically in the returned rect. (The returned rect itself is always
  normalized, i.e. the top left corner of the rect is actually further to the top/left than the
  bottom right corner). This is the case when the item position \a topLeft is further to the
  bottom/right than \a bottomRight.
  
  If scaling is disabled, returns a rect with size of the original pixmap and the top left corner
  aligned with the item position \a topLeft. The position \a bottomRight is ignored.
*/
QRect QCPItemPixmap::getFinalRect(bool *flippedHorz, bool *flippedVert) const
{
  QRect result;
  bool flipHorz = false;
  bool flipVert = false;
  QPoint p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition().toPoint();
  QPoint p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition().toPoint();
  if (p1 == p2)
    return {p1, QSize(0, 0)};
  if (mScaled)
  {
    QSize newSize = QSize(p2.x()-p1.x(), p2.y()-p1.y());
    QPoint topLeft = p1;
    if (newSize.width() < 0)
    {
      flipHorz = true;
      newSize.rwidth() *= -1;
      topLeft.setX(p2.x());
    }
    if (newSize.height() < 0)
    {
      flipVert = true;
      newSize.rheight() *= -1;
      topLeft.setY(p2.y());
    }
    QSize scaledSize = mPixmap.size();
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    scaledSize /= mPixmap.devicePixelRatio();
    scaledSize.scale(newSize*mPixmap.devicePixelRatio(), mAspectRatioMode);
#else
    scaledSize.scale(newSize, mAspectRatioMode);
#endif
    result = QRect(topLeft, scaledSize);
  } else
  {
#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED
    result = QRect(p1, mPixmap.size()/mPixmap.devicePixelRatio());
#else
    result = QRect(p1, mPixmap.size());
#endif
  }
  if (flippedHorz)
    *flippedHorz = flipHorz;
  if (flippedVert)
    *flippedVert = flipVert;
  return result;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemPixmap::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-pixmap.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-tracer.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 14645   */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemTracer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemTracer
  \brief Item that sticks to QCPGraph data points
 
  \image html QCPItemTracer.png "Tracer example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  The tracer can be connected with a QCPGraph via \ref setGraph. Then it will automatically adopt
  the coordinate axes of the graph and update its \a position to be on the graph's data. This means
  the key stays controllable via \ref setGraphKey, but the value will follow the graph data. If a
  QCPGraph is connected, note that setting the coordinates of the tracer item directly via \a
  position will have no effect because they will be overriden in the next redraw (this is when the
  coordinate update happens).
  
  If the specified key in \ref setGraphKey is outside the key bounds of the graph, the tracer will
  stay at the corresponding end of the graph.
  
  With \ref setInterpolating you may specify whether the tracer may only stay exactly on data
  points or whether it interpolates data points linearly, if given a key that lies between two data
  points of the graph.
  
  The tracer has different visual styles, see \ref setStyle. It is also possible to make the tracer
  have no own visual appearance (set the style to \ref tsNone), and just connect other item
  positions to the tracer \a position (used as an anchor) via \ref
  QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor.
  
  \note The tracer position is only automatically updated upon redraws. So when the data of the
  graph changes and immediately afterwards (without a redraw) the position coordinates of the
  tracer are retrieved, they will not reflect the updated data of the graph. In this case \ref
  updatePosition must be called manually, prior to reading the tracer coordinates.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a tracer item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemTracer::QCPItemTracer(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  position(createPosition(QLatin1String("position"))),
  mSize(6),
  mStyle(tsCrosshair),
  mGraph(nullptr),
  mGraphKey(0),
  mInterpolating(false)
{
  position->setCoords(0, 0);
 
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2));
}
 
QCPItemTracer::~QCPItemTracer()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer
  
  \see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer
  
  \see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer, when selected.
  
  \see setBrush, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the size of the tracer in pixels, if the style supports setting a size (e.g. \ref tsSquare
  does, \ref tsCrosshair does not).
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSize(double size)
{
  mSize = size;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the style/visual appearance of the tracer.
  
  If you only want to use the tracer \a position as an anchor for other items, set \a style to
  \ref tsNone.
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setStyle(QCPItemTracer::TracerStyle style)
{
  mStyle = style;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the QCPGraph this tracer sticks to. The tracer \a position will be set to type
  QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords and the axes will be set to the axes of \a graph.
  
  To free the tracer from any graph, set \a graph to \c nullptr. The tracer \a position can then be
  placed freely like any other item position. This is the state the tracer will assume when its
  graph gets deleted while still attached to it.
  
  \see setGraphKey
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setGraph(QCPGraph *graph)
{
  if (graph)
  {
    if (graph->parentPlot() == mParentPlot)
    {
      position->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords);
      position->setAxes(graph->keyAxis(), graph->valueAxis());
      mGraph = graph;
      updatePosition();
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph isn't in same QCustomPlot instance as this item";
  } else
  {
    mGraph = nullptr;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the key of the graph's data point the tracer will be positioned at. This is the only free
  coordinate of a tracer when attached to a graph.
  
  Depending on \ref setInterpolating, the tracer will be either positioned on the data point
  closest to \a key, or will stay exactly at \a key and interpolate the value linearly.
  
  \see setGraph, setInterpolating
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setGraphKey(double key)
{
  mGraphKey = key;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the value of the graph's data points shall be interpolated, when positioning the
  tracer.
  
  If \a enabled is set to false and a key is given with \ref setGraphKey, the tracer is placed on
  the data point of the graph which is closest to the key, but which is not necessarily exactly
  there. If \a enabled is true, the tracer will be positioned exactly at the specified key, and
  the appropriate value will be interpolated from the graph's data points linearly.
  
  \see setGraph, setGraphKey
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setInterpolating(bool enabled)
{
  mInterpolating = enabled;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemTracer::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
 
  QPointF center(position->pixelPosition());
  double w = mSize/2.0;
  QRect clip = clipRect();
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case tsNone: return -1;
    case tsPlus:
    {
      if (clipRect().intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
        return qSqrt(qMin(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(center+QPointF(-w, 0), center+QPointF(w, 0)),
                          QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(center+QPointF(0, -w), center+QPointF(0, w))));
      break;
    }
    case tsCrosshair:
    {
      return qSqrt(qMin(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(clip.left(), center.y()), QCPVector2D(clip.right(), center.y())),
                        QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(center.x(), clip.top()), QCPVector2D(center.x(), clip.bottom()))));
    }
    case tsCircle:
    {
      if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
      {
        // distance to border:
        double centerDist = QCPVector2D(center-pos).length();
        double circleLine = w;
        double result = qAbs(centerDist-circleLine);
        // filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit:
        if (result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0)
        {
          if (centerDist <= circleLine)
            result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
        }
        return result;
      }
      break;
    }
    case tsSquare:
    {
      if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
      {
        QRectF rect = QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w));
        bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0;
        return rectDistance(rect, pos, filledRect);
      }
      break;
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemTracer::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  updatePosition();
  if (mStyle == tsNone)
    return;
 
  painter->setPen(mainPen());
  painter->setBrush(mainBrush());
  QPointF center(position->pixelPosition());
  double w = mSize/2.0;
  QRect clip = clipRect();
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case tsNone: return;
    case tsPlus:
    {
      if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
      {
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(center+QPointF(-w, 0), center+QPointF(w, 0)));
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(center+QPointF(0, -w), center+QPointF(0, w)));
      }
      break;
    }
    case tsCrosshair:
    {
      if (center.y() > clip.top() && center.y() < clip.bottom())
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(clip.left(), center.y(), clip.right(), center.y()));
      if (center.x() > clip.left() && center.x() < clip.right())
        painter->drawLine(QLineF(center.x(), clip.top(), center.x(), clip.bottom()));
      break;
    }
    case tsCircle:
    {
      if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
        painter->drawEllipse(center, w, w);
      break;
    }
    case tsSquare:
    {
      if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect()))
        painter->drawRect(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)));
      break;
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  If the tracer is connected with a graph (\ref setGraph), this function updates the tracer's \a
  position to reside on the graph data, depending on the configured key (\ref setGraphKey).
  
  It is called automatically on every redraw and normally doesn't need to be called manually. One
  exception is when you want to read the tracer coordinates via \a position and are not sure that
  the graph's data (or the tracer key with \ref setGraphKey) hasn't changed since the last redraw.
  In that situation, call this function before accessing \a position, to make sure you don't get
  out-of-date coordinates.
  
  If there is no graph set on this tracer, this function does nothing.
*/
void QCPItemTracer::updatePosition()
{
  if (mGraph)
  {
    if (mParentPlot->hasPlottable(mGraph))
    {
      if (mGraph->data()->size() > 1)
      {
        QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator first = mGraph->data()->constBegin();
        QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator last = mGraph->data()->constEnd()-1;
        if (mGraphKey <= first->key)
          position->setCoords(first->key, first->value);
        else if (mGraphKey >= last->key)
          position->setCoords(last->key, last->value);
        else
        {
          QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->findBegin(mGraphKey);
          if (it != mGraph->data()->constEnd()) // mGraphKey is not exactly on last iterator, but somewhere between iterators
          {
            QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator prevIt = it;
            ++it; // won't advance to constEnd because we handled that case (mGraphKey >= last->key) before
            if (mInterpolating)
            {
              // interpolate between iterators around mGraphKey:
              double slope = 0;
              if (!qFuzzyCompare(double(it->key), double(prevIt->key)))
                slope = (it->value-prevIt->value)/(it->key-prevIt->key);
              position->setCoords(mGraphKey, (mGraphKey-prevIt->key)*slope+prevIt->value);
            } else
            {
              // find iterator with key closest to mGraphKey:
              if (mGraphKey < (prevIt->key+it->key)*0.5)
                position->setCoords(prevIt->key, prevIt->value);
              else
                position->setCoords(it->key, it->value);
            }
          } else // mGraphKey is exactly on last iterator (should actually be caught when comparing first/last keys, but this is a failsafe for fp uncertainty)
            position->setCoords(it->key, it->value);
        }
      } else if (mGraph->data()->size() == 1)
      {
        QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->constBegin();
        position->setCoords(it->key, it->value);
      } else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph has no data";
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph not contained in QCustomPlot instance (anymore)";
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected
  and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemTracer::mainPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item
  is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemTracer::mainBrush() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-tracer.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/items/item-bracket.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:56, size 10705    */
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemBracket
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPItemBracket
  \brief A bracket for referencing/highlighting certain parts in the plot.
 
  \image html QCPItemBracket.png "Bracket example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
 
  It has two positions, \a left and \a right, which define the span of the bracket. If \a left is
  actually farther to the left than \a right, the bracket is opened to the bottom, as shown in the
  example image.
  
  The bracket supports multiple styles via \ref setStyle. The length, i.e. how far the bracket
  stretches away from the embraced span, can be controlled with \ref setLength.
  
  \image html QCPItemBracket-length.png
  <center>Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for styles \ref
  bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for reference.</center>
  
  It provides an anchor \a center, to allow connection of other items, e.g. an arrow (QCPItemLine
  or QCPItemCurve) or a text label (QCPItemText), to the bracket.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a bracket item and sets default values.
  
  The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes
  ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead.
*/
QCPItemBracket::QCPItemBracket(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
  left(createPosition(QLatin1String("left"))),
  right(createPosition(QLatin1String("right"))),
  center(createAnchor(QLatin1String("center"), aiCenter)),
  mLength(8),
  mStyle(bsCalligraphic)
{
  left->setCoords(0, 0);
  right->setCoords(1, 1);
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::black));
  setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2));
}
 
QCPItemBracket::~QCPItemBracket()
{
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket.
  
  Note that when the style is \ref bsCalligraphic, only the color will be taken from the pen, the
  stroke and width are ignored. To change the apparent stroke width of a calligraphic bracket, use
  \ref setLength, which has a similar effect.
  
  \see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket when selected
  
  \see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the \a length in pixels how far the bracket extends in the direction towards the embraced
  span of the bracket (i.e. perpendicular to the <i>left</i>-<i>right</i>-direction)
  
  \image html QCPItemBracket-length.png
  <center>Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for styles \ref
  bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for reference.</center>
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setLength(double length)
{
  mLength = length;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the style of the bracket, i.e. the shape/visual appearance.
  
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setStyle(QCPItemBracket::BracketStyle style)
{
  mStyle = style;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemBracket::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable)
    return -1;
  
  QCPVector2D p(pos);
  QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition());
  if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint())
    return -1;
  
  QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5;
  QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength;
  QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec;
  
  switch (mStyle)
  {
    case QCPItemBracket::bsSquare:
    case QCPItemBracket::bsRound:
    {
      double a = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec, centerVec+widthVec);
      double b = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec, centerVec-widthVec);
      double c = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec, centerVec+widthVec);
      return qSqrt(qMin(qMin(a, b), c));
    }
    case QCPItemBracket::bsCurly:
    case QCPItemBracket::bsCalligraphic:
    {
      double a = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15, centerVec+lengthVec*0.3);
      double b = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec*0.7, centerVec-widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15);
      double c = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15, centerVec+lengthVec*0.3);
      double d = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec*0.7, centerVec+widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15);
      return qSqrt(qMin(qMin(a, b), qMin(c, d)));
    }
  }
  return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemBracket::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition());
  if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint())
    return;
  
  QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5;
  QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength;
  QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec;
 
  QPolygon boundingPoly;
  boundingPoly << leftVec.toPoint() << rightVec.toPoint()
               << (rightVec-lengthVec).toPoint() << (leftVec-lengthVec).toPoint();
  const int clipEnlarge = qCeil(mainPen().widthF());
  QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-clipEnlarge, -clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge, clipEnlarge);
  if (clip.intersects(boundingPoly.boundingRect()))
  {
    painter->setPen(mainPen());
    switch (mStyle)
    {
      case bsSquare:
      {
        painter->drawLine((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec).toPointF());
        painter->drawLine((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        painter->drawLine((centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        break;
      }
      case bsRound:
      {
        painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
        QPainterPath path;
        path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        painter->drawPath(path);
        break;
      }
      case bsCurly:
      {
        painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
        QPainterPath path;
        path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec+0.4*widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec-0.4*widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        painter->drawPath(path);
        break;
      }
      case bsCalligraphic:
      {
        painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen);
        painter->setBrush(QBrush(mainPen().color()));
        QPainterPath path;
        path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        
        path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec+0.4*widthVec+0.8*lengthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec-0.4*widthVec+0.8*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        
        path.cubicTo((centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.5).toPointF(), (centerVec-0.2*widthVec+1.2*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+lengthVec*0.2).toPointF());
        path.cubicTo((centerVec+0.2*widthVec+1.2*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.5).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF());
        
        painter->drawPath(path);
        break;
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemBracket::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const
{
  QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition());
  QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition());
  if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint())
    return leftVec.toPointF();
  
  QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5;
  QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength;
  QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec;
  
  switch (anchorId)
  {
    case aiCenter:
      return centerVec.toPointF();
  }
  qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
  return {};
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
  item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemBracket::mainPen() const
{
    return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/* end of 'src/items/item-bracket.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/polar/radialaxis.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 49415  */
 
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPolarAxisRadial
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPolarAxisRadial
  \brief The radial axis inside a radial plot
  
  \warning In this QCustomPlot version, polar plots are a tech preview. Expect documentation and
  functionality to be incomplete, as well as changing public interfaces in the future.
  
  Each axis holds an instance of QCPAxisTicker which is used to generate the tick coordinates and
  tick labels. You can access the currently installed \ref ticker or set a new one (possibly one of
  the specialized subclasses, or your own subclass) via \ref setTicker. For details, see the
  documentation of QCPAxisTicker.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> QCPPolarAxisRadial::ticker() const
 
  Returns a modifiable shared pointer to the currently installed axis ticker. The axis ticker is
  responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels of this axis. You can access the
  \ref QCPAxisTicker with this method and modify basic properties such as the approximate tick count
  (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount).
 
  You can gain more control over the axis ticks by setting a different \ref QCPAxisTicker subclass, see
  the documentation there. A new axis ticker can be set with \ref setTicker.
 
  Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis
  ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes.
 
  \see setTicker
*/
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
 
/*! \fn void QCPPolarAxisRadial::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange)
 
  This signal is emitted when the range of this axis has changed. You can connect it to the \ref
  setRange slot of another axis to communicate the new range to the other axis, in order for it to
  be synchronized.
  
  You may also manipulate/correct the range with \ref setRange in a slot connected to this signal.
  This is useful if for example a maximum range span shall not be exceeded, or if the lower/upper
  range shouldn't go beyond certain values (see \ref QCPRange::bounded). For example, the following
  slot would limit the x axis to ranges between 0 and 10:
  \code
  customPlot->xAxis->setRange(newRange.bounded(0, 10))
  \endcode
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPPolarAxisRadial::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange, const QCPRange &oldRange)
  \overload
  
  Additionally to the new range, this signal also provides the previous range held by the axis as
  \a oldRange.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPPolarAxisRadial::scaleTypeChanged(QCPPolarAxisRadial::ScaleType scaleType);
  
  This signal is emitted when the scale type changes, by calls to \ref setScaleType
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPPolarAxisRadial::selectionChanged(QCPPolarAxisRadial::SelectableParts selection)
  
  This signal is emitted when the selection state of this axis has changed, either by user interaction
  or by a direct call to \ref setSelectedParts.
*/
 
/*! \fn void QCPPolarAxisRadial::selectableChanged(const QCPPolarAxisRadial::SelectableParts &parts);
  
  This signal is emitted when the selectability changes, by calls to \ref setSelectableParts
*/
 
/* end of documentation of signals */
 
/*!
  Constructs an Axis instance of Type \a type for the axis rect \a parent.
  
  Usually it isn't necessary to instantiate axes directly, because you can let QCustomPlot create
  them for you with \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis. If you want to use own QCPAxis-subclasses however,
  create them manually and then inject them also via \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis.
*/
QCPPolarAxisRadial::QCPPolarAxisRadial(QCPPolarAxisAngular *parent) :
  QCPLayerable(parent->parentPlot(), QString(), parent),
  mRangeDrag(true),
  mRangeZoom(true),
  mRangeZoomFactor(0.85),
  // axis base:
  mAngularAxis(parent),
  mAngle(45),
  mAngleReference(arAngularAxis),
  mSelectableParts(spAxis | spTickLabels | spAxisLabel),
  mSelectedParts(spNone),
  mBasePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedBasePen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // axis label:
  mLabelPadding(0),
  mLabel(),
  mLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedLabelFont(QFont(mLabelFont.family(), mLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  // tick labels:
  // mTickLabelPadding(0), in label painter
  mTickLabels(true),
  // mTickLabelRotation(0), in label painter
  mTickLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedTickLabelFont(QFont(mTickLabelFont.family(), mTickLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mTickLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedTickLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  mNumberPrecision(6),
  mNumberFormatChar('g'),
  mNumberBeautifulPowers(true),
  mNumberMultiplyCross(false),
  // ticks and subticks:
  mTicks(true),
  mSubTicks(true),
  mTickLengthIn(5),
  mTickLengthOut(0),
  mSubTickLengthIn(2),
  mSubTickLengthOut(0),
  mTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  mSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // scale and range:
  mRange(0, 5),
  mRangeReversed(false),
  mScaleType(stLinear),
  // internal members:
  mRadius(1), // non-zero initial value, will be overwritten in ::update() according to inner rect
  mTicker(new QCPAxisTicker),
  mLabelPainter(mParentPlot)
{
  setParent(parent);
  setAntialiased(true);
  
  setTickLabelPadding(5);
  setTickLabelRotation(0);
  setTickLabelMode(lmUpright);
  mLabelPainter.setAnchorReferenceType(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::artTangent);
  mLabelPainter.setAbbreviateDecimalPowers(false);
}
 
QCPPolarAxisRadial::~QCPPolarAxisRadial()
{
}
 
QCPPolarAxisRadial::LabelMode QCPPolarAxisRadial::tickLabelMode() const
{
  switch (mLabelPainter.anchorMode())
  {
    case QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedUpright: return lmUpright;
    case QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedRotated: return lmRotated;
    default: qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid mode for polar axis"; break;
  }
  return lmUpright;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QString QCPPolarAxisRadial::numberFormat() const
{
  QString result;
  result.append(mNumberFormatChar);
  if (mNumberBeautifulPowers)
  {
    result.append(QLatin1Char('b'));
    if (mNumberMultiplyCross)
      result.append(QLatin1Char('c'));
  }
  return result;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPPolarAxisRadial::tickLengthIn() const
{
  return mTickLengthIn;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPPolarAxisRadial::tickLengthOut() const
{
  return mTickLengthOut;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPPolarAxisRadial::subTickLengthIn() const
{
  return mSubTickLengthIn;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPPolarAxisRadial::subTickLengthOut() const
{
  return mSubTickLengthOut;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPPolarAxisRadial::labelPadding() const
{
  return mLabelPadding;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeDrag(bool enabled)
{
  mRangeDrag = enabled;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeZoom(bool enabled)
{
  mRangeZoom = enabled;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeZoomFactor(double factor)
{
  mRangeZoomFactor = factor;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis uses a linear scale or a logarithmic scale.
  
  Note that this method controls the coordinate transformation. For logarithmic scales, you will
  likely also want to use a logarithmic tick spacing and labeling, which can be achieved by setting
  the axis ticker to an instance of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog :
  
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpaxisticker-log-creation
  
  See the documentation of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog about the details of logarithmic axis tick
  creation.
  
  \ref setNumberPrecision
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setScaleType(QCPPolarAxisRadial::ScaleType type)
{
  if (mScaleType != type)
  {
    mScaleType = type;
    if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
      setRange(mRange.sanitizedForLogScale());
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
    emit scaleTypeChanged(mScaleType);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  This slot may be connected with the \ref rangeChanged signal of another axis so this axis
  is always synchronized with the other axis range, when it changes.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRange(const QCPRange &range)
{
  if (range.lower == mRange.lower && range.upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(range)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = range.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = range.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface.
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes.)
  
  However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part,
  it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts
  directly.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable)
{
  if (mSelectableParts != selectable)
  {
    mSelectableParts = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the selected state of the respective axis parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part
  is selected, it uses a different pen/font.
  
  The entire selection mechanism for axes is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes. You only need to call this function when you
  wish to change the selection state manually.
  
  This function can change the selection state of a part, independent of the \ref setSelectableParts setting.
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBasePen, setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen,
  setSelectedTickLabelFont, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelColor, setSelectedLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected)
{
  if (mSelectedParts != selected)
  {
    mSelectedParts = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the lower and upper bound of the axis range.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
  
  There is also a slot to set a range, see \ref setRange(const QCPRange &range).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRange(double lower, double upper)
{
  if (lower == mRange.lower && upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(lower, upper)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  The \a position coordinate indicates together with the \a alignment parameter, where the new
  range will be positioned. \a size defines the size of the new axis range. \a alignment may be
  Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight or Qt::AlignCenter. This will cause the left border, right border,
  or center of the range to be aligned with \a position. Any other values of \a alignment will
  default to Qt::AlignCenter.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRange(double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment)
{
  if (alignment == Qt::AlignLeft)
    setRange(position, position+size);
  else if (alignment == Qt::AlignRight)
    setRange(position-size, position);
  else // alignment == Qt::AlignCenter
    setRange(position-size/2.0, position+size/2.0);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the lower bound of the axis range. The upper bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeLower(double lower)
{
  if (mRange.lower == lower)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the upper bound of the axis range. The lower bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeUpper(double upper)
{
  if (mRange.upper == upper)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
  } else
  {
    mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis range (direction) is displayed reversed. Normally, the values on horizontal
  axes increase left to right, on vertical axes bottom to top. When \a reversed is set to true, the
  direction of increasing values is inverted.
 
  Note that the range and data interface stays the same for reversed axes, e.g. the \a lower part
  of the \ref setRange interface will still reference the mathematically smaller number than the \a
  upper part.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setRangeReversed(bool reversed)
{
  mRangeReversed = reversed;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setAngle(double degrees)
{
  mAngle = degrees;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setAngleReference(AngleReference reference)
{
  mAngleReference = reference;
}
 
/*!
  The axis ticker is responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels. See the
  documentation of QCPAxisTicker for details on how to work with axis tickers.
  
  You can change the tick positioning/labeling behaviour of this axis by setting a different
  QCPAxisTicker subclass using this method. If you only wish to modify the currently installed axis
  ticker, access it via \ref ticker.
  
  Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis
  ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes.
  
  \see ticker
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTicker(QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> ticker)
{
  if (ticker)
    mTicker = ticker;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can not set 0 as axis ticker";
  // no need to invalidate margin cache here because produced tick labels are checked for changes in setupTickVector
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick marks are displayed.
 
  Note that setting \a show to false does not imply that tick labels are invisible, too. To achieve
  that, see \ref setTickLabels.
  
  \see setSubTicks
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mTicks != show)
  {
    mTicks = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick labels are displayed. Tick labels are the numbers drawn next to tick marks.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabels(bool show)
{
  if (mTickLabels != show)
  {
    mTickLabels = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
    if (!mTickLabels)
      mTickVectorLabels.clear();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the axis base line (including any outward ticks) and the tick labels.
  \see setLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  mLabelPainter.setPadding(padding);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (font != mTickLabelFont)
  {
    mTickLabelFont = font;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelFont
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTickLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the rotation of the tick labels. If \a degrees is zero, the labels are drawn normally. Else,
  the tick labels are drawn rotated by \a degrees clockwise. The specified angle is bound to values
  from -90 to 90 degrees.
  
  If \a degrees is exactly -90, 0 or 90, the tick labels are centered on the tick coordinate. For
  other angles, the label is drawn with an offset such that it seems to point toward or away from
  the tick mark.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabelRotation(double degrees)
{
  mLabelPainter.setRotation(degrees);
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLabelMode(LabelMode mode)
{
  switch (mode)
  {
    case lmUpright: mLabelPainter.setAnchorMode(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedUpright); break;
    case lmRotated: mLabelPainter.setAnchorMode(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedRotated); break;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number format for the numbers in tick labels. This \a formatCode is an extended version
  of the format code used e.g. by QString::number() and QLocale::toString(). For reference about
  that, see the "Argument Formats" section in the detailed description of the QString class.
  
  \a formatCode is a string of one, two or three characters. The first character is identical to
  the normal format code used by Qt. In short, this means: 'e'/'E' scientific format, 'f' fixed
  format, 'g'/'G' scientific or fixed, whichever is shorter.
  
  The second and third characters are optional and specific to QCustomPlot:\n
  If the first char was 'e' or 'g', numbers are/might be displayed in the scientific format, e.g.
  "5.5e9", which is ugly in a plot. So when the second char of \a formatCode is set to 'b' (for
  "beautiful"), those exponential numbers are formatted in a more natural way, i.e. "5.5
  [multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] 9". By default, the multiplication sign is a centered dot.
  If instead a cross should be shown (as is usual in the USA), the third char of \a formatCode can
  be set to 'c'. The inserted multiplication signs are the UTF-8 characters 215 (0xD7) for the
  cross and 183 (0xB7) for the dot.
  
  Examples for \a formatCode:
  \li \c g normal format code behaviour. If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large,
  normal scientific format is used
  \li \c gb If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large, scientific format is used with
  beautifully typeset decimal powers and a dot as multiplication sign
  \li \c ebc All numbers are in scientific format with beautifully typeset decimal power and a cross as
  multiplication sign
  \li \c fb illegal format code, since fixed format doesn't support (or need) beautifully typeset decimal
  powers. Format code will be reduced to 'f'.
  \li \c hello illegal format code, since first char is not 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' or 'G'. Current format
  code will not be changed.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setNumberFormat(const QString &formatCode)
{
  if (formatCode.isEmpty())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed formatCode is empty";
    return;
  }
  //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  
  // interpret first char as number format char:
  QString allowedFormatChars(QLatin1String("eEfgG"));
  if (allowedFormatChars.contains(formatCode.at(0)))
  {
    mNumberFormatChar = QLatin1Char(formatCode.at(0).toLatin1());
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (first char not in 'eEfgG'):" << formatCode;
    return;
  }
  
  if (formatCode.length() < 2)
  {
    mNumberBeautifulPowers = false;
    mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
  } else
  {
    // interpret second char as indicator for beautiful decimal powers:
    if (formatCode.at(1) == QLatin1Char('b') && (mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('e') || mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('g')))
      mNumberBeautifulPowers = true;
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (second char not 'b' or first char neither 'e' nor 'g'):" << formatCode;
    
    if (formatCode.length() < 3)
    {
      mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
    } else
    {
      // interpret third char as indicator for dot or cross multiplication symbol:
      if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('c'))
        mNumberMultiplyCross = true;
      else if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('d'))
        mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (third char neither 'c' nor 'd'):" << formatCode;
    }
  }
  mLabelPainter.setSubstituteExponent(mNumberBeautifulPowers);
  mLabelPainter.setMultiplicationSymbol(mNumberMultiplyCross ? QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolCross : QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolDot);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the precision of the tick label numbers. See QLocale::toString(double i, char f, int prec)
  for details. The effect of precisions are most notably for number Formats starting with 'e', see
  \ref setNumberFormat
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setNumberPrecision(int precision)
{
  if (mNumberPrecision != precision)
  {
    mNumberPrecision = precision;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach inside the
  plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than
  zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so
  they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLength, setTickLengthIn, setTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setTickLengthIn(inside);
  setTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach
  inside the plot.
  
  \see setTickLengthOut, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mTickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mTickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward ticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the ticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels and axis label will
  increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLengthIn, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mTickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mTickLengthOut = outside;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether sub tick marks are displayed.
  
  Sub ticks are only potentially visible if (major) ticks are also visible (see \ref setTicks)
  
  \see setTicks
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSubTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mSubTicks != show)
  {
    mSubTicks = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater
  than zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly,
  so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLength, setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSubTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setSubTickLengthIn(inside);
  setSubTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthOut, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSubTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mSubTickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mSubTickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward subticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the subticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels will increase their
  distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSubTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mSubTickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mSubTickLengthOut = outside;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, the axis base line is drawn with.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSubTickPen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, tick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, subtick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setSubTickCount, setSubTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (mLabelFont != font)
  {
    mLabelFont = font;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelFont
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the text of the axis label that will be shown below/above or next to the axis, depending on
  its orientation. To disable axis labels, pass an empty string as \a str.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setLabel(const QString &str)
{
  if (mLabel != str)
  {
    mLabel = str;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the tick labels and the axis label.
  
  \see setTickLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  if (mLabelPadding != padding)
  {
    mLabelPadding = padding;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (font != mSelectedTickLabelFont)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelFont = font;
    // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedLabelFont = font;
  // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  if (color != mSelectedTickLabelColor)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelColor = color;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the axis base line when selected.
  
  \see setBasePen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks when selected.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the subticks when selected.
  
  \see setSubTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setSelectedSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLinear, \a diff is added to the lower and upper
  bounds of the range. The range is simply moved by \a diff.
  
  If the scale type is \ref stLogarithmic, the range bounds are multiplied by \a diff. This
  corresponds to an apparent "linear" move in logarithmic scaling by a distance of log(diff).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::moveRange(double diff)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    mRange.lower += diff;
    mRange.upper += diff;
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    mRange.lower *= diff;
    mRange.upper *= diff;
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the center of the current axis range. For
  example, if \a factor is 2.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at the axis
  range center won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates around
  the center will have moved symmetrically closer).
 
  If you wish to scale around a different coordinate than the current axis range center, use the
  overload \ref scaleRange(double factor, double center).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::scaleRange(double factor)
{
  scaleRange(factor, range().center());
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the coordinate \a center. For example, if \a
  factor is 2.0, \a center is 1.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at
  coordinate 1.0 won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates
  around 1.0 will have moved symmetrically closer to 1.0).
 
  \see scaleRange(double factor)
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::scaleRange(double factor, double center)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    QCPRange newRange;
    newRange.lower = (mRange.lower-center)*factor + center;
    newRange.upper = (mRange.upper-center)*factor + center;
    if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange))
      mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    if ((mRange.upper < 0 && center < 0) || (mRange.upper > 0 && center > 0)) // make sure center has same sign as range
    {
      QCPRange newRange;
      newRange.lower = qPow(mRange.lower/center, factor)*center;
      newRange.upper = qPow(mRange.upper/center, factor)*center;
      if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange))
        mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
    } else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Center of scaling operation doesn't lie in same logarithmic sign domain as range:" << center;
  }
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Changes the axis range such that all plottables associated with this axis are fully visible in
  that dimension.
  
  \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::rescale(bool onlyVisiblePlottables)
{
  Q_UNUSED(onlyVisiblePlottables)
  /* TODO
  QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> p = plottables();
  QCPRange newRange;
  bool haveRange = false;
  for (int i=0; i<p.size(); ++i)
  {
    if (!p.at(i)->realVisibility() && onlyVisiblePlottables)
      continue;
    QCPRange plottableRange;
    bool currentFoundRange;
    QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth;
    if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic)
      signDomain = (mRange.upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
    if (p.at(i)->keyAxis() == this)
      plottableRange = p.at(i)->getKeyRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain);
    else
      plottableRange = p.at(i)->getValueRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain);
    if (currentFoundRange)
    {
      if (!haveRange)
        newRange = plottableRange;
      else
        newRange.expand(plottableRange);
      haveRange = true;
    }
  }
  if (haveRange)
  {
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (mScaleType == stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-mRange.size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+mRange.size()/2.0;
      } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower);
      }
    }
    setRange(newRange);
  }
  */
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget, to axis coordinates.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::pixelToCoord(QPointF pixelPos, double &angleCoord, double &radiusCoord) const
{
  QCPVector2D posVector(pixelPos-mCenter);
  radiusCoord = radiusToCoord(posVector.length());
  angleCoord = mAngularAxis->angleRadToCoord(posVector.angle());
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in coordinates of the axis, to pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget.
*/
QPointF QCPPolarAxisRadial::coordToPixel(double angleCoord, double radiusCoord) const
{
  const double radiusPixel = coordToRadius(radiusCoord);
  const double angleRad = mAngularAxis->coordToAngleRad(angleCoord);
  return QPointF(mCenter.x()+qCos(angleRad)*radiusPixel, mCenter.y()+qSin(angleRad)*radiusPixel);
}
 
double QCPPolarAxisRadial::coordToRadius(double coord) const
{
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    if (!mRangeReversed)
      return (coord-mRange.lower)/mRange.size()*mRadius;
    else
      return (mRange.upper-coord)/mRange.size()*mRadius;
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    if (coord >= 0.0 && mRange.upper < 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just return outside visible range
      return !mRangeReversed ? mRadius+200 : mRadius-200;
    else if (coord <= 0.0 && mRange.upper >= 0.0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just return outside visible range
      return !mRangeReversed ? mRadius-200 :mRadius+200;
    else
    {
      if (!mRangeReversed)
        return qLn(coord/mRange.lower)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mRadius;
      else
        return qLn(mRange.upper/coord)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mRadius;
    }
  }
}
 
double QCPPolarAxisRadial::radiusToCoord(double radius) const
{
  if (mScaleType == stLinear)
  {
    if (!mRangeReversed)
      return (radius)/mRadius*mRange.size()+mRange.lower;
    else
      return -(radius)/mRadius*mRange.size()+mRange.upper;
  } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
  {
    if (!mRangeReversed)
      return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (radius)/mRadius)*mRange.lower;
    else
      return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (-radius)/mRadius)*mRange.upper;
  }
}
 
 
/*!
  Returns the part of the axis that is hit by \a pos (in pixels). The return value of this function
  is independent of the user-selectable parts defined with \ref setSelectableParts. Further, this
  function does not change the current selection state of the axis.
  
  If the axis is not visible (\ref setVisible), this function always returns \ref spNone.
  
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCPPolarAxisRadial::SelectablePart QCPPolarAxisRadial::getPartAt(const QPointF &pos) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(pos) // TODO remove later
  if (!mVisible)
    return spNone;
  
  /*
    TODO:
  if (mAxisPainter->axisSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxis;
  else if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelsSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spTickLabels;
  else if (mAxisPainter->labelSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxisLabel;
  else */
    return spNone;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPPolarAxisRadial::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return -1;
  SelectablePart part = getPartAt(pos);
  if ((onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(part)) || part == spNone)
    return -1;
  
  if (details)
    details->setValue(part);
  return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  SelectablePart part = details.value<SelectablePart>();
  if (mSelectableParts.testFlag(part))
  {
    SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
    setSelectedParts(additive ? mSelectedParts^part : part);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
  setSelectedParts(mSelectedParts & ~mSelectableParts);
  if (selectionStateChanged)
    *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
 
  For the axis to accept this event and perform the single axis drag, the parent \ref QCPAxisRect
  must be configured accordingly, i.e. it must allow range dragging in the orientation of this axis
  (\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag) and this axis must be a draggable axis (\ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes)
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (!mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
  {
    event->ignore();
    return;
  }
  
  if (event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton)
  {
    mDragging = true;
    // initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging:
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
    {
      mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements();
      mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements();
    }
    // Mouse range dragging interaction:
    if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
      mDragStartRange = mRange;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
  
  \see QCPAxis::mousePressEvent
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event) // TODO remove later
  Q_UNUSED(startPos) // TODO remove later
  if (mDragging)
  {
    /* TODO
    const double startPixel = orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? startPos.x() : startPos.y();
    const double currentPixel = orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? event->pos().x() : event->pos().y();
    if (mScaleType == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLinear)
    {
      const double diff = pixelToCoord(startPixel) - pixelToCoord(currentPixel);
      setRange(mDragStartRange.lower+diff, mDragStartRange.upper+diff);
    } else if (mScaleType == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLogarithmic)
    {
      const double diff = pixelToCoord(startPixel) / pixelToCoord(currentPixel);
      setRange(mDragStartRange.lower*diff, mDragStartRange.upper*diff);
    }
    */
    
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
      mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll);
    mParentPlot->replot(QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user drag individual axes
  exclusively, by startig the drag on top of the axis.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The dragging of possibly multiple axes at once by starting the drag anywhere in the axis
  rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent.
  
  \see QCPAxis::mousePressEvent
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  mDragging = false;
  if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
  {
    mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements(mAADragBackup);
    mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(mNotAADragBackup);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  This mouse event reimplementation provides the functionality to let the user zoom individual axes
  exclusively, by performing the wheel event on top of the axis.
 
  For the axis to accept this event and perform the single axis zoom, the parent \ref QCPAxisRect
  must be configured accordingly, i.e. it must allow range zooming in the orientation of this axis
  (\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom) and this axis must be a zoomable axis (\ref
  QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes)
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \note The zooming of possibly multiple axes at once by performing the wheel event anywhere in the
  axis rect is handled by the axis rect's mouse event, e.g. \ref QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  // Mouse range zooming interaction:
  if (!mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeZoom))
  {
    event->ignore();
    return;
  }
  
  // TODO:
  //const double wheelSteps = event->delta()/120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually
  //const double factor = qPow(mRangeZoomFactor, wheelSteps);
  //scaleRange(factor, pixelToCoord(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? event->pos().x() : event->pos().y()));
  mParentPlot->replot();
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::updateGeometry(const QPointF &center, double radius)
{
  mCenter = center;
  mRadius = radius;
  if (mRadius < 1) mRadius = 1;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing axis lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeAxes);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the axis with the specified \a painter, using the internal QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance.
 
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  const double axisAngleRad = (mAngle+(mAngleReference==arAngularAxis ? mAngularAxis->angle() : 0))/180.0*M_PI;
  const QPointF axisVector(qCos(axisAngleRad), qSin(axisAngleRad)); // semantically should be QCPVector2D, but we save time in loops when we keep it as QPointF
  const QPointF tickNormal = QCPVector2D(axisVector).perpendicular().toPointF(); // semantically should be QCPVector2D, but we save time in loops when we keep it as QPointF
  
  // draw baseline:
  painter->setPen(getBasePen());
  painter->drawLine(QLineF(mCenter, mCenter+axisVector*(mRadius-0.5)));
  
  // draw subticks:
  if (!mSubTickVector.isEmpty())
  {
    painter->setPen(getSubTickPen());
    for (int i=0; i<mSubTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      const QPointF tickPosition = mCenter+axisVector*coordToRadius(mSubTickVector.at(i));
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(tickPosition-tickNormal*mSubTickLengthIn, tickPosition+tickNormal*mSubTickLengthOut));
    }
  }
  
  // draw ticks and labels:
  if (!mTickVector.isEmpty())
  {
    mLabelPainter.setAnchorReference(mCenter-axisVector); // subtract (normalized) axisVector, just to prevent degenerate tangents for tick label at exact lower axis range
    mLabelPainter.setFont(getTickLabelFont());
    mLabelPainter.setColor(getTickLabelColor());
    const QPen ticksPen = getTickPen();
    painter->setPen(ticksPen);
    for (int i=0; i<mTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      const double r = coordToRadius(mTickVector.at(i));
      const QPointF tickPosition = mCenter+axisVector*r;
      painter->drawLine(QLineF(tickPosition-tickNormal*mTickLengthIn, tickPosition+tickNormal*mTickLengthOut));
      // possibly draw tick labels:
      if (!mTickVectorLabels.isEmpty())
      {
        if ((!mRangeReversed && (i < mTickVectorLabels.count()-1 || mRadius-r > 10)) ||
            (mRangeReversed && (i > 0 || mRadius-r > 10))) // skip last label if it's closer than 10 pixels to angular axis
          mLabelPainter.drawTickLabel(painter, tickPosition+tickNormal*mSubTickLengthOut, mTickVectorLabels.at(i));
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Prepares the internal tick vector, sub tick vector and tick label vector. This is done by calling
  QCPAxisTicker::generate on the currently installed ticker.
  
  If a change in the label text/count is detected, the cached axis margin is invalidated to make
  sure the next margin calculation recalculates the label sizes and returns an up-to-date value.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisRadial::setupTickVectors()
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return;
  if ((!mTicks && !mTickLabels) || mRange.size() <= 0) return;
  
  mTicker->generate(mRange, mParentPlot->locale(), mNumberFormatChar, mNumberPrecision, mTickVector, mSubTicks ? &mSubTickVector : 0, mTickLabels ? &mTickVectorLabels : 0);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the axis base line. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedBasePen or mBasePen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisRadial::getBasePen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedBasePen : mBasePen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickPen or mTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisRadial::getTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedTickPen : mTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the subticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedSubTickPen or mSubTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisRadial::getSubTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedSubTickPen : mSubTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelFont or mTickLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPPolarAxisRadial::getTickLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelFont : mTickLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelFont or mLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPPolarAxisRadial::getLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelFont : mLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelColor or mTickLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPPolarAxisRadial::getTickLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelColor : mTickLabelColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelColor or mLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPPolarAxisRadial::getLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelColor : mLabelColor;
}
 
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPPolarAxisRadial::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectAxes;
}
/* end of 'src/polar/radialaxis.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/polar/layoutelement-angularaxis.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 57266                 */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPolarAxisAngular
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPolarAxisAngular
  \brief The main container for polar plots, representing the angular axis as a circle
 
  \warning In this QCustomPlot version, polar plots are a tech preview. Expect documentation and
  functionality to be incomplete, as well as changing public interfaces in the future.
*/
 
/* start documentation of inline functions */
 
/*! \fn QCPLayoutInset *QCPPolarAxisAngular::insetLayout() const
  
  Returns the inset layout of this axis rect. It can be used to place other layout elements (or
  even layouts with multiple other elements) inside/on top of an axis rect.
  
  \see QCPLayoutInset
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::left() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the left border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::right() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the right border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::top() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the top border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::bottom() const
  
  Returns the pixel position of the bottom border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into
  account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::width() const
  
  Returns the pixel width of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn int QCPPolarAxisAngular::height() const
  
  Returns the pixel height of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QSize QCPPolarAxisAngular::size() const
  
  Returns the pixel size of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPPolarAxisAngular::topLeft() const
  
  Returns the top left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here,
  so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPPolarAxisAngular::topRight() const
  
  Returns the top right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPPolarAxisAngular::bottomLeft() const
  
  Returns the bottom left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPPolarAxisAngular::bottomRight() const
  
  Returns the bottom right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account
  here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/*! \fn QPoint QCPPolarAxisAngular::center() const
  
  Returns the center of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here, so the
  returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
 
/* end documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPPolarAxis instance and sets default values. An axis is added for each of the four
  sides, the top and right axes are set invisible initially.
*/
QCPPolarAxisAngular::QCPPolarAxisAngular(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
  QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot),
  mBackgroundBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mBackgroundScaled(true),
  mBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding),
  mInsetLayout(new QCPLayoutInset),
  mRangeDrag(false),
  mRangeZoom(false),
  mRangeZoomFactor(0.85),
  // axis base:
  mAngle(-90),
  mAngleRad(mAngle/180.0*M_PI),
  mSelectableParts(spAxis | spTickLabels | spAxisLabel),
  mSelectedParts(spNone),
  mBasePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedBasePen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // axis label:
  mLabelPadding(0),
  mLabel(),
  mLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedLabelFont(QFont(mLabelFont.family(), mLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  // tick labels:
  //mTickLabelPadding(0), in label painter
  mTickLabels(true),
  //mTickLabelRotation(0), in label painter
  mTickLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()),
  mSelectedTickLabelFont(QFont(mTickLabelFont.family(), mTickLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)),
  mTickLabelColor(Qt::black),
  mSelectedTickLabelColor(Qt::blue),
  mNumberPrecision(6),
  mNumberFormatChar('g'),
  mNumberBeautifulPowers(true),
  mNumberMultiplyCross(false),
  // ticks and subticks:
  mTicks(true),
  mSubTicks(true),
  mTickLengthIn(5),
  mTickLengthOut(0),
  mSubTickLengthIn(2),
  mSubTickLengthOut(0),
  mTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  mSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)),
  mSelectedSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)),
  // scale and range:
  mRange(0, 360),
  mRangeReversed(false),
  // internal members:
  mRadius(1), // non-zero initial value, will be overwritten in ::update() according to inner rect
  mGrid(new QCPPolarGrid(this)),
  mTicker(new QCPAxisTickerFixed),
  mDragging(false),
  mLabelPainter(parentPlot)
{
  // TODO:
  //mInsetLayout->initializeParentPlot(mParentPlot);
  //mInsetLayout->setParentLayerable(this);
  //mInsetLayout->setParent(this);
 
  if (QCPAxisTickerFixed *fixedTicker = mTicker.dynamicCast<QCPAxisTickerFixed>().data())
  {
    fixedTicker->setTickStep(30);
  }
  setAntialiased(true);
  setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer()); // it's actually on that layer already, but we want it in front of the grid, so we place it on there again
  
  setTickLabelPadding(5);
  setTickLabelRotation(0);
  setTickLabelMode(lmUpright);
  mLabelPainter.setAnchorReferenceType(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::artNormal);
  mLabelPainter.setAbbreviateDecimalPowers(false);
  mLabelPainter.setCacheSize(24); // so we can cache up to 15-degree intervals, polar angular axis uses a bit larger cache than normal axes
  
  setMinimumSize(50, 50);
  setMinimumMargins(QMargins(30, 30, 30, 30));
  
  addRadialAxis();
  mGrid->setRadialAxis(radialAxis());
}
 
QCPPolarAxisAngular::~QCPPolarAxisAngular()
{
  delete mGrid; // delete grid here instead of via parent ~QObject for better defined deletion order
  mGrid = 0;
  
  delete mInsetLayout;
  mInsetLayout = 0;
  
  QList<QCPPolarAxisRadial*> radialAxesList = radialAxes();
  for (int i=0; i<radialAxesList.size(); ++i)
    removeRadialAxis(radialAxesList.at(i));
}
 
QCPPolarAxisAngular::LabelMode QCPPolarAxisAngular::tickLabelMode() const
{
  switch (mLabelPainter.anchorMode())
  {
    case QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedUpright: return lmUpright;
    case QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedRotated: return lmRotated;
    default: qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid mode for polar axis"; break;
  }
  return lmUpright;
}
 
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QString QCPPolarAxisAngular::numberFormat() const
{
  QString result;
  result.append(mNumberFormatChar);
  if (mNumberBeautifulPowers)
  {
    result.append(QLatin1Char('b'));
    if (mLabelPainter.multiplicationSymbol() == QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolCross)
      result.append(QLatin1Char('c'));
  }
  return result;
}
 
/*!
  Returns the number of axes on the axis rect side specified with \a type.
  
  \see axis
*/
int QCPPolarAxisAngular::radialAxisCount() const
{
  return mRadialAxes.size();
}
 
/*!
  Returns the axis with the given \a index on the axis rect side specified with \a type.
  
  \see axisCount, axes
*/
QCPPolarAxisRadial *QCPPolarAxisAngular::radialAxis(int index) const
{
  if (index >= 0 && index < mRadialAxes.size())
  {
    return mRadialAxes.at(index);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis index out of bounds:" << index;
    return 0;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns all axes on the axis rect sides specified with \a types.
  
  \a types may be a single \ref QCPAxis::AxisType or an <tt>or</tt>-combination, to get the axes of
  multiple sides.
  
  \see axis
*/
QList<QCPPolarAxisRadial*> QCPPolarAxisAngular::radialAxes() const
{
  return mRadialAxes;
}
 
 
/*!
  Adds a new axis to the axis rect side specified with \a type, and returns it. If \a axis is 0, a
  new QCPAxis instance is created internally. QCustomPlot owns the returned axis, so if you want to
  remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis instead of deleting it manually.
 
  You may inject QCPAxis instances (or subclasses of QCPAxis) by setting \a axis to an axis that was
  previously created outside QCustomPlot. It is important to note that QCustomPlot takes ownership
  of the axis, so you may not delete it afterwards. Further, the \a axis must have been created
  with this axis rect as parent and with the same axis type as specified in \a type. If this is not
  the case, a debug output is generated, the axis is not added, and the method returns 0.
 
  This method can not be used to move \a axis between axis rects. The same \a axis instance must
  not be added multiple times to the same or different axis rects.
 
  If an axis rect side already contains one or more axes, the lower and upper endings of the new
  axis (\ref QCPAxis::setLowerEnding, \ref QCPAxis::setUpperEnding) are set to \ref
  QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar.
 
  \see addAxes, setupFullAxesBox
*/
QCPPolarAxisRadial *QCPPolarAxisAngular::addRadialAxis(QCPPolarAxisRadial *axis)
{
  QCPPolarAxisRadial *newAxis = axis;
  if (!newAxis)
  {
    newAxis = new QCPPolarAxisRadial(this);
  } else // user provided existing axis instance, do some sanity checks
  {
    if (newAxis->angularAxis() != this)
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed radial axis doesn't have this angular axis as parent angular axis";
      return 0;
    }
    if (radialAxes().contains(newAxis))
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis is already owned by this angular axis";
      return 0;
    }
  }
  mRadialAxes.append(newAxis);
  return newAxis;
}
 
/*!
  Removes the specified \a axis from the axis rect and deletes it.
  
  Returns true on success, i.e. if \a axis was a valid axis in this axis rect.
  
  \see addAxis
*/
bool QCPPolarAxisAngular::removeRadialAxis(QCPPolarAxisRadial *radialAxis)
{
  if (mRadialAxes.contains(radialAxis))
  {
    mRadialAxes.removeOne(radialAxis);
    delete radialAxis;
    return true;
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Radial axis isn't associated with this angular axis:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(radialAxis);
    return false;
  }
}
 
QRegion QCPPolarAxisAngular::exactClipRegion() const
{
  return QRegion(mCenter.x()-mRadius, mCenter.y()-mRadius, qRound(2*mRadius), qRound(2*mRadius), QRegion::Ellipse);
}
 
/*!
  If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLinear, \a diff is added to the lower and upper
  bounds of the range. The range is simply moved by \a diff.
  
  If the scale type is \ref stLogarithmic, the range bounds are multiplied by \a diff. This
  corresponds to an apparent "linear" move in logarithmic scaling by a distance of log(diff).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::moveRange(double diff)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower += diff;
  mRange.upper += diff;
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the center of the current axis range. For
  example, if \a factor is 2.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at the axis
  range center won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates around
  the center will have moved symmetrically closer).
 
  If you wish to scale around a different coordinate than the current axis range center, use the
  overload \ref scaleRange(double factor, double center).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::scaleRange(double factor)
{
  scaleRange(factor, range().center());
}
 
/*! \overload
 
  Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the coordinate \a center. For example, if \a
  factor is 2.0, \a center is 1.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at
  coordinate 1.0 won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates
  around 1.0 will have moved symmetrically closer to 1.0).
 
  \see scaleRange(double factor)
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::scaleRange(double factor, double center)
{
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  QCPRange newRange;
  newRange.lower = (mRange.lower-center)*factor + center;
  newRange.upper = (mRange.upper-center)*factor + center;
  if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange))
    mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Changes the axis range such that all plottables associated with this axis are fully visible in
  that dimension.
  
  \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::rescale(bool onlyVisiblePlottables)
{
  QCPRange newRange;
  bool haveRange = false;
  for (int i=0; i<mGraphs.size(); ++i)
  {
    if (!mGraphs.at(i)->realVisibility() && onlyVisiblePlottables)
      continue;
    QCPRange range;
    bool currentFoundRange;
    if (mGraphs.at(i)->keyAxis() == this)
      range = mGraphs.at(i)->getKeyRange(currentFoundRange, QCP::sdBoth);
    else
      range = mGraphs.at(i)->getValueRange(currentFoundRange, QCP::sdBoth);
    if (currentFoundRange)
    {
      if (!haveRange)
        newRange = range;
      else
        newRange.expand(range);
      haveRange = true;
    }
  }
  if (haveRange)
  {
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      newRange.lower = center-mRange.size()/2.0;
      newRange.upper = center+mRange.size()/2.0;
    }
    setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget, to axis coordinates.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::pixelToCoord(QPointF pixelPos, double &angleCoord, double &radiusCoord) const
{
  if (!mRadialAxes.isEmpty())
    mRadialAxes.first()->pixelToCoord(pixelPos, angleCoord, radiusCoord);
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no radial axis configured";
}
 
/*!
  Transforms \a value, in coordinates of the axis, to pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget.
*/
QPointF QCPPolarAxisAngular::coordToPixel(double angleCoord, double radiusCoord) const
{
  if (!mRadialAxes.isEmpty())
  {
    return mRadialAxes.first()->coordToPixel(angleCoord, radiusCoord);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no radial axis configured";
    return QPointF();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Returns the part of the axis that is hit by \a pos (in pixels). The return value of this function
  is independent of the user-selectable parts defined with \ref setSelectableParts. Further, this
  function does not change the current selection state of the axis.
  
  If the axis is not visible (\ref setVisible), this function always returns \ref spNone.
  
  \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCPPolarAxisAngular::SelectablePart QCPPolarAxisAngular::getPartAt(const QPointF &pos) const
{
  Q_UNUSED(pos) // TODO remove later
  
  if (!mVisible)
    return spNone;
  
  /*
    TODO:
  if (mAxisPainter->axisSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxis;
  else if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelsSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spTickLabels;
  else if (mAxisPainter->labelSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint()))
    return spAxisLabel;
  else */
    return spNone;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPPolarAxisAngular::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  /*
  if (!mParentPlot) return -1;
  SelectablePart part = getPartAt(pos);
  if ((onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(part)) || part == spNone)
    return -1;
  
  if (details)
    details->setValue(part);
  return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
  */
  
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  
  if (onlySelectable)
    return -1;
  
  if (QRectF(mOuterRect).contains(pos))
  {
    if (mParentPlot)
      return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99;
    else
    {
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "parent plot not defined";
      return -1;
    }
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/*!
  This method is called automatically upon replot and doesn't need to be called by users of
  QCPPolarAxisAngular.
  
  Calls the base class implementation to update the margins (see \ref QCPLayoutElement::update),
  and finally passes the \ref rect to the inset layout (\ref insetLayout) and calls its
  QCPInsetLayout::update function.
  
  \seebaseclassmethod
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::update(UpdatePhase phase)
{
  QCPLayoutElement::update(phase);
  
  switch (phase)
  {
    case upPreparation:
    {
      setupTickVectors();
      for (int i=0; i<mRadialAxes.size(); ++i)
        mRadialAxes.at(i)->setupTickVectors();
      break;
    }
    case upLayout:
    {
      mCenter = mRect.center();
      mRadius = 0.5*qMin(qAbs(mRect.width()), qAbs(mRect.height()));
      if (mRadius < 1) mRadius = 1; // prevent cases where radius might become 0 which causes trouble
      for (int i=0; i<mRadialAxes.size(); ++i)
        mRadialAxes.at(i)->updateGeometry(mCenter, mRadius);
      
      mInsetLayout->setOuterRect(rect());
      break;
    }
    default: break;
  }
  
  // pass update call on to inset layout (doesn't happen automatically, because QCPPolarAxis doesn't derive from QCPLayout):
  mInsetLayout->update(phase);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPPolarAxisAngular::elements(bool recursive) const
{
  QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
  if (mInsetLayout)
  {
    result << mInsetLayout;
    if (recursive)
      result << mInsetLayout->elements(recursive);
  }
  return result;
}
 
bool QCPPolarAxisAngular::removeGraph(QCPPolarGraph *graph)
{
  if (!mGraphs.contains(graph))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph not in list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(graph);
    return false;
  }
  
  // remove plottable from legend:
  graph->removeFromLegend();
  // remove plottable:
  delete graph;
  mGraphs.removeOne(graph);
  return true;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeAxes);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  drawBackground(painter, mCenter, mRadius);
  
  // draw baseline circle:
  painter->setPen(getBasePen());
  painter->drawEllipse(mCenter, mRadius, mRadius);
  
  // draw subticks:
  if (!mSubTickVector.isEmpty())
  {
    painter->setPen(getSubTickPen());
    for (int i=0; i<mSubTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      painter->drawLine(mCenter+mSubTickVectorCosSin.at(i)*(mRadius-mSubTickLengthIn),
                        mCenter+mSubTickVectorCosSin.at(i)*(mRadius+mSubTickLengthOut));
    }
  }
  
  // draw ticks and labels:
  if (!mTickVector.isEmpty())
  {
    mLabelPainter.setAnchorReference(mCenter);
    mLabelPainter.setFont(getTickLabelFont());
    mLabelPainter.setColor(getTickLabelColor());
    const QPen ticksPen = getTickPen();
    painter->setPen(ticksPen);
    for (int i=0; i<mTickVector.size(); ++i)
    {
      const QPointF outerTick = mCenter+mTickVectorCosSin.at(i)*(mRadius+mTickLengthOut);
      painter->drawLine(mCenter+mTickVectorCosSin.at(i)*(mRadius-mTickLengthIn), outerTick);
      // draw tick labels:
      if (!mTickVectorLabels.isEmpty())
      {
        if (i < mTickVectorLabels.count()-1 || (mTickVectorCosSin.at(i)-mTickVectorCosSin.first()).manhattanLength() > 5/180.0*M_PI) // skip last label if it's closer than approx 5 degrees to first
          mLabelPainter.drawTickLabel(painter, outerTick, mTickVectorLabels.at(i));
      }
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPPolarAxisAngular::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectAxes;
}
 
 
/*!
  Sets \a pm as the axis background pixmap. The axis background pixmap will be drawn inside the
  axis rect. Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect
  backgrounds are usually drawn below everything else.
 
  For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the axis rect, scaling can be
  enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (i.e. whether and how the aspect ratio
  is preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these options in one call,
  consider using the overloaded version of this function.
 
  Below the pixmap, the axis rect may be optionally filled with a brush, if specified with \ref
  setBackground(const QBrush &brush).
  
  \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode, setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Sets \a brush as the background brush. The axis rect background will be filled with this brush.
  Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect backgrounds
  are usually drawn below everything else.
 
  The brush will be drawn before (under) any background pixmap, which may be specified with \ref
  setBackground(const QPixmap &pm).
 
  To disable drawing of a background brush, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
  
  \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBackground(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBackgroundBrush = brush;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Allows setting the background pixmap of the axis rect, whether it shall be scaled and how it
  shall be scaled in one call.
 
  \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the axis rect or not. If \a scaled
  is set to true, you may control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is
  preserved with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode.
  
  Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is no performance
  penalty on replots. (Except when the axis rect dimensions are changed continuously.)
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled)
{
  mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
}
 
/*!
  If scaling of the axis background pixmap is enabled (\ref setBackgroundScaled), use this function to
  define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap passed to \ref setBackground is preserved.
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode)
{
  mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeDrag(bool enabled)
{
  mRangeDrag = enabled;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeZoom(bool enabled)
{
  mRangeZoom = enabled;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeZoomFactor(double factor)
{
  mRangeZoomFactor = factor;
}
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/*!
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  This slot may be connected with the \ref rangeChanged signal of another axis so this axis
  is always synchronized with the other axis range, when it changes.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRange(const QCPRange &range)
{
  if (range.lower == mRange.lower && range.upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(range)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange = range.sanitizedForLinScale();
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface.
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes.)
  
  However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part,
  it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts
  directly.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable)
{
  if (mSelectableParts != selectable)
  {
    mSelectableParts = selectable;
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the selected state of the respective axis parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part
  is selected, it uses a different pen/font.
  
  The entire selection mechanism for axes is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes. You only need to call this function when you
  wish to change the selection state manually.
  
  This function can change the selection state of a part, independent of the \ref setSelectableParts setting.
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBasePen, setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen,
  setSelectedTickLabelFont, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelColor, setSelectedLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected)
{
  if (mSelectedParts != selected)
  {
    mSelectedParts = selected;
    emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts);
  }
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the lower and upper bound of the axis range.
  
  To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
  
  There is also a slot to set a range, see \ref setRange(const QCPRange &range).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRange(double lower, double upper)
{
  if (lower == mRange.lower && upper == mRange.upper)
    return;
  
  if (!QCPRange::validRange(lower, upper)) return;
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  \overload
  
  Sets the range of the axis.
  
  The \a position coordinate indicates together with the \a alignment parameter, where the new
  range will be positioned. \a size defines the size of the new axis range. \a alignment may be
  Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight or Qt::AlignCenter. This will cause the left border, right border,
  or center of the range to be aligned with \a position. Any other values of \a alignment will
  default to Qt::AlignCenter.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRange(double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment)
{
  if (alignment == Qt::AlignLeft)
    setRange(position, position+size);
  else if (alignment == Qt::AlignRight)
    setRange(position-size, position);
  else // alignment == Qt::AlignCenter
    setRange(position-size/2.0, position+size/2.0);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the lower bound of the axis range. The upper bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeLower(double lower)
{
  if (mRange.lower == lower)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.lower = lower;
  mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the upper bound of the axis range. The lower bound is not changed.
  \see setRange
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeUpper(double upper)
{
  if (mRange.upper == upper)
    return;
  
  QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
  mRange.upper = upper;
  mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
  emit rangeChanged(mRange);
  emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange);
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the axis range (direction) is displayed reversed. Normally, the values on horizontal
  axes increase left to right, on vertical axes bottom to top. When \a reversed is set to true, the
  direction of increasing values is inverted.
 
  Note that the range and data interface stays the same for reversed axes, e.g. the \a lower part
  of the \ref setRange interface will still reference the mathematically smaller number than the \a
  upper part.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setRangeReversed(bool reversed)
{
  mRangeReversed = reversed;
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setAngle(double degrees)
{
  mAngle = degrees;
  mAngleRad = mAngle/180.0*M_PI;
}
 
/*!
  The axis ticker is responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels. See the
  documentation of QCPAxisTicker for details on how to work with axis tickers.
  
  You can change the tick positioning/labeling behaviour of this axis by setting a different
  QCPAxisTicker subclass using this method. If you only wish to modify the currently installed axis
  ticker, access it via \ref ticker.
  
  Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis
  ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes.
  
  \see ticker
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTicker(QSharedPointer<QCPAxisTicker> ticker)
{
  if (ticker)
    mTicker = ticker;
  else
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can not set 0 as axis ticker";
  // no need to invalidate margin cache here because produced tick labels are checked for changes in setupTickVector
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick marks are displayed.
 
  Note that setting \a show to false does not imply that tick labels are invisible, too. To achieve
  that, see \ref setTickLabels.
  
  \see setSubTicks
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mTicks != show)
  {
    mTicks = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether tick labels are displayed. Tick labels are the numbers drawn next to tick marks.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabels(bool show)
{
  if (mTickLabels != show)
  {
    mTickLabels = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
    if (!mTickLabels)
      mTickVectorLabels.clear();
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the axis base line (including any outward ticks) and the tick labels.
  \see setLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  mLabelPainter.setPadding(padding);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mTickLabelFont = font;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the tick labels.
  
  \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelFont
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mTickLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the rotation of the tick labels. If \a degrees is zero, the labels are drawn normally. Else,
  the tick labels are drawn rotated by \a degrees clockwise. The specified angle is bound to values
  from -90 to 90 degrees.
  
  If \a degrees is exactly -90, 0 or 90, the tick labels are centered on the tick coordinate. For
  other angles, the label is drawn with an offset such that it seems to point toward or away from
  the tick mark.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabelRotation(double degrees)
{
  mLabelPainter.setRotation(degrees);
}
 
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLabelMode(LabelMode mode)
{
  switch (mode)
  {
    case lmUpright: mLabelPainter.setAnchorMode(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedUpright); break;
    case lmRotated: mLabelPainter.setAnchorMode(QCPLabelPainterPrivate::amSkewedRotated); break;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the number format for the numbers in tick labels. This \a formatCode is an extended version
  of the format code used e.g. by QString::number() and QLocale::toString(). For reference about
  that, see the "Argument Formats" section in the detailed description of the QString class.
  
  \a formatCode is a string of one, two or three characters. The first character is identical to
  the normal format code used by Qt. In short, this means: 'e'/'E' scientific format, 'f' fixed
  format, 'g'/'G' scientific or fixed, whichever is shorter.
  
  The second and third characters are optional and specific to QCustomPlot:\n If the first char was
  'e' or 'g', numbers are/might be displayed in the scientific format, e.g. "5.5e9", which might be
  visually unappealing in a plot. So when the second char of \a formatCode is set to 'b' (for
  "beautiful"), those exponential numbers are formatted in a more natural way, i.e. "5.5
  [multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] 9". By default, the multiplication sign is a centered dot.
  If instead a cross should be shown (as is usual in the USA), the third char of \a formatCode can
  be set to 'c'. The inserted multiplication signs are the UTF-8 characters 215 (0xD7) for the
  cross and 183 (0xB7) for the dot.
  
  Examples for \a formatCode:
  \li \c g normal format code behaviour. If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large,
  normal scientific format is used
  \li \c gb If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large, scientific format is used with
  beautifully typeset decimal powers and a dot as multiplication sign
  \li \c ebc All numbers are in scientific format with beautifully typeset decimal power and a cross as
  multiplication sign
  \li \c fb illegal format code, since fixed format doesn't support (or need) beautifully typeset decimal
  powers. Format code will be reduced to 'f'.
  \li \c hello illegal format code, since first char is not 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' or 'G'. Current format
  code will not be changed.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setNumberFormat(const QString &formatCode)
{
  if (formatCode.isEmpty())
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed formatCode is empty";
    return;
  }
  //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  
  // interpret first char as number format char:
  QString allowedFormatChars(QLatin1String("eEfgG"));
  if (allowedFormatChars.contains(formatCode.at(0)))
  {
    mNumberFormatChar = QLatin1Char(formatCode.at(0).toLatin1());
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (first char not in 'eEfgG'):" << formatCode;
    return;
  }
  
  if (formatCode.length() < 2)
  {
    mNumberBeautifulPowers = false;
    mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
  } else
  {
    // interpret second char as indicator for beautiful decimal powers:
    if (formatCode.at(1) == QLatin1Char('b') && (mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('e') || mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('g')))
      mNumberBeautifulPowers = true;
    else
      qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (second char not 'b' or first char neither 'e' nor 'g'):" << formatCode;
    
    if (formatCode.length() < 3)
    {
      mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
    } else
    {
      // interpret third char as indicator for dot or cross multiplication symbol:
      if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('c'))
        mNumberMultiplyCross = true;
      else if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('d'))
        mNumberMultiplyCross = false;
      else
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (third char neither 'c' nor 'd'):" << formatCode;
    }
  }
  mLabelPainter.setSubstituteExponent(mNumberBeautifulPowers);
  mLabelPainter.setMultiplicationSymbol(mNumberMultiplyCross ? QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolCross : QCPLabelPainterPrivate::SymbolDot);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the precision of the tick label numbers. See QLocale::toString(double i, char f, int prec)
  for details. The effect of precisions are most notably for number Formats starting with 'e', see
  \ref setNumberFormat
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setNumberPrecision(int precision)
{
  if (mNumberPrecision != precision)
  {
    mNumberPrecision = precision;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach inside the
  plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than
  zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so
  they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLength, setTickLengthIn, setTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setTickLengthIn(inside);
  setTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach
  inside the plot.
  
  \see setTickLengthOut, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mTickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mTickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward ticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the ticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels and axis label will
  increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLengthIn, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mTickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mTickLengthOut = outside;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether sub tick marks are displayed.
  
  Sub ticks are only potentially visible if (major) ticks are also visible (see \ref setTicks)
  
  \see setTicks
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSubTicks(bool show)
{
  if (mSubTicks != show)
  {
    mSubTicks = show;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater
  than zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly,
  so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setTickLength, setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSubTickLength(int inside, int outside)
{
  setSubTickLengthIn(inside);
  setSubTickLengthOut(outside);
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the inward subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside
  the plot.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthOut, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSubTickLengthIn(int inside)
{
  if (mSubTickLengthIn != inside)
  {
    mSubTickLengthIn = inside;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the length of the outward subticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the subticks will reach
  outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels will increase their
  distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
  
  \see setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSubTickLengthOut(int outside)
{
  if (mSubTickLengthOut != outside)
  {
    mSubTickLengthOut = outside;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, the axis base line is drawn with.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSubTickPen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, tick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen, subtick marks will be drawn with.
  
  \see setSubTickCount, setSubTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelColor
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (mLabelFont != font)
  {
    mLabelFont = font;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color of the axis label.
  
  \see setLabelFont
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the text of the axis label that will be shown below/above or next to the axis, depending on
  its orientation. To disable axis labels, pass an empty string as \a str.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setLabel(const QString &str)
{
  if (mLabel != str)
  {
    mLabel = str;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the distance between the tick labels and the axis label.
  
  \see setTickLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setLabelPadding(int padding)
{
  if (mLabelPadding != padding)
  {
    mLabelPadding = padding;
    //mCachedMarginValid = false;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedTickLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  if (font != mSelectedTickLabelFont)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelFont = font;
    // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the font that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedLabelFont(const QFont &font)
{
  mSelectedLabelFont = font;
  // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
  
  \see setTickLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedTickLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  if (color != mSelectedTickLabelColor)
  {
    mSelectedTickLabelColor = color;
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets the color that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
  
  \see setLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedLabelColor(const QColor &color)
{
  mSelectedLabelColor = color;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the axis base line when selected.
  
  \see setBasePen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedBasePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedBasePen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks when selected.
  
  \see setTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen that is used to draw the subticks when selected.
  
  \see setSubTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setSelectedSubTickPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mSelectedSubTickPen = pen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the background of this axis rect. It may consist of a background fill (a QBrush) and a
  pixmap.
  
  If a brush was given via \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), this function first draws an
  according filling inside the axis rect with the provided \a painter.
  
  Then, if a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the scaled version
  depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and then draws it inside
  the axis rect with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in
  mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is only updated, when
  the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background pixmap (this is
  dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a differend axis background pixmap was
  set.
  
  \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &center, double radius)
{
  // draw background fill (don't use circular clip, looks bad):
  if (mBackgroundBrush != Qt::NoBrush)
  {
    QPainterPath ellipsePath;
    ellipsePath.addEllipse(center, radius, radius);
    painter->fillPath(ellipsePath, mBackgroundBrush);
  }
  
  // draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified):
  if (!mBackgroundPixmap.isNull())
  {
    QRegion clipCircle(center.x()-radius, center.y()-radius, qRound(2*radius), qRound(2*radius), QRegion::Ellipse);
    QRegion originalClip = painter->clipRegion();
    painter->setClipRegion(clipCircle);
    if (mBackgroundScaled)
    {
      // check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated:
      QSize scaledSize(mBackgroundPixmap.size());
      scaledSize.scale(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode);
      if (mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize)
        mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation);
      painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mScaledBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height()) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect());
    } else
    {
      painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height()));
    }
    painter->setClipRegion(originalClip);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Prepares the internal tick vector, sub tick vector and tick label vector. This is done by calling
  QCPAxisTicker::generate on the currently installed ticker.
  
  If a change in the label text/count is detected, the cached axis margin is invalidated to make
  sure the next margin calculation recalculates the label sizes and returns an up-to-date value.
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::setupTickVectors()
{
  if (!mParentPlot) return;
  if ((!mTicks && !mTickLabels && !mGrid->visible()) || mRange.size() <= 0) return;
  
  mSubTickVector.clear(); // since we might not pass it to mTicker->generate(), and we don't want old data in there
  mTicker->generate(mRange, mParentPlot->locale(), mNumberFormatChar, mNumberPrecision, mTickVector, mSubTicks ? &mSubTickVector : 0, mTickLabels ? &mTickVectorLabels : 0);
  
  // fill cos/sin buffers which will be used by draw() and QCPPolarGrid::draw(), so we don't have to calculate it twice:
  mTickVectorCosSin.resize(mTickVector.size());
  for (int i=0; i<mTickVector.size(); ++i)
  {
    const double theta = coordToAngleRad(mTickVector.at(i));
    mTickVectorCosSin[i] = QPointF(qCos(theta), qSin(theta));
  }
  mSubTickVectorCosSin.resize(mSubTickVector.size());
  for (int i=0; i<mSubTickVector.size(); ++i)
  {
    const double theta = coordToAngleRad(mSubTickVector.at(i));
    mSubTickVectorCosSin[i] = QPointF(qCos(theta), qSin(theta));
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the axis base line. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedBasePen or mBasePen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisAngular::getBasePen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedBasePen : mBasePen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickPen or mTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisAngular::getTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedTickPen : mTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the pen that is used to draw the subticks. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedSubTickPen or mSubTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPPolarAxisAngular::getSubTickPen() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedSubTickPen : mSubTickPen;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelFont or mTickLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPPolarAxisAngular::getTickLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelFont : mTickLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the font that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelFont or mLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPPolarAxisAngular::getLabelFont() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelFont : mLabelFont;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedTickLabelColor or mTickLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPPolarAxisAngular::getTickLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelColor : mTickLabelColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Returns the color that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this
  is either mSelectedLabelColor or mLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPPolarAxisAngular::getLabelColor() const
{
  return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelColor : mLabelColor;
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed on the axis rect. If the left mouse button is
  pressed, the range dragging interaction is initialized (the actual range manipulation happens in
  the \ref mouseMoveEvent).
 
  The mDragging flag is set to true and some anchor points are set that are needed to determine the
  distance the mouse was dragged in the mouse move/release events later.
  
  \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details)
{
  Q_UNUSED(details)
  if (event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton)
  {
    mDragging = true;
    // initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging:
    if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
    {
      mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements();
      mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements();
    }
    // Mouse range dragging interaction:
    if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
    {
      mDragAngularStart = range();
      mDragRadialStart.clear();
      for (int i=0; i<mRadialAxes.size(); ++i)
        mDragRadialStart.append(mRadialAxes.at(i)->range());
    }
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for when the mouse is moved on the axis rect. If range dragging was activated in a
  preceding \ref mousePressEvent, the range is moved accordingly.
  
  \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  bool doReplot = false;
  // Mouse range dragging interaction:
  if (mDragging && mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag))
  {
    if (mRangeDrag)
    {
      doReplot = true;
      double angleCoordStart, radiusCoordStart;
      double angleCoord, radiusCoord;
      pixelToCoord(startPos, angleCoordStart, radiusCoordStart);
      pixelToCoord(event->pos(), angleCoord, radiusCoord);
      double diff = angleCoordStart - angleCoord;
      setRange(mDragAngularStart.lower+diff, mDragAngularStart.upper+diff);
    }
    
    for (int i=0; i<mRadialAxes.size(); ++i)
    {
      QCPPolarAxisRadial *ax = mRadialAxes.at(i);
      if (!ax->rangeDrag())
        continue;
      doReplot = true;
      double angleCoordStart, radiusCoordStart;
      double angleCoord, radiusCoord;
      ax->pixelToCoord(startPos, angleCoordStart, radiusCoordStart);
      ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos(), angleCoord, radiusCoord);
      if (ax->scaleType() == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLinear)
      {
        double diff = radiusCoordStart - radiusCoord;
        ax->setRange(mDragRadialStart.at(i).lower+diff, mDragRadialStart.at(i).upper+diff);
      } else if (ax->scaleType() == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLogarithmic)
      {
        if (radiusCoord != 0)
        {
          double diff = radiusCoordStart/radiusCoord;
          ax->setRange(mDragRadialStart.at(i).lower*diff, mDragRadialStart.at(i).upper*diff);
        }
      }
    }
    
    if (doReplot) // if either vertical or horizontal drag was enabled, do a replot
    {
      if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
        mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll);
      mParentPlot->replot(QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot);
    }
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  Q_UNUSED(startPos)
  mDragging = false;
  if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag())
  {
    mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements(mAADragBackup);
    mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(mNotAADragBackup);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Event handler for mouse wheel events. If rangeZoom is Qt::Horizontal, Qt::Vertical or both, the
  ranges of the axes defined as rangeZoomHorzAxis and rangeZoomVertAxis are scaled. The center of
  the scaling operation is the current cursor position inside the axis rect. The scaling factor is
  dependent on the mouse wheel delta (which direction the wheel was rotated) to provide a natural
  zooming feel. The Strength of the zoom can be controlled via \ref setRangeZoomFactor.
  
  Note, that event->delta() is usually +/-120 for single rotation steps. However, if the mouse
  wheel is turned rapidly, many steps may bunch up to one event, so the event->delta() may then be
  multiples of 120. This is taken into account here, by calculating \a wheelSteps and using it as
  exponent of the range zoom factor. This takes care of the wheel direction automatically, by
  inverting the factor, when the wheel step is negative (f^-1 = 1/f).
*/
void QCPPolarAxisAngular::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
{
  bool doReplot = false;
  // Mouse range zooming interaction:
  if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeZoom))
  {
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0)
    const double delta = event->delta();
#else
    const double delta = event->angleDelta().y();
#endif
 
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 14, 0)
    const QPointF pos = event->pos();
#else
    const QPointF pos = event->position();
#endif
    const double wheelSteps = delta/120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually
    if (mRangeZoom)
    {
      double angleCoord, radiusCoord;
      pixelToCoord(pos, angleCoord, radiusCoord);
      scaleRange(qPow(mRangeZoomFactor, wheelSteps), angleCoord);
    }
 
    for (int i=0; i<mRadialAxes.size(); ++i)
    {
      QCPPolarAxisRadial *ax = mRadialAxes.at(i);
      if (!ax->rangeZoom())
        continue;
      doReplot = true;
      double angleCoord, radiusCoord;
      ax->pixelToCoord(pos, angleCoord, radiusCoord);
      ax->scaleRange(qPow(ax->rangeZoomFactor(), wheelSteps), radiusCoord);
    }
  }
  if (doReplot)
    mParentPlot->replot();
}
 
bool QCPPolarAxisAngular::registerPolarGraph(QCPPolarGraph *graph)
{
  if (mGraphs.contains(graph))
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable already added:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(graph);
    return false;
  }
  if (graph->keyAxis() != this)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not created with this as axis:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>(graph);
    return false;
  }
  
  mGraphs.append(graph);
  // possibly add plottable to legend:
  if (mParentPlot->autoAddPlottableToLegend())
    graph->addToLegend();
  if (!graph->layer()) // usually the layer is already set in the constructor of the plottable (via QCPLayerable constructor)
    graph->setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer());
  return true;
}
/* end of 'src/polar/layoutelement-angularaxis.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/polar/polargrid.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 7493  */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPolarGrid
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPolarGrid
  \brief The grid in both angular and radial dimensions for polar plots
 
  \warning In this QCustomPlot version, polar plots are a tech preview. Expect documentation and
  functionality to be incomplete, as well as changing public interfaces in the future.
*/
 
/*!
  Creates a QCPPolarGrid instance and sets default values.
  
  You shouldn't instantiate grids on their own, since every axis brings its own grid.
*/
QCPPolarGrid::QCPPolarGrid(QCPPolarAxisAngular *parentAxis) :
  QCPLayerable(parentAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), parentAxis),
  mType(gtNone),
  mSubGridType(gtNone),
  mAntialiasedSubGrid(true),
  mAntialiasedZeroLine(true),
  mParentAxis(parentAxis)
{
  // warning: this is called in QCPPolarAxisAngular constructor, so parentAxis members should not be accessed/called
  setParent(parentAxis);
  setType(gtAll);
  setSubGridType(gtNone);
  
  setAngularPen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  setAngularSubGridPen(QPen(QColor(220,220,220), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  
  setRadialPen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  setRadialSubGridPen(QPen(QColor(220,220,220), 0, Qt::DotLine));
  setRadialZeroLinePen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::SolidLine));
  
  setAntialiased(true);
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setRadialAxis(QCPPolarAxisRadial *axis)
{
  mRadialAxis = axis;
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setType(GridTypes type)
{
  mType = type;
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setSubGridType(GridTypes type)
{
  mSubGridType = type;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether sub grid lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::setAntialiasedSubGrid(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedSubGrid = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether zero lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::setAntialiasedZeroLine(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedZeroLine = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen with which (major) grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::setAngularPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mAngularPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the pen with which sub grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::setAngularSubGridPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mAngularSubGridPen = pen;
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setRadialPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mRadialPen = pen;
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setRadialSubGridPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mRadialSubGridPen = pen;
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::setRadialZeroLinePen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mRadialZeroLinePen = pen;
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter
  before drawing the major grid lines.
 
  This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default.
  
  This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the
  overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
  
  \see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeGrid);
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws grid lines and sub grid lines at the positions of (sub) ticks of the parent axis, spanning
  over the complete axis rect. Also draws the zero line, if appropriate (\ref setZeroLinePen).
*/
void QCPPolarGrid::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; }
  
  const QPointF center = mParentAxis->mCenter;
  const double radius = mParentAxis->mRadius;
  
  painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  // draw main angular grid:
  if (mType.testFlag(gtAngular))
    drawAngularGrid(painter, center, radius, mParentAxis->mTickVectorCosSin, mAngularPen);
  // draw main radial grid:
  if (mType.testFlag(gtRadial) && mRadialAxis)
    drawRadialGrid(painter, center, mRadialAxis->tickVector(), mRadialPen, mRadialZeroLinePen);
  
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedSubGrid, QCP::aeGrid);
  // draw sub angular grid:
  if (mSubGridType.testFlag(gtAngular))
    drawAngularGrid(painter, center, radius, mParentAxis->mSubTickVectorCosSin, mAngularSubGridPen);
  // draw sub radial grid:
  if (mSubGridType.testFlag(gtRadial) && mRadialAxis)
    drawRadialGrid(painter, center, mRadialAxis->subTickVector(), mRadialSubGridPen);
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::drawRadialGrid(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &center, const QVector<double> &coords, const QPen &pen, const QPen &zeroPen)
{
  if (!mRadialAxis) return;
  if (coords.isEmpty()) return;
  const bool drawZeroLine = zeroPen != Qt::NoPen;
  const double zeroLineEpsilon = qAbs(coords.last()-coords.first())*1e-6;
  
  painter->setPen(pen);
  for (int i=0; i<coords.size(); ++i)
  {
    const double r = mRadialAxis->coordToRadius(coords.at(i));
    if (drawZeroLine && qAbs(coords.at(i)) < zeroLineEpsilon)
    {
      applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine);
      painter->setPen(zeroPen);
      painter->drawEllipse(center, r, r);
      painter->setPen(pen);
      applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    } else
    {
      painter->drawEllipse(center, r, r);
    }
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGrid::drawAngularGrid(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &center, double radius, const QVector<QPointF> &ticksCosSin, const QPen &pen)
{
  if (ticksCosSin.isEmpty()) return;
  
  painter->setPen(pen);
  for (int i=0; i<ticksCosSin.size(); ++i)
    painter->drawLine(center, center+ticksCosSin.at(i)*radius);
}
/* end of 'src/polar/polargrid.cpp' */
 
 
/* including file 'src/polar/polargraph.cpp' */
/* modified 2022-11-06T12:45:57, size 44035  */
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPolarLegendItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPolarLegendItem
  \brief A legend item for polar plots
 
  \warning In this QCustomPlot version, polar plots are a tech preview. Expect documentation and
  functionality to be incomplete, as well as changing public interfaces in the future.
*/
QCPPolarLegendItem::QCPPolarLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent, QCPPolarGraph *graph) :
  QCPAbstractLegendItem(parent),
  mPolarGraph(graph)
{
  setAntialiased(false);
}
 
void QCPPolarLegendItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mPolarGraph) return;
  painter->setFont(getFont());
  painter->setPen(QPen(getTextColor()));
  QSizeF iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
  QRectF textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPolarGraph->name());
  QRectF iconRect(mRect.topLeft(), iconSize);
  int textHeight = qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height());  // if text has smaller height than icon, center text vertically in icon height, else align tops
  painter->drawText(mRect.x()+iconSize.width()+mParentLegend->iconTextPadding(), mRect.y(), textRect.width(), textHeight, Qt::TextDontClip, mPolarGraph->name());
  // draw icon:
  painter->save();
  painter->setClipRect(iconRect, Qt::IntersectClip);
  mPolarGraph->drawLegendIcon(painter, iconRect);
  painter->restore();
  // draw icon border:
  if (getIconBorderPen().style() != Qt::NoPen)
  {
    painter->setPen(getIconBorderPen());
    painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
    int halfPen = qCeil(painter->pen().widthF()*0.5)+1;
    painter->setClipRect(mOuterRect.adjusted(-halfPen, -halfPen, halfPen, halfPen)); // extend default clip rect so thicker pens (especially during selection) are not clipped
    painter->drawRect(iconRect);
  }
}
 
QSize QCPPolarLegendItem::minimumOuterSizeHint() const
{
  if (!mPolarGraph) return QSize();
  QSize result(0, 0);
  QRect textRect;
  QFontMetrics fontMetrics(getFont());
  QSize iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
  textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPolarGraph->name());
  result.setWidth(iconSize.width() + mParentLegend->iconTextPadding() + textRect.width());
  result.setHeight(qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height()));
  result.rwidth() += mMargins.left()+mMargins.right();
  result.rheight() += mMargins.top()+mMargins.bottom();
  return result;
}
 
QPen QCPPolarLegendItem::getIconBorderPen() const
{
  return mSelected ? mParentLegend->selectedIconBorderPen() : mParentLegend->iconBorderPen();
}
 
QColor QCPPolarLegendItem::getTextColor() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor;
}
 
QFont QCPPolarLegendItem::getFont() const
{
  return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
 
 
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPolarGraph
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
/*! \class QCPPolarGraph
  \brief A radial graph used to display data in polar plots
 
  \warning In this QCustomPlot version, polar plots are a tech preview. Expect documentation and
  functionality to be incomplete, as well as changing public interfaces in the future.
*/
 
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
 
// TODO
 
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
 
/*!
  Constructs a graph which uses \a keyAxis as its angular and \a valueAxis as its radial axis. \a
  keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot, and the radial axis must be
  associated with the angular axis. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding
  message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
 
  The created QCPPolarGraph is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from
  \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPPolarGraph, so do not delete it
  manually but use QCPPolarAxisAngular::removeGraph() instead.
 
  To directly create a QCPPolarGraph inside a plot, you shoud use the QCPPolarAxisAngular::addGraph
  method.
*/
QCPPolarGraph::QCPPolarGraph(QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis, QCPPolarAxisRadial *valueAxis) :
  QCPLayerable(keyAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), keyAxis),
  mDataContainer(new QCPGraphDataContainer),
  mName(),
  mAntialiasedFill(true),
  mAntialiasedScatters(true),
  mPen(Qt::black),
  mBrush(Qt::NoBrush),
  mPeriodic(true),
  mKeyAxis(keyAxis),
  mValueAxis(valueAxis),
  mSelectable(QCP::stWhole)
  //mSelectionDecorator(0) // TODO
{
  if (keyAxis->parentPlot() != valueAxis->parentPlot())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Parent plot of keyAxis is not the same as that of valueAxis.";
  
  mKeyAxis->registerPolarGraph(this);
  
  //setSelectionDecorator(new QCPSelectionDecorator); // TODO
  
  setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 0));
  setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
  setLineStyle(lsLine);
}
 
QCPPolarGraph::~QCPPolarGraph()
{
  /* TODO
  if (mSelectionDecorator)
  {
    delete mSelectionDecorator;
    mSelectionDecorator = 0;
  }
  */
}
 
/*!
   The name is the textual representation of this plottable as it is displayed in the legend
   (\ref QCPLegend). It may contain any UTF-8 characters, including newlines.
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setName(const QString &name)
{
  mName = name;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether fills of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not.
  
  Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setAntialiasedFill(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedFill = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether the scatter symbols of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not.
  
  Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
  QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setAntialiasedScatters(bool enabled)
{
  mAntialiasedScatters = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  The pen is used to draw basic lines that make up the plottable representation in the
  plot.
  
  For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws its graph lines with this pen.
 
  \see setBrush
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setPen(const QPen &pen)
{
  mPen = pen;
}
 
/*!
  The brush is used to draw basic fills of the plottable representation in the
  plot. The Fill can be a color, gradient or texture, see the usage of QBrush.
  
  For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws the fill under the graph with this brush, when
  it's not set to Qt::NoBrush.
 
  \see setPen
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setBrush(const QBrush &brush)
{
  mBrush = brush;
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::setPeriodic(bool enabled)
{
  mPeriodic = enabled;
}
 
/*!
  The key axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is orthogonal
  to the plottable's value axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the case.
  The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and the
  y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
  
  Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref
  QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface).
 
  \see setValueAxis
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setKeyAxis(QCPPolarAxisAngular *axis)
{
  mKeyAxis = axis;
}
 
/*!
  The value axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is
  orthogonal to the plottable's key axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the
  case. The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and
  the y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
 
  Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref
  QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface).
  
  \see setKeyAxis
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setValueAxis(QCPPolarAxisRadial *axis)
{
  mValueAxis = axis;
}
 
/*!
  Sets whether and to which granularity this plottable can be selected.
 
  A selection can happen by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface (When \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables), by dragging a selection rect
  (When \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode is \ref QCP::srmSelect), or programmatically by
  calling \ref setSelection.
  
  \see setSelection, QCP::SelectionType
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setSelectable(QCP::SelectionType selectable)
{
  if (mSelectable != selectable)
  {
    mSelectable = selectable;
    QCPDataSelection oldSelection = mSelection;
    mSelection.enforceType(mSelectable);
    emit selectableChanged(mSelectable);
    if (mSelection != oldSelection)
    {
      emit selectionChanged(selected());
      emit selectionChanged(mSelection);
    }
  }
}
 
/*!
  Sets which data ranges of this plottable are selected. Selected data ranges are drawn differently
  (e.g. color) in the plot. This can be controlled via the selection decorator (see \ref
  selectionDecorator).
  
  The entire selection mechanism for plottables is handled automatically when \ref
  QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectPlottables. You only need to call this function when
  you wish to change the selection state programmatically.
  
  Using \ref setSelectable you can further specify for each plottable whether and to which
  granularity it is selectable. If \a selection is not compatible with the current \ref
  QCP::SelectionType set via \ref setSelectable, the resulting selection will be adjusted
  accordingly (see \ref QCPDataSelection::enforceType).
  
  emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state.
  
  \see setSelectable, selectTest
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setSelection(QCPDataSelection selection)
{
  selection.enforceType(mSelectable);
  if (mSelection != selection)
  {
    mSelection = selection;
    emit selectionChanged(selected());
    emit selectionChanged(mSelection);
  }
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container.
  
  Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPPolarGraphs may share the same data container safely.
  Modifying the data in the container will then affect all graphs that share the container. Sharing
  can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp QCPPolarGraph-datasharing-1
  
  If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use
  the \ref QCPDataContainer<DataType>::set method on the graph's data container directly:
  \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp QCPPolarGraph-datasharing-2
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setData(QSharedPointer<QCPGraphDataContainer> data)
{
  mDataContainer = data;
}
 
/*! \overload
  
  Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided
  vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the
  smallest vector.
  
  If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you
  can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run.
  
  \see addData
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  mDataContainer->clear();
  addData(keys, values, alreadySorted);
}
 
/*!
  Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot. For scatter-only plots, set \a ls to
  \ref lsNone and \ref setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style.
  
  \see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setLineStyle(LineStyle ls)
{
  mLineStyle = ls;
}
 
/*!
  Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points
  are drawn (e.g. for line-only-plots with appropriate line style).
  
  \see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style)
{
  mScatterStyle = style;
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::addData(const QVector<double> &keys, const QVector<double> &values, bool alreadySorted)
{
  if (keys.size() != values.size())
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size();
  const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size());
  QVector<QCPGraphData> tempData(n);
  QVector<QCPGraphData>::iterator it = tempData.begin();
  const QVector<QCPGraphData>::iterator itEnd = tempData.end();
  int i = 0;
  while (it != itEnd)
  {
    it->key = keys[i];
    it->value = values[i];
    ++it;
    ++i;
  }
  mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::addData(double key, double value)
{
  mDataContainer->add(QCPGraphData(key, value));
}
 
/*!
  Use this method to set an own QCPSelectionDecorator (subclass) instance. This allows you to
  customize the visual representation of selected data ranges further than by using the default
  QCPSelectionDecorator.
  
  The plottable takes ownership of the \a decorator.
  
  The currently set decorator can be accessed via \ref selectionDecorator.
*/
/*
void QCPPolarGraph::setSelectionDecorator(QCPSelectionDecorator *decorator)
{
  if (decorator)
  {
    if (decorator->registerWithPlottable(this))
    {
      if (mSelectionDecorator) // delete old decorator if necessary
        delete mSelectionDecorator;
      mSelectionDecorator = decorator;
    }
  } else if (mSelectionDecorator) // just clear decorator
  {
    delete mSelectionDecorator;
    mSelectionDecorator = 0;
  }
}
*/
 
void QCPPolarGraph::coordsToPixels(double key, double value, double &x, double &y) const
{
  if (mValueAxis)
  {
    const QPointF point = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(key, value);
    x = point.x();
    y = point.y();
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
  }
}
 
const QPointF QCPPolarGraph::coordsToPixels(double key, double value) const
{
  if (mValueAxis)
  {
    return mValueAxis->coordToPixel(key, value);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
    return QPointF();
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::pixelsToCoords(double x, double y, double &key, double &value) const
{
  if (mValueAxis)
  {
    mValueAxis->pixelToCoord(QPointF(x, y), key, value);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::pixelsToCoords(const QPointF &pixelPos, double &key, double &value) const
{
  if (mValueAxis)
  {
    mValueAxis->pixelToCoord(pixelPos, key, value);
  } else
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::rescaleAxes(bool onlyEnlarge) const
{
  rescaleKeyAxis(onlyEnlarge);
  rescaleValueAxis(onlyEnlarge);
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::rescaleKeyAxis(bool onlyEnlarge) const
{
  QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; return; }
  
  bool foundRange;
  QCPRange newRange = getKeyRange(foundRange, QCP::sdBoth);
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (onlyEnlarge)
      newRange.expand(keyAxis->range());
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      newRange.lower = center-keyAxis->range().size()/2.0;
      newRange.upper = center+keyAxis->range().size()/2.0;
    }
    keyAxis->setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::rescaleValueAxis(bool onlyEnlarge, bool inKeyRange) const
{
  QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPPolarAxisRadial *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth;
  if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLogarithmic)
    signDomain = (valueAxis->range().upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive);
  
  bool foundRange;
  QCPRange newRange = getValueRange(foundRange, signDomain, inKeyRange ? keyAxis->range() : QCPRange());
  if (foundRange)
  {
    if (onlyEnlarge)
      newRange.expand(valueAxis->range());
    if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
    {
      double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, incase validRange returned false for other reason
      if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPPolarAxisRadial::stLinear)
      {
        newRange.lower = center-valueAxis->range().size()/2.0;
        newRange.upper = center+valueAxis->range().size()/2.0;
      } else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic
      {
        newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower);
        newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower);
      }
    }
    valueAxis->setRange(newRange);
  }
}
 
bool QCPPolarGraph::addToLegend(QCPLegend *legend)
{
  if (!legend)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null";
    return false;
  }
  if (legend->parentPlot() != mParentPlot)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend isn't in the same QCustomPlot as this plottable";
    return false;
  }
  
  //if (!legend->hasItemWithPlottable(this)) // TODO
  //{
    legend->addItem(new QCPPolarLegendItem(legend, this));
    return true;
  //} else
  //  return false;
}
 
bool QCPPolarGraph::addToLegend()
{
  if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend)
    return false;
  else
    return addToLegend(mParentPlot->legend);
}
 
bool QCPPolarGraph::removeFromLegend(QCPLegend *legend) const
{
  if (!legend)
  {
    qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null";
    return false;
  }
  
  
  QCPPolarLegendItem *removableItem = 0;
  for (int i=0; i<legend->itemCount(); ++i) // TODO: reduce this to code in QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend once unified
  {
    if (QCPPolarLegendItem *pli = qobject_cast<QCPPolarLegendItem*>(legend->item(i)))
    {
      if (pli->polarGraph() == this)
      {
        removableItem = pli;
        break;
      }
    }
  }
  
  if (removableItem)
    return legend->removeItem(removableItem);
  else
    return false;
}
 
bool QCPPolarGraph::removeFromLegend() const
{
  if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend)
    return false;
  else
    return removeFromLegend(mParentPlot->legend);
}
 
double QCPPolarGraph::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const
{
  if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1;
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)
    return -1;
  
  if (mKeyAxis->rect().contains(pos.toPoint()))
  {
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint);
    if (details)
    {
      int pointIndex = closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin();
      details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1)));
    }
    return result;
  } else
    return -1;
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPPolarGraph::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const
{
  return mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPPolarGraph::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const
{
  return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QRect QCPPolarGraph::clipRect() const
{
  if (mKeyAxis)
    return mKeyAxis.data()->rect();
  else
    return QRect();
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::draw(QCPPainter *painter)
{
  if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  if (mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return;
  if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone()) return;
  
  painter->setClipRegion(mKeyAxis->exactClipRegion());
  
  QVector<QPointF> lines, scatters; // line and (if necessary) scatter pixel coordinates will be stored here while iterating over segments
  
  // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data:
  QList<QCPDataRange> selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments;
  getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments);
  allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments;
  for (int i=0; i<allSegments.size(); ++i)
  {
    bool isSelectedSegment = i >= unselectedSegments.size();
    // get line pixel points appropriate to line style:
    QCPDataRange lineDataRange = isSelectedSegment ? allSegments.at(i) : allSegments.at(i).adjusted(-1, 1); // unselected segments extend lines to bordering selected data point (safe to exceed total data bounds in first/last segment, getLines takes care)
    getLines(&lines, lineDataRange);
    
    // check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
    QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it;
    for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it)
    {
      if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value))
        qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name();
    }
#endif
    
    // draw fill of graph:
    //if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
    //  mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter);
    //else
      painter->setBrush(mBrush);
    painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen);
    drawFill(painter, &lines);
    
    
    // draw line:
    if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
    {
      //if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
      //  mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter);
      //else
        painter->setPen(mPen);
      painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
      drawLinePlot(painter, lines);
    }
    
    // draw scatters:
    
    QCPScatterStyle finalScatterStyle = mScatterStyle;
    //if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator)
    //  finalScatterStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mScatterStyle);
    if (!finalScatterStyle.isNone())
    {
      getScatters(&scatters, allSegments.at(i));
      drawScatterPlot(painter, scatters, finalScatterStyle);
    }
  }
  
  // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes:
  //if (mSelectionDecorator)
  //  mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection());
}
 
QCP::Interaction QCPPolarGraph::selectionCategory() const
{
  return QCP::iSelectPlottables;
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables);
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarGraph::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  Q_UNUSED(event)
  
  if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone)
  {
    QCPDataSelection newSelection = details.value<QCPDataSelection>();
    QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection;
    if (additive)
    {
      if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // in whole selection mode, we toggle to no selection even if currently unselected point was hit
      {
        if (selected())
          setSelection(QCPDataSelection());
        else
          setSelection(newSelection);
      } else // in all other selection modes we toggle selections of homogeneously selected/unselected segments
      {
        if (mSelection.contains(newSelection)) // if entire newSelection is already selected, toggle selection
          setSelection(mSelection-newSelection);
        else
          setSelection(mSelection+newSelection);
      }
    } else
      setSelection(newSelection);
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore;
  }
}
 
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPolarGraph::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged)
{
  if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone)
  {
    QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection;
    setSelection(QCPDataSelection());
    if (selectionStateChanged)
      *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore;
  }
}
 
/*!  \internal
  
  Draws lines between the points in \a lines, given in pixel coordinates.
  
  \see drawScatterPlot, drawImpulsePlot, QCPAbstractPlottable1D::drawPolyline
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::drawLinePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &lines) const
{
  if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    drawPolyline(painter, lines);
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
  
  Draws the fill of the graph using the specified \a painter, with the currently set brush.
  
  Depending on whether a normal fill or a channel fill (\ref setChannelFillGraph) is needed, \ref
  getFillPolygon or \ref getChannelFillPolygon are used to find the according fill polygons.
  
  In order to handle NaN Data points correctly (the fill needs to be split into disjoint areas),
  this method first determines a list of non-NaN segments with \ref getNonNanSegments, on which to
  operate. In the channel fill case, \ref getOverlappingSegments is used to consolidate the non-NaN
  segments of the two involved graphs, before passing the overlapping pairs to \ref
  getChannelFillPolygon.
  
  Pass the points of this graph's line as \a lines, in pixel coordinates.
 
  \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot, drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::drawFill(QCPPainter *painter, QVector<QPointF> *lines) const
{
  applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
  if (painter->brush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && painter->brush().color().alpha() != 0)
    painter->drawPolygon(QPolygonF(*lines));
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Draws scatter symbols at every point passed in \a scatters, given in pixel coordinates. The
  scatters will be drawn with \a painter and have the appearance as specified in \a style.
 
  \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &scatters, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const
{
  applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
  style.applyTo(painter, mPen);
  for (int i=0; i<scatters.size(); ++i)
    style.drawShape(painter, scatters.at(i).x(), scatters.at(i).y());
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const
{
  // draw fill:
  if (mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush)
  {
    applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->fillRect(QRectF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.width(), rect.height()/3.0), mBrush);
  }
  // draw line vertically centered:
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter);
    painter->setPen(mPen);
    painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.right()+5, rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0)); // +5 on x2 else last segment is missing from dashed/dotted pens
  }
  // draw scatter symbol:
  if (!mScatterStyle.isNone())
  {
    applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter);
    // scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect:
    if (mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap && (mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() || mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height()))
    {
      QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle(mScatterStyle);
      scaledStyle.setPixmap(scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::SmoothTransformation));
      scaledStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      scaledStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    } else
    {
      mScatterStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen);
      mScatterStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center());
    }
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::applyFillAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedFill, QCP::aeFills);
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::applyScattersAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const
{
  applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedScatters, QCP::aeScatters);
}
 
double QCPPolarGraph::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const
{
  closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd();
  if (mDataContainer->isEmpty())
    return -1.0;
  if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone())
    return -1.0;
  
  // calculate minimum distances to graph data points and find closestData iterator:
  double minDistSqr = (std::numeric_limits<double>::max)();
  // determine which key range comes into question, taking selection tolerance around pos into account:
  double posKeyMin, posKeyMax, dummy;
  pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint-QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMin, dummy);
  pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint+QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMax, dummy);
  if (posKeyMin > posKeyMax)
    qSwap(posKeyMin, posKeyMax);
  // iterate over found data points and then choose the one with the shortest distance to pos:
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(posKeyMin, true);
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->findEnd(posKeyMax, true);
  for (QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it)
  {
    const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)-pixelPoint).lengthSquared();
    if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
    {
      minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
      closestData = it;
    }
  }
    
  // calculate distance to graph line if there is one (if so, will probably be smaller than distance to closest data point):
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
  {
    // line displayed, calculate distance to line segments:
    QVector<QPointF> lineData;
    getLines(&lineData, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()));
    QCPVector2D p(pixelPoint);
    for (int i=0; i<lineData.size()-1; ++i)
    {
      const double currentDistSqr = p.distanceSquaredToLine(lineData.at(i), lineData.at(i+1));
      if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr)
        minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
    }
  }
  
  return qSqrt(minDistSqr);
}
 
int QCPPolarGraph::dataCount() const
{
  return mDataContainer->size();
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::getDataSegments(QList<QCPDataRange> &selectedSegments, QList<QCPDataRange> &unselectedSegments) const
{
  selectedSegments.clear();
  unselectedSegments.clear();
  if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // stWhole selection type draws the entire plottable with selected style if mSelection isn't empty
  {
    if (selected())
      selectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount());
    else
      unselectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount());
  } else
  {
    QCPDataSelection sel(selection());
    sel.simplify();
    selectedSegments = sel.dataRanges();
    unselectedSegments = sel.inverse(QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())).dataRanges();
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::drawPolyline(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector<QPointF> &lineData) const
{
  // if drawing solid line and not in PDF, use much faster line drawing instead of polyline:
  if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phFastPolylines) &&
      painter->pen().style() == Qt::SolidLine &&
      !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmVectorized) &&
      !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching))
  {
    int i = 0;
    bool lastIsNan = false;
    const int lineDataSize = lineData.size();
    while (i < lineDataSize && (qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) || qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x()))) // make sure first point is not NaN
      ++i;
    ++i; // because drawing works in 1 point retrospect
    while (i < lineDataSize)
    {
      if (!qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) && !qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x())) // NaNs create a gap in the line
      {
        if (!lastIsNan)
          painter->drawLine(lineData.at(i-1), lineData.at(i));
        else
          lastIsNan = false;
      } else
        lastIsNan = true;
      ++i;
    }
  } else
  {
    int segmentStart = 0;
    int i = 0;
    const int lineDataSize = lineData.size();
    while (i < lineDataSize)
    {
      if (qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) || qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x()) || qIsInf(lineData.at(i).y())) // NaNs create a gap in the line. Also filter Infs which make drawPolyline block
      {
        painter->drawPolyline(lineData.constData()+segmentStart, i-segmentStart); // i, because we don't want to include the current NaN point
        segmentStart = i+1;
      }
      ++i;
    }
    // draw last segment:
    painter->drawPolyline(lineData.constData()+segmentStart, lineDataSize-segmentStart);
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const
{
  if (rangeRestriction.isEmpty())
  {
    end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    begin = end;
  } else
  {
    QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
    QCPPolarAxisRadial *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
    if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
    // get visible data range:
    if (mPeriodic)
    {
      begin = mDataContainer->constBegin();
      end = mDataContainer->constEnd();
    } else
    {
      begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(keyAxis->range().lower);
      end = mDataContainer->findEnd(keyAxis->range().upper);
    }
    // limit lower/upperEnd to rangeRestriction:
    mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, rangeRestriction); // this also ensures rangeRestriction outside data bounds doesn't break anything
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  This method retrieves an optimized set of data points via \ref getOptimizedLineData, an branches
  out to the line style specific functions such as \ref dataToLines, \ref dataToStepLeftLines, etc.
  according to the line style of the graph.
 
  \a lines will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with the according
  draw functions like \ref drawLinePlot and \ref drawImpulsePlot. The points returned in \a lines
  aren't necessarily the original data points. For example, step line styles require additional
  points to form the steps when drawn. If the line style of the graph is \ref lsNone, the \a
  lines vector will be empty.
 
  \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for
  conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm:
  a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this
  function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref
  getDataSegments.
 
  \see getScatters
*/
void QCPPolarGraph::getLines(QVector<QPointF> *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const
{
  if (!lines) return;
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
  getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange);
  if (begin == end)
  {
    lines->clear();
    return;
  }
  
  QVector<QCPGraphData> lineData;
  if (mLineStyle != lsNone)
    getOptimizedLineData(&lineData, begin, end);
 
  switch (mLineStyle)
  {
    case lsNone: lines->clear(); break;
    case lsLine: *lines = dataToLines(lineData); break;
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::getScatters(QVector<QPointF> *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const
{
  QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPPolarAxisRadial *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; }
  
  if (!scatters) return;
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end;
  getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange);
  if (begin == end)
  {
    scatters->clear();
    return;
  }
  
  QVector<QCPGraphData> data;
  getOptimizedScatterData(&data, begin, end);
  
  scatters->resize(data.size());
  for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
  {
    if (!qIsNaN(data.at(i).value))
      (*scatters)[i] = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key, data.at(i).value);
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::getOptimizedLineData(QVector<QCPGraphData> *lineData, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const
{
  lineData->clear();
  
  // TODO: fix for log axes and thick line style
  
  const QCPRange range = mValueAxis->range();
  bool reversed = mValueAxis->rangeReversed();
  const double clipMargin = range.size()*0.05; // extra distance from visible circle, so optimized outside lines can cover more angle before having to place a dummy point to prevent tangents
  const double upperClipValue = range.upper + (reversed ? 0 : range.size()*0.05+clipMargin); // clip slightly outside of actual range to avoid line thicknesses to peek into visible circle
  const double lowerClipValue = range.lower - (reversed ? range.size()*0.05+clipMargin : 0); // clip slightly outside of actual range to avoid line thicknesses to peek into visible circle
  const double maxKeySkip = qAsin(qSqrt(clipMargin*(clipMargin+2*range.size()))/(range.size()+clipMargin))/M_PI*mKeyAxis->range().size(); // the maximum angle between two points on outer circle (r=clipValue+clipMargin) before connecting line becomes tangent to inner circle (r=clipValue)
  double skipBegin = 0;
  bool belowRange = false;
  bool aboveRange = false;
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
  while (it != end)
  {
    if (it->value < lowerClipValue)
    {
      if (aboveRange) // jumped directly from above to below visible range, draw previous point so entry angle is correct
      {
        aboveRange = false;
        if (!reversed) // TODO: with inner radius, we'll need else case here with projected border point
          lineData->append(*(it-1));
      }
      if (!belowRange)
      {
        skipBegin = it->key;
        lineData->append(QCPGraphData(it->key, lowerClipValue));
        belowRange = true;
      }
      if (it->key-skipBegin > maxKeySkip) // add dummy point if we're exceeding the maximum skippable angle (to prevent unintentional intersections with visible circle)
      {
        skipBegin += maxKeySkip;
        lineData->append(QCPGraphData(skipBegin, lowerClipValue));
      }
    } else if (it->value > upperClipValue)
    {
      if (belowRange) // jumped directly from below to above visible range, draw previous point so entry angle is correct (if lower means outer, so if reversed axis)
      {
        belowRange = false;
        if (reversed)
          lineData->append(*(it-1));
      }
      if (!aboveRange)
      {
        skipBegin = it->key;
        lineData->append(QCPGraphData(it->key, upperClipValue));
        aboveRange = true;
      }
      if (it->key-skipBegin > maxKeySkip) // add dummy point if we're exceeding the maximum skippable angle (to prevent unintentional intersections with visible circle)
      {
        skipBegin += maxKeySkip;
        lineData->append(QCPGraphData(skipBegin, upperClipValue));
      }
    } else // value within bounds where we don't optimize away points
    {
      if (aboveRange)
      {
        aboveRange = false;
        if (!reversed)
          lineData->append(*(it-1)); // just entered from above, draw previous point so entry angle is correct (if above means outer, so if not reversed axis)
      }
      if (belowRange)
      {
        belowRange = false;
        if (reversed)
          lineData->append(*(it-1)); // just entered from below, draw previous point so entry angle is correct (if below means outer, so if reversed axis)
      }
      lineData->append(*it); // inside visible circle, add point normally
    }
    ++it;
  }
  // to make fill not erratic, add last point normally if it was outside visible circle:
  if (aboveRange)
  {
    aboveRange = false;
    if (!reversed)
      lineData->append(*(it-1)); // just entered from above, draw previous point so entry angle is correct (if above means outer, so if not reversed axis)
  }
  if (belowRange)
  {
    belowRange = false;
    if (reversed)
      lineData->append(*(it-1)); // just entered from below, draw previous point so entry angle is correct (if below means outer, so if reversed axis)
  }
}
 
void QCPPolarGraph::getOptimizedScatterData(QVector<QCPGraphData> *scatterData, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end) const
{
  scatterData->clear();
  
  const QCPRange range = mValueAxis->range();
  bool reversed = mValueAxis->rangeReversed();
  const double clipMargin = range.size()*0.05;
  const double upperClipValue = range.upper + (reversed ? 0 : clipMargin); // clip slightly outside of actual range to avoid scatter size to peek into visible circle
  const double lowerClipValue = range.lower - (reversed ? clipMargin : 0); // clip slightly outside of actual range to avoid scatter size to peek into visible circle
  QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin;
  while (it != end)
  {
    if (it->value > lowerClipValue && it->value < upperClipValue)
      scatterData->append(*it);
    ++it;
  }
}
 
/*! \internal
 
  Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel
  coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsLine.
  
  The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a
  getLines if the line style is set accordingly.
 
  \see dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot
*/
QVector<QPointF> QCPPolarGraph::dataToLines(const QVector<QCPGraphData> &data) const
{
  QVector<QPointF> result;
  QCPPolarAxisAngular *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
  QCPPolarAxisRadial *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
  if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; }
 
  // transform data points to pixels:
  result.resize(data.size());
  for (int i=0; i<data.size(); ++i)
    result[i] = mValueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key, data.at(i).value);
  return result;
}
/* end of 'src/polar/polargraph.cpp' */